A yd 6 

NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; 



EMBRACING BOTH THE 



3tnalgtu anb 0antljetic fiXobez of Mztxnttion ; 



A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ART 



OF 



READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING FRENCH. 



ON THE PLAN OF WOODBURY'S METHOD WITH GERMAN 



BY LOUIS FASQUELLE. LL.D. 

PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN 

THIRTY-SECOND EDmON, 

NEW YOEK: 
IVISON & PHINNBY, 321 BEOADWAY, 

(SUCCESSORS OF MARK H. NEWMAN & CO.) 

CHICAGO: S. C. GRIGGS & Co., Ill LAKE STREET. 
BUFFALO: PHINNBY * CO. 

A.U1UEN : SEYMOUE * ALWAED. OTNOrNNATI : MOORE, WILSTACH, KEYS St 06. 
DETROIT : RAYMOND <fe 8ELLECK. 8T. LOUIS J KEITH <fe WOOD!. 

1 857. 



,FZ5 



We have publish ea ? or the use of Teachers, 

"A Key to the Exercises in Fasquelle's New Freneb 
Method, with occasional Notes and References to the Rules, by 
Louis Fasquelle,LL.D., &c." Price 15 cts. The " Key" can be sen 
bv mail, by sending the publisher the price in P. 0. stamps. 

Newman & Ivison. 



eye 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, 
BY LOUIS FASQUELLE, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United State** for 1 
District of Michigan. 



vo 



€\i Ions nf \)i }xit\\ langtrag* 

AND LITERATURE, 

THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES, 

®l)is bolttmc 

1% MOST UK8PECTFULLY DEDICATED. 



WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 



.«.•♦«.» 



I. NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 

523 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1 50. 

II. KEY TO NEW METHOD. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 60 cents. 

in. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 

230 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 

250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 

280 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1. 

VH. GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN READER. 

70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 25 cents. 

vin. g©ip]p!Nbwffj^s ^mt Wltttyvbt 

jur Srlernung i>er englif^en @prctd)e* 

9>rete $1* 



— ,«♦>,»» 



tfa&qmllt's jFrencf) 0mes. 



I. FRENCH COURSE. 

500 pp. 12mo. — Price, $1 25. 

n. KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 

140 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

III. COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

IV. TELEMAQUE. 

890 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

V. NAPOLEON. 

274 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 



PKEFACE 



The universality of the French language furnishes sufficient 
proof of its utility. Throughout Europe, in many parts of Asia, 
Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowledge 
of that tongue ; which in more than one country of Europe is 
emphatically called " the language? Its merits are becoming so 
well appreciated in this country, that it is almost unnecessary to 
particularize them, — to speak of its unsurpassed precision and clear- 
ness, and of its capability of expressing every idea in the m jtft 
laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language of 
France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and the 
Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest literature 
and to the most profound diction of science. The rich mines of 
French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, offer in 
every department of knowledge treasures equal to those presented 
by the literature of any other nation. 

Many works have been published, in this country and in Eng 
land, to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but. 
during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the mod- 
ern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked for 
the appearance of a book which, like several of the French gram- 
mars published in Germany, should unite in due proportions the- 
dry and practice. To the high merits of several of the theoretical 
grammars, he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, the student 
might go through them, and know but little of the idiomatic or 
practical part of the language. Several of the practical works, 
though well executed according to the plans which their authors 
had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not entirely, at lea^t, far 
too much ; and the student may, after having devoted a long time 
to the mere memorizing of sentences, find himself in possession of a 



VI PREFACE. 

number of set phrases, valuable, it is true, but from which, desti- 
tute of landmarks, the slightest deviation must lead him into 
unknown regions. 

A work which, unit/ng practice with theory, should attempt to 
avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem- 
plated by the author of these pages, when " Woodbury's New 
Method with the German" made its appearance. Finding in that 
work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beautifully 
blended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in adopting the 
" New Method," so successfully applied by Mr. Woodbury to 
the German, as the model on which to construct his long intended 
treatise on the French. The result is the present work. 

The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- 
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and 
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar care 
has been taken to render this part sufficiently full, to provide the 
student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in the principal 
difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words presenting 
peculiarities of pronunciation, are placed as exceptions to the rules 
given in this part. 

In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the 
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are grad - 
ually introduced and explained ; copious references to the Second, 
or more theoretical Part, render further information easily attain- 
able. After the rules of every lesson, comes a resumt of ex 
amples in illustration of them, as also of preceding ones, con- 
taining often new idioms and conversational phrases. The 
examples on the rules, the resumes and the French exercises 
to be rendered into English consisting almost entirely of ques- 
tions and answers, combine, it is thought, all the benefits pre- 
sented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the lessons, 
and the ease with which reference may be had to the Second 
Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treatises. It 
will be easily seen that the teacher and student will find here the 
practice, with as little or as much of the theory as they may desire. 

The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, so 
as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Care has been 
taken not to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws, while 



PREFACE. 711 

the resemblance or difference of construction between the two 

languages is carefully pointed out. 

Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of 
every lesson. The materials for these are found in the examples 
to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and in the 
vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, in accordance 
with an admirable feature of Mr. Woodbury's system, the student 
is furnished with the means of carrying on in connection with the 
regular course already indicated, a series of exercises in French 
composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable in the highest 
degree. 

The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification 
of the irregularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- 
mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a tense 
in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the latter 
he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs are 
often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. 

An attempt is made in the "Practical Resumes," Lessons 98 
and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex 
subject of the past participle. 

The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced from 
the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by short 
extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is hoped, 
while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the student 
with a desire of becoming more intimately acquainted with the 
authors from whose works the examples are taken. It will be 
perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the extracts, have 
not been overlooked. 

In the Second Part, the verbs are given in their fullest form. 
The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal 
verbs are placed alphabetically. 

The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view of 
offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which he 
has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence to 
leam the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part as soon as 
he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, and 
this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of vie First Part 
The verbs in the French, and in the other, so called Romanic 



rill PRSPAri, 

languages, are more complicated and require more study than the 
verbs in the German and other Teutonic languages. Having in 
this manner acquired some knowledge of the verbs, the student 
will, by the time he, in his progress through the first part, reaches 
the groupings of the tenses mentioned above, be able to recognize 
the verbs as old friends, and better to appreciate the classification 
f the irregularities. This course is advised not as indispensable, 
but as beneficial. 

The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the 
best sources, and containing grammatical references to both parts 
of the work, will not be unacceptable to the student. A vocabu- 
lary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. 

Among the numerous works which have been consulted during 
the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention with 
gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, Lemare, 
Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Bescherelle, Landais, etc. 

With a sincere hope that the present volume msy assist the 
American student in obtaining a knowledge of tie beautiful 
language of France, it is respectfully submitted. 



L F. 

Ann Arbor; Sept. \Uh, 1851. 



University of Michigan, > 

61. \ 



GENERAL INDEX. 



A, pf-ep <> 142, (2). 

Abbreviations, p. 275. 

Accents. Lesson 2. 

Acheter. to buy. § 49. (5) ; its gov- 
ernment. L. 50. 1. 

Accorder, s\ to agree ; said also of 
watches. L. 92/3. 

Active verb. % 43, (2), (3.) 

Active Voice, used in French in 
cases where the passive is used in 
English. L. 35. 2; L. 46 3- U28. 

(5.); f 118,(1.) 

Adjectives. <) 14. (1). Qua Al ;ying 
adjectives. <) 14. (2). Degrees of 
signification, ty 14. (2). Gender 
and number of. § 15. Formation 
of feminine of. $ 16. L. 13. Irregu- 
lar adjectives. <jl6 (8). Adjectives 
having no feminine, () 16, (9.) 
Plural of, <) 17. L. 14. Agree- 
ment of adjective with nouns, 
i 18; <) 83; L. 13. L. 14. Relat- 
ing to several nouns, () 18. (3); 
lt7 14, 1, 2. Determining adjec- 
tives, () 19. Demonstrative. () 20 ; 
{) 93. Possessive, <> 21 ; $ 94 ; Re-* 
marks on. <j 95. Agree with ob- 
ject possessed. <j 21. (2) ; L. 9, 3. 
Numeral adjectives, () 22 ; place of, 
6 96. Cardinal adjective. () 22. (1). 
(2), (4); Variations of. <> 23; Or> 
servation on. 6 24. Ordinal num- 
bers <) 23, (3) (5). Observation on, 
(\ 25. Indefinite adjectives, () 30; 
\) 97- Verbal adjectives, syn- 
tax of <) 65. Remarks on feu, 
&c {) 84. Adjective used ad- 
verbiallv. $ 67. (3) ; () 84. (5). 
Place of, <) 85 ; <) 86 ; L. 15. Ad- 
jective preceding noun, () 85, (11). 
A'ljeetive different in meaning be- 
fore and after. § 86. Regimen or 
government of () 87 ; § 88 ; () 89 ; 
<) 92 : L. 79. Adjective requiring 
a different preposition in French 
and English. < } 90. 

Adverbs. <) 67. Formed from adjec- 
tives, () 68. Degrees of significa- 
tion, <j 69. Adverbs forming a 
comparison of themselves, $ 70. 



Syntax of () 136. Place of. () 136 ; 
L. 34 ; L. 41. Observation on, 
() 137. Adverls of negation, 
$ 138. 

A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6. 

A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. 

A fleur de, even with, L. 80. 2. 

A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. 

A l'egard de, with regard to, L. 80, 2, 

A raison de, at the rate of L. 80, 2. 

Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dela. beyond, L. 80, 2. 

Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. 

A la campagne, in the country 

^ L. 34, 8. 

A la chasse, hunting. L. 34, 8. 

A la pe he, fishing, L. 34, 8. 

A Tanglaise, a la I ln^aise, after t/ie 
English, French fashions, L. 69, 3. 

A l'ecole. at school; a l'eglise, at 
church, L. 25. 6. 

A l'endroit, right side out; a l'en- 
vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1. 

A l'insu, unknown to, L. 82. 

Alphabet, L. 1. 

Aller. to go. used for proximate fu- 
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to 
go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go 
away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. Aller, 
toft, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller a pied 
a cheval, en voiture, to walk, ride, 
go in a carriage, L. 62, Exam- 
ples. 

Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine, 
L. 67, 3. 

Amuser. (s\) to take pleasure in, etc., 
L. 38, 6. 

Analogy between many French and 
English words, ( 147. 

Answers in French should be ex- 
plicit. L. 21. 12. 

Apporter, amener, to bring, carry, 
L. 44, 6. 

Approcher, (s',) to draxt near, L. 
39,6. 

Articles, $18; L. 4, 1.2. Elision 
of, L. 4,2; <\ 13,(7) ;() 146. Con- 
traction of; <) 13, (8) ; L. 5, 1; L. 25, 
6. English article, a or an % 14; 



GENERAL INDEX. 



(9). Recapitulation of articles, 
^ 13. Svntax of. <\ 77. Use of, 
^ 77, (1), (2), (3). etc. Before 
words used in partitive sense, 
j 78 (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7) ; 
§13.(10); L.6. 1; L. 7, 5;L. 8, 
4, L 12, 3 ; L. 29, 8. Article used 
before words in general sense, 
and abstract nouns. § 77. (1), (2) ; 
L. 8, 2, 3 ; L. 23, 11; L. 29 and 30. 
Article omitted before number of 
a sovereign. L. 30. 3. Article le used 
before parts of the body, L. 63, 5. 
Use of article instead of possessive 
adjective ; () 77, (9) ; L. 37 ; 1 ; 
L. 63, 5; L. 66, 3. Repetition, 
of, § 80. Remarks on use of, 
§ 81. Idioms in which the article 
is omitted, () 82. 

Aspirate H, L. 3, 11, — H not aspirate 
in heroine, &c., L. 3, 11, note. 

Asseoir, (s',) to sit down, L. 36, 4. 

Assez, enough ; its place, L. 34, 3. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day, its place, L. 
41, 5. 

Au lieu de, instead of, L. 35, 4. 

Au revoir, till I see you again, L. 89, 4. 

Auxiliary verbs, () 43~ (8) ; ty 46. 
Use of, § 46. Paradigms of, § 47. 

Avancer, to gain, said of clocks, etc., 
L. 92, 1. 

Avant, before, prep. () 142, 1. 

Avoir, to have, used idiomatically 
with quelque chose, chaud, froid, 
<$*c, L. 8, 1. With coutume, besom, 
&c, L. 21, 4. Used for the day 
of the month, L. 19, 6 ; for age, 
L. 20, 6. Avoir lieu, to take place, 
L. 35, 3. Avoir mal, to have a 
pain, etc., L. 66, 1. Avoir desdou- 
leurs, L. 66, 2. Avoir, to hold, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir chaud aux mains, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir beau, to be in vain, 
L. 67, 1. Avoir, used for dimen- 
sion, tsize, L. 68, 1. Avoir, nega- 
tively, () 47, (2). Interrogatively, 
§ 47, {3). Interrogatively and 
negatively, § 47 (4). 

BEiU, bel, handsome, fine, L. 13, 6. 

Capitals, use of, § 145. 

Cardinal numbers, § 22, 2; § 24. 
Variations of, § 23. Use of, after 
names of sovereigns, L. 30, 3 ; § 26, 
(3). For the day of the month, 
$26,(1). 



Cases, () 2. 

Ce, demons, prn. () 37, (6) ; § 108 
(> 116; L. 81. Used for he, she 
before etre, L. 82, 1. C est moi 
L. 81, 1. 

— . demons, adj., <j 20, (1) ; L. 10, 1,2. 

Cedilla, L. 3, 6. 

Ce que, what, L. 31, 4. 

Celui qui, he who, L. 81, 4. 

Chacun, each one, i) 41, (2). 

Chaque, each, % 30, (4). 

Changer d'habit, to change ojie : s coal; 
changer de maison, to move, L. 58, 
1. Changer, to exchange. L. 58, 2. 

Chez, prep, at the house of, <\ 142, (3); 
L. 24, 9. 

Collective nouns, % 3, (5), (6). Num- 
ber of verbs after collective nouns, 
L.85. 

Collocation of words, % 144. 

Combien de temps, hoiu long; com* 
bien de fois ? hoio often ? L. 44, 1. 
Combien y a-t-h"? how far 1 how 
long since ? L. 57, 4. 

Comparison of adjectives. L. 17. 

Compound nouns, § 3, (7). <) 9 ; L. 
59. Gender of, § 5, (15). 

Conditional mode, () 45, 2d, (3). 
Use of, () 125. Formation and 
termination of. L. 62, 1, 2. Irre- 
gularities of, L. 62, 4. Xot used 
after si, if L. 62. 6 ; $ 125. 

Conjugation of verbs. First conju- 
gation, paradigm, <j 48. Peculiari- 
ties of some verbs. () 49. Second 
conjugation, paradigm, vj 50. 
Third conjugation, paradigm, <) 
51. Peculiarities of verbs of 
third conjugation. § 49; () 52. 
Fourth conjugation, paradigm. ty 
53. Passive verbs, paradigm, $ 54. 
Rule, ty 55. Reflective verbs, para- 
digm. <) 56. Negative form of, 
<i 57. Interrogative form. V) 58. 
Interrogative and negative form, 
§ 59. Unipersonal verbs, para- 
digm. () 61, 2. Terminations of reg- 
ular verbs, v\ 60. Table of irregu- 
lar verbs. 

Connaitre, to be acquainted with, L. 
30, 6. Connaitre quel fu'un a la 
voix. to knew some i 
L. 87, 4. Connaitre de vue. to 
know by sight , etc., L. 87. 5. Se 
connaitre a. to b>- a fudge of I* 
87,6. 

Conjunctions, § 73. Lists of, § 7$ 



GENERAL INDEX. 



2). Syntax of, <j 143. Govern- En ? prep. § 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, 7. 
nient of, <j 127 ; () 143. Requir- Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5. 
ing subjunctive, <j 143, (2) ; infin- Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- 
itive, § 143, (1); conditional or nuyer, to become weary, L. 38. 6. 
indicative, § 143, (3) ; si, if, % 125, Entendre parler, to hear about, of L. 
(3) ; L. 62. 6. Examples of con- 35, 7. 

Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. Se 

faire entendre, to make one's selj 

understood, L. 96, 4. Followed by 

another verb, L. 97, 4. 

Envoyer chercher, to send for. L. 

. 26, 5. 

Epouser, to marry, said only of par- 
ties, L. 67, 2. 
Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. 



junctions, L. 100, 
Convenhytfofe becoming, L. 49, 2. 
Coucher (se), to retire, go to bed, L. 

37,5. 

Dans, prep, in, § 142, (2). 
Da vantage, more, note, L. 16. 
Day of month, week, not preceded 
by preposition, L. 26, 10, 



Degrees of comparison of adjectives Es4-ce-que, prefixed to the verb. $ 

L. 16; L. 17. A 98; L. 25. 

Demain, to-morrow, its place, L. 41, 5. Etre, conjugation of, § 47, (6). 



Demander, to ask, its government, j 

L. 50, 1. 
Pemettre (se), le bras, &c, to dislo-\ 

cate one's arm, &c., L. 93, 1. To 

resign a place, L. 93, 2. 
Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See I 

Adjective. 



Number of 6tre after ce, % 116. 
Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 5. For 
to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. £tre 
riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. 
Etre en retard, to be late, and 
other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. 
Y etre, to be at home, in, L. 91, 3. 



Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See Euphonic t, L. 4, 6. 



Eveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 5. 
| Every day, tous les jours, L. 26, 8. 

' Facher (se), to be or become angry, 
L. 40, 4. 



Pronoun. 
Depecher (se), to make haste, 

40, 7. 
Devant, prep, before. <j 142, (1). 
Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. 
Devoir, to owe, expressing future, Faire, before another verb, to cause, 



obligation, L. 35, 5. 
Dimension, etc., L. 68. 
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, 14. 
Dont. prn. of whom, of which, L. 

31, 8. 

Elision, 6 146. Of article L. 4, 2 ; 
J 13, (7). Of pronoun je, L. 4, 5. 
Of preposition de, L. 6,3. Ofne, 
L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. 

. 9, 2. 

Eloigner (s'), to go from, to leave. L. 
39, 6. 

Emparer (s'), to seize, lay hold of L. 
93, 3. 

Rmpi&cher (s'), to kelp, to prevent 
one's self, L. 93, 4. 

En i porter, Emmener, to take away, 
L. 44, 6. 

En. pronoun, v> 39, (17); <) 95, (5); 
§ 110; § 103, (1); <) 104: L. 
15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past 
participle, § 135, (7); L. 42, 11, 
12. Used instead of possessive 
adjective, $ 95, (5); L. 96. 1 2. 



to have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. 
Faire faire, to have made, L. 32, 4 : 
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to 
have mended. Faire la cuisine, 
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir, 
to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to 
frighten ; faire attention, to pay 
attention; faire tort, to injure; 
faire du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3. 
, used unipersonally, in speak- 



ing of the weather, L. 33, 5. 

Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. 

Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3). 

Feu, adj., late, <) 84, (1). 

Future absolute, () 45, (2). Use of. 
() 124. Formation of, <j 61 ; L. 60' 
1, 2, 3. Irregularities of, L. 61 
1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior, <) 45 ; 
(2), 8. Use of, 6 124. Forma- 
tion of, L. 60, 4. Future used ic 
French where the present is used 
in English, L. 61, 5. 

Gender, $ 4. By the meaning, £ 6 
By the termination <i 6. 



Xll 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Gener, to incommode , trouble, &c, L. 
83, 5. Se goner, to constrain or 
trouble one's self, L. 83, 5. 

Gens, people, L. 05, 2, 3, 4. 

Government. See Regimen. 

Gre, will. Bon gre, mal gre, &c. 
L. 88,5 

Guerc (nej, but Utile, L. 17, 5. 

Hater (se), to hasten, L. 40, 7. 
Hier, yesterday, its place, L. 41, 5. 
Hour of the day, L. 20 ; L. 92. 

Imperative mode, § 45, 3d, (4). Use 
of, ty 126. Terminations of, L. 
70, 1. Irregularities, L. 70, 3*4. 
Two imperatives coming together, 
§ 100, (6). Imperative followed 
by a verb, L. 71, 1. 

Imperfect of indicative, <) 45, (2), 2d. 
Use of, () 119 ; L. 53. Formation 
and termination, L. 53. Irregu- 
larities, L. 54. 

Imperfect of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 
2. Use of, L. 75. Terminations 
of, L. 75, 1. 2, 3. Formation of, 
L. 75, 4. Irregularities, L. 75. 5. 

Importer; n'importe, no matter, 
qu'importe % what matters it ? L. 
94, 1, 2. 

In, dans, en, a, L. 34, 5, 6. 

Indicative mode. () 45, 1st, (2). 

Indicative present, § 45, (2), 1. Use 
of, {) 118. Terminations, L. 23. 5. 

Infinitive mode, () 45, 5th, (6). Use 
of, § 128. Important rules, § 128, 
(4), (5). Verb preceded by an- 
other, put in infinitive, L. 21, 2. 

In order to, pour, L. 28, 8. 

Inquieter, (s : ), to be uneasy, L. 93, 5. 

Intel jections, <j 74. 

Interrogative form of verbs, L. 23. 
9 ; L. 25, 1 ; % 98, (5), (6). 

Interrogative sentences, form of, L. 
6,4; $ 76, (4), (5); L. 50. 1. ' 

Irregular verbs, L. 24. Table of, 
§62. 

It, coming before verb to be followed 
by /, &c. L. 81. // used absolutely 
before verb to be, L. 81, 1. 

Jusau'oa, how for? L. 44. 3. 
Jusqu'a, until, as far as, L. 44, 4. 

Laisskr, to leave, to neglect, lo forget 
to bring, L. 86, 4. ' Followed by 
another verb, Ti. 97, 4. 



La plupart, most. Number of veil 

after, L. 85, 3. 
Le, meaning so, it, &c, L. 46, 4, 5. 
Le mien, mine. &c, L. 9, 6 ; L. 12. 6. 
LequeL &c, which, L..18, 6 ; L. 31, 7. 
Lever (se), to rise, L. 37, 6. 
L'un. Tautre, one another, (\ 41, (10) j 
L'un et l'autre, both, (\ 41, (11) ; L, 

19, 3. 

Madame, Mademoiselle, used before 
names of kindred, L. 24, note. 
Before titles, L. 29, 6. Plural of, 
L. 29, 7. 

Mal, sore, pain, etc., L. 66. Mal de 
dents, toothache, malde tete. head- 
ache, L. 66. 

Marcher, to walk, L. 36, 6. 

Marier, to marry, to perform the cere- 
mony, L. 67, 2. Se luarier, to get 
married, L. 67, 2. Etre marie^ to 
be married, L. 67, 2. See Epouser. 

Measure, weight, price by, L. 68, 3. 

Menie, same, even, <$*c, ty 30, (5) ; 
$ 97, (2). 

Mener, porter, to take, to carry. L. 

44.6. 
; Mettre, to put on, L. 32, 1. Mettre 
le couvert, to lay the cloth, L. 32. 1. 
Mettre a meme, to enable ; mettre 
pied a terre, to alight ; mettre a. 
la porte, to turn out of doors ; met- 
tre au fait, to acquaint, etc.. L. 
69. 1. Se mettre, to dress oue\ 
self to sit down, L. 69, 2. 

Mettre a l'heure, to set a watch, L, 
92,2. 

Midi, minuit, noon, midnight, L. 
20.2. 

Modes, () 45. Indicative. § 45. 1st, 
(2). Conditional. § 45, 2d,' (3). 
Imperative, () 45, 3d. (4). Sub- 
junctive, <\ 45, 4th. (6). Infinitive, 
() 45, 5th, (6). Participle, & 45, 
6th, (7). 

Moi, toi. etc., used instead of nomi- 
native pronouns. L. 17. 6. 

Mon. ma, poss. adj., agree with ob- 
ject possessed, L. 9, ;>. 4. 

Monde, world, people, L. 95. 1. Tout 
le monde y, L. 95. 

Monsieur, used before names of kin- 
dred. L. 24, note. Before titles, 
L. 29, 6. Plural of. L 29. 7. 

.Month, day of L. 19. 6; L. 2Q 
10. 

Must,/o«0tr,&c M L. 48; % 62. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Xffi 



NaitbE; to b> born, Je suis ne, / was 
barn, L. 43. note. 

Ne, negative, § 138. Place of, L. 7, 
1. Ne— que. only. L. 19. 2- Ne, 
idiomatic. (3 127, 3 ; <> 138, (4), 
(5) ; L. 72, 9. Ne — plus, no — 
more, L. 17, 4. Ne — guere, L. 
17 ; 5. 

50, neither, nor, L. 7, 4. Article 
used or mt after ni, L. 8, 3, 4. 

Ni Tun. ui l'autre, neither, L. 84, 4, 5. 

Negative, second, suppressed after 
certain verbs, $ 138 (2). 

Neuter verbs. <) 43 (5). Their aux- 
iliary, L. 43 ; () 46. 

Nominative. See Subject. 

Non. wo, Je dis que non. / say no, 
L. 82, 3. * 

Notre, votre. our, your, &c, L. 9, 5. 
Le notre, ours, L. 9. 6. 

Noun, () 3. Proper, (3). Common. 
(4). Collective, § 3. (5), (fi). 
Compound. § 3, (7). Taken in a 
partitive sense. § 13. (10) ; <j 78, 
(1), (2); L. 6, 1; L. 29, 8. 
Taken in a general sense, $ 77. 
(1), (2) ; L. 8, 2. Gender by the 
meaning. () 5. By the termina- 
tion. () 6. Plural of, §8; L. 11. 
Plural of compound, () 9 ; L. 59. 
Syntax of, <j 76. Place of sub- 
ject in affirmative and negative 
sentences, () 76, (1). (2). In inter- 
jected sentences, § 76, (3). In 
interrogative sentences, § 76. (4). 
(5); L. 6, 4; L. 56, 1. Place of 
regimen, < } 76, (6), (7), (8), (9) ; 
L. 56, 2, 3. Respective places of 
possessor and object possessed, 
() 76. (10) ; L. 5. 3. Of object and 
its substance, ^ 76, (11) ; L. 5, 4 ; 
L. 69, 6. Of object and its use. 
< } 76, (12), (13), (14) ; L. 59, 7. 

Nouveau. nouvel. new, L. 13, 6. 

Nu. bare, adj.. $ 84, (2). 

Nnl. w, $ 30, (7). 

Nuile part, no where, L. 25, 8. 

Number, $ 1, (5). &# Different 
Parts ox Speech. 

Number. See Numeral Adjectives. 
Ordinal adverbs of number. (\ 29. 

Numeral collective nouns. $ 27". 

Numerals, fractions, () 28. 

On. tf/?e, vwple, they, <\ 41. (4), (5) ; 
$118; L. 36, 1,2. 

Ordinal numbers, (> 22, (3), (5). Not 



used after n&mes of sovereigns or 
for davs of the month. L. 30, 3 ; $ 
.26,(1), (3) 

Oter, to take off, to take away, L. 32, 2. 
Ou, or. agreement of verb with 

nouns connected by, L. 84, 2, 3. 
Oui, yes, Je dis que oui, / say yes, L 

82, 3. 

Paradigms of auxiliary verbs, () 47 
For others, see Conjugations. 

Par ou ] which vmy ? L. 44, 5. 

Participle past, § 45, 6th, (7). With- 
out an auxiliary, () 66, (3) ; L. 42, 
10 ; L. 98, 1. Accompanied by 
etre, § 134, (2) ; L. 42. 6 ; L. 98, 3, 
In reflective verbs. <j 135. (1). (2) ; 
L. 45, 2; L. 98, 6; L. 99, 4. In 
neuter verbs, L. 98, 3. Accompa- 
nied by avoir, () 134, (3) ; L. 42. 5 ; 
L. 98, 4. Never agrees with indi- 
rect regimen, L, 42, 9. Neuter 
verbs with avoir, <) 135, (6) ; L. 
99, 2. Of unipersonal verbs. L. 
45. 6 ; L. 99, 3. Never agrees 
with en, % 135, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 12; 
L. 99, 8. Followed bv an infini- 
tive, <) 135, (3) ; L. 98, 7 ; L. 99, 

5. Of passive verbs, L. 46 ; L. 98, 
2. Fait alwavs invariable before 
an infinitive, L. 63. 2 ; L. 99, 7. 
After lepeu, $ 135, (8). 

present, () 64 ; L. 97. 

Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L. 

6. 1; ()13, 10; § 78, (1), (2); L. 
29, 8. 

Pas. point, not. difference. () 138. (1). 
Place of L. 7, 1, 2. Omitted when 
a second negative occurs, v> 138, 
(3) ; L. 7. 4. Omitted after certain 
verbs, § 138, "(2). 
; Passer (se), to do without, L. 39, 1. 

Passive voice, () 113 (1). 

Passive verb, $ 43 (4) ; L. 46. Con- 
jugation of. () 54. Rule, $56. Its 
participle, L. 46. 2; L. 98. 2. 

Past anterior. 6 45, (2). 5. Use of 
<) 122: L. 56. 

Past definite, 6 45. (2), 3. Use of 
[) 120; L. 51. Its terminations 
and irregularities, L. -Vj. 

Past indefinite, $ 15. (2 >, 4. Use of, 
< } 121; L.41. 

Past of subjunctive, $ 15. (5), 3. 

Payer, to pay, its government, L. 50, 

Penonne, no body, ( 41. (6) ; L. 7, T. 
'Persons, $31, (3). 



XIV 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Place, respective, of noun, direct 
and indirect regimen, L. 56, 2, 3 ; 
§ 76, (7), (8). (9). In interjected 
sentences, v> 76, (3.) Of noun in in- 
terrogative sentences, <j 76, (4), 
(5); L. 56, 1 ; L. 6,4. Of adjec- 
tive, L. 8 ; 5 ; L. 15 ; <> 85 ; () 86. Of 
pronoun subject or nominative, <) 
98. Of regimen pronoun, L. 9. 1 ; 
L. 27; L. 28; <) 101; § 102. 
Place of en and y, V> 104 ; L. 57. 
Of adverb, § 136; L. 34; L. 41. 
4,5. Of verb, ^144. 

Plaire (se), to take pleasure in, L. 
40, 6. Used unipersonallly, comme 
il vous plaira, as you please, L. 89, 3. 

P'euvoir, to rain, L. 33, 3. 

Pluperfect of indicative. § 45. (2), 6. 
Use of, § 123 ; L. 55 ; 4. 

of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 

4; L. 75, 6. 

Plural of nouns, § 8 ; L. 11. Of com- 
pound nouns, ^ 9 ; L. 59. Nouns 
having no plural, ty 10. Nouns 
having no singular, () 11. Plural 
of adjectives, i) 17 ; L. 14, 3. Moral 
or physical properties of man, 
single in the individual, not put 
in the plural, L. 66, 5. 

Plus de, more than, before a number, 
L. 20 7. 

Plusieurs, several, §30, (9); L. 18, 7. 

Pour, in order to, L. 28, 8. 

Porter, to carry, to wear, L. 23, 10 ; 
L. 44. 6. Se porter, to be, to do, 
L. 36^ 3. 

Preposition, ty 71. Table of princi- 
pal, § 72 Regimen or govern- 
ment of, <J> 139. Governing with- 
out another preposition, V) 139. 
By means of de, <) 139, 2. By a, 
<) 139, 3. Rules or government 
of, % 140. Repetition of, § 141, 
Observations on, § 142. 

Promener (se), to walk, ride, &c, 
for pleasure, L. 36, 5. 

Prendre, to take, its government, L. 
50,1. 

Prendre garde, to take care ; prendre 
le deuil, to go into mourning; 
prendre la peine, to take the trou- 
ble; prendre les devants. to go be- 
fore ; prendre un parti, to U 
resolution; prendre du the, du 
cafe, to take tea, ct>fee % 1n. 71, 3. 

Prendre le the, to V//.7? one's (<<i. 
note, L 71. 



Pronouns, § 31. Personal, () 32. Re- 
marks on, () 33. Use of moi, to\ 
instead of subject or nominative 
pronouns. § 33, (8). etc. Reflective 
pronoun se, % 33, (12), (13). Sot, 
(14). Possessive pronoun, <j 34. 
Remarks on. <j 35. Demonstrative 
pronouns. <j 36. Remarks on, £ 37. 
Cc, demonstrative pronoun. t> 37, 
(6); § 108; U16;L. 81. Used 
for he, she, L. 82. Celui, celle, ce- 
lui-ci. cclle-ei, () 20 ; L. 10. Ceci 1 
cela, L. 10 ; 6. Relative pronouns, 
<) 38. Remarks on, <j 39. En, 
() 39, (17) ; () 95, (5) ; § 110 ; <) 103, 
(1). Place of En, § 104. Y. §.39, 
(18) ; <) 103 (2). Place of y. $ 104 ; 
§ 111. Dont, L.^Bl, 8. Syntax of 
pronouns, § 98. Place of subject 
or nominative, § '98. Repetition 
of, {) 99 ; L. 87. Place of regimen 
pronouns, § 100 ; L. 9, 1 ; L. 27. 
Respective place of regimen pro- 
nouns, () 101 ; L. 28. Rule on this 
subject, § 102. Repetition of regi- 
men pronoun, § 105 ; L. 27. 7. 
Rules on possessive pronouns, § 
106. On demonstrative pronouns, 
§ 107. On relative pronouns, § 
109. 

Que, rel. prn., () 109. Never sup- 
pressed, L. 19, 1 ; L. 31, 3. Que, 
interrogative, L. 18, 5 ; L. 31, 5. 

Que, conj., never suppressed, L. 19, 
1. Que, idiomatic, L. 82, 3. 

Quel, which, ichat,>% 30, (10) ; % 109 ; 
L. 18, 4. 

Quelque, % 30, (12^1 ; % 97 ; L. 18, 
7; L.88. 

Quel — que, quelque — que, govern 
the subjunctive, L. 88, 3. 

Quelque chose, something, anything. 
L. 7, 6. Require dc before an ad- 
jective, L. 18, 3. Not used in neg- 
ative sentences, L. 7, 6. 

Quelque part, somewhere, anmchere, 
L. 26, 8. 

Quelqu'un. <\ 41, 7. 

Qu'est-ce-que, used idiomatically foi 
what? L. 82, 2. 

Quiconqne, who* r<>\ § 41, (9). 

Quitter, to -"idou, &c., L. 

86, 8. 

Qnoi, what, L. 31. 6. 

Qui, who, whom, used absolutely, $ 

: 89,(5). 



GENERAL INDEX. 



XV 



Rappeler (se), to remember, recollect, 
L 37, 2. 

Reading lessons, p. 466. 

Recevoir des nouvelles. to hear from, 
L. 35. 6. 

Reflective verbs. () 43, (6). Conjuga- 
tion of, <) 56 ; L. 36. Often used 
in French for the English passive, 
L. 36, 2. Its auxiliary is etre, L. 
45 ; <) 46. Its participle. § 135 ; 
L. 45; L. 98,5; L. 99, 4. 

Regarder. to concern, L. 94, 5. 

Remercier, to thank, Je vous remer- 
cie, equivalent to a refusal. L. 89, 2. 

Resume of rules on participle past. 
L. 98; L. 99. 

Rien, nothing, etc., L. 7, 7 ; L. 18, 3. 

Regime, regimen or object, § 2. 
Direct. $ 2. (2) ; § 42. (4) ; L. 56. 
2. 3 ; $ 76. Indirect. <> 2. (3) ; § 
42, (5); L. 56, 2, 3; § 76. 

Regimen or government of adjec- 
tives, () 87 ; L. 79. After etre 
unipersonal. § 87. (4) ; L. 79, 3. 
Adjective followed by de, <j 88. 
By d, § 89. By different preposi- 
tions in bot> languages, § 90. 
Regimen of verbs, § 129 ; L. 21, 4 ; 
L. 50. Verbs followed by no 
preposition. <) 130 ; L. 76. 1. By 
d, $131. By de, 132; L. 21, 4; 
L. 77. By a preposition in French 
and by none in English, L. 78, 1, 
2. By a different prep, in both. 
L. 78, 3. Regimen of prepositions, 
^ 139 ; L. 80. Important rules on 
regimen, $ 92 ; <> 133 : $ 140 ; L. 
80, 5. 

Regimen of prendre, to take ; voler, 
to steal; acheter, to buy; dernan- 
der. to as!: ; payer, to pay. L. 50, 1. 

Kejouir (se . L. 40. 5. 

Remettre, to set a dislocated bone, 
&.c. L. 93. examples. g 

Repetition of demonstrative adjec- 
tives. () 93. Of possessive adjec- 
tives, <) 21. (4). Of articles, ( 80, 
L. 6, 5. Of subject or nominative 
pronouns. § 99; L. 87. Of regimen 
or objective pronouns, () 105; L. 
87. Of adverbs, ( 137. Of prep- 
ositions, () 141. 

Hester, used unip. to remain, to harr 
L. 85. 4. 

Reete de, left, L. 85, 4. 

Retardrr. to lose, to put bach said of 
watches. &C, L. 92, 1. 



Savoir, to knoio, and connaitre, tc 
be acquainted with, L. 30, 5. 

Seoir, to suit, become, L. 47. 3. Used 
unipersonally, L. 49, 1. 

Servir (se), to use, L. 39, 2. Servir, 
to help at table, L. 89, 1. 

S'il vous plait, if you please, L, 89, 3. 

Si, conj., <) 125,(3). Should not pre- 
cede conditional mode, L. 62, 6, 

Souvenir (se). to remember 3 recollect; 
L. 37, 2. 

So, rendered by le, L. 46, 4. 
1 Speech, parts of. () 1, (lj. 

Stem of a verb, L. 23. 

Subject or nominative, § 2, (1) ; 
ty 42 (2). Verb having several sub- 
jects in different persons, L. 83, 2. 
Agreement of verbs with subjects, 
L.83, 1; L. 84; § 114; § 115. 

Subjunctive mode. 6 45. 4th. (5), 
Use of, $127; $143; L. 72. 8. 9, 
10. Present of, $ 45, (5), 1. Ter- 
mination of, L. 72. Subjunctive 
used after verbs expressing con- 
sent, command, etc., followed by 
que, L. 72. 8. After severaluniper- 
sonal verbs followed by que. L. 73, 
1. After certain conjunctions, § 
143 ; L. 73. 4. After croire, espe- 
rer, &c, interrogative or negative, 
L. 74. 2. After another verb, un- 
certain, and preceded by relative 
pronoun or a superlative. L. 74, 3, 
4. Past of subjunctive. L. 72, 7. 

Substantive. Set Noun. 

Superlative absolute, § 14, (11) ; L. 
17, 1. Superlative relative. $ 14, 
(9); L. 17,2. 

Syntax, $ 75. Of noun, () 76. Arti- 
cle, <) 77. Adjective, $ 83. Pro- 
noun, () 98. Verb, ( 114. Parti- 
ciple, (> 134. Adverb, vj 136. Pre- 
position, v> 139. Conjunction, 
<) 143. 

Taire, to conceal, L. 96,5. Se taire, 

to be sUcnt, L. 96, 5. 
Tarder. to tarn/, to long, L. 58, 3. 
Tel. such, <y 41 (12). (13). Monsieur 

un tel, Mr. such a ou>\ § 41, 13. 
Tenir. to hold, used in the sense of to 

h<<p. Tenir m parole, to keep 
one's word, tenir la porte ouverte, 
to k<<p the door of* a. etc., etc. L. 
90, 1. Tenir un langage, to make 
use of languor nons, etc., 

L. 90, 2. Tenir, to be attached, 



XVI 



GENERAL INDEX 



etc., L. 90, 3. Faire tenir, to for- 
ward, L. 90, 6. Se tenir, to re- 
main, to abide by, etc., L. 90, 6. 

Tenses of verbs, () 45. Formation of, 
(§ 61). See Different Tenses, 

Terminations of regular verbs, § 60. 
Of indicative, L. 23 ; 5. Of imper- 
fect of indicative, h. 53, 5. Of 
past definite, L. 51. Of future, 
L. 60. Of conditional, L. 62. Of 
imperative, L. 70. Of subjunc- 
tive, L. 72. Of imperfect of sub- 
junctive, L. 75. Of infinitive, L. 
21, 1. Of present participle, L. 
23, 3. Of past participle, L. 23, 4. 

Times, number of. in a given space, 
L. 68, 4. 

Tout, all, etc., § 30, (15), (16) ; § 97, 
(4), (5), (6). Tout, every, L. 26, 
8. Tout, the whole, L. 26, 9. 
Tout, entirely, quite, variable by 
euphony, L. 88, 4. 

Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Se 
tromper, to be mistaken, etc., L. 
38,2. 

Un, une, a, an, one, § 13, (4) ; (11) ; 
L. 6, 2. Not used before nouns 
placed in apposition, L. 30, 4. 

Unipersonal verbs, § 43, (7). Para- 
digm of, § 61-2. Auxiliary of 
unipersonal verbs, L. 45, 3, 4. 

Valoir, to be worth, L. 49, 3 ; to be 
better, L, 49, 6. 

Venir, to come, used to indicate past 
just elapsed, L. 26, 2. Venir 
trouver, to come to, L. 26, 3. 

Verbal adjectives, § 65 ; L. 97. 

Verbs, § 42. Subject or nominative 
of, § 42, (2). Regimen or object 
of, § 42 (3). Different sort of 
verbs, § 43. Active, § 43. (2), 
(3) ; L. 43. Passive. § 43, (4) ; L. 
46. Neuter, § 43 (5); L. 43. 



Reflective, § 43, (6); § 66; L. 36 
2. Unipersonal, § 43, 7 ; <j 61-2. 

Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8). Use 
of. () 46 ; L, 43, 45. Modes and 
tenses of, § 45. See Different 
Modes and Tenses. Irregular 
verbs, L. 24. Table of, § 62. Syn- 
tax of the verb, () 114. Agreement 
of the verb with subject. <j 114; 
L. 83 ; L. 84 ; L. 85. Verb after 
a collective noun, § 115 ; L. 85, 1, 
2, 3. Number of verb after ce, 
§ 116. Verb after nouns indifferent 
persons. § 117. Use of tenses, 
§118. See Different Tenses. Regi- 
men or government of verbs. 
See Regimen. 

Veuillez, be so kind, L. 70, 4. 

Vocabulary to the reading lessons, 
p. 485. 

Voici, here is, L. 34, 4. 

Voila, there is, L. 34, 4. 

Voler, to rob, steal, its government, 
L. 50, 1. 

Vouloir dire, to mean, L. 32. 5, 6. 

(en), to bear a grudge, &C., 

L. 94, 6. 

Vowels, L. 2. 

What, rel. prn., ce que, L. 31, 4 ; qvA x 
L. 31, 5. 

, interrogative, rendered by, 



qu'est-ce-que, L. 82. 2. 
Whole (the), le tout, L. 26, 9. 
Will, used In the sense of wisn, ren-« 

dered by vouloir, L. 60, 5. 
Words, variable. 0. (3). Invariable, 

Y avoir, to be there, § 61-2 ; L. 33, 4. 
Used for ago, L. 41, 6. Y avoir s 
followed by the present. when the 
action continues, L. 57. 2. 

Y,prn.&adv.<) 39, (18); § 103. (2) 
Place of, §104; §111: L. 21, 11 



NEW FRENCH COURSE 



PAET FIEST. 



LESSON I. 



LEgON I. 





THE 


LETTERS. 




Ihe Frmch 


alphabet contains twenty-five letters : 


— 




Old names. 


New names. 


Examples, 


A a 


ah 


ah 


anias. 


B b 
C c 
D d 


bay 
say- 
day 


be|| 
ke$ 
de$ 


barre. 
cas, cil. 

dard. 


E e 


a 


a 


effet. 


F f 


eff 


fe 


frere. 


G g 
H h 


jay* 

ash 


ghe 
he 


grele. 
haie. 


T i 


e 


e 


idee. 


K k 


jee* 
kah 


j e 
ke 


jais. 
kali. 


L 1 


ell 


le 


lit. 


M m 


emm 


me 


mat. 


N n 


enn 


ne 


natte. 


o 








orge. 


£ P 
Q q 

R r 


pay 
ku 
err f 


pe 
ke 
re 


pere. 

quadre 

rat. 


S s 


ess 


se 


soie. 


T t 


tay 


te 


tort. 


U u 


ut 


u 


urne. 


V v 
X x 


vay 

eeks 


V 

xe 1 


vase, 
rixe. 


Y y 

Z z 


e grec 
zed 


egrec 
ze** 


yeux. 
zele. 



W, caiJed in French double V 1 might be added, as many for- 
eign words which have that letter have been adopted into the 
French language. 



* Like s in pleasure. 
| No corresponding sound in English. 
$ Nearly like ke and de in cake and 
lers has the same sound. 
If kse 



t Nearly like err in error. 

|| Nearly like be in globe. 

■rradc. The e of the c ther let- 

** se in rose. 



18 LESS OX II. 

LESSON II. LEgON JI 

THE VOWELS. 

Vowels are rendered long or short by certain marks placed over 
them These marks, which are three in number, are called ascents. 

The acute accent ( ' ) is placed over the e to give it a sharp or close 
sound. (See 4, e.) 

The grave accent ( x ) is placed over a, e, u, to give to those vowels 
a grave or open sound. (See 5, e.) 

The circumflex accent ( A ) is placed over a, e, i, 0, u, to give to those 
letters a long and broad sound.* 

1. a like a in mass. Ex. face, face; bateau, boat ; tableau, picture; 

patte, paw ; malade, sich 

2. & like a in bar, far. Ex. age, age ; chateau, castle; pdte, paste ; 

blame, blame; crane, cranium. 

3. e nearly like u in bud, and frequently silent at the end of poly- 

syllables. Ex. \e, ike ; me, me ; te, thee ; que, that ; meuble, 
piece of furniture ; peuple, people ; rime, rime. 

4. e like a in fate. Ex. ete, summer ; amitie, friendship , eleve, 

raised ; epee, sword. 

5. e like ai in pair. Ex. pere, father ; frere, brother ; mere, mother ; 

eleve, pupil. 

6. e nearly like e in there. Ex. reVe, dream ; extreme, extreme ; 

creme, cream ; crepe, crape; foret, forest 

7. i nearly like i in pin. Ex. midi, mid-day ; id, here; ftnt, finished; 

credit, credit 

8. i like ee in bee. Ex. tie, island ; gite, lodging ; epttre, epistle ; 

dime, tithe ; abime, abyss. 

9. o nearly like o in rob. Ex. robe, robe ; globe, globe , caehot, dun- 

geon; haricot, bean. 
LO. 6 like in bone. Ex. depot, deposit ; prevot, pro cost , bientot, 
soon; suppot, supporter. 
1. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- 
lish. The position of the lips in whistling, is very nearly the 
position which they should have in emitting the French u. Ex. 
wrne, urn; lime, moon; btrt, aim : tribe/. tribe ; tribut, tribute; 
e\u, ejected. 

* This accent indicates the suppression of the letter s after the vowel 
on which it is placed, thus : fete, tile, bete, were formerly written, feste % 
teste, beste; the s was not sounded, but gave to the preceding vowel that 
prolonged sound now represented by the circumflex accent. 



LESSON II. 19 

12. ft is the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mure, mulberry ; du, 

due ; cru, growth ; brftler, to burn, 

13. y See 28, y. 

THE DIPHTHONGS. 

14. A vowel surmounted by a diseresis ( " ) cannot form a diph- 
thong with another vowel, it is pronounced separately. Ex. 
hair — Exception : e at the end of a few words, such as cigue, 
hemlock, is silent, the u being pronounced like u. — E accented 
(e) and followed by a vowel, is pronounced separately. Ex. 
ob<?ir, to obey; ge'ant, giant 

15. ai, ei, preceding a liquid I (see Consonants, 13) do not form a 

diphthong ; a is then pronounced as in mass, and e as ai in 
pair. The i seems merely to indicate the liquid sound of the 
I. Ex. paille, straw ; omlle, ear, 

16. ai is like a in fate. Ex. j'az, I have; je feiai, I will make; baze, 

bay ; mai, May; balcw, broom. 

When the diphthong ai is followed by s, d, or t, it assumes a 
broader sound, resembling the French e or a* in the English 
word pair. Ex. j'avais, I had; je ferats, I should make ; laitj 
milk; laid, ugly. 

17. au nearly like oh ! in English. Ex. taux, rate ; chaud, warm. 

e preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- 
ing its sound. Ex. beau, handsome ; chateau, castle ; tableau, 
picture; eau, water. 

18. ei nearly like a in fate. Ex. beige, serge ; netge, snow ; seigle, 

rye; reine, queen; petgne, comb. 

19. eu approaches the sound of u in tub. Ex. jew, play ; lieu, place; 

pew, little ; pewr, fear ; chalewr, heat. Exceptions, in eu, had ; 
j'ews, &c., I had; j'ewsse, etc,, I might have; eu is pronounced 
like u alone. 

20. ia nearly like ia in medial. Ex. il lia, he bound ; il cria, he cried ; 

dialogue, dialogue. 

21. ie like ee in free. Ex. il lie, he binds ; il itudie, he studies ; harpie, 

harpy ; mie t the soft part of bread. 

22. oi nearly like wa in was. Ex. croix, cross; il bozt, Ae drinks; 

roi, king. 
13. ou like oo in cool Ex. doux,soft; coup, blow; nous, we; \ous, 
you; cou, neck. 



20 



LESSON II. 



24. ua t« I -g II sn\ua, he saluted; il remua, he moved; fl 

1 ^ 2 contribiza, Tie contributed. 

25. ue §.*> © „• II salne, 7ie salutes; il remne, Tie moves; il 

q a i ? § contribwe, 7ie contributes. 

26. ui o? © " produit, pnduce ; conduite, conduct ; Xut, him; 

© © a bruit, noise ; il rednit, 7ie reduces. 

27. uo ^ w dno, ^ Me ^ 

28. y when initial, when coming between two consonants, or when 

forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French u 
Ex. style, style; type, type ; yeux, eyes ; Fpres, Ypres ; y, there , 
between two vowels y has the power of two Vs, one of which 
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the 
following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between 
the t's. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean ; 
citor/en, citizen ; abbaz/e, abbey ; these words are pronounced 
as if they were written moi-ien, essai-ier, nettoUier, citoi-ien, 
abbai-ie. The words pays, country ; pay sage, landscape ; pay- 
san, peasant, are pronounced pe-is, pe-isage, peusan. 

THE NASAL SOUNDS. 

29. The combination of the vowels with the consonant m ox n, 
produces what the French call le son nasal, the nasal sound. 

30. When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel* the nasal sound does not take place. 
Ex. innocent, innocent ; immobile, immovable ; inutile, useless ; 
inou'i, unheard of. The syllables in and im in the words in- 
nocent and immobile, are pronounced as in English ; the syl- 
labic division of i-nu-ti-le and i-nou-'i will explain the reason 
of the absence of the nasal sound in those words. 

81. anO ample, ample ; chambre, chamber ; lampe, 

lamp. 
pronounced m an, year; banc, bench; dans, in : ma^ 
anh\ nearly i 'E. teau, clock. 

like an in I membre, limb ; emporter, to carry away; 
pant. W trembler, to tremble. 

en, in ; dent, tooth ; pre??dre, to take ; 
rendre, to render. 



* The words ennui, cimuycr, cmmcncr.cnivrcr,enorgurillir : form excep- 
tions to this rule. The first syllable of ennui, ennuyrr, emmcur is nasal; 
enivrer,e7iorgiieilUr are pronounced cn-nivrcr, en-orgueiltir. 

f This combination, it seems to us, rerders the Frerxh nasal sound 
more accurately than ang\ the g giving ar unpleasant twaDg not existing 
in the French nasal syllables. 



LESSON III. 



21 



32. en final is sometimes pronounced like en in then. Ex. Eden, 

Eden. 

33. en in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils lisent, 

ils portent, ils donnent ; pronounce ils liz, ils port, ils donn. 



34. im "I 



somewhat 

> like an in < 

crank. 



r timbre, stamp; impossible, impossible; im* 
portant, important, 
Un, flax ; "pin, pine ; crin. horse-hair ; \tr 
wine. 



35 om 



pronounced f tombe, tomb ; comble, height ; sombre, dark 



onh, nearly 
like o?i in 



toraber, to fall, 
man, my ; ton, thy ; s?n, his ; bond, bound 
song. j)ont, bridge. 

36 urn ^1 somewhat f humble, humble ; parfum, perfume. 

I like un in <J un, one ; chaewn, each one ; importwn, inu 
un J hunting. portunate. 



lesson m. 



LEgoisr m 



THE CONSONANTS. 

1. A final consonant is generally silent. 

2. The letters c, f, 1, r, however, when final, are generally pro- 
nounced. 

3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next 
word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. (See 
II, h.) 

4. For illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 

5. B initial is pronounced as in English. In the middle of words, 

and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. aftdiquer 
to abdicate, Job, Caleb, &c. B is also pronounced in radoufy 
refitting of a vessel, and rum/;, (pronounced romb,) point of th 
compass. It is silent in jAomb, lead; aplomb, perpendicular. 
When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced. 
Ex. abbe, abbot ; saMat. 
ft. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, 
cottage; cou, neck; ecu, crown; enclin, inclined; Oiu'.'his, 
Cneius ; croire, to believe* 
t before e and i, and with the cedilla (c) before a, 0, or u, has 
the sound of s; cec\,this; cendres, ashes ; facade, front; fa- 
co\\ fashion; re cm, received. 



22 LESSON III. 

ch is pronounced like sh in she. Ex. char, car ; c/iarton, coal , 
c/iangement, change. 

c in the words vermicelh and violoncelle, is pronounced like ch. 

ch is pronounced like k in a few words derived from the Greek. 
Ex. c/iaos, anac/ironisme, cfrronique, patriarc/tat, orchestre, &c 
In patriarc/ie, arcfreveque, Acheron, ch is pronounced like sh 
In Mic/zel-Ange, Michael- Angelo, it sounds like k. 

c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, with ; 
arc, bow ; sac, bag; sue, juice; Turc, Turk. 
Exceptions: it is silent inaccroc, rent; hroc,jug; clerc, clerk , 
estomac, stomach ; lacs, snares ; marc, maWc ; porc,_por/c ; tabac 
tobacco — ch is silent in almanac/?. 

c preceded by n is silent. Ex. banc, bench; flanc, flank. 

c is pronounced like g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful. 

c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 

7. D has the same sound as in English. Ex. dame, lady. D is pro 

nounced in the middle of words. Ex. adverbe, adverb ; ad- 
mirer, to admire. 

a is silent at the end of words, except in proper names : as in 
David, David ; also in the word sud, south, and in a few for- 
eign words, as le Cid, the Cid; le Talmud, the Talmud, &c. 

d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an 
h mute, assumes the sound of t — un grand homme, is pro - 
nounced grand tomme; coud-il, does he sew? vend-il, does he 
sell 1 are pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 

8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex./ievre,/ci"cr;/iacre, hackney- 

coach. 
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/*, (hirst ; chef, chief; sui/, 
tallow. 

Exceptions: e\ef, key; che/-d ? ceuvre, master-piece; ceuf-dar, 
hard egg ; ceu/-frais, fresh egg ; bceu/-frais, fresh beef; bceuf- 
sale, salt beef. In the plural of the words oeuf and \ceuf,f 
is always silent, 

The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounds 
like v before a vowel or h mute; neuf livres, pronounce neu 
livres — neuf homines, neu/ enfants, pronounce veu-ro7nme, 
mm -ven fonts. 

9. Ci is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. 

garde, guard ; g"ond, hinge; aiiru, acute 
g before e and i has always the soft sound, (that of a in pleasure). 

Ex. g-erbe, sheaf; gendre, son-in4aw ; gibier, game; g^et, vest, 
gua, guc, gue, gui, are pronounced gha, gho ghe, ghi, i.e.. the 



LESSON III. 



28 



a is silent. Ex. il \egua, he bequeathed; leguons, let us 
bequeath; guerre, war, guitzre, guitar. 
Exceptions : In aiguille, needle, Guise, &c, the two vowels 
are sounded. The ue of gue final is mute, unless a diaeresis 
is on the e, as in cigue, hemlock. 

H gi is pr3nounced like ni in union. ~Ex. regne, reign ; peig^e, 
comb ; daigTier, to deign ; saig^er, to bleed. 
Exceptions : Gmde, Pro^e, stagnant, ignee, &c. 
g final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute; — 
sang humain, human blood, is pronounced san ku?nain. 

1 1 H is mute or aspirate — h mute (having of itself no sound) when 
preceded by a word subject to elision, ({ 146) is treated as 
a vowel — h aspirate is always initial, the breathing or aspi- 
ration is very sligh* but not entirely absent, as is advanced 
by some grammarians. 

As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro- 
nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to 
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the 
words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however 
the derivatives and a few words seldom used. 





Hableur 


Haras 


Have 


Hors 




Hache 


Harasser 


Havre 


Hotte 




Hagard 


Harceler 


Havresac 


Hottentot 




Haie 


Hardes 


Heler 


Houblon 




Haillons 


Hardi 


Hennir 


Houille 




Haine 


Harem 


Henri 


Houlette 




Hair 


Hareng 


Heraut 


Houppe 




Haire 


Hargneux 


Herisson 


Houri 




Hal age 


Haricot 


Herisser 


Houppelande 




Hale 


Haridelle 


Heron 


Housse 




Halle 


Hamais 


Heros* 


Houx 




Hallebarde 


Harpe 


Herse 


Huche 




Hallier 


Harpie 


Heurter 


Huee 




Halte 


Ilarpon 


Hibou 


Huguenot 




Hamac 


Hasard 


Hideux 


Huit 




Hameau 


Hater 


Hierarchie 


Humer 




Hanche 


Hausser 


Hollandef 


JIuppe 




Hangar 


Haut 


Homard 


Hure 




Hanneton 


Haut-bois 


Honte 


Hurler 




Hanter 


Hautesse 


Horde 


Hussard 




Harangue 








i2. J 


is pronounced 


like s in pleasure. Ex.^our, day 


; jamais, never. 



* The h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, hero- 
isme, hero'iquc, &c, is not aspirated. 

t We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese ; de la toite 
d'Hollande. Dutch Uncn. 



24 LESSON III. 

K sounds like k in English. Ex. &an, khan; kilogramme, a 
French weight. 

13. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at 

the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English 
word brilliant. Ex. pa?'ZZe, straw ; fiZZe, daughter ; baiZ, lease 
travail, labor. 

Exceptions: Unthread; BresiZ, Brazil ; Nil, Nile; mil,mffle 
thousand; civil, civil; profiZ, profile; viZZe, town, and its deriv 
atives; tranquiZZe, tranquiZZite, &c, quiet, quietness, fyc. 

I is silent in bariZ, barrel ; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking ; fiZs 
son ; fourniZ, bakehouse ; fusiZ, gun ; griZ, gridiron ; outiZ, tool 
persiZ, parsley. 

II in SuZZy to s the liquid sound — 1 is silent in pouZs, pulse; and 
gentiZshommes, noblemen. 

The 1 marked as silent in the words above, is never carried to 
the next word. 

14. M ) initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 

15. N S combination with the vowels, see nasal sounds, (page 20.) 

Final consonants after m and n are generally silent. Ex. temps 
weather ; je romj?s, je prencZs, I break, I take. 

m is silent in condaraner, to condemn; automne, autumn. 

n final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next word, 
when this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two 
words are closely connected. Ex. un borc enfant, a good child m 
mora ami, my friend; pronounce bon nenfant, mon nami. 

16. P is generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in 

bapteme, baptism ; baptiser, to baptize ; compte, account ; 

donrpter 5 to subdue ; exempt, exempt ; sej>t, seven ; septiem6, 

seventh. 
p final is silent. Ex. coup, blow ; drap, cloth. 

Exceptions : cap, cape ; and proper names generally, 
p final is not carried to the next word. 
7. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. gwestion, question; qui, wh) 

^walite, quality : — ue final is silent after q. Ex. pratique, pra 

lice. 

Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in a^uatiqu-.. 

erfi/ateur, egwestrc, e^witation, elation, in-</?mrto, li^wefier, 

gwadragenaire, ^adruple, ^wadrupede, Qwinte-Curce, Quia* 

tilien, ^t/intuple, guirinaL 
q final is sounded. It is however mute in co^-d'Inde, turkey • 

and in cinq, Jive, when followed by a word commencing with 9 

«onsonant. 



LESSON III. 25 

18. K The French r is pronounced with greater force than th« 
English. 

rr is pronounced like r. Ex. arriver, to arrive ; arranger, td «r- 
range. 

Exceptions : in the future and conditional of acquerir, to ac- 
quire; courir, to run, and mourir, to die, the two r's are dis- 
tinctly sounded, Ex. je courrai, je mourrai, je courrais, je 
mourrais, j'acquerrais, &c. 

r final is pronounced when preceded by a, i, o, u. Ex. car, for ; 
finir, to finish; cor, hunting horn; pur, pure. 
Exception: Monsieur, Sir. 

r preceded by e is generally sounded in monosyllables. Ex. 
fer, iron ; cher, dear. 

r preceded by e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
Ex. parler, to speak ; manger, to eat ; chercher, to seek. 
Exceptions : r is sounded in amer, belveder, cancer, cuiller, 
ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the next 
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally 
carried to the next word. 
19 S has generally the same sound as in English. 

s between two vowels is pronounced as in the English words 
rose, prose. Ex. base, base; vase, vase; pause, pause ; chose, 
thing. 

Exceptions : s in words composed of a particle, or an adjective, 
and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing sound. 
Ex. parasol, parasol ; vraisemblable, likely ; desuetude, desue- 
tude; prestance, precedence, &c. 

sc is pronounced as in English. Ex. scandale, scandal; science, 
science. 

ech is pronounced like sh, in the words scMsme, scMsmatique, 
sc/aste, sc/ierif, sc/ieik, sc7ielling — It is pronounced sk in 
scheme. 

s final is generally silent. Ex. pas, step; mais, but; jus, juice 
Exceptions: s is pronounced in aloes, aloes; atlas, atlas 9 
blocus, blockade; cens, census; en sus, besides; gratis, gra^ 
tis ; lapis, lapis ; iris, iris ; mais, maize ; moeurs, manners ; 
prospectus, 'prospectus ; Rheims, Rheims ; vis, screw ; and in 
Latin and Greek names ending in s — Delos, Romulus, &c. 

ft is carried to the next word when the word commences with 
a vowel or an h mute; it has then the sound of z — bons 
amis, good friends, is pronounced bon zami. In conversation 
2 



26 LESSON III. 

the final s of verbs is not generally carried to the next 
word. 

20. T is pronounced like t in tab: 9. Ex. Zard, late ; fort, -jrong. 

t has the sound of the English c in cedar, in the combinations 
iial, tiel, tion, final or in the middle of words. Ex, partial, 
partial ; essentiel, essential ; observation, observation. Words 
in which those terminations are preceded by s or x, are ex- 
cepted; the t therefore in bastion, question, mixtion, &c. 
retains its proper sound. 

t has the sound of c in cedar, in the words ineptie, absurdity , 
minutie, minutia ; prophetie, prophecy ; and in words ending 
in atie, derived from the Greek, and having in English the ter- 
mination cy, aristocratie, democratic, &c. ; also in initier, to 
initiate. 

In other words ending in tie, and in those ending in tie and 
tier, the t has its proper sound. Ex. garantie, guarantee ; 
moitie, half; amitie, friendship ; chantier, dock-yard ; metier, 
trade. 

th sounds always like t alone. Ex. the, tea ; these, thesis. 

t final is generally silent. Ex. hut, aim ; mot, word ; sort, fate. 
Exceptions : t is sounded in bru£, chut, correct, dot, direct, 
deficit, faZ, exac£, net, preterit, suspect, strict, &c. 

t in sept, huit, vingt, is sounded except when it comes before 
a consonant. 

t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in et (and) is always 
silent. 

21. V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. riande, meat ; toile, 

veil. 

22. W which is found only in foreign words, is pronounced like v. 

Ex. Wurtemberg, Westphalie. In a few other words it has 
the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig, whist. 

23. X initial, which in French is only found in a few words, is pro. 

nounced like gz. Ex. xylon, cotton-plant ; Xavier, Xenophoiu 

Xante, Xantippe. 

Xerx&s is pronounced gzercess. 
x following an initial e, and preceding a vowel or an h, is also 

sounded like gz. Ex. exil, exile ; examiner, to examine; ex* 

hiber, to exhibit. 
x not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, 

sounds like ks. Ex. axe, axis ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, 

Alexander ; maxime, maxim ; sexe, sex 
i sounds like ss in the following words : six, six dix, ten , 



LESSON III. 27 

soi-rante, sixty; Bruxelles, Brussels; Auxonne, Auxene, 

Alr-en-Provence, 

In sijcieme, dmeme, deuxieme, dix-sept, dix-huit, dix-neuf, 

it is pronounced like % in zone. 
x final is generally silent. Ex. prix, price ; ctGjX, cross ; voir, 

voice. 

Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of 

Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajax, Styx, etc. In Aix-la-Cha- 

pelle it has the same sound. 

The x of deux, six, dix, coming before a consonant is silent, 

except in the cases mentioned above ; i. e., in dix-sept, dix- 

huit, dix-neuf. 
x when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 
34. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal , 

zenith, zenith. 
z final is generally silent. Ex. nes, nose; chez, with, <$-c. , 

allez, go. 

Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c. it sounds like ss. 
z final is generally carried to the next word when that word 

commences with a vowel, or an h mute. 

Exercise 1. — The Vowels. 

(a) Table, table ; fable, fable ; chat, cat ; eclat, splendor ; arbre, 

tree ; tard, late; balle, ball. 
(a) ame, soul; blame, blame; batir, to build; pate, paste; age, 

age ; mat, mast. 
(e) me, me ; de, of; que, that ; elle, she ; malle, mail ; parle, 

speak; fourche, fork ; salle, AaZZ. 
(e) pre, meadow; nWd^gone; donne, given; passe, passee, past, 

eleve, raised ; armee, army. 
(e) iris, very ; apres, after; achete, buy ; mere, mother; espere, 

hope; leve, raise ; chere, fare; chevre, goat. 
(e) meme, same ; careme, Lent ; arret, arrest ; tempete, tempest ; 

tete, head; bete, beast. 
(i) lit, bed; dit, said ; dire, to say; lire, to read; lime, file ; cire, 

wax ; rite, rite. 
(i) diner, to dine ; ile, isle ; dime, tithe ; abime, abyss ; epitre, 

epistle ; gite, lodging. 
(o) mot, word ; cachot, dungeon ; repos, rest ; trot, trot ; globe, 

globe ; carrosse, coach. 
(6) t6t, soon; plutot, rather; r6ti, roast meat; depot, deposit; 

pr6vot, provost. 



28 LESSON III. 

(u) bu, drank ; cru, believed ; du, of the ; elu, elected ; menu, 

minute; prem, foreseen ; ecu, crown, 
(u) chute, fall; brulot, fireship ; mur, ripe; dument, duly; il 

fut, he might be ; nous fumes, we were. 

The Diphthongs. 

(ai) je donnai, I gave; je parlerai, I will speak; j'allai, I went; 

je cherchai, J sought ; je menai, / Zed ; j'irai, I will go. 
(ais) je donnais, I was giving ; je parlerais, I would speak ; j'allais, 

I was going ; je cherchais, / ivas seeking ; je menais, J was 

leading ; j'irais, I would go. 
(au, eau) maux, evils ; chameau, camel ; chevaux, horses ; beau, 

handsome ; nouveau, new ; troupeau, flock. 
(ei) neige, snow ; veine, vein ; reine, queen ; Seine, Seine ; je 

peigne, I comb ; sein, bosom. 
(eu) peu, little; jyeur, fear; leur, their; il meurt, he dies; sceur, 

sister ; ceuf, egg ; lueur, light. 
(eu) like u. J'eus, / had; tu eus, thou hadst; il eut, he had ; eu, 

had, 
(ia) liant, binding ; il lia, 7ie bound ; partial, partial ; il cria, he 

cried ; il nia, he denied ; il pria, he prayed. 
(ie) garantie, guarantee ; il prie, he prays ; il lie, he binds ; il rie. 

he may laugh ; il nie, he denies. 
(oi) loi, law ; moi, me ; il voit, he sees ; il boit, he drinks ; ro:, 

king ; droit, rig-fa ; il croit, he believes. 
(ou) bout, end; il coud, he sews ; il moud, he grinds ; coupe, cup; 

loup, wolf; coup, Z>ta ; croute, crust. 
(ua) nuage, cloud; nuance, shade; il salua, Tie saluted; il remua, 

7ie moved ; il contribua, 7ie contributed. 
(ue) nue, cZowd ; lue, f. read ; recue, f. received ; il salue, he sa~ 

lutes ; il remue, he moves. 
(ui) lui, him ; luisant, shining ; cuire, to bake ; cuit, baked ; nuire, 

to injure ; produire, to produce. 
(y) thyrse, thyrsus ; type, type ; style, style ; yeux, e?/es ; Yvetot, 

Yvetot ; payer, to pay ; envoyer, to send, ; abbaye, abbey ; 

essayer, to try ; pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; payspn, 

peasant. 



Exercise 2. — The N^sal Sounds. 

30. Innocent, innocent ; inutile, iseless*; diner, dinner ; immortelj 
immortal ; une, one ; lune, moon ; dunes, downs. 



LESSON III. 29 

Mm 

31. am ambre, amber; chambre, chamber; Adam, Adam; ramper, to 

creep ; ample, ample ; lampe, lamp. 

an tante, aunt; manteau, cloak; plan, plan; plancher, floor; 
rang", rank; sang, blood; enfant, child. 

em remplir, to fill ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, 
assembly ; trembler, to tremble; membre, limb. 

en sentir, to feel ; tente, tent ; pente, declivity ; je rends, / ren- 
der ; je prends, I take; je sens, I feel. 

32. en amen, amen; specimen, specimen; examen, examination, 

33. en ils donnent, they give; ils parlent, they speak; ils eerivent, 

tliey write ; ils cherchent, they seek. 

34. im simple, simple; timbre, stamp; daim, deer; faim, hunger ; 

imposteur, impostor; important, important. 
in fin, fine; pain, bread; demain, to-morrow ; crin, horse-hair; vin, 
wine; bain, bath; teindre, to die; peindre, to paint. 

35. om sombre, dark; nom, name; ombre, shadow; tombe, tomb, 

nombre, number ; comble, height. 
on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason ; 
maison, house ; fondre, to melt ; non, no. 

36. urn iiumble, humble ; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. 
un lundi, Monday; brun, brown; alun, alum; emprunter, to 

borrow ; importun, importunate ; un, one. 

Exercise 3. — The Consonants. 

(b) baume, balsam ; blessure, wound; brun, brown; absolution, 
absolution ; abstrait, abstract ; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. 

(c) cacher, to conceal ; coin, corner ; decuple, decuple ; cire, 
wax; cinq, five; chercher, to seek; je cache, J conceal; pa- 
triarche, patriarch ; patriarchat, patriarchate; chambre, cham- 
ber; arche, arch; changer, to change; orchestre, orchestra; 
charbon, coal ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; clerc, clerk ; banc, bench ; 
Haiic, flank ; second, second; fecond, fruitful ; f&c on, fashion ; 
recu, received. 

(d) daim, deer ; don, gift ; admirer, to admire ; bord, border; nord, 
north; sud, south; Obed, Obed ; Talmud, Talmud; grand 
age, advanced age ; rend-il, does he render ? prend-il, does he take ? 

(f) fcin, hay; faim, hunger; froid, cold; bref, short; soif, thirst; 
suif, tallow; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master- 
piece ; ceuf, egg ; ocufs, eggs ; oeuf frais,/res/i egg ; boeuf, ox, 
beef; boeufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, nine houses ; neuf chevaux, 
nine horses; neuf amis, nine friends, 

(g) gager, to bet ; gosier, throat ; gibier, game ; guide, guide ; 



80 LESSON III 

ligue, league; il ligua, he leagued; nous liguons, we league, 
aiguil e, needle ; aiguillon, goad ; cigue, hemlock ; digne, 
worthy; regne, reign; Espagne, Spain; Pologne, Poland ; 
brugnon, nectarine ; soignant, taking care; joignant, joining ; 
stagnant, stagnant ; rang honorable, honorable rank. 

(h) hate, haste ; honte, shame ; haut, high ; herbe, herbage ; al- 

manach, almanac. 
( j) jujube, jujube ; jeune, young ; juger, to judge ; jurer, to swear 
jonc, rush; joindre, to join; dejeuner, to breakfast; Juif, Jew, 
jeu, play. 

(1) lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; illicite, unlawful, 
paille, straw ; soleil, sun ; pareil, similar ; bail, lease ; railler, 
to rail ; souiller, to soil; eaille, quail; canaille, rabble; ville, 
town ; village, village; mille, mile, thousand; peril, peril; 
pointilleux, punctilious; baril, barrel; fusil, gun; gentil- 
homme, nobleman; gentilshommes, noblemen ; bouteille, bottle. 

Exercise 4. — The Consonants Continued. 

(mn) mon, my; marge, margin ; nom, name ; champ, field ; moint 
monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn; faim, hunger ; 
son argent, his money ; bon appetit, good appetite ; lien etroit, 
close connection. 

(p) partir, to go away ; coup, blow ; temps, weather ; drap, cloth ; 
sept, seven; bapteme, baptism; cap, cape; Alep, Aleppo. 

(q) querir, to fetch ; quitter, to leave ; musique, music ; logique, 
logic ; quarante, forty ; quoi, what ; aquatique, aquatic ; Quin- 
tilien, Quintilian; cinq, five; cinq livres,^ue books. 

(r) ranger, to arrange; errer, to err ; arriver, to arrive; verser, 
to pour; je courrai, I will run; je courais, Iicas running; 
jouir, to enjoy ; car, for ; plaisir, pleasure ; amer, bitter ; parler 
to speak; changer, to change; fer, iron; hiver, winter. 

(s) silence, silence ; soin, care; sans, without; base, base; rose, 
rose ; chose, thing ; observer, to observe ; rasoir, razor ; para 
sol, parasol ; science, science ; schisme, schism ; scie, saw 
scheme, scheme; gras, fat; pas, step; lambris, loainscot; 
Barras, Barras ; Romulus, Samos; vous avez, you have; 
nous aimons, we love. 

(t) tiers, third; tiare, tiara; tort, wrong; portion,* portion; 



* T, in the English words corresponding to the French words, in which 
this letter is pronounced like c in cedar, has generally the sound of sh; 
as in motion, partial, &c. 



LESSONIV. 31 

sanction, sanction; essentiel, essential; partiality, partiality ; 
section, section; question, question; bastion, bastion; obser- 
vation, observation ; minutie, minutia; democratic, democracy; 
amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation; mot, word; lot, lot; 
sept, seven; sept livres, seven books; et, and; vingt livies, 
twenty books. 

v voir, to see; va,go; leve, raise; lever, to raise; visage, face 
vive, f. lively. 

w Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. 

x xyl on, cotton plant; Xenophon; exiler, to exile; excuser, to 
excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maxime, 
maxim ; soixantieme, sixtieth ; six, six ; sixieme, sixth ; six 
livres, six books ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; 
dix, ten ; Phenix ; Ajax ; deux hommes, tiuo men ; dix amis, 
ten friends. 

z zele, zeal; zone, zone; zoologie, zoology; vous lisez, you 
read; nez, nose ; Metz ; allez-y, go there ; venez ici, come 
here. 



LESSON IV. LEgON IV. 

1. In French the article [§ 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a dis- 
rinct "orm for each gender. Ex. 

Le fils, the son ; La fille, the daughter, the girl ; 

Le frcre, the brother; La soeur, the sister. 

2. Before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 11,] 
the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex. 

L'a'ieul, the grandfather ; L'aieule, the grandmoilier ; 

L'hote, the landlord ; L'hotesse, the landlady. 

3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. [) 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an 
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. 

Masc. L'homme, the man; Le lion, the lion; 

Le livre, tlie book; Le papier, the paper; 



L'arbre, the tree ; Le bois, the wood ; 

La femme, the woman; La lionne, the Iwtu 

La table, the table; La feuille, the Uaf 

La plume, the pen ; La porte, the dow. 



LESSON IV, 



4. Avoir, to have, in the Present of the Indicative. 



Affirmatively. 



J'ai, 

Tu as, ft 33.(1.) (2.)] 

II a, 

Elle a, 
Nous avons 
Vous avez, ; 
lis ont, m. 
Elles ont, f. 



/ have ; 
Thou hast ; 
He has ; 
She has ; 
We have ; 
You have ; 
They have ; 
They have ; 



Intcrro, 

Ai-je? 
As-tu 7 
A-t-iH 
A-t-elle? 
Avons nous 1 
Avez vous 1 
Ont ils ^ m. 
Ont elles ^ f. 



Have Z? 
Hast thou 7 
Has he? 
Has she ? 
Have wc ? 
Have you ? 
Have they ? 
Have they ? 



5. The e of the pronoun je is elided when that pronoun comes 
before a vowel or an h mute. [$ 146.] 

6. In interrogative sentences, when the third person singular of a 
~erb ends with a vowel, and is immediately followed by a pronoun, a 
t, called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. 



A-t-iH 



Has he? 



A-t-elle'? 



Has site ? 



Kesume of Examples. 



Le psre a la viande, vous avez le 

cafe, et j'ai l'eau. 
L'homme a le pain, l'enfant a le sel, 

et nous avons le poivre. 



The father has the meat, you have t/te 
coffee, and I have the water. 

The man has the bread, the child has 
the salt, and we have the pepper. 



Avoine, f. oats ; 
Ble, m. wheat ; 
Boucher, m. butcher; 
Boulanger, m. baker ; 
Cheval, m. horse ; 
Et, and; 
Farine, f. flour; 
Frere, m. brother ; 
Livre, m. book ; 



Exercise 5. 

Madame, Madam ; 
Mademoiselle, Miss ; 
Meunier, m. miller ; 
Monsieur, Mr. Sir; 
Non, no ; 
Oui, yes ; 
Pain, m. bread ; 
Plume, f. pen ; 



Qui, who; 
Sel, m. salt ; 
Seulement, only ; 
Table, f. table ; 
The, m. tea ; 
Viande, f. meat; 
Vin, m. wine ; 
Vinaigre, m. vinegar. 



1. Qui a le pain? 2. Le boulanger a le pain. 3. A-t-il la farine ? 4. 
Oui, Monsieur, il a la farine. 5. Avons nous la viande ? 6. Oui, Monsieur, 
vous avez la viande et le pain. 7. Le meunier a la farine. 8. Le 
boulanger a la farine et le ble. 9. Avons nous le livre et la 
plume ? 10. Oui, Mademoiselle, vous avez le livre et la plume. 
11. Le boucher a la viande. 12. Le meunier a la viande et j'ai 
le cafe. 13. Avez vons l'eau et le sel ? 14. Oui, Monoieur, nous 
avons l'eau, le sel et 1'avoine. 15. Avons nous le the ? 16. Non, 
Monsieur, la fille a le the, le vinaigre et le sel. 17. Ai-je levin? 

18, Non, Madame, vous avez seulement le vinaigre et la viande. 

19. Avez vous la table? 20. Oui, Madame, j'a* la table. 



lesson r. 33 



Exercise 6. 

1. Have you the wheat ? 2. Yes, Sir, I have the wheat 3. Who 
nas the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat arid the salt. 5. Has 
he the oats ? 6. No, Madam, the horse has the oats. 7. Have we 
the wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. Who has the 
salt? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar 
the tea and the coffee ? 12. No, Sir, the brother has the vinegar 
13 Who has the horse ? 14. The baker has the horse. 15. Have 
we the book and the pen? 16. No, Miss, the girl has the pen, and 
the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, Sir ? 18. No, Sir, 
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table ? 20. We have the 
table, the pen, and the book. 



LESSON V. LEgON V. 

1. The article Ze, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- 
tracted into du, when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- 
lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 11. J 13, 
(8.) (9.) 

Du frere, of the brother ; Du chateau, of the castle ; 

Du heros, of the liero ; Du chemin, of the way. 

2. "Before feminine words, and before masculine words commencing 
with a vowel, or an h mute, the article is not blended with the pre- 
position. 

De la dame, f. of the lady ; De l'amie, f. of the female friend ; 

De l'argent, m. of the money ; De l'honneur, m. of the honor. 

3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the 
object possessed. [§ 76, (10.)] 

La maison du medecin, T7ie physician's house ; 

L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden ; 

La lettre de la .soeur, The sister's letter. 

4. The name of the material of which an object is composed follows 
always the name of the object; the tw r o words being connected by 
the preposition de. (cV before a vowel or an h mute.) [$ 76. (11.)] 

L'habit de drap, The cloth coat ; 

La robe de soie, The silk dress : 

La montre d'or, TU gcli vatch. 

2* 



34 LESSON V. 



Resume of Examples. 



Le tailleur a l'habit de drap du 

medecin. 
Vous avez la .ettre de la soeur du 

boulanger. 
A-t-il le livre de la dame 7 



The tailor has the physician's cloik 

coat. 
You have the baker's sister's letter, 

{the letter of the sister of the baker,) 
Has he the lady's book ? 



Exercise 7. 

Argent, m. silver, money ; Couteau, m. knife; Porte-crayon, m. pencil* 
Bas, m. stocking ; Cuir, m. leather; case; 

Bois, m. wood ; Dame, f. lady ; Robe, f. dress ; 

Chapeau, m. hat; Drap, m. cloth; Satin, m. satin; 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Foin, m. hay ; Soeur, f. sister ; 

ter ; Habit, m. coat ; Soie, f. silk ; 

Cordonnier, m. shoenia- Laine, f. wool } woollen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

ker ; Mais, but ; Table, f. table ; 

Coton, m. cotton; Or, m. gold; Tailleur, m. tailor. 

1. Avez vous la montre d'or? 2. Oui, Madame, j'ai la montre d'or 
et le chapeau de soie. 3. Monsieur, avez vous le livre du tailleur ? 
4. Non, Monsieur, j'ai le livre du medecin. 5. Ont ils le pain du 
boulanger? 6. Ils ont le pain du boulanger et la farine du meunier. 
7. Avez vous le porte-crayon d'argent? 8. Oui, Monsieur, nous avons 
le porte-crayon d'argent. 9. Avons nous l'avoine du cheval? 10. 
Vous avez l'avoine et le foin du cheval. 11. Qui a l'habit de drap 
du charpentier? 12. Le cordonnier a le chapeau de soie du tailleur. 
13. Le tailleur a le Soulier de cuir du cordonnier. 14. Avez vous la 
table de bois? 15. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai la table de bois du charpentier. 
16. Ont ils le couteau d'argent? 17. Ils ont le couteau d'argent. 
18. Le frere du medecin a la montre d'argent. 19. La soeur du 
cordonnier a la robe de soie. 20. A-t-elle le Soulier de cuir ? 21. Non, 
Madame, elle a le Soulier de satin. 22. Avons nous lebas de laine ? 
23. Non, Monsieur, vous avez le bas de soie du tailleur. 24. Qui 
a le bas de coton? 25. Le medecin a le bas de coton. 26. La dame 
a le Soulier de satin de la soeur du boulanger. 

Exercise 8. 

1. Have you the tailor's book? 2. No, Sir, I have the physician's 
Match. 3. Who has the gold watch 1 4. The lady has the gold watch 
and tne siiver penci,!-case. 5. Have you the tailors shoe? 6. I have 
the tailor's clotli shoe. 7. Have we the wooden table? 8. Yoa 
you have the wooden table. 9. Have they the silver knife ? 10. They 
have the silver knife. 11. The lady has the silver knife and the 
gold pencil-case. 12. Has she the satin dress? 13. The physician's 
eister has the satin dress. 14. Who has the wood? 15. The car- 






LESSON VI, 35 

penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stock- 
ing? 17. No, Sir, but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the 
bakers bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's 
flour, 20. Have we the horse's hay? 21. You have the horse's 
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat ? 23. Yes, Sir, you have the 
tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the 
cloth shoe of the physician's sister? 25. No, Madam, I hav3 the lady's 
silk dress. 



LESSON VI. LEgON VI. 

1. The article, preceded by or contracted with the preposition de, 

according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before 

words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally be 

known in English when some or any is or may be prefixed to them. 

[$ 13, (10.) § 78, (1.)] 

Du pain, Bread, or some bread; 

De la viande, Meat, or some meat; 

De 1'argent, Money, or some money. 

2. The French numeral adjective, un, m. une, /., answers to the 
English indefinite article, a or an. [$ 13, (4.) (11).] 

Un homine, A man ; 

Une femme, A woman. 

3. The e of the preposition de is elided before un and une. [§ 146.] 

D'un livre, m. Of or from a book; 

Dvme maison, f. Of or from a nouse. 

4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is 
a noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after 
the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses, 
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender, 
number and person. [$ 76, (4.) (5.)] 

Le medecin a-t-il de largent 7 Has the physician money ? 

Le boucher a-t-il de la viande ? Has the butcher meat ? 

Le libraire a-t-il du papier 1 Has the bookseller paper ? 

La damo a-t-elle de la soie 1 Has the lady silk ? 

R&sum£ of Examples. 



Avez vous du pain 1 

Vous avcz du pain, du beurre, et 

du fromage. 
*otre fr^re a-t-il une livre de 

beurre ? 



Have you bread ? 

You have bread } butter, and cheese. 

Has your brother a pound of butter t 



36 LESSON VI. 

Avez vous le livre d'un libraire 1 I Have you a bookseller's book? 
Non, j'ai le livre d'une dame. | No, I have a lady's book. 

La soeur du niedecin a-t-elle du I Has the physician's sister paper U 
papier et de l'encre ^ | ink ? 

5. It will be seen by some of the above examples ; that the ar 
tide must be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense 

Exercise 9. 

Acajou, m. mahogany ; Encre, f. ink; Livre, f. pound ; 

Acier, m. steel ; Epicier, m. grocer ; Morceau, m. piece ; 

Aujourd'hui, to-day; Fils, m. son ; Papier, m. paper ; 

Beurre, m. butter; Fourchette, f. fork ; Plume, f. pen; 

Biere, f. beer ; Fromage, m. cheese ; Sucre, m. sugar • 

Bceuf, m. beef; Gant, m. glove ; Yin, m. vnne ; 

Cafe, m. coffee ; Libraire, m. bookseller ; Votre, your ; 

Cuiller, f. spoon; Livre, m. book ; The, m. tea. 
De, m. thimble; 

I. Avez vous de la viande? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une livre de 
viande. 3. Votre fils a-t-il un morceau de pain ? 4. Oui, Madame, 
il a un morceau de pain. 5. Le libraire a-t-il un livre ? 6. II a de 
l'encre et du papier. 7. Votre soeur a-t-elle une montre d'or? 8. 
Elle a une montre d'or et un de d'argent. 9. Le boulanger a-t-il du 
vin ou de la biere? 10. Le boulanger a du the et du cafe. 11. 
Votre frere a-t-il du fromage? 12. II a du fromage et du beurre. 
13. La dame a-t-elle une cuiller d'argent? 14. La dame a une 
cuiller et une fourchette d'argent. 15. Le boucher a-t-il de la 
viande aujourd'hui? 16. Oui, Monsieur, il a un morceau de boeuf. 
17. Le charpentier a-t-il une table? 18. Oui, Monsieur, il a une 
table d'acajou. 19. Avez vous le livre du medecin? 20. Non, 
Madame, mais j'ai le livre de votre soeur. 21. Qui a du cafe et du 
sucre ? 22. L'epicier a du cafe et du sucre. 23. La soeur du 
libraire a-t-elle un gant? 24. Non, Monsieur, mais elle a un livre, 
25. A-t-elle une plume d'acier ? 26. Non, Monsieur, elle a une plume 
d'or. 27. Vous avez le porte-crayon du medecin. 

Exercise 10. 
1. Have you any tea? 2. Yes, Madam, I have a pound of tea 
3. YYho has bread ? 4. The baker has bread, butter, and cheese 
5. Has the tailor cloth? 6. The tailor lias a piece of cloth. 7 
Has the physician gold? 8. Yes, Sir, the physician has gold and 
silver. 9. Has the lady a silver watch? 10. Yes, Miss, the lady 
has a shVer watch and a gold pen. 11. Has your sister silk? 12. 
Yes, Sir, she has silk and cotton. 13. Have you a knife ? 14. Yes, 
Sir, I have a steel knife and a silver fork. 15. Have you meal 
to-day, Sir ? 16. Yes, Sir, I have a piece of bee£ 17. Has your 



LESSON VII. 3Y 

carpenter a mahogany table? 18. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany 
table. 19. Has your sister a glove? 20. No, Sir, your sister has a 
silk glove. 21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil case ? 22. 
Yes, Sir, he has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Who has 
your sister's watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the 
silk hat, 25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) 



lesson vn. LEgON vn. 

1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and 
fas after it. 

Je n'ai pas le cheval. J have not the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas la niaison. You have not the house. 

2. When the verb is in a compound tense [$ 45, (8.)] the first 
negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between 
the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. I have not had the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 

3. Ii will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, 
when the verb begins with a vowel. [§ 146.] 

4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- 
sonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those 
words take the place of pas. [j 41, (6.)] 

Je n'ai ni le livre ni le papier. J have neither the book nor the paper. 

Avez vous quelque chose 1 Hoax you any thins: ? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing. 

Personne n'a le livre. No one has the book. 

Vous n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 

5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1), and being 

the object of a verb, conjugated negatively, should not be preceded 

by the article, but by the preposition de only. [5 78, (7.)] 

Nous n'avons pas d'argeut. We have no money, 

Vous n'avez pas de viande. You have no meat. 

6. Quelqu'un, some one, any one ; [$ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, s min- 
:hing, any thing ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- 
tive sentence, or in a sentence which is negative and interrogative at 
the same time. 

Avons nous quelqu'un 7 Have we any or, el 

Avez vous quelque chose 7 Have you nmj thin* ? 

N 'avons nous pas quelque choso ? Have we not something ? 



88 



LESSON VII, 



7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nobody, not an$ 
tody ; and ne — rien, nothing, not any tiling. 



Je n'ai personne. 
Vous n'avez rien. 



/ have no one, not any one. 

You have nothing, or not any thing. 



8. Avoir, to have, in the Present of the Indicative. 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'as pas, 
II n'a pas, 
Elle n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas, 
Vous n'avez pas, 
Us n'ont pas, 
Elles n'ont pas, 



Negatively. 

I have not ; 
Thou hast not ; 
He has not ; 
She has not ; 
We have not ; 
You have not ; 



They m. have not ; N'ont ils pas ? 
They f. have not ; N'ont elles pas 1 



Negatively and Interrogatively. 
N'ai je pas 7 Have I not ? 

N'as tu pas 1 Hast thou not ? 

N'a-t-il pas % Has he not ? 

N'a-t-elle pas ? Has she not ? 
N'avons nous pas 7 Have we not ? 
N'avez vous pas 1 Have you not ? 

Have they m. not ? 

Have they f. not ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Le tailleur a-t-il le bouton 1 
Le tailleur n'a pas le bouton. 
II n'a pas eu le drap. 
II n'a eu ni le drap ni le cuir. 

Ai-je de la viande % 

Vous n'avez pas de viande, (R. 5.) 

Avons nous quelque chose 1 

Nous n'avons rien. 

Nous n'avons jamais de cafe, (R. 5.) 



Has the tailor the button ? 

The tailor has not the button. 

He has not had the doth. 

He has had neither the cloth nor Hit 

leather. 
Have I meat ? 
You have no meat. 
Have we any thing ? 
We have nothing, or not any thing. 
We never have coffee. 



Exercise 11. 



Personne. m. nobody; 

Quelque chose, m. some* 
France, f. France ; thing, any thing ; 

Histoire, f. history ; Quelqu'un, m. same one, 

Libraire, m. bookseller; any one; 
Marchand, m. merchant; Soie, f. silk; 
Mon, m. my; Velours, m. velvet; 

Ni, conj. neither, nor ; Voisin, m. neighbor. 



Ami, m. friend ; Drap, m. cloth; 

Angleterre, f. England ; Du tout. adv. at all ; 

Aussi, also; 

Autre, other ; 

Chapelier, m. hatter 

Chien, m. dog; 

Coton, m. cotton; 

Cousin, m. cousin; 

Deux, two; 

1. Le chapelier a-t-il de la soie? 2. Le chapelier n'a pas de soie 
mais il a du velours. 3. A-t-il du velours de coton ? 4. Non, Mon 
sieur, il n'a pas de velours de coton, il a du velours de soie. 5. Avez 
vous de la viande ? 6. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai de la viande. 7. Le mi 
decin n'a pas d'argent. 8. Qui a de l'argent ? 9. Le marchand n'a 
pas d'argent, mais il a du drap, du velours ct de la soie. 10. Avez 
vous quelque chose? 11. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai rien du tout. 12. Le 
tailleur a-t-il deux boutons d'argent? 13. Non, Monsieur, il a deux 
boutons de soie. 14. Qui a votre chien? 15. Le voisin a le chien de 
mon cousin. 16. N'a-t-il pas voire cheval aussi? 17. Non, Monsieur 



LESSON VIII. 39 

il a le cneval de votre ami, 18. Avez vous l'histoire de France? 
19. Non, Madame, je n'ai ni l'histoire de France ni l'histoire d'Angle- 
terre. 20. N'avez vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21. Non, Mademoi- 
selle, je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. 22. Qui a du papier? 23. Le libraire 
n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ] 25. Personne n'a 
de livre. 

Exercise 12. 

I. Ha9 the baker velvet? 2. No, Sir, the baker has no velvet. 
3. Who has silk velvet? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. 
5, Have you two silver buttons? 6. No, Sir, I have a cloth coat, a 
silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7. Has your neighbor a wooden table ? 
8. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany table. 9. Has your cousin a history 
of England? 10. No, Sir, he has a history of France. 11. I have 
neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor 
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book? 14. Your cousin has a book, 
a velvet coat, and a silk hat. 15. Have you the physician's book? 

1 6. Yes, Madam, I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 

17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he 
has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog? 20. Nobody has 
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has anyone my book? 22. No one has 
your book. 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, Sir, 
he has nothing 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother 
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat ? 28. He has not 
the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. 



LESSON VHL LEgON vm. 

1. The veil) avoir is used idiomatically in French, with the words 
quelque chose, chaud, froid, faim, honte, peur, raison, tort, soif, som- 
tneil. 

J'ai quelque chose. Something is the matter with me. 

II a chaud. He is warm. 

Elle a faim. She is hungry. 

Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. 

Vous avez peur. You are afraid. 

lis ont tort. TJiey are wrong. 

Avez vous raison 1 Are you right ? 

J'ai sommeil. I am sleepy, 

2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a particular sense, 
Is, in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different 
forms, [} 77, (1.) (2.)] 



40 



LESSON VIII. 



Le pain est necessaire. Bret d is necessary. 

II a le pain. He has the bread. 

3. A noun, preceded by the article le, retains that article afW ni, 
nor, neither ; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, 1,] takes 
after ni, neither article nor preposition. 



Je n'ai ni l'arbre ni le jardin. 
ous n'avons ni arbre ni jardin. 



J have neither the tree n'rr the garment 
We have neither tree nor garden. 



4. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjec- 
tive, tekes merely the preposition de. [§ 78, (3.)] 

5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noun , 

Beau, handsome; Cher, dear ; Jeune, young ; Meilleur, better; 

Bon, good ; Grand, great, large ; Joli, pretty ; Petit, small ; 

Brave, worthy; Gros, large; Mauvais, bad; Vieux, old; 

. Vilain, ugly. 

Kesume of Examples. 



Avez vous quelque chose 1 
Jen'airien, {literally, I have nothing.) 
Votre frere a-t-il chaud 1 
II n'a ni froid ni chaud. 
Votre soeur a-t-elle faim ou soif 1 
Elle n'a pas faim, mais honte. 
Votre ami a-t-il sommeil 1 
Mon ami n'a ni sommeil ni peur. 
Avez vous raison ou tort 1 
Avez vous du lait ou du vin ? 
Je n'ai ni lait ni vin, [R. 3.] 
Avez vous le lait ou le vin 1 
Je n'ai ni le lait ni le vin. [R. 3.] 
Avez vous de beau drap et de bon 
cafe? 



Is any thing the matter with you ? 
Nothing is the matter with me. 
Is your brother warm ? 
He is neither warm nor cold. 
Is your sister hungry or thirsty ? 
She is not hungry, but ashamed. 
Is your friend sleepy ? 
My friend is neither sleepy nor afraid, 
Are you right or wrong ? 
Have you milk or v:ine ? 
I have neither milk nor wine. 
Have you the milk or the vnnc ? 
I have neither the milk nor the wine? 
Have you handsome cloth and good 
coffee ? 



Exercise 13. 

Au contraire, on the con- Fusil, m. gun; Petit, small, little; 

trary ; Froid, m. cold; Peur, f. fear, afraid; 

Bouton, button; Gros, large ; Quel, what, which ; 

Capitaine, captain; Honte, f. shame, asha?ncd; Raison, f. reason, right; 

Cousin, m. cousin; Mais, but; Rien, nothing ; 

Chaud, m. heat, warm; Marteau, m. hammer ; Tort. m. wrong ; 

Faim, f. hunger, hungry; Menuisier, m. joiner ; Sel, m. salt ; 

Ferblanticr, m. tinman; Poivre, m. pepper ; Sommeil, m. sleep, sleep} 

1. Qui a sommeil? 2. Mon frere a faim, mais il n'a pas somnieU. 
3. Avez vous raison ou tort? 4. J'ai raison, je n'ai pas tort, 5. Avez 
vous le bon fusil de mon frere? 6. Je n'ai pas le fusil. 7. Avez vous 
froid anjourd'hui? 8. Je n'ai pas f v oici, au contraire, j'ai chaud. 
9. Avez vous de bon pain? i0. Je n'ai pas de pain. 11. N'avez 
vous pas faim? 12. Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 13. Avez vous honts? 



LESSON IX. 41 

14. Je n'ai ni honte ni peur. 15. Avons nous du poivre ou du sel? 
16. Vous n'avez ni poru*e ni sel. 17. Quel livre avez vous? 18. J'ai 
le livre de mon cousin. 19. Avez vous le marteau de fer ou le mar- 
teau d'argent ? 20. Je n'ai ni le marteau de fer ni le marteau d'argent, 
j'ai le marteau de bois du ferblantier. 21. Avez vous quelque chose? 
22. Je n'ai rien. 23. Avez vous le gros livre du libraire ? 24. Je n'ai 
ni le gros livre du libraire, ni le petit livre du menuisier, j'ai le boa 
livre du capitaine. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Are you sleepy, Sir? 2. No, Sir, I am not sleepy, but I am 
hungry. 3. Have you pepper or salt? 4. I have neither pepper nor 
salt : I have cheese. 5. Is your brother thirsty or hungry ? 6. My 
brother is neither thirsty nor hungry. 7. Is your sister right or 
wrong? 8. She is not wrong, she is right. 9. Is the good joiner 
afraid? 10 He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Have you milk or 
cheese? 12. I have neither milk nor cheese, I have butter. 13. Have 
you the fine cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth 
nor the good tea. 15. Is anything the matter with you, my good 
friend? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good Sir. 17. Have 
you no bread? 18. Yes, Madam, I have good bread, good butter, and 
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy? 20. The carpenter is not 
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. 21. Have you the tinman's wooden 
hammer? 22. I have not the wooden hammer. 23. Which hammer 
nave you? 24. I have the steel hammer. 25. Have you a good cloth 
coat? 26. No, Sir, but I have a silk dress. 27. Has the tailor the 
good gold button? 28. Yes, Sir, he has the good gold button. 
29. Who has my brother's gold watch ? 30. Some one has the gold 
watch. 



LESSON IX. LEgON IX. 

1. The pronouns le, him, it; la, her, it, are, in French, placed before 
the verb.* These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns which 
they represent. 

Voyez vous le couteau? m. Do you see the knife? 

Je le vois. I see it. 

Voyons nous la fourchette? f. Do m see the fork? 

Nous la voyons. We sec it. 

* Except in the second person singular, and in the first and second 
persons plural of the imperative used affirmatively. 



42 



LESSON IX. 



2. The vowel of the pronouns le and la, is elided before a verli 
commencing with a vowel or an li mute. [§ 146.] 



Avez vous le baton ? m. 
Je l'ai. 

Avons nous la canne ^ f. 
Nous l'avons. 



Have you the stick ? 
I have it. 

Have we the cane ? 
We have it. 



3. The possessive adjectives mon, m. ma, f. my; ton, m. ta, f. thy r 
son, m. sa, f. Ms, hei, agree in gender with the object possessed, that 
is with the noun following them. [§ 21, (1.) (2.)] 

My desk ; 

Have you my letter ? 



Mon pupitre, m. 

Avez vous ma lettre *? f. 



II a son fusil, m. 
II a sa cravate, f. 



He has his gun. 
He has his cravat. 



4. Before a feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a 

vowel or an h mute," the masculine form, mon, ton, son is used 

[5 21,(3.)] 

J'ai mon epee, f. / have my sword. 

C'est son habitude, f. It is his or her habit. 

Le general a son armee, f. The general has his army. 

5. The adjectives notre, our ; votre, your ; leur, their, are used 

without variation before a noun of either gender, in the singular. 

[& 21, (1.)] 

Notre argent, m. Our silver. 

Votre canne, f. Your cane. 

Leur terre, f. Their land. 

6. The possessive pronouns le mien, m. la mienne, f. mine; le 
tien, m. la tienne, f. thine ; le sien, m. la sienne, f. his or hers, can 
never be prefixed to nouns. The article preceding those pronouns, 
and forming an indispensable part of them, takes the gender of the 
object possessed ; mien, tien, sien, vary for the feminine — n6tre and 
votre used as pronouns have the circumflex accent. 



J'ai votre livre et le mien. 
Elle a sa robe et la mienne. 
Vous avez votre plume et la netre. 



J have your book and mine . 
She has her dress and mine. 
Vou have your pen and ours. 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre ami a-t-il le mouton 1 

II l'a, elle l'a. 

II ne l'a pas. 

N'avez vous pas l'encrier d'argent ? 

Nous ne l'avons pas. 

Avez vous votre fusil ou le mien 1 

Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. 

Son epouso a-t-elle sa robo ou la 

votre ? 
Elle n'a ni la sienne ni la votre. 



Has your friend the sheep or mutt mi 

He has it, she has it. 

He has it not. 

Have you not the silver inkstand? 

We have it not. 

Have you your gun or mine? 

I have neither yours nor mine. 

Has his wife her dress or yours ? 

She has neUher hers nor youis. 



LESSONIX. 43 

Ne Tavez vous pas 1 Have you it not? 

Votre frere ne l'a-t-il pas 1 Has not your brother it ? 

Exercise 15. 

Assiette, f. plate ; Crayon, m. pencil ; Parent, m. relation ; 

Biscuit, m. biscuit ; Cuisinier, m. cook ; Plat, m. dish ; 

Bceuf m. beef; Fourchette, f. fork ; Poisson, m.fish; 

Boucher, m butcher ; Matelot, m. sailor; Porcelaine, f. china; 

Commode, f. chest of Mouton, m. mutton, Sofa, m. sofa ; 

drawers; sheep; Tout, all; 

Couteau, m. knife; Miroir,m. looking-glass; Veau, m. veal, calf. 

1. Avez vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Qui, Monsieur, je Fai. 
3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf ? 4. Non, Monsieur, il ne l'a pas. 5. 
Quel mouton avez vous ? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le bon veau du 
boucher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, Monsieur, 
il ne l'a pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson ? 10. Qui a tout le biscuit du 
boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12. 
A-t-il son couteau et sa fourchette ? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa 
fourchette, il a son assiette [R. 4]. 14. Quel plat a-t-il? 15. II a 
lejoli plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez vous le mien oulesien? 17. 
Je n'ai ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez vous peur, 
Monsieur? 19. Non, Madame, je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. 
Quelqu'un a-t-il ma montre d'or ? 21. Non, Monsieur, personne ne 
l'a. 22. Qu'avez vous, Monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez vous 
le sofa d'acajou de mon menuisier? 25. Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai 
pas. 26. J'ai son joli miroir et son bon crayon. 

Exercise 16. 

1. Have you the silver pencil case? 2. No, Sir, I have it not. 3. 
Have you my brother's plate ? 4. Yes, Madam, I have it. 5. Ha3 
the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good 
beef the good mutton, and the good veal. 7. Have you my knife 
and my fork ?* 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 9. 
Who has the good sailor's biscuit ? 10. The baker has it, and I have 
mine. 11. Have you mine also? 12. I have neither yours nor his, 
13. Are you hungry? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty and sleepy. 
15. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I 
am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong? 18. My relation is 
right, Sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife? 20. He 
has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has your china 
ylate. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case? 22. No one has it, 

The possessive adjective must in French bo repeated before every 
i. ft 21, (4.)] 



■ran. ft 21, (4.)] 



44 LESSON X. 

but your b/Ocher has your cloth coat. 23. Have you mine or his! 
24. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany c'nest of draw* 
ers 1 26. He has it not, he has the mahogany sofa. 27. Has the 
tinman my plate 1 28. He has not your plate, he has mine. 29. 
Which sofa have you? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 31. I have 
neither his nor yours, I have mine. 



LESSON X. LEgON X. 

1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette, f. this or that are al- 
ways placed before nouns ; they agree in gender with these nouns. 
H 20, (1.)] 

Avez vous ce parapluie 1 m. Have you this or that umbrella ? 

Vous n'avez pas cette bouteille, f. You have not this or that dottle. 

2. Before a word masculine singular, commencing with a vowel, or 

an h mute, cet takes the place of ce. [§ 20, (1.)] 

N'avez vous pas cet argent 1 Have you not this or that money ? 

Vaus avez eu cet honneur. You have had this or that honor. 

3. When it is deemed necessary to express in French, the differ- 
ence existing in English between the words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and la may be placed after the nouns. [§ 20, (2.)] 

Je n'ai pas ce parasol-ci j'ai ce pa- I have not this parasol, I have thai 
rasol-la, parasol. 

4. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, m. celle, f. this or that, are 
used to represent nouns, but are never joined with them like adjec- 
tives. [} 36, 5 37, (1.)] 

J'ai mon parapluie et celui de votre J have my umbrella and your brotliefs, 

frere, i. e., thai of your brother. 

Vous avez ma robe et celle de ma You have my dress and my sister's, i. e. } 

soeur, that of my sister. 

5. The pronouns celui, celle, with the addition of the words et and 
la, are used in the sense of this one, that one, the latter, the former. 
[§ 37, (4.)] They agree in gender with the word which they repre- 
sent. 

Vous avez celui-ci mais vous n'avez You have this one (the latter), but you 
pas celui-la. have not that one {the former). 

6. The pronouns ceci and cela, are used absolutely, that is, without 
a noun, in pointing out objects. 

Nous n'avons pas ceci, nous avons We have not f.Ms, ice have that 

cela. 
Ceci ou cela, Thi or that- 



IE8SON X. 



46 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous le li'Te de cet homine ? 
Je n'ai pas son livre. j'ai le mien. 
Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie 1 
II n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce 

parapluie-la, (R. 3.) 
Avez vous celui de votre frere 1 

Je n'ai pas cehii de mon frere, j'ai 
celui de ma sceur, (R. 4.) 

Avez vous celui-ci ou celui-la. 1 
Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 
Quelle robe avez vous 1 f. 
J *ai celle-ci. 
Avez vous ceci ou cela? (R. 6,) 



Have you that man's book ? 

I have not his book, I have mint. 

Has the cook that umbrella ? 

He has not this umbrella, he has thai 

umbrella. 
Have you your brother's ? that of yout 

brother. 
I have not my brother's, I have my 

sister's; i. e., that of my brother, that 

of my sister. 
Have you this one or that one ? 
I have neither lice latter nor the farmer. 
Which dress have you ? 
I have this (one.) 
Have you this or that ? 



Exercise 17. 

Lettre, f. letter ; 
Malle, f. trunk; 
Parasol, m. parasol ; 
Poulet, m. chicken ; 
Plomb, m. lead; 
Plus, no longer ; 



Encrier, m. inkstand; 
Etranger, m. stranger ', 

foreigner ; 
Lait, m. milk; 
Parapluie. m. umbrella ; 
Volaille, f. poultry. 



Ardoise, f. slate ; 

Balai, m. broom ; 

Bois, m. wood; 

Bouteille, f. bottle ; 

Dame, f. lady ; 

Fromage, m. cheese ; 

Jardinier, m. gardener ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 

1. Votre frere a-t-il son encrier d'argent? 2. II ne l'a plus il a un 
encrier de plomb. 3. Avons nous la lettre de l'etranger 1 4. Oui, 
Monsieur, nous avons celle de Petranger [R. 4.]. 5. Votre soeur n'a 
pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier 
a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a celui 
du jardinier. 8. Avez vous mon bon parapluie de soie? 9. J'ai 
votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez vous ma 
bouteille? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteille, j'ai la malle de votre 
sceur. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere? 13. II n'a pas cette 
saliere-ci, il a celle-la. 14. Avez vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 
15. Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez vous? 17. J'ai 
celui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulanger a-t-il de la volaille? [L. 6 
R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il adu lait [L. 7. R. 5.] 
3C Avez vcus votre fromage ou le mien ? 21. Je n'ai ni le votre ni 
le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- 
sonne n'a faim. 24. Avez vous quelque chose? 25. Non, Monsieur, 
je n'ai rien. 

ExE'tCISE 18. 

1. Has your b-other that lady\ umbrella? 2. My brother has that 
lady's umbrella, 3. Have you this parasol or that one ? 4. I have 



46 LESSONXI. 

neither this (one) nor that (one). 5. Have you the stranger's gold 
watch? 6. No, Sir, I have the baker's. 7. Who has my slate! 
8. I have your slate and your brother's. 9. Has the cook a silver 
salt stand? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand, and a silver dish. 
11. Has the cook this poultry or that? 12. He has neither this nor 
that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this ncr 
that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para- 
sol? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol. 
17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? 18. The gardener has a leather 
trunk. 19. Who has my good cheese ? 20. Nobody has your 
cheese, but some one has your brother's. 21. Have you mine or 
his ? 22. I have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 23. Haa 
the cook this bottle or that broom ? 24. He has this bottle. 25. Have 
you a lead inkstand ? 26. No, Sir, I have a china inkstand. 27. Has 
the stranger poultry? 28. The stranger has no poultry, but he has 
money. 29. Your brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 
30. Is anyone ashamed? 31. No, Sir, nobody is ashamed. 32. Is 
your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is 
wrong. 34. Your sister has neither her satin hat nor her velvet hat 



LESSON XL LEgON XL 

PLURAL OF NOUNS (§ 8.) 

1. The plural in French is generally formed, as in English, by the 

addition of s to the singular. 

Un homme, une femme, A man, a woman ; 

Deux hommes, deux femmes, Two men, two icomen. 

The form le of the article becomes plural by the addition of 5. 

and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. 

Les hommes, les femmes, The men, the icomen. 

2. 1st Exception to Rule 1. Nouns ending in s, x, z remain 

unchanged for the plural. 

Le bas, les bas, • Tlic sticking, the stockings ; 

La voix, les voix, The voice, the voices ; 

Le nez, les ncz, The nose, the iwscs. 

3. 2d Exception. Nouns ending with au, and eu, take x for thf 

plural. 

Le bateau, les bateaux, The boat, the boats ; 

Le lieu, les lieux, The place, tie placet, 



LESSON XI. 



47 



4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending Li ow, take x for 
the plural, bijou, jewel ; caillou, pebble ; chou, cabbage ; genou, knee , 
hibou, owl; joujou, plaything, 

Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choux, The jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages; 
Les hiboux, les genoux, les joujoux, The owls, the knees, the playthings. 

5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change that 

termination into aux for the plural; bail, lease; corail, coral; email 

enamel ; soupirail, air-hole ; sous-bail, under-lease ; travail, labor. 

Les baux, les eoraux, les emaux, The leases, the corals, the enamels; 
Les soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The air-holes, the labors, the under- 
baux, leases. 

6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in aux. 

Le cheval, les chevaux, The horse, the horses ; 

Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. 

Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, oackal; regal, treat, follow the 
general rule. 

7. 6th Exception. Ciel, heaven; ceil, eye; and aieul, ancestor. 
form their plural irregularly. 

Les cieux, les yeux, les aieux. The heavens, the eyes, the ancestors. 

For further rules see $ 8, } 9, and J 10 of the Second Part. 

R£sum£ of Examples. 



Les Anglais ont ils les chevaux 

du general 1 
Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. 
Les enfants ont ils les cailloux 1 
Les yeux de l'enfant. 
Les tableaux de cette eglise. 
Avez vous les oiseaux de ce bois 1 
Avez vous les encriers d'argent de 

ma soeur 1 
J'ai les bijoux d'argent et d'or de 

l'etranger. 
Les rois n'ont ils pas les palais de 

marbre 1 



Have the English the general's horses? 

The generals have not the jewels. 

Have the children the pebbles ? 

The child's eyes. 

The pictures of that church. 

Have you the birds of that wood ? 

Have you my sister 1 s silver inkstands? 

I have the gold and silver jewels of tfa 
foreigner. 

Have not the kings the marble pal- 
aces? 



Exercise 19. 



Barfl, m. barrel ; 
Bas, jqq. stocking ; 



General, m. general; Meunier, m. miller; 

Gilet, m. waistcoat; Morceau, m. piece; 

Chocolat, m. chocolate; Grand, adj. large, great; Oiseau, m. bird; 
Bijou, m. jewel; Jardin, m. garden; Petit, adj. small; 

Joujou, m. plaything; Paire, f. pair; 

Legume, m. vegetable; Poivre, m. pepper; 

Marehand, ra. merchant ; Qu', que, what; 

Marechal, m. blacksmith ; Rien, nothing. 

Mauvais, e, bad; 



Chou, ra. cat 
Dans in; 
Enfant, m. child; 
Per, m. iron; 

PUS, m. SOU; 



1. Avez vous les marteaux du charpentier ? 2. Nous avona les mar 



48 LESSONXI. 

teauxdu marshal? 3. Les marechaux ont ils deux marteaux de 
bois* 4. Ils ont deux marteaux de fer. 5. Les generaux ont lis 
les chapeaux de sole de l'enfant ? 6. Ils ont les bijoux et les joujoux 
de l'enfant. 7. Les enfants ont ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. lis 
n'ont pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les chevaux de mon 
general. 9. Le marechal a-Ul une paire de bas de lame? 1C. Le 
marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur, n'ave; vous 
pas froid? 12. Non, Monsieur, j'ai chaud. 13. Avez vous du cafe 
ou du chocolat? 14. Je n'ai ni cafe ni chocolat. 15. N'avez vous 
pas les choux de mon grand jardin ! 16. J'ai les legumes de votre 
petit jardin. 17. Votre fils, qu'a-t-il? 18. Mon fils n'a nen. 
19. Avez vous deux morceaux de pain? 20. Le meunier a un mor- 
ceau de pain et deux barils de farine. 21. L'epicier a-t-il du cafe, du 
the, du chocolat, et du poivre % 22. II a du the et du cafe, et le cho- 
colat et le poivre de votre ^archand. 23. Qui a de l'argent ! 24. Je 
n'ai pas d'argent, mais j'ai du papier. 26. Avez vous de bon papier? 
26. J'ai de mauvais papier. 

Exercise 20. 

1. Have you my brother's horses] 2. I have not your brother's 

horses, I have your cousin's hats. 3. Have the blacksmiths good 

iron? ' 4. The blacksmith has two pieces of iron. 5. Have you two 

pairs of stockings? 6. I have one pair of stockings and two pairs 

of gloves. 7. Has your sister the gold jewels? 8. My sister has 

the gold jewels and the paper playthings. 9. Have you the cabbages 

in your garden ? 10. We have two cabbages in our garden. 1 1. Have 

you the silk hats? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have 

you coffee or sugar? 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 

15. Is your brother ashamed? 16. My brother is neither 

ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who has two barrels of flour? 18. The 

miller has two barrels of flour. 19. Have the birds bread? 20. The 

birds have no bread. 21 . Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar and 

pepper? 22. He has sugar and pepper, but he has neither tea nor 

chocolate. 23. Whit has vour sister? 24. She has nothing. 25. 

What is the matter with your brother? 26. Nothing is the matter 

with him. 27. Is he not cold? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 

29 Is he wrong ? 30. He is not wrong, he is right. 3] . Have you 

two cloth coats? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I have two 

satin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter? 34Y>ursia- 

Ur has it. 35. Your sister has it not 



LESSON XII. 



LESSON XII. LEgON XIL 

1. The plural form of the pronouns 1e, him or it; la, her or t*,ii 

les, them, for both genders. Its place is also before the verb. 

Vous les avez. Les avez vous 1 You have them. Have you them ? 
Nous ne les avons pas. We have them not. 

2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, of, or 
from, is des for both genders. 

Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the books, of the pens ; 

Des freres, des soeurs, Of or from the brothers, of the sisters. ' 

3. The same form of the article is placed before plural nouns used 
in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] 

J'ai des habits. J have clothes. 

Vous avez des maisons. You have houses. 

4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural 
nouns used partitively. 

Nous n'avons pas de livres. We have no books. 

Vous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 

5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, mon, ton, son, 

notre, votre, leur, is mes, my; tes, thy; ses, his, her; nos, our; vos, 

your ; leurs, their, for both genders. 

Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters ; 

Nos livres, nos plumes, Our books, our pens. 

6. The possessive pronouns, le mien, la mienne, etc. [L. 9, R. 6,] 
form their plural as follows : 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

Les miens, Les miennes, mine ; Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine; 
Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers; Les notres, Les notres, ours; 

Les votres, Les votres, yours ; Les leurs, Les leurs, theirs. 

Vos niai.sons et les miennes, Your houses and mine; 

harups et les siens, Your fields and his; 

Les siens, les votres et les notres. His, yours and ours. 

7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, cet, cette, have ces for thei 
plural. 

Ces hommes, ces femmes. These men, these women. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui,m. this, or that, makes ceux in 
the plural. TIig feminine form, celle, merely takes the s in the 
plural. 

Mes chandeliers (m.) et ceux de vos My candlesticks and those of your 

freres. brothers. 

Vos chandelles f f.) et cellee de nos Your candles and those of our neigK- 

voiains. b*rs. 

3 



50 



LESSON XII. 



RESUME OF ExAMrLilfci. 



Votre frere a-t> il mes chevaux 1 
H n'a ni les votres ni les siens. 
A-t-il ceux de nos voisins ? 
s. II ne les a pas 1 
Ma soeur a-t-elle vos plumes ou 

celles de ma cousine 7 
Elle n'a ni les miennes ni celles de 

ma cousine, elle a les siennes. 
Avons nous des marteaux 1 
Vous n'avez pas de marteaux. 
Vous avez de jolis crayons. 
Avez vous les habits des enfants ^ 
Je n'ai pas les habits des enfants. 
Vous avez les chapeaux des dames. 
Avez vous ceux-ci ou ceux la ? 



Has your brothe? my horses ? 

He has neither yours nor his. 

Has he those of our neighbors } 

He has them not. 

Has my sister your pens or my con*- 

m's, f. ? (or those of my cousin). 
She has neither mine nor my cousin 1 1 

she has her own. 
Have we hammers ? 
You have no hammers. 
You have pretty pencils. 
Have you the children's clothes ? 
I have not the children's clothes. 
You have the ladies' hats. 
Have you these or those ? 



Exercise 21. 

Acajou, m. mahogany; Chandelle, f. candle; Fusil, m. gun; 
Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Cousine, f. cousin; Laine, f. wool; 

er ; Crin, m. horse-hair ; Marbre, m. marble ; 

Blanc, he, white ; Ebeniste, m. cabinet- Mate las, m. mattress ; 

Chaise, f. chair ; maker ; Meilleure, adj. f. better ; 

Chandelier, m. candle- Ferblanc, m. tin ; Ouvrier, m. workman ; 

stick ; Ferblantier, m. tinman ; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

1. Avez vous les marteaux des marechaux ? 2. Oui, Monsieur, je 
les ai. 3. Ne les avez vous pas ? 4. Non, Monsieur, nous ne les 
avons pas. 5. L'ouvrier les a. 6. L'aubergiste a-t-il vos chevaux ? 
7. L'aubergiste n'a ni mes chevaux ni les votres, il a les siens. 8. 
Le medecin a-t-il des livres 1 9. Oui, Monsieur, il a de bons livres. 
10. N'avez vous pas mes meilleures plumes? 11. Oui, Monsieur.^ 
j'ai vos meilleures plumes, les miennes et celles de votre cousine 
12. Le voyageur a-t-il de bons fusils ? 13. II n'a pas de bens fusils, 
il a des fusils de fer. 14. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes matelas de 
crin? 15. II ne les a pas. 16. Qu'a-t-il? 17. II a les matelas de 
laine de Pebeniste. 18. L'ebeniste a-t-il des tables d'acajou? 19. 
Oui, Madame, il a des tables d'acajou et des tables de marbre blanc 
20. Avez vous mes chaises ou les v6tres? 21. Je n'ai ni les v6trea 
ni les miennes, j'ai celles de l'ebeniste. 22. N'avez vous pas som- 
raeil ? 23. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai ni sommeil ni faim. 24. Le fer- 
blantier a-t-il vos chandeliers de fer ? 25. Non, Monsieur, il a ceux 
du marechal. 

Exercise 22. 

1. Have you my tables or yours? 2. I have neither yours nor 
mine, I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ? 4 No, Sir, I have 



LESSON XIII. 51 

them not. 5. Has your sister my horses ? 6. Yes, Sir, she has 
your two horses and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 
8. I am right, I am not wrong. 9. Has the tinman my silver can- 
dlesticks or yours? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor 
mine. 11. What has he? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden 
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, Sir, he has my 
white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those ? 16. I have 
neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have you 
good pencil-cases? 18. No, Sir, but I have good pencils. 19. Has 
the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, Sir, he has mine, yours, and his. 
21. Has he not your brother's ? 22. He has not my brother's. 23. 
Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, Sir, he has them. 
25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has mine 
and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes ? 28. Yes, Madam, 
I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat? 30. I have my 
cousin's, f. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother? 32. 
He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, Sir, I have 
two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one wool 
mattress. 



LESSON XIH. LEQON XHL 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place,* agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [§ 15,(1.) (2.)]. 

2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i. e. not accented, retain thst 
termination for the feminine. 

Un gar^on aimable, An amiable boy ; 

Une fille aimable. An amiable girl. 

3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine. 

Un gar£on diligent, A diligent boy ; 

Une fille diligente, A diligent girl. 

4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et, on, as, and <* 
double the last consonant and take e for the feminine. J 



Mas. 
Essentiel, 
Vermeil 
Ancien, 


Fern. 
essentielle, 
vermeille, 
ancienne, 


essential ; 
vermilion ; 
ancient ; 


Mas. 
Sujet, 
Bon, 
Bas, 


Fern. 
sujette, 
bonne, 
basse, 


subject ; 
good; 
low ; 



* For the place of adjectives see L. 15, and Rule 5, L. 8. 



52 



LESSON XIII. 



Une robe neuve, 
A new dress ; 
Une femme heureuse, 
A happy woman ; 



5. Adjectives ending in /change the /into ve; those ending in M 

change that letter into se for the feminine. 

Un habit neuf, 
A new coat; 
Un homme heureux, 
A happy man ; 

6. The adjectives beau, handsome; fou, foolish; mou, soft; nouveaa 
new ; vieux, old, become bel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, before a noun 
masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute ; the last conso 
nant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, Ex, 
belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille. 

7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, §15 of the 
Second Part of this grammar. 

8. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative op 

Etre, to Be 



Affirmatv 


vely 


Interrogatively 


Je suis, 


I am; 


Suis-je 1 


Ami? 


Tues, 


Thou art ; 


Es-tu 1 


Art thou ? 


11 est, 


He is ; 


Est-il 1 


Is he? 


Elle est, 


She is ; 


Est elle 1 


Is she? 


Nous sommes, 


We are ; 


Sommes nous 1 


Are we ? 


Vous etes, 


You are ; 


Etes vous ? 


Are you ? 


lis sont, m. 


They are; 


Sont ils ? 


Are they ? 


Elles sont f. 


They are; 


Sont elles % 


Are they ? 



Eesume of Examples. 



Avez vous un gar^on diligent et une 

fille diligente 1 
Mon gar^on est diligent, mais ma 

fille est paresseuse [R. 5.] 
Cette coutume est elle ancienne 7 
Cette coutume n'est pas ancienne, 

elle est nouvelle [R. 6.] 
Votre plume /. est elle bonne ou 

mauvaise 1 
Ma soeur est tres vive, [R. 5.] 
Votre maison est elle meilleure que 

la mienne 1 
La maison de ma soeur n'est pas si 

bonne que la votre. 



Have you a diligent boy and a dik* 

gent girl ? 
My boy is diligent, but my daughter 

is idle. 
Is this custom ancient ? 
This custom is not ancient, it is new, 

Is your pen good or bad ? 

My sister is very lively. 

Is your house better than mine ? 

My sister's house is not so good M 

yours. 



Beau, bel, belle, hand- 
some f 
Bon, m. good ; 
Content,-e, pleased; 
Cravate, f. cravat ; 
Dame, f. lady ; 
Encrier, m. inkstand. 
Excellent,-©, excellent] 



Exercise 23. 

Fille, f. daughter; 
Habit, m. coat ; 
Heureux,-se, happy ; 
Ici, licrc; 

Mcillcur, e. better ; 
Neuf r ve, new ; 



Parasol, m. parasol ; 
Petit,-e, small ; 
Paresseux,-se, idle ; 
Porcelaine, f. china; 
Que, than; 
Vieux, vieille, old; 
Parapluie, m. umbrella ;Y if, vive, quick, lively; 



LESSON XIII. 55 

1. Cette dame est elle eontente? 2. Non, Monsieur, cette dame 
H'estpas ccntente. 3. Votre fille est elle vive? 4. Mon fils esttres 
vif et ma fille est paresseuse. 5. N'a-t-elle pas tort? 6. Elle n'a 
pas raisori. 7. Votre cousine est elle heureuse ? 8. Oui, Madame, elle 
est bonne, belle et heureuse. 9. A-t-elle des amis? 10. Oui, Monsieur, 
elle a des parents et des amis. 11. A-t-elle une robe neuve et de vieux 
souliers ? 12. Elle a de vieux souliers et une vieille robe. 13. Votre 
frere n'a-t-il pas un bel habit [R. 6.] ? 14. H a un bel habit et une 
bonne cravate. 15. Avez vous de bonne viande, Monsieur ? 16. J'ai 
de la viande exceilente. 17. Cette viande-ci est elle meilleure que 
celle-la? 18. Celle-ci est meilleure que celle-la. 19. Votre ami a-t-il le 
bel encrier de porcelaine ? 20. Son encrier est beau, mais il n'est 
pas de porcelaine. 21. Quelqu'un a t-il faim? 22. Personne n'a faim. 
23. Les generaux sont ils ici ? 24. Les generaux et les marechaux 
sont ici. 25. J'ai vos parasols et vos parapluies, et ceux de vos 
enfants. 

Exercise 24. 

1. Is your little sister pleased ? 2. Yes, Madam, she is pleased. 
3. Is that little girl handsome ? 4. That little girl is not handsome, 
but she is good. 5. Have you good cloth and good silk ? 6. My 
cloth and* silk are here. 7. Is your sister happy ? 8. My sister is 
good and happy. 9. Has that physician's sister friends? 10. No, 
Madam, she has no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat 
is good but my cheese is better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand- 
some china inkstand? 14. He has a fine silver inkstand and a pair 
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols ? 16. I have your 
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome? 18. My 
brother has a handsome coat and an old silk cravat 19. Have you 
relations and friends ? 20. I have no relations but I have friends. 
21. Is that handsome lady wrong? 22. That handsome lady is not 
wrong. 23. Have you handsome china? 24. Our china is hand- 
some and good. 25. It is better than yours. 26. Is not that littlo 
girl hungry ? 27. That handsome little girl is neither hungry nor 
thirsty. 28. What is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re- 
lations nor friends. 30. Is this gold watch good? 31. This one is 
good, but that one is better. 32. Have you it ? 33. I have it, but I 
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mine, I have 
your mother's. 

* The article, the possessive and the demonstrative adjective are re- 
peated before every noun. Mon frere et ma soeur, rmj brother and sister. 



54 LESS OK XIV. 

LESSON XIV. LEgON XIV. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES — PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more singula! 

nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun ornoun° 

and is put in the plural. 

Les arbres et les fruits sont beaux. The trees and fruits are fine. 
Les fleurs et les plantes sont belles. The flowers and plants are fine. 
Vos jardins sont tres beaux. Your gardens are very fine. 

2. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different genders 
is put in the plural masculine (§ 18.) 

Mon frere et ma sceur sont contents. My brother and sister are pleased. 
Le canif et la plume sont bons. The penknife and pen are good. 

3. The plural of the feminine of adjectives is invariably formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Vous avez de jolies maisons. You have pretty houses. 

Ces demoiselles sont attentives. Those young ladies are attentive. 

4. The plural of the masculine of adjectives is generally formed b; 
the addition of an s. 

Ces ecoliers sont attentifs. Those scholars are attentive. 

Vos bois sont magnifiques. ' Your woods are magnificent. 

5. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu- 
line. 

Nos fruits sont mauvais. Our fruits are bad. 

Vos oiseaux sont hideux. Your birds are hideous. 

6. To the termination eau, x is added for the plural masculine. 

Vos champs sont tres beaux. Your fields are very fine. 

7. The termination al is generally changed into aux for the plural 
masculine [§ 17 (3.)]. 

Les hommes sont egaux. Men are equal. 

8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions,.see \ 17, Second Pari 

9. Present of the Indicative of etre, to be. 

Negatively. . Negatively and Interrogatively. 

Je ne suis pas, I am not ; Ne suis-je pas 1 Am I not ? 

Tu n'es pas, Thou art not; N'es tu pas? Art thou nott 

II n'est pas, He is not ; N'est il pas 1 Is he not ? 

Elle n'est pas, She is not ; N'est elle pas ? Is she not ? 

Nous ne sommes pas, We are not ; Ne sorames nous pas ? Are we not ? 

Vous n'dtes pas, You arc not; Notes vous pas 1 Arc you not? 

lis ne sont pas m. They are not; Ne sont ils pas 1 m. Are they not? 

Elles ne sont pas f. Ttiey are not ; Ne sont elles pas 1 f. Are they not ? 



LESSON XIV. 



56 



Resume of Examples. 



Aver, vous des ecoliers attentifsl 
Mes ecoliers et mes ecolieres sont 

tres attentifs et tres studieux. 
Ces demoiselles sont elles studi- 

euses 1 
Elles ne sont pas tres studieuses. 
jDes regies sont elles generates 7 
(Jes principes sont generaux. 
Leurs habillements sont superbes. 
Avez vous peur de ces chevaux 

retifs ? 
Vos montres d'or sont excellentes. 
Les miennes sont elles meilleures 

que les votres % 
Les votres sont meilleures que les 

miennes. 



Have you attentive scholars ? 

My scholars (male and female) ate 

very attentive and very studious* 
Are those young ladies studious ? 

They are not very studious. 

Are those rules general ? 

Those principles are general. 

Their clothes are superb. 

Are you afraid of those restive horses 1 

Your gold watches are excellent. 
Are mine better than yours ? 

Yours are better than mine 



Exercise 25. 

Mauvais, e, bad; 
Mule, f. mule; 
Oisif, ve, idle; 
Pantoufles f. slippers ; 
Personne, m. nobody; 
Retif, ve, restive ; 



Sou vent, often ; 
Travail, m. labor ; 
Tres, very ; 
Utile, useful; 
Velours, m. velvet; 
Yif, ve, quick, lively. 



Agreable, agreeable; 
Aine, e, elder ; 
Allemande, f. German; 
Jamais, never ; 
Indulgent, e, indulgent; 
Laine, f. wool, woollen; 
Maroquin, m. morocco ; 

1. Les chevaux de notre ami sont ils retifs 1 ? 2. Ses chevaux ne 
sont pas retifs mais ses mules sont tres retives. 3. Les chevaux et 
les mules de votre frere sont excellents. 4. Vos sceurs sont elles 
tr&s vives? 5. Mes freres et mes sceurs sont tres vifs. ■ 6. Sont ils 
souvent oisifs ? 7. Non, Monsieur, mes sceurs ne sont jamais oisives. 
8. Avez vous peur de votre frere ? 9. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai peur 
de personne. 10. Ne sommes nous pas indulgents? 11. Vous etes 
indulgents, et vous avez raison. 12. Ai-je vos livres? 13. Vous ne 
les avez pas, vous avez ceux de mon frere aine. 14. Ne les avez 
vous pas ? 15. Je ne les ai pas. 16. Avez vous une bonne paire de 
bas de laine? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez vous 
le3 bonnes maisons ou les mauvaises? 19. Je n'ai ni les bonnes ni 
les mauvaises, j'ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le travail est il agre- 
able t 21. Le travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avez vous mes 
beaux souliers de maroquin? 23. Je n'ai pas vos beaux souJiers de 
maroquin, j'ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 24. Avez vous iee 
pantoufles de votre scour, ou les miennes? 25. Je n'd ni les v6trc j 6 
ni celles de votre soeur, j'ai celles de 1' Allemande. 

Exercise 26. 
1. Are your brothers and sisters very {lien) quick? (Note, p. 53.) 



56 LESSONXV. 

2. My brothers are quick, but my sisters are not quick. 3. Have you 
not two restive horses ? f 4. No, but I have a restive mule. 5. Have 
you not two good pairs of silk gloves ? 6. 1 have a good pair of 
cotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves. 7. Are you not afraid 
of your friends ? 8. No, Sir, I am never afraid of my friends. 9. 1 
am afraid of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong? 11. lam right 
12. Have you my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip- 
pers? 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers. 
14. Are those ladies pleased? 15. Those ladies are pleased and they 
are right. 16. Has the German lady your father's shoes or mine ? 
17. She has neither his nor yours, she has my sister's. 18. Has 
your elder brother good houses or bad? 19. His houses are better 
than yours and than mine.* 20. Are his houses old? 21. His 
houses are old, but they are good. 22. Have you them ? 23, No, 
Sir, I have them not, I have no houses. 24. Have you my brother's 
or my sister's? 25. Your sister hashers and my mother's. 26. Are 
your scholars attentive ? 27. My scholars are very attentive and very 
studious. 28. Are those German ladies studious? 29. They are 
very studious and very attentive. 30. Are you often wrong? 31. 
Yes, Sir, I am often wrong. 32. Is labor agreeable ? 33. Yes, Sir, 
labor is agreeable and useful. 34. We have them and you have 
them not. 



LESSON XV. LEQON XV. 

PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES. RELATIVE PRONOUN EN. 

1. The adjective in French, follows the noun much more fre* 
quently than it precedes it. [§ 85, (1.)] 

Vous avez des amis fideles. You have faithful friends. 

Ma soeura des livres instructifs. My sister has instructive books. 

2. Those adjectives which generally precede the nouns, have been 

entioned [L. 8, R. 5.], and will be found [§ 85, (11.)] 

Nous avons de belles maisons. Wc have beaut [fid houses. 

Votre jolie petite fille est studieuse. Your pretty Utile girl is studious. 

3. The adjectives which are placed after nouns are: — 1st, All par- 
ticiples, present and past, used adjectivcly. 

* Que meaning which and que conjunct ion are never understood in 
FrQpch, they must be repeated before every noun, prcnoun and verb. 
SoeT. 19, R. 1. f See llnle 5 of next L. 



LESS O.N XV. 



57 



Ces homines liberaux sont aimes. 
Voila un esprit raisonnable. 
Voila un esclave fugitif. 



Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. 
Vous avez des enfants polis. You have polite children. 

4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to 
hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object ia 
composed ; as also such as refer to nationality, or to any defects of 
the body. [} 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] 

Kos parents out des chapeaux noirs. Our relations have black hats. 

Vous avez des pommes douces. You liave sweet apples. 

Voila de la cire molle. There is soft wax. 

Cette dame espagnole a un enfant That Spanish lady has a lame child, 
boiteux. 

5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if. 

Those liberal men are loved. 
That is a reasonable mind. 
That is a fugitive slave. J 

6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to then 
position before or after the noun. [5 86.] 

Un brave homme, a worthy man. Un homnie brave, a brave man. 

7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or 

understood, but not followed by a noun ; en has also the sense of 

of it, of them, thereof, generally understood in English sentences, 

particularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) { 104, § HO, 

(2.) (3.)] 

Avez vous des souliers de cuir 1 Have you leather shoes ? 

J have some, I have {of them). 
Has your son any ? 

8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive significa- 
tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by 
the preposition de in the same manner as if the noun were expressed 
[See R. 4. Lesson 8.] 

Avez vous de bonnes plumes 1 Have you good pens? 

Non, mais j ; en ai de mauvaises. No, but I have bad ones. 



J'en ai. 

Yotre fils en-a-t-il % 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous de beaux jardins 7 
Oui. j'en ai de beaux. [R. 7.] 
Votre frere n'a-t-il pas des souliers 

noirs 1 
R n'en a pas, mais ma soeur en a. 
N'a-t-elle pas aussi une robe 

blanche % 
Oui. elle en a une. 
Non, elle n'en a pas. 
Qui en a une % 
Qui n'en a pas ? 



Have you fine gardens ? 

Yes, I have fine ones. 

Has not your brother black shoes ? 

He has none, but my rtster has som4 c 
Has she not also a while dress ? 

Yes, she has one. 
No, she has none. 
Who has one ? 
Who has none. ? 



3* 



58 



IESSON XV. 



Le boucher n a-tril pas de la viande 

fraiche 1 
II en a, il n'en a pas. 
II en a beaucoup. 
II n'en a guere. 
II en a deux livres. 



Has not the butcher fresh meat? 

He lias some, he lias none. 
He lias 'nuiich {of it). 
He has but little {of it). 
He has two pounds {of it). 



Laine, f. wool; 
Mademoiselle, f. Miss , 
Monsieur, m. Sir, ATt n 

Gentleman ; 
Parent, m. relation; 
Soldat, m. soldier; 
Terre, f. land. 



Exercise 27. 

Amusant, e, amusing; Bijou, m. jewel; 
Americain, e, American ; Blanc, he, white ; 
Anglais, e, English ; Brave, brave, worthy ; 
Arabe, Arabian; Chale, m. shawl; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Couteau, m. knife ; 

er ; Fra^ais, e, French; 

Beaucoup, much, many ; Guere, little, but little ; 
Beige, Belgian; Guitare, f. guitar ; 

1. Avez vous une bonne guitare? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une 
guitare excellente. 3. Avez vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, Madame, 
j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere 
n'a-t-elle pas un chale de soie ? 6. Oui, Mademoiselle, elle en a un 
de soie et un de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux 
anglais? 8. L'aubergiste a des chevaux anglais, francais et 
arabes. 9. II en a de superbes. 10. L'ami de votre frere a-t-il des 
bijoux d'or? 11. Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 12. A-t-il aussi des bijoux 
d'argent? 13. II en a aussi. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, 
Monsieur, il n'en a guere. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents ? 17. 
Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 18. Ce Monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume 
d'acier ou une belle plume d'or? 19. II en a une d'acier et nous en 
avons une d'or. 20. Le general n'a-t-il pas de bons soldats? 21. 
H en a de tres braves. 22. Les Americains n'ont ils pas de bonne 
terre? 23. Ils en ont d'excellente. 24. Le marchand a-t-il des cou- 
teaux anglais ou francais ? 25. Les couteaux du marchand ne sont 
ni anglais ni francais, ils sont beiges. 

Exercise 28, 

1. Has your brother Arabian horses? 2. Yes, Sir, he has some, 
3. Has he handsome ones? 4. Yes, Sir, he has handsome ones. 
6. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No, Miss, they aie not 
wrong, they are right. 7. Have you a French shawl ? 8. Yes^.Sir, 
1 have one, I have a handsome French shawl. 9. Has your innkeeper 
your silver knife or mine? 10. He has neither yours nor mine, ho 
has his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian a good 
guitar? 12. He has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has an ex* 
cellent one. 14. Has the* gentleman amusing books? 15. Yes, Sir 
he has two. 16. Has the general French or Arabian horses? 17 



LESSON XVI. 59 

He has neither French nor Arabian horses, he has English horses. 
18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has some. 20. 
Has the Englishman any ? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has 
your friend's sister* a good steel pen? 23. My friend's sister has 
one, but my relations have none. 24. Are you not wrong, Sir ? 
25. Yes, Madam, I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English'? 27. 
No, Sir, they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have 
two, and they are here (ici). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 
31. Yes, Sir, he has much. 32. Has he much money? 33. He has 
but little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 35. Yes, 
Sir he has good ones. 



LESSON XVI. LECON XVI. 

PLAN OF THE EXEEOISES IN COMPOSING FRENCH. 

Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring 
facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, 
French into English and again English into French. Following still 
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of 
endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take 
some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 267, 
and seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The 
words taken from the lists., are to be used merely as things suggest- 
ive of thought. The/<?rm which, in any given case, the sentence 
may assume, should be determined by the models found in the Les- 
sons preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mas- 
tered in the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a 
model, on which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his 
own. Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that 
is, shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms pecu- 
liar to a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and 
writing that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along 
in the ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found 
applying his knowledge in the way of actually composing independ- 
ent sentences. In this way, he will soon acquire a facility and ao- 
siracy in the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all 



00 LESSON XVI 



Comparison. 

1. Adjectives and adverbs are always compared in French, aa 
they often are in English, by means of adverbs. 

Plus beau, plus souvent, More beautiful, oftener. 

2. The first part of the comparison for the degree in quality ia 
made by : 

Aussi, as, or as much: \ m _ , , . „ 

-o! _ These adverbs come almost alwavs he- 

ir ius, more; J 

Pas aussi, pas si, not so, not as; f fore an active, a participle, or an ad- 
Moins, less; J yerb * 

Aussi grand, as tall. Plus grand, taller. 

Pas aussi grand, not as tall. Moins grand, less tall, not as tall. 



3. For the degree in quantity we use : 



Autant de, as much, as many ; 

Plus de, more ; 

Pas autant de, not as much or as many ; 

Moins de, less, fewer ; 

Autant de livres, as many books. Autant de bons, as many good ones. 
Plus de ceux-ci, more of these. Moins des miens, less of mine. 



Coming almost always before a 
noun, an adjective used 'sub- 
stantively, or a possessive or de- 
monstrative pronoun. 



4. The second part of the comparison is expressed by : 
Que, as, than : when it does not precede a word expressing a quantity 
compared with the word following the first adverb of the comparison. 

Autant de livres que votre frere, As many books as your brother. 

Tout autant d'or que sa soeur, Quite as much gold as his sister. 

Plus diligent que sa soeur, More diligent than his sister. 

Que de, as, than: before a word expressing a quantity compared with 
that expressed by the word following the adverb of the first part. 

Plus de livres que de maisons, More books than hoiises, 

Autant d'or quo d'argent, As much gold as silver. 

J'ai tout autant de sucre que de Ihave quite (or just) as much sugar as 
cafe, coffee. 

Resume of Examples. 
Avcz-vous autant de livres anglais, \Have you as many English books as 



que de livres italienST? 
J'en ai tout autant 
J'ai autant de ceux-ci que de ccux- 

la. 
II est aussi heureux quo vous. 
Avez vous plus d'assicttes que do 

plats? 



Italian books ? 
Ihave just as many. 

(these as of those. 

He is as happy as you. 

Have you more plates than dishest 



LESBOK XVI. 



61 



/'ai plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 
Est-il plus complaisant que ses 

freres 7 
Le Fra^ais a-t-il moins de legumes 

que de fruits 1 
II a moins de livres que de manu- 

scrits. 
II n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que 

de ceux-la "? 
En a-t-il moins que votre frere 7 

II en a tout autant. 



Bleu, e, blue; 
Courage, m. courage ; 
Davantage,* more ; 
Drap, m. cloth; 
Ennemi, m. enemy ; 
iHspagnol, e, Spaniard; 
Estampe, f. engraving ; 



I have more of these than of those. 
Is he more obliging than his brothers f 

Has the Frenchman fewer vegetable 

than fruits? 
He lias fewer books than manuscripts. 

He has not so many of these as of 

those. 
Has he less {of them) than your 

brother ? 
He has quite as many. 

Exercise 29. 

Fer, m. iron ; Manuscrit, m. manu- 

Fromage, m. cheese ; script; 

Hollandais, m. Dutch- Marechsil, m. blacksmith; 

man ; Modestie, f. modesty ; 

Italien, ne, Italian ; Soie, f. silk; 

Jardin, m. garden ; Tres, very; 

Manteau, m. cloak ; Verre, m. glass. 

1. Etes vous aussi content que votre frere ? 2. Je suis aussi con- 
tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de 
modestie ? 4. II a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le 
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes ? 6. II a plus de 
celles-ci que de ceux-la. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 
8. II a plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que 
de fromage ? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere? 12. II en a 
plus que mon pere et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez vous pas 
froid? 14. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres chaud. 15. Avez 
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve- 
lours bleu. 17. N'avez vous pas plus de verres que d'asstettes? 
18. Nous en avons davantage.* 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer 
que d'acier? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
21. II a moins de celui-ci que de ce*lui-la. 22. Les Hollandais ont ils 
de beaux jardins? 23. Leursjardins sont tres beaux. 24. Lea 
jardins das Italiens sont plus beaux que ceux des Espagnols. 

Exercise 30. 

1. Are you more attentive than your sister? 2. I am not so atten- 
tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother 1 
4. I have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as 
iron? 6. He has more of the latter than of the former. [L. 10, R. 5.] 

* Davantage means more. It caxf never be placed before a noun j it may 
be used instead of plus, at the end of a sentence. 



62 LESSON XVII. 

7. Has he more modesty than the Spaniard? 8. He has more. 9. He 

has more than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, Sirl 
11. No, Sir, but I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman 
more cheese than the Italian? 13. He has more cheese and more 
money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk? 15. I 
have more of this than of that. 16. Who has more friends than the 
Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as much 
of your money as of his? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 20. 
Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks? 21. We have more of 
these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks? 23. Yes, Sir, I 
have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you 
more plates than dishes ? 25. I have not more plates than dishes ; 
but I have more glasses than plates. 26. Are you not very cold ? 
27. No, Sir, I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter 
wood?. 29. Yes, Sir, he has wood, money, cheese and meat. 30. Who 
has more money than the carpenter? 31. The Dutchman has more. 
32. Who has more engravings than books ? 33. The bookseller has 
more of these than of those. 34. Are you as attentive as your 
friend ? 35. I am more attentive than my friend. 



LESSON XVII. LEQON XVH. 

COMPARISON, ENCORE, &C. 

1. The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres, fort, or bien, 
very, before the adjective. [} 14, 11.] 

Oes chandeliars sont tres utiles. These candlesticks are very useful. 

Notre tailleur est bien obligeant. Our tailor is very obliging. 

2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article ]e, la 
les, to a comparative. [§ 14, (9.)] 

Votre neveu est le plus savant de tous. Your nephew is the most learned ofaU. 

3. Encore is used in French in the sense of more, $077ie more, any 
more, still, — used affirmatively and interrogatively, but not nega- 
tively. 

Avez vans encore du cafe 1 Hare you. any more coffee? 

J'ai encore du cafe. / have more (or same more) coffee. 

J'en ai encore. I hav*somc more, or some left. 

4. Ne — plus is used in the sense of not any more, and no more, oi 
n<me left. 

Je n'ai plus de livres. J have no more books. 

Je n'ai plus de chocc lat. / have no chocolate left. 



LESSON XVII. 



5. Ne — guere means hut little, hut few, 

Je n'ai guere d'amis. / have but few friends. 

Je n'en ai guere. I have butfevj — but little. 

6. The pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the nomi- 
native pronouns je, tu, il, ils, after the que of a comparison, and when 
the verb is understood. 



Vous etes plus heureux que moi. 
Vous avez plus de merite que lui. 



You are happier than I. 
You have more merit than he. 



Kesume of Examples. 



l'Dtre marchand est bien obligeant. 
V oila le meilleur de ces ga^ons. 
Nous avons encore des amis. 
Vous avez encore du credit. 
Avez vous encore une piastre ? 
Le ma9on a-t-il encore des briques ? 
II n'en a plus. 
II n'a plus de briques. 
II n'en a guere. 
II n'en a plus guere. 
Je n'ai guere de livres. 
Avez vous plus de courage que lui? 
II a nioins de courage que moi. 
Combien de piastres avez vous en- 
core? 



Your merchant is very obliging. 
That is the best of those boys. 
We have some more (or still) friends. 
You have still (or yet) credit. 
Have you a dollar left ? 
Has the mason more bricks ? 
He has no more — he has none left. 
He has no more bricks. 
He has but few. 
He has but few left. 
I have but jew books. 
Have you more courage than he ? 
He has less courage than I. 
How many dollars have you stiU % or 
have you left ? 



Exercise 31. 

Correct, e, correct; Neveu, m. nephew; Sceur, f. sister; 

Credit, m. credit; Niece, f. niece; Salade, f. salad; 

Beaucoup, much ; Nouvelles, f. news ; Tante, f. aunt ; 

Boyer, Boyer ; Quel, which, which one ; Tous, all; 

Dictionnaire, m. diction- Savant, e, learned ; Ville, f. town, city, 
ary; 

1. Votre dictionnaire est il tres correct? 2. II est plus correct que 
celui de Boyer. 3. Votre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tous. 
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces jardins ? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de 
tous les jardins de la ville. 6. Avez vous encore de l'argent? 7. Je 
n'ai plus d'argent,niais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons nous encore de 
If saiade? 9. Nous n'en avons plus. 10. Nous n'avons plus de 
viande. 11. Qui en a encore? 12. Mes freres et mes soeurs en ont 
encore. 13. En avez vous encore beauconp? 14. Je n'en ai plus 
guere. 15. Votre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre niece? 16. 
Elle n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Votre neveu est il plus savant que 
votre niece? 18. II n'est pas aussi savant qu'elle. 19. Elle est plus 
Bavante que lui. 20. Avez vous encore froid? 21. Je n'ai plus froid, 
j'ai bien chaud. 22. N'avez vous plus de nouvelles ? 23. Je n'en ai 
plus. 24 En i vez vous beaucoup ? 25. Je n'en ai guere. 



64 LESSON XVIII. 

Exercise 32. 

1. Has your brother a very good dictionary? 2. His dictionary is 
not very correct. 3. Has your father more courage than he ? 4. He 
has much mo~e courage than your nephew. 5. Have your brothers 
credit ? 6. They have but little credit, but they have money. 7. Is 
our aunt obliging ? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you still 
ooks, pens, and paper? 10. I have no more books, but I have still 
good pens and excellent English paper. 11. Who has still paper? 
12. I have no more, but my brother has some more. 13. Have you 
any news, Sir? 14. No, Madam, I have none to-day. 15. Have you 
as much wood as my brother's son ? 16. I have more than you or he. 
17. Are you still wrong? 18. No, Sir, I am no longer (plus) wrong, 
I am right. 19. Are your sisters still hungry? 20. They are neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 21. Is your niece as 
learned as he ? 22. She is more learned than he and (que) his aunt. 
23. Have you no news, Sir ? 24. No, Madam, I have no more news. 
25. Who has news ? 26. I have no more. 27. Have you them all ? 
28. Yes, Sir, I have them all. 29. Has your aunt much of it left ? 
30. She has but little more of it. 31. Has your brother any more 
English horses ? 32. He has no more. 33. He has two more. 34. 
Have you a handsome French shawl left? 35. 1 have no more French 
shawls, but I have an English one. 



LESSON XVIII. LECON XVIH. 

1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, how much, how many; tro?, 
too much, too many ; beaucoup, much, many ; assez, enough; peu, liu 
tie, few; guere, but little, few; and the word pas, meaning no, when 
coming before a noun or an adjective, are followed by the preposi- 
tion de. 

Combien de fleurs avez vous 7 How many flowers have you? 

J'ai beaucoup de fleurs. I have many flowers. 

Vous avez trop de loisir. You have too much leisure. 

Votre sceur a assez de temps. Your sister has time enough. 

2. The adverb bien, used in the sense of beaucoup (much, many,) is 
followed by the preposition de, joined to or blended with the article 
le, la, les. [L. 6.] 

Vous avez bien do la complaisance. You have much kindness. 
Elle a bien des amis. She has many friends. 



LESSON XVII L 



65 



3. Quel que chose, something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rienfnothing, 

not any thing, take de before an adjective. 

Votre ami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has something pleasant* 

able. 

Avez vous quelque chose de bon % Have you any thing good ? 

Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing {not any thing) good. 

4. Quel, m., quelle,/., quels, m. p., quelles, /._p., are used interro* 

gatively for which or what before a noun. 

Quelle serviette avez vous ? What or which napkin have you ? 

Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il 1 What purses has your friend ? 

5. Que is used for what before a verb. 

Qn'avez vous 1 What is the matter with you ? 

6. Lequel, m., laquelle, /, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, /. p., are 
used absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and 
equivalent to which one, which ones. 

Lequel votre fils a-t-il % Which {one) has your son ? 

Lesquelles avons nous 7 Which (ones) have we ? 

7. Quelques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelquea 
uns, 772., quelques unes,/., are used absolutely, with the same mean 
ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. 

Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes 1 Has the Dane a few apples? 
II en a quelques unes. He has a few. 

II en a plusieurs. He has several. 



Resume of Examples. 



Combien de poires avez vous ? 
Nous avons beaucoup de poires. 
Nous en avons beaucoup. 
Nous avons assez de cerises. 
Nous n'en avons pas assez. 
Vous n'avez guere de peches. 
Votre jardinier a bien des peches. 
N'avez vous pas de peches 1 
J'ai beaucoup de peches et d'abri- 

cots. 
Le boucher a-t-il quelque chose de 

bon. 
II a quelque chose de bon et de 

mauvais. 
II n'a rien de bon. 
Quelles poires/. avez vous? 
Nous avons celles de votre soeur. 
Quel habit m. avez vous ? 
Nous avons celui du tailleur. 
Qu'avez vous de bon 1 
Lequel avez vous 1 
Lesquels votre frere a-t-il ? 
J'ai du fruit mur ? 



Hmv many pears have you ? 

We have many pears. 

We have many {of them). 

We have cherries enough. 

We have not enough (of them). 

You have but few peaches. 

Your gardener has many peaches. 

Have you n*o peaches ? 

I have 7?iany peaclies and apricots. 

Has the butcher any thing good ? 



He has not any thing (nothing) good 

What or which pears have you ? 

We have your sister's. 

Which or ivhat coat have you ? 

We have the tailor's. 

What have you good ? 

Which (one) have you ? 

Which {ones) has your brother l i 

I have ripe fruit. 



06 LESSON XVIII. 



Exercise 33. 

Abricot, m. apricot; Fleur, f. flower; Pommes, f. apple ; 

Anana, m. pineapple ; Legume, ra. vegetable ; Pomme-de-terre, f. po* 

Beurre, m. butter ; Magasin, m. vsarehouse ; tato ; 

Cerise, f. cherry ; Oncle, m. uncle; Prune, f. plum; 

Epicier, m. grocer; Poire, f. pear; Sucre, m. sugar: 

fitranger, e, foreign ; Poivre, m. pepper ; The, m. tea. 
Jardin, m. garden ; 

1. Combien de pommes-de-terre votre frere a-t-il ? 2. II n'en a 
pas beaucoup. 3. L'epicier a-t-il beaucoup de sucre dans son ma- 
gasin ? 4. II n'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivie. 
5. Votre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. II a plus de cerises 
que de prunes. 7. Les prunes sont elles meilleures que les cerises ? 
8. Les cerises sont meilleures que les prunes. 9. Avez vous quel- 
ques poires mures ? 10. Nous en avons quelques unes, nous avons 
aussi beaucoup d'ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il quel- 
que chose de bon dans son jardin? 12. II a queique chose de bon 
et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles fleurs. 14. Avez 
vous des fleurs etrangeres ? 15. Pen ai quelques unes. 16. Les- 
quelles avez vous ? 17. J'ai celles de votre frere et celles de votre 
jardinier.- 18. N'avez vous pas aussi les miennes? 19. Non, Mon- 
sieur, je ne les ai pas. 20. Qui en a beaucoup? 21. Personne n'en 
a beaucoup. 22. J'en ai quelques unes. 23. Avez vous assez de 
the ? 24. Pen ai assez. 25. J'en ai plus que lui. 

Exercise 34. 

1. Has your gardener many vegetables ? 2. Yes, Sir, he has many. 
3. How many gardens has he ? 4. He has several gardens and seve- 
ral houses. 5. Have you many books ? 6. I have but few, but my 
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother ? 8. He has a good 
cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches? 10. He has but few 
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has the 
tailor? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth and silk. 13. What 
silk has your friend the merchant? 14. He has a great deal (beau* 
coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any 
thing good in (dans) his garden? 16. He has many pineapples. 
17. Has he more vegetables than fruit? 18. He has more of this than 
of those. 19. Has your uncle many pears and cherries? 20. He has 
a few, and he has many apples and plums. 21. Have you a few? 
22. I have still many, but my brother has no more. 23. Which 
peaches has he? 24. He has large (grosses) peaches. 25. Which 
(ones) have you ? 26. I hav 3 the best peaches. 27. Has the mer- 



LESS OK XIX, 



67 



tjhant any thing good in his warehouse 1 28. He has nothing good in 
his warehouse, but he has something good in his garden. 29. How 
many potatoes has the foreigner? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he 
good vegetables 1 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or 
wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither 
this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. 



LESSON XIX. 



LEgoisr xix. 



1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- 
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, aad must be repeated be- 
fore every verb depending on them. [§ 109.] 

Les crayons que j'ai sont meilleurs The pencils (which) I have, are better 
que ceux que vous avez. than those {which) you have. 

2. Ne, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of 
only, hut. 

Je n'ai qu'un ami. I have but one friend. 

3. L'un et l'autre, means both ; les uns et les autres, these and 
those, the latter and the former. [J 41, (11.)] 

Vous avez l'un et l'autre. You have both. 

4. Cardinal and ordinal numbers as far as twenty. [§ 22, 23.] 



Cardinal. 


Ordinal 




Un, m. me, f. 


One, 


Premier, m. e,f. 
Second, m. e,f. 


First, 


Deux, 


Two, 


Second, 






Deuxieme, 




Trois, 


Three, 


Troisieme, 


Tldrd, 


Quatre, 


Four, 


Quatrieme, 


Fourth, 


Cinq, 


Five, 


Cinquieme, 


Fifth, 


Six, 


Six, 


Sixieme, 


Sixth, 


Sept, 


Seven, 


Septieme, 


Seventh, 


Huit, 


Eight, 


Huitieme, 


Eighth, 


Neuf, 


Nine, 


Neuvieme, 


Ninth, 


Dix, 


Ten, 


Dixieme, 


Tenth, 


Onze, 


Eleven, 


Onzieme, 


Eleventh, 


Douze, 


Twelve, 


Douzieme, 


Twelfth, 


Treize, 


Thirteen, 


Treizieme, 


Thirteenth, 


Quatorze 


Fourteen, 


Quatorzieme, 


Fourteenth, 


Quinze, 


Fifteen, 


Quinzieme, 


Fifteenth, 


Seize, 


Sixteen, 


Seizieme, 


Sixteenth, 


Dix-sept, 


Seventeen, 


Dix-septieme, 


Seventeenth, 


Dix-huit. 


Eighteen, 


Dix-huitieme, 


Eighteenth, 


Dix-neuf, 


Nineteen, 


Dix-neuvieme v 


Nineteenth^ 


Vingt, 


Twenty. 


Vingtieme, 


Twentieth. 



68 LESSON XIX. 

5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of tne 

month, except the firsts for which the ordinal number premier ia 

substituted : — 

Le dix aout, le cinq juillet, The tenth of August, the fifth of July. 

Le premier du mois prochain, The first of next month. 

6. The verb avoir, to have, is used actively, [} 26, (1.)] for the day 
of the month. The verb etre may also be used : — 

Quel jour du mois avons nous 1 What day of the month is it ? 

Nous avons le vingt. It is the twentieth. 

C'est aujourd'hui le dix. To-day is the tenth. 

7. Before the word onze, the article le or la is not elided. [§ 146.] :— 
Nous avons le onze de decembre. We have (it is) the 11th of December. 

Resume of Examples. 

L'ouvrier a-t-il les outils que vous , Has the workman the tools which you 

avez 1 have ? 

Les maisons que j'ai sont elles aussi I Are the houses which I have as good 



bonnes que celles que vous avez 1 
Combien de francs avez vous 1 
Jen'ai que dix francs, mais mon 

frere en a plus de vingt. 
Avons nous le quatorze du mois 1 

Non, Monsieur, nous n'avons que le 

onze. 
Lequel de ces deux volumes avez 

vous'? 
J'ai Tun et l'autre. 
Avez vous la premiere place ou la 

deuxieme 1 
J'ai la premiere, et mon frere a la 

deuxieme. 



as those which you have ? 
How many francs have you? 
I have only ten francs, but my brother 

has more than twenty (of them). 
Is it the fourteenth day of the 

" 7 



No, Sir, It is only the eleventh. 

Which of those two volumes have you? 

I have both. 

Have you the first or tlie second 

place? 
I have the first, and my brother has 

the second. 



Exercise 35. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day; Fevrier, m. February ; Outil, m. tool; 

Canelle, f. cinnamon; Franc, m. franc ; Ouvrage, m. work; 

Centime, m. centime — Histoire, f. history ; Oeuvres, f. work*. 

the 100th part of a Italien, m. Italian ; Place, f. place ; 

franc; Kilogramme, m. kilo- Quart, m. quarter; 

Combien, how much, how gramme — about two Septembre, m. Scptern- 

many ; pounds ; ber ; 

Cravate, f. cravat; Menuisier, m. joiner; Volume, m. volume. 

Demi, half; Mousseline, f. muslin; 

1. Le cheval que vous avez est il bon? 2. II est meilleur que celiu 
que vous avez et que celui de notre ami. 3. Combien d'enfants avez 
vous? 4. Je n'en ai qu'un, mais FItalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avona 
nous le dix septembre? 6. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le neuf 



L3SS80N XIX. 69 

fevrier. 7. Avez vous ma cravate de soie ou ma cravat e de mousse- 
line? 8. J'&l Tune et l'autre. 9. Avez vous huit kilogrammes de 
canelle? 10 Non, Monsieur, je n'en ai qu'un demi kilogramme. 11. 
Combien de francs avez vous, Monsieur 1 ? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi franc, 
mais mon ami a un franc et derm 13. Votre sosur a-t-elle vingt cinq 
centimes? 14. Oui, Monsieur, elle a un quart de franc. 15. N'avons 
nous pas le premier aout? 16. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le six sep 
tembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Non, Monsieur, c'est le 
onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place? 20. Non, Monsieur, 
il a la dixieme. 21. Votre menuisier a-t-il beaucoup d'outils? 22. 
Oui, Monsieur, il en a beaucoup. 23. Cet ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 
24. Non, Monsieur, il n'en a que neuf. 25. J'ai le sixieme volume 
des oeuvres de Moliere et le premier volume de l'histoire de France 
de Michelet. 

Exercise 36. 

1. Is that cinnamon good? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours 
and your brother's. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day? 
4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs ? 6. No, Sir, he 
has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your 
work? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the 
second volume of Michelet's history of France? 10. Yes, Sir, he has 
read the second volume (of it). 1 1. Has your friend,Moliere's works? 
12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat 
or my velvet coat? 14. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 
16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 
18. How many centimes has the merchant? 19. He has twenty- six. 
20. Have you the third or the fourth place? 21. I have neither the 
third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- 
day ? 23. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have you 
a quarter of a franc ? 25. No, Sir, but I have half a franc. 26. Is 
it the sixth of July? 27. No, Sir, it is the fourth of March. 
28. Has your uncle six children? 29. No, Sir, he has cnly one 
30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat? 31. I have only five kilo 
grammes. 32. Is the butcher's meat good? 33. It (elle) is not verj 
good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it) ? 35 J have 
only two, but my brother has four. 



10 



LESSON XX. 



LESSON XX. LEgOS XX. 

1. For the time of the day, the verb &tre, is used unipersonaily m 

French, in the same manner as the verb to be is used in English for 

the same object. The word heure, sing, heures, plur* represent* 

the English expressions, o'clock, or time, and must always be ex 

pressed, 

Quelle heure est il 1 What o'clock (time) is it ? 

II est une heure. It is one o'clock. 

II est dix heures. It is ten, it is ten o'clock. 

2. Midi is used for twelve o'clock in the day, and minuit, for mid- 
night, or twelve at night. Douze heures is never used except in the 
sense of twelve hours. 

Est il midi 1 Est il minuit ? Is it noon ? Is it midnight ? 

3. Et quart, et demie, [§ 84, (2.)] answer to the English expres- 
sions, a quarter, half-past, after, &c. 

II est neuf heures et quart. It is a quarter after nine. 

II est midi et demi. It is half after twelve. 

II est une heure et demie. It is half after one. 

4. Moins un quart, moins vingt minutes, answer to the English 
expressions, a quarter before, twenty minutes before, &c. 



II est dix heures moins un quart. It wants a quarter 

II est neuf heures moins dix mi- It is ten minutes be A 

nutes. 



of ten. 

efore nvn 



5. The word demi, preceding the word heure, does not vary 
Placed after it, it is variable. [} 84, (2.)] 

Une demi heure. Half an hour. 

Une heure et demie. An Jwur and a half. 

6. The verb avoir, is used actively [§ 43, (2,) (3,)] in French iu 
peaking of age, and the word an, year, is always expressed. 

Quel age avez vous 1 How old are you ? i. e., What, *gt 

have you? 
J'ai plus de vingt ans. J am more than twenty. 

7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before * 
number. 

Avons nous plus de dix metres de Have we more than ten, metres of this 

cette toile d'Hollande 1 Holland (Holland linen) t 

Vous en avez moins de six aunes. You have kss than six ells of it. 



I ESSON XL 



71 



Resume of Examples. 



II n'est pas encore deux heures. 

Est il une heure et demie ? 

II est midi et quart ou midi et demi. 

II est huit heures moins un quart. 

Quel age votre fils a-t-il ? 

II n'a que dix-huit ans. 

Votre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de 
dix-neuf ans % 

Ma belle sceur n'a pas moins de dix- 
huit ans et demi. 

Est il plus de dix heures a votre 
montre 1 

II n'est que neuf heures a mon 
horloge. 

Votre fils est il plus age que le 
mien'? 

II est plus jeune que le votre. 



It is not yet two o'clock. 

Is it half-past one T 

It is a quarter or half-past twelve. 

It wants a quarter of eight. 

How old is your son ? 

He is only eighteen years old. 

Is not your brother-in-law more than 

nineteen years old ? 
My sister-in-law is not less than eighr 

teen years and a half. 
Is it more than ten o'clock by your 

watch ? 
It is only nine by my clock. 

Is your son older than mine ? 

He is younger than yours. 



Exercise 37. 



Age, e, old ; Cela, that ; 

Aune, f. ell ; Cinquante, fifty ; 

Beau-frere, m. brother- Cousin-germain, m. first 

in-law ; cousin ; 

Beau-fils, m. son-in-law ; Enfant, m. child; 
Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February ; 



Jour, m. day ; 
Maintenant, now ; 
Mars, m. March ; 
Metre, m. metre, a 
French measure about 
three French feet ; 
Horloge, f. clock ; Mois, m. month ; 

Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cal- Ruban, m. ribbon ; 

Tard, late ; 
Verge, f. yard. 



law 



law 



Belle-soeur, f. sister-in- Jeune, young ; 
law; 

1. Votre beau-frere est il plus age que le mien? 2. Le v6tre est 
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age a votre belle-mere ? 4. Elle 
a pres de cinquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est il maintenant ? 6. 
II est six heures passees. 7. £tes vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en suis certain. 9. Est il plus de deux heures a votre 
montre? 10. II n'est que midi a ma montre. 11. Avez vous plus 
de cinq ans, mon enfant ? 12. Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 13. 
Avez vous plus de six verges d'indienne? 14. J'en ai moins de trois 
metres. 15. Combien d'aunes de ruban votre beau-pere a-t-il? 16. 
II n'a guere de ruban, il n ? en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est il midi 
moins un quart? 18. 11 est plus tard, Monsieur, il est midi et quart. 
19 Quel jour du mois avons nous ? 20. Nous avons le six octobre. 
21 N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier que . . . ? 22. Non, Madame, c'est le huit 
Mars. 23. Combien de jardins a votre cousin-germain ? 24. II n'e*) 
a qu'un, mais il est tr&s beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. 



12 



1ESS0N xx r. 



Exercise 38. 






1. How old is your brother-in-law? 2. He is fifty years old. & 
Is your sister-in-law older than mine ? 4. No, Sir, my sister-in-law 
is younger than yours. 5. Is your son twenty-five years old ? 6. 
No, Madam, he is only sixteen. 7. What day of the month have we 
to-day ? 8. We have the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth vol- 
ume of Chateaubriand's works? 10. No, Madam, we have the 
eleventh. 11. What o'clock is it, Sir? 12. It is only twelve o'clock. 
13. Is it not later? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15. It is a quar- 
ter after five. 16. How many yards of this holland (toile d* Hol- 
lander f.) have you ? 17. I have ten ells and a half. 18, I have six 
metres of it, and sixteen yards of Italian silk. 19. Is your mother- 
in-law younger than your father-in-law ? 20. She is younger than 
he/ 21. Are you twenty years old? 22. No, Sir, I am only nine- 
teen and a half. 23. Are you sure (siir) that it is ten o'clock. 24. 
Yes, Madam, I am sure of it. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten ? 26 
No, Sir, it is a quarter before twelve (midi). 27. How many houses 
have you ? 28. I have only one, but my sister-in-law has two. 29. 
Have you mine (f.) or yours ? 30. I have neither yours nor mine, I 
have your son-in-law's. 31. Has your mother-in-law five yards of 
that printed calico ? 32. She has only two yards of it. 33. What 
o'clock is it by (a) your watch? 34. It is half-past four by my 
watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mine (d la mienne). 



LESSON XXI. LEgON XXI. 

THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 

1. The four classes or conjugations, into" which the French verba 
are divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the In- 
finitive [§ 44]. The first conjugation ends in er ; as chanter, to sing; 
donner, to give ; parler, to speak ; chercher, to seek. 

The second conjugation ends in ir ; as, cherir, to cherish ; punir, to 
punish ; munir, to provide ; finir, to finish. 

x'he termination of the infinitive of the regular verbs of the third 
conjugation, is evoir ; as, devoir, to owe; recevoir, to receive; that of 
die irregular verbs is oir, as valoir, to be worth. 

The fourth conjugation ends in re : as, rendre, to render; fendra, 
to split ; tendre, to stretch ; vendre, to sell 



LESSON XXI. 



IB 



2. A verb preceded by another verb (other than the auxiliaries 
avoir and etre), or by a preposition (other than en), is put in the present 
of the infinitive. 

II va travailler ou lire. He is going to work or to read. 

3. In French, verbs are often connected with others by prepositions 
not answering literally to those which accompany the same verbs in 
English. They also often come together without prepositions. The 
studc nt will find in § 129, and the following sections of the Second 
Part, lists of verbs, with the prepositions which they require after 
them. 

4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when 

they come before a verb: (} 132) avoir besoin, to want; avoir cou- 

tume, to he accustomed ; avoir dessein, to intend, to design ; avoir envie, 

to have a wish, a desire ; avoir honte, to he ashamed ; avoir intention, 

or, Pintention, to intend ; avoir le temps, to have time or leisure ; avoir 

le courage, to have courage ; avoir peur, to he afraid ; avoir raison, to 

he right ; avoir regret, to regret ; avoir tort, to he wrong ; avoir sujet 

to have reason ; avoir soin, to take care. 

Cet enfant a besoin de dormir, That child wants to sleep. ' 

Vous avez honte de courir, You are ashamed of running. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous quelque chose a. dire 1 
Je n'ai rien a dire. H 
Votre soeur n'a-t-elle rien a ecrire 1 
Elle a deux lettres a ecrire. 
A-t-elle le temps de les ecrire 1 
Elle n'a pas dessein de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas l'intention de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas envie de les ecrire. 
Avez vous peur de danser 1 
Je n'ai pas honte de danser. 
Votre cousin a raison de sortir. 
N'avez vous pas soin d'ecrire 1 
Avez vous le courage d'aller a la 
guerre. 



Have you any thing to say ? 

I have nothing to say. 

Has your sister nothing to write ? 

She has two letters to write. 

Has she time to write them 7 

She does not design to write them. 

Site does not intend to write them. 

She has no desire to write them. 

Are you afraid to dance ? 

I am not ashamed to dance. 

Your cousin is right to go out. 

Do you not take care to write ? 

Have you the courage to go to the war 7 



Exercise 39. 

Achetev, to buy ; Faire, to make ; Marcher, to walk; 

Champ, m. field ; Fatigue, e, tired, weary ; Mars, m. March; 

Danser, to dance ; Gazette, f. newspaper ; Ne — rien, nothing ; 

De bonne heure, early ; Juillet. m. July ; Page, f. page ; 

Dormir, to sleep; Juin, m. June; Seize, sixteen; 

Ecrire, to write ; Lire, to read ; Travailler, to work, labor. 

1. Votre belle-mere a-t-elle quelque chose a faire ? 2. Elle n'a rien 
a faire. 3. A-t-elle deux pages a ecrire ? 4. Non, Monsieur, ello 

4 



74 LESSON AX I. 

n'en a qu'une. 5. Avez vous l'intention de lire cette gazette t 6. Oui 
Madame, j'ai Tintention de la lire. 7. Avez vous raison d'acheter Tin 
habit de velours? 8. J'ai raison d'en acheter un. 9. Votre petite 
fille a-t-elle besoin de dormir? 10. Oui, Monsieur, elle a besoin de 
dormir, elle est fatiguee. 11. Avez vous peur de tomber? 12. Je 
n'ai pas peur de tomber. 13. Le jardinier a-t-il le temps detravailler 
dans les champs ? 14. II n'a pas envie de travailler dans les champs. 
15. Vos champs sont ils aussi grands que les miens? 16. Ilssont 
p\us grands que les votres. 17. Avez vous honte de marcher? 
18. Je n'ai pas honte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. Quel 
Age a votre fils? 20. II a seize ans. 21. Avons nous le deux mars 
ou le cinq juin? 22. Nous avons le vingt-huit juillet. 23. Est il 
midi? 24. Non, Monsieur il n'est pas encore midi, il n'est que onze 
heures et demie. 25. II est encore de bonne heure. 

Exercise 40. 

1. What has your brother-in-law to do? 2. He has letters to 
write. 3. Does he want to work ? 4. Yes, Sir, he wants to work. 
5. Does he intend to read my book ? 6. He does not intend to read 
your book, he has no time. 7. Is your sister ashamed to walk ? 
8. My sister is not ashamed to walk, but my brother is ashamed to 
dance. 9. Has your cousin any thing to say? 10. My cousin has 
nothing to say, she is afraid to speak (jparler). 11. Is it late ? 12. No, 
Madam, it is not late, it is early. 13. Have you a wish to read my 
sister's letter (f.) ? 14. Have you the courage to go to the war ? 15. I 
have not the courage to go to the war. 16. Is your sister right to 
buy a silk dress (f.) ? 17. Yes, Sir, she is right to buy one. 18. Does 
that child' want to sleep? 19. No, Sir, that child does not want to 
sleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to 
work in my garden? 21. He has a wish to work in (dans) mine. 
22. How old is that child? 23. That child is ten years old. 24. What 
is the day of the month? 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you 
afiaid to walk ? 27. I am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 28. Have 
you time to read my brother's book? 29. I have time to read hia 
book. 30. Has the joiner a wish to speak? 31. He has a wish to 
work and to read. 32. Is your son afraid of falling? 33. He is not 
afraid of falling, but he is afraid of working. 34. What o'clock is it* 
35. It is twelve. 



LESSON XXII. 75 



LESSON XXII. LEQON XXII. 

1. The expressions avoir besoin, to want ; avoir soin, to take care; 

avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir peur, to be afraid, require also th.3 

preposition de before a noun. Those idioms mean literally, to have 

need, to have care, &c. 

Avez vous besoin de votre frere 7 Do you want your brother ? 

J'ai soin de mes effets. / take care of my things. 

II a honte de sa conduite. He is ashamed of his conduct. 

Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 

2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob- 
ject, they will, of course, require the same preposition before the 
pronoun representing that object. 

J'ai besoin de vous. / want you. 

J'ai soin de lui. J take care of him. 

De qui avez vous besoin 7 Whom do you want ? 

De quoi a-t-elle besoin % What does she vm?it? 

3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned before 
the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that of the 
pronoun representing the object. 

Avez vous besoin de votre cheval 1 Do you want your horse ? 

J 'en ai besoin. / want it. 

4. The expressions etre fache, to be sorry ; etre etonne, to be as- 
tonished ; etre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de be- 
fore a noun or pronoun. [§ 88.] 

Je suis fache de son malheur. / am sorry for his misfortune. 

Je suis etonne de sa conduite. lam astonished at his conduct. 

Je suis content de lui. / am pleased with him. 

5. Etre fache, in the sense of to be angry, requires the preposition 

contre. 

Vous etes fache contre moi. You are angry with me. 

6. For rules on the government of adjectives, see § 87, and fol- 
lowing Sections. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous besoin d 'argent 7 

J'ai besoin d'argent. 

Je n'en ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] 

En avez vous besoin 1 

J'en ai besoin, et mon frere en a 

besoin aussi. 
Avez vous besoin de votre fr&re 1 



Do you want money ? 

I want money. 

I do not want any. 

Do you want any ? 

I want some, and my brother want* 

some too. 
Do you want your brother ? 



78 



LESSON XXII. 



TsA besoin de lui * 

De quoi avez vous besoin? 

J'ai besoin d'un dictionnaire. 

Avez vous soin de votre livre ? 

J'en ai soin. 

Avez vous soin de votre perel 

J ; ai soin de lui.* 

Votre frere est il fache contre moi 1 

II est fache contre votre soeur. 

Avez vous peur de ce chien 1 

J'en ai peur. 

De qui avez vous honte 1 

Je n'ai honte de personne. 

Avez vous besoin de quelque 

chose 7 
Je n'ai besoin de rien. 



J want him. 

What do you want ? 

I want a dictionary. 

Do you take care of your book ? 

I take care of it. 

Do you take care of your father? 

I take care of him. 

Is your brother angry with me ? 

He is angry with your sister. 

Are you afraid of this dog ? 

I am afraid of him. 

Of whom are you ashamed ? 

I am ashamed of nobody. 

Do you want any thing ? 

I want nothing. 



Exercise 41. 

Besoin, m. want, need; Fatigue, e, weary, tired ,-Parler, to speak; 
Conduite, f. conduct ; Gar£on, m. boy ; Reposer, to rest ; 

Domestique, m. servant; Jeune homme, m. young Soin, m. care ; 
Effets, ni. things, clothes; man; Travailler, to work ; 

E tonne, e, astonished; Lire, to read; Vieux, old. 

Fache, e, sorry, angry; 

1. Qui a besoin de pain? 2. Personne n'en a besoin. 3. N'avez 
vous pas besoin de votre domestique ? 4. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai besoin 
de lui.* 5. Votre jardinier a-t-il soin de votre jardin? 6. Oui, 
Madame, il en a soin. 7. A-t-il bien soin de son vieux pere ? 8. Oui, 
Monsieur, il a bien soin de lui. 9. Votre garcon a-t-il honte de sa 
cenduite? 10. Oui, Monsieur, il en a honte. 11. Avez vous peur 
de ce cheval-ci ou de celui-la. ? 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni do 
celui-la. 13. Notre domestique a-t-il soin devos effets? 14. II en 
a bien soin. 15. Avez vous peur de parler ou de lire ? 16. Je n'ai 
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. £tes vous etonne de cette affaire? 
18. Je n'en suis pas etonne. 19. En £tes vous fache? 20. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en suis bien fache. 21. Avez vous besoin de ce garcon? 
22. Oui, Madame, j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N'avez vous pas besoin de 
son livre? 24. Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez vous envie de 
travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, 
j'ai envie de me reposer car je suis fatigue. 

Exercise 42. 

1. Do you want your servant? 2. Yes, Sir, I want him. 3. Does 
your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother.f 

* The word en should be avoided as much as possible in relation t* 
persons, 
t Repeat the preposition de. 



LESSON XXIII. 



11 



5. Does he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has 
enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct ? 8. He is very 
sorry for his conduct and very angry against you. 9. Does he take 
good (bien) care of his books ? 10. He takes good care of them. 
11. How many volumes has he? 12. He has more than you, h* nas 
more than twenty. 13. What does the young man want? 14. He 
wants his clothes. 15. Do you want to rest (vous reposer) ? 16. 
[s not your brother astonished at this ? 17. He is astonished at it. 
18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books? 19. I have a 
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 
21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the 
young brother take care of his things ? 23. He takes good care of 
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog ? 25. He is not afraid 
of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread ? 27. 
I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's con- 
duct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish to 
read my book? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he is 
weary. 32. Is that young man angry with you or with his friends ? 
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you want 
my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your hf iter's. 



lesson xxm. 



LEgoN xxm. 



1. If the ending or distinguishing characteristic of the conjugation 
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- 
maining will be the stem of the verb: — 

Chant-er Fin-ir Rec-evoir Rend-re 

2. To that stem are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- 
ular verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to which it be- 

ongs [J 60.] 

3. Participle Present. 



Chant-ant 
Singing 



Chant-e 
Sung 



Fin-issant 
Finishing 



Rec-evant 
Receiving 



4. Participle Past. 



Fin-i 
Finished 



Re$-u 
Received 



Rend-ant 
Rendering 



Rend-u 
Rendered 



78 



LESSON XXIII. 



5. Termination of the Present of the Indicative. 



Je 


chant 


-e 


fin -is 


re<; -ois 


rtnd 




si?ttr 




finish 


receive 


render 


Tu 


pari 


-es 


chcr -is 


apei'9 -ois 


vend 




speakest 
d oil 11 




cherish est 


perceivest 


sellest 


11 


-e 


fourn -it 


per$ -oit 


tend 




gives 




furnishes 


gathers 


tends 


Nous 


cherch 


-ons 


pun -issons 


cone -evons 


entend 




seek 




punish 


conceive 


hear 


Vous 


port 


-ez 


sais -issez 


d -evez 


perd 




carry 




seize 


owe 


lose 


lis 


aim 


-ent 


un -issent 


de$ -oivent 


mord 




love, like 




unite 


deceive 


bite 



-on* 



-ez 

-ent 



6. The present of the indicative has but one form in French, there- 
fore Je chante, may be rendered in English by, / sing, I do sing, or 
I am singing. 

7. The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from 
the participle present by changing ant into ons, ez ent. Ex : chantant, 
nous chantons; finissant, nous finissons ; recevant, nous recevons ; 
rendant, nous Tendons. 

8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but in almost 
all the irregular verbs. 

9. Verbs may be conjugated interrogatively in French (except in 
the first person singular of the present of the indicative,) [§ 98 (4.) (5.)?] 
by placing the pronoun after the verb in all the simple tenses, and 
between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses. 



Chantez vous bien 1 

Avez vous bien chante % 

N'avez vous pas bien chante 1 

[L. 7, R. 2.] 
Ne chantez vous pas bien ? 
Votre pere parle-t-il bien 1 [L. 4, R. 

6— L. 6, R. 4.] 



Do you sing well ? 
Have you sung well ? 
Have you not sung well ? 

Do you not sing well ? 
Does your father speak well? 



10. The verb porter means to carry. It means also to wear, in 
epeaking of garments ; apporter means to bring, and emporter to carry 
away; aimer means to love, to like, to be fond of, and takes the prepo- 
sition a before another verb. 



Quel habit portez vous'? 

Je porte un habit de drap noir. 

Votre frere qu' apporte-t-il ? [L. 4, 

R. 6.] 
II apporte de l'argent a son ami. 



Wliat coat do you wear? 
I 'wear a coat of black cloth. 
What docs your brother bring ? 



He brings money to his friend. 

11. A noun used in a general sense [J 77 (1.)] takes the article le, 
ia, 1', or les. 

Aimez vous le boeuf ou le mouton 1 Do you like beef or mutton ? 
Je n'aime ni le boeuf ni le mouton. / like neither beef nor mutton. 



LESSON XXIII. 



*9 



Resume of Examples. 



Chantez vous une chanson ita- 

lienne 7 
Nous chantons des chansons alle- 

mandes. 
Porte z vous ce livre a l'honime 1 
Non, je le porte a nion frere. 
Emportez vous tout votre argent 7 
J'en emporte seulement une partie. 
Finissez vous votre lecon aujour- 

d'huH 
Nous la finissons ce matin. 
N'aimez vous pas les enfants atten- 

tifs? 
Je les aime beaucoup. 
Ne recevez vous pas beaucoup de 

lettres 1 
Nous en recevons beaucoup. 
Vendez vous beaucoup de marchan- 

dises 1 
Nous en vendons beaucoup. 
Votre frere aime le boeuf et le mou- 

ton. 



Do you sing an Italian song ? 

We sing German songs. 

Do you carry this book to tXe man 7 
No, I carry it to my brother. 
Do you carry away all your money ? 
I carry away only a 'part of it. 
Do you finish your lesson to-day ? 

We finish it this morning. 

Do you not like attentive children ? 

I like them much. 

Do you not receive many letters ? 

We receive many letters. 
Do you sell many goods ? 

We sell many. 

Your brother likes beef and mutton 



Exercise 43. 

[ We shall hereafter put a hyphen between the stem and the termination oj 
Lie verbs placed in the vocabularies. The number indicates the conjugation. , J 

Non seulement, not only ; 
Lecture, f. reading ; 
Paille, f. straw ; 
Perd-re, 4. to lose ; 
Port-er, 1. to carry , to 

wear ; 
Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; 
Souvent, often ; 
Toujours, always; 
Travail, m. labor ; 



Aim-er, 1. to love, to 

like, to be fond of; 
Autre, other ; 
Assez, enough; 
Chapeau, m. hat ; 
Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; 



Donn-er, 1. to give; 
Fin-ir, 2. to finish; 
Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish ; 
Gard-er, 1. to keep ; 
Guere, but little ; 
Habits, m. p. clothes, 



Cherch-er, 1. to seek, to garments; 

look for ; Mais, but ; 

Compagnon ; m. compan- Maison. f. house; 

ion ; Marchand, m. merchan t ; 

Dame, f. lady; Marchandises, f.p. goods; Trouv-er, 1. to find; 

De bonne heure, early ; Neveu, m. nephew ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 
D-evoir, 3. to owe; 

1. Votre mere aim e-t-elle la lecture? [R. 11.] 2. Oui, Mademoi 
selle, elle Faime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau votre 
neveu porte-t-il ? 4. II porte un chapeau de soie, et je porte un cha- 
peau de paille. 5. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants? 6. ( ; , 
Monsieur, elle les cherit. 7. Fournissez vous des marchandises a 
ces marchands ? 8. Je fournis des marchandises a ces marchands, et 
ils me donnent de Pargent. 9. Vos compagnons aiment ils les beaux 
habits? [R. 11.] 10. Nos compagnons aiment les beaux habits et 
les bons livres. 11. Cherchez vous mon frere? 12. Oui, Monsieur, 
je le cherche mais je ne le trouve pas. 13. Votre frere perd-il son 



80 LESSON XXII I. 

temps. 14. II perd son temps et son argent. 15. Perdons nout 
touj ours notre temps ? 16. Nous le perdons tres eouvent. 17. De- 
vez vous beaueoup d'argent? 18. J'en dois assez, mais je n'en dois 
pas beaueoup. 19. Vendez vous vos deux maisons a notre mede- 
cin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde l'autre pour ma belle-sceur. 
21. Recevez vous de l'argent aujourd'hui? 22. Nous n'en recevona 
gueie. 23. Votre menuisier finit il son travail de bonne heure ? 
24. II le finit tard. 25. A quelle heure le finit il ? 26. II le finit a 
midi et demi. 27. Nous finissons le notre a dix heures moins vingt 
minutes. 

Exercise 44. 

1. Does your companion like reading] 2. My companion does 
not like reading. 3. Does your father like good books? [R. 11.] 
4. He likes good books and good clothes * 5. Do you owe more 
than twenty dollars ? 6.1 only owe ten, but my brother owes more 
than fifteen. 7. Are you wrong to finish your work early ? 8. I am 
right to finish mine early, and you are wrong not to (de ne pas) fin- 
ish yours. 9. Do you receive much money to-day ? 10. I receive 
but little. 11. Do we give our best books to that little child ? 12. 
We do not give them, we keep them because (parceque) we want 
them. 13. Do you sell your two horses? 14. We do not sell our 
two horses, we keep one of them. 15. Do you finish your work 
this morning (matin) ? 16. Yes, Sir, I finish it this morning early. 
17. Does your brother-in-law like fine clothes ? 18. Yes, Madam, he 
likes fine clothes. 19. Do you seek my nephew? 20. Yes, Sir, we 
seek him. 21. Does he lose nistime? 22. He loses not only his 
time, but he loses money. 23. How much money has he lost to- 
day ? 24. He has lost more than ten dollars. 25. Does your joiner 
finish your house ? 26. He finishes my house and my brothers. 
27. Do you sell good hats ? 28. We sell silk hats, and silk hats are 
good. [R. 11.] 29. How old is your companion ? 30. He is twelve 
years old, and his sister is fifteen. 31. Does your brother like meat? 
2. He likes meat and bread. 33. Do you receive your goods at 
two o'clock? 34. We receive them at half after twelve. 35. We 
receive them ten minutes before one. 



* Repeat the article. 



LESSON XXIV. 81 



LESSOX XXIV. LECON XXIV. 

I. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which are 
cailed irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the 
rule, or mode] verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [§ 62.] 

2 Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated regu- 
larly. 

3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular 
verbs, is almost always irregular. 

4. In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i before an e mute. 
tt 49.] 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs. 

Aller. 1. to go; Envoyer, 1. to send; Venir, 2. to come ; 

Je vais, I go, do go, or J'envoie [R. 4.] I send, do Je viens, / come, do come, 

am going ; send, or am sending ; or am coming ; 

Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, 

II va, II envoie, II vient, 

Nous allons, Nous envoyons, Nous venons, 

Vous allez, Vous envoyez, Vous venez, 

lis vont, lis envoient [R. 4.] lis viennent. 

6. All verbs ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 

7. The student will find in \ 62 the irregular verbs alphabetically 
arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with 
an irregular verb. 

8. The expression, a la maison, is used for the English at home, at 
his or her house, &c. 

Le chirurgien est il a la maison % Is tJie surgeon at home ? 

Mon frcre est a la maison. My brother is at home. 

9. The preposition chez, placed before «* noun or pronoun, answers 
to the English, at the house of, with (meaning ai the residence of), 
among, etc. [} 142, (3.)] 

Chez moi, chez lui, chez elle, At my house, at his house, at her house. 

Chez nous, chez vous, chez eux, m. At our house, at your house, at tlvei/ 
chez elles, f. house. 

That is literally, at the house of me, at the house of him, &c. 

Chez mon pere, chez ma soeur, At my father's, at my sister's. 

10. The word avec answers to the English with, meaning merely 
in the company of 

Venez avec nous, ou avec lui. Come with us, or with him. 

II. The word y means to it, at it, at that place, there. It is gene** 

4* 



82 



LESSON XXIV. 



ally placed before the verb, and refers always to something men 
tioned. [} 39, { 103, § 104.] 

Votre soeur est elle chez vous % Is your sister at your house ? 

Oui, Monsieur, elle y est. Yes, Sir, she is there. 

12. In French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of 
an auxiliary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do 
you come to my house to-day? / do. Have you books? J have. 
The sentence in French must be complete; as, / go there; I haw 
some. The words oui or non, without a verb would however suffice. 



Yenez vous chez moi aujourd'hui 1 
Oui, Monsieur, j 'irai. 
Avez vous des livres chez vous 1 
Oui, Monsieur, nous en avons. 



Do you come to my house to-day ? 

Yes, Sir, I will. 

Have you books at home ? 

Yes, Sir, we have. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ou est le colonel ^ 

II est chez son frere aine. 

N'est il pas chez nous ? 

Non, Monsieur, il n'y est pas. 

Madame votre mere est elle a la 

maison 7* 
Non, Madame, elle n'y est pas. 
Allez vous chez nous, ou chez lui 1 

Nous allons chez le capitaine. 
N'est il pas chez votre frere 1 
Non, Monsieur, il est chez nous. 
N'envoyez vous pas vos habits chez 

vos soeurs 1 
Je les envoie chez elles. 
N'allez vous pas chez ce monsieur ? 
Je n'y vais pas, je n'ai pas le temps 

d'y aller aujourd'hui. 



Where is the colonel ? 

He is at his eldest brother's. 

Is he not at our house ? 

No, Sir, he is not. 

Is your mother at home ? 

No, Madam, she is not. 

Do you go to our house, or to his 

house? 
We go to the captain 's. 
Is he not at your brother's ? 
No, Sir, he is at our house. 
Do you not send your clothes to your 

sisters 1 ? 
I send them to their house. 
Do you not go to that gentleman's ? 
I do not, [R. 12.] 7 have not time to 

go there to-day. 



Exercise 45. 

All-er, 1. ir, to go ; Horloger, m. watch-ma- Relieur, m. book-binder: 

Ami, m. friend; ker ; Rest-er, 1. to remain, 

Associe, m. partner; Hollandais, e, Dutch ; live; 

Capitaine, m. captain; Magasin, m. warehouse; Russe, Russian; 

Demeur-er, 1. to live, Maison, f. house ; Ven-ir, 2. ir, to come ; 

dwell; Matin, m. morning ; Voisin ; e, neighbor. 

Gilet, m. waistcoat ; Peintre, m. painter ; 

1. Oa allez vous mon ami? 2. Je vais chez Monsieur votre pere, 
est il a la maison? 3. II y est ce matin. 4. D'ou venez vous? 5. 

Nous venons de chez vous et de chez votre soeur. 6. Qui est chez 

— , , — , — 

* The French in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix the 
word Monsieur. Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representing their 
interlocutor's relations, or friends. 



LESSON XXIV. 83 

nous ? 7. Mon voisin y est aujourd'hui. 8. Ou avez vous l'inten- 
tion de porter ces livres ? 9. J'ai rintention de les porter chez le fils 
du medecin. 10. Avez vous tort de rester chez vous? 11. Je n'ai 
pas tort de rester a la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnes 
montres chez lui? 13. II n'a pas de montres chez lui, il en a dans 
son magasin. 14. Chez qui portez vous vos livres? 15. Je les 
porte chez le relieur. 16. Allez vous chez le capitaine hollandais ? 
17. Nous n'allons pas chez le capitaine hollandais, nous allons chez 
le major russe. 18. Est il chez vous ou chez votre frere? 19. II 
derneure chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons nous pas chez votre tail- 
leur? 21. Vous y demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'oii vient il? 23. 
II vient de chez son associe. 24. Ou portez vous mes souliers et 
mon gilet ? 25. Je porte vos souliers chez le cordonnier et votro 
gilet chez le tailleur. 

Exercise 46. 

1. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. 6. J to 
your house or to your brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to 
your partner's ? 4. He intends to go there, but he has no time to-day. 
5. What do you want to-day ? 6. I want my waistcoat, which (qui) 
is at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's ? 8. They are 
not there, they are at the tailor's. 9. Where do you live, my friend ? 
10. I live at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at home? 12. 
No, Sir, he is not. 13. Where does your servant carry the wood? 
14. He carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman 
who (qui) is with your father live at his house? 16. No, Sir, he 
lives with me. 17. Is he wrong to live with you? 18. No, Sir, he is 
right to live with me. 19. Whence (J'ou) comes the carpenter? 
20. He comes from his partner's house. 21. Has he two partners? 
22. No, Sir, he has only one, who lives here (ici). 23. Have you 
time to go to our house this morning ? 24. We have time to go 
there. 25. We intend to go there and to speak to your sister. 26. 
Is she at your house ? 27. She is at her (own) house. 28. Have you 
bread, butter, and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butter 
there. 30. We have no cheese there, we do not like cheese. 31. 
Is your watch at the watchmaker's? 32. It (elle) is there. 33. 
Have you two gold watches ? 34. I have only one gold watch. 35. 
Who intends to go to my father's this morning ? 36. Nobody in- 
tends to go there. 



84 LI880K XXV 



LESSON XXV. LEgON XXV 

1. In the first person singular of the present of the indicative of 

almost all those French verbs, which in that person have only one 

syllable, the common interrogative form [L. 23. 9.] is not allowed 

To render the verb interrogative, the expression est-ce que is prefixed 

to the affirmative form. [} 98, (5.) (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vends du drap 1 Do I sell cloth ? 

Est-ce que je joue souvent % Do I play often ? 

2. The first person singular of the indicative of avoir, to have; 
etre, to be ; aller, to go ; pouvoir, to be able ; devoir, to owe ; savoir. 
to know, etc., may, however, be conjugated interrogatively according 
to the general rules. 

Ai-je vos mouchoirs 1 Have I yow handkerchiefs ? 

Combien vous dois-je % Hmv much do I owe you ? 

3. The form est-ce que is always allowable, and sometimes prefer- 
able, when the first person singular of the present of the indicative 
of a verb has several syllables, [§ 98, (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vous envoie des livres 7 Do I send you books ? 

Est-ce que je commence a parler 1 Do I begin to speak? 

4. Est-ce que may, in familiar conversation, be used with all the 
persons of those tenses susceptible of being conjugated interroga- 
tively : — Qu'est-ce que vous lisez 1 may be said, instead of, que hsez 
vous? What do you read? 

5. Interrogative Form of the Indicative Present c^ 

Aller, to go. Envoyer, to send,. Venir, to come. 

Est-ce que je vais 1 do I Est-ce que j 'envoie 1 do Est-ce que je viem 1 d* 
go, or am I going ? I send, or am I sending? I come, or am Ice. ing'i 

Vas-tu 1 Envoies-tu ] Viens-tu 1 

Va-t-il 1 . Envoie-t-il 1 Yient-il 1 

Allons nous 1 Envoy ons nous ? Venons nous 1 

Allez vous 1 Envoyez vous 1 Venez vous 1 

Vont ils 1 Envoient ils 1 Viennent ils ] 

6. The article le, preceded by the preposition a is contracted into 
au before a noun masculine commencing with a consonant, or an ft 
aspirate; and into aux before a plural noun. [{ 13, (8.)] 

Allez vous au bal ou au marche 1 Do you, go to the ball or to market ? 

7. A Feglise means at or to church; a l'ecole, at or to school: — 
Nous allons a Teglise et a lecole. Wc go to church and to stkooL 

8. Quelque part, means somewhere, anywhere; nulle part, no- 
where 



LESSON XXV. 



85 



Votre neveu ou est il 1 
H est quelque part. 
II n'est nulle part. 



Where is your nephew ? 
He is somewhere. 
He is nowhere. 



Resume of Examples. 



Est-ce que je vais a l'ecole 1 

Vous allez a l'eglise aujourd'hui. 

Est-ce que je commence mon tra- 
vail 1 

Est-ce que je parle anglais 7 

E^t-ce que j'envoie ce livre a mon 
frere 1 

Allez vous au marche demain 1 

J'y vais apres-demain. 

Envoyez vous vos enfants a. l'ecole 1 

Je les envoie chez le professeur. 

Je les y envoie cette apres-midi. 

Vos habits ou sont ils 1 

lis sont quelque part. 

Ils ne sont nulle part. 

Est-ce que je demeure chez vous 1 

Est-ce que je mange trop 7 



Do I go to school? 
You go to church to-day. 
Do I begin my work ? 

Do I speak English ? 

Do I send this book to my brother ? 

Do you go to market to-morrow ? 

I go there t/ie day after to-morrow. 

Do you send your children to school ? 

I send them to the professor's. 

I send them there this afternoon. 

Where are your clothes ? 

They are somewhere. 

They are nowhere. 

Do I live at your house ? 

Do I eat too much ? 



Exercise 47. 

Cuir, m. leather; 
Depuis, since; 
Ecole, f. sclwol; 
Ecolier, m. scholar ; 
Eglise, f. church; 
Marche, m. market; 
Noir, e, black; 



Perruquier, m. hair-dres~ 

ser ; 
Point, not; 
Poste, f. post-office ; 
Rouge, red; 
Village, m. village; 
Vert, e, green. 



Absent, e, absent; 
Adresse, f. address; 
Banque, f. bank; 
Banquier, m. banker ; 
Billet, m. note; ticket; 
Chapelier, m. hatter ; 
Concert, m. concert ; 
Coup-er, 1. to cut; 

1. Oii est-ce que je vais 1 ? 2. Vous allez chez le chapelier. 3. Est-ce 
que je vais a la banque ? 4. Vous allez a la banque et au concert. 
5. Est-ce que je coupe votre bois? 6. Vous ne coupez ni mon bois 
ni mon habit. 7. Est-ce que je porte un chapeau vert? 8. Vous ne 
portez pas un chapeau vert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Votre 
ecolier va-t-il quelque part? 10. II va a l'eglise, a l'ecole et au 
marche. 11. Ne va-t-il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nulle 
part. 13. Ne portez vous point des bottes de cuir rouge? 14. J'en 
porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez vous pas chez le banquier? 16. Je 
ne vais pas chez lui, il est absent depuis hier. 17. Vient il a la 
banque ce matin? 18. II a l'intention d'y venir, s'il a le temps.* 19. 
A-t-il envie d'aller au concert? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, mais 
il n'a pas de billet. 21. Demeurez vous dans ce village? 22. v Qui, 



* The i of si is elided before il, ils, but in no other case, 
•nly instance of the elision of i. 



This is the 



86 LESSON XXVI. 

Monsieur, j'y demeure. 24. Envoyez vous ce billet a la poste? 25, 
Je l'envoie a. son adresse. 

Exercise 48. 

1. Do I wear my large black hat? 2. You wear a handsome green 
l.at. 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning? 4. 
He goes there this morning. 5. Does he intend to go to the bank 
this morning ? 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time. 
7. Do you send your letters to the post-office ? 8. I do not send 
them, they are not yet written (ecrites). 9. Do I send you a note? 

10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert. 

11. Does your brother go to school to-morrow? 12. He goes (there) 
to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13. Do I go there? 14. You 
do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go? 16. I am going to 
your brother's, is he at home ? 17. He is not at home, he is absent 
since yesterday. 18. Does your brother live in this village? 19. He 
does not, [L. 24. 12.] he lives at my nephew's. 20. Are you wrong 
to go to school? 21. No, Sir, I am right to go to church and to 
schooL 22. Do you wish to come to my house ? 23. I like to go to 
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to 
our house? 25. To-morrow, if I have time. 26. Does the banker 
like to come here ? 27. He likes to come to your house. 28. Is the 
hair-dresser coming? 29. He is not yet coming. 30. What are you 
sending to the scholar? 31. 1 am sending books, paper, and clothes. 
32. Where is he ? 33. He is at school. 34. Is the school in the vil- 
lage ? 35. It is there. 



LESSON XXVI. LECON XXVI. 

1. The verb aller, is used, in French, in the same manner as tho 
verb to go, in English, to indicate a proximate future. 

Allez vous ecrire ce matin? Arc you going to write this morning-? 

Je vais ecrire mes lettres. / am got/iir to write my letters. 

2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a 

past just elapsed. It requires, in this signification, the preposition 

de before another verb. 

Je viens d'ecrire mes lettres. J have just written my letters. 

Nous venons de recevoir des lettres. We have just received letters. 

3. Aller trouver, venir trouver, are used in the sense of to go to, 



LESSON XXVI. 87 

to come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing per. 
6ons • — 

Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. 

J'ai envie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to go to him. 

Venez me trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 

4. Aller chercher, means to go for, to go and fetch : — 

Allez cherclier le niedecin. Go and fetch the physician. 

Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. / am going for coffee and sugar 

5. Envoyer chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch ;— 

Envoyez chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. 

J'envoie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 

6. The first and second persons of the plural of the imperative 
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of 
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not 
used with the imperative. 

7. Plural of the Imperative of Aller, Envoyer, and 

Venir. 

Allons, let us go; Envoyons, let us send; Venons, let us come; 

Allez. go; Envoyez, send ; Venez, come. 

8. Tous, m. t jutes, f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, 

are used in French in the same sense as the word every in English. 

Votre frero vient tous les jours. Your brother comes every day. 

Vous allez a l'ecole tous les matins. You go to school every morning. 

9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by le or la and the noun in the 
singular, are used for the English expression the ichole coming before 
a noun. 

II reste ici toute la journee. He remains here the whole day. 

10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as the time 
of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a preposi- 
tion in French. 

Venez lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. 

Venez le quinze ou le seize avril. Come on the fifteenth or sixteenth 

of April. 

11. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, the 

article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day. 

II vient nous trouver le lundi. He comes to us Mondays. 

II va trouver votre pere l'apres-midi. He goes to your father in the afternoon, 



Resume of Examples 

tre pere. I / am going 

iir de l'argent. We have jus 
Que venez vous de faire 1 | What have you just doiu? 



Je vais parler a M. votre pere. I / am going to speak to your father. 

Nous venons de recevoir de l'argent. We have just received money. 



88 



LESSON XXVI. 



Je viens de dcchirer mon habit. 
Votre frere va-t-il trouver son ami % 
II va le trouver tous les jours. 
II vient me trouver tous les lundis. 
Allez vous chercher de l'argent ? 
Je n'en vais pas chercher. 
Envoyez vous chercher des livres 

arabes ? 
Allez vous chez cette dame lundi % 

J'ai l'intention d'y aller mardi. 
J'y vais ordinairement le mercredi. 
II va a l'eglise le dimanche. 



/ have just torn my coed. 

Does your brother go to his friend ? 

He goes to him every day. 

He comes to me every Monday. 

Do you go and fetch money ? 

I do not. [L24. 12.] 

Do you send for Arabic books ? 

Do you go to thai lady's house 09 

Monday ? 
I intend to go there on Tuesday. 
I generally go there Wednesdays. 
He goes to church Sundays. 



Mardi, m. Tuesday ; 
Mercredi, m. Wednes* 

day ; 
Musique, f. music ; 
Prochain. e, next; 
Vendredi, m. Friday ; 
Rest-er, 1. to remain t 

live ; 
Samedi, Saturday ; 
Teinturier, m. dyer. 



Exercise 49. 

Annee, f. year ; Dimanche. m. Sunday ; 

Apprend-re,4.ir.fofe#?7i;Ecossais, e, Scotch; 
Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; 
Commenc-er ; 1. to com- Enseign-er, 1. to teach; 

mence; Excepts, except; 

Compagne, f, compan- Jeudi, m. Thursday ; 

ion ; Journee, f. day ; 

Connaissances, f. ac- Irlandais, e, Irish ; 

quaintances ; Lundi, m. Monday ; 

Demain, to-morrow ; Malade, sick; 

1. Qu'allez vous faire ? 2. Je vais apprendre mes lecons 
3. N'allez vous pas ecrire a vos connaissances'? 4. Je nevais ecrins 
a personne. 5. Qui vient de vous parler ? 6. L'Irlandais vient da 
nous parler. 7. Quand l'Ecossaise va-t-elle vous enseigner la mu- 
sique ? 8. Elle va me Fenseigner Pannee prochaine. 9. Va-t-elle 
commencer mardi ou mercredi? 10. Elle ne va commencer ni mardi 
ni mercredi, elle a l'intention de commencer jeudi, si elle a le temps. 
11. Votre compagne va-t-elle a l'eglise tous les dimanches ? 12. Elle 
y va tous les dimanches et tous les mercredis. 13. Qui allez vous 
trouver? 14. Je ne vais trouver personne. 15. N'avez vous pas 
l'intention de venir me trouver demain? 16. J'ai l'intention d'aller 
trouver votre teinturier. 17. Envoyez vous chercher le medecin? 
18. Quand je suis malade, je l'envoie chercher. 19. Reste-t-il avee 
vous toute la journee? 20. II ne reste chez moi que que^ques 
minutes. 21. Allez vous a l'ecole le matin? 22. J'y vais le matin 
et Fapres-midi. 23. Y allez vous tous les jouis? 24. J'y vais tous 
les jours excepte le lundi et le dimanche. 25. Le samedi je reste chez 
nous, et le dimanche je vais a l'eglise. 

Exercise 50. 

1. What is the Irishman going to do? 2. He is going to teach ' 
music. 3. Has he just commenced his work ? 4. He has just com 



LESSON XXTII. 39 

menced it 5. Who has just written to you ? 6. The dyer has just 
written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day? 
8. No, Sir, he goes to church Sundays and he goes to school every 
day. 9. Do you go for the physician ? 10. I send for him because 
(jparceque) my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician or to 
yours? 12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13 Where is he? 
11. He is at your father's or at your brother's. 15. Do you inten 
to send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am I 
rigut to send for the Scotchman? 18. You are wrong to send for 
him. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon? 20. I go to 
nim in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's every 
Monday? 22. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going to 
learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time. 
25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are going to read to 
morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day? 28. He comes 
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter 
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He comes at a 
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for 
wine, bread, butter and cheese. 35. What do you go for? 36. We 
go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want sugar every 
morning. 



lesson xxvn. LEgosr xxvn. 

PLACE OF THE PRONOUNS. 

1. The personal pronoun used as the direct regimen [} 2, (2.) {42, 
(4.)] or object of a verb * is in French placed before the verb, except in 
the second person singular or in the first and second persons plural 
of the imperative used affirmatively. 

II me voit. il 1'aime. He sees me, he loves him. 

II nous aime, il vous airne. He loves us, he loves you. 

2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the 
verb, [} 2, (3.) $42, (5.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and to 
the indirect object of the English with the preposition to expressed 
or understood, is also in French placed before the verb :— 



* The young student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used 
as the direct regimen of a verb, by the fact that there is in English no 
preposition between the verb and this pronoun. 



90 



LESSON XXVII. 



He speaks to me, he speahs to Mm 

He gives us a flower.* 

He speaks to you, he speaks to them. 



H me parle, il lui parle. , 
II nous donne une fleur. 
II vous parle, il leur parle. 

3. The personal pronoun is generally placed after the following 

verbs: aller, to go; accourir, to run to; courir, to run; venir, to 

come ; penser a, songer a, to think of: — 

II vient a moi. He comes to me. 

II pense a vous, a eux. He thinks of you, of them. 

4. In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow the 
verb : — 

Aimez les, parlez leur. Love them, speak to them. " 

5. The words en and y follow the above rules, except the 3d. 
J'en parle, j'y pense. / speak of it, I think of it. 

6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- 
tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which in 
English is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is 
in French always placed after the verb : — 

Je parle de lui, d'elle, d'eux. I speak of him, of her, of them. 

Je reste avec vous et avec eux. I remain with you and with them. 

7. All pronouns used as objects of verbs, must be repeated : — 

Je les aime, je les respecte, je les / love them, respect and honor tliem 
honore. 

Resume of Examples. — See § 32. 



M'entendez vous ? 

Je ne vous entends pas. 

Les entendez vous 1 

Je les vois et je les entends. 

II nous aime et il nous honore, 

Me parlez vous de votre ami 1 

Je vous parle de lui. [R. 6.] 

Nous parlez vous de ces dames 1 

Je vous parle d'elles. 

Ne leur parlez vous pas 1 

Je n'ai pas envie de leur parler. 

Parlez lui, — ne lui parlez pas. 

Allez a lui, courez a lui. 
Parlez leur, — ne leur parlez pas. 



Affaire, f. affair ; 
Arbre, m. tree ; 
Avis, m. advice ; 
Cerisier, m. cherry-tree i 

.*9mmuniqu-er,l.&?awt-Exenrple, m. example 
municate ; 



Do you hear or understand me ? 

I do not understand or hear you. 

Do you hear them ? 

I see them and understand them. 

He loves and honors us. 

Do you speak to me of your friend ? 

I speak to you of him. 

Do you speak to us about those ladies ? 

I speak to you of them. 

Do you not speak to them ? 

I have no wish to speak to them. 

Speak to him or her — do not speak U 

him. 
Go to him — run to him. 
Speak to them, — do not speak to them. 

Exercise 51. 

Compagnon, m. compan- Nouvclle, f. news; 

ion; Pens-er, 1. to think; 

Deja, already ; Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 

Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; Pommier, m. apple-tree; 
Respect-er, 1. to respect, 



* The preposition to is understood. He gives a flower to us. 



LESSON XXVII. 91 

1. Allez vous lui ecrire ? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer 
cette nouvelie. 3. Allez vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- 
ler de vous et de votre compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez vous de beaux 
arbrcs ? 6. Je leur envoie des pornmiers, des poiriers, et des censiers ? 
7. Ne m'envoyez vous pas des cerisiers ? 8. Je ne vous en envoie 
pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez vous raison de leur parler de cette 
alFaire? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de cette affaire. 11. Ve- 
nez a nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous trouver, cette apres-midi. 
13. Ailez vous les trouver tous les jours? 14. Je vais les trouver 
tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez vous de bons avis? 16. Je leur 
donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17. Nous parlez vous de 
vossoeurs? 18. Je vous parle d'elles. 19. Ne nous parlez vous pas 
de nos freres? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne les aimez vous 
pas ? 22. Nous les aimons et nous les respe^ions. 23. Pensez vou'i 
a ce livre ou n'y pensez vous pas? 24. Nuus y pensons et nous en 
parlons. 25. Nous n'y pensons pas. 

Exercise 52. 
1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going 
to write to him to-morrow morning. 3. Do you intend to write to 
him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 5. 
Have you a wish to speak to him to-day ? 6. I have a wish to speak 
to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his house. 
9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, Sir, I speak to them about (de) 
this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice? 12. They give me 
good advice and good examples. 13. Do you go to your sister every 
day? 14. I go to her every morning at a quarter before nine. 15. 
Does she like to see (voir) you? 16. She likes to see me and she 
receives me well. 17. Do you think of this affair? 18. I think of it 
the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with (avec) your brother? 
20. We speak of it often. 21. Do you send your companion to my 
house ? 22. I send him every day. 23-. Are you at home every 
dar? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 25. Do you like 
to go to church ? 26: I like to go there every Sunday and every 
Wednesday. 27. Do you speak of your houses ? 28. I speak of 
them (en). 29. Does your brother speak of his friends? 30. Yes, 
Sir, he speaks of them (d'eux). 31. Does he think of them ? 32. 
Yes, Sir, he thinks of them (d eux). 33. Does he think of this news t 
84. Yes, Sir, he thinks of it (y). 35. I love and honor them. 



92 LESSON XXVIII. 

LESSON XXVIIL LEgON XXVHL 

RESPECTIVE PLACE OF THE PRONOUNS. See $ 101 

1. When two pronouns occur, one used as a direct regimen or ob* 

ject (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object 

(dative), the indirect object, if not in the third person singular or plu* 

ral, must precede the direct object. [§ 101, (1.)] 

Je vous le donne. I give it to you. 

II me le donne. He gives it to Trie. 

II nous le donne. He gives it to us. 

2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object [dative, Rule 2 

L, 26.] is in the third person singular or plural, it must be placed 

after the direct object. [$ 101, (2.)] 

Nous le lui donnons. We give it to him. 

Nous le leur donnons. We give it to them. 

3. The above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used 

negatively : — 

Ne nous le donnez pas. [R. 1.] Do not give tt to us. 

Ne le lui donnez pas. [R. 2.] Do not give it him. 

4. With the imperative used affirmatively, the direct object pre- 
cedes in all cases the indirect object. [§ 101, (5.)] 

Donnez le nous. Give it to us. 

Montrez le leur. Show it to them. 

5. En and y always follow the other pronouns : — 

Je lui en donne. I give him some. 

II nous y envoie. He sends us thither. 

6. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs, 

Voir, to see; Voulojr, to will, be wil- Pouvoir, to be able; 
ling; 

Je vois, I see, do see, or Je veux, J will or am Je puis, / can, I may, i 

am seeing ; willing ; am able ; 

Tu vois, Tu veux, Tu peux,* 

II voit, II veut, II peut, 

Nous voyons, Nous voulons, Nous pouvons, 

Vous voyez, Vous voulez, Vous pouvez, 

lis voient, lis veulent, lis peuvent. 

7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb. 

8. The preposition, pour, is used to render the preposition to, whe* 
the latter means in order to. 

Je vais chez vous pour parler a vo- I go to yimr house to speak to yom 
tre frere et pour vous voir. brother and to see you. 

* After the verbs pouvoir, to be able ; oser, to dare savoir, to know 
the negative pas may be omitted. 



LESSON XXVIII. 



93 



J'ai besoin (Targent pour acheter / want money to {in ordei to) buf 
des marcliandises. goods. 

Kesume of Examples. 



Voulez vous nous le donner 7 

Je veux vous le preter. 

Pouvez vous me les donner 1 

Je ne puis vous les donner. 

Votre frere peut il le lui envoyer 1 

II ne veut pas le lui envoyer. 

Qui veut le leur preter ? 

Personne ne veut le leur preter. 

Envoyez les nous. 

Ne nous les envoyez paa. 

Donnez nous en. 

Ne leur en envoyez pas. 

Envoyez le leur, pour les concenter. 

Je puis vous l'y envoyer. 



Will you give it to us? 

I will lend it to you. 

Can you g^xe titem to me ? 

I cannot give them to you. 

Can your brother send it to \imJ 

He vrill not send, it to him. 

Who will lend it to fluent ? 

No one will lend it to tJiem. 

Send them to us. 

Do not send them to us. 

Give us some (of it). 

Do not send them any. 

Send it to them (in order) to satisfy 

them. 
I can send it to you there. 



Exercise 53. 

Commis, m. clerk ; Guere, but little ; Poisson, m, fish; 

Connaissance, f. acquain- Marchande de modes, f. Pologne, f. Poland; 

tance; milliner; Preter, 1. to lend; 

Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Montr-er, 1. to show ; Semaine,/. week ; 

Dette, f. debt ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Souvent, often ; 

D-evoir, 3. to owe ; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Voulez vous donner ce livre a mon frere? 2. Je puis le lui 
preter, mais je ne puis le lui donner. 3. Voulez vous nous les en- 
voyer ? 4. La marchande de modes peut vous les envoyer. 5. Les 
lui montrez vous? 6. Je les vois et je les lui montre. 7. Avez vous 
peur de nous les preter? 8. Je n'ai pas peur de vous les preter. 9 
Ne pouvez vous nous envoyer du poisson? 10. Je ne puis vous en 
envoyer, je n'en ai guere. 11. Voulez vous leur en parler? 12. Je 
veux leur en parler, si je ne l'oublie pas. 13. Venez vous souvent 
les voir ? 14. Je viens les voir tous les matins, et tous les soirs. 15. 
Ne leur parlez vous point de votre voyage en Pologne ? 16. Je leur 
en parle, mais ils ne veulent pas me croire. 17. Est-ce que je vois mes 
connaissances, le lundi? 18. Vous les voyez tous les jours de la 
semaine. 19. Vous envoient elles plus d'argent que le commis de 
notre marchand? 20. Elles m'en envoient plus que lui. 21. Ed 
envoyez vous au libraire? 22. Je lui en envoie quand je lui en dois. 
23. N'avez vous pas tort de lui en envoyer ? 24. Je ne puis avoir 
tort de payer mes dettes. 25. lis vous en donnent, et ils vou? en 
present quand vous en avez besoin. 



94 LESSON XXIX. 



Exercise 54. 

1. Will you send us that letter? 2. I will send it to you, if you 
will read it. 3. I will read it if (si) I can. 4. Can you lend me'youi 
pen ? 5. I can lend it to you, if you will take care of it. [L. 22, (3.)] 
6. May I speak to your father ? 7. You may speak to him, he is 
here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I am 
not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will yrm send them to him ? 11. I 
intend to send them to him, if I have time. 12. Do you speak to 
him of your journey? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I 
speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him ? 16. I 
have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- 
quaintances svery Monday? 18. I see them every Monday and every 
Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them ? 20. I intend to 
see them at your brother's and at your sister's. 21. Can you send 
him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if he 
wishes (sHl le veut). 23. Can you give them to me ? 24. I can 
give them to you. 25. Who will lend them books ? 26. No one 
will lend them any. 27. Your bookseller is willing to sell them 
good books and good paper. 28. Is he at home ? 29. He is at his 
brother's. 30. Are you wrong to pay your debts? 31. I am right 
to pay them. 32. Will you send it to us ? 33. I am willing to send 
it to you, if you want it. 34. Are you willing to give them to us ? 
35. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances. 



LESSON XXIX. LEgON XXIX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE (§ 77.) 

1. The article le, la,les, as already stated, is used in French before 
nouns taken in a general sense : — 

Les jardins sont les ornements des Gardens are the ornaments of vil 
villages ec des campagnes. lages and of rural districts. 

2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouns 

taken in a particular sense : — 

Les jardins de ce village sont su- IVie gardens of this village are 9tf* 
perbes. perb. 

3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs and adjective! 
used substantively :— 



LESSON XXIX. 



95 



La paresse est odieuse. Idleness is odious. 

La jeunesse n'est pas toujours do- Youth is not always tractable, 

cilo. 

Le boire et le manger sont neces- Eating and drinking are necessary to 

saires a la vie. life. 

4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 

rivers, winds and mountains : — [$ 77, (3.) (4.)] 

La Francs est plus grande que France is larger than Italy, 

Tltalie. 
La Normandie est tres fertile. Normandy is very fertile, 

5. The article is used before titles : — 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le marechal Ney. 



General Cavaignac. 
Marshal Ney. 



6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, Monsieur, Ma- 
dame, Mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of 
relationship : — 



Monsieur le president. 
Madame la comtesse. 
Mademoiselle votre soeur. 



{Mr.) President. 
{Madam) Countess. 
{Miss) your sister. 



7. The plural of Monsieur, Madame and Mademoiselle, is Messieurs, 
Mesdames, and Mesdemoiselles. 

8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun taken in a 
general or in a particular sense from one taken in a partitive sense 
[j 78.] 

General or 'particular sense. Partitive sense. 

Nous aimons les livres, Nous avons des livres, 

We like books. We have books i. e. some books. 

Nous avons les livres, Vous avez ecrit des lettres. 

We have the books. You have written letters, i. e. some 

letters. 



Resume of Examples. 



La modestie est aimable. 

Le courage est indispensable au 
general. 

Les fleurs sont l'ornement des jar- 
dins. 

Les fleurs des jardins de ce chateau. 

Avez vous l'intention de visiter la 

France ? 
J'ai Tintention de visiter lltalie. 
Le capitaine Dumont est il ici ? 
Le major Guillaume est chez lui. 
Voyez vous Madame votre mere? 
Je vois Monsieur votre frere. 
Men frere n'aime pas les louanges. 



Modesty is amiable. 
Courage is indispensable to the gene- 
ral. 
Moicers arc the ornament of gardens. 

The flowers of the gardens of this 

villa. 
Do you intend visiting Fance? 



I intend visiting Italy. 
Is captain Dunumt here? 
Major William is at home, 
Do you see your mothei 1 
I see your brother. 
My brother is not fond of 



90 LB8SON XXIX. 

Exercise 55. 

Aim-er,l. to be fond */ Demeur-er, 1. to dwell, L6gume, m. vegetal / 

, i.i live ' JLiOin, josi > 

ApDort-CT 1 to bring; £tudi-er, 1. to study; Lunch, m. M™<%; 
vZ^wood, forest* Fleur, f. /fowr ; Peche, f. geacft ; 

Capitaine, m. captain ; Fraise, f. drowfarw; Prune, f. plum. 
Caporal, m. corporal; Framboise, f. raspberry ; 

1 Aimez vous le pain ou la viande ? 2. J'aime le pain, la viande, 
et le fruit. 3. Avons nous des peches dans notre jardin? 4. Nous y 
avons des peches, des fraises, des framboises et des cerises 5. Mon- 
sieur votre frere aime-t-il les cerises ! 6. II n'aime guere les cerises, 
il prefere les prunes. 7. Avez vous des legumes? 8. Je na.me 
point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legumes m fruits. [L.8.3,i.\ 
10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes ni les fruits. 11. Allez vous tons 
les jours dans le bois de Monsieur votre frere? 12. Je n y va.s pas 
tous les jours. 13. Votre sceur apporte-t-elle les fleurs ? 14. Elle 
les apporte. 15. Madame votre mere apporte-t-elle des neurs . 
16. Elle en apporte tous les lundis. 17. Voyez vous le general Ber- 
trand ? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vois le caporal Duchene. 19. Mes- 
demoiselles vos soeurs sont elles fatiguees? 20. Mes sceurs sont 
fatiguees d'etudier. 21. Monsieur le president est-il chez tan. 
22 Non, Monsieur, il est chez Monsieur le colonel Dumont. 23. JJe- 
meure-t-il loin d'ici? 24. II ne demeure pas loin d'ici 25. OH 
demeure-t-il? 26. II demeure chez Monsieur le capitame Lebrun. 

Exercise 56. 
1. Does your sister like flowers? 2. My sister likes flowers, and 
my brother is fond of books. 3. Is he wrong to like books ? 4. No, 
Sir, he is right to like books and flowers. 5. Have you many flowers 
in your gardens? 6. We have many flowers and much fruit. 7. Is 
your cousin fond of raspberries ? 8. My cousin is fond of raspberries 
and * strawberries. 9. Is the captain fond of praises ? 10. He is not 
fond of praises. 11. Has the gardener brought you vegetables' 
12 He has brought me vegetables and fruit * 13. Is he ashamed to 
brin<* you vegetables? 14. He is neither ashamed nor afraid to sell 
vegetables. 15. Is your mother tired? 16. My mother is not tired. 
17° Is your brother at colonel D's ? 18. He lives at colonel D's, but 
he is not at home at present (A present). 19. How many peaches 
have you' 20. I have not many peaches, but I have many plums. 
21. Does Capt. B. like peaches? 22. He likes peaches* plums, 

» The student must not forget that the article is repeated before every 



noun. 



LESiOK XXX. 97 

raspberries, and strawberries 23. Are you gohig into (dans) your 
brother's wood? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is general L. 
here ? 2G. No, Sir, he is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does 
your friend, General H. live far from here ? 28. He does not live far 
from here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in 
your garden? 30. We have very fine flowers; we are fond of 
flowers. 31. Do you give them to him? 32. I give them to you. 
33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 
$6. Do not give us any. 



LESSON XXX. LEgON XXX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE CONTINUED. 

1. Adjectives of nation will, according to R. 3 of the last lesson, 
be preceded by the article : — 

II apprend le fra^ais, l'anglais, He learns French, English, German 
l'allemand et l'italien. and Italian. 

2. After the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad- 
jective of nation, taken substantively : — 

Votre frere parle espagnol et portu- Hour brother . speaks Spanish and 
gais. Portuguese. 

3. The article is not used in French before the number which fol- 
lows the name of a sovereign. This number, (unless it be first and 
second) must be the cardinal, and not the ordinal : — [§ 26, (3.)] 

Vous avez l'histoire de Henri qua- You have the history of Henry the 
tre. Fourth. 

4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not in 
French preceded by un, une, a or an, unless it be qualified by an ad- 
jective or determined by the following part of the sentence. 

Votre ami eat medecin. Your friend is a physician. 

Notre frere est avocat. Our brotlicr is a barrister. 

Votre ami est un bon medecin. Your friend is a good physician. 

Notre frere est un avocat celebre. Our brotlicr is a celebrated advocate. 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Ieregular Verbs: 

Apprendre, to learn; Connaitre, to know ; Savoir, to know; 

J'apprends, / learn, do Je connais, / know, or Je sais, / know, or d* 

learn, or am learning ; do know ; know ; 

Tu apprends, Tu connais Tu sais, 

II apprend. II connait, II sait, 

Nous apprenons, Nous connaissons, Nous savons, 

Vous apprenez, Vous connaissez, Vous savea, 

Us apprennent. Us connaissont. lis savent. 

5 



98 



LESSON XXX. 



6. Connaitre means to Iz acquainted with ; savoir, to know, is said 
only of things. 



Connaissez vous ce Fncfais, cet 
Anglais, cet AllenuQd, et cet 
Espagnol 1 

Savez vous le fran^ais, Tanglais, 
I'alleinand, et l'espagnol % 



Do you know that Frinchnuin, that 
Englishman, thai German, aa-X 
that Spaniard ? 

Do you know French, English, (rer* 
man, and Spanish? 



Resume of Examples. 



Le capitaine G. sait il le frai^ais 1 

II ne le sait pas, mais il l'apprend. 

Connaissez vous le Docteur L. 1 

Je ne le connais pas, mais je sais ou 
il demeure. 

Ce monsieur est il peintre 1 

Non, il est architecte. 

Ce monsieur est un architecte dis- 
tingue. 

Ce Franfais parle grec et arabe. 

H parle le grec, 1'arabe et l'italien. 

Avez vous vu Charles dix, frere de 
Louis dix-huit 1 



Does captain G. know French ? 
He does not know it, but learns it. 
Do you know Dr. L. ? 
I am not acquainted with him, but A 

know where he lives. 
Is that gentleman a painter ? 
No, he is an architect. 
That gentleman is a distinguished 

architect. 
That Frenchman speaks Greek and 

Arabic. 
He speaks the Greek, Arabic, and 

Italian languages. 
Have you seen Charles the Tenth, a 

brother of Lends the Eighteenth ? 



Exercise 57. 

Allemand, e, German ; Hongrois, e, Hungarian ; Quatre, four ; 
Ancien, ne, ancient ; Langue, f. language ; Russe, Russian ; 
Anglais, e, English; Moderne, modern; Suedois, e, Swedish, 

Chinois, e, Chinese ; Polonais, e, Polish, Pole ; Swede ; 
Danois, e, Danish, Dane ; Quatorze, fourteen ; Tapissier, m. upholsterer , 
Grec, que, Greek; 

1. Connaissez vous ce Monsieur ? 2. Oui, Madame, je le connaia 
fort bien. 3. Savez vous de quel pays il est ? 4. II est hongrois. 
5. Parle-t-il allemand? 6. II parle allemand, polonais, russe, sue- 
dois, et danois. 7. N'est il pas medecin? 8. Non, Monsieur, avant 
la revolution, il etait capitaine. 9. Avez vous envie d'apprendre le 
russe? 10 J'ai envie d'ap* rendre le russe et le grec moderne. 11. 
Connaissez vous les n. -ssieurs qui parlent a. votre sceur? 12. Je 
ne les connais pas. j3. Savez vous oii ils demeurent? 14. Us de- 
meurent chez le tapissier de votre frere. 15. N'avez vous pas This- 
toire de Louis cuat^rze, dans votre bibliotheque ? 16. Je n'ai ni 
celle de Louis quatorze, ni celle de Henri quatre. 17. Avez vous 
tort d'apprendre le chinois? 18. Je n'ai pas tort d'apprendre le chi- 
nois. 19. Vos compagnons apprennent ils les langues anciennes 1 
20. Us savent plusieurs langues anciennes et modernes. 21. Parka 
▼ous anglais? 22. Je sais l'anglais et je le parle. 23. Connaissea 



LESSON XXXI. 99 

vous P Anglais que nous voyons ? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25. L 
ne me connait pas et je ne le connais pas. 

Exercise 58. 
1. Does our physician know French ? 2. He knows French, Eng- 
lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician ? 4. He 
knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady? 6. I 
am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede ? 8. 
She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you 
intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in (en) English. 
11. Does she know English?" 12. She knows several languages; 
she speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your 
brother a colonel? 14. No, Sir, he is a captain. 15. Is your up- 
holsterer a Dane ? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are 
you a Frenchman? 18. No, Sir, I am a Hungarian. 19. Do you 
know Chinese ? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 
21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to 
learn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who lives at 
your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 25. I am not ac- 
quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of 
books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian ? 29. I have no de- 
sire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31.1 have but little 
time. 32. What do you learn? 33. We learn Latin, Greek, French, 
and German. 34. Do you not learn Spanish ? 35. We do not 
learn it. 



LESSON XXXI. LEgON" XXXi. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS, ($ 38). 

1. Qui, used as nominative, may relate to persons or to things:— 
Les fleurs qui sont dans votre jardin. The flowers which are in your garden, 

2. Qui, used as the object of a verb, can only be said of persons. 

It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition : — 

Qui votre frere voit il ? Wliom does, your brother seel 

Dc qui parlez vous ce matin 1 Of whom do you speak this morning ? 

3. Que may be said of persons or things. It can never be under- 
stood, and must be repeated before every verb. [L. 19. 1.] 

Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see. 

Lcs langues que nous apprenons. The languages which we learn. 

4. Ce que is employed for that which, or its equivalent what : — 

Ce que vous apprenez est utile. That which you learn is useful. 

Trouvez vous ce que vous cherchez. Do you find what you seek? 



100 



LESSON XXXI. 



5. Que answers to the English pronoun what, used absolutely be- 
fore a verb:-- 

Que pensez vous de cela 7 What do you think of that ? 

6. Quoi, when not used as an exclamation, is generally preceded 
ly a preposition, and relates only to things: — 

De quoi voulez vous parler 1 Of what do you wish to speak ? 
A quoi pensez vous % Of what do you think ? 

7. Lequel, m., laquelle, f., lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, f. p., which, or 

which one, [L. 18. 6.] or which ones, relate to persons or things. They 

may be preceded by a preposition : — 

Lequel avez vous apporte ? Which one have you brought ? * 

Duquel parlez vous % Of which one do you speak ? 

8. Dont, of which, or of whom, whose, may relate to persons or 

things, in the masculine or feminine, singular or plural. It can never 

be used absolutely and must always be preceded by an antecedent. 

It is preferable to de qui or duquel, &c. 

Les fleurs dont vous me parlez. The flowers of which you speak to me. 

Les demoiselles dont votre soeur vous The young ladies of whom your sister 
parle. speaks to you. 

9. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs, 

Di-re, 4. to say. Fai-re, 4. to make, to do. Mett-re, 4. to put. 

Je dis, / say, do say, or Je fais, J make or do, I Je mets, I put, do put, oi 

am saying. am making or doing. am putting. 

Tu dis, Tu fais, Tu mets, 

II dit, II fait, II met, 

Nous disons, Nous faisons, Nous mettons, 

Vous dites, Vous faites, Vous mettez, 

lis disent. lis font. lis mettent. 

Eesume of Examples. 



Connaissez vous le monsieur qui 

parle a notre cousin 7 
Je connais celui qui lui parle. 
Comprenez vous ce que je vous dis 7 ? 
Qui vous a parle de cette affaire 1 
L'Anglais dont vous parlez est ici. 

L'Espagnol dont la soeur est ici. 
Que faites vous ce matin ? 
Que dites vous a notre ami 1 
Nous faisons ce que vous nous dites. 
Pour qui faites vous cet habit 1 
De quoi parlez vous a votre frere 1 
Nous faisons ce que nous pouvons. 
Nous parlons de ce dont vous parlez. 



Do yon know the gentleman wh* 

speaks to our causin ? 
I know him who speaks to him. 
Do you understand ichat I say to you? 
WJio has spoken to you of this affair? 
T/ie Englishman of whom you speak 

is here. 
The Spaniard whose sister is here. 
WJiat do you do this morning? 
What do you say to our friend? 
We do that which t/ou say to us. 
For whom do you make this coat ? 
Of what do you speak to your brother? 
We do what wc can. 
We speak of that o r witch you speak. 



LESSON XXXI. 101 



Exercise 59. 



Arriv-er, 1. to anive; Habillement, m. dress, Plaisir, ri'..pleiisure: 
Avec, with; clot/tes; Presque, almost; 

Coflre, m. trunk; Hollandais, e. Dutch; Rien. nothing ; 

Command-er, 1. to order; Linge, m. linen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch ; Monsieur, m. gentleman ; Vrai. e, true. 
Enfant, m. child; Nom, m. name ; 

1. Qui connaissez vous? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandais dont 
vous nous parlez. 3. Quelles lecons apprenez vous ? 4. Nous ap- 
prenons les lecons que vous nous recommandez. 5. Ce que je vous 
dis est il vrai ? 6. Ce que vous nous dites est vrai. 7. De qui nous 
parlez vous ? 8. Nous vous parlons des Ecossais qui viennent d'arri- 
ver. 9. Savez vous qui vient d'arriver? 10. Je sais que le monsieur 
que votre frere connait vient d'arriver. 11. Vos sceurs que font 
jlles? 12. Elles ne font presque rien, elles n'ont presque rien a faire. 
13. Que mettez vous dans votre coflfre? 14. Nous y mettons ce que 
nous avons, nos habillements et notre linge. 15. N'y mettez vous 
pas vos souliers? 16. Nous y mettons les souliers dont nous avons 
besoin. 17. De quoi avez vous besoin? 18. Nous avons besoin de 
ce que nous avons. 19. Cet enfant sait il ce qu'il fait? 20. II sait 
ce qu'il fait et ce qu'il dit. 21. Ne voulez vous pas le leur dire? 
22. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. 23. Faites vous ce que le marchand 
vous commande ? 24. Nous faisons ce qu'il nous dit. 25. II parle 
de ce dont vous parlez. 

Exercise 60. 

1 . Have you what {ce dont) you want ? 2. We have what we want. 
3. Is the gentleman whom you know, here ? 4. The lady of whom 
you speak is here. 5. Is she just arrived ? [L. 26. 2.] 6. She is just 
arrived. 7. Do you know that gentleman ? 8. I know the gentleman 
who is speaking with your father. 9. Do you know his name ? 10. 1 do 
not know his name, but I know where he lives (demeure). 11. What 
do you do every morning? 12. We do almost nothing; we have very 
little to do. 13. Does the tailor make your clothes? 14. He makes 
my clothes, my brother's, and my cousin's. 15. Do you know what 
you say? 16. I know what I say, and what I do. 17. Do you know 
the Scotchman of whom your brother speaks? 18. I know him well. 
19 What does he put into his trunk? 20. He puts his clothes, 
21. Is that which you say, true? 22. What I say is true. 23. Do 
you understand that which I say to you ? 24. I understand all that 
you say. 25. Of whom does your brother speak ? 26. He speaks of 
the gentleman whose sister is here. 27. Is your brother wrong to 



102 



LESSON XXXII. 



do what he dois? 28. He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What ar« 
you doing? 30 I am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you 
put my books? 32. Into (dans) your brother's trunk. 33. Is your 
brother here ? 34. He is not here. 35. He is at my brother's, or at 
my father's. 



lesson xxxn. 



LEgON XXXH. 



1 . The verb mettre is used in the same sense as the English to put 

on, in speaking of garments. Mettre le couvert, means to lay the 

cloth, or set the table : — 

Quel chapeau mettez vous 1 What hat do you put an ? 

Votre frere met son habit noir. Your brother puts on his black coat. 

Le domestique va mettre le couvert. The servant is going to lay the cloth, 

2. Oter means to take off, to take away, to take out : — 

Mon domestique ote son chapeau. My servant takes off his hat. 

Otez ce livre de la table. Take away thai book from the table. 

N'a-t-on pas ote le diner 1 Have they not taken away t/ie dinner . 

3. The verb faire is used before another verb, in the sense of to 
"have, to cause, 

Votre frere fait il batir une maison % Does your brother have a house built ? 
II en fait batir plus d'une. He has more than one built, 

4. It may be used in the san ' sense before its own infinitive : — 

Je fais faire un habit de drap. / have a cloth coat made. 

Vous faites faire des souliers de c ir. You have leatlier shoes made* 

5. Vouloir [L. 28. 6.] followed i dire is used in the sense of to 
mean : — 



Que voulez vous dire 7 

Votre soeur que veut elle dire 1 



What do you mean ? 

What docs your sister mean ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Ne mettez vous pas vos habits 1 

J'ai peiir de les gater. 

Ne portez vous jamais votre habit 

noir 1 
Je le mets tous les samedis. 
Pourquoi n'otez vous pas votre 

manteau 1 
J'ai trop froid, j'ai peur de Voter. 

Faites vous raccommoder vos sou- 
liers % 
Je fais raccommoder mes habits. 
Je fais faire une paire de bottes. 



Do you not put on your clothes ? 

I am afraid of spoiling them. 

Do you never wear your black coat ? 

I put it on every Saturday. 

Why do you not take off your cloak * 

/ am too cold, I am afraid to take il 

Do you have your shoes mended 7 

I have my clothes mended. 
I have a 'pair of boots made* 



LESSON XXXII. 



103 



Je fais cretjser un puits. 

Voire frere que veut il dire 1 

Que veut dir~3 cela 1 

Cela ne veut rien dire. 

Otez vous vos souliers et vos bas ? 

Je n'ote ni les uns ni les autres. 
Le diner est pret : le domestique va 

mettre le couvert. 
Vo'olez vous oter le couvert 1 

Je vais mettre le couvert. 
Je vais oter le couvert. 



J have a well dug. 

What does your brother mean ? 

What does that mean ? 

That means nothing. 

Do you take off your shoes and stock- 
ings? 

I take off neither these nor those. 

Dinner is ready; the servant is 
going to lay the cloth. 

Will you take away tlie things from 
the "table ? 

I am going to lay the cloth. 

I am going to take away the things. 



is 



Pret, e, ready ; 
Raccommod-er, 1, 

mend ; 

Tout-a-1'heure, immedi- 
ately ; 

Uniforme, m. uniform ; 

Velours, m. velvet 



Exercise 61. 

Apothicaire, m. drug-Gat-ev, 1, to spoil ; 

gist ; Gilet, m. woAstcoat ; 

Apres, after ; Grand, e, large, very ; 

Cave, f. cellar; Manteau, m. cloak; 

Creus-er, 1. to dig ; Noir, e, black ; 

Dimanche, m. Sunday ; Pantoufle, f. slipper; 

Diner, m. dinner ; Pourquoi, why ; 
Fache, e, sorry, angry ; 

1. Le general N. met il son uniforme? 2. II ne le met point. 
3. Pourquoi ne portez vous point votre manteau noir ? 4. J'ai peur 
de le gater. 5. Mettez vous vos souliers de satin tous les matins? 
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanches. 7. II est midi ; le domestique 
met il le couvert? 8. II ne le met pas encore ; il va le mettre tout-a- 
l'heure. 9. Le diner n'est il pas pret? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-il 
le couvert? 11. II ne Tote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de l'oter. 
12. Otez vous votre habit quand vous avez chaud? 13. Je l'ote 
quand j'ai trop chaud. 14. Faites vous faire un habit de drap? 15. 
Je fais faire un habit de drap et un gilet de satin noir. 16. Ne faites 
vous point raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites 
vous pas creuser une cave? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 
19. L'apothicaire que veut il dire? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin 
d'argent. 21. Savez vous ce que cela veut dire? 22. Cela veut dire 
que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez vous envie de met- 
tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai l'intention de le mettre, car j'ai grand 
froid. 25. Je vais l'oter, car j'ai chaud 

Exercise 62. 
1. Do you take off your coat? 2. I do not take off my coat, I put 
it on. 3. Do you take off your cloak when you are cold ? 4. When 
I am cold I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and 
stockings ? [$ 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put 
them on again (remetlrc). 7. Does that little girl lay the cloth? 8. 



104 LESSON XXXIII. 

She lays the cloth everyday at noon (midi). 9. Doos she take away 
tne things after dinner? 10. She takes away the things every day. 
11. Do you intend to have a coat made? 12. I intend to have a coat 
made. 13. I am going to have a coat and a vest made. 14. Does 
your brother have his boots mended? 15. He has them mended. 
16. What does your son mean? 17. I do not know what he means. 
18. Is he angry with me or with my brother? 19. He is neither 
ngry with you nor with your brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil his 
coat? 21. He is not afraid to spoil it. 22. Does the druggist want 
money ? 23. He does not want money. 24. Has your sister taken 
my book from the table ? 25. She has not taken it away. 26. Why 
do you take off your shoes ? 27. I take them off because they hurt 
me (genent). 28. Do you intend to have a house built? 29. I in- 
tend to have one built. 30. Does the tailor spoil your coat? 31. 
He does not spoil it. 32. Who spoils your clothes ? 33. No person 
spoils them. 34. What hat do you wear ? 35. I wear a black hat. 



LESSON XXXIH. LECON XXXIH. 

UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

1. The unipersonal verb is conjugated only in the third person 
singular of a tense. Its nominative pronoun il, it, is used absolutely, 
i. e. it represents no noun previously expressed. 

II pleut aujourd'hui. It rains to-day. 

2. The unipersonal verb assumes the termination of the class or 
conjugation to which it belongs. Some verbs are always uniper- 
sonal, and will be found in § 62. Others are only occasionally so, 
and if irregular, will be found in the personal form in the same \ 62. 

3. Present of the Indicative of the Unipersonal Verbs, 

Y avoir, to be there : Pleuvoir, to rain : Neiger, to snow r 

H y a, tfiere is, there are. II pleut, it rains, it is II neige, it sn-ows, it u 
raining. snowing. 

Greler, to hail. Geler, to freeze. Degeler, to thaw. 

II grele (§ 49.) it /tails, it 11 gcle (§ 49.) it freezes, II clegele (() 49.) it thaws % 
is hailing. it is freezing, it is f hawing. 

4. II y a, means there is, or there are, and may be foL-owed xyy a 
singular or plural noun, [J 61, 2.] 

Hyadu gibier au marche. There is game in the market. 

II y a des pommes dans votre jardin. There arc apples in your gar dm 



LESSON XXXIII. 



105 



6. In relation to the weather, the verb faire is used unipersonally 
in the same manner as the English verb to be. 



II fait beau temps aujourd'hui. 
II fait chaud, il fait troid. 



It is fine weather to- stay. 
It is warm, it is cold. 



Resume of Examples. 



Pieut il ce matin 7 

II ne pleut pas, il neige. 

11 va pleuvoir ce matin. 

Ne gele-t-il pas ce matin 1 

II ne gele pas, il fait du brouillard. 

Y a-t-il du sucre chez vous 1 

II y en a beaucoup chez mon frere. 

Y a-t-il plusieurs personnes chez 
mc-H 

II y a plus de cent personnes. 

N'y a-t-il personne a l'eglise 1 

II n'y a encore personne. 

Est il trop tot 1 

Au contraire, il est trop tard. 

Fait il froid ou chaud aujourd'hui 1 

II fait chaud et humide. 

Fait il du vent ou du brouillard ! 

II fait un temps bien desagreable. 



Does it rain this morning ? 
It does not rain, it snows. 
It is going to ram this morning. 
Does it not freeze this morning ? 
It does not freeze, it is foggy- 
Is there any sugar at your house ? 
There is a great deal at my brother's. 
Are tliere several persons at my house ? 

There are more than one hundred 

persons. 
Is there nobody at church ? 
There is as yet no one tliere. 
Is it too soon ? 

On the contrary, it is too late. 
Is it cold or warm to-day ? 
It is warm and damp. 
Is it ivindy or foggy ? 
It is very disagreeable weather. 



Manuscrit, m. mant* 

script ; 
Veau, m. veal ; 
Vent. m. wind; 
Volaille, f. poultry. 



Exercise 63. 

Assemblee, f. assembly, Couvert, e, cloudy ; 

parly; Ecurie, f. stable ; 

Bibliotheque, f. library; Epais, se, thick ; 
Brouillard, m.fog; Foin, m. hay ; 

Chambre, f. room; Gibier, m. game; 

Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; 

1. Quel temps fait il aujourd'hui? 2. II fait un temps superbe. 
3. Fa\ il tres beau temps aujourd'hui? 4. II fait un temps couvert 
et humide. 5. Pleut il beaucoup ce matin? 6. II ne pleut pas en- 
core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait il du vent ou du brouillard? 8. II 
ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 10, Combien 
de personnes y a-t-il a. l'assemblee? 11. II y a plus de deux cents 
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. N'y a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits 
dans votre bibliotheque? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a 
que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait il trop froid pour vous dans cette 
chambre? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il 
beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie? 17. II y en a assez pour mon 
cheval. 18. Restez vous a la maison quand il pleut? 19, Quand il 
pleut je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais chez 
mon cousin. 20. Y a-t-il de la viande au marche? 21. II y en a 

5* 



106 LESSON XXXIV. 

beaueoup, il y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du veau, du mouton et 
de la volaille. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruits? 
24. II n'y en a pas. 25. II y en a aussi. 

Exercise 64. 

1. Are you cold this morning 1 ? 2. I am not cold, it is warm thia 
morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ? 4. It is neither foggy nor windy, 
it rains in torrents (a verse). 5. Is it going to rain or to snow ? 6. 
It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and foggy. 8. 
Is there any body at your brother's to-day ? 9. My brother is at 
nome, and my sister is at church. 10. Is there any meat in the mar- 
ket? 11. There is meat and poultry. 12. Is it too warm or too 
cold, for your sister, in this room? 13. It is not so warm in this 
room, as in your brother's library. 14. Are there good English 
books in your sister's library? 15. There are some good ones. 16. 
Are there peaches and plums in your garden? 17. There are many. 
18. Do you remain at your brother's, when it snows? 19. When it 
snows we remain at home. 20. Are there ladies at your mother's ? 
21. Your two sisters are there to-day. 22. Have you time to go 
and fetch them? 23. I have no time this morning. 24. Is your 
horse in the stable ? 25. It is not there, it is at my brother's. 26. 
Does it hail this morning ? 27. It does not hail, it freezes. 28. 
What weather is it this morning? 29. It is very fine weather. 
30. Is it too warm? 31. It is neither too warm nor too cold. 32. 
Is it going to freeze ? 33. It is going to snow. 34. Does it snow 
every day ? 35. It does not snow every day, but it snows very often 
(souvent). 



LESSON XXXIY. LEgON XXXIV. 

PLACE OF THE ADVERB. (§ 136.) 

1. In simple tenses, the adverb generally follows the Ncrb, and i£ 
placed as near it as possible : — 

Votre commis ecrit trdfl bien. Your cirri: write* very irrU. 

Cette demoiselle lit tres mal. That young la>t\i reads very badly. 

2. When a verb is in the infinitive, the two negatives ne and pa^ 
ne and rien, should be placed before it : — 

N* pao parler, ne pas lire. Not to speak, not to read. 



LESSON XXXIV. iOT 

3. The adverb assez, enough, tolerably, precedes generally the 
other adverbs. It precedes also adjectives and nouns: — 

Yous ecrivez assez correctement. You write pretty correctly. 

Vous avez assez de livres. You have books enough. 

Get enfant est assez attentif. That child is attentive enough. 

4. Voici means, here is ; voila, there is: — 

Voici le livre que vous aimez. Here is the book which you like. 

Voila le monsieur dont vous parlez. There is the gentleman of whom yo% 

speak. 

5. Dans is used for in or into, when the noun which follows it is 

preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral 

adjective, [j 142, (2.)] :— 

Le crayon est dans le pupitre. The pencil is in the desk. 

Mettez cette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trunk. 

6. En renders to, in, or into, coming after the verbs to be, to go, to 
reside, followed by the name of a part of the earth, a country, or 
province : — 

Notre ami est en France. Our friend is in France. 

Vous allez en Italic You go to Italy. 

7. The preposition a is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- 
fore the name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- 
tioned above : — 

II va a Paris le mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month. 

8. The same preposition is used in the expressions, a la campagne, 

a la ville, a la chasse, a la peche, &c. 

Nous allons a la campagne. We go into the country. 

Vous n'allez pas a la ville. You do not go to the city. 

Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. I go hunting and fishing. 

9. Indicative Present of the Irregular Verbs, 

Condui-re, 4. to conduct. Ecri-re, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. 

Je conduis, / conduct, do J'ecris, / virite, do write, Je lis, / read, do read or 

conduct, or am con- or am writing; am reading; 

ducting; 

Tu conduis, Tu ecris, Tu lis, 

II conduit, 11 ecrit, II lit, 

Nous conduisons, Nons ecrivons, Nous lisons, 

Vous conduisez, Vous ecrivez, Vous lisez, 

lis conduisent. lis ecrivent. lis lisent. 

Resume of Examples. 



Votre parent ecrit il bien ? 

II ecrit assez bien et assez vite. 

Nous avons assez de livres. 



Does your relation write well '/ 

He writes well enough and rapidly 

enough. 
We have books enough. 



108 



LESSOX XXXIV. 



Nous sommes assez attentifs a nos 

le^ns. 
Voila la demoiselle dont vous parlez. 

Votre cheval n'est il pas dans le 

champ 1 
II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. 
Allez vous en France cette annee ? 
Nous allons a Paris et a Lyon. 
Ou conduisez vous ce jeune homme 1 
Je le conduis en Allemagne. 
Demeurez vous a la ville % 
Nous demeurons a la campagne. 
Allez vous souvent a la chasse T 
Nous allons quelquefois a la peche. 



We are attentive enough to our lei- 
sons. 

There is the young lady of whom you 
speak. 

Is not your horse v,\ the field ? 

It is not there, it is in the garden. 
Do you go to France this year ? 
We go to Paris and to I/yons. 
Where do you take this young man ? 
I take him to Germany. 
Do you live in the town ? 
We live in the country. 
Do you go often hunting ? 
We sometimes go fishing. 



Associe, m. partner ; 
Canif, m. penknife ; 
Campagne, f. country; 
Chasse, f. hunting ; 
Commis, m. clerk; 



Exercise 65. 

Fort, very ; 
Peche, f. fishing ; 
Prusse, f. Prussia; 
Rapidement, rapidly ; 
Rend-re, 4. to return ; 



Suisse, f. Switzerland; 
Terre, f. farm, estate; 
Ville, f. town, city ; 
Vite, quickly ; 
Voyage, m. jouK^ey. 



1. Ecrivez vous encore la meme lecon 1 2. Je n'ecris pms la meme, 
j'en ecris une autre. 3. Votre commis ecrit il rapidement? 4. II 
ecrit fort bien, mais il n'ecrit pas vite. 5. N'avez vous pas assez 
d'argent pour acheter cette terre ? 6. Pai assez d'argent, mais j'ai 
1'intention de faire un voyage en France. 7. Voila votre livre, en 
avez vous besom? 8. Je n'en ai pasbesoin, j'en ai un autre. 9. Avez 
vous encore besoin de mon canif? 10. Je n'en ai plus besoin, je vais 
vous le rendre. 11. Notre cousin demeure-t-il a la ville? 12. II ne 
demeure plus a la ville, il demeure a la campagne. 13. Aime-t-il a 
aller a la chasse? 14. II n'aime pas a aller a la chasse. 15. II va 
tous les jours a la peche. 16. Notre associe est il a Paris ou a. 
Rouen? 17. II est a Marseille. 18. Oa avez vous l'intention de con- 
duire votre fils? 19. Je vais le conduire en Italic 20. Demeurez 
vous a Milan ou a Florence? 21. Je ne demeure ni a Milan ni a 
Florence, je demeure a Turin. 22. Votre ami demeure-t-il en Suisse? 
23. II ne demeure plus en Suisse, il demeure en Prusse. 24. Votre 
domestique est il a l'eglise? 25. Non, Monsieur, il est a l'ecole. 

Exercise 66. 

1. Does your clerk write as well as your son? 2. He writes toler- 
ably well, but not so well as my son. 3. Have you books enough 
in your library ? 4. I have not books enough, but I intend to buy 
some more. 5. Here is your sister's letter, will you iead it? 6. I 
intend to read it. 7. Does your son like to go fishing? 8. He likes 



LESSON XXXV. • 109 

to go fishing and hunting. 9. When does he like to go fishing? 
10. When I am in the country. 11. What do you do when you are 
in the city ? 12. When I am in the city, I read and learn my lesson. 
13. Do you intend to go to France this year? 14. I intend to go to 
Germany. 15. Will you go to the city if it (s'il) rains ? 16. When it 
rains I always remain at home. [R. 1.] 17. How many friends have 
you in the city? 18. I have many friends there. 19. Are there many 
English in France ? 20. There are many English in France and in 
Italy (Italic). 21. Are there more English in Germany than in Italy 1 
22. There are more English in Italy than in Germany. 23. Is it fine 
weather in Italy? 24. It is very fine weather there. 25. Does it 
often freeze there ? 26. It freezes sometimes there, but not often. 
27. Does that young lady read as well as her sister? 28. She reads 
better than her sister, but her sister reads better than I. 29. Is there 
anyone at your house? 30. My father is at home. 31. Is your 
brother-in-law absent? 32. My brother-in-law is at your house. 
33. There is no one at home to-day. 



LESSON xxxv. LEgosr XXXV. 

1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in Englisn. 
It maybe rendered by one, we, they, people, &c, according to th?, 
context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a 
particular person, [{ 41, (4.) (5.) f 113.] :— 

On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. 

On nous apporte de l'argent. Money is brought to us. 

2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative 
of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive 
[5 113,(1.)]:- 

Ori dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is here. 

On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. 
On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested (grown) in 
France. France. 

3. Avoir lieu, answers to the English expression, to take place:— 
Cela a lieu tous les jours. That takes place every day. 

4. Au lieu de, answers to the English, instead of. The verb which 
follows it must, according to Rule 2, L. 21, be put in the infinitive:— 

Au lieu d'etudier, il joue. Instead of studying, he plays. 



110 



LESSON XXXV. 



5. Devoir, to owe, is used before an infinitive, like the English Terb^ 
to be, to express obligation : — 

Je dois hii ecrire demain. / am to write to him to-morrow. 

Nous devons y aller demain. We are to go there to-morrow. 

6. Recevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from : — 

Devez vous recevoir des nouvelles Are you to hear from your sister? 
de votre soeur. 

7. Entendre parler, answers to the English phrase, to hear of oi 

about. 

Entendez vous souvent parler de Do you often hear of your friends? 
vos amis % 



Resume of Examples. 



Que dit on de nous dans la ville 1 

On ne parle pas de vous. 

Ne mange-t-on pas tous les jours 7 

On mange quand on a faim. 

On trouve beaucoup d'or en Cali- 

fornie. 
Dit on quelque chose de nouveau 1 
On ne dit rien de nouveau. 
A-t-on re^u des nouvelles de George'? 

On n'a point entendu parler de lui. 
On n'a point re£U de ses nouvelles. 
Devez vous ecrire a notre ami 1 
Je dois lui ecrire demain. 
Le concert doit il avoir lieu ce soir ? 

VI doit avoir lieu ce matin. 
Je viens au lieu de mon frere. 
II danse au lieu de marcher. 



What do they say of us in the city ? 
People do not speak of you. 
Do not people eat every day ? 
People eat when they are hungry. 
Much gold is found in California. 

Do they (people) say any thing new 7 

Nothing new is said. 

Has any thing been heard from 

George ? 
Nothing has been heard of him. 
They have not heard from him. 
Are you to write to our friend? 
I am to write to him to-morroio. 
Is the concert to take place this even" 

ing ? 
It is to take place this morning. 
I come instead of my brother. 
He dances instead of walking. 



Afrique, f. Africa; 
Alger, Algiers; 
Apport-er, 1. to bring ; 
Demain, to-morrow ; 
Diamant. m. diamond ; 



Exercise 67. 

Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to depart, tc 
Habits, m. p. clothes ; set out, to leave ; 

Malade, sick ; Prochain, e. next ; 

Mois, m. month; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know ; 

Or, m. gold ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Vous apporte-t-on de l'argent tous les jours? 2. On ne m'en 

apporte pas tous les jours. 3. Vous fournit on des habits quand 

vous en avez besoin ? [L. 22.] 4. On m'en fournit toutes les fois 

(every time) que j'en ai besoin. 5. A-t-on besoin d'argent quand on 

est malade 1 6. Quand on est malade, on en a grand besoin. 7. 

Avez vous recu des nouvelles de mon fils ? 8. Je n'ai point re^u de 

ses nouvelles. 9. Ne dit on pas qu'il est en Afrique? 10. On dit 

qu'ii doit partir pour Alger. 11. Quand doit il commencer son 

voyage? 12. On dit qu'il doit le commencer le mois prochain. 13, 



LESSON XXXVI. Ill 

Ce manage a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ou demain? 14. On nous dit qu'il 
doit avoir lieu cette apres-midi. 15. II aura lieu a cinq heures et 
demie. 16. Avez vous envie de venir au lieu de votre frere ? 17. 
5ion frere doit venir au lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez vous re- 
tention de lui dire ce qu'il doit faire? 19. II sait ce qui- doit faire. 
20. Savez vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne dit rien de 
nouveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Californie ? 23. On y 
en trouve beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on aussi des diamants? 25= 
On n'y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de Tor. 

Exercise 68. 

1. What do people say of me? 2. People say that you are not 
very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found in 
Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in-California. 5. Do they 
bring you books everyday? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2.] 
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one do 
(doit on faire) when one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physician. 
3. Do you send for my brother? 10. I am to send for him this 
morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day? 12. I hear 
from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does the sale 
(xente, f.) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 15. 
At what time Qieure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at half 
after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is sick. 
18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, who, 
it is said (dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa? 21. 
He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you-come instead of your father ? 
23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert take place 
this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 26. Do you 
know at what hour ? 27. At a quarter before five. 28. Is your 
brother coming? 29. My brother is not coming, he has no time 
30. Are you angry With your brother? 31. I am not angry with 
him, 32. Is any thing new said? (Is there any thing new?) 33 
There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Nothing i 
said of him. 



LESSON XXXVI. LEgON XXXYI. 

REFLECTIVE VERES. (& 43, (6.) § 5G.) 

I. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated 
vith two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 



112 1ESS0N XXXVI. 

pronoun and the pronouns me, te, se, &c. [$ 56.] In these verbs the 
subject is represented as acting upon itself : — 

Je m'applique a l'etude. I apply {myself) to study. 

Je me propose de voyager. I propose {to myself) to travel, i. e. it 

is my intention to travel. 

In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective 
pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and 2, Lesson 
27, is placed before the verb. 

2. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently 
used in French than in English, often answers to the passive form 
so common in the latter language : — 

Celasevoittouslesjour, { Sift^gE**' 

Cette marchandise se vend facile- \ That merchandise is easily sold. 
ment. \ That merchandise sells itself easily. 

Celasefaitainsi. {%£%££$£ 

3. The verb se porter, literally to carry one's self, is used idiomati- 
cally for to do or to be in speaking of health : — 

Comment vous portez vous ? How do you do ? 

Je me porte tres bien. / am very well. 

4. S'asseoir, [4. ir. see § 62.] to sit down, is also a reflective verb :— 
Vofre frere s'assied. Your brother sits down. 

5. Se promener means to walk, to ride, &c. for pleasure, or health :— • 

Je me promene tous les jours. J take a walk every day. 
Je me promene a cheval. J take a ride. 

6. Marcher, aller a cheval, aller en voiture, signify to walk or to 
ride, when we wish to express simply the manner of progressing : — 

Marchez vous beaucoup tous les Do you walk much every day? 

jours % 
Je vais a cheval et en voiture. I ride on horseback and in a carriage. 

7. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative of the 

Reflective Verbs, 

0e port-er, 1. to be orSE promen-er, 1. to icalk & asse-oir, 3. ir. to Sit 

do; or ride; down; 

Je me porte, I am ox do; Je me promene, I take aJb m'assieds, I sit down. 

walk or ride ; or am sitting down ; 

Tu te portes, Tu te promenes, [§ 49.] Tu t'assieds, 

II se porte, II se promene, II s'assied, 

Nous nous portons, Nous nous promenons, Nous nous asseyons, 

Vous vous portez, Vous vous promenez, Vous vons asseyez, 

lis se portent. lis se prominent. lis s'asseient. 

8. The reflective pronouns in the imperative of reflective veros, 



LESSOR XXXVI. 



113 



follow Rule 4, of L 27 and Rules 3,4, of Lesson 28 and also,} 100. 

(2.) (3.) :- 

Asseyons nous, asseyez vous. Let us sit down, sit down. 

Ne nous asseyons pas. Let us not sit down. 

Resume of Examples. 



A quoi vous appliquez vous 1 

Je m'occupe de mes affaires. 

Je m'adresse a mes amis. 

Vous adressez vous a votre pere. 

Je m'adresse alui [<) 100, (4. J] 

Comment se porte Monsieur votre 

pere ? 
II se porte passablement bien. 
Pourquoi ne vous asseyez vous pas 7 
Je m'assieds quand je suis fatigue. 
Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. 
Youspromenez vous tons les jours'? 
Je me promene en voiture au- 

jourd'hui. 
Vos amis se promenent ils a cheval ] 
N'aimez vous pas a marcher ? 
J'aime beaucoup a aller a cheval. 
Aimez vous a vouspromener'? 
Asseyons nous, s'il vous plait. 
Ne nous asseyons nous pas 1 
Ne nous asseyons pas, il est trop 

tard. 
Combien ce drap se vend il la* 

verge ? 
II se vend vingt-cinq francs le 

metre. 
Comment cela s'appelle-t-il 7 

Comment vous appelez [§ 49, (4.)] 
vous] 



To what do you apply yourself? 

I occupy myself with my affairs. 

I apply to my friends. 

Do you apply to your father? 

I apply to him. 

How is your father ? 

He is tolerably well. 

Why do you not sit down ? 

I sit down when I am weary. 

I have no time to sit down. 

Do you take a walk every day ? 

I take a ride to-day (in a carriage). 

Do your friends take a ridel 

Do you not like walking ? 

I like riding much. 

Do you like walking (for pleasure} ? 

Let us sit down, if you please. 

Do we not sit down ? 

Let us not sit down, it is too late. 

How much is that cloth sold a yard ? 

It is sold twenty-five francs the 

metre. 
How is that called? What is the 

name of that ? 
What is your name ? How do you 

call yourself? 



Exercise 69. 

Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m. foot ; 
Comment, how; Matin, m. morning ; Port-er, to carry, wear ; 

Cheval, m. Jwrse ; Mieux, better ; Quelquefois, sometimes; 

Drap. m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Fatigue, e, weary, tired ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out; Voiture, f. carriage. 

1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il? 2. Je ne sais comment 
. s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Non, 
Madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur- votre pere seporte-t-il bien 
ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait il beau temps 
aujourd'hui ? 8. II fait un temps magnifique, n'allez vous pas vous 



* The English a or an before a measure is rendered into French by the 
article le, or" la, &c. 



114 IESSON XXXVII. 

promensr? 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Ne pouvez 
vous marcher ? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marcher. 12. N'allez 
vous pas a cheval tous les matins? 13. Je me promene tous lea 
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez vous? 15. Quelquefois a 
pied et quelquefois en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez vousquand 
vous avez besoin d'argent? 17. Je m'adresse a mon banquier? 
18. Ne voulez vous pas vous asseoir? 19. Nous vous sommes bien 
obliges. 20. Ce drap se vend il fort bien? 21. II se vend fortcher. 

22. Ne devez vous pas aller a la campagne, s'il fait beau temps'? 

23. Votre frere doit il quitter la ville aujourd'hui? 24. II doit partir 
demain matin. 25. Ma soeur se promene tous les matins. 

Exercise 70. 

1. Does your sister walk every day? 2. She takes a walk every 
morning. 3. She likes riding on horseback and in a carriage. 
4. What is that little girl called ? 5. She is called L. 6. Is not that 
gentleman called L. ? 7. No, Sir, he is called G. and his cousin is 
called H. 8. How is your brother ? 9. My brother is very well, but 
my sister is not well. 10. How are your two daughters ? 11. They 
are tolerably well to-day. 12. Will you not sit down, gentlemen? 

13. We are much obliged to you, Madam, we have not time. 

14. Does that book sell well? 15. It sells very well. 16. How is 
that silk sold an ell (Vaune) ? 17. It is sold six francs an ell. 
18. Is it fine weather to-day? 19. It is very fine weather, will you 
not take a walk? 20. I have no time to walk. 21. To whom does 
your brother apply? 22. He applies to his brother. 23. Is his 
brother at home ? 24. No, Sir, he is at Paris. 25. When does he 
intend to go to France? 26. He intends to go to France in one 
month. 27. Is your sister to leave to-morrow morning ? 28. She 
is to leave to day if (s'il) it is fine weather. 29. What do people 
say of this? 30. Nothing is said about it [L. 35]. 31. Are you too 
much fatigued to walk ? 32. I am not too much fatigued, but I havo 
no wish to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding? 34. I like 
riding, when I have a good horse. 35. I do not like walking. 



LESSON XXXVII. LECON XXXVII. 

1. The reflective pronoun is often used to express possession, in- 
stead of the possessive adjective. In such cases the article takes the 
place of this adjective, before the noun. [$ 77, (9.)] 



LESS ON XXXVII. 



115 



Vot£ chauffez vous les pieds 1 Do you warm your feet ? 

Je me chauffe les mains et les pieds. / warm my hands and feet. 

2. Se souvenir [2. ir. See 5 62.], se rappeler [§ 49, (4.)], correspond to 
ihe English verb to remember. Se rappeler takes a direct object, that 
i», no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if the 
same be a noun or a pronoun : — 

Vous rappelez vous ces demoiselles'? Do you remember those young ladies? 
Je ne me les rappelie pas. / do not remember them. 

3. Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the preposition 
de between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive : — 

Nous ne nous rappelons pas d'en We do not remember having been de- 
avoir ete prives (Condillac). prived of it. 

4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun 
as well as before an infinitive : — 

Vous souvenez vous de ce'tte affaire % Do you remember that affair ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. J do not remember it. 

Je me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. / remember having written to him. 

5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to 
led ;— 

Je me couche de bonne heure. / retire early. 

6. Se lever [j 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get up: — 

Je me leve au point du jour. / rise at the break of day. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vous coupez vous les ongles 1 

Je me coupe les ongles et les che- 

veux. 
Vous coupez vous les doigts ? 
Je me coupe souvent les doigts, 

quand je taille ma j)lumc. 
Vous rappelez [<) 49, (4.)] vous les 

malheurs du frere de voire ami] 
Je me rappelie ses malheurs. 
Je me les rappelie distinctement. 
Je me rappelie de l'avoir vu. 
Vous souvenez vous de cela 1 
Je ne m'en souviens }>as du tout. 
A quelle heure vous couchcz vous ] 
Nous nous couchons tous les jours 

au coucher du soleil. 
Nous nous levons de meilleure heure 

que vous, — au lever du soleil. 
II se leve a cinq hemes du matin, et 

il se couche a dix heures et de- 

mie du soir. 



Do you cut your nails ? 
I cut my nails and hair. 

Do you cut your fingers ? 

I often cut my fingers, when 1 men* 

my pen. 
Do you remember the misfortunes of 

your friend's brother ? 
I remember his misfortunes. 
I recollect them distinctly. 
I remember having seen him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it at all. 
At what hour do you retire ? 
We go to bed every day at sunset. 

We rise earlier than you, — at sun- 
rise. 

He rises at five o'clock in the m.om» 
ing, and goes to bed at half aftef 

ten in the event a is. 



116 LESSON XXXVII. 



Exercise 71. 



Associe, m. partner ; De meilleure heure, I erruquier, m. haw> 
Bois, m. wood; earlier; dresser; 

Boucher, m. butcher; Doigt, m. finger; Poele. m. stove; 

Se brul-er, 1. ref. to Fer, m. iron; Pouce, m. thumb; 

burn one's self. Feu, m. fire ; Promesse, f. promise; 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Main, f. hand ; Se souvenir, to remem^ 

ter. S'occuper, 1. to occupy ber (see Venir, $62.); 

Se chauff-er, 1. ref. to one's self. Travaill-er, 1. to work. 

i^arm one's self Parfaitement, perfectly ; 

1. Le perruquier se coupe-t-il le pouce ? 2. Non, Monsieur, il se 
coupe les cheveux. 3. Le charpentier ne se coupe-t-il pas la main ? 
4. II ne se coupe pas la main, il coupe le bois. 5. Ne vous rappelez 
vous pas cette dame ? 6. Je me rappelle cette dame et ces messieurs. 
7. De quoi vous occupez vous ? 8. Nous nous occupons de nos af- 
faires. 9. Vous souvenezvous des fusils qu'a votre pere ? 10. Je 
ne m'en souviens point du tout. 11. Cette petite fille ne se brule-t- 
elle pas? 12. Elle ne se brule pas, il n'y a pas de feu dans le poele. 

13. Pourquoi le boucher ne se chaufFe-t-il pas? 14. Parcequ'il n'a 
pas froid. 15. Ces enfants se levent ils de meilleure heure que moi? 
16. Ils se couchent de bonne heure, et ils se levent tous les matins a 
six heures. 17. Votre associe ne veut il pas s'asseoir? 18. II n'a 
pas le temps de s'asseoir. 19. Vous souvenez vous de vos promes- 
ses? 20. Je m'en souviens parfaitement. 21. Ne vous chauffez 
vous pas quand vous avez froid? 22. Je ne me chauffe presque ja- 
mais. 23. Ne se couche-t-on pas, quand on a sommeil ? 24. On se 
couche quand on a sommeil, et on mange quand on a faim. 25. 
Quand on se porte bien, se leve-t-on de bonne heure ? 26. Quand 
on se porte bien, on doit (should) se lever de bonne heure. 

Exercise 72. 

1. Do you rise early when you are well? 2. When I am well, I 
rise every morning at five o'clock. 3. Do you remember your cousin 
L. ? 4. I remember him perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early ? 
6. We go to bed at ten o'clock. 7. Does not the tailor burn his 
fingers? 8. He does not burn his fingers, his iron is not warm. 9. 
Does the carpenter cut his thumb ? 10. He cuts neither his thumb 
nor his hand. 11. Why do you not warm yourself? 12. I do not 
warm myself, because I am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day? 

14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Does your hair-dresser rise at 
sunrise? 16. The carpenter rises at sunriBe and goes to bed at sun- 
set. 17. Do you rise earlier than I ? 18. We rise every morning at 



LESSON XXXVIII. 117 

the break of day. 1 9. Do you cut your hair often 1 20. I tut my 
nair and my nails every month. 21. Do you remember that gentle- 
man? 22. ] remember him very well. 23. I do not remember him. 
24. Do you iut your ringers when you mend a pen? 25. I cut my 
hand when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. 1 
do hot remember all that (tout ce que) I learn. 28. Do you know if 
your father is well ? 29. He is very well to-day. 30. Is not your 
mother well? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember 
your friend's misfortunes ? 33. I remember them. 34. I remember 
that. 



LESSON XXXVHI. LEQON XXXVHI. 

1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Eng- 
lish verb to deceive : — 

II trompe tout le monde. He deceives every body. 

2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken ; lite- 
rally, to deceive one's self : — 

On se trompe bien souvent. One is often mistaken. 

3. Ennuyer, [§ 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, tc 

tease, to bore : — 

Cet homrne ennuie ses auditeurs. That man wearies his hearers. 
Vous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary us by your ques- 
mandes. tions. 

4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies 
generally, to be or to become mentally weary of any thing or place : — 

Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are weary of being here. 

Vous ennuyez vous a la campagne 1 Are you weary of beingin the country ? 

J<- m'ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 

5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, I am mentally weary, I want change, 
amusement, occupation, &c. : — 

6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's self 
to tike pleasure in, to spend one's time in, to find amusement in, to 
enjoy one's self : — 

Nous nous amusons a la campagne. We enjoy oursuves in the country. 
Vous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend yoin time in trifles. 

Resume of Examples. 



On se trompe souvent soi-meme en 

cherchant a tromper les autres. 
Votre commis ne se trompe-tril pas 1 
II se trompe bien rarement. 



We often deceive mirsclves while seek* 

ing to deceive others. 
Is not your clerk mistaken ? 
He is very rarely mistaken. 



118 



LESSON XXXVIII. 



Ne vous trompez vous pas frequein- 

ment 1 
Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- 

per. 
Ce marchand trompe tout le monde. 
Sa conversation nous ennuie. 
Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos 

plaintes. 
Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas 1 
Vous ennuyez vous chez nous 1 
Je m'ennuie a la ville et je m'amuse 
^ a la campagne. 
A quoi vous amusez vous 1 
Je m'amuse a lire l'allemand. 



Are you notfi tquenJly mistaken ? 

Every one is opt to be mistaken. 

That merchant deceives every body. 

His conversation wearies us. 

You weary your friends by your com 

plaints. 
Do I not weary you ? 
Are you weary of remaining with us 7 
I become weary of the city and find 

amusement in the country. 
In what do you amuse yourself? 
I amuse myself in reading German. 



Exercise 73. 

Apprend-re, 4. ir. to Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Quand, when ; 

learn ; Ennuyer, 1. See § 49, (2.) Quelquefois, sometimes ; 

Banquier, m. banker; Langue, f. language ; Rec-evoh, 3. to receive; 

Client, m. client, cus- Malade, sick ; Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come 

tomer ; Memoire, in. bill ; back ; 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell ; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer ; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive. 

1. Aimez vous ademeurer a la campagne? 2. Je prefere la cam- 
pagne a la ville. 3. Vous ennuyez vous souvent a la campagne ? 
4. Quand je m'ennuie a la campagne, je reviens a la ville. 5. Re§oit 
on des nouvelles du General L. % 6. On n'entend pas parler de lui. 
7. Vous trompez vous quelquefois ] 8. Tout le monde se trompe 
quelquefois. 9. Le banquier trompe-t-il ses clients? 10. II ne 
trompe ni ses clients ni ses amis, il ne trompe personne. 11. Ne 
vous trompez vous pas dans ce memoire? 12. Je neme trompe pas. 
13. Vous amusez vous a lire ou a ecrire? 14. Je m'amuse a ap- 
prendre l'allemand et le francais. 15. Avez vous tort d'apprendre 
leslangues? 16. J'ai raison deles apprendre. 17. Vous ennuyez 
vous souvent? 18. Je m'ennuie quand je n'ai rien a faire. 19. A 
quoi vous amusez vous quand vous etes a la campagne ? 20. Nous 
nous promenons le matin, et nous travaiilons le reste de la journee 
21. Vous portez vous toujours bien? 22. Nous sommes quelque- 
fois malades. 23. Envoyez vous chercher le medecin ? 24. Nous 
Penvoyons cheroher. 25. Je vais le chercher. 

Exercise 74. 

1. Are you not mistaken? 2. I am not mistaken. 3. Is not the 
banker mistaken ? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly 
(certainement) mistaken. 5. Does he not deceive you? 6. He does 
not deceive me, he deceives nobody. 7. Are you not wrong to de- 
ceive your father? 8. I do not intend to deceive hiin. 9. Does not 



LESSON XXXIX. 11Q 

tne merchant make & mistake? 10. He makes a mistake in the bill 
which he writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city? 12. J 
prefer the city ; I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not 
that child weary you by his questions ? 14. Dees not that long story 
(recit, m.) weary you? 15. It does not weary me, it amuses mo. 
16. Do you amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. I 
amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18. Are you not weary 
of remaining at your uncle's? 19. I am never weary of remaining 
there. 20 Is your brother often mistaken? 21. Every body is 
sometimes mistaken. 22. Does his conversation weary you? 23. 
On the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from ? 
25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister well ? 27. 
No, Sir, she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not weary 
me. 30. Ami mistaken? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is he 
often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do ycu not rise 
late ? 35. No, Sir, I rise early. 



LESSON XXXIX. LEgON XXXIX. 

1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the ser*s> 
of to do without. It 13 followed by the preposition de, when it 
comes before a noun or a verb : — 

Vous passez vous de ce livre 1 Do you do without that book ? 

Je ne puis m'en passer. / cannot do without it. 

2. Se servir [2. ir. see \ 62.], to use, also requires the preposition 

de before its object : — 

Jo me sers de votre canif. J use your penknife. 

Je ne m'en sers pas. / do not use it. 

3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that, when 
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence 
by the pronoun en: — 

Je m'en sers, jo m'en passe. / use it, I do without it. 

4. The pronoun* used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep- 
iesenting a person, follows the verb [) 100, (4.)] : — 

Je puis me passer de lui. / can do without him. 

Je m'adresse a vous et a elle. / apply to you and to Iter. 

5. S'endormir [2. ir. see \ 62.]; to fall asleep, anl s r eveiller, to 
awake, are also reflective. 



* The rule does not apply to the reflective pronoun, whicb Is some- 
^es an indirect object. 



120 



LESSON XXXIX. 



Je m'endors aussitot que je me I fall asleep as soon as I go to bad. 

couche. 
Je rn'eveille a six heures du matin. / awake at six o'clock in the mornings 

6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s'eloigner, to draw back^ 
to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when 
a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above : — 

Votre fils s'approche-t-il du feu 7 ? Does your son draw near the fire? 

II ne s'en approche pas. He does not come near it. 

II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from mc and from you. 

Resume of Example s t 



Vous serve z vous de ce couteau ? 
Je ne m'en sers pas, il ne coupe pas. 
De quels couteaux vous servez vous 7 ? 
Nous nous servons de couteaux 

d'acier. 
Pouvez vous vous passer d'argentl 
Nous ne pouvons nous en passer. 
Vous passez vous de votre maitre 1 
Nous nous passons de lui. 
Vous adressez vous a ces messieurs 1 
Nous nous adressons a eux et a 

vous. 
Vous vous endormez facilement. 
Je rn'eveille de tres bonne heure. 
Pourquoi vous approchez vous du 

feu? 
Je m'en approche parceque j'ai 

froid. 
Nous nous eloignons du feu. 
Nous nous en eloignons. 
Nous nous approchons de notre 

pere. 
Nous nous approchons de lui. 



Do you use that knife ? 
I do not use it, it does not cut. 
What knives do you use ? 
We use steel knives. 

Can you do without money ? 

We cannot do without it. 

Do you do without your teacher ? 

We do without him. 

Do you apply to those gentlemen 1 

We apply to them and to you. 

You go to sleep easily. 

I awake very early. 

Why do you come near the fire 1 

I come near it because I am cold. 

We go from the fire. 

We go from it. 

We go near our father. 

We go near Mm. 



Ordinairement, gener- 
ally ; 
Plume, f. pen ; 
Pourquoi, why ; 
Prct-er, 1, to lend; 
Quart, m. quarter ; 
Taill-er, 1. to mend. 



Exercise 75. 

Aussi, also ; Encre, f. ink ; 

Aussitot — que. as soonFenctre, f. window; 

as; Feu, m.fire; 

Canif, m. penknife; Fourchette, f. fork ; 

Demoiselle, young lady ; Heure, f. hour, o'clock; 
Domestique, m. ser- Moins, less, before; 

vant; Oblige, e, obliged; 

1. Pouvez vous vous passer d'encre? 2. Nous pouvons nous en 
passer, nous n'avons rien a ecrire. 3. Vous servez vous de votre 
plume ? 4. Je ne m'en sers pas ; en avez vous besoin 1 5. Ne voulez 
vous pas vous approcher du feu? 6. Je vous suis bien oblige, je n'ai 
pas froid 7. Pourquoi ces demoiselles s'eloignent elles de la fen6- 
tre? 8. Elles s'en eloignent parcequ'il y fuit trop froid. 9. Ces 
enfants ne s'adressent ils pus a vous? 10. lis s'adressent a moi 



LESSON XL 121 

ct a mon frere. 11. A quelle heura vous 6veillez vous le matin? 
12. Je m'eveille ordinairement a six heures moins un quart. 13. 
Vous levez vous aussitot que vous vous eveillez ? 14. Je me leve 
aussitot que je m'eveille. 15. De quels livres vous servez vous 12 

16. Je me sers des miens et des votres. 17. Ne vous servez vous 
pas de ceux de votre frere ? 18. Je m'en sers aussi. 19. Les plumes 
dent [L. 31. R. 8,] vous vous servez sont elles bonnes? 20. Pour- 
quoi votre ami s'eloigne-t-il du feu? 21. II s'en eloigne parcequ'il 
a trop chaud. 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en apprQphe-t-il ? 
23. II s'en approche pour se chauffer. 24. Vous ennuyez vous ici? 
25. Je ne m'ennuie pas. 

Exercise 76. 
1. Will you lend me your penknife ? 2. I cannot do without 
At, I want it to mend my pen. 3. Do you want to use my book ? 
4. I want to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. What knife does 
your brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife and my brother's 
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? 8. We are much obliged 
to you, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough ? [L. 34, 
3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (dites lux) to come near the 
fire? 12. Why do you go from the fire? 13. We are too warm. 
14. Does your brother leave the window? 15. He leaves the win- 
dow because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply? 

17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- 
ply to me? 19. Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do 
you awake early every morning? 21. I awake early, when I go to 
bed earlv. 22. Why do you go to sleep ? 23. I go to sleep because 
I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father? 25. I am 
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us? 27. We 
cannot do without you, but we can do without your brother. 28. 
Do you want my brother's horse? 29. No, Sir, we can do without 
it. 30. Do you intend to do without money? 34. You know very 
well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of 
being here 1 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near 
the fire, mv child. 



LESSON XL. LECON XL. 

1. The verb aller (1. ir. $ 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre 
ceded by the word en, i. e. s'en aller, corresponds to the English ex- 
preshions to go away, to leave : — 

6 



122 



LESSON XL. 



2. Indicative Present of the Verb s'en Aller, to Go away 

Je m'en vais, I go away ; Nous nous en al- We go away; 
Tu t'en vas, Thou art going Ions, 

away; Vous vous en allez, You are going 

II s'en va, He goes away ; away ; 

lis s'en vont, They go away. 

3. Thj same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. 

Est-ce que je m'en Do I go away? Nous en allons Do we go away! 

vais ? nous ? 

T'en vas tu ? Art thou going Vous en allez Do you go away ? 

away? vous? Are they going 

S'en va-t-il 1 Is he going away ? S'en vont ils 1 away ? 

4. Se facher, to be or becc/me angry, requires the preposition contre 
or de before the noun or pronoun following it: — 

Se fache-tol contre votre frere ? Does he get angry with your brother ? 
II se fache contre lui. He is angry with him. 

Vous vous fachez d'un rien. You get angry at nothing. 

5. Se rejouir, to rejoice, is followed by the preposition de : — 
Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. J rejoice at your happiness. 

6. Se plaire [4. ir. see \ 62,] to take pleasure, to delight in any thing 
to like to be in a place, takes a. before its object : — 

Je me plais a la campagne. J like to be in the count? y. 

Je me plais a etudier, a lire. I take pleasure in studying, in reading, 

7. Se depecher, se hater, to make haste, take de before their ob- 
ject : — 

Depdchez vous de finir vos le9ons. Make haste to finish your lessons. 
Pourquoi ne vous depechez vous pas? Why do you not make haste ? 



Resume of Examples. 



I«e marchand s'en va-t-il aujour- 
d'hui? 

Nous nous en allons demain. 

Je m'en vais quand je suis fatigue. 

Pourquoi vous fachez vous contre 
lui? 

II se plait a jouer, il n'etudie ja- 
mais. 

Vous plaisez vous chez vos parents 1 

De quoi vous rejouissez vous 7 

Nous nous rejouissons de votre 
gucces. 

Nous nous en rejouissons. 

Pourquoi vous depechez vous 1 

Nous nous depechons d'6crire. 

Nous nous plaisons en Angle terre. 

Nous ne nous plaisons pas d Paris. 



Does the merchant go away to-day ? 

We are going away to-morrow. 
I go away when I am tired. 
Why do you get angry with him ? 

He takes pleasure in playing, he nevet 

studies. 
Do you like to be at your relations' ? 
At what do you rejoice? 
We rejoice at your success. 

We rejoice at it. 
Why do you make haste? 
We make haste to write. 
We like to be m England. 
We do not like to be in Paris. 



LESSON XL. 



123 



Nous ne notis y plaisons pas. 
Vous plaisez vous a New York 1 
Nous nous y plaisons. 



We do not like to be there. 

Do you like to be in New Yoi k ? 

We like to be there. 



Exercise 77. 

Ambassadeur, m. am- Jouer, 1. to play ; Prochain, e, need; 

bassador; Malheur, m. misfortune; Retourn-er, 1. to return; 

Arrivee, f. arrival; Mieux, better ,• Semaine, f. week; 

Autrui, m. others ; Midi, noon ; Tante, f. aunt ; 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run; Parceque, because; Turc, turque, Turkish. 

Jamais, never ; 

1. Vous en allez vous bient6t? 2. Je m'en vais la semaine pro- 
chaine. 3. Pourquoi vous en allez vous ? 4. Parceque je ne me plais 
pas ici. 5. Vous plaisez vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 6. Je 
m'y plais mieux. 7. N'avez vous pas tort de vous en aller si tot ? 
8. J'ai raison de m'en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez vous pas des mal- 
heurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point. 11. Cet 
homme se fache-t-il contre le jardinier? 12. II se fache contre lui parce 
qu'il ne veut pas se depecher. 13. Se fache-t-il bien souvent? 14. U 
se fache a tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne vous depechez 
vous jamais? 16. Je me depeche toujours quand j'ai quelque chose a 
faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez vous pas a courir et a jouer? 18. Je me 
plais a jouer et mon frere se plait a lire. 19. Vous rejouissez vous 
de l'arrivee de l'ambassadeur turc? 20. Je m'en rejouis. 21. Ne vous 
plaisez vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y plais beaucoup mieux 
qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait il pas chez vous ? 24. II 
se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner chez son pere. 25. Depe- 
chez vous, il est deja midi. 

Exercise 78. 

1. At what hour does your friend go away? 2. He goes away 
every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 
4. I go away with him when I have time. 5. Will you make haste 
to finish your letter? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- 
dener get angry with his brother ? 8. He gets angry against him when 
he does not make haste. 9. Make haste, my friend, it is ten o'clock. 
10. Why do you not make haste ? 11. I like to play, but I do not like 
to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I like to stay 
there. 14. Are you rejoiced at the arrival of your mother? 15. I 
rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so soon? 
17. He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 18. Do you 
rejoice at other people's misfortunes? 19. I do not rejoice at them. 
20. I rejoice at your success. 21. Does not your brother draw near 
the fire? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too warm. 23. Does that 



124 LESSON XL I. 

young lady get angry against you ? 24. She gets angry at trifles (ifc 
rieri). 25. Do you like to be in Paris ? 26. I like to be there. 27. 
Can you do without me to-day? 28. We cannot do without you— 
make haste to finish your work (ouvrage). 29. Do you want your 
penknife? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make haste to rise, it is six 
o'clock. 32. Is it fine weather ? 33. No, Sir, it rains. 34. Is your 
father well this morning? 35. Yes, Sir, he is very well. 



LESSON XLL LEQON XLI. 

THE PAST INDEFINITE. [§ 121.] 

1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the indicative 
of one of the auxiliary verbs, avoir and etre [} 45, (8.)], and the par- 
ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, § 47 and 
following sections : — 

J'ai parle, je suis arrive. J have spoken, I am arrived. 

2. The past indefinite is used to express an action entirely com- 
pleted, but performed at a time of which a part is not yet elapsed, 
or at a time entirely past, but not specified. [$ 121, (1.) (2.)] : — 

J'ai vu votre pere ce matin. / have seen your father this morning. 

Je ne vous ai pas encore parle. / have not yet spoken to you. 

3. The past indefinite may also be used, when the time is speci- 
fied [{ 121, (3.)] :— 

Je lui ai ecrit la semaine derniere. / wrote to him last week. 
Je lui ai envoy c une lettre le mois / sent him a letter last month. 
dernier. 

4. In this tense and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gene- 
rally placed between the auxiliary and the participle [§ 136, (3.)] ■ — 

Vous nous avez souvent parle. You have often spoken to us. 

Je ne l'ai pas encore vu. / have not yet seen him. 

5. The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to-morrow ; hier, yester- 
day ; polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in ment, and long adverbs 
generally, do not come between the auxiliary and the participle, but 
follow Rule 1. L. 34. See $ 136, (5.) :— 

Vous avez lu derniereruent. You read lately. 

6. The unipersonal verb y avoir, [L. 33. R. 3. 4,] placed before a 
Word expressing time, corresponds with the English word, ago : — 

J'ai re$u une lettre, il y a lmit jours. J received a letter eight days ago, 
Vous avez achete une maison, il y a You bought a house a year ago. 
un an. 



LESSON XLI. 



125 



Kesume of Examples. 



Vos neveux nous ont parle. 
Nous avons parle a votre pere. 
Le tailleur a-t-il fait mon habit 1 
Le boulanger a mis son chapeau. 
Le cordonnier a ote ses souliers. 
Votre frere a dit quelque chose. 
Votre sceur qu'a-t-elle dit ? 
N'avez vous rien dit a mon cousin 7 
Je ne lui ai rien dit. 
Je ne l'ai jamais rencontre. 
Je ne leur ai jamais parle. 
Qu'avez vous fait aujourd'hui 1 
Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. 

ft 136.] 
Leur en avez vous souvent parle 1 

Je leur en ai souvent parle. 
Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit. 

N'avez vous pas assez ecrit 1 
II m'a ecrit, il y a longtemps. 
II nous a repondu, il y a un mois. 



Your nephews ipoh*. to us. 
We spoke to your fatlier. 
Has the tailor mack my coat ? 
The baker has put on his hat. 
The shoemaker has taken his shoes off. 
Your brotlier said something. 
What did your sister say ? 
Have you told my cousin nothing ? 
I have told him nothing. 
I have neuc ^et him. 
I never spoke to them. 
What have you done to-day ? 
We did not work yesterday. 

Have you often spoken to them about 
■ it? 

I have often spoken to them about it. 
I have not yet said any thing to them 

about it. 
Have you not written enough! 
He wrote tome a long time ago. 
He replied to us a month ago. 



Avocat, m. barrister; 
Cela, ceci, that, this ; 
Dit, from dire, said; 
Etuai-er, 1. to study; 
Gant, m. glove ; 



Exercise 79. 

Gar 9 on, m. boy ; 
Hier, yesterday ; 
Journee, f. day ; 
Lu. from lire, read ; 
Ministre, m. minister; 



Mis, from mettre, put on 
Plant-er, 1. to plant ; 
Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 
Soulier, m. shoe ; 
Vu, from voir, seen. 



1. Qui vous a dit cela? 2. L'avocat me Ta dit. 3. Lui avez vous 
parle de cette affaire ? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L'avez 
vous vu dernierement ? 6. Jel'ai vu il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez 
vous pas ecrit hier? 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toule la journee. [L. 
26, (9.)] 9. N'avez vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers? 10. Je 
n'ai pas 6te mes gants, mais j'ai 6te mon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur 
n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau? 12. Oui, Monsieur, il a mis son cha- 
peau. 13. Qu'avez vous fait a ce petit garcon? 14. Je ne luiai rien 
fait. 15. Ne lui avez vous point dit que je suis ici? 16. Je ne le lui 
ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez vous etudie ce matin ? 18. Nous avons 
etudie nosleconset nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- 
nistre a-t-il plante le poirier ? 20. II l'a plante :1 y a plus de hull jours. 
21. Avez vous achete un habit de drap noir? 22. J'en ai achete un. 
23. L'avez vous porte aujourd'hui ? 24. Je ne l'ai pas encore porta, 
25. Nous avons mis nos souliers et nos has ce matin. 

Exercise 80. 
1. Have you studied to-day? 2. We have no time to study, we 



126 LESSON XLII. 

have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother? 4. I 
have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my 
mother ? 6. He has not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (&) 
my mother that I have taken (jpris) this book ? 8. I have not yet 
seen your mother. 9. What have you done this morning? 10. We 
have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat? 12. I have 
not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller writ- 
ten to your brother? 14. He wrote to him a long time ago. 15. 
Did he write to him a month ago? 16. He wrote to him more than 
a year ago. 17. H~ve you planted a pear-tree ? 18. We have planted 
several. 19. Is it too cold to (pour) plant trees ? 20. It is too warm. 
21. What has the gardener done to your little boy ? 22. He has done 
nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him ? 24. No 
one has done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him ? 
26. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Has your father put on his 
black hat ? 28. No, Sir, he has not put on his black hat. 29. What 
has youi brother said ? 30. He has said nothing. 31. Has your sis- 
ter told you that? 32. She told it me. 33. Did you not work yes- 
terday ? 34. We did not work yesterday, we had nothing to do 
35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. 



LESSON XLH. LEQON XLII. 

THE PAST PARTICIPLE. [§ 134.] 

1. The past participle, which in French forms a part of every com- 
pound tense, [} 45, (8.)] is susceptible of changes in its termination. 

2. The student will find in the table of the terminations of the 
regular verbs [$ 60.], the different changes which the past participle 
of those verbs undergoes. The feminine terminations of the past 
participle of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical 
table, } 62. 

3. The last letter of the feminine termination is always an e mute. 

4. Tifi plura. of a past participle not ending with an s, is formed 
by the addition of that letter to the singular, masculine or femi- 
nine. 

5. The participle past, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, never 

agrees with the nominative or subject [} 134, (3.)] : — 

Les demoiselles ont chants. The young ladies sang. 

Cea messieurs ont lu toute la journee. Those gentlemen read the whole day. 



LESSON XLII. 127 

6. The participle past, having etre as its auxiliary, assumes in its 
termination the gender and number of the subject [{ 134, (2.)] * — 

Ma fille est arrivee ce matin. My daughter arrived this morning 

Nos freres ne sont pas venus. Our brothers are not come. 

7. The participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, agrees in 

gendei and number with its direct object or regime direct, [§ 2, (2.) 

j 42, (4 )] when that object precedes it [$ 134, (4.)] :— 

Les dames que nous avons vues. The ladies whom we have seen. 
Les lettres que nous avons lues. The letters which we have read. 

8. When the regime direct or objective (accusative) follows the 

participle, no agreement takes place [$ 134, (5.)] : — 

Avez vous vu les dames 7 Have you seen the ladies ? 

Avons nous lu les lettres 1 Have we read the letters ? 

9. A participle past never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- 
rect object (dative or ablative) [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] : — 

Les dames a. qui nous avons parle. The ladies to whom we have spoken. 

10. The participle past used adjectively, that is, without an aux 
iliary follows the rule of the adjective, [} 66, (3„) § 134, (1 )| :— 

Des livres bien imprimes. Well printed books. 

11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains 

invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural 

noun [\ 135, (7.)] :— 

Avez vous apporte des plumes 1 Have you brought pens ? 

J 'en ai apporte. / have brought some. 

12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement 
of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen [$ 135, 
(7.)] :- 

Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. The pens which I have brought from it. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vos soeurs ont elles ecrit ? | Have your sisters written? 

Elles n'ont pas encore ecrit. They have not yet written. 

Les lettres que nous avons ecrites, 
Avez vous ecrit vos lettres'? 



Je les ai lues, je les ai ecrites. 
Les avez vous apportees 1 
Je ne les ai pas apportees. 
Avez vous appele ces dames 1 
Je ne les ai pas appelees. 
Qui avez vous vu ce matin 1 
Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. 
Nous les avons vues. 
Nous ne leur avons pas parle. 
Avez vous des livres relies ? 



Tlie letters which we have written. 

Have you written your letter r 7 

I have read them, I have written them 

Have you brought them ? 

I have not brought them. 

Have you called those ladies ? 

I have not called them. 

Whom have you seen this morning ? 

We ha ve seen those young ladies. 

We have seen them. 

We have not spoken to them. 

Have you bound books ? 



128 



LESSON LXII. 



J'ai des livres broches. 

Avez vous achete des pommes ? 
J'en ai achete. 
Nous en avons achete. 
Nous les en avons persuades. 



J have unbound (ditched, in papei 

covers,) books. 
Have you bought apples ? 
I have bought some. 
We have bought some. 
We have persuaded them of it. 



Exercise 81. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy. [§ 49, Donn-er, 1. to give ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; 

(5.)] Dit, from Dire, 4. ir. Gravure, f. engraving ; 

Apport-er, 1. to bring ; said; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; 

Appel-er, 1. to call. [§49, Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Rec-evoir, 3. to receive; 

(4.)] Examin-er, 1. to exam- Reli-er, 1. to bind; 

Broch-er, 1. to stitch; ine ; Revenus, m. p. income : 

Bourse, f. purse ; Expres, on purpose ; Tasse. f. cup; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Fleur, f. flower ; Vu, from voir. 3.ir. seen. 
Commission, f. errand; 

1. Nous avez vous apporte nos habits ? 2. Nous ne les avons pas 
encore apportes. 3. Les avez vous oublies ? 4. Nous ne les avong 
pas oublies, mais nous n'avons pas eu le temps de les apporter. 5 
Pourquoi n'avez vous pas appele les marchands ? 6. Je les ai appeles, 
mais ils ne m'ont pas entendu. 7. Avez vous entendu cette mu- 
sique? 8. Je l'ai entendue. 9. N'avez vous pas vu les jolies fleurs 
que j'ai apportees 1 ? 10. Je les ai vues; a qui les avez vous don- 
nees? 11. Je ne les ai donnees a personne, je les ai gardees pour 
vous. 12. Avez vous bieri examine ces gravures? 13. Je les ai 
bien examinees. 14. Les avez vous achetees. 15. Je ne les ai point 
achetees. 16. N'avez vous point recu vos revenus? 17. Je ne les 
ai point encore recus. 18. La domestique a-t-elle casse ces tasses? 
19. Elle les a cassees. 20. A-t-elle casse des tasses expres? 21. 
Elle n'en a pas casse expres. 22. Avez vous achete des livres re- 
lies ou broches. 23. J'ai achete des livres relies. 24. Nous avez 
vous dit ces paroles ? 25. Nous vous les avons dites. mais vous lea 
avez oubliees. 26. Je n'ai pas oublie votre commission. 

Exercise 82. 

1. Have you seen my cups ? 2. I have not yet seen the3L 3. 
Have you brought me my books? 4. I have not forgotten them, 1 
have left them (laiss-er, 1 .) at my brother's. 5. Has your mother called 
your sisters? 6. She has not yet called them. 7. Has the servant 
told you this news ? (nouvelle.) 8. She has told me this news. 9. 
She has told it me. 10. Have you forgotten my errand? 11. We 
have not forgotten it, we have forgotten yourmoiuy. 12. Where 
have you left your purse? 13. We left it at the merchant's. 14* 
Have you bought the beautiful (belles) engra rings which I saw &t 



LESSON XLIII. 129 

your bookseller's ? 15. I have not seen them. 16. Has yt ur mother 
bought them ? 17. She has bought books, but she has bought no 
engravings. 18. Has that little girl broken my cups ? 19. She has 
broken them on purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income 
every month? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the 
house which you have bought large? 23. I have bought no house. 
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- 
ceived a letter from him four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to 
those ladies? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given 
them flowers? 29. I have given them some (en). 30. .Are the 
books which you have bought bound? 31. No, Sir, they are in 
paper covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not 
examined it. 34. Your brother (en) has examined several (plusieurs) 



LESSOR XLHI. LECON XLHI. 

a 

USE OF THE AUXILIARIES (§ 46). 

1. The active verb [§ 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has 
or may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir, as its 
auxiliary [($ 46, (1.)] :— 

Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our banker. 

2. Almost all neuter verbs, i. e. verbs which cannot have a direct 
object, take the auxiliary avoir, when they express action : — 

Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 

3. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs, expressing action, 

are, however, conjugated with tire — aller, to go ; arriver, to arrive ; 

choir, tomber, to fall; deceder, mourir, to die; naitre, to be born; 

venir, to come ; parvenir, to succeed ; devenir, to become ; revenir, to 

return : — 

A quelle heure etes vous venu ? At what hour did you come ? 
Je suis * ne en France. / icas born in France. 

4. A few neuter verbs [$ 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they express 
action, and etre, when they express situation : — 

* Observe that when the person spoken of is living, the French use the 
present and not the past of the auxiliary with the past participle of 
fcaitre, to be born : — Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. TfuU Jxuiy (is) 
was b^rn in England :— Mon frere est ne en France. My brothe* (u) vxu 
born in France. 

e* 



130 



LE880N XLIII. 



Votre frere a-t-il sorti ce matin ? Has your brother gone out this morn- 
ing? 
Votre frere est il s >rti 7 Is your brotlier gone out ? 

5. The past indefinite of the verb etre, [4. ir.] ( J'ai ete, &c ) ii 
used instead of the preterite indefinite of aller (Je suis alle ;) when 
speaking of a place where one has been : — 

Le medecin a etc a Paris. Tke physician has been at Paris, 

J'ai ete a l'eglise ce matin. J went to church this morning. 

6. When, however, we are still in a given place or on the road 
towards it, the expression, Je suis alle, &c. is used : — 

Le medecin est alle a Londres. The physician is gone to London 

Votre soeur est allee a l'eglise. Your sister is gone to church. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous ete au bal hier au soir 1 
Nous n'y avons pas ete. 
Ou cette demoiselle a-t-elle ete 1 
Elle a ete chez son frere et chez 

nous. 
Ou votre sceur est elle allee ce 

matin % 
Elle est allee trouver sa cousine. 
N'avez vous pas sorti aujourd'hui 1 
Je n'ai pas encore sorti. 
Ou est Monsieur le general 1 
Je ne sais pas, Monsieur, il 

sorti. 
Ou ce monsieur est il ne 1 
II est ne a Paris ou a Lyon. 
Votre niece a-t-elle ete voir 

frere % 
Elle a ete le voir hier. 



est 



son 



Elle est allee le voir hier. 



Did you go to the ball last evening ? 

We did not go. 

Whither did that young lady go ? 

She went to her brother's and to our 
house. 

Where is your sister gone this morn- 
ing? 

She is gone to her cousin. 

Did you not go out to-day ? 

I have not yet been out. 

Where is the general ? 

I do not know, Sir, he is gone out. 

Where was that gentleman born ? 
He teas born in Paris or Jjyons. 
Did your niece go to visit her brother? 

She went to see him yesterday {and 

is back'). 
She went to see him yesterday {and is 

not back.) 



Exercise 83. 



Bijouterie, f. jewelry ; Ma^on, m. mason; Orfevre, m. goldsmith ; 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Magasin, m. warehouse ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out ; 

Ete, {from etre, 4. ir.)Malade, sick; Retourn-er, 1. to re- 

been; Marchandise, f. merchan- turn; 

Espagne, f. Spain ; disc ; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out - 

Horloger, rn. watch-ma-l$e, from Naitre, 4. ir.Venu, from venir, 2, 
ker ; to be born ; ir. came. 

1. A quelle heure votre sceur est elle venue? 2. Elle est venue 
a huit heures moins un quart. 3. Ces demoiselles sont elles nces a 
Rouen ou a Caen ? 4. Elles ne sont nees ni a Rouen ni a Caei^ 
elles sont nees a Strasbourg. 6. L'horloger est il chez lui ? 6. Non, 
Monsieur, il est alle a son magasin. 7. A-t-il ete a Paris cette 



LESSON XLIII. 131 

M nee ? 8. Oui, Madame, il y a ete. 9. Y a-t-il achete 1 des marcnan- 
dises? 10. II y a achete de la bijouterie. 11. Avez vous ete trouver 
mon pere? 12. J'ai ete le trouver. 13. Votre chapelier a-t-il sorti 
aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a pas sorti, il est malade. 15. Le mac on est il a 
lamaison? 16. Non. Madame, il est sorti. 17. Quand est il sorti ? 
18. U est sorti il y a une heure. 19. Votre chapelier est il arrive 
aujourd'hui ou hier? 20. II est arrive hier a quatre heures du matin. 
21. Notre taiileur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui? 22. II est 
parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est il pas parti 
pour l'Espagne ? 24. Non, Monsieur, il est retourne en Allemagne. 
25. Ma soeur a ete a l'eglise ce matin, et elle est allee a l'ecole, il y a 
une demi-heure. 

Exercise 84.- 

1. Is the physician at home ? 2. No, Sir, he is not at home; he is 
out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. |£b, Sir, I have not 
been out ; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl o*ut ? 6. Yes, Sir, 
she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the hatter 
arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go to 
Paris or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months ago, 
but he is back (de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother or to my 
sister? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where was that 
gentleman born? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter or in Ports- 
mouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, Sir, she 
was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that your brother 
has bought a good house ? 18. He has bought a very good house in 
London. 19. Do you know at what time the watchmaker arrived ? 20. 
He arrived this morning at a quarter before five. 21. Has he brought 
much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought much jewelry, but he has 
brought many watches (montre, f.). 23. Has he been in France or 
in Germany? 24. He has been in France, in Germany, and in Swit- 
zerland (Suisse). 25. Is your sister in (a la maisori). Sir? 26. No, 
Sir, she is out ; she is gone to church. 27. Did she go to school 
yesterday * 28. She went to school and to church. 29. Is she there 
now? 30. No, Sir, she is back. 31. Is the hatter arrived? 32. Yes, 
Sir, he is arrived. 33. When did he arrive? 34. He arrived yester- 
day at nine o'clock in the morning. 



132 



LESSON XLIV. 



LESSON XLIV. 



LEgON XLIV. 



1. Combi-en de temps corresponds with the English expression 

\ow long. 

Combien de temps avez vous de- How long did you live in Italy ? 
mears en Italie 1 

2. Combien de fois answers to the English, how often, liow many 
times. 

Combien de fois y avez vous ete 1 How many times have you been there ? 

3. Jusqu'ou is used for how far, what distance, &c. 
Jusqu'ou avez vous ete 1 How far have you been? 

4. Jusqu'a quelle heure (till what hour,) means also, how late. 

Jusqu'a quelle heure avez vous at- How late did you wait ? 

rendu? 

5. D'ou means whence; par ou, lohich way, in what direction. 
D'ou venez vous mon ami 1 Whence do you come, my friend 7 
Par ou votre ami est il alle 1 Which way is your friend gone? 

6. Mener [§ 49.], porter, to take, to carry; amener, apporter, to bring 

to take with one ; emmener, emporter, to take, to carry away. We use 

mener, amener, emmener, for to take, to bring, to take away, in the 

sense of conducting, leading, guiding, on foot or in a vehicle. Porter 

apporter, emporter, mean to carry, to bear, to carry away, &c. 

Menez votre soeur a l'ecole. Take your sister to school. 

Portez ce livre a votre soeur. Take this book to your sister. 

Resume of Examples. 



Jusqu'ou votre frere est il alle 1 
II est alle jusqu'a Paris. 
Combien de temps va-t-il y rester % 
II va y rester jusqu'au printemps. 
Combien de temps avez vous de- 

meure a Lcndres 1 
Nous y avons demeure six ans. 
Jusqu'ou avez vous ete 7 
Nous avons ete jusqu'aux Champs 

Elysees. 
Jusqu'a quelle heure avez vous 

ecrit ? 
J'ai ecrit jusqu'a minuit. 
D'ou viennent ees Allemandes 1 
JElles viennent d'Aix-la-chapelle. 
Par ou sont elles venues 1 
Elles sont venues par Broxelles. 
Menez vous cette petite fille a 

l'*cole7 



How far is your brother gone ? 
He is gone as far as Paris. 
How long is he going to stay there ? 
He is going to slay there until spring 
How long did you live in London ? 

Wc lived (here six years. 

How far did you go ? 

Wc went as far as the Champs Elf< 

sees. 
How late did you write ? 

I wrote until midn 

Whence come those German ladies? 

Th cy co m c from A ix- (a -eh apeke. 
Which way did (hey come? 

Do you take {lead) that littie girl &• 
school ? 



LESSON XLIV. ]83 



Je ne lJ mene pas, je l'y porte, elle 
est trop petite pour marcher. 

Amenez vous vos enfants % 

Portez vois une lettre a la poste ? 

J'emuiene mon cheval, j'emporte 
raa mont.^. 



/ do not lead her there, I carry hei 
there ; she is too imall to walk. 

Do you bring your children ? 

Do you take a letter to the post-office ? 

I bring away my horse, I bring away 
my watch. 



Exercise 85. 

Bruit, m. noise ; Ici, liere ; Pied, m.foot; 

Drap, m. cloth; Loin, far; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Eleve, m. pupil; Magnifique, magnificent; Soieries, f. p. silk goods; 

Fils, m. son; Midi, noon; Voiture, f. carriage; 

Pin, e,fine; Nouvelle, f. news; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

1. Le jeune homme est il alle loin ? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, 
il n'est alle que jusqu'a Paris. 3. Vos enfants font trop de bruit, 
pourquoi ne les emmenez vous pas ? 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu- 
vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez vous amenes ici ? 6. Je les ai 
amenes en voiture. 7. A quelle heure amenez vous le medecin ? 
8. Je l'amene tous les jours a midi. 9. Combien de fois par jour 
menez vous vos eleves a l'eglise? 10. Je les mene a l'eglise deux 
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez vous ete? 12. J'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 13. Par oa ces voyageurs sont ils venus? 14. Ils sont 
venus par Amiens et par Rouen. ,15. D'oa apportez vous cette nou- 
velle? 16. Je l'apporte de Cologne. 17. D'oa avez vous amene 
ces superbes chevaux ] 18. Je les ai amenes d'Angleterre. 19. Si vous 
quittez la France, avez vous l'intention d'emmener votre ills'? 20. J'ai 
Tintention de l'emmener. 21. Qu'avez vous apporte de France? 22. 
Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps fins et des cha- 
peaux de Lyon. 23. Avez vous amene votre fille a pied ou a cheval ? 24. 
Je Tai amenee en voiture. 25. Vos freres nous ont apporte des livres. 

Exercise 86. 

1. How long did your son live in London? 2. He lived there 
ten years. 3. How far is the physician gone ? 4. The physician 
is gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him ? 6. 
He has not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two little 
girls ? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 9. 
Is she too little to walk? 10. She is not too small to walk, but she 
is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse? 12. We have brought 
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- 
mised me (vromis)1 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. 
Has that lady brought her eldest (aint) son? 16. She has brought 
all her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in a 
carriage. 19. Which way did your brother come from Germany! 



134 LESSOR xi-v. 

20. He came by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do you intend 
to take your son to school this afternoon ? 22. I do not intend to 
take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick \o walk ? 
24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25 Why do 
you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother has taken my 
horse away. 27. Have you brought the physician? 28, T have not 
brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will yoa take this 
book to church ? 30. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have 
you taken my letter to the post-office ? 32. I have forgotten it. 
33. How late did you write ? 34. I wrote until midnight (minuit), 
35. Whence do your sisters come ? 36. They come from Paris. 



LESSON XLV. LEgON XLV. 

(See Lesson 36.) 

1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes etre as its 
auxiliary [$ 46] : — 

Votre cousin s'est promene. Your cousin has taken a walk. 

Nos amis se sont flattes. Our friends have flattered themselves. 

2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated 
with etre, it agrees with its direct regimen, when that regimen pre- 
cedes it, and is invariable when the regimen follows it. The student 
should be careful to see, if the reflective pronoun be a direct or an 
indirect regimen [§ 135.] : — 

Vous vous etes flattees, Mesdemoi- You have flattered yourselves, young 

selles. ladies. 

Elles se sont donne la main They have given (to) each other the 

hand. 

It will be easily perceived that se in the first sentence is a direct 
regimen, and that the same word in the second represents an indu 
reel object. 

3. Verbs essentially unipersonal, i. e., verbs which cannot be cw>» 
jugated otherwise, take avoir as an auxiliary: — 

II a phi, il a neige, il a gele. It rained, it snou-cd, it froze. 

4. Verbs occasionally unipersonal, take etre as an auxiliary : — 
II lui est arrive un mallieur. A misfortune has happened to him. 

5. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonally, and Y avoir, to be there, take 
the auxiliary avoir : — 

A-t-il fait beau temps le mois passe ? Was it fine weather last month ? 
Y a-t-il eu beaucoup do monde 1 Were there many people there? 



LESSON XLT. 



135 



6. Tlie participle past of a unipersonal verb is always invariable 
[{135,(6.)]:- 
Les pluies qu'il yaeu cet ete. The rains which we have had this 



Resume of Examples. 



Les Italiennes se sont elles prome- 

nees'? 
Oui, Monsieur, elles se sont prome- 

nees. 
Nous nous sommes ape^us de cela. 

Votre mere s'est elle bien portee ? 
Vos soeurs se sont elles assises ? 
Cette marchandise s'est elle bien 

vendue 1 
Vos enfants se sont ils appliques a 

l'etude ? 
Us s'y sont appliques. 
Nous nous sommes donne de la 

peine. [§ 135, (1.)] 
Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin 1 
N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps 7 
Quel malheur vous est il arrive 1 

Vous est il arrive quelque cbose ? 
II ne m'est rien arrive. 



Did the Italian ladies walk ? 

Yes, Sir, they have taken a walk. 

We perceived that, or we took notice 

of that. 
Has your mother been well ? 
Did your sisters sit down ? 
Did that merchandise sell well ? 

Did your children apply to study ? 

They applied to it. 

We gave (to) ourselves much trouble, 

What vjeather was it this morning ? 

Was it not fine weather? 

What misfortune has happened to 

you? 
Has any thing happened to you ? 
Nothing has happened to me. 



Exercise 87. 

Acier, m. steel; Grel-er, 1. pec. to hail; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- Hollandais, e. Dutch; mistaken; 

ply ; Neig-er, 1. pec. to snow ; Se serv-ir, 2. ir. ref, to 

S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to Peine, f. trouble ; use ; 

perceive ; Plu, from pleuvoir, rain- Se vend-re, 4. ref. to sell. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to ed; 

sit dovni ; Plume, f. pen ; 

S'ennuy-er, l.pec. R49.] Se port-er, 1. ref. to be 

to grow, weary ; or do ; 

1. A qui vos sceurs se sont elles adressees? 2. Elles se sont 
adressees a. moi. 3. Ne se sont elles pas trompees? [L. 38. 1.] 4. 
Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes vous apercu de votre erreur? 
6. Je ne m'en suis pas apergu. 7. Vous etes vous ennuyes a la 
sampagne ? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38. 4.] 9. Ces 
demoiselles se sont elles ennuyees chez vous? 10. Elles s'y sont 
ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes vous servie pour ecrire, Mademoi- 
selle ? [L. 39. 2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plume d'or. 13. 
Ces ecolieres ne se sont elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 14. 
Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 15. La Hollandaise s'est 
elle assise? 16. Elle ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est T arrive un 



136 LESSON XLVI. 

malheur? 18. II ne lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porte pas bien. 19, 
Ne s'est elle pas donne [§ 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien? 20. 
Cette soie ne s'est elle pas bien vendue ? 21. Elle s'est tres bien 
vendue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la journee ? 23. 
Non, Monsieur, il a plu, il a neige et il a grele. 24. N'est41 rien 
arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ce matin ? 25. Non, 
Madame, il ne leur est rien arrive. 

Exercise 88. 

1. Has it rained to-day ? 2. It has not rained, but it has hailed 
and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little boy ? 4. 
Nothing has happened to him, but he is sick to-day. 5. Did your 
sister sit down at your house ? 6. She did not sit down, she was 
sick. 7. Did that cloth sell well ? 8. It sold very well, we have sold 
it all. 9. Did you perceive your error (erreur) ? 10. We perceived 
it. 11. Were not your sisters mistaken in this affair? 12. They 
were not mistaken. 13. Were not your cousins weary of being in 
the country? 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 15. 
What have you used to write your exercises? 16. I used a gold 
pen, and my brother used a silver pen. 17. Have you used my pen- 
knife (canif) ? 18. I have used it. 19. What has happened to you ? 
20. Nothing has happened to me. 21. Has your mother been well ? 22. 
She has not been well. 23. Did your brothers apply to their studies, 
at school ? 24. They applied to their studies and have finished their 
lessons. 25. What weather was it this morning ? 26. It was very 
fine weather. 27. Has your sister taken much trouble in this affair ? 
28. She has taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did the Dutch 
ladies walk? 30. They walked this morning. 31. How far did they 
walk? 32. They walked as far as your brother's. 33. Have you 
given each other the hand? 34. We shook hands. 35. Those ladies 
flattered themselves very much (beaucoup). 



LESSON XLVI. LECON XLVI. 

THE' PASSIVE VERB ($ 54). 

1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb tire in all 
its tenses, the past participle of an active verb. See model, } 54. 

2. This participle must agree in gender and number with the sub- 
ject [$ 134, (2.) L. 42. R. 6.] : — 



LESSON XLVI. 



137 



Ces viiillard* sont respectes. Those old men are respected. 

Ce3 enfants sont aimes de tout le Those children are loved by every body. 
monde. 

3. The genius of the French language seems to prefer the active 
to the passive voice. Many expressions which are in the passive m 
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or re 
flective [$ 128, (5.) } 113, (1.)] :— 



Cette maisonest a louer ouavendre. 

Ma sceur est a plaindre. 

Get homuie est a craindre. 

Cet homme s'appelle H. [L. 36. R. 2.] 

Cet horame se trompe. [L. 38. R. 2.] 

On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35. R. 2.] 

On nous a dit cela. [L. 35. R. 2.] 



That house is to be let or sold. 
My sister is to be pitied. 
That man is to be feared. 
That man is called H. 
That man is mistaken. 
It is said that it is so. 
We have been told that. 



4. In an answer to a question [see L. 24. R. 12.], the pronoun le 
corresponds in signification w 7 ith the English word so, or it, expressed 
or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not pre- 
ceded by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a 
verb or even to a whole sentence : — 



Ces enfants sont ils aimes 1 
lis ne le sont pas. 
Ces demoiselles sont elles soeurs ? 
Elles ne le sont pas. 



Are those children loved ? 
They are not (so). 
Are those young ladies sisters? 
They are not. 



5. When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in 
signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be 
expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender 
and number of the noun to which it refers. 

Etes vous la sceur de mon ami 1 Are you the sister of my friend ? 
Je la suis. / am (she). 



Resume of Examples. 



Leur conduite est elle approuvee 1 
Elle n'est approuvee de personne. 
Cette dame edt elle estimee et res- 

pectee 1 
Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. 
Ces marchandises sont a vendre. 
Ces enfants sont bien a plaindre. 
A-t-onditqnelquechoseamonfrere? 
On ne lui a rien dit. 
Savez vous comment cela s'appelle 1 
Madame, etes vous maitresse ici 1 
Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur. 
Etes vous la maitresse de la mai- 

son ] 
Je la scis. 



Is their conduct approved ? 

It is approved by nobody. 

Is that lady esteemed and respected 7 

She is neither esteemed nor respected. 

Those goods are to be sold (for sale). 

Those children are to be pitied. 

Has any thing been said to my brothe-* 

Nothing has been said to him. 

Do you J: now how Uiat is called ? 

Madame, are you mistress here ? 

I am not (so), Sir. 

Arc you the mistress ofth* \ouse ? 

I am (she). 



138 LESSON LXVI. i 

Exercise 89. 

S'appel-dr, 1. pec. to foCroi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Pun-ir, 2. to punish; 

calted [§ 49, (4.)] ; Ecolier, m. scholar ; Karement, seldom; 
Auteur, m. author ; Jardin, m. garden ; Relieur, m. bookbinder , 
Blam-er, 1. to blame ; Lou-er, 1. to let, to praise; Souvent, often; 
Car, for ; Mere, f. mother ; Us-er, 1. to wear out; 

Conduite, f. conduct ; Paresseux, se, idle ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 

1. Votre mere est elle aimee de sa scaur? 2. Elle est aimee 3l 
son frere et de sa soeur. 3. Lesltaliens sont ils aimes desFrancais? 
4. Vos ecoliers ne sont ils pas blames ? 5. Ils sont blames quelque- 
fois. 6. Sont ils souvent punis ? 7. Ils sont rarement punis. 8. 
Par qui etes vous puni quand vous etes paresseux ? 9. Je ne suis 
jamais puni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle ete* approuvee? 11. Elle a 
ete approuvee de tout le monde. 12. Elle a ete approuvee par* ses 
amis. 13. Get auteur est il estime ? 14. U est estime de tout le 
monde. 15. Le jardin du relieur est il a. vendre ou a louer? 16. 
On dit qu'il est a louer. 17. Le menuisier a-t-il fait faire un habit ? 
18. II en a fait faire deux. 19. Les habits que vous avez achetes 
sont ils uses (worn out) 1 20. Ils sont uses, j'en ai fait faire d'autres. 
21. Dit-on que nos amis sont aimes de tout le monde ? 22. On ne le 
dit pas, car on ne le croit pas. 23. Les dames que nous avons vues a 
Teglise hier au soir, sont elles soeurs ? 24. Elles ne le sont pas, on 
dit qu' elles sont cousines. 25. On dit que l'officier qui vient d'ar- 
river s'appelle S. 

Exercise 90. 

1. Are you blamed or praised? 2. I am neither blamed nor 
praised. 3. Is not your cousin esteemed by every body ? 4. She is 
esteemed by nobody. 5. What has been said of my brother ! 6. 
Nothing has been said of him. 7. Do you know if your brother's 
house is to be let ? 8. I have been told (on rrfa dii) that it is to be 
sold. 9. Is not an idle person to be pitied? 10. The idle man is to 
be pitied. 11. Is your son sometimes punished at school? 12. He 
s always punished when he is idle. 13. Are your scholars praised 
when they are diligent (diligent) ? 14. They are praised when they 
are diligent, and they are blamed when they are idle. 15. Is that 
lady esteemed and respected? 16. She is loved, esteemed and re- 
spected by every body. 17. What has been told you ? 18. We have 
been told that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam, 
are you Mr. S.'s sister? 20. No, Sir, I am not. 21. Madam, are 

* The prepositions de and par are used indifferently after many passive 
verbs. 



LESSON XLVII. 139 

you pleased with your son's conduct ? 22. No, Sir, I am not, for he 
is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ? 
24. It is said that li e is called H. 25. What is your brother's name 1 
26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother 
is arrived'? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which 
your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 31. 
Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat made. 
33. Is his other coat worn out ? 34. The coat which he bought last 
year is worn out. 



LESSON XLVII. LEgON XLVH. 

1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go away 
[L. 40. 1, 2.], the pronoun en will of course keep its general place, 
after the other pronouns and before the auxiliary. It must never 
come between the auxiliary and the participle : — 

Je m'en suis alle, I went away; Nous nous en We went away ; 

sommes alles, 
Tu t'en es alle, Thou wentest Vous vous en etes You went away / 

away ; alles, 

II s'en est alle, He went away ; lis s'en sont alles, They went away 

Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies are gone away. 

Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen are gone away. 

2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the 
English to Jit, to sit : — 

Mon habit va bien. My coat Jits or sits ivell. 

3. Seoir [3. ir. see table } 62.] answers to the English to suit, to 
become : — 

Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become you. 

4. Essayer (5 49.) corresponds in signification to the English to 
try cm : — 

J'ai essaye mon gilet, il me va bien. / have tried my waistcoat, it jits me 

well. 

6. fitre is often used in French for appartenir, to belong [} 106, 
*3.)]:- 

A i To whom does that house belong ? 

qui est cette maison ? J ^ K hou5e * that ? 

KUe est a mon cousin. It is my cousin's. 



140 



LESSON XLVII. 



Resume of Examples. 



A quelle heure vous en etes vous 

alle 1 
Je m'en suis alle a neuf heures. 
Vous en etes vous allees trop tot, 

Mesdames 1 
Nous nous en sommes allees trop 

tard. 
Cette robe vous va-t-elle bien 1 
Elle ne me va pas bien. 
Cet habit vous sied il fort bien 1 
Je l'ai essaye, mais il ne va pas 

bien. 
II lui va bien (regime indirect). 
II me gene, il me serre trop. 
Cette robe ne lui va pas bien. 
Ces livres sont ils a vous ou a moi 1 
lis ne sont ni a moi ni a vous. 
A qui sont ils done ^ 
Les livres de qui, avez vous appor- 

tes? 
J'ai apporte ceux de mon frere. 



At what hour did yo% go away ? 

I went away at nine v } clock. 

Did you go away too soon, ladies 1 

We went away too late. 

Does that dr est fit you well? 

It does not fit me well. 

Does that coat become you very well I 

I have tried %i on, but it does not fit 

me. 
It fits him well. 

It hurts me, it presses me too much. 
Tliat dress does not fit her well. 
Are those books yours or mine? 
They belong neitlter to me nor to you. 
Whose are they then ? 
Whose books have you brought ? 

I have brought my brother's. 



Neuf, ve, new f 
to Ou, where) 

Serr-er, 1. to press* 
Ten-ir, 2. ir. to hold; 
Yers, towards, about. 



Exercise 91. 

Beau-frere, m. brother-in- Fonce, e, dark ; 

law; Gen-er, 1. to hurt, 

Botte, f. boot; press; 

Clair, e, light; Gilet, m. waistcoat; 

Court, e, short; Large, wide; 

Etroit, e, narrow, tight; Mieux, better ; 

1. Vos bottes ne vont elles pas bien? 2. Elles ne me vont pas 
bien, elles me serrent trop. 3. Sont elles trop etroites ? 4. Elles 
sont trop etroites et trop courtes, elles me genent. 5. Le cordonnier 
s'en est il alle ? 6. II ne s'en est pas encore alle. 7. A quelle heure 
les compagnes de votre soeur s'en sont elles allees ? 8. Elles s'en 
sont allees vers six heures de Tapres-midi. 9. L'habit que vous 
tenez, est il a vous ou a votre frere ? 10. II n'est ni a lui ni a moi, 
il est a mon beau frere. 11. Lui va-t-il bien ? 12. II lui va fort bien, 
et il lui sied bien. 13. Ou l'a-t-il fait faire? 14. II l'a fait faire en 
France ou en Allemagne. 15. A qui sont les livres que lit Made- 
moiselle votre soeur? 16. Ils sont a. moi. 17. Votre gilet va-t-il 
mieux que celui de votre beau-frere 2 18. II me va beaucoup mieux. 
19. Votre habit ne vous gene-t-il pas? 20. II ne saurait {cannot) 
me gener, il est de beaucoup trop large. 21. Avez vous essaye votre 
habit neuf? 22. Je l'ai essaye, mais la couleur ne me tded pas. 
23. Est elle trop claire ? 24. Elle est tx>pfoncce. 25. Les couleurs 
foncees ne me sieent jamais. 



LESSON XLVIII. 141 



Exercise 92. 



1. Are Jour frie ids gone away ? 2. They are not yet gone away, 
they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away ? £ 
She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go away 
late ? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new dress 
become her? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it not bo 
come her? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light colors 
become your brothers wife ? 12. They become her very well. 13. 
Are your new boots too narrow or too wide? 14. They are neither 
too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does your brother's 
waistcoat fit him? 16. It fits him, but it does not become him. 17. 
Light colors never become him. 18. Does your coat press you? 
19. It does not press me, it is by far too wide. 20. Whose house is 
that? 21. It is my father's and brother's. 22. Whose books have 
you brought this morning ? 23. I have brought my brother's and 
my sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those? 25. They are my mo- 
ther's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are not those German 
books yours ? 27. They are not mine, they are my friend's. 28. 
Are those pens yours or mine ? 29. They are neither yours nor 
mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat fit you? 31. Yes, 
Sir, it fits me, but it does not become me. 32. Is your hat too 
small? 33. It is too large {grand). 34. Are your gloves too large ? 
35. They are too small, I cannot put them on. 



LESSON XLVIH. LEgON XLVHI. 

1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to be necessary, is always conjugated 
unipersonally. See table, { 62. 

II faut, il a fallu. It is necessary, it was or has been ?*€- 

cessary. 
II faut etudier tous les jours. It is necessary to study every day. 

2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative 
or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative — me, to, lui, 
nous, vous, leur), placed before the verb, will De equivalent to the 
pronoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, to be 
obliged, &c. : — 

II me faut ecrire un theme. I must wrde an exercise. 

Ou nous faut il aller 1 Where must wi go 1 



142 



LESSON XL VI II. 



3. Falloir i a used in the signification of to want, to need, to le under 

the necessity of having : — 

II me faut un livre. I need a book. 

II lui faut de l'argent. He is in want ofmaruy. 

4 When must is used in the last acceptation, and has a noun as 
its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence should 
be in the indirect regimen preceded by a : — 

II faut un livre a ma soeur. My sister must have a bcok [needs a 

book). 

Resume of Examples. 



Pour apprendre une langue il faut 

etudier. 
II faut aller a l'eglise et a l'ecole. 

II faut rester a la maison. 

II me faut lire un bon livre * 

II lui faut aller voir sa mere. 

Que nous faut-il faire 1 

Que leur faut-il lire % 

Que leur faut-il 1 

II leur faut de l'argent ou du credit. 

Vous faut-il cinquante francs 7 

II me faut cinquante-cinq francs 1 
Combien d'argent faut-il a votre 

pere'? 
II lui en faut beaucoup. 
Nous avons ce qu'il [R. 3.] nous faut. 



To learn a language it is necessary 

to study. 
It is necessary to goto church and to 

school. 
It is necessary to remain at home. 
I must read a good book. 
She must go and see her mother. 
What must we do? 
What must they read ? 
What do they want or need ? 
They need or must have money or 

creolit. 
Do you vjant or must you have fifty 

francs ? 
I must have or I need fifty-five francs 
How much money does your father 

want ? 
He wants much (of it). 
We have what we want. 



Fort, very, very much ; 
Modiste, milliner; 
Ouvrage, m. work; 
Payer, 1. pec. [§49, (2.)], 

to pay ; 
Peine, f. trouble; 
Quand, when. 



Exercise 93. 

Aller trouver, to go to a Davantage, more ; 

person ; Desir-er, 1. to wish, de- 
Chirurgien, m. surgeon ; sire ; 

Centime, m. 100^ of a Dette, f. debt ; 

franc; Envoy-er, 1. ir. [§49, 
Combien, how much, (2.)], to send; 

how many? Fin-ir. 2. to finish; 

1. Que faut il faire aujourd'hui? 2. Aujourd'hui il faut travailler. 
8. A-t-il fallu travailler fort pour finir l'ouvrage a temps? 4. L a 
fallu travailler toute la journee. 5. Quand faut il ecrire a notre 
ami? 6. II faut lui ecrire aujourd'hui. 7. Me faut il aller trouver 
mon pere ? 8. II vous faut aller le trouver, il desire vous parler. 9. 
A-t-il besoin de quelque chose ? 10. II lui faut des livres, des plumes 
et de Tencre. 11. Ne lui faut il pas aussi de l'argent ? 12. II lui en 

* Another construction of these sentences will be f dui id Le»son 22, 
111 



LESSON XLJX. 143 

faut beaucoup pour payer ses dettes. 13. Yous faut-il encore quelque 
those? 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ee qu'il me faut. 15. 
Ne faut il pas du papier a votre sceur? 16. II ne lui en faut pas da- 
vantage.* 17. Que faut il envoyer au chirurgien ? 18. II faut lui 
envoyer de l'argent^il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-^le 
toat ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui faut. 21. 
Combien vous faut il? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. Ne voua 
faut il pas davantage ? 24. II ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui 
faut il pour sa peine ? 26. II demande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. 

Exercise 94. 
1. What must we do? 2. You must bring your book and learn 
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. 
It is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to 
speak to your father? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. 
Is it necessary to go to D. to-day ? 8. It is necessary to go there 
(y). 9. Must I go to your sister? 10. You must go to her, she 
wishes to speak to you. 11. How much money must your brother 
have? 12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many 
books does your sister want? 14. She must have many books, she 
reads (lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We 
must send him our horse ; his own (le sien) is sick. 17. Must he 
not have paper? 18. He must have some; he has letters to write. 
19. Must he have much ? 20. He must have a quire (main, f.). 21. 
Do you want any thing more? (See No. 13, in the French exercise 
above.) 22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 
24. Must you have one hundred francs? 25. I must have ten dol- 
lars. 26. What does the surgeon want ? 27. He must have money 
to (pour) pay his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants? 29. 
He has not aL that he wants. 30. The milliner has received all that 
she wants. 31. What must you have for your trouble ? 32. How 
much do you want? 33. How much do we want? 34. What must 
Id)? 35. You must write a letter. 36. What must she write. e 
37. She must write four pages. 38. She must go to church. 



LESSON XLIX. LEgON XLIX. 

1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, R. 3.], is also used uniper- 
•onaily : — 
H no vous sied pas de parler ainsi. M does not occomc you to speak thus. 

* This adverb can never be placed before a substantive. 



144 



LESSON XL IX. 



2. The verb convenir [2. ir. see § 62.], to suit, is at times used uai« 
personally. It then signifies to be suitable, advisable, &c. : — 

II convient de lui ecrire. It is advisable to write to him, 

3^ The irregular verb valoir [see table, § 62.] corresponds in sig- 
nification to the English expression, to be worth :— 

Cette maisonvaut cinq mille francs. That house is worth Jive thousand 

francs. 

4. Ne rien valoir means to be good for nothing; ne pas valoir 
grand'chose, to be worth little, not to be good for much. 



Ce drap ne vaut rien. 

Notre maison ne vaut pas grand'chose. 



That cloth is good for nothing. 
Our house is not good for much. 



5. Etre riche de . . . means to be worth, to possess; when a person 
is the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in this sense. 

Cette personne est riche de cinq That person is worth five thousand 
mille piastres. dollars. 

6. Valoir mieux, conjugated unipersonally, means to be better; 
valoir la peine, to be worth the while : — 

II vaut mieux travailler que d'etre It is better to labor than to be idle, 

oisif. 

II ne vaut pas la peine de parler It is not worth the while to speak when 

quand on n'a rien a dire. one has nothing to say. 

Resume of Examples. 



II ne vous sied pas de nous faire des 

reproches. 
n ne vous convient pas de parler de 

la sorte. 
II ne nous convient pas d'y aller. 
Combien votre jardin vaut il 1 
II vaut beaucoup plus que le votre. 
II ne vaut pas autant que le mien. 
Notre maison ne vaut rien. 
Votre habit ne vaut pas grand'chose. 
Cela ne vaut pas la peine. 
Ce chateau peut valoir cent mille 

francs. 
De combien votre oncle est il riche ? 
II est riche de deux cent mille francs. 

Ne vaut il pas mieux lire que jouer 1 



It does not become you to reproach us. 

It is not suitable for you to speak so. 

It does not suit us to go there. 
How much is your garden worth ? 
It is much more valuable than yours 
It is not worth so much as mine. 
Our house is good for nothing. 
Your coat is iwt good for much. 
That is not worth the while. 
That villa maybe worth one hundred 

thousand francs. 
How much is your uncle worth ? 
He is worth two hundred thousand 

francs. 
Is it not better to read than to play ? 



Exercise 95. 

Assur-er, 1. to assure ; Cass-er, 1. to break; 
Au juste, precisely ; Centaine, f. about a hun- 

Autre chose, something dred ; 
else; Chaine, f. chain; 



Couteau, m. knife; 
Marche, m. market ; 
Merit-er, 1. to deserve, 
merit ; 



LESSON XLIX, 145 

Monire. f. watch; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able; Tout au plus, at most; 

Negligence, f. neglect ; Reproch-er, 1. to re- Y&.from aller, to go ; 
Negotiant, merchant; proach,; Vingtaine,f. about twenty. 

1. Vous sied-il de nous reprocher notre negligence? 2. II me 
sied de vous faire des reproches quand vous le meritez. 3. Vous 
convient il d'aller trouver mon frere? 4. II ne me convient pas 
i'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose a faire. 5. Combien ce champ 
peut il raloir? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine [{ 27, (2.)] de mille 
francs. 7. Valez vous mieux que votre frere. 8. Mon frere vaut 
beaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut il pas plus que le 
votre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut davantage. 11. Combien 
votre montre vaut elle? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle ne 
va pas bien. 13. De combien le negociant, est il riehe? 14. Je ne 
puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs. 
15. Ne vaut il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche? 16. II 
vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Votre chaine d'or vaut elle plus 
que la mienne ? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas 
grand'chose,* elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut il cinquante francs? 
21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs? 22. Avez vous demande 
au marchand ce que cela vaut ? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande 24. 
II m'assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. 

Exercise 96. 

1. How much is my house worth? 2. It is worth about twenty- 
thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one? 4. 
This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 
5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother? 6. It is not worth 
the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out when one does not 
to walk? 8. It is not (ri'en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit 
you to write to my brother to-morrow? 10. It does not suit me to 
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- 
lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (bldmer) you when you deserve it. 
13. What is that man worth? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, about 
fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good? 16. No, Sir, it is good 
for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine? 18. Yes, Sir. 
it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's? 20. No, Sir, I 
have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to market early 
than late? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How much may your 
ho»-se be worth ? 24. It is not worth much, it is very old. 25. la 
your watch, better than mine ? 26. It is not worth much, it does not 
*o. 27. Is that book worth two francs? 28. It is worth one, at 

1 



146 



LESSON U 



most. 29. Have you asked your sister what that book is worth 1 
30. I have not. [L. 24, R. 12. L. 46, R. 4.] 31. What must I do! 
32. You must speak to your father. 33. Must he have money ? 34. 
He must have some. 35. Has he not sold his horse ? 36. He baa 
sold it, but it was not worth much. 



LESSON L. 



LEgON L. 



Avez vous pris le livre ? 
Avez vous paye le libraire 1 
Avez vous demande votre argent 1 
L'avez vous demande 7 



1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. see § 62.], to take; voler, to rob 
tu steal; acheter, to buy ; demander, to ask for ; payer, to pay, are fol- 
lowed by one regimen only, or by several regimens in the same rela- 
tion ; these regimens, if nouns, must not be separated from the verb 
by a preposition ; if pronouns, they take the form of the direct regi- 
men, le, la, les : — 

Have you taken the book ? 
Have you paid tlve bookseller ? 
Have you asked for your money? 
Have you asked for him ? 

2. When the verbs above mentioned are accompanied by several 
regimens holding different relations, the regimen representing the 
thing or object will be direct, and come under the above rule, and 
that representing the person, will, if a noun, be preceded by the 
preposition d, and, if a pronoun, assume the form of the indirect 
regimen : lui, to him, to her ; leur, to them : — 

J'ai pris le livre a mon frere. J have taken the book from my brothei , 

J'ai paye le livre au libraire. / have paid the bookseller for the book. 

Je le lui ai paye, &c. / have paid him for it. 

3. Demander is used also in the sense of to inquire for, to ash 
for : — 

J'ai demande ce monsieur. / asked for that gentleman. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vous a-t-on vole vos livres ? 

On me les a voles [L. 35. 1, 21 
A-t-on paye les souliers au cordon- 

nier'? 
On ne les lui a pas encore payes. 
Qu'a-t-on pris a votre pere ? 

On lui a pris son argent. 
No vous a-t-on rien paye 1 
On m'a paye presque tout. 
J'ai achete des livres au libraire. 



Has any one stolen your books from 

you 1 
They have been stolen from me. „ 
Has I he shoemaker b'en paid fcr tM 

shoes ? 
He has not yet been paid for them. 
What has been taken from vou* 

father ? 
His money has been t-aken frovi kiri*- 
Has /w!hing been paid you? 
I have been paid almost all, 
I bong hi books from the bookseller 



LESSON L, 147 



Qui avez vous demanle ? 
J'ai demande mon frere ain6. 
Avez vous demande de Targent a 

votre ami 7 
Je ne lui en ai pas demande. 



Whom have you asked for? 
I inquired for my eldest brother. 
Have you asked your friend for 

money? 
I have not asked him for any. 



Exercise 97. 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Lover, m. rent ; Renseignements, m. p. 

Crayon, m. pencil; Pantoune, f. slipper; information; 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell; Paysan, m. peasant;- Revenu, m. income; 

Fenetre, f. window; Proprietaire, m. land- Tout, e, all; 

Frapp-er, 1. to knock; lord; Yoyageur, m. traveller. 

Legume, m. vegetable; Rend-re, 4. to return; 

1. Que vous a-t-on pris? 2. On m'a pris mes livres, mes crayons et 
mon canif. 3. Savez vous qui vous les a pris? 4. Je ne connais pas 
celui qui me les a pris, mais je sais qu'il demeure ici. 5. Avez vous 
demande vos livres? 6. Je les ai demandes a mon cousin. 7. Vous 
les a-t-il rendus? 8. II me les a payes. 9. Vous a-t-on vole beaucoup 
de fruit cette annee? 10. On m'a vole des legumes, mais on ne m'a 
point vole de fruit. 11. Avez vous paye votre chapeau au paysan? 
12. Je ne le lui ai pas paye, je l'ai paye au chapelier. 13. A qui avez 
vous demande des renseignements ? 14. J'en ai demande au voyageur. 
15. Savez vous qui vient de frapper a la porte? 16. C'est M. L., qui 
vous demande. 17. Qui avez vous demande? 18. J'ai demande votre 
frere. 19. Votre frere a-t-il paye toutes ses dettes? 20. II ne les a 
pas encore payees, parce qu'il n'a pas recu ses revenus. 21. Lui avez 
vous paye ce que vous lui avez achete? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 23. 
Ne leur avez vous pas paye votre loyer ? 24 Je le leur ai paye. 25. 
lis nous ont paye notre maison. 

Exercise 98. 
1. Have you paid your landlord? 2. I have paid him my rent. 3. 
Have you- paid him for the windows which you have broken ? 4. I 
have paid him for them. 5. Has the hatter paid for all his hats ? 6. 
He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (a credit). 
7. Do you pay what you owe, every day? 8. I pay my butcher 
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat? 10. I have paid 
him for it. 11. For whom did you inquire this morning? 12. I 
inquired for your brother. 13. Why did you not inquire for my 
father? 14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the 
hatter been paid for his hats? 16. He has been paid for them. 17. 
Has your money been taken from you ? 18. My hat has been stolen 
from me. 19. Have you asked your brother for your money? 20. 
I have asked him for it, but he cannot return it to me. 21. lias he 
no money ? 22. He has just paid all his debts, and he has no money 



148 



LESSON LI. 



Jeft (de rests). 23. Have you asked your father for money ? 24. I 

nave not asked him for any, I know that he has none. 25. From 
what bookseller have you bought your books? 26. I bought them 
from your bookseller. 27. Are you wrong to pay your debts ? 28. 
I am right to pay them. 29. Who is inquiring for me ? 30. The 
physician is inquiring for you. 31. Who knocks'? 32. Your shoe- 
maker knocks. 



LESSON LI. 



LEgON LI. 



THE PAST DEFINITE. (§ 120.) 

1. The past definite may be called the narrative or historical tense 
of the French. It is used to express an action entirely past, definite 
and complete in itself. The time must be specified, and every por- 
tion of it must be elapsed. One night at least should have occurred 
since the action took place. 

Mon frere partit hier pour Paris. My brother left yesterday for Paris. 

2. The student will bear in mind that the past indefinite [L. 41.] 
may be used for the past definite. The past definite, however, may 
never be used for the indefinite. In conversation the indefinite is 
often preferred to the definite, as the latter would at times appear 
too formal [} 121, (3.)] :— 

3. The past definite may generally be rendered in English by the 
simple form of the imperfect, or by the same tense conjugated with 
did. The past definite can never be rendered in English, by the par- 
ticiple present of the verb preceded by was. 

J'alJai a l'eglise hier matin, I went, or did go to church yesterday 









morning. 




4. 


Terminations 


of the Past Definite of the Fouk 




Conjugations. See L. 23, and $ 60. 




Je 


chant -ai 


fin -is 


re 9 -us 


rend -is 




$ang 


finished 


received 


rendered 


lu 


pari -as 


cher -is 


apei'9 -us 


vend -is 




spokes t 


cherishedst 


perceivedst 


s oldest 


11 


donn -a 


fourn -it 


per9 -ut 


tend -it 




gave 


furnished 


gathered 


tended 


Nous 


cherch -ames 


pun -imes 


con 9 -times 


entend -imes 




sought 


punished 


conceived 


heard 


Vous 


port -ates 


sais -itcs 


d -utes 


perd -ites 




carried 


seized 


orced 


lost 


Ds 


aim -erent 


un -irent 


de9 -urent 


mord -irent 




loved , liked 


united 


deceived 


ba 



conjugations are alike. 



LESSON LL 149 



Resume of Examples. 



On nous parla de vous hier. 

Le banquier nous donna de Targent 
Tannee derniere. 

Le banquier nous a donne de l'ar- 
gent. 

Le professeur nous parla de vous 
Tannee derniere. 

II nous a parle de ses amis et des 
notres. 

Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- 
conta ses aventures. 

II nous a raconte l'histoire de sa 
vie. 



They spoke to us of you yeshrday. 
The banker gave us money last yean 

Tie banker has given us money. 

The professor spoke to us abend you 

last year. 
He spoke to us of his friends and of 

ours. 
During our journey he related to ut 

his adventures. 
He related to us tlie history of his life. 



Exercise 99. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise ;Remerci-er, 1. to thank; 
Avec, with; Lorsque, when; Sejour, m. stay; 

Se couch-er, 1. ref. to goNeuf, ve, new; Semaine, f. week; 

to bed ; Ordinairement, general- Soldat, m. soldier ; 

Dernier, e, last ; ly ; Tard, late ; 

S'echapp-er, 1. ref. to Pendant, during; Trop tot, too soon. 

escape; Pri-er, 1. to beg; 

Habillement, m. dress; Proprietes, f. p. property; 

1. Le banquier re§ut il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere ? 
2. II en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercutes votre frere, 
ne lui parlates vous pas? 4. Des que je Tapercus, je lui parlai. 5. 
Avez \ous deja porte vos habillements neufs ? 6. Je ne les ai pas 
encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de l'argent, hier, le remer- 
ciates vous ? 8. Je le remerciai et je le priai de vous remercier. 9. 
Avez vous trouve vos livres ? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 
11. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir ne finites vous pas vos affaires 
avec mon pere ? 12. Je les finis alors et je le payai. 13. N'avez 
vous pas vu votre soeur ainee pendant votre sejour a Lyon ? 14. Je 
ne Tai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couchates vous pas trop 16t hier au 
oir? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous etes vous 
eve ce matin? 18. Je me suis leve a cinq heures; je mv leve ordi- 
nairement de bonne heure. 19. Ne cherchates vous pas a vous 
echapper de votre prison Tannee derniere ? 20. Je n'ai jamais cherche 
a m'echapper. 21. Avez vous vendu vos proprietes? 22. Je ne 
les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu'avez vous donne au soldat. 24. Je ne 
lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B., nous lui donnamea 
tout ce qu'il voulut. 



150 LESSON LIE 

Exercise 100. 

1. What did you receive last week? 2. We received fifty franc* 
from your friend, and twenty-five from your brother. 3. Did you 
take your son to church with you yesterday ? 4. I did not take him 
there (y). 5. What did you lose last year ? 6. We lost our money, 
our clothes and our horses. 7. Have you looked (cherches) for them? 
8. I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they speak of 
your brother yesterday? 10. They spoke of him and of you. 1L 
What did the physician give you? 12. He gave me nothing. 13. 
At what hour did your sister rise yesterday? 14. She rose at five 
o'clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning ? 16. We rose a\ 
half-past six. 17. Has your cousin sold all his property? 18. He 
has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has the trav- 
eller related his adventures to you? 20. He related them to me. 21. 
Did that man try (cherche) to speak to your father ? 22. He tried to 
speak to him. 23. Did the professor speak of your brother during 
his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. 25. Has your friend 
worn his new coat ? 26. He has not worn it yet. 27. Have you 
thanked your brother? 28. I have thanked him. 29. What have 
you given to your eldest sister ? 30. T have given her nothing, 1 
have nothing to give her. 31. When your brother gave you a book 
last year, did you thank him ? 32. I did not thank him. 33. Is it 
late. 34. It is not late, it is only six. 35. Is it fine weather or bad 
weather ? 36. It is very fine weather. 



LESSON LH. LEgON LH 

1. The terminations of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel- 
dom arbitrary,* but an irregular verb of one conjugation will some- 
times, in this tense, assume the terminations of another conjugation. 
In a few instances the stem [L. 23.] of the verb is entirely changed. 



Avoir, to have; 


Etre, to be; 


Voir, to see ; 


Lire, to read ; 


J' e -us 


f -us 


v -is 


1 -us 


Tu e -us 


f -us 


v -is 


1 -us 


n e -ut 


f -ut 


v -it 


1 -ut 


Nous e -umes 


f -umes 


v -imes 


1 -umes 


Vous e -utes 


f -utes 


v -ites 


1 -tites 


lis e -urent 


f -urent 


v -irent 


1 -urent 



* This termination is arbitrary only in verbs ending in cnir in which 
an r, comes after the i of the termination : vimncs } tvimes, &a 



LESSON LI I. 



151 



2. Avoir and etre, t will be perceived, take in this tense a new stem, 
* us, /-us; etre and lire, though belonging to the 4th conjugation, take 
the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes the ter- 
minations of the 4th. 

3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its letters, 
and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs 

CRAINDRE, CoNNAiTRE, CONDUIRE, 

to fear ; to know ; to conduct. 

craign -is conn -us conduis -is 

craign -is conn -us conduis -is 

craign -it conn -ut conduis -it 

craign -imes conn -umes conduis -imes 

craign -ites conn -utes conduis -ites 

craign -irent conn -urent conduis -ireut 

4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- 
dre, connaitre, and conduire, those ending in metre, aitre and uire , 
and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com- 
prendre, surprendre, &c. 

5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu 
lar verbs, § 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs with which he 
is not familiar. 

Resume of Examples. 



Venir, 
to come ; 


Prendre, 
to take ; 


Je v -ins 


pr -is 


Tu v -ins 
11 v -int 


pr -is 

pr -it 


Nous v -inmes 
Vous v -intes 
lis v -inrent 


pr -imes 
pr -ites 
pr -irent 



Ne conduisites vous point votre fils, 

en Espagne l'annee derniere 1 
Je l'y conduisis et je l'y laissai. 
Aussitot que vous vites votre frere, 

ne le reconniites vous pas 1 
Je le reconnus aussitot que je 

l'aper9us. 
Le pharrnacien ne vint-il pas vous 

voir 1 
II vint mc voir ; il fut bien etonne 

de trouver ehez moi, un do ses 

anciens ai 
Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos 

amis, hierl 
Je pris conge d'eux. et je les priai 

de m'ecrire. 



Did you not take your son to Spain 

last year ? 
I took him thither and left him. 
As soon as you saw your brother ', did 

you not recognize him ? 
I recognized him as soon as I per- 

ccived him. 
Did not the apoUiecary come to see 

you? 
He came to see me; he was much 

astonished to find one of his old 

friends at my house. 
Did yon not take leave of your 

friends yesterday? 
I took leave of them, and begged 

them to write to me. 



Accompagn-er, 1. to ac- 
company ; 

A la fin, oX last ; 

Amicalcment kindly ; 

Arrivee, f. arrival ; 

Attcnd-re, 4. to wait for ; 

Au secours; to the assis- 
tance ; 

Conge, m. leave; 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; 



Exercise 101. 

De mon micux, as well Histoire, f. history; 

as I could; Inform-er, 1. to inforvi- 

Se depech-er. 1. ref. toNotaire, m. notary; 

make haste ; Lu, from lire, 4. ir. i§ 

Des que, as soon as ; read ; 

Kcolier, m. scholar ; Peintre, m. painter ; 
S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. to fo-Sans, without; 

come weary ; Secour-ir, 2. ir. to sue- 

Se hat-er, 1. r?f. to conr. 

hasten ; 



152 LESSON LIT. 

1. Nos ecoliers s'ennuyerent-ils hier, d'attendre si longtempst 
2. Us furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qu'a. la fin ils perdirent 
patience. 3. Ne recutes-vous point voire parent amicalement lors- 
qu'il vint vous voir ? 4. Je le recus demon mieux. 5. Nelutes-vous 
pas la lettre de votre frere avant hier? 6. Je la lus et je i'envoyai a 
nion oncle. 7. Ne courutes-vous pas au secours de votre frere 
aussitot que vous le vites en danger? 8. Je me hatai de le secourir, 
9. Ne vous etes-vous pas depeches de venir ? 10. Nous nous sommes 
depeches. 11. Aussitot que vous eutes apercu mon frere ne m'in- 
formates-vous pas de son arrivee ? 12. Je vous en informal. 13. A 
quelle heure votre soeur est-elle venue aujourd'hui ? 14. Elle est 
venue a midi. 15. Vos compagnons vinrent-ils hier vous prier de 
les aecompagner ? 16. Ils vinrent me voir, mais ils me quitterent 
sans me parler de leur voyage. 17. Ne peignites-vous pas un 
tableau l'annee derniere? 18. Je peignis un tableau d'histoire. 
19. Le peintre italien a-t-il fini son portrait? 20. II le finit hier, 
21. II Pa fini ce matin. 22. Des que j'eus recu cette nouvelle-, 
j'envoyai chercher le notaire. 23. Ce jeune homme a-t-il pris conge 
de son pere. 24. II a pris conge de lui. 25. II prit conge de lu; 
hier. 

Exercise 102. 

1. Did the notary accompany you yesterday? 2. He accompanied 
me as far as (jusque chez) your brother's. 3. Did your companion 
take leave of you yesterday ? 4. He took leave of me this morning. 
5. Did you read yesterday, the book which I have lent you ? 6. I 
read it the day before yesterday (avant hier). 7. At what time did 
the painter come this morning? 8. He came at half-past nine. 
9. Has he finished your father's portrait? 10. He painted all day 
yesterday, but the portrait is not yet finished. 11 Did you not run 
to your father's relief when you saw him in danger ? 12. I hastened 
to succour him. 13. What did you do when you came? 14. As 
soon as I came I sent for my brother. 15. Did you take your sister 
to Germany last year? 16. I took her there this year. 17. Did you 
take your children to school yesterday* 18. I took them to my 
brother's. 19. Do you paint a historical picture? 20. I painted last 
year a historical picture. 21. Did your sister beg you to accompany 
her ? 22. She begged me to accompany her. 23. Did you send for 
the notary as soon as you heard from your father? 24. I sent for 
him. 25. When did the notary take leave of you? 26. He took 
leave of me this morning at nine. 27. Has :he apothecary finished 
his letter? 28. He has not yet finished it. 29. Were you not 



LESSON LIIL 153 

astonished yesterday to see that lady 1 30. I was not astonished to 
Bee her. 31. Did you make haste to read your book last night 
(hier au soir) 1 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have you finished 
it ? 34. I have not yet finished it 



lesson mi. LEgoK Lin. 

THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 

1. The imperfect or simultaneous past tense may be called the 
descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or 
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense 
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined. 
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary was, &c. and the 
participle present of the verb [§ 119, 120.] : — 

J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous etes I was meriting this morning when you 

entre. came in. 

Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- / was passing yesterday when you 

pelates. called me. 

2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- 
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by 
the word, used to, placed before the verb : — 

L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went {used to go) every 

jours a l'ecole. day to school. 

Quand nous demeurions a la When we were (used to be) in the 

campagne, nous nous couchions country, ice used to go to bed at nine 

ordinairement a neuf heures. o'clock. 

3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past 
tense which takes did* as an auxiliary. The past definite never 
corresponds in meaning to the English imperfect composed of the 
auxiliary " was" and the participle present. It cannot be rendered 
by the verb preceded by " used to." 

J'allais a la chassc hier matin 1 was going hunting yesterday mom- 

quand nous nous rencontrames. ing wJien we met (did meet). 

J : allai a la chasse hier matin. / went (did go) hunting yesterday 

morning, 

4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing 
int into ais, &c. § 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc. to the 

* Except when, in interrogative sentences, did is used as an auxiliary 
to used to expressed or understood. 

1* 



154 



LESSON L 1 1 I. 



stem of the verb for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc. foi 
the 2d, and evais, etc. for the 3d. 

5. Terminations of the Imperfect of the four Conjuga- 
tions. 



Je chant -ais 

/ was singing' 

Tu pari -ais 

Thou wast speaking 

II donn -ait 

He was giving 

Nous cherch -ions 

We were seeking 

Vous port -iez 

You were carrying 

lis aim -aient 
They were loving 



fin -issais 

was finishing 

cher -issais 

wast cherishing 

fourn -issait 

was furnishing 

pun -issions 

were punishing 

sais -issiez 

were seizing 

un -issaient 

were uniting 



rec -evais 

was receiving 

aperc -evais 

wast perceiving 

perc -evait 

was gathering 

cone -evions 
were conceiving 

d -eviez 

were owing 

dec -evaient 

were deceiving 



rend -ais 

was rendering 

vend -ais 

wast selling 

tend -ait 

was tending 

entend -ions 

were hearing 

perd -iez 

were losing 

mord -aient 
were biting. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je chantais quand on m'apporta 

votre lettre. 
J'aimais autrefois a lire les poetes 

anglais. 
J'etais dans votre chambre lorsque 

vous etes entre. 
Comment votre pere se portait-il, 

lorsque vous demeuriez enFrance'? 
Avez vous paye a mon pere ce que 

vous lui deviez, et ce que vous lui 

aviez promise 
Je parlai hier toute la matinee. 
Je parlais hier a votre pere, lorsque 

votre ami nous rencontra. 
Je cherchais votre pere. 



J was singing when they brought me 

your letter. 
I used to like formerly to read the 

English poets. 
I was in your room when you came 

in. 
How was your father when you lived 

in France ? 
Have you paid my father vshat you 

owed him, and what you had prom- 
ised him ? 
I spoke yesterday the whole morning. 
I was speaking to your father when 

your friend met us yesterday. 
I was looking for your father. 



Exercise 103. 

Autrefois, formerly ; JEcolier, m. scholar; Presque pas, almost 

Brun, e, brown; Noir, e, black; none; 

Chambre, f. room; Merit-er. 1. to deserve; Retrouv-er, 1. to find 

Crayon, m. pencil; Pantoufle, f. slipper; again: 

Demeur-er, to live, dwell; Parchemin, m. parch- Theme, m. exercise; 

De nouveau, again ; ment ; Vert, e, green. 

1. De qui parliez-vous ce matin quand je suis venu vous trouver? 
2. Ma cousine parlait de son frere et je parlais du mien ? 3. N'aimioz- 
vous pas mieux le bceuf que le mouton, autrefois? 4. J'aimais le 
boauf, mais je n'ai jamais aiine le mouton. 5. Ne rendiez-vous pas 
beaucoup de livres, lorsque vous demeuriez a Paris? 6. J'en vendais 
beaucoup parceque j'etais libraire. 7. Le libraire a-t-il rendu beau- 
coup de crayons ce matin ? 8. II a vendu beaucoup de crayons au- 
jourd'hui. 9. Vendiez-vous beaucoup de parchemin lorsque vous 
6tiez libraire? 10. Je n'en vendais presque pas. 11. Votre frere 



LESSON LIII. 155 

portaiUl un habit vert lorsqu'il demeurait a Londres? 12. II portait 
un habit brun et des pantoufles noires. 13. Q,ue cherchiez-vous ? 
14. Je cherchais mon livre. 15. Depuis quand l'aviez-vous perdu? 
16. Je Pavais perdu depuis hier. 17. L'avez-vous retrouve? 18. Je 
l'avais retrouve, mais je Pai perdu de nouveau. 19. Ce boulanger 
ve-us fournissait-il de bon pain ! 20. II nous en fournissait d'excel- 
lent, 21. Punissiez-vous souvent vos ecoliers? 22. Je les punissais 
quand ils le meritaient. 23. Ou etiez-vous ce matin quand je vous 
cherchais? 24. J'etais dans ma chambre. 25. Je finissais mon 
theme. 

Exercise 104. 

1. Who was at your house this morning? 2. My friend G. was 
there, and was looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this 
morning? 4. I was not looking for you, I was looking for your 
scholar. 5. Did you speak to my father yesterday ? 6. 1 was speak- 
ing to him when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you use to 
sell much meat when you lived in B. ? 8. I sold much meat because 
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father use to wear a white hat when 
he lived in London ? 10. He used to wear a black hat, and my brother 
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came? 
12. No, Sir, I was finishing my exercise. 13. Had you lost your 
pencil this morning? 14. I had lost it, and was looking for it when 
you spoke to me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed? 
16. He has not paid for his coat. 17. How was your mother when 
she lived in Italy? 18. She was very well. 19. You used to like 
reading, (la lecture), did your sister (use to) like it also? 20. She 
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning when I was 
looking for her? 22. She was at my mother's. 23. What song were 
you singing this morning? 24. I was singing an Italian song. 25. 
Have you been afraid to speak to me? 26. I have never been afraid 
to speak to you. 27. Have you brought my book ? 28. I have not 
brought it. 29. Of what were you speaking ? 30. I was speaking of 
nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother? 32. I was net 
giving him anything. 33. What were you carrying? 34. I was 
carrying a tree. 35. Where were you carrying it? 36. I was cam' 
\i\g it home. 



156 IrESSOW LIV. 

LESSON LIV. LECON LIV. 

THE IMPERFECT CONTINUED. 

1. The imperfect of the indicative of every French verb, regular or 
irregular, ends in ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

2. No verb of the first conjugation er, is irregular in this tense. 

3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of the second 
conjugation ir, is that, to form the imperfect, the stem of these verba 
takes ais, &c, instead of issais : as, ven-ir^'e xen-ais, cour-ir, je cotu* 
rais; cuei\l-ir,je cueill-ais. Exception: Fuir, to flee— jefuyais. 

4. The irregular verbs of the third conjugation oir, change that 
termination (oir) into ais, etc., like the regular verbs of the same : 
as, sav-oir 5t /e sav-ais ; av-oir,fav-ais. Exceptions: se-oir, to become. 
voir, to see, and their compounds, and dechoir, [see § 62.] 

5. The changes which the stem of the irregular verbs of the fourth 
conjugation undergoes, in this tense, are too various to admit of a 
complete classification. We, however, offer the following: — 

Prendre, to take. Ecrjre, to write. Craindre, to fear. 

Je-pren -ais, etc. ecriv -ais, etc. craign -ais, etc. 

CONNAITRE, to JCTIOVJ. CoNDUIRE, to COIlduct. 

Connaiss -ais, etc. Conduis -ais, etc. 

6. Like prendre and ecrire are conjugated, in this tense, those verbs 
in which prendre and crire appear in composition : as, comprendre, 
je comprenais ; souscrire, je souscrivais. — Like craindre and con- 
naitre, those ending in indre and aitre; teindre^'e teignais ; paraitre, 
je paraissais. — Like conduire, those ending in ire: as, \ire,je li-sais ; 
faire, je faisais ; luire, je luisais ; dire, je disais, etc. — Exceptions : 
rire, traire, ecrire, and their compounds. 

7. Mettre and its compounds, and etre are regular in this tense. 

8. The participle present from which the French grammarians cfe- 
rive the imperfect, presents of course the same irregularities, as ; ve- 
nant, valant, prenant, ecrivant, craignant, connaissant, ccnduisant, 
Exceptions : avoir, ayant ; savoir, sachant. 

Resume of Examples. 



De quoi notre ami avait-il peur ? 

II n'avait peur de rien. 

N'aviev. vous pas besoin de mon 

frere 1 
Nous avions besoin de ltd. 
Le marchand n'avait-il pas besoin 

d'argent 1 
II en avait grand besoh* 



Of what \dos our friend afraid? 
He was afraid of nothing. 
Did you not want my brother ? 

Wc wanted him. 

Did not the merchant want money? 

ffe liad great nevd cfit. 



LESSOR LIT. 



157 



Quelle volture conduisiez-vous 1 

Ponr qui me preniez-vous 1 

Je venais vous trouver quand je 

vous rencontrai. 
A qui ecriviez-vous ce matin 1 



J ecrivais a 
frere. 



ma sceur et a mon 



What carriage were you driving ? 

For whom were you taking me ? 

I vms coming to you when I met you. 

To whom were you writing this morn- 
ing ? 
I vjas writing to my sister and to my 

brother. 



Antrement. otherwise ; 
Cass-er. 1. to break; 
C basse, f. hunting*; 
Dire, 4. ir. to say; 
Montre, f. watch; 
Moins ; (au) at least; 
Mort, e, dead; 
Offens-er, to offend; 



Exercise 105. 

Oub!i-er, 1. to forget; Teind-re, 4. ir. to dye 

Peche, f. fishing ; Teinturier, m. dyer ; 

Peind-re, 4. ir. lo paint ; Toile, f. linen cloth; 

Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- Rencontr-er, l.to meet; 



turn 

Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know ; 
Se tromp-er, 1. to be 

mistaken; 



Val-oir, 3. ir. to be worth , 
Ven-ir, 2. ir. to come, to 

have just ; 
Vite, quickly. 



1. Pourquoi n'ecriviez-vous pas plus vite ce matin? 2. Parceque 
j'avais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-vous pas d'offenser 
cettedame? 4. Je craignais de l'offenser, mais je ne pouvais faire 
autrement? 5. Que peigniez-vous ce matin? 6. Je peignais un 
tableau d'histoire. 7. Votre teinturier que teignait-il ? 8. II teignait 
du drap, de la soie et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait 
il? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert. 11. 
Conduisiez-vous ie jeune Polonais a l'ecole lorsque je vous ai rencon- 
tre? 12. Je conduisais monfilsaine al'eglise. 13. Que lisiez-vous? 
14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 15. Ne saviez-vous 
pas que ce monsieur est mort? 16. Je l'avais oublie. 17. Combien 
la montre que vous avez cassee valait-elle ? 18. Elle valait au moins 
deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller a 
la chattel 20. II valait beaucoup mieux alter a l'ecole. 21. Votre 
ami que vous disait-il? 22. lime disait que son frere est revenu 
d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vous pas a la chasse tous les jours lorsque 
vous demeuriez a la campagne ? 24. J'allais souvent a la peche. 
25 Mon frere allait tous les jours a. l'ecole quand il etait ici. 



Exercise 106. 

1. Were you afraid this morning when you came to our house ? 
2, I was afraid. 3. Of what were you afraid? 4. I was afraid of 
the h)rse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? (de tumbci, 
See L. 21. R. 2, 4.) 6. Ke was not afraid of falling, but he wad 
afraid of making a mistake (dese tromper. See 2. in Exercise above). 
7. Were you not afraid of offending your brother? 8. I was afraid 
of offending him. 9. Were you f ,aking vour SO n to school? 10. 



158 LESSON LT. 

was conducting him to school. 11. Was the dyer dyeing your coat 
12. He was not dyeing my coat, he was dyeing silk. 13. What color 
was he dyeing the silk ? 14. He was dyeing some red and some 
gretn. 15. Was he dyeing his linen cloth black or green? 
16. He was neither dyeing it black nor green, he was dyeing it 
pink (rose). 17. Were you aware (saviez vous) that your uncle is 
dead? 18. I did not know it (imperfic t). 19. What was the gen. 
tleman reading? 20. He was reading a letter which he had just re- 
ceived. 21. Were you cold when you came here ? 22. I was cold, 
hungry and thirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your conduct 
(conduite). 24. I was ashamed of it. 25. Were you not in want 
of money ? 26. I was not in want of it. 27. Did you not want 
your father ? 28. We did not want him. 29. Whither were you 
going when I met you? 30. I was going to your house. 31. Were 
you driving your brother's carriage ? 32. I was driving my own (la 
mienne). 33. Were you writing to me or to my father ? 34. I was 
writing to your friend's cousin. 35. Your friend was taking me for 
your eldest brother. 



LESSON LV. LEQON LV. 

THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. (§ 122, 123.) 

1. The past anterior is formed from the past definite of the aux- 
iliary and the past participle of the verb : j'eus parle, I had spoken, Je 
fus venu, J had come. 

2. The past anterior expresses generally a momentary action, 
which took place before another action. The latter immediately 
follows the former, and often depends upon it. The action ex- 
pressed by this tense is not a customary one. The past anterior is 
often preceded by a peine, scarcely ; des que, aussitot que, as soon 
as; quand, lorsque, ivhen ; [$ 122. § 123, (3.)] 

Des que j'eus fini ma taehe je m'en As soon as I had finished my task 
allai. went away. 

3. This tense partakes of the nature of the past definite. 

4. The pluperfect is composed of the imperfect of the auxiliary, 
and the past participle of the verb ; j'avais parle, J had spoken, j'etais 
venu. J had come. 

5. To this tense might be applied nearly all the rules on the use 
of the imperfect. The action which it expresses, or the situation 
which it depicts, is frequency a customary one, or one often re 
peated : — 



LESSON LV. 



159 



D&s qne j'avais fini ma tache je As soon as my task was finished I used 
m'en allais. to go away. 



Resume of Examples. 



Aviez- vous cu soin de yos efifets ? 
J'en avais eu soin. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu besoin de moi 1 
J'avais eu besoin de vous et de votre 

frere. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu Tintention de 

me parler 7 
Nous avions eu envie de dormir. 
Des que vous eutes fini votre lettre, 

ne la portates-vous pas a la poste 7 
Des que vous aviez fini vos lettres, 

ne les portiez-vous pas a la poste 1 

Des que vous futes arrive, ne com- 
men^ates-vous pas a 6crire ? 

Des que vous etiez arrive, ne com- 
men9iez-vous pas a ecrire 7 



Had you taken care of your things ? 

I liad taken care of them. 

Had you not wanted me ? 

I had wanted you and your brother. 

Had you not intended to speak to me 7 

We had had a icish to sleep. 

As soon as you had finished your letter 

did you not carry it to the post-office? 
As soon as your Utters were finished, 

did you not {commonly) take them 

to the post-office ? 
As soon as you had arrived did you 

not commence writing ? 
As soon as you used to arrive, did you 

not {generally) commence writing 1 



Arret-er, 1. to stop; 
Bal, m. ball ; 
Bourse, f. purse ; 



Exercise 107. 

Egar-er, 1. to mislay; 
Invit-er, 1. to invite; 
Se lev-er, ref. to rise ; 



Se coucher, 1. ref. to go Malade, sick; 

to bed ; Musicien, m. musician 

Dangereusement, dan- Oubli-er, 1. to forget; 

gerously ; Part-ir, 2. to set out ; 

Diner, m. dinner ; 



Perd-re, 1. to lose; 
Remont-er, 1. to wind 

up; 
Retrouv-er, 1. to find 

again ; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out; 
Spectacle, m. play. 



1. Ne saviez-vous pas ou le musicien etait alle? 2. Je savais 
qu'il etait alle a Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on pas dit que votre frere 
est mort ? 4. On m'avait dit qu'il etait dangereusement malade. 5. 
Ne vous couchiez-vous pas ordinairement, des que vous aviez fini vos 
lecons? 6. Des que je les avais finies, j'allais au spectacle. 7. Des 
que vous eutea fini vos lemons, que fites-vous hier an soir? 8. Aus- 
sitot que je les eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite fille n'avait- 
elle pas envie de dormir? 10. Elle avait plus envie de dormir que 
d'etudier. 11. Qu'aviez-vous fait de {with) votre livre quand je vous 
le demandai ? 12. Je l'avais egare. 13. Oa l'aviez-vous egare ? 14. 
Je l'avais oublie dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre etait- 
elle arretee ? 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 17. L'hor- 
loger ne l'avait-il pas remontee ? 18. II avait oublie de le faire. 19. 
N'aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse? 20. Je l'avais perdue, maia je 
l'ai retrouvee. 21. Votre cousin etait-il parti? 22. II n'elait paa 
encore parti. 23. Etait-il sorti ? 24. II etait sorti avec ma mere. 



160 LESSOR LVl. 

25. Ou etaiUl alle ? 26. II etait all§ chez mon frere, qui l'avail 
invite a diner. 

Exercise 108. 

1. Had you not intended to speak to my brother ? 2. I had in- 
tended to speak to him, but he was gone. 3. Did your sister go to 
bed last evening as soon as she had read (lu) her book ? 4. She 
went to bed as soon as she had read it 5. Did she usually go to 
bed as soon as she had read her book ? 6. She generally went to 
bed as soon as she had read six pages. 7. Were you told that your 
sister was sick 1 ? 8. I was told that she had been dangerously sick. 
9. Did you know what you had done with your pen? 10. I knew 
that I had mislaid it. 11. Had your sister mislaid hers? 12. She 
had left (laissee) it in my room. 13. How many of your books have 
you mislaid? 14. I had mislaid five, but my brother has found them. 
15. Where had you left them? 16. I had left them in the garden. 
17. Was your brother's watch stopped? 18. It was stopped. 19. 
Why was it stopped? 20. He had forgotten to wind it up. 21. 
Had he not lost his key? (clef, f.) 22. He had not lost it. 23. Had 
you wanted my father or me ? 24. I had wanted your little girl. 
25. Was she out ? 26. She was out with your brother. 27. Was 
she gone to my sister's ? 28. She was gone thither. 29. Was the 
dyer gone ? 30. He was not yet gone, he intended to leave at five. 
31. Had you spoken to him when I came yesterday? 32. 1 had 
spoken to him. 33. Had you told him that my sister is here ? 34. 
I had told him. 35. Is he still here ? 36. No, Sir, he is gofce, he 
went this morning at six. 



LESSON LVL LEgON LV1. 

1. We have given [L. 6. R. 4, and § 76 (4.)] a rule for the place of 
the noun, subject or nominative of an interrogative sentence. Te 
avoid confusing the student, we have hitherto refrained from intro- 
ducing another construction which is often used by the French* 
instead of that given in the rule. When a sentence commences 
with ou, where; que, ichat; quel, which; combien, how much, hoio 
many ; and quand, when; the noun may be placed immediately afte* 
the verb. This construction is similar to that of the English inter* 
rogative sentence when the verb has no auxiliary [$ 76, (5.)] : — 

Ou sont nos amis et nos parents 1 Where arc our friends and relations} 
Qu'Scrit votre correspondant 1 What writes yowr en respondent 7 



LESSON LYI. 161 

2. When there are in a French sentence two regimens of equal 
,ength, the direct should precede the indirect [§ 76, (7.)] : — 

Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given the child Uve play- 

fam 1 things ? 

Av^2-vous donne cette lettre a Have you given the man that Utter? 

1 Iionmie % 

3, The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- 
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and 
rendering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8.)]. The indirect 
regimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would 
otherwise be equivocal [) 76, (9.)] : — 

Avez-vous donne a l'enfant. les jouets Have you given the child, the play- 
que vous lui aviez promis % things which you had promised 

him ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Quel age a cette demoiselle 1 * 
Que veulent dire ces messieurs ? 
Ou sont alles messieurs vos freres 7 
Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur 1 

Avez vous paye cet argent au mar- 

chand % 
J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. 
Vous avez paye au tailleur, le gilet 

que vous avez achete. 
Naviez-vous pas demande cela a 

l'enfant 1 



How old is thai young lady! 
Wha.t do those gentlemen mean ? 
Where are your brothers gone ? 
Hovj many children hws that gentle- 

man ? 
Have you paid the merchant that 

money ? 
I paid the tailor for my coat. 
You have paid the tailor for t/ie coat 

which you have bought. 
Had you not asked the child for that ? 



Exercise 109. 

Accompagn-er, 1. to oc-Chaine, f. chain; Dernier, e, last ; 

company; Chapeau, m. hat, bo7i-¥ves, near, nearly; 

Aine, e, eldest ; net; Rend-re, 4. to return 

Associe. ni, partner; Cinquante, f. fifty; Serrurier, m. locksmith; 

Aubergiste. m landlord ; Clef, f. key; Serviette, f. napkin. 

Bouteule, t battle; Commis, m. clerk ; 

1. Ou etaient vos parents l'annee derniere? 2. lis etaient en An- 

gleterre. 3. Ou sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient 

ce matin ? 4. lis sont restes chez leurs associes. 5. Que lisaient 

vos amies lorsque vous les avez quittees? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- 

velles qu'elles venaient de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur votre 

pere ? 8. II ne dit rien. 9. Quel -age a ce monsieur? 10. II a pres 

do cinquante ans. 11. Quel age ont vos enfants? 12. L'aine a dix 

ans, et le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Avez-vous demande votre eliaine 

d'or a ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demanded. 15. Avez-vous 

rendu au commis, Fargent qu'il vous avait prete 1 16. Je le lui ai 

rendu. 17. Aviez-vous envie d'envoyer vos clefs au serrurier? 18. 

J'avais envie de les lui envoyer, car elles sont cass^es. 19. Aviez* 



162 LESSON LVII. 

vous oublie" de payer votre habit au tailleur 1 20. J'avais oublie da 
le lui payer, 21. Va*lait-il la peine d'envoyer ces plumes a l'ecolier? 

22. II ne valait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'autres. 

23. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer ces bouteilles a Faubergiste ? 24. 11 
valait la peine de les lui envoyer, car il n'en avait pas. 25. Avez- 
vous demande des serviettes a votre pere ? 26. Je ifai pas voulu 
lui en demander. 

Exercise 110. 
1. What does the tailor mean ? 2. I do not know what he means. 
3, Where is your eldest sister ? 4. She is at my brother's, or at 
my sister's. 5. What was the locksmith saying to you ? 6. He was 
saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many letters have you 
carried to the post-office ? 8.1 have carried seven, three for you, 
and four for my father. 9. Have you given my sister the letter 
which I have written ? 10. I have not given it to her, I left it upon 
my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen- 
knife? 12. He lives at my father's, do you wish to speak to him? 

13. I wished to send him a letter which I brought from England. 

14. Have you returned to that man the money which he had lent 
you ? 15. I have returned it to him. 16. Has your mother paid the 
milliner (modiste) for her bonnet? 17. She has not yet paid her for 
it. 18. How old is the shoemaker's eldest son? 19. He is twenty- 
one. 20. Had you a wish to send your brother the key of your 
room ? 21. I had a wish to send it to him. 22. Was it worth the 
while to give your brother that book ? 23. It was worth the while 
to give it to him, for (car) he wanted it. 24. Was it worth the while 
to send these bottles to the druggist (apothicaire)! 25. It was 
worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the landlord? 
27. He is in England. 28. Is your sister at home? 29. No Sir, 
she is gone out. 30. How many children has the locksmith? 31. 
He has ten. 32. How many books has the physician ? 33. He has 
five hundred volumes. 34. Have you given the gentleman that let- 
wer ? 35. I have forgotten to give it to him. 



LESSON LVII. LECON LVH. 

a 

1. The French avoid placing the verb at the end of such sentence* 
as /.he following, when the nominative is a noun: — 

Dites-moi ou. demeure M. II. Tell vie where Mr. II. lives. 

Je ne sais ou est mon pere. / do not know where my father is. 

Savez-veus ou est George 1 Do you know where George is 7 



LESSON LVII. 



163 



2. In speaking ot a state, condition or action, commenced in the 
past, but still continuing, the French use the piesent of the indica- 
tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases : — 

Combien de temps y-a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here? 

ici? „ 
II y a deux heures qu'il ecrit. He has been ivriting tliese two hours. 

II y a un mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris o j ne month. 
II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead these two years. 

3. When however the state no longer continues, the past may be 
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English :-^ 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. ? 

meure aL.1 
Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn 

l'allemand 1 German ? 

II y a un mois que je ne l'ai vu. / have not seen him this month, 

4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de miJ'es y a-t-il . . . Quelle 
distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far . . . 
How many miles is it . . . What is the distance, &c. 

Combien y a-t-il de Paris a Londres ? How far is it from Paris to London ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous 
avez cette maison % 

II y a deux ans que nous l'avons. 

Combien de temps avez-vous eu 
cette maison ? 

Nous l'avons eue dix ans. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre 
frere apprend le grec 1 

II y a six ans qu'il 1' apprend. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a 
Boulogne 1 

II y a huit lieues de Calais a Bou- 
logne. 



How long have you had that house ? 

We have had it these tw& years. 
How long did you have that house ? 

We had it ten years. 

How long has your brother been 

learning Greek? 
He has been learning it six years. 
How far is it from Calais to Bou^ 

logne ? 
It is eight leagues from Calais to 

Boulogne. 



Exercise 111. 



Affiche. f. bill; Demi, e, half; Morceau, m. piece; 

An, del annee f. year ; Fatigue, e, tired; Ne, from naitre. 4. to b* 
Attend-re. 4. to expect, to Imprimeur, m. printer ; born; 

wait for; LUma, f. league ; Verger, m. orchard ; 

Compagnie, f. company ; Maintenant, nmv ; Vienne, Vienna. 
Copenhague, Copenha- Mois, m. month; 

gen; 

1. Combien de temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a Paris? 2. II y 
& dix ans qu'il y demeure. 3. r\ T, a-t-il pas demeure a Lyon ? 4 II y 
a demeure autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire ofi est le fils du 
eapitaine. 6. II y a un ai\ qu'il est en Angletcrre. 7. Savoz-vous ou 



164 LfcSSON LVI1 

demeure M. B. ? 8. H demeurait autrefois a Rouen ; je ne sais pas oft 
il demeure maintenant. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes icil 
10. II y a plus de deux mois que nous sommes ici. 11. Combien de 
temps y a-t-il que vous avez ce verger? 12. II yaunan que nous 
i'avons, 13. Oii cet imprimeur est-il ne? 14. II est ne a Falaise. 
15. Savez-vous combien il y a de Paris a Vienne? - 16. II y a trois 
cent six lieues de Paris a Vienne et deux cents lieues de Vienne a 
Copenhague. 17. Y a-t-il longtemps que la compagnie est venue ? 
18. II y a plus de deux heures qu'elle est ici. K). Y a-t-il long- 
temps que vous avez lu cette affiche. 20. II y a plus de trois 
heures que je l'ai lue. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d'une demi-heure que 
votre sceur lit ? 22. II y a si longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est 
fatiguee. 23. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous attendez ce morceau de 
musique ? 24. II y a plus d'un an que je Pattends. 

Exercise 112. 

1. How long has the printer been here ? 2. He has been here 
more than a year. 3. Do you not know where my father lives ? 4. 
I know where he lives, but I have no time to go to his house to-day. 
5. How long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived there 
ten years. 7. How long did he live in England ? 8. He lived in 
England six years and a half. 9. Can you tell me where the lock- 
smith lives? 10. He lives at my brother's. 11. Have you been 
waiting long for this book? 12. I have been waiting for it more 
than a year. 13. How long has your son been learning Greek ? 14. 
He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sister 
born in Falaise ? 16. No, Sir ; she was born at Paris. 17. How long 
has your brother had this orchard ? 18. He has had it more than 
six months. 19. How far is it from Paris to Lyons ? 20. It is one 
hundred and sixteen leagues from Paris to Lyons. 21. Is it farther 
(plus loin) from Lyons to Geneva than from Lyons to Turin ? 22. It 
is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to Geneva. 23. 
How long did your father live in Germany ? 24. He lived in Ger- 
many two years, and in England six months. 25. How long have you 
lived in Paris? 26. We have been here six months. 27. How long 
did you live in Rome? 28. We lived there more than a year. 29. 
How long has your brother been gone? 30. He has been gone 
these two years. 31. Have you been learning German more than one 
year? 32. I have been learning it more than four -ears. 33. Youi 
Bister has been learning music one year and a /ial£ 



LBSS ON LVIII. 105 



LESSON LVIII. LEgON LVIII. 

1. Changer [1. see § 49, (l.)],used in the sense of to change, to leave 

one thing for another, is followed by the preposition de: :hanger 

d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, <$-c. ; changer 

d'avis, to change one's mind; changer de maison, to move, to chang 

houses ; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de climat, to go 

tc another place, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change one's 

name. The student will perceive that the noun following changer, is 

not preceded by a possessive adjective, like the noun of the English 

sentence : — 

Voulez-vous changer d'habit 1 Will you change your coat ? 

Ce monsieur a change de nom. That gentleman has changed his name. 

2. Changer contre, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change 
for, to get change for : — 

Voulez-vous changer votre chapeau Will you exchange your hat for mine ? 

contre le mien 1 
Changez ce billet pour de l'argent. Change that bill for silver. 

3. Tarder means to tarry, to be long in coming. Tarder, used 

unipersonally, and preceded by an indirect object, means to long, to 

icish for : — 

Votre sceur tarde bien a venir. Your sister is very long coming. 

II me tarde de la voir. / long to see Iter. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas change d'apparte- 

ment 1 
Nous avons change de maison. 



Oette dame a change de religion. 
Contre quoi avez-vuus change votre 

cheval 1 
J'ai besom demonnaie, ponvez-vous 

me changer cette piece de vingt 

franca 1 
Ce garden a beaucoup tarde. 
II nous tardait d'arriver. 
II leur tardait de revoir leurs amis. 



Have you not taken another apart- 
ment ? 

We have changed' houses. 

Your brother has changed his con- 
duct. 

That lady has changed her religion. 

Fur what have you czc/uinged your 
horse ? 

I want change, can you change me 
this twenty franc piece ? 

That boy tarried very much. 

We longed to arrive. 

They longed to see their fritruu 

ntiain. 
I Ions to see France again. 



\1 me tarde de revoir la France. 

Exercise 113. 

Air, m. air ; Blanc, che, v Gris, e, gray ; 

Avis, m. mind, mean- Combat, m. combat ; Guinee, f. ^uinra; 
ins > Conduite, f. conduct ; Jeuno, young ; 



166 LESSON LVIII. 

Maitre, m. master; Passe, e, past, last; Vie, f. life, amdud ; 

Manteau, m. cloak; Pays, m. country ; Visage, m. countenance, 

Monnaie, f. change; Rentr-er, 1. to came in face. 

Mouille, e, wet; again; 
Parceque, because; 

1. Cet homme n'a-t-il pas change de vie? 2. II a change de con- 
duite. 3. Cette grande maison n'a-t-elle pas change de maitre? 4, 
Elle a change de maitre, le capitaine G. vient de l'acheter. 5. Vous 
etes mouille, pourquoi ne changez-vous pas de manteau ? 6. Parce- 
que je n'en ai pas d'autre. 7. Votre cousine ne change-t-elle pas 
souvent d'avis? 8. Elle en change bien souvent. 9. Pendant le 
combat, ce jeune soldat n'a-t-il pas change de visage? 10. II n'a 
point change de visage. 11. Ce malade ne devrait-il pas changer 
d'air? 12. Le medecin lui recommande de changer de pays. 13 
Ou est votre cheval gris? 14. Je ne l'ai plus, je l'ai change contre 
un blanc. 15. Avec qui l'avez-vous change? 16. Je 'ai change 
avec le jeune homme qui demeurait ici le mois passe. 17. Le mar- 
chand peut il me changer cette piece de quarante francs ? 18. II ne 
saurait (cannot) vous la changer, il n'a pas de monnaie. 19. Avez- 
vous la monnaie d'une guinee (change for a guinea). 20. Combien 
de schellings, y a-t-il dans une guinee? 21. II y en a vingt-et-un. 
22. Votre petit garcon ne tarde-t-il pas a rentrer ? 23. II tarde beau- 
coup. 24. Ne vous tarde-t-il pas d'aller en Italie ? 25. II me tarde 
d'y aller. 

Exercise 114. 

1. Why do you not change your coat? 2. For a very good rea- 
son, (raison, f.) because I have no other. 3. Has your father changed 
houses ? 4. No, Sir, but we intend to do so (de le faire) to-morrow. 
5. Has that child changed his conduct ? 6. He has changed his con- 
duct, he is very good now (maintenant). 7. Have you changed your 
religion ? 8. No, Sir, I have not changed my religion. 9. Do you 
not change your place very often? 10. I change my place when I 
am tired. 11. Does not your sister change her mind everyday? 
12. She does not change her mind every day. 13. Was not your 
brother afraid, did not his countenance change? 14. His counte- 
nance changed, but he was not afraid. 15. Have you not changed 
rooms (chambre^i.)1 16. I have not changed rooms, my room is 
very good. 17. Do you not long to be in France? 18. I long to 
be there. 19. Does not your mother tarry too hng? 20. She is 
very long in coming. 21. Have you changed the forty franc piece] 
22. I have not changed it yet. 23. Why ha>ve you not changed it ? 
24. Because your father has no change. 25. Have you the change 



LESSON LIX, 167 

for a guinea ? 26. No, Sir, I have only twelve shillings. 27. How 
many cents are there in a dollar ? 28. There are one hundred. 29. 
Has that gentleman exchanged that horse ? 30. Yes, Sir, he has ex- 
changed it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for 
mine ? 32. No, Sir, your hat is too small for me. 33. With whom 
have you exchanged your horse ? 34. I have exchanged it with my 
brother. 35. I have exchanged it for a white one. 



LESSON LIX. LEQON LIX. 

1. We have given, in Lesson 11, rules for forming the plural of 
nouns, hut have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too 
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules 
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 

2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan- 
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu, 
des chefs-lieux, a chief place, chief places ; un gentilhomme, des gentils- 
hommes, a nobleman, noblemen [g 9, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the 
first only becomes plural : Un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'oeuvre, a 
master-piece master-pieces [§ 9, (2.)]. 

4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or adverb, 
the noun only becomes plural; Passe-port, passe-ports, passport, 
passports [$ 9, (6.)]. 

5. Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb, an adverb, and a 
preposition, are invariable: un passe-partout, des passe-partout, 
master-key, master-keys [§ 9, (8.)]. 

6. We have seen [L. 5. R. 4.] that the name of the material al- 
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united by the 
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation also fol- 
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition 
de connects the two : un maitre d'armes, a fencing master ; un maitre 
de dessin, a drawing master ; un marchand de farine, a dealer in flour 
[5 76, (12.) \ 81, (4)]. 

7. The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, &c, always precedes the noun 
describing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to 
which it is adapted; the name of an apartment, that of the use'to 
which it is appropriated. The connecting preposition is a : un moulin- 
a-vapeur, a steam mill ; un bateau-a-vapeur, a steamboat ; un moulin- 
i-eau, a water-mill; la salle-a-manger, the dining-room [} 76 (13.) 
O4)}81,(4.)(50j. 



.68 



LESSON LIX. 



Resume of Examples. 



Lille et Arras sont les chefs-lieux 

des departments du Nord et du 

Pas-de-Calais. 
Les chemins-de-fer et les bateaux- 

d-vapeur sont tres nombreux en 

Amerique. 
Cstte maison contient un salon ; une 

salle-a-inanger, une cuisine et plu- 

sieurs chambres-a-coucher. 
Les moulins-a-vent sont plus com- 

muns en France que les moulins- 

a-eau ou a-vapeur. 



Lisle and Arras are the chief placet 
of the departments of the North ana 
of the Pas-de- Calais. 

Railroads and steamboats are very 
numerous in America. 

That house contains a draising-roorriy 
a dining-room, a kitchen, and seve- 
ral bed-rooms. 

Windmills are more common in 
France than water or steam-mills. 



Amies, f. ^.fencing; 
Bat-ir, 2. to build ; 
Bouteille, f. bottle ; 
Cabriolet, m. gig ; 
Chat-huant, m. owl; 
Chauve-souris, f. bat ; 



Exercise 115. 

Dessin, m. drawing ; Ordinaire, usual ; 
Engag-er, 1. to engage , Roue, f. wheel; 
Faire bat-ir, 2. to have Voyag-er, 1. to travel; 

built ; Voile, f. sail. 

Se munir, 1. ref. to pro- 

vide one's self with ; 

1. Faut-il avoir un passe-port pour voyager en France ? 2. II faut 
en avoir un. 3. Les Anglais se rnunissent-ils de passe-ports pour 
voyager en Angleterre ? 4. On n'a pas besoin de passe-port en An- 
gleterre. 5. Aimez-vous a voyager sur les cheniins-de-fer ? 6. 
J'aime mieux voyager sur les chemins-de-fer que sur les chemins 
ordinaires. 7. Avez-vous apporte vos passe-partout? 8. Je n'ai 
point de passe-partout, je n'ai que des clefs ordinaires. 9. Votre 
frere est-il venu dans un bateau - a-vapeur ] 10. II est venu dans un 
bateau-a-voiles. 11. Avez-vous une voiture a. quatre chevaux ? 12. 
Non, Monsieur, nous n'avons qu'un cabriolet a. un cheval. 13. Votre 
frere a-t-il bati un moulin-a-vapeur? 14. II a fait batir deux moulins, 
Tun a vent et l'autre a. eau? 15. Votre compagnon a-t-il engage un 
maitre d'armes ? 16. Non, Monsieur, il a deja un maitre de dessin 
et un maitre de danse. 17. Combien de chambres-a-coucher avez 
vous? 18. Nous en avons deux. 19. Avez-vous une bouteille de 
vin 1 20. Non, Monsieur, mais j'ai une bouteille-a-vin (wine-bottle) 
[5 81.]. 21. Voyez-vous les chats-huants 1 22. Non, mais je vcia 
les chauves-souris. 23. J'ai une voiture a quatre roues. 

Exercise 116. 
1. Is your father in England? 2. No, Sir, he is in France with 
my* brother. 3. Have they taken passports? 4. Yes, Sir, they havo 
taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer 
ica? 6. No, Sir, but it is necessary to have one to travel in Italy. 
7. Is there a steamboat from Calais to Dover (Douvres) ? 8. There 



LESSON LX. 



169 



are several. 9. Is there a railroad from Paris to Brussels (Bri*. 
xelles) ? 10. There is one from Paris to Brussels, and one from Paris 
to Tours. 11. Has your brother bought a wind-mill? 12. No, Sir, 
but he has built a steam -mill. 13. Are there many wind-mills in 
America ? 14. No, Sir, but there are many water and steam-mills. 
15. Have your sisters a dancing-master ? 16. They have a dancing- 
master and a music-master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing? 
18. He does not learn it, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is 
the fencing-master in the dining-room ? 20. No, Sir, he is in the 
drawing-room. 21. Is your cousin in his bed-room? 22. No, Sir, 
he is out (sorli). 23. How many rooms are there in your house. 
24. Five ; a kitchen, a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed- 
rooms. 25. Are there owls here ? 26. Yes, Sir, and bats too. 27. 
Have you seen those master-pieces ? 28. Yes, Sir, I have seen them. 
29. Have you sent them to the chief place of the department ? 30. 
I have sent them there. 31. Have you a two-horse gig? 32. I have 
a four-horse one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage? 34, 
He has a two-seat carriage (d deux sieges). 



LESSON LX. 



LEgON LX. 



THE TWO FUTURES, SIMPLE AND ANTERIOR. (§ 124.) 

1. The future of every verb in the French language ends with rai % 
ras, ra, vans, rez, ront. 

2. This tense, in all the regular verbs, as also in the irregular verbs 
not mentioned in the next lesson, may be formed from the present 
of the infinitive by changing the r of the tirst and second conjuga- 
tions, and the oir and re of the third and fourth, into the terniinatia&s 
already given and here again repeated. 

3. Conjugation of the Future Simple of the Regular 



he Future Simple 
Verbs. 



Je 

Tu 
11 



chante -rai 

will sing 

parle -ras 

wilt speak 

drone -ra 

shall give 

Nous cherche -rons 

will seek 

Vousporte -rez 

will carry 

Da aime -ront 



fini -rai 

will finish 

cheri -ras 

wilt cherish 
fourni -ra 
will furnish 

puni -rons 

shall punish 

saisi -rez 

will seize 

uni -ront 

will units 

8 



recev -rai 

will receive 

apercev -ras 

wilt perceive 

pcrccv -ra 

will gather 

concev -rons 

will conceive 

dcv -rez 

will owe 

dccev -ront 

will dcstive 



rend -rai 

will render 

vend -ras 

wilt sell 

tend -ra 

will tend 

entend -rons 

io ill hear 

pcrd 
will lose 

mord 
will biu 



-rez 



-ront 



170 



LESSON LX. 



4. Tb3 future anterior is merely the past participle of the vertv, 
conjugated with the future of one of the auxiliaries avoir, tire : — 

J'aurai fini; je me serai flatte. / shall have done, I shall have flatter ca 

myself. 

5. The student, when rendering English into French, should be 
careful to distinguish will, taken a<* an auxiliary, from the same word 
employed as a principal verb. In this latter case, it is always equiva- 
lent to the verb, to wish, or to be willing, and should not be rendered 
by the future of the verb, but by the present of vouloir : — 



Ne voulea-vous pas lui ecrire ? 



Will you not {are you not witting) to 
write to him ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Quadd parlerez-vous ace monsieur ? 

Vous fournira-t-il des provisions 1 
lis ne recevront pas leurs revenus. 
Ne vendrez-vous pas vos proprie- 

tes'J 
Que voulez-vous avoir 7 
Que veut lire votre frere 1 
Apporterez-vous des pommes ] 
Nous amenerons nos enfants, 
Vous apporterez des legumes. 



When will you speak to that genii* 

man? 
Will he furnish you provisions ? 
They will not receive their income. 
Will you not sell your property ? 

What do you wish to have? 
What will your brother read * 
Will yon bring apples ? 
We will bring our children. 
You will bring vegetables. 



Exercise 117. 

Abreuvoir, m. watering Chateau, m. mlla ; Men-er, 1. \% 4y, (6.)J to 
place; Colporteur, m. pedlar, take , to lead ; 

Appel-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] hawker; Se promen-er, 1. ref. 

to call ; Donner a manger, to [§ 49, (6.)] to walk or 

Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; ^ feed ; ride for pleasure ; 

Avoine, f. oats ; Ecurie, f. stable ; Recolt-er, 1. to harvest; 

Ble, m. wheat; Foin, m. hay ; Sem-er, 1. [§ 49, (6.)] to 

Cachet-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)]Geler, 1. [$ 49, (5.)] to sow. 
to seal , freeze ; 

1. Menerez-vous vos enfants a Pecole? 2. Je les menerai a 
'ecole et a l'eglise. 3. Le jardinier apportera-t-il des legumes au 
marche? 4. II y en apportera. 5. Oii mdnerez-vous ce cheval! 
K. Je lo menerai a l'ccurie. 7. Lui donnerez-vous a manger" 1 
S. Je lui donnerai du foin et de l'avoino. 9. Lui donnerez-vous di 
r eau1 10. Je le menerai a Tabreuvoir. 11. Paierez-[§ 49, (2.)] vous 
ce que vous devez ? 12. Ne voulez-vous pas vous promener? 13. Je 
me prontenerai cette apres-midi. 14. Vous promenerez-vous a pied 
ou a cheval ? 15. Je me promenerai a cheval et ma soaur se prome- 
nera en voiturc. 16. Marcherez-vous bcaucoup dans votre voyage 



LESSON Ltl. lYl 

a Paris? 17. Nous ne marcher ons pas dutout 18. N'appellerez- 
[{49,(4.)] vous pas, le colporteur? 19. Je ne Pappellerai pas. 
20. N'acheterez-[j 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau. 21. Nous l'ache- 
terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [H^> (p')~\ cetta 
nuit? 23. Je ne le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne seinerez- 
[§ 49, (6.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez? 25. Je n'en 
eemerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai mes 
lettres et je les porterai a la poste. 

Exercise 118. 

1. Will not the gentleman call his children? 2. He will call his 
children and his sister's. 3. Will you not bring your children? 
4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon? 
6. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my 
father's horses ? 8. I shall not buy them ; I have no money. 9. Will 
you not call the pedlar ? 10. I do not wish to call him ; I do not wish 
to buy any thing. 11. W T ill you pay the tailor? 12. I will pay him 
for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow? 14. It will freeze 
to-morrow; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in this field 
(champ)! 16. I will not sow oats ; I will sow wheat there. 17. Will 
you take your sister to school? 18. I will take her there this after- 
noon. 19. Will you not take your son to market? 20. I will not 
take him there. 21. Will not the gardener take his horse to the 
watering place ? 22. He will take him there. 23. Will you give 
oats to your horse ? 24. I will give him hay. 25. Will you bring 
your son with you ? 26. I will bring him to-morrow.' 27. Will he 
bring his horse? 28. He will bring his horse and carriage. 29. Why 
do you carry that little child? 30. He is too sick to (pour) walk. 
31. Will your brother sell his property? 32. He will only sell part 
of it. 33. Will not your servant carry the letter to the post-office ? 
34. I will seal it and give it to him. 35. Will you feed my horse? 
36. I will feed him and give him some water. 



LESSON LXI. LEgON LXL 

IRREGULARITIES OF THE FUTURE. 

1. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation aller, to go, and 
envoyer, to send, make in the future firai, fenverrai [iee § 62.] : — 

2. All the verbs of the second conjugation, which end in enir, change 
that termination into iervdrai^ &c., for the future : as, tenir, to hoU 



172 



LESSON LX1. 



wenir, to come ; je tiendraije viendrai. Acquerir, to acquire ; conquerir 
to conquer ; requerir, to require ; mourir, to die ; and courir, to run, and 
its compounds, do uble the r in the future:— -facquerrai,je mourra\ 
je courrai. Cueillir, to gather, and its compounds, change the i pre- 
ceding the r into e:—je cueillerai. 

3. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit down, and seoir, to sit* 
make ye nCassierai and je sierai. Falloir, to be necessary, vouloir, to 
be willing, and valoir, to be worth, make il faudra,je voudrai, and je 
vaudrai. Voir, to see, and revoir, to see again, make je verrai, je 
reverrai. Pouvoir, to be able, makes je pourrai, and pourvoir, to pro- 
vide, je pourvoirai. Savoir, to know, and avoir, to have, make ye saurai, 
and faurai. 

4. Etre, to be, faire, to make, and its compounds, are the only verbs 
of the fourth conjugation, which are irregular in the future :— -je serai, 
jeferai, &c. 

5. The futures, simple and anterior, are used in French after an 
adverb of time, in cases similar to those in which the English use 
the present and perfect of the indicative, with a, future meaning: — 

Quand vous verrez ces messieurs . . When you see those gentlemen . . . 
Des que vous aurez re9U cette As soon as you have received this 
lettre . . : letter . . . 

Resume of Examples. 



Irez-vous en France cette annee 1 
Nous irons en France et en Italic 
Nous vous enverrons chercher. 
Ne viendrez-vous pas nous trouver. 
Ne nous assierons-nous pas ? 
Quand ils viendront, j'aurai ma 

lettre. 
Cela vaudra-t-il la peine 1 
Cet habit ira-t-il bien ? 
II faudra leur envoyer de l'argent. 



Shall you go to France this year ? 

We shall go to France and Italy. 

We sliaU send for you. 

Will you not come to us ? 

Shall we not sit d<non ? 

When they come, I shall have my let- 
ter. 

Will that be worth the while ? 

Will that coat fit well? 

It will be necessary to send them 
money. 



Avec, with; 
Bientot, soon; 
Connait-re, 4. ir. to 

know ; 
Demeure, f. dwelling ; 
Fraise, f. strawberry ; 
Guitare, f. guitar ; 



Exercise 119. 

Lentement, slowly ; 
March-er, to walk, to go 

on foot; 
Moi-meme, myself; 
Ou, where; 
Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out, 

to leave ; 



Permett-re, 4. ir. to per- 
mit; 
Plaisir, m. pleasure ; 
Pret-er, 1. to lend; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out. 



1. Ne viendrez-vous pas nous voir demain? 2. J'irai vous voir, si 
Je temps le permet. 3. N'enverrcz-vous pas chercher le medecin, si 
votre fils est malade? 4. Je l'irai chercher moi-meme. 5. Quand je 
serai fatigue, je marcherai plus lentement. 7. Quand vous connaitrez 



LESSON LXI. 173 

sa demeure irez-vous le voir ? 8. J'irai le voir aussit6t que je saurai 
oti il demeure. 9. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 10. Je le 
verrai cette apres-midi. 11. Ne pourrez-vous point nous accom- 
pagner? 12. Je le ferai avec beaucoup de plaisir. 13. Ne leur en- 
verrez-vous point des fraises? 14. Je leur en enverrai quand lea 
miennes seront mures. 15. Ne faudra-t-il pas leur ecrire bientot? 
16. Quand nous aurons recu des nouvelles de leur parent, il faudra 
leur ecrire. 17. Que ferons-nous demain? 18. Nous irons a la 
chasse. 19. N'irez vous pas chez votre pere? 20. Nous irons cer- 
tainement. 21. Quand votre guitare sera arrivee, la preterez-vous? 
22. Je ne pourrai la preter. 23. A quelle heure partirez-vous de- 
main ? 24. Je partirai a cinq heures du matin. 25. Ne sortirez-vous 
pas ce soir ? 26. Je ne sortirai pas, et je me eoucherai de bonne 
heure. 

Execise 120. 

1. Will you send for the physician ? 2. I will send for him this 
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples ? 4. She 
will send for some. 5. Will you not sit down when you are tired ? 
6. We will not sit down, we have no time. 7. What will your 
brother do when he is tired ? [R. 5.] 8. He will do what [ce que] 
ne can. [R. 5.] 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to him ? 
10. It will not be worth the while, for (car) he will not come. 11. 
Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant? 12. It will not 
be necessary to speak to him. 13. Will it be necessary for us to 
take passports? 14. It will be necessary. (11 le faudra.) 15. Will 
not your little boy walk more slowly when he is tired? 16. When 
he is tired, he will sit down. 17. What will your sister do to-mor- 
row ' 18. She will go to church and to school. 19. Will she not 
come here? 20. She will not be able to come. 21. Will you walk 
or go on horseback, (Irez vous a pied ou a cheval ?) 22. I shall go on 
horseback. 23. Why do you not go in a carriage ? 24. Because my 
carriage is in London. 25. When will you see them ? 26, I shall 
ee them as soon as I can. 27. Will they come to our house to- 
morrow ? 28. They will do so with much pleasure. 29. When you 
see that gentleman, will you speak to him? 30. I will not speak to 
him. 31. When you have written your letters, what will you do? 
32. I shall come to your house. 33. When you have read that book, 
will you send it to me? 34. I will send it to you. 35. Will ycu send 
it to-day? 36. I will send it to-morrow. 37. They will come to you 
to-morrow. 



1*4 



LESSON LXII. 



LESSON LXII. 



LEgON Lxn. 



THE TWO CONDITIONALS. (§ 125.) - 

1. The conditional present may be formed from the future, by 
displacing the terminations ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont, and substituting 
those of the imperfect of the indicative, ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

2. Every verb in the French language, regular and irregular, has 
in this tense the above terminations. 

3. Conjugation of the Conditional Present of the Regu- 
lar Verbs. 



Je chanter -ais 


finir -ais 


recevr -ais 


rendr -ais 


would sing 


would finish 


would receive 


would render 


Tu parler -ais 


cherir -ais 


apercevr -ais 


vendr -ais 


wouldst speak 


wouldst cherish 


wouldst perceive 


wouldst sell 


11 donner -ait 


fournir -ait 


percevr -ait 


tendr -ait 


should give 


should furnish 


would gather 


should tend 


Nous che^ cher -ions 


punir -ions 


concevr -ions 


entendr -ions 


would seek 


should punish 


would conceive 


should hear 


Vous porter -iez 


saisir -iez 


devr- -iez 


perdr -iez 


should carry 


would seize 


should owe 


would love 


lis aimer -aient 


unir -aient 


decevr -aient 


mordr • aient 


would love 


should unite 


would deceive 


should bite 



4. The irregularities of the conditional appear not in the termina- 
tions, but in the stem of the verb. They are precisely the same as 
those of the future. Those irregularities will be found in the last 
lesson, and need not be repeated here. The conditional of any irreg- 
ular verb may be formed by placing after the last r of the future, the 
terminations of the imperfect of the indicative. 

5. The conditional past is formed from the conditional present of 
one of the auxiliaries avoir, etre, and the past participle of the verb 
[§ 125, (2.)] :- 

J'aurais ecrit, je me serais flatte. / slwuld have written, I should have 

flattered myself. 

6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be useo 
after the conjunction si (if). But in such case, the present and thf 

mperfect of the indicative should be used : — 

B'il pouvait quitter son pcre, il vien- If lie could leave his father, he woul* 

drait. come. 

Si j'etais a votre place, j ; irais. If I were m your place, I would go. 

Resume of Examples. 

Nous irions a, la chasse, si nous I Wc would go hunting if we had Hm* 

avions le temps. J 

Je lirais, si j'avais des livres ici. I / would read if I had books here. 



/aimerais mieux aller a pied qu'a 

cheval. 
Votre mere se porterait mieux a 

Paris. 

Nous nous passerious facilement de 
ce livre 



LBSSON LXII. |Y5 

I would prefer walking to riding. 
Your mother would be better in Paris. 
We might easily do without that book. 



Would it not be better to write to htm ) 
Would it not be necessary to write ic> 

him ? 
I would sit down if I were tired. 
Thai coat would fit me well if it were 

broad enough. 



Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui ecrire 1 
No faudrait-il pas lui ecrire % 

Je m'assierais si j'etais fatigue. 
Get habit m'irait bien, s'il etait assez 
large. 

Exercise 121. 

8 J amus-er. 1. ref. to Interromp-re, 4. ir. to Be tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 
amuse one s self; interrupt ; mistaken ; 

5 approch-er, 1. ref. tolnvit-er, 1. to invite ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to be 
come near; Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; or do; 

6 eloign-er, 1. ref. to go Mouill-er, 1. to wet ; Voyage, m. journey. 
n f rom i Ot-er, 1. to take off; ^ J 
S'ennuy-er ; 1. ref. [$ 49.] Peut^etre, per/iaps; 

to be or become weary; Sech-er, 1. to dry ; 

1. Quel habit mettriez-vous si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je 
mettrais un habit vert. 3. N'6teriez-vous pas vos bottes, si elles 
etaient mouillees? 4. Je les oterais, et je les ferais secher. 5. Si 
vous aviez froid, ne vous approcheriez-vous pas du feu ? 6. Je ni'en 
approcherais certainement. 7. Votre petit garcon ne s'en eloigne- 
rait.il pas, s'il avait trop chaud? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vite. & 9. 
Vous ennuieriez-vous ici? 10. Je ne m'ennuierais pas, je m'amuse- 
rais a lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal- 
cul? 12. Je me tromperais peut-etre, si j'etais interrompu. 13. 
Viendriez-vous si on vous invitait? 14. Je viendrais avec beaucoup 
de plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisiez 
moins? 16. Je me portends beaucoup mieux. 17. Ne faudrait-il 
pas lui parler de votre affaire? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. 
Combien d'argent vous faudrait-il? 20. II me faudrait mille francs, 
si je fiuaais ce voyage. 21. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui parler que 
lui ecrire ? 22. II vaudrait mieux lui ecrire. 23. Si vous etiez a 
ma place, que feriez-vous ? 24. Si j'etais a votre place, je lui paieraia 
esque je lui dois. 25. Si j'avais le temps, je porterais volontiers 
vos lettres a la poste. 

Exercise 122. 

1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. I would read two 
hours every day if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother 
put on if be went to church ? 4. He would put on a black coat. 5 
Would you put on a black ha. 6. I would put on a straw hat 



176 LESSON LXIII. 

(chapeau de paille) if it was warm. 7. Would you not draw [L. 39, 
6. ] near the fire if you were cold ? 8. We would draw near it 
9. Would you not take off your coat? 10. I would take it off, if it 
were wet. 11. Would you go to my father's if he invited you ? 12 
I would go to his house and to your brother's, if they invited me 
13. Would you put on your boots, if they were wet? 14. If they 
were wet, I would not put them on. 15. How much money would 
you want, if you went to England? 16. We would want three 
thousand francs. 17. Would you not be better if you lived (de~ 
meurer) in the country? 18. I should not be better. 19. Would 
it not be better to write to your brother ? 20. It would be better to 
write to him. 21. Would you read the book if I lent it to you ? 22. 
I would certainly read it. 23. If you were in his place, would you 
go to school ? 24. If I were in his place, I would go. 25. If you 
were in my place, would you write to him ? 26. I would write to 
him every day. 27. Would your sister be mistaken? 28. She 
would not be mistaken, she is very attentive. 29. If you rose every 
morning at five, would you be better? 30. I should not be better. 
31. Would you prefer going on foot? 32. I would prefer going on 
horseback. 33. Would you not sit down ? 34. I would sit down 
if I were tired. 



LESSON LXIII. LEQON LXIH. 

1. The verb faire (4. ir.) is used in the formation of a number of 

idiomatic sentences. See L. 32. R. 3, 4. Faire faire, to have made, 

to bespeak ; faire raccommoder, to have mended ; faire la cuisine, to 

cook ; faire cuire, to cook, to bake ; faire bouillir, to boil ; faire rotir 

to roast ; faire chauffer, to warm (in speaking of food) ; faire bonne 

chore, to live well : — 

Nous avons fait faire des habits. We have had clothes made. 
Vous avez fait raccommoder vos You have had your waistcoats mended 
gilets. 

2. The past participle of faire never varies, when it precedes an 
infinitive : — 

Les livres que vous avez fait venir. The books which you have sent for, 

3. Faire peur, to frighten; faire attention, to pay attention; faire 

tort, to injure ; faire mal, faire du mal, to hurt, take d before 4 

noun : — 

Nous avons fait peur a ces enfants. We have frightened those child* en* 
Vous leur avez fait mal. You have hurt thenu 



LESSON LXIII. 



m 



4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by a, 
expressed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will 
take the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to 
the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention 
has for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pro- 
noun follows the verb : — 

Nous ferons attention a lui. We will pay attention to him. 

5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article 
ie, la, les, &c, instead of the possessive adjective [{ 77, (9.)] when 
the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37. R. 1.) or other per- 
sonal pronoun or by some other word in the sentence : — 

Vous m'avez fait mal a la main. You have hurt my hand. 

Le bras lui fait mal. His arm hurts or pains him. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ferez-vous raccommoder vos sou- 

liers ? 
Je ferais faire un habit si j'avais de 

l'argent 1 
II ne sait pas faire ia cuisine. 
Avez-vous fait cuire votre viande 1 
Ferez-vous chauffer votre bouillon 1 
Vous lui avez fait mal au coude. 
Vous m'avez fait mal au pied. 
Vous avez fait peindre votre mai- 

son. 



Will you have your shoes mended ? 

I would bespeak a new coat if I had 

money. 
He does not understand, cooking. 
Have you cooked your meat ? 
Will you warm your broth ? 
You have hurt his clbcno. 
You have hurt my foot. 
You have had your house painted. 



Bat-ir, 2. to build; 
Bouillon, m. broth; 
Bras. m. arm; 

inier. m. cook; 
Epaule, f. shoulder; 



Exercise 123. 

Gravure, f. engrav- Poignet, m. wrist ; 

ing ; Tete, f. head ; 

Ma^on, m. mason; Tout-a-1'heure, by-and- 

March-er, to step, tread; by; 



Ou, where; 



Gigot^de-mouton, m. leg "Pied, m. foot; 
of mutton; 



Travail, m. 
bor. 



work, la- 



2. J' en ferai batir uno 
3. Avez-vous fait bouil- 



1. Quand ferez-vous batir une maison? 
l'annee prochaine, si je recois mon argent. 
lir ce gigot de mouton ? 4. Je Tai fait rotir. 5. Le cuisinier a-t-il 
fait chauffer votre bouillon ? 6. II ne l'a pas encore fait chauffer, mais 
il le fera tout-a-1'heure. 7. N'avez-vous pas fait venir des livres? 
8. Nous n'en avons pas fait venir, mais nous avons fait venir des 
gravures. 9. N'avez-vous pas fait peur a ces petites lilies ? 10. 
Nous leur avons fait peur. 11. Ferez-vous attention a votre travail ? 
12. J'y ferai attention. 13. Avez-vous fait mal a cette petite fille ? 
14. Je ne lui ai pas fait mal. 15. N'avez-vous pas fait mal a ce 
ehien? 16. Je lui ai fait mal. 17. Ou avez-vous fait mal a votre fila ? 

8* 



178 LESSON LXIV. 

18. Je lui ai lout mal au bras et a la main. 19. No lui avez-vous pas 
fait mal au pied? 20. Je lui ai fait mal a. Fepaule. 21. A qui ce 
macon a-t-il fait mai \ 22. 11 n'a fait mal a personne. 23. Vous ai-je 
fait mal au pied? 24. Vous m'avez marche sur le pied et vous m'avez 
fait mal. 25. La tete, l'epaule, le bras, le poignet et la main me font 
mal [R. 5.] 

Exercise 124. 

1. Will you have your coat mended? 2. I will not have it 
mended. 3. Will your brother have his house painted ? 4. He will 
have it painted next year. 5. Will you not have a coat made ? 6. I 
would have one made if I had money. 7. Have you hurt your 
brother? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped upon his foot. 9. 
Does his arm pain him? 10. Yes, Sir, his shoulder, arm and wrist 
pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 12. 
He will pay attention to it, he has nothing else (rien autre chose) to 
do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow? 14. You have 
hurt my ringers (doigts). 15. Does your cook understand cooking? 
16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of 
mutton? 18. He has boiled it. 19. Has he not warmed it? 20. 
He has not had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- 
gravings ? 22. He has sent for books. 23. Have you hurt his 
elbow? 24. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. Have I 
not hurt your fingers ? 26. You have hurt my wrist. 27. Where 
have you hurt your son ? 28. I have not hurt him. 29. Would the 
cook boil that mlat if he had time ? 30. He would not boil it, he 
would roast it. 31. When will he warm your broth ? 32. He will 
warm it by-and-by, if he has time. 33. If you had stepped upon 
my foot, would you not have hurt me ? 34. I should certainly have 
hurt you, if I had stepped upon your foot. 



LESSON LXIV. LEgON LXIV. 

1, Faire connaissance, to become or get acquainted, takes the jrepo. 

sition avec before its object. Faire un mille, &c, faire un voyage. 

faire un tour de promenade, mean to go, or travel a mile, &c., to go 

on a journey, to take a walk : — 

Nous avons fait vingt milles a. die- We travelled twenty miles on horse- 
val back. 

2. Faire sea adieux, faire des emplettes, faire des progres, faire des 



LESSON L X I V. 



179 



questions, fxire du feu, correspond in signification to the English 

expressions, to bid farewell, to make purchases, to improve or progress, 

to ask questions, to make a fire : — 

J'ai fait mes adieux a. mes parents. / bid farewell to my relations. 
Avez-vous fait du feu dans ma Have you made a fire in my room ? 
chambre 1 

3. Faire sortir means, to send out, or to order out ; faire entrer, tc 

let in, to bid come in ; faire attendre, to keep waiting : — 

Vous les avez fait entrer dans ma You made them come into my room. 

chambre. 
Vous avez fait attendre mon pere. You made my father wait. 

4. Faire son possible, to do one!s best, takes the preposition pour, 
Faire seinblant, to pretend, faire usage, to make use, are followed by 
de:— 

Nous avons fait notre possible. We have done our best: 

Resume of Examples, 



Nous avons fait connaissance avec 

eux. 
Vous avez fait vingt lieues en dix 

heures. 
Nous ferons un tour de promenade. 
Je lui ai fait plusieurs questions, 
lis nous ont fait leurs adieux. 
Vous nous avez fait attendre. 
Cet enfant fait semblant de dormir. 
Vous faites semblant de lire. 

Nous ferons notre possible pour le 
voir. 



We became acquainted with them. 

You travelled twenty leagues in ten 

hours. 
We shall take a walk. 
I asked him several questions. 
They have bid usfarevjell. 
You have made us wait. 
That child pretends to be asleep. 
You pretend to be reading, or do as 

if you were reading. 
We will do our best to see him. 



Aliment, m.food; 
Credit, m. credit; 

Demand-er, 1. to ask; 
Dorm-ir. 2. ir. to sleep ; 
Ktude, f. study ; 



Exercise 125. 

Se fach-er, 1. ref. to be- Negociant, m. merchant; 

came angry ; Quart, m. quarter; 

Faire l'aumone, to give Rarement, seldom ; 

alms ; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed ; 

Laiss-er, 1. to leave, let ; Riz, m. rice. 
Mendiant, m. beggar ; 

1. Seriez-vous bien aise de faire connaissance avec ce monsieur ? 
2. J'en serais bien aise. 3. Ce cheval fait-il une lieue en un quart 
d'heure? 4. II a fait ce matin une lieue en douze minutes. 5. Leur 
avez-vous fait des questions ? 6. Je leur en ai fait.* 7. Quelle* 
questions leur avez-vous faites? 8. Je leur ai demande s'ils avaient 
fait des emplettes? 9. Vos cloves font-ils des progres dans leurs 
eludes 3 10. Us n'en font pas beaucoup, ils vienncnt rarement a Pecole. 



* SeoL. 42. 11, and $ 135, (7.) 



LESSON L X I V. 

11. Si vous etiez chez vous, feriez-vous semblant de dormir? 12. Je 
ne ferais certainement pas semblant de dormir. 13. Pourquoi ne 
faites-vous pas entrer ce mendiant ? 14. Ma mere vient de lui faire 
l'aumone. 15. Le negociant fait-il usage de son credit? 16. II en fait 
usage. 17. De quels aliments ce malade fait-il usage? 18. II fait 
usage de riz et de bouillon. 19. Faites-vous votre possible pour 
reussir? 20. Je fais tout mon possible. 21. Avez-vous fait entrer 
ees enfants, ou les avez-vous fait sortir? 22. Je les ai laisses ou ils 
etaient. 23. Vous avons-nous fait attendre? 24. Vous nous avez 
fait attendre plusieurs heures. 25. Si vous faisiez attendre ces 
dames, elles se facheraient. 

Exercise 126. 

1. Does that child pretend to read? 2. He pretends to read. 3. 
Does not that gentleman pretend to sleep ? 4. He does not pretend 
to sleep, he sleeps really (reellemenl). 5. Will you take a walk this 
morning ? 6. I would do so with pleasure, if I had time. 7. Have 
you become acquainted with the physician ? 8. I have not yet be- 
come acquainted with him. 9. How many questions have you asked 
(d) the child? 10. I asked him many questions. 11. Have you asked 
him if he had studied his lesson? 12. I did not ask him. 13. Will 
not that little girl do her best to learn her lesson? 14. She will do 
her best to learn it. 15. Of what food do you make use when you 
are sick? 16. We make use of bread and rice. 17. Have you for- 
gotten to bid farewell to your mother? 18. I had not forgotten it; 
I intended to go to her house this afternoon. 19. With whom have 
you become acquainted? 20. With the bookseller. 21. Do you not 
keep those ladies waiting ? 22. I do not keep them waiting, they are 
not ready (pretes). 23. Do I make you wait? 24. You do not make 
me wait. 25. Have you left your children in your room? 26. I have 
not done so (le). 27. Have you sent them out ? 28. I have not sent 
them out, I have let them remain where they were. 29. Have you 
made purchases this morning? 30. I have made none, I have no 
money. 31. Has the servant made a fire in my room ? 32. He has 
made one. 33. Will you do your best to come to-morrow ? 34. I 
will do my best to come early. 3£ We travelled yesterday forty 
»ea#uo8 in sixteen hours. 



LESSON LXV. 



181 



LESSON LXV. 



LEgON LXV. 



1. Faire is also used in the sense of playing the part of, or pretend- 
ing to be : — 

II fait le grand seigneur. He plays the great lord, 

2. Faire also means to matter, to concern, to help : — 

Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. 

Cela ne vous fait rien. That is nothing to you, does not corxern 

you. 
Qu ? est-ce-que cela nous fait 1 What is that to us ? 
Je ne puis qu'y faire. ■ J cannot help it. 

3. Se faire mal conjugated reflectively, means to hurt one's self. 

Se faire is used reflectively in the sense of the English verbs, to be- 

come, to turn. It is, also, used with the signification of the words 

cause, have, get, c^c. Se faire takes itre as its auxiliary. [} 46. 

L. 45.] :— 

I have become a physician. 

I have had a pair of boots made fot 



I ha re had my beard shaved. 
We have had our hair cut. 



Je me suis fait medecin. 

Je me suis fait faire une paire 

de bottes. 
Je me suis fait raser. 
Nous nous sommes fait couper les 

cheveux. 
Je me suis fait mal au doigt. I have hurt my finger. 

4. Besides the instances mentioned, [L. 33. R. 5.], faire is used 

unipersonally in many idiomatic expressions : — 

II fait jour, il fait unit. It is daylight, it is night. 

II fait de la boue, il fait de la It is muddy, it is dusty. 

pous- 

II fait clair de lune. il fait obscur. It is moonlight, it is dark. 

II fait bon ici, il fait cher ici. It is comfortable here, it is dca* here. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ce jeune homme fait le savant. 

Cela ne me fait rien. 
Que pouvuns-nous y faire 1 
Mon frere s'est fait orfuvre. 
Pourquoi vous faites-vous raser 1 
Je me ferai couper les cheveux. 
Je me suis fait batir une niaison. 
lines fatt mal a la 
tete. 
II commence a se fiire tard. 
Fait-il cher vivre a Paris 1 
11 fait beaucoup da bone. 



That young man plays Vie tcarnet 

man. 
That is nothing to me. 
What can we do to it ? 
Mo brother has turned goldsmith. 
Why do you get shaved? 
' hove mu hair cut. 
I have had a house built fat me 
We have hurt our he 

It is beginning to grow late. 
Is it dear living in Paris ? 
It is very muddy. 



182 LE8S0N LXV. 



Exercise 127. 



Absolument, absoivZtly ; Etudiant, m. student ; Peintre, m. painter; 

Artisan, m. mechanic; Fou, folle, fool, simple- Personne, m. nobody; 

Bijoutier, m. jeweller; ton; Tanneur, m. tanner, 

Bon marche, cheap; Impertinent, e, imper- Vigneron, ni. vine-dre* 
Chagrine, e, vexed; tinent; ser. 

Denrees, f. p. provisions ; Ouvrier, m. vjorkman ; Vitrier, m, glazier 

1. Pourquoi cet ouvrier fait-il le malade ? 2. II fait le malada 
parcequ'il n'a pas envie de travailler. 3. Cet etudiant ne fait-ii 
pas le savant? 4. II ne fait pas le savant, il fait le fou. 5. Sied-il 
a ce jeune homme de faire le maitre ici 2 6. II ne sied a personne 
de faire l'impertinent. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose? [R. 2.] 8. 
Cela ne fait absolument rien. 9. Cela peut-il faire quelque chose a 
ces vignerons? 10. Cela ne leur fait rien du tout. 11. N'etes-vous 
pas bien ehagrines de cela? 12. Nous en sommes bien faches, mais 
nous ne pouvons qu'y faire. 13. Votre associe ne s'est-il pas fait 
bijoutier? 14. Non, Monsieur, il s'est fait peintre. 15. Cet artisan 
ne s'est-il pas fait vitrier ? 16. II s'est fait tanneur, et son frere s'est 
fait soldat. 17. La modiste ne s'est-elle pas fait couper les cheveux ? 
18. Elle se les est fait couper. 19. Ne vous levez-vous pas aussitot 
qu'ii fait jour? 20. Oui, Monsieur, je me leve de tres bonne heure. 
21. Ne fait-il pas clair de lune? 22. II fait tres clair, mais il ne 
fait pas clair de lune. 23. Fait-il bon vivre en Amerique ? 24. D 
fait tres bon vivre en Amerique, les denrees y sont a bon marche. 

Exercise 128. 
1. Does not that gentleman play the learned man? 2. He plays 
the lord and fool at the' same time (a la fois). 3. Does not that boy 
pretend to be sick ? 4. He pretends to be sick, he does not wish to 
study his lessons. 5. When you have no wish to work do you pre- 
tend to be sick ? 6. I never pretend to be sick. 7. Is it muddy to- 
day? 8. It is not muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight this 
evening? 10. It will not be moonlight, it will be very dark. 11. Is 
it comfortable here ? 12. It is very comfortable. 13. Is it too warm 
or too cold? 14. It is neither too warm nor too cold here. 15. 
Will you have your hair cut? 16. I had my haircut yesterday morn- 
ing. 17. Will you not go home, it is beginning to grow late ? 18. 
Is it not very dark out ? (dehors.) 19. It is not dark, it is moon- 
light. 20. Has not the glazier turned goldsmith? 21. He has not 
turned goldsmith, he has turned soldier. 22. Does that concern 
your brother? 23. That does not concern him. 24. Are you not 
sorry for that? 25. I am sorry for it, but I cannot help it. 26. Why 



LESSON LXVI. 183 

do you get shaved ? 27. Because I cannot shave myself. 28. Have 
you not hurt those children? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have 
you hurt your arm? 31. No, Sir, but I have hurt my head. 32. 
Has not your sister hurt her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, and 
my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt your head ? 
35 I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. 



LESSON LXVI. LEQON LXVI. 

1. Avoir mal, means to have a pain or ache, a sore. When used 

in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a 

bruise, a cut, &c. The name of the part of the body is preceded by 

the preposition a and the article [See L. 63, R. 5. { 77, (9.)] : — 

N'avez-vous pas mal au doigt ? Have you not a sore finger ? 

Je n'ai pas mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 

2. Avoir une douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English 
to have a pain or pains : — 

J'ai une doubur au bras. J have a pain m my arm. 

3. The construction mentioned in R. 1, is used after avoir, taken in 

the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud [L, 

63, R. 5.] :— 

Vous avez les armes a la main. You have your arms in your hands. 

J'ai chaud aux mains etaux pieds. My hands and feet are warm. 

4. The article le, &c, is used before words indicating moral and 
physical properties, in cases where the English use a or an, or omit 
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the noun, un* une, 
or de, des, are at times used : — 

Cette dame a l'esprit juste. That lady has a correct mind. 

Votre Bceur a Les ycux noirs. Your sister has black eyes. 

5. A moral or physical property, which, in the individual is single, 

is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num. 

her of individuals : — 

Ces dames ont l'esprit juste. Those ladle >ave correct minds. 

Ces gargons se sont fait mal a la tete. Those boys^ je hurt then heaai. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas mal au pied ? 
Cette demoiselle a le mal de tete. 
N'avez-vous pus mal aux dents 7 
Mon fr&re a le mal de dents. 
Mon cousin a mal au cote. 



Have you not a sore foot ? 

That young lady has the headache. 

Do not your tccl/i < 

My brother has tfw toothache. 

My cousin has a vain in his side. 



184 



LESSON LXVI. 



D a des douleurs de poitrine. 
Qu'avez-vous a la main 1 

Je n'ai rien a la main. 

J'ai chaud aux mains et froid aux 

pieds. 
Vos soeurs ont le gout delicat. 
Ces messieurs ont le nez aquilin. 



He has pains in his chest 

What have you in your hand ? 

What is the matter with yout 
hand ? 

I have nothing in my hand. 

Nothing is thi matter with nv§ 
hand. 
My hands are warm and my fai 

cold. 
Your sisters have a delicate taste. 
Those gentlemen have Roman noses. 



Bleu, e, blue ; 
Bouche, f. mouth; 
Dent, f. tooth ; 
Doigt, m. finger ; 
Gorge, f. throat ; 
Memoire, f. memory ; 



Exercise 129. 
Mai de gorge, m. sore Pied, m.foot; 



throat ; 
•Mai d'oreille, 

ache; 
Niece, f. niece 
Noir, e. black; 



Presque, almost; 
m. ear- Teint, m. complexion; 
Visage, m.face; 
Yeux, from ceil, eyes. 



1. Ce jeune homme a-t-il mal a la gorge? 2. Oui, Monsieur, u 
y a deux jours qu'il a le mal de gorge. 3. Avez-vous souvent mal 
a la tete ? 4. J'ai le mal de tete presque tous les jours. 5. N'avez- 
vous pas mal au bras ? 6. J'ai mal au bras et a la main. 7. Votre 
soeur a-t-elle le mal d'oreille. 8. Oui, Madame, elle a le mal d'oreille 
et le mal de dents. 9. N'avez-vous pas froid a la t£te. 10. Non, 
Monsieur, mais j'ai froid aux doigts. 11. N'avez-vous point froid 
au visage. 12. Non, Monsieur, je n'y ai point froid. 13. Ce mon- 
sieur a-t-il le nez aquilin? 14. II a le nez aquilin et la bouche 
grande. 15. Cette demoiselle a-t-elle de belles dents? 16. Elle a 
de belles dents et de beaux yeux. 17. Ce petit garcon a-t-il les 
pieds petits ? 18. II a les pieds petits et les mains grandes. 19. Vo- 
tre niece n'a-t-elle pas les yeux bleus? 20. Non, Monsieur, elle a 
les yeux noirs. 21. Vos ecoliers se sont-ils fait mal au visage ? 22. 
lis se sont fait mal a la poitrine. 23. Vos filles ont-elles une bonne 
memoire ? 24. Elles ont la memoire excellente. 25. Ces Italiennes 
n'ont pas le teint frais. 

Exercise 130. 

1. What i3 the matter with your hand ? 2. I have had a sore hand 
these ten days. 3. Has your brother sore fingers? 4. He has soro 
fingers and a sore hand. 5. What has your brother in his hand ? 
6. He has a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a sore throat ? 
8. He has a sore throat. 9. Has not your eldest sister the tooth- 
ache? 10. She has not the toothache, but she has a sore finger. 
11. Why does not the soldier walk ? 12. He cannot walk, he lias i 



ESSON LXVII. 185 

sore foot. 13. Have you not sore feet? 14. My feet are not sore. 

15. If your fingers were sore would you write? 16. If I had sore 
fingers I should not write. 17. If your brother had the headache 
would he study his lesson? 18. He eonld not study his lesson if 
he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest ? 
20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little 
girl black eyes or blue eyes ? 22. She has black eyes and a fresh 
complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She 
has the tooth-ache and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and 
feet cold? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have 
not those ladies aquiline noses ? 28. They have aquiline noses and 
a fair complexion (le teint beau) . 29. Has your sister large hands ? 
30. No, Sir, my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little 
girls hurt their heads ? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they 
have hurt their faces. 33. That little boy has black hair (cheveux). 



LESSON LXVH. LEgON LXVH. 

1. Avoir beau — Vous avez beau, corresponds in signification to the 
English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must be followed by 
the infinitive : — 

Vous avez beau dire 3 il ne viendra It is in vain for you to speak, lie will 
pas. not come. 

2. Epouser, marier, to marry, have, in French, a different mean- 
ing. Marier, conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative 
the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the 
parties in marriage ; epouser takes, as its nominative, the contracting 
parlies only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se 
marier, to get married, and marier, conjugated passively, take the 
same nominative as epouser. 

M. L. a marie sa fille avec M. G. Mr. L. has married his daughter to 

Mr. G. 

M. G. a epouse la fille de M. L. Mr. G. has married Mr. L.'s daugh- 

ter. 

M. G. et M^e. L. sont rnaries. Mr. G. and Miss L. are married. 

Mon frfcre va so marier. My brother is going to be married. 

3. Un de mes amis, is equivalent to the English, a friend of 
mine : — 

Votre ami a Spouse uno de mes Your friend has married a friend of 
amies. mine. 



186 



LESSON LXTII. 



Resume of Examples. 



lis ont beau dire et beau faire. ils 
ne l'empecheront pas de se nia- 
rier. 

Vous avez beau lui faire des re- 
montrances. 

L'evcque de B. a marie ma soeur. 

Le capitaine G. a epouse ma cou- 

sine. 
Quand il se mariera, il nous invitera 

a la noce. 
Votre cousine est mariee avec mon 

cousin. 
"Votre cousine a epouse un de mes 

cousins. 
Le colonel a epouse une de mes 

soeurs. 



Wliatcver tJiey may say or do, tkty 
will not pre cent his marrying. 

It is in vain for you to remonstraU 

vrith him. 
The bishop of B. has married mv 

sister. 
Captain G. has married my cousin. 

When he marries, he will invite us 

to the wedding. 
Your cousin is married to my cousin. 

Your cousin has married a cousin of 

mine. 
The colonel has married a sister of 

mine. 



Aine, e, elder, eldest ; 

Archeveque, m. arch- 
bishop ; 

Cadet, te, younger ; 

Demoiselle, f. young 
lady ; 



Exercise 131. 

Devoir, 3. ir. to owe, fc? Parent, e, relation; 
^ be about ; Princesse, f. princess ; 

Epoux, pi. couple; man Prochain, e, next; 

and wife ; Savoir, 3. ir. to know; 

Infanterie, f. infantry; Regiment, m. regiment; 
Eveque, m. bishop; Yieillard, old man. 

1. Votre niece ne va-t-elle pas se marier? 2. Elle se mariera 
l'annee prochaine. 3. Qui epousera-t-elle ? 4. Elle epousera le nls 
aine du general M. 5. Savez-vous qui a marie ces deux epoux? 
6. L'archeveque de Paris les a maries. 7. N'a-t-il pas aussi mario 
Mile. L. ? 8. II Pa mariee avec M. G. 9. Qui votre demoiselle a-t- 
elle epouse? 10. Elle a epouse M. L. capitaine au 25^ me regiment 
d'infanterie. 11. Ce vieillard n'a-t-il pas tort de se marier ? 12. II 
n'a pas tort de se marier, mais il a tort d'epouser cette demoiselle. 
13. Quand ces princesses vont-elles se marier? 14. Elles se ma- 
rieront le mois prochain. 15. Qui les mariera? 16. L'eveque 
d' Arras les mariera. 17. Qui doi vent-el les epouser? 18. L'ainc€ 
doit epouser M. W. et la cadette M. G. 19. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-il 
pas epouse une de vos parentes? 20. Oui, Monsieur, il a epouse 
une de mes eousines? 21. Qui est cette demoiselle? 22. CYst 
une de mes sceurs. 23. N'avez-vous pas un de meslivres? 24. Pai 
un de vos livres et une de vos plumes. 25. Je viens de parler a une 
de vos sceurs. 

Exercise 132. 

1. Is your brother going to marry Miss L. ? 2. Yes, Sir, it is in 
vain for us t) speak to him, he will marry her. 3. Will not youi 



LESSON LXVIII. 187 

father marr) your sister to Mr. G. ? 4. No, Sir, he will marry her 
to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H. married ? 6. No, Sir, he is not yet mar- 
ried, but he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he intend to 
marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is at my 
brother's. 9 Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother intends 
to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, Sir, 
she is not married. 13. Is she going to be married? 14. She will 
marry when she is [L. 61. 5.] old enough (assez agte). 15. Whom 
did Colonel J. marry? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How 
long have they been married [L. 57. 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- 
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married? 
20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young. 21. Who married 
General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 
23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple? 24. The 
archbishop of Paris married them. 25. Will not your aunt marry ? 
26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home ? 28. No, 
Sir, she is with (chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your 
house? 30. No, Sir, he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he 
married? 32. He is not married. 33. Is Captain H. married? 34 
He was married last week. 35. He married Miss H. 



LESSON LXVIII. LEgON LXVIII. 

DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 

1. The verb avoir is used in expressing the size of an object. The 
preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no 
verb in the sentence, the preposition must be placed before the num 
ber, and again before the noun of dimension : — 

Cette muraille a dix pieds de That walk is Unfed high. 

hauteur. 
Ce puits a cent pieds de profondeur. That well is one hundred feel deep 
Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A table four feet long. 

gueur. 

2. In sentences, where sizes are compared, and the verb etrc is 
used, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the 
excess : — 

Vous 6tes plus grand que moide You are taller than I by two inches. 
deux pouces. 

3. When the price of an article is mentioned, the article le is used 
before the noun expressing the measure, weight, &c. When the 



188 



LKSSON LXVIII. 



remuneration, or rent, &c. for a definite space of time is mentioned 
the preposition par (per) is used: — 

Le beurre se vend un franc la livre. Butter is sold a franc a pouna. 
II gagne six francs par jour. He earns six francs per day. 

4. The same preposition is used, when we speak of the number cf 
times any occurrence takes place in a given space of time :— 

Je vais a la poste deux fois par I go to the post-office twice a day. 
jour. 

Kesume of Examples. 



La canelle se vend deux francs la 

livre. 
Cette soie vaut six francs le metre. 
Ce clocher a cinq cents pieds de 

hauteur. 
Cet etang a huit pieds de profon- 

deur. 
Une chambre de quinze pieds de 

longueur, sar dix-huit de largeur, 

et huit de hauteur. 
De quelle taille est votre frere 1 
Sa taille est de cinq pieds huit 

pouces. 
Notre ami est-il grand ou petit 1 
II est de taille moyenne. 
Votre maison est plus haute que la 

mienne, de cinq pieds. 
Je vais a l'ecole deux fois par jour. 
II nous paie huit francs par semaine. 



Cinnamon is sold two francs a pound* 

That silk is worth six francs a metre. 
That steeple is five hundred feet high. 

That pond is eight feet deep. 

A room fifteen feet Ions: by eighteen 
feet broad and eight feet high. 

How tall is your brother ? 

His height is five feet eight inches. 

Is our friend tall or short? 

His height is middling. 

Your house is higher than mine by 

five feet 
I go to school twice a day. 
He pays us eight francs a week. 



Exercise 133. 



Profondeur, f. depth; 
Pouce, m. inch ; 
Semaine, f. week ; 
Taille f. height, size; 
Verge, f. perch, yard, rod. 



Bon marche, cheap ; Grandeur, f. size; 
Cassonade, f. brown su- Hauteur, f. height; 
^ gar ; Largeur. f. breadth ; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch; Longueur, f. length; 
Epaisseur, f. thickness; Loyer, m. rent ; 
Etoffe, f. stuff; 

1. Votre maison est-elle grande? 2. Elle a cinquante pieds de 

long et vingt-cinq de large. 3. Combien de longueur votre jardin 

a-t-il? 4. II a vingt-cinq verges de longueur et douze de largeur. 

6. De quelle grandeur est ce livre ? 6. II a dix-huit pouces de longue ur, 

treize de largeur et trois d'epaisseur. 7. Votre maison est-elle plus 

longue que celle-ci? 8. Elle est plus longue de deux pieds. 

9. Quelle profondeur a ce puits? 10. De quelle hauteur est ce 

clocher ? 1 1. II a trois cent cinquante-trois pieds de hauteur. 12. De 

quelle taille est cet officier? 13. II est de haute taille. 14. De 

combien cet Ecossais est-il plus grand que son frere? 15. II estplua 

grand de toute la tete. 16. N'etes-vous pas de beauconp plus grand 

que moi ? 17. Je suis plus grand que vous de trois pouces. 



LESSON LXIX. 189 

18. Combien tette etoflTe se vend-elle la verge? 19. Elle se vend 
trois francs ] 3 metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle pas cher ? 
21. Elle se vend a. bon marche. 22. Combien de lettres ecrivez-voua 
par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Ccmbien 
payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer ? 25. Je ne paie que dix 
francs par semaine. 

Exercise 134. 

1. How large is your father's garden? 2. It is twenty -five rods 
*ong and ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- 
six feet long and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine? 
6. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Do you know how deep 
that well is ? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep and six feet broad. 
9. How is that cloth sold a metre? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a 
metre. 11. How much do you receive a week for your work ? 12. I 
receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your 
friend pay a month for his board (pension, f.) ? 14. He pays seventy 
francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin? 16. I am 
taller than he by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than 
your son ? 18. He is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How 
large is this room? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What 
size is your brother ? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How 
many books do you read a week ? 24. I read ten volumes a week. 
25. How is butter sold a pound ? 26. Butter is sold two francs a 
pound. 27. Do you know how much your son earns a day? 
28. He earns as much as yours, he earns ten francs a day. 29. How 
much is that silk worth a metre ? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 
31. Our friend's stature is middling. 32. Do you go to church twice 
a day ? 33. I go to church once a day. 34. Does your son go to 
the post-office every day ? 35. He goes thither six times a day. 



LESSON LXIX. LEgON LXIX. 

1. Mettre (4. ir.) forms, in French, many idiomatic expressions. 
Mettre a ineme de, to enable; mettre pied a terre, to alight, to land; 
mettre le pied, to set one's foot; mettre a la porte, to turn out of 
doors; mettre an fait de, to acquaint with; mettre ;\ l'abri, to shatter, 
mettre a l'ombie, to jnd in the shade; mettre un habit & rendroit, a 
'envers, to put on a coat right side out, wrong side out, &c. : — 



190 



LESSON LXIX. 



Nous l'avons mis a mdme de con- We enabled him to know the truth, 

naitre la verit6. 
II a mis cet insolent a la porte. He turned that insolent person out 

of doors. 

2. Mettre conjugated reflectively, i. e. se mettre, means to place. 

one's self to dress one's self; se mettre a table, to sit down to table; 

se mettre en colere, to become angry, to put one's self into a passion . 

II se met a l'ombre, au soleil. He places himself in the shade, in the 

sun. 

3. Se mettre, followed by an infinitive, means to commence, to be- 
gin:— 

lis se mirent a pleurer. They commenced weeping. 

A l'anglaise, a la francaise, are used elliptically for a la mode 
francaise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English 
fashion. 



Kesume of Examples, 
Ce cavalier a mis pied a terre. 
Vous n'osez mettre le pied cbez lui. 



Mettez ces enfants a l'abri de la 
pluie. 

Vous avez mis votre manteau a 
l'envers. 

Ce monsieur se met toujours a l'an- 
glaise. 

Hier nous nous mimes a table a dix 
heures. 

Pourquoi vous mettez-vous a l'om- 
bre 1 

Ces enfants se mirent a rire. 

Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas 
a l'ouvrage ^ 

Je vais me mettre en pension. 

Nous allons nous mettre en voyage. 



That horseman is come down from 

his horse. 
You dare not set your foot inside his 

house. 
Shelter those children from the rain. 

You have put your cloak inside out. 

That gentleman always dresses after 

the English fashion. 
Yesterday we sat down to table at ten 

o'clock. 
Why do you go into the shade ? 

Those children commenced laughing* 
W7ty do you not set yourself to work ? 

I will commence boarding. 
We are going to commence our jour* 
ney. 



Exercise 135. 

A l'italienne, after the Defend-re, 4. to forbid ; Etudi-er, 1. to study; 

Italian fashion ; Effets, m. p. things ; Mise, f. mettre, dressed j 

A merveille, exceedingly Entr-er, 1. to come in; Pluie, f. rain ; 

well; Etourdi, e, giddy per- ~R\YQ,±.\v.tolavgh; 

Convert, See L. 32, 1.; ,<<//?; Tablier, apron. 

1. Avez-vous defendu ti cet homme de mettre le pied chez vous? 
2. Je le lui ai defendu. 3. Avez-vous mis ces effets a. l'abri de la 
pluie? 4. Je les ai mis a l'abri de la pluie et du vent. 5. Avez-voua 
rais votre frere au fait de cette affaire ? 6. Je ne Ten ai pas mis au 



LESSON LXIX 191 

fait 7. Ne 1'avez-vous pas mis a meme d'etuoier ? 8. Je l'ai mis 
a. meme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Vuulez-vous mettre 
celadecote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il 
pas voulu entrer? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a terre. 13. 
Votre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier a Fenvers? 14. Nor^ 
Monsieur, il Pa mis a l'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi 
a la porte? 16. Nous lui avons ferme la porte au nez (in his face). 
17. A quelle heure vous mettez-vous a table? 18. Aussitot que le 
couvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 20. 
fl se met toujours a Fanglaise ou a Fitalienne. 21. Ces enfants ne 
se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, ils 
se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas a ecrire ? 
24. II est temps de se mettre a table. 25. Ces Siciliennes sont-elles 
bien mises? 26. Elles sont mises a merveille. 

Exercise 136. 

1. Did the gentleman alight this morning? 2. No, Sir, he would 
not alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person 
out of doors ? 4. No, Sir, but I forbade him to set his foot in my 
house. 5. Did you shelter those little children from the rain ? 6. I 
sheltered them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled 
your son to study medicine (la medecine)! 8. I enabled him to 
study medicine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Have you put on your 
coat inside out? 10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side 
out. 11. Did you put yourself in a passion? 12. No, Sir, I did 
not become angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock 
yesterday? 14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you 
intend to commence boarding? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L. 
(chez M. L.) 17. When do you commence your journey? 18. We 
commence our journey to-morrow morning. 19. Did your son com- 
mence laughing? 20. No, Sir. he commenced weeping. 21. Why 
do you not commence working ? 22. Because I am going to com- 
mence reading. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion 
24. She dresses after the Italian fashion. 25. Are those ladies weL 
dressed ? 26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not 
place yourself in the shade? 28. I will place myself in the sun, I 
nry cold. 29. Is your coat inside out? 30. No, Sir, it is right 
side out. 31. Is this the right side of this cloth (Cendroil) ? 32. It 
is the wrong side (Venters). 33. Are you not dressed after the Eng- 
lish fashion? 34. I am dressed after the Italian fashion. 35. You 
are well dressed 



1*2 



LESSON LXZ. 



LESSON LXX. 



LEgON LXX. 



THE IMPERATIVE. 



1. Conjugation of the Imperative of the Regular Verbs :— 



Chant -e 


fin -is 


re9 -ois 


rend -8 


sing 


finish 


receive 


render 


Qu'il pari -e 


cher -isse 


aper9 -oive 


vend -e 


let him speak 


let him cherish 


let him perceive 


let him sell 


Donn -ons 


fourn -issons 


perc -evons 


tend -ons 


let us givtt 


let us furnish 


let us gather 


let us tend 


Cherch *ez 


pun -issez 


cone -evez 


entend -ez 


aeek 


punish 


conceive 


hear 


Qu'ils port -ent 


sais -issent 


d -oivent 


perd -ent 


let them carry 


let them seize 


let them owe 


let them lose 



2. The second person singular, and the first and second persons 
piural of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular, 
and the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indica- 
tive. The pronouns are dropped. 

Je parle, park; je finis, finis. I speak, speak ; I finish, finish. 

3. Exceptions — Avoir, to have, makes in those persons of the im- 
perative, aie, ay ons, ayez ; etre, to be, sois, soy ons, soyez ; savoir, to 
know, sache, sachons, sachez ; and aller, va, and vas before y not fol- 
lowed by an infinitive. 

4. Vouloir has only the second person plural, veuillez, have the 
goodness to. . . . 

5. A third person singular and plural is given in the imperative by 
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong 
properly to the subjunctive, as they express rather a strong wish than 
a command. The English expressions, let him speak, that he may 
speak, are rendered in French by qu'il parle. 

6. A droite, a gauche, corrrespond in signification to the English 
tc the right, to the left. 

Allez a droite, a gauche. Go to the right, to the left. 

7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with the impera- 
tive, see L. 27. R. 1, 4 ; L. 28, R. 1, 2, 3, 4. 

Resume of Examples. 



Prencms ia premiere rue a droite. 
Ne cherehez plus a le tromper. 
Sachons nous contcnter du neces- 

saire. 
Faites bien attention a cc que vous 

dites. 
Dites toujours la vcrite. 
Allons! Messieurs, depechez-vous. 
Tenez, Monsieur voila. votre argent. 
Veuillez accepter ce present. 



Let lis take the first street to Vie right. 
Seek no longer to deceive him. 
Let vs know how to content ourselves 
with necessaries. 

Pan great attention to what you sa% 

Always trlt the truth. 
Come! gentlemen, make haste. 
Here, Sir, here is your money. 
Bq so kind as to accept this present. 



LESS ON LXX. 193 



Exercise 137. 



Clef f. key; Promett-re, 4. ir. to p w- Renvoy-er, 1, to send. 

Crayon, m. pencil; mise ; back; 

Institutrice, f. teacJver ; Rapport-er, 1. to bring Sans faute, without fail; 

Obe-ir 2. to obey ; back; Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use ; 

Partie, f. part ; Remett-re, 4. ir. to de- Tiers, m. third ; 

Precepteur, m. instruc- liver ; Verrez, 3. ir. fi om voir, 

tor ; to see. 

1. Envoyez chercher le medecin, votre petit garcon est malade. 
2, Nous Favoiis deja envoy e chercher. 3. Vous n'avez pas besoin 
de votre crayon, pretez-le-moi [L. 27. R. 4 ; L. 28. R. 4]. 4. Je ne 
saurais vous le preter, je m'en sers. 5. Donnez-le-moi ou me le 
pretez [} 100, (6.)]. 6. Je l'ai promis a votre institutrice. 7. Si 
vous nele lui avez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot que possible. 8. Ne le 
lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en [§ 39, 17.] la prochaine fois* 
que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, votre pere ne tar- 
dera pas a venir. 11. Obeissez a votre precepteur. 12. Je lui 
obeis toujours. — Donnez-lui-en une bonne partie. 13. Je lui en ai 
deja donne plus des deux tiers. 14. Avez vous porte cette clef au 
serrurier? 15. J'ai oublie de la lui remettre. 16. Portez-la-lui sans 
faute cette apres-midi. 17. Veuillez me dire ""ou demeure M. G 
18. Prenez la premiere rue a gauche, il demeure dans la deuxieme 
rnaison a droite. 19. Allons, Mesdemoiselles, depechons-nous. 20. 
Menez-les-y le plus tot possible. 21. Ne me les rapportez pas. 22. 
Renvoyez-les-moi demain. 23. Portons-les-y. 24. Ne les y portons 
pas. 25. Pr6tez-les-lui, mais ne les lui donnez pas. 

Exercise 138. 

1. Give a book to the young man. 2. I have already given him 
one. and he does not read it. 3. Lend it to him, if you will not glvo 
it to him. 4. I will not lend it to him. 5. Make haste, young la- 
die-, it. is ten o'clock. 6. Plave the goodness to give me a pen. 7. 
\ have given one to your brother. 8. Obey your father, and speak 
to your sister. 9. Will you not send for the letter? 10. I will send 
to* it. 11. Send for it as soon as you can. 12. Do not do so (le), 
but write to my cousin. 13. Come, children (mes enfants), learn 
your lesson. 14. Give him some [5 39, 17], or lend him some [{ 100, 
(6.)]. 15. Do not make haste, we have (le) time. 16. Have pa- 
tience, my child, the merchant will soon come. 17. Send it to him, 
if you cannot g ; ve it to him. 18. Write to him this afternoon with- 
out fail. 19. I would write to him if I had time. 20. Let us take 
Uie first street to the left. 21. Take the second street to the right 

9 



194 LESSON LXXI. 

22. Pay attention to what your brother says. 23. Let us tell the 
truth. 24. Let us read that book to-day. 25. Pay your debts as 
soon as possible. 26. Let us obey our instructor. 27. Carry the 
key to him. 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent you. 
29. Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have 
patience, we shall soon have money. 31. Let us speak to them, they 
are at my father's. 32. Tell them that I intend to w T rite to them to- 
morrow morning. 33. Go to church this afternoon. 34. Bring me 
back my letters. 35. Do not carry them there, but bring them to 
jth». as soon as possible. 



LESSON LXXI. LEgON LXXI. 

1 . A verb following another verb in the imperative, is put in tne 

infinitive, (according to general Rule L. 21. 2.) The conjunction 

which often comes between the two verbs in English, is not used in 

French : — 

Allez parler au musicien. Go and speak to the musician. 

Allez faire votre ouvrage. Go and do your work. 

Courez voir ces messieurs. Run and see those gentlemen. 

2. Prendre garde, to take care, to take heed; when followed by an- 
other verb in the infinitive, means to take care not to : — 

Prenez garde de tomber. Take care not to fall. 

3. Prendre Je deuil, means to go into mourning ; prendre la peine, to 
take the trouble ; prendre les devants, to go on before ; prendre un 
parti, to take a determination, prendre du cafe, du the, &c, to take 
coffee, tea, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 



Envoyez chercher le tapissier. 
Allez chercher votre parapluie. 
Courez voir votre pcre. 
Prenons garde de nous blesser. 
Prenez garde de dechirer vos habits. 
N'avez-vous pas pris le deuil 7 
Prenez la peine de vous asseoir. 
Prenez du the ou du cafe. 
Quel parti avez-vous pris 1 



Send for the upholsterer. 

Go and fetch your umbrella. 

Run and see your father. 

Let us take care not to hurt ourselves 

Take care not to tear your clothes. 

Have you not put on mourning ? 

Take the trouble to sit doicn. 

Take lea or coffee. 

What resolution have you, taken ? 



Exercise 139. 

Attend-re, 4. to expect, Gather, 1. to spoil ; Robe, f. dress; 

to wait for ; Gouverneur, m. govern- Soin, m. care ; 

Chocolat, m. chocolate; or; Tomb-er, 1, to fall; 

C ourrier, m. courier ; Lorsque, ?/•■' Tacher, 1. to stain, u 

Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Port-cr, 1. to wear ; spot; 

Deehir-er, 1, to Lear ; Quelquefois, sumel i met ; Se tai-fo ; 4. ir. U be silent, 



LESSON LXXI. 195 

1. Allez voir mon frere, il a quelque chose a vous communiquer. 
2. Courez leur dire que je les attends. 3. Mon frere a bien pris 
garde de dechirer ses habits. 4. Votre eousine a-t-elle pris garde 
de tacher sa robe ] 5. Elle a pris garde de toniber, car en tombani 
elle l'aurait gatee. 6. Ces petites filles ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7. 
Elles viennent de le prendre." 8. Pour qui prenez-vous le deuil ? 9. 
Je porte le deuil de ma mere. 10. Prenez-vous du the ou du cafe 
le matin? 11. Nous prenons du the et du cafe. 12. Ne prenez» 
^ous pas quelquefois du chocolat? 13. Nous n'en prenons que lora- 
que nous sommes malades. 14. Quel parti le gouverneur a-t-il pris ? 
15. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti (my 
fart) ou celui de votre fils? 17. Je prendrai le votre, si je crois que 
vous avez raison. 18. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas la peine de lire 
sa lettre ? 19. Parce qu'elle n'en vautpas la peine. 20. Votre cour- 
rier a-t-il pris les devants ? 21. II n'a pu prendre les devants. 22. 
N'avez-vous pas tort de prendre son parti? 23. Je n'ai pas tort de le 
prendre. 24. Avez-vous pris le the* {your tea) ? 25. Nous n'avons 
pas pris (pur) le the, nous avons pris le cafe ? 

Exercise 140. 

1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his hat? 2. He has 
taken care not to spoil it, he has only one. 3. Go and speak to your 
sister, she calls you (appelle). 4. Will you not take a cup (tasse) 
of tea ? 5. I have just taken my tea. 6. What have you said to 
your little girl? 7. I have told her to take care not to tear her dress. 
8. Let us take care not to tear that book. 9. My son has just brought 
it. 10. Has he taken his tea? 11. He has not yet taken tea, it is 
too early. 12. At what hour do you take tea* at your house ? 13. 
We take tea at six o'clock. 14. Do you take tea* or coffee for break- 
fast (a votre dfjeuner) 1 ; 15. We take coffee. 16. Is your courier 
gone on before ? 17. He has not been able to go on before. 18. 
What resolution have you taken? 19. I have taken the resolution 
jo study my lesson. 20. Have you taken care not to tear your 
books? 21. I have taken care not to stain them. 22. What has 
your brother determined ? 23. He has determined to remain silent. 
24 Have you taken my part? 25. I have taken my brother's part. 
26 Are you right to take his part? 27. I am right to take his part, 
because he is right. 28. Are you not afraid to take his part? 29. I 
am not afraid to take his part. 30. Will you take your sister's part 

* Le the, tlic meal called, tea, ; du the, the beverage called lea. 



196 



LESSON LXXII. 



or mine? 31. 1 will take my sister's part. 32. Go and read your 
book, you do not know your lesson. 33. I know my lesson, and 
1 know also that you are my friend. 34. Let us go to our father, he 
wants us. 



LESSON LXXLL 



LEgON LXXTT. 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



1. All the French verbs, regular and irregular, end in this tense 
with e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : — 

2. Conjugation of the Present of the Subjunctive of the 
Kegular Verbs : — 



Que je chant -e 

That I may sing 

Que tu pari -es 

That thou mayest speak 
Qu'il donn -e 

That he may give 

Que nous cherch -ions 

That we may seek 

Que vous port -iez 

That you may carry 

Qu'ils aim -ent 

That they may love 



fin -isse 

may finish 

cher -isses 

mayest cherish 

fourn -isse 

may furnish 

pun -issions 

may punish 

sais -issiez 

may seize 

un -issent 
may unite 



re$ -oive 

may receive 

aper9 -oives 

mayest perceive 
perp -oive 

may perceive 

cone -evions 

may conceive 

d -eviez 

may owe 

de£ -oivent 
may deceive 



rend -e 

may render 

vend -es 

mayest sell 



tend 

may tend 

entend 

may hear 
perd 
may lose 
mord 
may bite 



-e 



-ions 

-iez 

-ent 



3. In the first conjugation, the subjunctive is in the singular, simi- 
lar to the present of the indicative. Exception : aller — je vais, que 
faille. 

4. The first and second persons plural of the subjunctive, in the 
four conjugations, are the same as the corresponding persons of the 
imperfect of the indicative. The third person plural is like the cor- 
responding person in the indicative present. Exceptions: avoir; 
subjunctive, nous ayons, vous ayez, ilsaient; savoir: nous sachions, 
vous sachiez, Us sachent ; etre, nous soyons, vous soyez, Us soient ; faire, 
ious f cessions, vous fassiez, Us f assent, aller, Us aillent; vouloir Us 
veuillent ; valoir, Us vaillent. 

5. The subjunctive may also be formed from the participle present, 
by changing ant into e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : as, chantant, je cliante; 
finissant, je finisse ; recevant, je regoive ; sachant, je sache; crai- 
gnant, je craigne. 

6. The verbs presenting exceptions to this last rule are the fol- 
lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Second Part 
of this grammar, \ 62 : — 



LESSON LXXII. 



197 



Acquerir Concevoir Mourir Prendre, Savoir Venir 
Aller Decevoir Mouvoir (and Tenir (and (and 
Apercevoir Devoir Percevoir its com- its com- its corn- 
Avoir Etre Pouvoir pounds) pounds) pounds) 
Boire Faire Pourvoir Recevoir Valoir Vouloir 

7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive 
present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir, etre, and the past participle of 
a verb [§ 45.] : — 

Que j'aie parle, que je sois venu. That I may have spoken, that I may 

have come. 

8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the 
conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, 
doubt, desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen- 
sion, &c. [} 127, (2.)] :— 

Je veux que vous lui parliez. I wish you to speak to him. 

Je desire que vous arriviez a temps. / wish you to arrive in time. 

9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne, which, however, has 
no negative sense [} 127, (3.) { 138, (4.) (5.) (6.)] :— 

Je crams qu'il ne tombe. J am afraid lest he fall. 

10. After craindre, to fear ; apprehender, to apprehend; avoir peur, 
to be afraid; trembler, to tremble, pas is used in connection with the 
ne, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur- 
rence expressed by the second verb [} 138, (7.)] : — 

Je tremble qu'il n'arrive pas a / tremble tliat lie may not arrive in 
temps. time. 

Resume of Examples. 



Le medecin veut-il que je boive de 

l'eau I 
Je consens quo vous alliez le voir. 
Nous doutons que vous arriviez a 

temps. 
Je crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse. 
J 3 crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse pas. 
Je m'etonne qu'il ne sache pas cela. 

J'exige que vous lui donniez cela. 
Voulez-voufl qu'il aille a la chasse? 
Que voulez-vous que je dise ] 



J'aime inieax 
payiez. 



que vous me 



Does tJie physician wish me to drink 

water ? 
I consent that you go to see him. 
We doubt your arriving in time. 

I fear lest your master may punish 

you. 
I fear that your master may not 

punish you. 
I am astonished that he does not 

know that. 
I rcif nire yon to give him that. 
Do you ivish him to go hunting. 
Wiat do you wish me to (that 1 

should) say ? 
I would rather liave you tc paf 

me. 



198 LESSON LXXII, 



Exercise 141. 



Artisan, m. mechanic; Empech-er, 1. to prevent; Moulin-a-scie, i&w-mili 

Atelier, m. workshop ; Forteinent, very much ; Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; 

An des&us, above; Force, f. strength; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; 

Bracelet, m. bracelet; Magasin, m. warehouse; Rue, f. street; 

Deja, already ; Malsain, e, unhealthy ; Tomb-er, 1. to fall. 

1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions? 2. Je desire que vous 
fassiez attention a vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluie 
ne vous empeche de sortir ? 4. Nous craignons fortement que la 
pluie ne nous empeche de remplir nos engagements ? 5. Doutez-voua 
qu'il soit chez lui maintenant ? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, il est dej a 
dix heures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je 
m'etonne qu'il ne soit pas deja parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que 
je vous rende ces bracelets ? 10. J'aime mieux que vous me les payiez. 
11. Votre voisin craint-il que son enfant ne sorte? 12. II craint qu'il 
ne tombe dans la rue. 13. Ne desirez-vous pas que vos eleves vous 
obeissent? 14. Je souhaite qu'ils m' obeissent et qu'ils obeissent a 
leurs professeurs. 15. Ne craignez-vous pas que cet artisan ne 
tombe malade ? 16. Je crains qu'il ne tombe malade, car son atelier 
est tres malsain. 17. Ne regrettez-vous pas qu'il soit oblige de tra- 
vailler? 18. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler au dessus de ses 
forces. 19. Ne desirez-vous pas qu'on lui apprenne cette nouvelle? 
20. Je desire qu'on la lui apprenne le plus tot possible. 21. Votre 
pere ne veut-il pas que vous achetiez un magasin ? 22. II veut que 
j'achete un moulin-a-scie. 23. Desirez-vous que je vous quitte? 24, 
Je desire que vous restiez avec moi. 25. Je veux que vous partiez 
ce matin. 

Exercise 142. 

1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to 
tell him to (de) come here to-morrow morning. 3. What do you 
wish me to do ? 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not 
wish me to read your letter ? 6. I wish you to read it and (que) 
give it to my sisters. 7. Does not your sister fear lest the rain may 
prevent her going out? 8. She fears that the rain may prevent our 
going out. 9. Do you doubt that your father be at home now'? 
10. I doubt his being there. 11. Do you require me to do my work 
now ? 12. I wish you to do your work before going out (avant de 
sortir). 13. Do you not regret your being obliged to work? 14. 1 
do not regret my being obliged to work. 15. Are you not astonished 
that he knows that? 16. I am astonished that he knows alL 



LESSON LXXIII 199 

17. Do vou require me to pay him to-day? 18. I wish you to pay 
him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of 
the ab)xe exercise) 1 : 20. I will have you pay him .immediatelv. 
21. Do you fear lest the master punish your son? 22. I fear that he 
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say? 24. 1 
would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you 
to buy a house? 26. He wishes me to buy a storehouse. 27. Do 
ycu wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow 
29. Do you wish me to stay with you ? 30. I wish you to stay 
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish you 
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their 
teacher? 34. I wish them to obey him. 



LESSON" LXXIII. LEQON LXXHI. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED. 

1. A verb preceded by the conjunction que and one of the um- 
personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary ; il importe, it matters, it is 
important ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieux, it is 
letter ; il plait, it pleases, suits ; il se peut, il peut se faire, it may be, 
il est juste, it is just; il est bon, it is proper ; il est necessaire, it is 
necessary ; il est important, it is important ; il est temps, it is time ; 
il est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est a propos, it is proper ; 
il est facheux, it is sad, it is a pity ; il est urgent, it is urgent, or by 
another verb or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety, 
must be put in the subjunctive [rj 127, (4.)] : — 

II faut que vous restiez ici. You must remain here. 

II est juste que vous soyez recom- It is just you be rewarded. 
penaft. 

2. The unipersona] verb, il est, governs the indicative present or the 

future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que, coming 

after one of the adjectives, stir, sure ; certain, certain; vrai, true; 

demontre, proved; incontestable, incontestable; evident, evident, and 

others having a positive and affirmative sense: — 

II est Certain qiril Vient ou qiril It is certain that he comes or will u)i.i>- 
viendra. 

3. When however the verb, il est, used in the above connection is 
negative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive : — 

II nVst nullement certain qu'il It is by no means certain that hevrill 



200 



LESSON LXXIII 



4. After certain conjunctions, afin que, in order that ; quoique* 
although, <$-c. [see full list, § 143, (2.)] the subjunctive is always used 

Quoique vous fassiez, quoique vous Whatever you may do, whatever you 
disiez. may say. 

5. Otner important rules on the government of conjunctions wili 
be found in said \ 143. 

Resume of Examples. 



Que faut-il que votre sceur fasse 7 

Faut-il que je lui ecrive'* 

II est necessaire que vous lui 

ecriviez. 
II est temps que vous lui donniez 

son argent. 
N'est-il pas facheux qu'il soit arrive 

si tard ? 
II est certain qu'il est arrive. 
II n'est point certain qu'il se soit 

blesse. 
Restez ici jusqu'a-ce-qu'il arrive. 
Pourvu que vous finissiez a temps. 



What must your sister do ? 

Must I write to him ? 

It is necessary for you to write to ktm. 

It is time that you should give him his 

money. 
Is it not a pity that he arrived so late * 

It is certain that he is arrived. 

It is not certain that he has hurt him- 

self. 
Remain here until Jie comes. 
Provided, that you finish in time. 



Exercise 143. 

Affaire, f. affair ; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise ; Point, m. point, degree ; 

Ainsi, thus ; Linge, m. linen ; Pourvu que, provided 

Creancier, m. creditor; Manqu-er, 1. to want ; that; 
Se couch-er, 1. ref. to Necessaire, m. 7iecessa-Hegl-er, 1. to regulate; 

retire ; ries ; Satisfai-re, 4. ir. to satis- 

Emprunt-er, 1. to bor- Ordre, m. order; fy; 

row; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Tel, le, such. 
Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; 

1. Que faut-ii que je dise ? 2. II faut que vous disiez ce que vous 
avez entendu. 3. Ne faut-il pas que je finisse cette histoire ? 4. II 
n'est pas necessaire que vous la finissiez. 5. N'est-il pas a propos 
que je satisfasse mes creanciers ? 6. II est a propos que vous le fassiez. 

7. N'est-il pas juste que je vous paie ce que je vous ai emprunte ? 

8. II est juste que vous me le payiez. 9. Se peut-il que votre frere 
ait oublie sa famille? 10. II ne pent pas se faire qu'il l'ait oubliee. 

11. Est-il certain que votre frere se soit oublie a un tel point? 

12. II est certain qu'ii s'est oublie. 13. II est Men facheux qu'il se 
soit oublie ainsi. 14. Resterez-vous jusqu'a-ce-que j'aie mis ordre a 
mes affaires. 15. Je resterai jusqu'a-ce-que vous les ayez r^glees. 
16. Ne faudra-t-il pas que je fournisse des provisions a cette 
famille ? 17. II faudra que vous lui en fournissiez pourvu que vous en 
ayez. 18. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieux que vous lui pretiez de l'argent, que 
de le laisser manquer du necessaire? 19. II vaudra mieux que noua 



i 

LESSON LXXIV. 201 

ui en pretions. 20. Que faut-il que nous fassions? 21. Ilfaut qua 
vous portiez ce linge chez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me 
eouche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous couchiez. 24. Faut-il que 
je me leve ? 25. II faut que vous vous leviez. 

Exercise 144. 

1. What must our friend do? 2. He must remain at our house 
untL I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ! 4. He must put his 
affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- 
tors ? 6. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your 
little boy to go to school ? 8. It is time for him to go to school, it is 
ten o'clock. 9. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to- 
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is 
it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casquelte) ? 12. It is 
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it necessary for your mother to 
finish her letter? 14. It is not necessary that she finish it. 15. Is it 
certain that your son has forgotten his money ? 16. It is certain that 
he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no means certain that he has for- 
gotten it. 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? 19. I 
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do 
you will not succeed (rtussir). 21. Whatever your brother may 
say, nobody will believe him (croire, ir.). 22. Must I write to you? 
23. You must write to me. 24. Do you wish me to be sick ? 25. I 
do not wish you to be sick. 26. Do you require me to tell you 
that ? 27. It is necessary that you tell me all. 28. Do you wish 
me to go to your house ? 29. I wish you to go there. 30. Must I 
get up? 31. You must rise immediately (a Vinstant). 32. Must 
your brother retire ? 33. He must go to bed immediately. 34. It 
is time for him to go to bed, it is twelve o'clock. 



LESSON LXXIV. LEgON LXXIV. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. CONTINUED. 

1 . The verbs croire, to believe ; dire, to say ; esperer, to hope ; gager 

and parier, to bet ; penser, to think; sentir, to feel; voir, to see; and 

ig affirmation or something certain and positive, BN 

(when they are conjugated affirmatively, and have que after them) 
followed by the indicative present or future \] 127, (2.) Note] : — 

Je pense, je crois, je dis qu'il / think, I believe, I say that ,\e vnR 
viendra. come. 



9 



• 



202 



LESSON L X X I V. 



2. The ubove verbs, when used in the same connection and conju 
gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the subjunctive 
[} 127, (2.)] :- 

Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. J do not believe he will come. 

3. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, is 
put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, and in 
the indicative, when the idea is certain [§ 127, (2.) Note] : — 

J'ai un homme qui me rendra ser- / have a man wlw will oblige me. 

vice. 

J'ai besoin d'un homme qui me / want a man who will {may) oblig* 

rende service. me. 

4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le 

seid, le premier , le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [} 127.] : — 

Voila le seul chapeau que j'aie. That is tlie only hat I have. 

Voila le meilleur homme que je There is the best man I know. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je crois que le concert a eu lieu. 
Je ne pense pas que notre ami 

vienne. 
J'espere que vous apprendrez cela 

par coeur. 
Je ne pense pas qu'il puisse appren- 

dre tout cela par coeur. 
Je crois que ce marchand s'enrichit 

aux depens d'autrui. 
Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse a 

vos de pens. 
Je ne crois pas que vous reussissiez 

a gagner votre vie. 
J'ai une carafe qui contient un litre. 
Je cherche une carafe qui contienne 

un litre. 
Je vous prete le meilleur chapeau 

que j'aie, a condition que vous me 

le rendiez demain. 



/ believe that the concert took place. 

I do not think that our friend will 
come. 

I hope that you will learn that by 
heart. 

I do not think that he can learn all 
that by heart, 

I believe that this merchant grows rich 
at the expense of others. 

I do not believe that he enriches him- 
self at your expense. 

I do not believe that you will succeed 
in earning your living. 

I have a decanter which holds a litre. 

I seek a decanter which holds a litre. 

1 lend you the best hat I have, on con- 
dition that you will return it te me 
to-morrow. 



Exercise 145. 



S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Fort, strong 

git dole ii ; 
Compt-er, 1. to depend ; 
Crista!, m. crystal; 
Debout, standing ; 
Dur-er, 1. to wear, last ; 



Rentr-er, 1. to igme in 
Litre, m. litre, about a again ; 

quart ; Sorte, f. kind; 

Negociant, m. merchant : Buffi-re, 4. Ir. to mfict; 

"1. m. parasol; Tanneur. m. tanners 
Portier, m. porter; Tard-er, 1. to tarry. 



1. Pensez-vous que ce drap dure longtemps ? 2. Je crois qu'il 
durera bien, car il est fort. 3. Croyez-vous que notre portier tarde a 
rentrer? 4. Je crois qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez- vous que noua 



LESSOR LXXIV. 203 

restions debont? 6. Je desire au contraire, que vous vous as- 
seyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq 
pages par coeur en deux heures J 8. Je crois que c'est impossible. 
9. Esperez-vous que notre ami arrive de bonne heure? 10. J'espere 
qu'il arnvera bientot. 11. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il ? 12. I\ 
m'en faur, une qui contienne un litre. 13. Pen ai une de cristal, qui 
co^tient deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ee negotiant s'enrichisse 
a vos depens? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens d'autrui. 16. 
Quel parasol pensez-vous me preter? 17. Je pense vous preter le 
meilleur que j'aie. 18. Le tanneur reussira-t-il a gagner sa vie ? 19. 
Je ne crois pas qu'il y reussisse. 20. Pensez-vous que cet argent 
suffise avotrepere? 21. Je crois qu'il lui suffira. 22. Croyez-vous 
que ces messieurs comptent sur moi ? 23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur 
vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je 
crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. 

Exercise- 146. 
1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place? 2. I believe 
that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that your sister's dress 
will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very 
good. 5. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a 
livelihood? 6. I believe he will succeed in it (?/), for he is very dili- 
gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense ? 
8. I think that he enriches himself at the expense of others. 9. 
Does the merchant grow rich at my father's expense? 10. He 
grows rich at your expense. 11. What kind of a house must you 
have (vous faut-il) ] 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms. 
13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind 
of a decanter do you seek? 15. I seek one which holds three litres. 
16. I have one which holds two litres, I will lend it to you. 17. 
What coat will you send me? 18. I will send you the best I have, 
take care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will 
learn all that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it. 21. 
Do you believe (that) he will come? 22. I believe that he will 
come Boon. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon me? 
24. I kno v that lie depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentle- 
man depend upon me? 26. I think that he depends upon your bro- 
ther. 27. Will the porter soon come in again ? 28. I hope that he 
will not tarry long. 29. Will you not lend me your umbrella? 30. 
1 will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain 
standing? 32. lie does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish 
me to sit down? 34 T wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish 
that he may come. 



204 LESSON LXXV. 



LESSON LXXV. LECON LXXV. 

THE IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are in all 
the verbs, regular and irregular, of the four conjugations, sse, sses 9 t 
ssions, ssiez, ssent. 

2. The vowel preceding the t of the third person singular always 
takes the circumflex accent, 

3. Conjugation of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive of 

the Regular Verbs. 
Que je chant -asse fin -isse re 9 -usse rend -isse 

That I might sing might finish might receive might render 

Que tu pari -asses chcr -isses aper<; -usses vend -isses 

That thou mightest speak mightest cherish mightest perceive mightest sell 

Qu'il donn -at fourn -it pei*9 -ut tend -it 

That he might give might furnish might gather might tend 

Que nous cherch -assions pun -issions C0119 -ussions entend -issiona 

That we might seek might punish might conceive might hear 

Que vous port -assiez sais -issiez d -ussiez perd -issiez 

That you might carry might seize might owe might lose 

Qu'ils aim -assent un -issent de9 -ussent mord -issent 

That they might love might unite might deceive might bite 

4. This tense may be formed from the past definite [L. 51.] by 
changing, for the first conjugation, the final i of the first person sin- 
gular of the past definite into sse, sses, etc., and by adding se, ses, etc. 
to the same person in the other three conjugations. This rule has 
no exceptions. 

J'allai, fallasse ; je finis, jefinisse. I went, I might go; I JinisJied, I might 

finish. 

5. All the observations made Lesson 52, on the changes of the 
stem of the irregular verbs, in the past definite, apply equally to the 
imperfect of the subjunctive. 

6. The pluperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the imperfect 

of the same mode of one of the auxiliaries avoir, tire, and the past 

participle of the verb. 

Qu3 j'eusse fini; que je fusse venu. That I might have finished, that 1 

'might have come. 

7. All the rules given on the use of the subjunctive in the threo 
preceding lessons, apply, of course, to the imperfect and pluperfect of 
the mode. 

8. In the same manner as the present or future of the indicative 
of the first part of a proposition, governs under the above-mentioned 
rules, the verb of the second part, in the present or past of the sub- 



LESSON LXXV. 



2t)5 



junctive; so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative 
and the two conditionals, govern the verb in the second part of the 
proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



Ne fallait-il pas que je lui parlasse 1 

11 faudrait que je lui donnasse ce li- 
vre. 



Was it not necessary that I should 

speak to him ? 
It would be necessary for me to give 

him that book. 



Resume of Examples. 



Voudriez-vous que je donnasse un 

coup de baton a cet enfant 1 
Je voudrais que yous tirassiez un 

coup de fusil sur cet oiseau. 
Exigeriez-Yous que nous revinssi- 

ons de bonne heure 1 
Que Youdriez-vous que ces hommes 

fissent 1 
Que Youliez-Yous que je fisse 7 
II faudrait que j'eusse mon argent. 

Je ne voulais pas que yous mourus- 

siez de froid. 
Elle craignait que vous ne mourus- 

siez de misere et de faim. 
Voudriez-Yous que je jetasse un 

coup-d : ceil sur ces papiers 2 



Would you wish me to give that child 

a blow with a stick ? 
I would vnsh you to fire your gun 

upon that bird. 
Would you require us to return early ? 

What vjould you wish those men to 

do? 
What did you, wish me to do? 
It would be necessary for me to have 

my money. 
I did not ivish you to die with the cold. 

She feared lest you might die with 

want and, hunger. 
Would you wish me to cast a glance 

upon these papers ? 



Exercise 147. 

Ivrogne, m. drunkard; Ressembl-er, 1. to fe~ 

Mer, f. sea,; semble ; 

Lievre. m. hare; Betablissement, m. re- 

Perdrix. f. partridge ; coven/; 

Poste. m. post; Sante, f. health; 
Be rend-re, 4. ref. to re- Tir-er, 1. to fire, shoot, 
pair; 



Becasse, f. woodcock; 
Bord. in. sJwre; 
Charg-er, 1. to load; 
Coup. m. blow; 
Coup-de-fu>il. m. shot; 
Coiip-d ceil. m. glance; 
Demi-nod, half-worn; 

Fout't, 111. whip ; 

1. Voudriez-vous que j'achetasse un habit a demi-use? 2. Je vou- 
drais que yous en achetflAsiez un neuf. 3. Voulait-on que ce soldat 
malade se rendit a son poste ? 4. On voulait qu'il se rendit a. son 
regiment. 5. Faudrait-il que je demeurasse aubord de la mer ? 6. 11 
faudrait pour le retablissement de Yotre sante, que vous vous ren- 
diaaiez en Suisse? 7. Ne pensez-voua pas que cet enmnt ressemble Tl 
■t more ? 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui i 
t-il ? 10. II ressemble it sa socur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-voue 
voire fille epousat cet ivrogne. 12. Voudriez-vous que nous mon 
russions de misore . ; 13. Je craignaia que ces dames ne monraaeent 
[{ 127, (3.) L. 72. 9.] de froid. 14. Ne voulez voub pas tirer sur ce 
lievre? 15. Je tirerais sur cette becasse si mon fusil etait chaigo 



206 LESSON LXXVI. 

16. Combien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que je tirasse? 17. Si 
vous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassiez sur cette per- 
drix. 18. Voukz-vous que je jettc un coup d'ceil sur cette lettre ? 

19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que voudriez-vous que je 
flsse? 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention a vos etudes. 22. 
Faudrait-il que je sortisse ? 23. II faudrait que vous restassiez a la 
maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse a ce chevai? 25. Je 
voudrais que vous lui donnassiez des coups de fouet. 

Exercise 148. 

1. What would you have me do ? 2. I would have you cast a 
. glance upon this letter. 3. Would you wish me to give that dog 
blows with a stick ? 4. I would wish you to give that horse blows 
with a whip. 5. Would you require us to return at five o'clock ? 
6. I would require you to return early. 7. Do you think that your 
brother resembles your father ? 8. I do not think he resembles my 
father. 9. Whom do you think that he resembles ? 10. I think he 
resembles my mother. 11. How many shots have you fired? 12. I 
have fired five shots at that woodcock. 13. Would you not have me 
fire at that partridge ? 14. I would have you fire at that partridge, if 
your' gun was loaded. 15. Where would it be necessary for me to 
dwell? 16. It would be necessary for you to dwell on the sea-shore. 

17. Would you have me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you 
die of hunger. 19. Would you have your brother die with cold? 

20. I would not have him die with cold or want. 21. What would 
you have your son do ? 22. I would have him learn his lessons. 23. 
Would you have him learn German ? 24. I would have him learn 
German and Spanish. 25. Have you fired at (sur) that hare ? 26. I 
have not fired at that hare. 27. Would it be necessary for me to go 
out? 28. It would be necessary for you to go out. 29. Would it be 
necessary for me to remain here ? 30. It would be necessary for you 
to go to church. 31. What did you wish? 32. I wished you to write 
to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out? 34. I 
wished you to buy a good hat. 



LESSON LXXVI. LECON LXXVI. 

REGIMEN OR GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. (§ 129.) 

1. Many verbs come together in French without prepositions, 
which are in English joined by them. Many others are connected in 
French by prepositions different from those connecting the corres- 



LESSON LXXVI. 



207 



ponding verbs in English. No satisfactory general rules can be 
given on this point. We have given in the Second Part of this gram- 
mar [{ 130, 131, 132.] copious lists of the verbs in general use, with the 
prepositions which follow them, when they come before other verbs. 
We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually placed after the 
verbs introduced in our lessons. 

2 The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb 
(not avoir or tire) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive. 

3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, § 130, although 
they, in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take 
one in French : — 



Aller, 1. ir. to go 
Compter, 1. to intend 
Courir, 2. ir. to run 
Daigner, 1. to deign 
Desirer, 1. to desire 
Devoir, 3. to owe 
Envoyer, l.ir. to send 
Esperer, 1. to nope 



Falloir 3 ir. to be <ne- Savon, 3. ir. to know 

cesS a r y Souhaiter, 1. to wish 

Mener, 1. to lead, take Valoir mieux 3. ir. to be 
Penser. 1. to think better 

Ponvoir, 3. ir. to be able Venir, 2. ir. to come 

Pretendre, 4. to pretend Vouloir, 3. ir. to wis^ 
Preferer, 1. to prefer will. 



Resume of Examples. 



Comptez-vous diner avec nous 1 

Je vais diner chez mon pere. 

Ne voulez-vous pas donner a man- 
ger a ce chien 1 

Desirez vous monter dans ma cliam- 
brel 

Je prefere descendre chez votre pere. 

Demeure-t-il en haut ou en Das'? 

Prefercz-vous demeurer au rez-de- 
chaussee % 

Je desire demeurer an premier Stage. 

Nous pre ferons louer le second etage. 

Nuns esperoDfl loner une chambre 
au second. 



Do you intend to dine with us ? 
1 am going to dine at my father's. 
Will you not feed that dog? 

Do you wish to go up to my room ? 

I prefer to go down to your father's. 

Does he live above or below ? 

Do you prefer to live on tlie ground 

floor? 
I wish to live in the first story. 
We prefer to take the second story. 
We hope to rent a room in the second 
\ story. 



Cabinet, m. closet ; 
Oompt-er, 1. to cipher; 
Demain, to-morrow 



Exercise 149. 

En haut, up stairs, above; Salle, f. parlor ; 
Faisan, m. peasant ; Touch-er, 1. to touch, 
Jou-er, 1. to play; Vtyj Jt . ,« 

D.'jrun-er 1. to break- Lou-er, 1. to rent, to let; Troisieme, third story ; 

fat. V\nc-av,l. to play; Violon, m. violin. 

En bas, down stairs, fo-Plaisir, m. favor, plea- 
low ; sure ; 

1. Combien de chambres comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous comp- 
tons louer une salle au rez-de-chaussee et deux cabinets au troisieme. 
3. Ne prelerez-vous pas louer une chambre-a-couchcr au second ! 4. 
Nous preferona demeurer au rez-de-ch-ussce. 5. Nc pouvez-vous 



208 LESSON LXXVI. 

raster & diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? 6. Je vous remercie, je pre* 
fAre venir demain. 7. M. votre pere viendra-t-il demain dejeuner 
avec nous? 8. II compte venir demain, de bonne heure. 9. Que 
voulez-vous leur dire? 10. Je veux ies prier de me faire ce plaisir. 
11. Comptez-vous faire ce plaisir a mon frere? 12. J'espere le lui 
faire. 13. Preferez-vous demeurer en haut ouenbas? 14. Nous 
preferons demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-vous faire de ce jeune 
faisan? 16. Nous pensons l'envoyer a M. votre beau-frere. 17. 
Ne savez-vous pas jouer duviolon? 18. Je sais en jouer. 19. 
MHe. votre cousine sait-elle toucher le piano ? 20. Elle sait toucher 
le piano et pincer la harpe. 21. Ne savez-vous pas ecrire? 22. Nouj 
savons lire, ecrire, et compter. 23. Savez-vous jouer de la guitare* 
24. Nous ne savons pas en jouer. 25. Nous souhaitons trouver un 
appartement au rez de chaussee. 

Exercise 150. 

1. Does your brother-in-law intend to rent the ground floor? 2 
He intends to rent two rooms in the second story. 3. How many 
rooms does your son intend to take ? 4. He intends to take two 
rooms in the second story. 5. Does he prefer to live on the second 
floor? 6. He prefers to live on the ground floor. 7. Does your 
father wish to come to dinner with us to-morrow ? 8. He intends 
to come to-morrow at two o'clock. 9. Do you prefer to live up 
stairs or down stairs ? 10. I prefer to live above. 11. Does your 
sister know how to play on the piano? 12. She knows how to play 
on the piano. 13. Where do you intend to live (demeurer)' 1 . 14. 
We intend to live at your father's. 15. Will you go up to my 
room? 16. I will go down to your father's. 17. Do you wish to 
live on the ground floor? 18. I wish to live on the second floor. 
19. Is it necessary to stay here? 20. It is not necessary to stay 
here. 21. What do you think of doing with (de) your book? 22. 
I thiruk of giving it to my son. 23. What do you wish me to say to 
that gentleman ? 24. I wish to beg him to do me a favor. 25. Do 
you wish to send that pheasant to your mother? 26. I wish to send 
it to her, she is sick. 27. Cannot your sister play on the violin ? 

28. She cannot play on the violin, but she can play on the guitar. 

29. Does your sister wish to live up stairs ? 30. She prefers living 
down stairs. 31 Will you not do me that favor? 32. I will do it 
with pleasure. 3a Cannot your brother stay and dine with us to* 
day? 34. He has • "omised my father to come and dine with him 
35. Our friend knows how to read, write, and cipher. 



LESS OX LXXVII. 



209 



LESSON LXXVn. 



LEgON LXXVH. 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs follow ng, 
oy means of the preposition de, of where the corresponding verbs 
n English either take no preposition, or one other than of. Besides 
avoir besoin, &c. [L. 21. R. 4.], the following verbs extracted from 
lift, J 132, belong to this class : — 



Achever, to finish 
Briiler. to burn, to long 
Cesser, to cease 
Commander, to com- 
mand 
Conseiller. to advise 
Defendre, to forbid 
Dire, to say 



Dispenser, to dispense Negliger, to neglect 

Empecher. to prevent Prier, to beg 

Eviter, to avoid Promettre, to promise 
Se flatter, to flatter one's Proposer, to propose 

self Refuser, to refuse 

Jurer, to swear Supplier, to entreat 

Manquer, to foil Trembler, to tremble 
Menacer, to threaten 

Resume of Examples. 



Pourquoi n'achevez-vous pas cl'ap- 

prendre ce metier? 
Nous brulons de continuer nos etu- 
des. 
II ne cesse de nous tourmenter. 
Me defendez-vous de faire du bien 

a cet homme ? 
Ne negligez pas de lui faire une 

visite. 
Me promettez-vous de faire une 

visite a mon ami 7 
Je vous prie d'aller tout droit chez 

vous. 
Je vous couseille de venir par le 

ehemin-de-fer. 
Ne manquez pas de lui faire mes 

compliments. 
L'avez-vou.s menace* de le frapper? 
J'ai refuse de lui faire credit. 
Me proposez-voufl de lui confier cet 

• -it ? 
Je vous couseille de le lui confier. 
■Tevite de lui reprocher ses fautes. 



Why do you not finish learning thai 

trade? 
We burn to continue our studies. 

He does not cease tormenting us. 
Do you forbid my doing good to that 

man ? 
Do not neglect paying him a visit. 

Do you promise me to pay a visit to 

my friend? 
I beg you will go straight home. 

I advise you to come by Vie railroad. 

Do not fail to present my compli- 
ments to him. 

Have you threatened to strike him? 

I refused to give him credit. 

Do you propose to me to trust him 
villi this money ? 

J ad rise you to trust him ivithit. 

I avoid to reproach him with hi* 
faults. 



Exercise 151. 

Arros-er. 1. to water ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; 
kmxoir t m.ttfatering-poti Jardinier, m. gardener ; 
Au conlraire, on the Lendemain, m. next 
contrary; dan; 

Corrig-er, 1. to correct ; Oubli-er, 1. to fn 
Faire part, to communi- So rend-re, 4. ref. to 
cuie ; repair ; 



Tout droit, straight ; 
Bend-re, 4. to do, to ren~ 
der ; 

Veille, f. err., day before; 
Voie, f. conveyance, way, 
or mode of travelling. 



210 LESSON LXXVII. 

1. Pourquoi ne cessez-vous pas de lire ? 2. J'aurais tort de cesser 
de lire avant de savoir ma lee on. 3. Avez-vous defendu a votre 
jardinier d'arroser ces fleurs? 4. Au contraire, ye lui avais com- 
mando de les arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de .h faire? 6. 
Parcequ'il a oublie d'apporter Parrosoir. 7. Que desire faire M. F. ? 
8. II brule de continuer l'etude de la medecine. 9. N'avez-vous pas 
tort de faire des visites a ce monsieur] 10. J'aurais tort de 'e n^« 
gliger. 11. N'avez-vous pas refuse de rendre ce service a votre en- 
nemi? 12. J'aurais eu tort de refuser de le lui rendre. 13. Quelle 
voie nous avez-vous conseille de prendre? 14. Je vous ai conseille 
de prendre la voie du bateau-a-vapeur. 15. Avez-vous menace de 
frapper cet enfant? 16. Je l'ai menace de le corriger. 17. Avez* 
vous refuse de vendre des marchandises a mon frere ? 18. J'ai re- 
fuse de lui en vendre a credit. 19. Avez-vous dit a mon fils de se 
rendre a la maison? 20. Je l'ai prie d'y aller tout droit. 21. Vous 
proposez-vous de venir la veille de Noel ? 22. Nous nous proposons 
de venir le lendemain. 23. Votre compagnon se propose-t-il de 
garder le secret ? 24. II se propose de faire part de cela a tout le 
monde. 

Exercise 152. 

1. Have you forbidden my cousin to speak to the gardener ? 2. 1 
have not forbidden him to speak to him. 3. Has your mother ordered 
the gardener to water her roses (roses) ? 4. She has ordered him to 
water them. 5. Has he forgotten to do it ? 6. He has neglected to 
do it, he has not forgotten it. 7. What conveyance will you take to 
go to Paris ? 8. I advise you to take the railroad. 9. Have you 
told (a) your son to take the steamboat? - 10, No, Sir, I have told 
him to take the stage (diligence, f.). 11. Is not your brother wrong 
to neglect paying a visit to his brother-in-law? 12. He is wrong to 
neglect it. 13. Does not that young German long to read that letter ? 
14. He longs to continue his studies. 15. Do you propose to trust 
him with that money? 16. I propose to trust him with it. 17. Do 
you neglect to reproach him with his faults? 18. I avoid to reproach 
him with them. 19. Have you threatened to punish your son. 20. 
I have threatened to strike him. 21. Do not tail to present my com- 
pliments to my sister's friends. 22. I will not fail (je u'y manquerai 
pas). 23. Have you refused to sell him good- \ 21. I have refused 
to sell him goods on credit. 25. Which mode of travelling do you 
advise me to take? 26. I advise you to take the railroad. 27. Do 
you forbid him to come? 28. I have forbidden his writing. 29. 
Have you failed to pay your gardener ? 30. I have not failed to pay 



LESSON L XX VI I I. 



211 



iilq. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do not neglect to write 
*,o me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work, 
35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I have told him to come 
'he dav after. 



4 ■* » 



LESSON LXXVIII. 



LECON LXXVIII. 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many French verbs reach their object by means of prepositions, 
while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, 
that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach 
their object through prepositions different from those used in English. 
We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, commen- 
cing with the first : — 

2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun, in French, but 
have none in English : — 

Abuser de, to abuse Jouir de, to enjoy Plaire a, to please 

S'approcher de, to ap- Manquer a, to offend, to Se souvenir de, to re- 



fail member 

Medire de, to slander Se servir de. to use 
Se metier de, to mistrust Ressembler a, to resem- 
Obeir a, to obey ble 

Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre a. to survive 



proach 
Convenir a, to suit 
De plaire a. to displease 
Desobeir a, to disobey 
Douter de ; to doubt 
Echapper a, to escape 

3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions in the 
two languages. 

S'affligerde, to grieve for Louer de, to praise for Remercier de, to thank 
F6licifter de, to congrat- Profiter de, to profit by for 

ulate Penser a, to think of Hire de, to laugh at 

Gtunir de, to grieve for Be passer de, to djj uslth- Rougir de. to blush cJt 
S'mformer de. to inquire out Songer a, to think of 

about 

Resume of Examples. 



BTavez-voufl pas abuse de notre pa- 
tience ? 

Nous en avons abuse. 

Voufl avez desobei a vos parents. 

Vous pardonnerez a vos ennemis. 

\v»us penserez constamment a vos 
devoirs. 

Vous y penserez constamment. 

Ne riez-vous paa de noa errenrs 1 

Nous n'en rions point. 

Ne ressenible-t-il pas a son pere 1 



Have you not abused our patience* 

We have abused, it. 

You have disobeyed your parents. 

You will forgive your etiemies. 

You will think constantly of you* 

duties. 
You will think of 'them constantly. 
Do not laugh at our 'mistakes. 
We do not I audi at tin M. 
Docs he not resemble Ms father? 



212 LESSON LXXVIII, 

Exercise 153. 

Arrangement, m. ar- Cceur, m. heart ; Ne — plus, no more 

rangement; Devoir, m. duty ; Nou^elle, f. news; 

Circonstanee, f. zircum- Faute, f. fault ; Peintre, m. painter • 

stance ; S'informer, 1. ref. to in- Prochain. m. neighbor ,- 

Conduite, f. conduct; quire ; Sellier, m. saddler ; 

Complaisance, f. kind- Malheur, m. misfor- Succes, m. success, 
ness; tune; 

1. Cefc arrangement vous convient-il? 2. II ne me convient pas, 
mais il convient a notre parent. 3. Cela ne deplait-il pas au peintre ? 
4. Votre conduite lui deplait beaucoup. 5. Ne craignez-vous pas 
d'abuser de la patience de votre ami ? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 7. 
Ne pensez-vous jamais a vos devoirs? 8. J'y pense tous les jours. 
9. Avez-vous pense a votre frere aujourd'hui? 10. J'ai pense a lui, 
et je me suis souvenu de ses bontes. 11. A-t-il eu soin de son pere, 
et lui a-t-il obei? 12. II lui obeit constamment. 13. Ne lui a-t-il 
jamais desobei ? 14. II lui a desobei plusieurs fois, mais il gemit de 
sa faute. 15. Ne les remerciez-vous pas de leur complaisance? 16. 
Je les en remercie de tout mon cceur. 17. Le sellier vous a-t-il 
felicite de votre succes? 18. II m'en a felicite. 19. N'avez-vous 
pas ri de notre malheur ? 20. Nous n'en avons pas ri, nous ne rions 
jamais des malheurs d'autrui. 21. Ne vous souvenez-vous pas des 
nouvelles que je vous ai apprises ? 22. Je ne m'en souviens plus. 
23. Votre pere ne vous a-t-il pas defendu de medire de votre pro- 
chain ? 24. II me l'a defendu. 25. Nous nous sommes informes de 
toutes les circonstances de cette affaire. 

Exercise 154. 

1. Have you not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have not 
abused his kindness, I have abused his patience. 3. Does not your 
conduct displease your parents ? 4. My conduct does not please 
them. 5. Why have you not obeyed your father ? 6.1 have obeyed 
him (lui). 7. Have you not laughed at my mistakes? 8. I have 
not laughed at your mistakes. 9. Has the young man laughed at 
the painter's mistakes? 10. He has not laughed at his mistakes 
1 1. Has your saddler laughed at your cousin's misfortunes ? 12. Ho 
has not laughed at his misfortunes. 13. Do you ever laugh at the 
misfortunes of others? 14. We never laugh at our neighbor's mis- 
fortunes. 15. Do you remember the lesson which you learnt yes- 
terday? 16. I do not remember it (en). 17. Does that young lady 
resemble her mother? 18. She does not resemble he' mother. 



LESSON LXXIX. 213 

19. Hive you thanked ycur friend for his kindness? 20. I have 
thanked him for it. 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read 
that book? 22. She has forbidden it (me To). 23. Why do you 
not forgive your enemies ? 24. I forgive them with all my heart 
25. Do you not think of your duties? 26. I think of them (y) every 
day. 27. Ha^ you congratulated your friend ? 28. I have congratu- 
lated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those gen 
tiemen? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house 
suit you ? 32. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33. 
Doe-3 that house suit the painter? 34. It suits him very well, but it 
is teo small for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to 
that gentleman. 



LESSON LXXIX. LEgOJST LXXIX. 

REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. (§ 87.) 

1. The regimen or complement of an adjective is generally a 
noun or a verb completing its signification. This regimen is usually 
connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition. 

2. That preposition is often different in French from that connecting 
the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 

the preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [} 87, 

(4-)] :- 

II est necessaire de travailler pour It is necessary to labor in order to 
vivre. live. 

4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, \ 88, 89, 90, reach 
their regimen through prepositions, different in French and Eng 
liflh :— 

Anioureux de, in love Mecontent de, displeased Propre a, fit for 

with with . Rebelle a, rebellions toio- 

Chcri de, beloved by Reconnaissant de, grate- ards 
Content de with Jul for Bon pour, kind towards 

1)68016 de, grieved for Rempti de, filled with Insolent avcc, insolent 
Faclie de, sorry for Bon a, good for towards 

Inquietde, uneasy about Cruel a, cruel towards Poli envers, polite to 
Ivre de, intoxicated with Exact a ; exact in 

Resume of Examples. 

N'etes-vous pas content de vos pr > I Arc vou not pleased with your pro* 

gres ] griss ? 

Jen h"ih fort content. J am very much pleased unth it. 

Votre domestique est-il exact 5 Is your servant exact in fulfilling 

remplir ses devoirs % \ his duties ? 



214 



LESSON LXXIX. 



Avez-vous rempli de vin cette bou- 
teille ? 

Avez-vous rempli d'argent votre 
bourse 1 

Je Ten ai remplie. 

II est tres facile de blamer les ac- 
tions d'autrui. 

II est glorieux de mourir pour sa 
patrie. 

II est plus agreable de voyager en 
etc qu'en hiver. 



Have you filled that bottle -wit/i wine f 

Have you filled your purse wild 

money ? 
I have filled it loith it. 
It is very easy to blame Vie actions 

of others. 
It is glorious to die Jwr one's county y< 

It is more agreeable to travel in sumr 
mer than in winter. 



Exercise 155. 

Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois-a-br tiler, m. /re- Nettoy-er, 1. to clean; 

down; wood; Peuple, m. people ; 

Achat, m. purchase ; Chagrine, e, vexed ; Pommier, m. apple-tree ; 

Arrach-er, 1. to pull Encre, f. ink; Prunier, m. plum-tree ; 

up ; Fendre, 4. to cleave, split; Roi, m. king ; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Gloire, f. glory; Sci-er 1. to saw ; 

er; Liberte, f. liberty ; Tonneau. cask. 

1. Ce heros n'etait-il pas amoureux de la liberte et de la gloire ? 
2. U en etait amoureux. 3. Ce roi n 5 etait-il pas cheri de son 
peuple ? 4. II en etait cheri. 5. Ces negociants ne sont-ils pas 
contents de leur achat 1 ? 6. lis n'en sont pas contents. 7. N'etes- 
vous pas chagrine de ne pouvoir nous accompagner ? 8. Pen suis 
desole. 9. Savez-vous de quoi l'aubergiste a rempli ce tonneau? 
10. II Pa rempli de vin. 11. De quoi ferez-vous remplir cette 
bouteille, quand vous Paurez fait nettoyer ? 12. Elle est deja 
remplie d'encre. 13. N'etes-vous pas bien fache d'avoir fait abattre 
vospommiers? 14. J'en suis bien content, car ils n'etaient bons a 
rien. 15. N'est-il pas n^cessaire de faire arracher ces pruniers 1 
16. II n'est pas necessaire de les faire arracher. 17. Est-il possible 
de fendre ce morceau de bois? 18. II est possible de le fendre. 
19. Etes-vous exact a nettoyer vos habits ? 20. J'y suis tres exact. 
21. De quoi avez-vous rempli votre bourse ? 22. Je Pai remplie 
d'argent. 23. Est-il necessaire de faire scier votre bois-a-bruler ? 
24. II est necessaire de le faire scier. 25. N'etes-vous pas reconnaissant 
des services qu'on vous rend ? 26. J'en suis tres reconnaissant. 

Exercise 156. 

1. Are you not grieved with having lost your money ? 2. I am 
vexed that I have lost my purse. 3. With what will you fill that 
bottle? 4. I will have it filled with ink. 5. Is it not necessary to 
have our wood sawed? 6. It is necessary to have our fire-wood 
sawed. 7. Your garden is too small, is it not necessary to have some 



LESSON LXXX. 215 

plum-trees pulled out I 8. It is necessary to have some plum-trees 
cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver ? 10. I 
have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your bottles filled with vine? 
12. They are all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled 
your bottles with ink ? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, 
for [ want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. I am 
pleased with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good 
for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children? 20. She is 
beloved by her friends and by her children. 21. Are you grateful 
for those services ? 22. I am grateful for them. 23. Is it not possi- 
ble to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it. 
25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not so agreeable to 
travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 
28. Is it not glorious to die for one's country ? 29. It is glorious to 
live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand 
(encrier) with it? 31. I have filled it with it. 32. Would it not be 
accessary to pull up all those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary 
to pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 34. Henry tho 
fourth (quatre) was beloved by his people. 



LESSON LXXX. LECON LXXX. 

GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS, ETC. (§ 139.) 

1. Some prepositions govern the nouns which follow them, without 
the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before (at an earlier period), 
[\ 1 1J, (1.)] devant, before (opposite place), [$ 142, (1.)] derriere, 
behind; chez, at the house of; concernant, touching ; excepte, except; 
outre, besides; selon, according to; voici, here is; volla, tliere is, etc 
H 139, (1.)]- 

2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their object 
by means of the preposition de : — hors de, out of; loin de, far from , 
I ileur de, even iviih ; a force de, by dint of ; a l'egard de, with regard 
to ; a i'insu de, without the knoioledge of, unknown to ; a raison de, at 
the rate of; au deca de, this way of; au dela de, that way of [$ 139, 

a.]. 

3. Others take 3 — quant \\,asfar ; jusqu'a, as far as, etc. [} 139, 3.]. 

4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions may in French 
nave a regimen in common, provided they govern in the saine manner 
or case [J 92, (1.) (2.) $ HO, and j 133.] :— 



216 



LESSON L X X X. 



We love and praise our children. 

That garden is useful and agreeabU 

to our father. 
Within or without the kingdom. 



Nous aimons et nous louons nos 

enfants. 
Ce jardin est utile et agreable a 

notre pere. 
Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- 

aume. 

5. When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions 
coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen 
n the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. The 
regimen must he repeated, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn 
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, 
therefore, be translated literally into French : — 

That man is useful to and loved by his family — / write to and receive 
tetters from my brothers — To be exposed to or sheltered from the rain. We 
must say: — 



Cet liomme est utile a sa famille, 

et il en est aime. 
J'ecris des lettres a mon frere, et 

j'en re^ois de lui. 
Etre expose a la pluie, ou en etre 

a Tabri. 



That man is useful to his family , and 
he is beloved by them. 

I write letters to my brother, and re- 
ceive some from him. 

To be exposed to the rain, or to bt 
sheltered from it. 



Utile and aime, ecrire and recevoir, expose and a l'abri, take dif- 
ferent regimens. 

Resume of Examples. 



Nous sommes arrives avant la ba- 

taille. 
Vous vous asseyez toujours devant 

moi. 
Les avez-vous places sur la table % 
Je les ai places dessous. 
Je les ai mis sous la chaise ou des- 

sus. 
lis demeurent derriere notre mai- 

son. 
J'ai loue une chambre de derriere. 
Nous occupons le devant de la mai- 

son. 
Je les ai rencontres derriere votre 

jardin. 
Vous aves achete cette terre a 

l'insu de votre pere. 
J'ai pave ce jardinier a raison de 

d" n K francs par jour. 



We arrived before the battle. 

You always sit before me. 

Have you placed them upon the table 7 

I have placed tJiem under. 

I huve put them under the chair or 

upon it. 
They lived behind our house. 

I have rented a back room. 

We occupy the front of ike house. 

I met them behind your garden. 

You have bought that estate withori 
the knowledge of your father. 

I paid the gardener at tlie rate of two 
francs per day. 



Assiette, f. plate ; 
Cout-er, 1. to cost ; 
Dedans, inside, within ; 



Exercise 157. 

Dehors, outside, wit haul; Dessous, under, under 

Derriere, m. back ; it; 

Devant, m. front ; Dessus, above , upon it / 



LESSON LXXX 217 

S'enrich-ir. 2. to become Hors, out; Ponime-de-terre, f. po- 

rich ; Plat. m. dish ; tato; 

Hectolitre, m 100 litres ; Stt, upo?i, about. 

1. N'avez-vous pas ferme la porte de devant? 2. Nous l'avons 
fermee, niais nous n'avona pas ferme la porte de derriere. 3. Qui 
est arrive avant nioi? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis de yant la fenetre. 
6. Qui demeure derriere voire maison ? 6. II n'y a point de maison 
derriere la notre. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'a force de travailler, il 
e'enrichira? 8. Je ne crois pas quil s'enrichisse, s'il vend ses mar- 
chandises a si bon marche. 9. Apprend-il la musique a Tinsu de ses 
parents? 10. II Tapprend a leur i.nsu. 11. Vous etes vous marie 
a Tinsu de votre sceur? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 13. 
Notre ami n'est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. II n'est pas 
hors de la ville, il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de l'argent sur vous/ 
16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le der- 
riere on sur le devant de la maison? 18. Nous demeurons sur le de- 
vant. 19. La cuisiniere a-t-elle mis les assiettes sur la table ou 
dessous ? 20. Elles a mis les assiettes, les plats, les cuilleres et les 
fourchettes sui la table. 21. Combien ces pommes-de-terre vous 
coutent-elles ? 22. Je les ai achetees a raison de cinq francs l'hecto- 
litre. 23. Avez vous fait reparer le dedans ou le dehors de la mai- 
son ? 24. J'ai fait reparer l'mterieur et Fexterieur. 

Exercise 158. 

1. Have you bought that house without your father's knowledge? 
2. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten 
to shut the front door? 4. I have shut the front door and the back 
5. I have brought all my books except two or three. 6. Does 
your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupies the 
8. Whom have you met behind that house? 9. I met nobody 
behind the house. 10. Does that gentleman live behind your house? 
11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no house behind 
yours. 13. Have you a knife about you ? 14. I have no knife about 
me. 15. Do you carry a knife about you? 16. I never carry a 
knift; about me. 17. Has not your brother money about him ? 18. 
He has no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils upon 
the table, or under it? 20. I will put them in the drawer (ftrotr). 
21. How much have you given for that wheat.' 22. I bm;_ 

te of twenty-five francs the hectolitre. 23. Is that I idy'a house 
Dut of the city ! 24 It is not out of the city ; it is within. 25. Has 
not your sister placed the plates upon the table ? 26. She lias put 
the plates upon the table, and the spoons under it. 27. Have you 

10 



218 LESSON LXXXI. 

had your house repaired ? 28. I have had the inside repaired, but 
not the outside. 29. How much does that silk cost you] 30. I 
have bought it at the rate of five francs the metre. 31. Did you 
marry without your father's knowledge ? 32. I married without his 
knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without my knowledge ? 
34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I sold them without 
my sister's knowledge. 



LESSON LXXXI. LEgON LXXXI. 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. (§ 108.) 

1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before 

the verb to be, in such sentences as, it is I, it is thou, &c. The latter 

pronouns (I, thou, &c.) are rendered by moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, 

eux, m., elles, f. The verb remains in the singular, except when the 

pronoun following it is in the third person plural ; in which case it 

maybe put in the plural or in the singular [§ 116, (2.)]. If the 

pronoun is followed by qui, the verb is better in the plural, and, if 

followed by que, in the singular : — 

C'est moi, c'est lui, c'est elle. It is I, it is he, it is she. 

Ce sont elles qui parlent. It is they who speak. 

C'est elles que nous cherchons. It is they whom we seek. 

2. If the relative pronoun qui and another verb follow ttre, this 

second verb must agree in number and person with the pronoun 

preceding the relative : — 

C'est vous qui avez fait cela. It is you have done that. 

C'est nous qui avons dechire cette It is we who have tarn tliat silk. 
soie. 

3. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but 

not unipersonally before the verb to be [§ 108, (5.)] : — 

Co fut en Allemagne qu'il trouva It was in Germany that he found \u 
son ami. friend. 

4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, m., celles qui, f., are equivalent U 
die English pronouns, he who, she iclw, they who — celui que, celle que 
ceux que, celles que, render he whom, <SfC. 

Celui ou celle qui chante. He or she who sings. 

Resume of Examples. 

Est-ce vous qui nous avez averti de | h it uou. \o\oi ave warned t/softhis? 
cclal 



LESSON LXXXI. 



219 



C'est ncus qui vous on avons averti. 
Est-ce vous, mesdanies, que nous 

avons rencontrees 7 
Ce n'est pas nous, c'est eux que 

vous avez vus. 
Ce n'est pas vous, ce sont eux qui 

ont fait cela. 
C'est en Angleterre que je vous ai 

vu. 
Connaissez-vous ces deux Portu- 

gais'? 
Je connais celui qui parle a M. L. 



It is vie who have learned you of it. 
Is it you, ladies, whom we have met ? 

It is not v-e; it is they whom you have 

seen. 
It is not you ; it is they who h/we dow 

that. 
It is in England that I saw you. 

Do you know those two Portuguese ? 

I know him wlw speaks to Mr. L, 



Exercise 159. 

Connaissance, f. acquain- De temps en temps,/™??* 
tance ; time to time; 

Expliqu-er, 1. to explain; No. number ; 

Guerre, f. war ; Phrase, f. sentence; 

De-jour en-j our. fro7?idayI > re\\i&-eT, 1. to prelude, 
to day; 



Appel-er, 1. to call ; 
A-toute-force, by all 

means ; 
Avert- ir, 1. to warn; 
Blessure, f. wound; 
Combl-er, 1. to over- 

v:hehii ; 

1. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui avez appele votre domestique? 2. Ce 
n'est pas moi qui l'ai appele. 3. Est-ce vous mon ami qui voulez 
a toute force aller en Espagne ? 4. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon cousin. 
5. N'est-ce pas lui qui a averti ce matelot de son danger ? 6. Ce n'est 
pas lui, c'est moi qui Ten ai averti. 7. Est-ce nous que vous atten- 
dez de jour en jour ? 8. Ce n'est pas vous, c'est eux que j'attends. 
9. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui nous avez comblees de bienfaits? 10. 
Ce n'est pas moi, Madame. 11. N'est-ce pas en Italie que vous avez 
fait connaissance avec lui ? 12. Ce n'est pas en Italie ; c'est en Russie. 
13. Est-ce vous, Mesdames, ou vos cousines que nous avons vues au 
bal ! 14. C'est nous, ce n'est pas nos cousines que vous avez vues. 
1.3. Ne connaissez-vous pas ces deux messieurs? 16. Je connais celui 
qui parle a, Madame L. 17. Est-ce vous qui avez recu une blessure 
a. la guerre? 18. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon voisin. 19. N'est-ce 
pas vous qui nous avez explique cette phrase? 20. Est-ce vous, Mon- 
sieur, qui demeurez au N°- 18? 21. Ce n'est pas moi qui y demeure, 
22. Entendez-vous ces musiciens? 23. J'entends celui qui chante, 
24. Je n'entends pas bien celui qui joue. 25. Nous entendons ceux 
qui preludent. 

Exercise 160. 

1. Is it you, my friend, who have warned me of my danger? 2. It 
is not I who have warned you of it. 3. Is it they whom you expect 
from day to day? 4. It 13 not they whom we expect. 5. Is it you 
who have done this ? 6. It is not wo ; it is you who have done it 



220 LESSON LXXXII. 

7. Was it in England that you bought this hat ? 8. It was not in 
England; it was in Germany. 9. Was it not in Russia that you be- 
came acquainted with him? 10. It was not in Russia; it was in 
Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us? 12. It was not we; it 
was he 13. Are you not acquainted with the two Poles who are 
reading ? 14. I know the one who is near you. 15. Is that (est-ce ui) 
the lady whom you expected? 16. It is not (she). 17. Ts it; you, 
gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness? 18. It is not 
(we), Sir; we have not the pleasure of knowing him. 19. Is it you 
who have been wounded in the (au) arm? 20. It is not (1). 21. Do 
you not hear those two ladies ? 22. I do not hear the one who sings. 
23. I hear the one who plays. 24. Was it you who came to our 
house this morning? 25. It was not I; I was in London then (alors). 
26. Was it you, Sir, who did us that favor ? 27. It was not (I) ; it 
was my sister. 28. Was it your son who wished by all means to go 
to London ? 29. It was not he ; he is now in Germany. 30. Is it you 
who wrote that letter? 31. We have written no letter. 32. Who 
lives at (au) No. 20 ? 33. I live there (Jest mot). 34. Is it we whom 
you have seen ? 35. It was not you whom I saw. 



LESSON LXXXII. LEgON LXXXII. 

1. The pronoun ce (and not the pronouns ii, elle, &c), must be 
used for he, she, they, coming before the verb to be, when that verb is 
followed by a noun, or an adjective used substantively, preceded by 
the, a or an, by some or any understood, or by a possessive or demon- 
strative adjective. When the word used in apposition with ce is plural, 
and in the third person, the verb is put in the plural, although ce re- 
mains unchanged [§ 108, (2.) (3.)] : — 

C'est un Polonais. He is a Pole. 

Ce sont des Anglais. They are Englishmen. 

C'est cette dame quim'aparle de vous. It is that lady who spoke to me of you. 

2. Ce is used as the nominative of the verb etre, in sentences li*e 
he following, and the conjunction que is used idiomatically after it. 

The verb in this case is not put in the plural : — 

Qu'est-ce-que ces enfants? What arc those children? 

Qu'est-ce-que PItalie 1 What is Italy ? 

Qu'est-ce-que le jardinage 1 What is gardening ? 

3. Que is used idiomatically in a number of sentences. In fche 
following it gives greater force to the expression : — 

Ce sont de bons livres que les votres. Yours arc indeed good books. 
Je dis que oui ; je crois que non. / say yes ; I believe not 



LESSON LXXXII. 221 



Resume or Examples. 



Qui sont ces ni essieurs qui parlent 
a M. L. 1 

Ce sont mes cousins, qui viennent 

d/arriver. 
De quel pays sont ces marchands 1 
Ce sont des Polonais ; ils viennent 

d'arriver. 
Ils ne sont pas polonais; lis sont 

russes. 
Ce ne sont pas des Polonais ; ce sont 

des Russes. 
Qu'est-ce que la Touraine 7 
C'est le jardin de la France. 
Votre fenetre ne donne-t-elle pas 

sur la rue 7 
Non, c ? est sur la cour qu'elle donne. 
Je crois que oui ; je crois que non. 



Who are the gentlemen whi speak to 
Mr. L. ? 

They are my cousins, who are ywst 
arrived. 

Of what country are those me% chants ? 

They are Poles; they are just ar- 
rived. 

They are not Poles ; they are Rus- 
sians. 

They are not Poles ; they are Rus- 
sians. 

What is Touraine ? 

It is the garden of France. 

Does not your window look on the 
street ? 

No, it looks on the yard. 

I believe %o ; I believe not. 



Exercise 161. 

Bris-er, 1. to break; fitranger, e, foreign; Soieries, f. p. silk stuffs; 
Charron, m. wlieel rrighi; Fenetre, f. window; Sucre, m. sugar ; 
Confitures, f. p pre- Lyon, Lyons; Suisse, Swiss; 

serves ; Mouchoir, m. handker- Surprend-re, 4. ir. to 

Donn-er, 1. to;. ■. ne, look; chief; catch, surprise; 

Ecossais, e, ^ fph; Roue, f. wheel; Vol-er, 1. to steal. 

1. Connaissez-vous ces etrangers? 2. Oui, Monsieur, ce sont lea 
freres de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-il pas ecossais? 4. Non, Mon- 
sieur, ils sont suisses. 5. Ne sont-ce point des Ecossais qui vous 
ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, Monsieur, ce sont des 
Suisses. 7. N'est-ce pas votre domestique qui vous a vole du vin ? 
8. Ce n'est pas lui, c'est son frere. 9. N'est-ce pas lui qui a pris vos 
confitures? 10. Ce n'est pas lui; ce sont ses enfants. 11. Ne 
sont-ce pas la les enfants que vous avez surpris a voler votre sucre ? 
12. Ce sont leurs freres. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins? 14. Ils ne 
sont pas cousins; ils sont freres. 15. Qu'est-ce-que ces soieries? 
16. Ce sont des marchandises qu'on vient de nous envoyer. 17. 
N'est-ce pas une belle ville que Lyon? 18. C'est une grande et 
die ville. 19. N'est-ce pas la. le mouchoir que vous avez perdu? 
20. Je crois que oui. 21. N'est-ce pas sur le jardin que donnent vcs 
fen&tresl 22. Oui, Monsieur, c'est sur le jardin qu'elles donnent. 
23. N'est-ce pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est 
pas lui qui l'a faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui l'ont bnsee et c'est 
le menuisier qui la faite. 

Exercise 1G2. 
1. Is that lady your friend's sister? 2. No, Sir, she is a btranger 
S. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ? 4. 



222 LESSON LXXXIII. 

They are Swiss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom vou 
have invited? 3. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not know that man 1 

8. I know him very well ; he is the man who has stolen my wine. 

9. What is Italy"? 10. It is the garden of Europe. 11. Is not that 
the letter w T hich you intended to carry to the post-office? 12. No, 
Sir, it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre fine ? 14. Yes, Sir 
Havre is truly a large and beautiful city. 15. Is not that the ma 
whom you have caught stealing your fruit? 16. It is not, it is an 
other. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought? 18. Yes, Sir, I 
believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on the street? 
20. No, Madam, they look on the garden. 21. Do not the windows of 
your dining-room look on the yard (cour) ? 22. No, Sir, they look 
on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that litt> child wiio has taken your pre- 
serves ? 24. It is his brother or his sister. 25. What are those en- 
gravings ? 26. They are engravings which I bought in Germany. 
27. Are those gentlemen Scotch ? 28. They are not Scotch ; they 
are Italian. 29. Are those ladies Scotch ? 30. No ; they are the 
Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is M irseille ? 32. It 
is one of the finest cities in (de) France. 33. Is it ^ot your tailo: 
who made that coat ? 34. It is not he ; it is an En^ sh tailor who 
made it. 35. It is your friend who broke my watch. 



LESSON LXXXIII. LECON LXXXTTT. 

1. In French, as in other languages, when a verb has two subjects 
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [§ 114, (2.)] : — 

L'oncle et la tante sont arrives. The uncle and aunt are arrived. 

2. When a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it 
is put in the plural, and assumes the termination of the first person 
rather than that of the second or third, and the termination of the 
second in preference to that of the third : — 

Vous et moi irons domain a la chasse. You and I will go hunting to-morrow. 
Vous et lui irez demain a 1'ecole. You and he will go to school to-morrow. 
Sa mdre et moi nous avons ecrit His mother and I have written that 
cette lettre. letter. 

3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has several 
subjects, all of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, 
the w T ords moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of je, tu, il, ils. A pro- 
noun recapitulating the others, may, as in the last example, be placed 
immediately before the verb [$ 33, (10.) (II.)]- 



LESSON LXXXIII. 



223 



4 For further rules on this subject, see 5 114 and 115, and also 
the next lesson. 

5. Gener corresponds in signification to the English to trouble, to 
incommode, to disturb, to be in the way, and to hurt (in speaking of 
shoes and garments), Se gener means to constrain, or trouble one's 
self:— 

Est-ce-que je vous gene 1 Am I in your way? 

Resume of Examples. 
Ou irez-vous, votre frcre et vous 1 



Lui et moi irons en Angleterre. 
Vous, elle et lui. vous acketcrez du 

ble. 
JBux et moi, nous sommes fait mal 

a la tete. 
Vous et lui. vous devriez vous pre- 

ter aux circonstances (se preter). 
Lui et moi, vous generous sans 

doute. 
Ma cousine et moi, nous craignons 

de vous gener. 
Je ne me gene jamais chez nes 

amis. 
Ne vous genez pas; mettez-vous a 

votre aise. 
Nous n'aimons pas a gener les au- 

tres. 
Nous n'aimons pas a nous gener. 



Where will you go, your brother and 

you? 

He and I -will go to England. 
You. she and he will buy wheat. 

They and I have hurt our heads. 

You and he should adapt yourselves 
to circumstances. 

He and I will without doubt incom- 
mode you. 

My cousin and I fear to be in youi 
way. 

I am never under constraint with my 
friends. 

Be under no constraint ; ploxe your- 
self comfortably. 

We do not like to incommode others. 

We do not like to incommode our- 
selves. 



Exercise 163. 

A perte, at a loss; Nullement, by no means; Prodigue, prodigal, lav- 

A profit, wilh ay raft; Pardon, excuse me; ish ; 

Bras, arm; Persist-er, 1. to persist; Societe, f. company, so- 

I>e ran g-er. wrb ; Place, f. room ; ciety ; 

Economc ■d; Tous deux, both. 

1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous 
gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est 
tres agreable. 3. N'uvez-vous pas etc trop prodigues, vous et vofre 
fr£re ? 4 Lui et moi au contraire, nous avons ete tros economes 
6. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur? 6. Nous n'avon.s 
nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce-que mon bras vous 
Monsieur? 8. Non, Monsieur; nous avons assez de place, vous ne 
me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux eircon- 
fctances? 10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous y 
preter. 11. Cejeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution? 12. 
Nous y persistons, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-VOTM tous deux a res- 



224 LESSON LXXXIV. 

ter ici? 14. Nous y persist oris tous deux. 15. Cet homme est-i. 
g£ne dans ses affaires (uncomfortably siluaied, badly qff)1 16. E 
etait g6ne dans ses affaires il y a un an. 17. Ne vous genez pas. 
Monsieur. 18. Je ne me gene jamais, Monsieur. 19. Est-coquc 
mon frere vous derange ? 20. Non, Monsieur, il ne me derange pas. 

21. Je ne voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous de- 
range. 23. Vous et votre associe avez vendu vos marchandises a 
perte. 24. Vous et moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Votre 
piM'e, votre frere et moi nous avons achete des marchandises. 

Exercise 164. 
1. Do we incommode you, my brother and I? 2. No, Sir; yon 
do not incommode us; we are very glad to see you. 3. Are you not 
afraid to disturb your friend ? 4. We are afraid to disturb him ; he 
has much to do. 5. Is my foot in your way, Sir'? 6. No, Sir ; your 
foot is not in my way. 7. Will you and your brother go to Ger- 
many this year ? 8. We intend to go there, he and I. 9. He, you 
and I, should write our lessons. 10. Should you not, you and your 
friends, adapt yourselves to circumstances? 11. We should do so, 
if it were possible. 12. Do I not disturb »tm, Sir? 13. You do 
not disturb me by any means. 14. Does ec* my little boy disturb 
you? 15. He does not disturb me. 16. He Wurbs nobody. 17 
Does not your partner sell his goods at a loss ? \ \ He never sells at 
a loss. 19. He and I always sell at a profit. £K>, Do you persist in 
your resolution ? 21. Your friend and I persist > our resolution. 

22. I never feel under constraint at your house. ^% Be under no 
constraint (make yourself at home). 24. Are you rK wrong to in- 
commode them ? 25. I do not intend to incommode t Wu. 26. We 
do not like to incommode ourselves (to put ourselves out of the 
way). 27. My little boy and I will, perhaps, be in you- *vay. 28. 
No, Sir; we are very glad of your company. 29. Do I disturb you? 
30. No, Sir; you do not disturb us. 31. Do I disturb your father? 
32. No, Sir ; you disturb no one. 33. Excuse me, Sir, if I li**urb 

ou. 34. Have you not been very lavish? 35. No, Sir; I BSflure 
ou, that your son and I have been very economical. 



LESSON LXXXIV. LECON LXXXIV. 

1. When a verb is preceded by several nouns not connected by <t 9 
it agiees with the last only, provided the nouns are in some way 
synonymous, or the mind dwells more forcibly upon the last : — 



LESSOR L X X X 1 V. 



225 



Son amour, sa lendresse pour ses His love, his tenderness far his chil- 

enfants est connue de tout le dren, are known to every bcdy. 
monde. 

Vos amis, vos parents. Dieu vous Your friends, your relatives, God 

recompensej-a. v;ill reward you. 

2. When two or more nouns are united by the conjunction ou, the 

rerb agrees with the last only : — 

Charles ou George ecrira a votre Charles or George will vsriie to your 
ami. friend. 

3. When a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not be- 
ing all in the third person), are joined by ou, the verb is put in the 
plural : — 

Vous ou moi partirons demain. You or I will go to-morrow. 

Votre soeur ou vous irez a Teglise. Your sister or you will go to church 

Vous ou lui avez pu seuls commettre You or he alone have probably com- 

cette action. mitted this act. 

4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated, or when ni Vun m 
C autre is used as nominative to a verb, the verb is put in the plural, if 
the two nouns, or the two persons represented by ni Cun ni Vautre, 
perform or may perform the action together : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne liront. Neither the one nor the other will read. 

5. When, however, only one at a time can perform the action, the 

verb is put in the singular : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nomme Neither the one nor the otJier will be ap- 
prefet de ce department. pointed prefect of that department. 

Eesume of Examples. 



Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont trouve le vin 
bon. 

L'un et l'autre ont trouve le diner 
mauvais. 

Comment se trouvent Messieurs vos 
frcr 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent bien. 

L'unet l'autre se trouverent au ren- 
dezvous. 

Ni 1 un ni l'autre ne sera elu presi- 
dent. 

L un ou l'autre y trouvera a redire. 

Lui on vous avez trouve quelque 
chose a redire a notre conduite. 

Ni lui ni moi a'avons trouve a redire 
a la conduite do vos enfants. 



Neither the one nor the other found the 

wine good. 
Both found the dinner bad. 

How do your brothers find themselves ? 

Neither find themselves well. 

They both found themselves at the ren- 

dcz-vous. 
Neither will be elected president. 

One or the other will find fault with it. 
He or you have found something to 

blame in 7W conduct. 
Neither he nor I have found any fauli 
i your child re a 1 s cow 



Auteur. m. author; 
Devoir, m. duty ; 
6criture, f. writing ; 



Exercise 10-3. 

Eli-re, 4. ir. to elect; 
Expos-er, 1. to expose; 
Intoret, m. interest; 
10* 



Plutot, ra' 

Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; 
Roti, m. roast meat ; 



2 k 26 LESSON LXXXIV. 

Secretaire, rn. sea etary ; Se trouv-er, 1. ref. to find Veiller, 1. to watch,; 
Trouv-er, 1. to find, to one's self; to be pres-Vie, f. life, 
like, to fancy; ent. 

1. Remplissez-vous bien votre devoir ? 2. Nous ne le remplissona 
pi Tun ni l'autre. 3. Cherchent-ils Fun et l'autre a s'exposer ? 4. Ni 
Fun ni Fautre ne cherchent a exposer leur vie (La Bruyere). 5. M. 
r/otre pere et M me - votre mere, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourd'hui ? 6. 
Ni Fun ni Fautre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve a re- 
dire a mon ecriture ou a celle de mon secretaire? 8. Je n'ai trcure 
a redire ni a Fune ni a Fautre. 9. Cet auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a 
redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a tous les livres. 11. Y 
trouvez-vous quelque chose a redire ? 12. Ni lui ni moi n'y trouvons 
rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillerons a vos interets. 14. 
Ni lui ni moi ne cesserons de veiller a la conduite de votre fils. 15. 
Nous y veillerons plutot que d'y trouver a redire. 16. Lui et moi 
nous trouvames ensemble au rendezvous. 17. Vous y trouverez 
vous Fun ou Fautre ? 18. Nous nous y trouverons Fun ou Fautre. 
19. L'un ou Fautre sera-t-il elu president? 20. Ni Fun ni Fautre 
ne sera elu. 21. Comment trouvez-vous ce roti? 22. Je le trouve 
excellent. 23. Je trouve ce livre bon. 24. Je ne le trouve pas bon 
25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 

Exercise 166. 

1. How do you like that book? 2. Neither my sister nor I like 
it. 3. Did your brothers find the dinner good ? 4. Both found it 
very good. 5. Did the professor find fault with your conduct ? 6. 
He did not find fault with it. 7. Neither he nor my father find 
fault with my conduct. 8. Do they both watch over your conduct ? 
9. They both watch over my conduct and over my interests. 10. 
Have you both fulfilled your duty? 11. We have fulfilled it. 12. 
Have you not both criticised my writing? 13. Neither has criticised 
it. 14. Do not your two sisters find themselves better to-day ? 15. 
One finds herself better. 16. The other does not find herself so 
well. 17.- Do not those ladies find fault with every thing ? 18. They 
find fault with nothing. 19. Will either be elected prefect of the 
Department? 20. Neither will be elected. 21. How do you like 
this bread? 22. I find it very good. 23. Did your two friends ar- 
rive in time at the appointed place ? 24. Neither was there in 
time. 25. Do you find fault with that (cr]j) ? 26. I do not find 
fault with it (y). 27. Will you both expose yourselves to this dan- 
ger? 28. We will not expose ourselves to it. 29. Do you find fault 
with my secretary's conduct? 30. I do not find fault with it 31. 



LESSON LXXXV. 



Do yon fini fault with his writing? 32. I find fault with it; for it 
is very bad. 33. Will you not watch over my interests 1 34. Mv 
brother and I will watch over them. 35. We will not cease to watch 
over vour interests. 



LESSON LXXXY. LEQON LXXXV. 

1. A verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] 
p-eceded by the article, agrees with the noun [j 115, (1.)] : — 

La foule des pauvres est grande. The crowd of the poor is great 

2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [§ 3, (6.)] takes the 
number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be par- 
ticularly directed to the collective itself [} 115, (2.)] : — 

Une foule de pauvres re9oivent A crowd of poor people receive assist- 
des secours. ance. 

3. The words, la plupart, most ; un nombre, a number, &c, and 
the adverbs of quantity, peu, assez, beaucoup, plus, moins, trop, tant, 
combien, belong to this class. 

4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to have left. 

The adverbial expression de reste is often used in the same manner 

as the English word left : — 

II me reste deux francs. I have two francs left — or literally 

There remains to me two francs. 
Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 

5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with etre as an auxiliary, corresponds 

in signification to the English to become, followed by of. It is also 

Englished by to become, or simply to tarn : — 

:iu votre frere 1 What has become of your brother ? 

II est en France, ct est devenu He is in France, and has turned la&- 
avocat. ycr. 

R&8i me of Examples. 

Most of my hours are devoted to labor. 



La plupart de mes heures sont 

consacrees au travail. 
La foule des humains est vouee au 

malheur. 
La plufl grande partie des voyageurs 

le disent, et ie rep&tent. 
t-il que celal 
Voila tout ce qu'il me re- 
Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. 

Je no sais ce que vous deviendrez. 



The mass of mankind is devoted to 

misfortune. 
The greatest number of travellers 

say it, and repeat it. 
Have you only that left ? 
That is all that I have left. 
I do not know what has become o) 

them. 
I do not know what will become of you 



228 LESSON LXXXY. 



Exercise 167. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref. to Chemin, m. ivay, road ; Habile, sJcilfvZ; 

apply ; Besol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; 

Appreiiti, m. apprentice ; Egar-er, 1. to mislay; Naissance, f. birth; 
Aveugle, blind ; Emplettes, f. p. purcha- Rue, f. street ; 

Bagatelle, f. trifle ; ^ ses ; Savant, e, learned. 

Boiteux, se, lame ; Etat, m. trade ; 

1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir? 2. 
Beau^ftwip sont venus. 3. Que sont devenus lesautres? 4. Je n« 
saurmWvous dire ee qu'ils sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ce jeune 
liomme s'il ne s'applique pas a l'etude ? 6. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il 
deviendra. 7. Je sais qu'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Combien 
de francs avez-vous de reste? 9. II ne me reste qu'un franc. 10. 
Combien vous restera-t-il quand vous aurez fait vos emplettes? 11. 
Jl ne me restera qu'une bagatelle. 12. Cet apprenti est-ii devenu 
habile dans son etat? 13. II y est devenu habile. 14. Ce monsieur 
est-il aveugle de naissance, ou Test-il devenu? 15. II Test devenu. 
16. Savez-vous ce que sont devenus ces jeunes gens? 17. lis sont 
devenus medecins. 18. Ne savez-vous pas ce que sont devenus mes 
livres? 19. lis sont egares. 20. Ne deviendrez-vous pas boiteux si 
vous marchez tant? 21. Je deviendrai boiteux et maigre. 22. La 
foule ne s'est-elle pas egaree dans ce bois? 23. La foule s'y est 
egaree, et n'a pu retrouver son chemin. 24. Une nuee de barbares 
desolerent le pays. (Acad.) 25. Une foule de citoyens mines, 
remplissaient les rues de Stockholm. (Voltaire.) 

Exercise 168. 

1. Have not most of your friends become rich ? 2. Most of them 
have become poor. 3. Has not that young lady become learned ? 
4. I think that she will never become learned. 5. Is not the Ameri- 
can army (armee) very small? 6. The American army is small, but 
most of the American soldiers are very brave (braves). 7. Can you 
tell me what has become of that gentleman ? 8. I cannot tell you 
what has become of him. 9. Is your brother blind by birth (wag 
your brother born blind)? 10. No, Sir, he has become so. 11. 
Were you born lame? 12. No, Sir, I became so three years ago (?1 
y a). 13. Are not most of your hours devoted to play (jeu. m.) 1 
14. No, Sir, they are devoted to study. 15. How much of vonr 
money have you left? 16. I have only twenty- five francs left. 17. 
Do you know how much I have left? 18. You have only a trifle 
left. 19. How much shall you have left to-morrow? 20. I abali 
only have six francs left. 21.1 shall only have two francs left when 



LESSON LXXXVI. 



S29 



I have made my purchases. 22. What has become of your gram- 
mar ? 23. I have mislaid it. 24. Do you know what has become 
of my hat ? 25. You have left (laisse) it upon the table. 26. Will 
not that gentleman become blind? 27. He will not become blind, 
but lade. 28. Has your son become skilful in his trade 1 29. He 
has not become skilful nj it. 30. What has become of him ? 31. 
He has lost his way in the wood. 32. Did the crowd lose its way ? 
53. Most of the soldiers lost their way. 34. A cloud of locusts 
(saiUerelles) desolated our country. 



LESSON LXXXVI. 



LECOJST LXXXVI. 



1. The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjectives, 
must be repeated, as before said, before every noun or adjective used 
substantively, which they determine [§ 80, 93, 21]. 

2. The prepositions a, de, and en, are repeated before every word 
which they govern [$ 141]. 

3. The verb quitter, to leave (to quit), is said of persons and 
places, and also of things in the sense of to abandon, to give up : — 

Vons avez quitte vos parents et vos You have left your relations ana 

amis. friends. 

Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 

4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how 
ever said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain: — 

Vous avez laisse votre livre sur la You left your book upon tJie table. 
table. 

The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. 
Resum£ of Examples. 

Have you not left your house ? 



N'avez vous pas quitte] votre mai- 
sonl 

J'ai quitte mon pays et mes parents. 

J'ai laisse ma biblotheque en Eu- 
rope. 

He voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils 
ici 1 

ht n'aime pas a le quitter. 

J'ai laisse votre lettre a son domes- ! / left your letter with his servant 
tique. 

Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille 
francs. 

Les avez- vous laisses tranquilles 1 



I have left my country and j iMion 
I left my library in Europe. 

Will you not leave your son here? 

I do vol, J He to quit him. 



My father left me fifty thoiuan* 

francs. 
Havt you let tliem alone ? 



230 



LESSON" LXXXVI. 



Je leur a> laLsse le champ libre. 

Ge malade a quitfci le lit. 
Votre frere a quitte le barreau. 
Je vous laisserai ce chapeau a ce 
prix. 



/ have left them a free choice (fret 

room). 
That sick ma,n has left his bed. 
Your brot/ier has left tlie bar. 
I will let you hare that hat at thai 

prise. 



Exercise 169. 

A bon compte, cheap ; Mauvais, e, bad ; 

Carte, f. card; Moins, less; 

Epee, f. sword, army (fig- Noyau, m. fruit-stone; 

uratively). Pourquoi, why; 

Habitude, f. habit; Pa vie, m. ciingstone- 

Juge, m. judge; peach; 



Pension, f. boarding* 

school ; 
Portier, m. porter ; 
Prix, m. price; 
Robe, f. gown ; 
Service, m. service, army. 



1. Vos oncles, vos cousins et vos neveux, ont-ils quitte le com- 
merce ? 2. lis ont quitte le commerce, et sont devenus medecins. 
3. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-il pas quitte le service ? 4. II a quitte la France, 
mais il n'a pas quitte le service. 5. Ou avez-vous laisse votre fils? 
6. Je l'ai laisse dans une pension. 7. Est-il trop jeune pour quitter 
ses etudes ? 8. II est trop jeune ; il n'a que douze, ans. 9. A qui avez- 
vous laisse votre carte de visite? 10. Je l'ai laissee chez le portier. 

11. Pourquoi ne le laissez-vous pas parler? 12. Parce qu'il est temps 
que nous vous quittions. 13. Me permettez-vous de lui communiquer 
cela? 14. Je vous laisse le champ libre a cet egard. 15. Ce jeune 
homme n'a-t-il pas quitte ses mauvaises habitudes? 16. II les a 
quittees. 17. M. L. n'a-t-il pas quitte la robe pour Tepee? 18. Oui 
Monsieur; il n'est plus juge; il est capitaine. 19. Ces peches quit, 
tent-elles facilement le noyau? 20. Non, Monsieur; cc sont des pa- 
vies. 21. Je vous laisse cet habit pour cinquante francs. 22. A 
quel prix me le laisserez-vous ? 23. Je vous le laisserai pour dix francs. 
24. Je vous le laisse a. bon compte; je ne saurais vous le laisser a 
moins. 

Exercise lYO. 

1. The son, daughter, and cousin, have left Paris. 2. My father, 
mother, and sister, have left me here. 3. Do you like to leave your 
country ? 4. I do not like to leave my friends and country. 5. My 
parents do not like to leave me here; I am too young. 6. Why 
does not your brother let his son speak [L. 97. 4.] ? 7. Because he 
has nothing to say. 8. Have you let him alone? 9. I have let him 
alone. 10. Why do you not let me alone? 11. I will let them alone. 

12. Has your friend left his bed? 13. He has not yet left his bed 
he is yet very sick. 14. Has Captain G. left the army? 15. He has not 
left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the bar? 
17. He las nat left the army. 18. My friend has left the bar. 19. At 



LESSON LXXXVH. 231 

nhat price will you let me have this silk ? 20. I will let you have it at 
two francs a yard. 21. Can you not let me have it for less? 22. I let 
you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for twenty 
francs. 24. I will let you have it for twenty-two. 25. I could not let 
you have it for less. 26. With whom (d qui) have you left my book] 
27. I left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not leave it w th my 
servant ? 29. Because he had left your house. 30. Do you like to 
leave your friends ? 31. I do not like to leave them. 32. Where 
have you left your book I 33. I left it at my father's. 34. Has that 
merchant given up commerce ? 35. He has not given it up. 36. Those 
peaches do not part easily from the stone ; they are clingstone peaches. 



LESSON LXXXVH. LEgON LXXXVH. 

1. The nominative pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, 

must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative 

and the second affirmative, when the verbs are in different tenses, 

and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions 

other than et, ou ni, mais [§ 99. 2.] : — 

II ne lit pas; il ecrit. He does not read; he writes. 

Elle ne viendra pas ; elle est partie. She will /not come ; she is gone. 

2. The pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the 
second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other 
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should, 
however, not advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is 
always correct to repeat the nominative pronouns. 

3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must 
always be repe; 

4. Connaitre & answers to the English expression, to know by: — 
Jele connais a sa demarche. I know him by his walk (carriage). 

5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean, to know by name, by 
sigh 4 . 

6. Se connaitre a quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds 
in signification to the English expression; to be a judge of something. 
Vous vous connaissez en pierreries. You are a judge of precious stoner.. 

Resume of Examples. 



J»; le connais. je l'aime, et je lui 
rends justice. Grk 

U s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 



I W him, love him, and do justice 
to him. 

II listens to himself i is pleased 

himself adorns himstlf. lows him- 
self. 



232 



LESSON LXXXVIT. 



A quoi connaissez-vous ce mon- 
sieur 1 
Je le connais a son habit noir. 
Je le connais de vue. 
J'ai reconnu ma mere a la voix. 
A quoi vous connaissez-vous 7 
Je me connais en marchandises. 
Je ne m'y connais pas. 
II ne s'y connait point du tout. 

II s'y connait mieux que moi. 

Jo m'y connais aussi bien que lui. 



By what do you know that gcnU* 

man? 
I know him by his black coat. 
I know him by sight. 
I recognized my mother by iter voice, 
Of what are yon a judge ? 
I am a judge of goods. 
I am not a judge of it {of tJtem), 
He is not the least judge of U {of 

them). 
He is a better judge of tt {of them) } 

than I. 
I am as good a judge of it {of them) 

as he. 



Artisan, m. mechanic ; 
Blond, e, light ; 
Boucle, e, curled; ■ 
Chevelure, f. head 

hair ; 
Cheveux, m. p. hair ; 



Exercise 171. 

Etoffes, cloths of all kinds; Grain, m. gram; 
Fabricant, m. manufac- Orfevre, m. goldsmitn , 
Purer; Oeuvre, f. work; 

of "Forgeron, m. blacksmith ; Poesie, f. poetry ; 
Gestes, m. p. gestures ; Tout, quite. 
Gracieux, se, graceful ; 



1. Ne reconnaissez-vous point votre aniie? 2. Je la reconnais a 
sa chevelure blonde. 3. A quoi reconnaissez-vous cette demoiselle ? 
4. Je la reconnais a sa demarche gracieuse. 5. N'auriez-vous point 
connu votre ami a la voix ? 6. Je l'y aurais reconnu. 7. A Foeuvre 
on connait Partisan (La Fontaine). 8. Ne le reconnaitrez-vous point 
a ces marques? 9. Je l'y reconnaitrai. 10. Cet orfevre ne se con- 
nait-il point a cela? 11. II ne s'y connait point du tout. 12. Vous 
y connaissez-vous aussi bien que le forgeron? 13. Je m'y connais 
tout aussi bien que lui. 14. Ne vous connaissez-vous point en 
poesie? 15. Je ne m'y connais guere. 16. Le fabricant se connait- 
il aussi bien en etoffes qu'en grain? 17. II se connait beaucoup 
mieux a ceLes-la qu'a celui-ci. 18. Ne connaissez-vous pas ce mon- 
sieur a ses gestes vehements? 19. Je le connais a ses cheveux 
boucles. 20. Ne vous etes-vous pas fait connaitre {told your name) ? 
21. Je me suis fait connaitre. 22. Ne nous ferons-nous pas con- 
naitre ? 23. Vous vous ferez connaitre. 24. lis se feront connaitre 
par leurs vertus {they will make themselves known). 



Exercise 172. 

1. Do you not know that man? 2. Yes, Sir; I know him bv his 
large {grand) hat. 3. By what do you recognize me? 4. I recog- 
nize you by your walk. 5. Do you recognize my friend by his ges- 
tures ? 6. No, Sir; I recognize him by his black coat. 7. Do you 
know him well ? 8. I know him by sight, but I have never spoken 



LESSON LXXXVI1I. 233 

to him. 9. Are you a judge of iron? 10 No, Sir; the blacksmith 
is a judge of iron. 11. By what will you ^now your book? 12. 1 
shall know it by those marks. 13. Have you not known your friend 
by her voice ? 14. No, Madam ; I knew her by her light hair. 15. 
Have you told your name? 16. I have not told my name. 17. Did 
you know your sister's friend by her curled hair? 18. I knew her 
by it. 19. Is the merchant a good judge of cloth? 20. He is a bet 
ter judge than I. 21. Is he a better judge of it than the manufac 
tu er? 22. He is quite as good a judge as he. 23. Is not the gold- 
smith as good a judge of precious stones as you? 24. He is a better 
judge of them than I. 25. Of what are you a judge? 26. I am a 
judge of nothing. 27. Are not your sisters good judges of poetry ? 
28. They are not the least judges of it. 29. Do you not know that 
young _ady by her dress (robe) ? 30. I know her by her graceful 
carriage. 31. Have they made themselves known? 32. They have 
made themselves known by their merit (merite). 33. Is not the 
workman known by his work ? 34. The workman is known by his 
work 35. He is a judge of it. 



LESSOX LXXXVHI. LEQOX LXXXVIH. 

1. Quelque, whatsoever, however, some, any, followed by a noun 
ta^es the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed 
by an adjective or an adverb [$ 97, (1.) 2. 3.] : — 

Quelques livres que vous ayez. Wliatcvcr books you may have. 
Quelque bona qu'ils sok'iit. However good tkaj may be. 

2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written as two words, the first 
(quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that 
verb [J 97, (1.) 1.]:- 

Quelles que soient vos vertus. \V7iattucr your virtues may be. 

3. The above examples show that quelque — que and quel — que 
govern the subjunctive. 

4. Tout meaning entirely, quite, nothing but, though an adverb, 
Varies through euphony before a feminine word commencing with a 
consonant or an h aspirate : 

L'esperaw", Untie trompeuse qu'elle Hope, deceit fid as it is, mrvet at least 

est. Bert au moins a nous racner a //> [ (<> (he tcrmniaium of 

la fin do la vie par un chemin life by an agreeable road. 
agreabie. (La Bruyere.) 



234 



LESSON LXXXVIII. 



5. The word gre signifying consent, will, meaning, c^c. forms « 

number of idioms : — 

Je lui sais [savoir, 3. ir.] bon gre de 

cette action. 
II nous sait mauvais gre de cela. 



/ am thankful to Kim (i. e. owe him 

gcod-vnll) for that action. 
He is displeased with us for that. 



Kesume of Examples. 



Ne le ferez-vous pas de bon gre ! 
II s'est marie contre le gre de ses 

parents. 
Sa ch^velure voltige au gre de vent. 

Je sais mauvais gre a votre frere de 

vouloir se meler de mes affaires. 
Je lui en sais bon gre. 
J'espere que vous ne me saurez pas 

mauvais gre, si je ne vous ecris 

pas. 
C'est a mon gre le meilleur enfant 

du monde. 



Will you not do it wittingly? 

He married against the will of lis 

parents. 
His hair flutters at the will of the 

wind. 
I am displeased with your brother for 

wishing to interfere with my affairs. 
I am thankful to him for it. 
I Jwpe that you will not be displeased 

with me, if I do not write to you. 

He is, to my thinking, the best chila 
in the world. 



Exercise 173. 

Bon gre, mal gre, willing Men-er, 1. to take, to lead; Secret, m. secret ; 

or not willing; Nou-er, 1. to tie, to fasten; Silence, m. silence ; 

Cbambre, f. room; Oblig-er, 1. to oblige; Suite, f. consequence; 

Gard-er, 1. to keep; Offre, f. offer ; Voler, 1. to fly. 

Lit, m. bed ; Becommand-er, 1. to re- 

Malgre, in spite of; commend ; 

1. Savez-vous mauvais gre a votre oncle de ce qu'il a dit ? 2. Je 
ne lui en sais aucun mauvais gre (Voltaire). 3. Ne me sauriez- 
vous pas bon gre si je vous menais avec moi ? 4. Je vous en saurais 
le meilleur gre du monde. 5. Ne leur savez-vous pas bon gre d'avoir 
garde ce secret ? 6. Je leur sais bon gre de l'avoir garde. 7. Ne 
leur avez-vous pas recommande de garder le silence ? 8. Je leur ai 
jecommande de le garder. 9. Ce malade garde-t-il encore le lit? 
10. II ne garde plus le lit, mais il est encore oblige de garder la 
chambre. 11. Votre chevelure est-elle bien nouee? 12. Non, Mon- 
sieur, elle vole au gre du vent. 13. Garderez-vous votre domestique * 
14. Je le garderai,il fait tout a mon gre. 15. Quelques offresqu'on 
lui fosse, il ne veut pas me quitter? 16. Quclque bonnes que soient 
ces dames, elles ne sont pas a mon gre. 17. Quelles que soient les 
suites dc cette affaire, je vous sais bon gre de vos intentions 1 
18. Toute belle qu'elle est, elle n'est pas a mon giv. 19. L'avez-vous 
fait malgre vous? 20. Non, Monsieur; je l'ai fait de bon gro. 
21. Bon gre mal gre, il partira. 22. Me garderez vous le secret! 
23. Je vous le garderai. 24. II change d'opinion au gre dcs evene- 
ments. 



lesson lxxxix. 235 

Exercise 174. 
1. Wil? le marry against his father's consent? 2. He wil ? not 
marry agu'nst hip. parents' consent. 3. Why are you displeased uritli 
me * 4. J am not displeased with you. 5. Is your little girl's hair 
tied ? 6. It is r^t tied ; it waves (flolte) with the wind. 7. What 
do vou think of my book ? 8. It is, in my opinion, the best book 
that I have s&A [L. 74. 3, 4]. 9. Will you not be displeased with 
me, if I do not f'.ome to-day? 10. I shall not be displeased with you. 
11. Will you rot read that letter? 12. However well written it may 
be, I will not 7 r.ud it. 13. Are those ladies handsome ? 14. However 
handsome and good they may be, they do not strike my fancy. 
15. Are you displeased with my brother? 16. No, Sir, I am thank- 
ful to him for his intentions, whatever may be the consequences of 
his conduct. 17. Will you keep this secret (for me)? 18. I will 
keep it willingly. 19. Does your sister keep her bed willingly? 
20. She does not keep her room willingly. 21. Willingly or not, 
she must keep her room, when she is sick. 22. Will you keep silent 
on this point ? 23. I will willingly. 24. I am thankful to you for 
your good intentions. 25. Are you thankful to him for this (de 
cela) ? 26. I am thankful to him for it. 27. Will the judge keep his 
servant ? 28. He will keep him. 29. Does he do his work to his 
fancy? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is your brother obliged to 
keep in the house ? 32. He is obliged to keep his bed. 33. Has he 
not left his room? 34. He has not yet left his room ; he is too sick 
to leave it, 35. I should be under the greatest obligations in the 
world to you, if you would do this. 



LESSON LXXXIX. LEgON LXXXIX. 

1. Servir [2. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the English 

expression to help to: — 

Que vous servirai-jo 1 To what sliall I help you ? 

Vous servirai-je de la soupe 1 Sh/dl I help ijou to some smip ? 

Vous n'avez pas servi monsieur. You have not Jiclped that gentleman. 

2. Je vous remercie, / thank you, said in answer to an offer, is i:i 
French always a refusal. This phrase is never employed like the 
English expression, I thank you for {this or thai), to signify a request. 
The French make use of other forms: — Oseai-je vous prier de . . . 
Oserai-je vous demander . . . Je vous prie de , . . Je vous prierai 
de . . . :— 



286 



LESSON LXXXIX. 



Oserai je vous demander une aile 
de cette volaille, un morceau de 
oe roti 1 



I will thank you for a wing of thai 
fowl, a slice of that roast meat. 



3. S'il vous plait, corresponds to the English, if you please. The 

verb is used unipersonally in that sentence and in the following : — 

Oomme il vous plaira. .As you please. 

II ne me plait pas d'y aller. It does not suit or please me to go there. 

Que vous plait-il 1 What would you pt&asa to have ? 

4. Au plaisir de vous revoir, au re voir, adieu, jusqu'au revoir, mean 
till I have the pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 
Qu'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir 1 



Je vous demanderai un morceau de 

ce jamb on. 
Vous offrirai-je un morceau de ce 

roti'? 
Je vous remercie, Monsieur; je 

prendrai de preference une aile 

de cette volaille. 
N'a-t-on pas encore servi 1 
Je vous souhaite le bon soir. 
J'ai souhaite le bonjour a Madame. 

Ayez la complaisance de vous as- 

seoir. 
Messieurs, ayez la complaisance 

d'entrer. 



To what shall I have the pleasure of 

helping you ? 
I will thank you or / will trouble you 

for a slice of that ham. 
Shall I offer you a slice of this roast 

meat? 
I thank you, Sir ; I would prefer a 

wing of that fowl. 

Is not the dinner yet on the table ? 
I wish you good evening. 
1 have wished the lady a good morn- 
ing. 
Have the goodness to sit down. 

Gentlemen, have the kindness to walk 



Exercise 175. 

Adieu, m. adieu; Graces, f. p. thanks; Pri-er, to beg, to desire; 

Aile, f. wing ; Jambon, m. ham ; Reraerciment, m. thanks; 

Attend-re, 4. to wait for ; Legume, m. vegetable ; Roti, m. roast meat ; 

Bouilli, m. boiled meat, Mett-re, (se) ir. ref. 4. to Soupe, f. soup ; 

beef; sit down; Suffisamment, adv. s?//- 

Conge, m. leave; Ortolan, m. ortolan; ficiently ; 

Cotelette, f. cutlet ; Perdrix, f. partridge ; Tranche, f. slice. 

1. Monsieur, qu'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir? 2. Je vous de- 
manderai une tranche de ce jambon. 3. Je vous prie de servir ces 
messieurs. 4. Oserai-je vous demander un morceau de ce bouilli 1 
5. Vous offrirai-je une tranche de ce r6ti ? 6. Je vous rends crrace, 
Monsieur; j'en ai suffisamment. 7. Mademoiselle, aurai-ji- t'hon* 
neur de vous servir une aile de cette perdrix? 8. Je vous rcmeroie, 
Monsieur ; je prendrai de preference un de ces ortolans. 9. Monsieur, 
vous enverrai-je de la soupe? 10. Madame, je vous prie de servir 
mademoiselle. 11. Je vous en demanderai apres. 12. Jean, pre« 
ttentez cette cotelette a Monsieur. 13. Ces legumes sont d41icieux. 



LESSON xc. 237 

14. Monsieur, je suis bien aise que vous les trouviez bons. 15. Mon- 
sieur, ne voulez-vous pas vous asseoir? 16. Mille remerciments, 
Monsieur, mon pere m'attend a la maison. 17. Ne leur avez-vous pas 
souhaite le bonjour? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon soir. 19. Leur 
avez-vous dit adieu ? 20. J'ai dit adieu a. mon frere. 21. J'ai pris 
conge d'eux. 22. Les avez-vous pries d'entrer ? 23. J e les en ai 
pries. 24. Messieurs, on a servi. 25. Ayez la complaisance de 
vous mettre ici. 

Exercise 176. 

1. Madam, to what shall I help you? 2. I will trouble you for a 
slice of that ham. 3. Shall I send you a wing of this fowl ? 4. No, 
Sir, I thank you. 5. I thank you, Sir (s'z'Z vous plait, Monsieur). 

6. Sir, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ? 

7. I thank you, Sir, I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall 
I offer you a little of this boiled meat ? 9. I thank you, Sir ; I have 
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soup? 11. Much 
obliged to you, Sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will 
you have the goodness to help this young lady? 13. With much 
pleasure, Sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These 
ortolans are delicious. 16. I am very glad that you like them. 17 
Is the dinner on the table ? 18. No, Sir; it is not yet on the table. 
19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does 
not please me to go to his house ; but I will go, if you wish it. 22. 
Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend 
sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day. 
26. Have you wished your friend a good morning ? 27. I wished 
him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. 1 
have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 
31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my 
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are 
Diuch obliged to you, Sir. 35. Our lather is waiting for us at home. 



LESSON XC. LEgON XC. 

1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to Iwld, often corresponds in signification 
to the English verb to keep ; tenir un hotel, iokeep a hotel; tenir table 
ouverte, tokeepopcu table ; tenir sa chambre propre, &c\, to keep oi\£$ 
room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the 
windows open ; ten ; r les yeux ouverts, fermes, to keep one's eyes opened, 



238 



LESSON XC. 



shut ; tenir la tete droite, &c, to keep one's head upright ; tenir sa 
parole, to keep one's word ; tenir compagnie a quclqu'un, to stay 01 
remain with some or any one, 

2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propcs . . ., des discours . . ., 
would be rendered in English by to make use of singular language, 
to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, &e. 

Ce jeune homme tient des propos That young man says foolish things. 

insenses. 

3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to be tena- 
cious of: — 

Je tiens a mon argent, a la vie. / value (i. e. hold to) my money, mi 

life. 
Je tiens a mon opinion. / am tenacious of my opinion. 

4. Tenir is also used of a color which is fast or not: — 

Cette couleur tiendra ou ne tiendra This color is fast (i. e. holds) or not. 
pas. 

5. Faire tenir is used in the sense of to forward, to send: — 

Faites-lui tenir cet argent, cette Forward him this money, this letter. 
lettre. 

6. Se tenir, or s'en tenir, conjugated reflectively, may often be 
rendered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with : — 

II se tient debout, assis. He remains standing, seated. 

Je m'en tiens a votre opinion. J am satisfied with your opinion. 

Resume of Examples. 



M. L. tient un hotel superbe. 
Votre petite fille ne tient pas sa 

chambre bien propre. 
Pourquoi tenez-vous les portes ou- 

vertes 1 
II fait si chaud que nous tenons 

toutes les fenetres ouvertes. 
Tenez la tete droite et les yeux 

ouverts. 
Pourquoi ne tenez-vous pas votre 

parole 1 
Tenez compagnie a votre soeur; 

elle est malade. 
Votre ami tient des propos bien 

singuliers. 
Vous tenez des discours bien legers. 
La couleur de votre drap tiendra- 

t-elle? 
Lui avez-vous fait tenir ce livre 1 
A quoi vous en tiendrcz-vous 1 
Je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'ai dit. 
Pourquoi se tient-il toujours de- 
bout 1 



Mr. L. keeps a superb hotel. 

Your little girl does not keep her room 

very clean. 
Why do you keep the doors open ? 

It is so warm that we keep all the win- 

doivs open. 
Keep your head upright and your 

eyes open. 
Why do you not keep your word 7 

Stay with your sister ; she is sick. 

Your friend makes use of very singu- 
lar expressions. 
You use very light language. 
Is the color of your cloth fast? 

Have you scut him that book? 
What will be your decision? 
I shall abide \ij what I have said. 
Why iocs hi always remax n star** 
ing? 



LESSON XC. 



239 



L'incredule s'en tiendra-t-il au pre- 
sent, qui doit finir demain 1 

Massillon. 



Will the unbeliever be satisfied vcilk 
the present, wkU-h is to end to-Tnor* 

row ? 



Exercise 177. 

Cocher. m. coachman ; Gens. pi. people; Recommand-er, 1 fa 

Debout standing; Indispose, e, indisposed; recommend; 

Defend-re, 4. to forbid; Insolent, e, insolent; Regard-er, 1. to look; 

De pres, closely ; Lieu, place ; Rue, street ; 

En dehors, out, outside; Malade, sick ; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to Unowi 

S'enrhumer, 1. ref. to get Parfaitenient, perfectly ; Vie, life. 

a cold; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer ; 

1. Quel hotel votre frere tient-il? 2. II tient l'hotel de 1'Europe, 
rue de . . . 3. Votre petit garcon se tient-il bien propre ? 4. II se tient 
bien propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je m'en tiendrai 
a ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a quoi #ous en tenir? 
8. Je sais parfaitement a quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi vous tenez- 
vous debout? 10. Parceque nous n'avons pas le temps de nous 
asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de tenir 
de tels propos ? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Votre cocher n'a-t-il 
pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas peur de vous 
enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes? 15. Nous prefererions les 
tenir fermees. 16. Votre maitre vous recommande-t-il de tenir la 
tMedroite? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds en dehors. 18. 
Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie? 19. Sa sceur est 
indisposee; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre oncle ne 
vous a-t-il pas tenu lieu de pere? 21. II m'a tenu lieu de pere et de 
mere. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus pres a cette affaire? 23. Non, 
Monsieur; je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce medecin ne 
tient-il pas a son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne tient a la vie 
de ses malades. 

Exercise 178. 

1. Does that gentleman keep open table? 2. He keeps a hotel in 
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open? 4. We keep them 
open because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his 
word. 6. He has kept his word; he always keeps his word. 7. Have 
ot told your scholar to keep his head upright? 8. I have toll 
bim to keep his head upright and his eyes open. 9. Why do you 
not Btay with your sister? 10. Because I have promised to go to my 
cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy to 
make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 13. Does 
he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not. 15. What sviU 
be your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told your father. 17 



240 LESSON XCI. 

Have you forwarded that money to your friend? 18. I have not yet 
forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to him to-morrow? 
20. I will forward it to him, if I have an opportunity. 21. Why do 
you not keep standing? 22. Because I am weary. 23. Do you think 
that the color of your coat is fast? 24. I think that it is fast; it (elle) 
appears very good. 25. Will you not look closely into your brother's 
affairs? 26. I shall not look closely into them. 27. I will be satisfied 
with your opinion. 28. Are you not tenacious of your opinion? 
29. I am not too tenacious of it. 30. Does not your physician ad- 
here too tenaciously to his opinion? 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does 
that lady hold your mother's place ? 33. She is a mother to me. 34. 
Our cousin is a father to us. 35. That physician does not value the 
life of his patient. 



LESSON XCI. LEgON XCI. 

1. The verb etre forms a great many idioms besides those which 
we have already mentioned : etre en retard, to be late, to tarry ; etre 
en etat, a meme de, to be able to ; etre en peine de, to be uneasy about; 
etre en vie, to be alive, to live ; etre en chemin pour, to be on the way 
to ; ^tre au fait, au courant de, to be familiar with; etre a la veille de, 
to be on the eve of; etre de trop, to be unnecessary, to be in the way ; 
£tre bien avec, to be on good terms with ; etre brouille avec, to be on 
bad terms with; etre aux prises avec, to be in open rupture, quarrel or 
battle with ; etre d'avis, to be of opinion, etc. 

2. Etre, as already said [L. 47. 5.], is used in the sense of appar- 
tenir, to belong. It is also employed in the sense of to behoove, to be- 
come. In the latter sense, it takes generally the preposition de before 
another verb : — 

Est-ce a vous de lui faire des re- Does it become you to cast {make) re 

proches ? proaches upon him ? 

C'est a vous d parler. It is your turn to speak. 

3. Y £tre is often used for to be at home, to be in : — 

Yotre pere y est-il 1 Is your father at home ? 

Resume of Examples. 



N> sommes-nous pas dc trop ici 1 
Nous ne sommes pas bien avec 

nos parents. 
N dus sommes au courant de tout 

cela. 



Are we not in the way here? 

We arc not an good terms with out re* 

lotions. 
We arc familiar with all that. 



LESSON XCI. 



241 



Je suis a mdme de satisfaire a sa 

demande. 
Nous sommes brouilles. 

Ma soeur est a la veille de se 

marier. 
Nous sommes d'avis que vous 

alliez lui faire des excuses. 
Ce n'est pas a lui de nous re- 

procher notre bonte. 
A qui est-ce a lire 1 
C'est a ma soeur a lire ce matin. 

Cette maison est a lui et a moi. 
Elle est a moi, elle est a lui. 
Ces souliers ne sont pas a nous, 
lis appartiennent a notre frere. 
lis lui appartiennent. 
Monsieur* n'y est pas. 
Madame y est. 



I am able to satisfy Av* demand. 

We ai e not on good terms / \oe are at 
variance. 

My sister is on the eve of her mar- 
riage. 

It is our opinion that you should go 
and apologize to him. 

It does not become him to reproach us 
with our kindness. 

Whose turn is it to read ? 

It is my sister's turn to read this 
morning. 

That house is his and mine. 

It is mine, it is his. 

These shoes arc not ours. 

They belong to our brother. 

Tliey belong to him. 

The gentleman is not at home 

The lady is in. 



Exercise 179. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy ; Gravure, f. engraving ; 
Arriv-er, 1. to arrive ; Hote, m. host; 
Correspondant, corres- Libraire, m. bookseller ; 

pondent; Mois, m. month; 

Craind-re, 4. ir. to fear; Montre, f. watch ; 
Dev-oir, 3. to owe, beoblig- Mort, p. p. from mourir, Veille, 

ed ; to die; fore. 

Embarqu-er, (s') 1. ref. 

to embark; 



Part-ir, 2. ir. to start, set 

out; 

Proprietaire, m. land- 
lord; 

Punir, 2. to punish ; 

f. eve, day be- 



1. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes brouilles? 2. II y a plus d'un 
mois que je suis brouille avec lui. 3. Votre ami est-il encore en vie? 
4. Non, Monsieur; il y a dix ans qu'il est mort. 5. Votre corres- 
pondant est-il en chemin pour Paris? 6. Je crois qu'il doit etre 
arrive. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il pas en retard? 8. Oui, Mon- 
sieur ; il ne vient jamais a temps. 9. Ces gravures sont-elles a vous 
ou a votre libraire? 10. Elles sont a moi; je viens de les acheter. 
11. Ne craignez-vous pas d'etre de trop ici ? 12. Nous somme3 trop 
bien avec notre hote pour craindre cela. 13. A qui est^ce a aller 
chercher les livres? 14. C'est a moi a les aller chercher. 15. Est-ce 
a vous de le punir, quand il le merite? 16. C'est a moi de le punir, 
car je lui tiens lieu de pere. 17. Ces maisons n'appartiennent-elles 
pas a notre proprietaire? 18. Elles ne lui appartiennent pas. 19. 
Elles sont a notre correspondant. 20. A qui sont ces lettres ? 21. 
Elles ne sont point a moi, elles sont a ma cousine. 22. Cette montre 



* Monsieur, Madame, not followed by a name, are generally understood 
to mean the master and mistress of the house, the heads of the family 

11 



242 lesson xcir. 

est a lui. 23. N'etes-vous point a. la veille de partii pour Limdres' 
24. Nous sommes a la veille de nous embarquer pour Cadix. 25. 
II Y a longtemps, que nous sommes aux prises. 



Exercise 180. 

1. Are you able to pay him ? 2. I am not able to p&y him ; I have 
not received my money. 3. Are you on good terms with your book- 
seller ? 4. I am not on good terms with him. 5. I am on bad terms 
with him. 6. How long have you been on bad terms with him ? 7. 
It is more than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy my friend's 
demand? 9. I am able to satisfy it (d?y satisfaire). 10. Are you 
on your way to Naples? 11. No, Sir; I am on my way to Rome. 
12. Is not your physician on the eve of starting for Montpellier ? 13. 
He is on the eve of starting for Paris. 14. Am I in the way here? 
15. No, Sir; you are not in the way. 16. Whose turn is it to speak * 
17. It is my turn to speak and to read. 18. Is it my place (d moi) 
to make apologies to him? 19. It is your brother's place to apolo- 
gize to him. 20. Does it become you to punish that child? 21. It 
behooves me to punish him. 22. Do you hold the place of a father 
towards him ? 23. I hold the place of a father towards him. 24 
Is that coat yours ? 25. No, Sir ; it is not mine ; it is my brother's. 
26. Have you broken openly with him ? 27. We have been quar- 
relling two months. 28. Is not that large house yours ? 29. No, 
Sir; it is not mine; it is my sister's. 30. Does it become your 
brother to reproach him with his kindness ? 31. It does not become 
him to do it. 32. Whose turn is it to go and fetch the books? 33. 
It is my place to go and fetch them. 34. Is the gentleman in? 
35. No, Sir, the gentleman is not in ; but the lady (of the house) 
is in. 



LESSON XCE. LEgON xcn. 

1. Avancer, retarder, correspond to the English verbs to gain, to 
K>se, to put forward, to put back, in speaking of a watch or clock, &c. 
The preposition de is placed before the word expressing the vari 
ation : — 

Ma montre retarde d'une demi- My wrJch is half an hour too slow. 

heure. 

La mienne avance d'un quart Mine isaquarterofanlwurtoofast. 

d'heure. 

J'ai avancS cette horloge d'une I se that clock half *n hour fervor, u. 

demi-heure. 



LESSON XCII. 



243 



Retardez votre montre de cinq Put your watch five minutes back. 
minutes. 

2. Mettre [4. ir.] a l'heure, means to set right, to put right, to 

set : — 

Mettez cette montre a 1'henre. Set that watch right. 

3. S'accorder, to agree, is said also of clocks, watches, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 



Votre montre va-t-elle bien % 

Elle retarde d'une demi-heure par 

jour. 
Elle avance d'un quart d'heure par 

semaine. 
De combien avance-t-elle 1 
Je viens de mettre ma montre a 

l'heure. 
Si votre montre retarde, pourquoi 

ne l'avancez-vous pas 1 
Ma pendule avance j je viens de la 

retarder. 
Quelle heure est-il a votre montre 1 
Mon horloge sonne les heures et les 

demies. 
J'ai oublie de la monter (or remon- 

ter). 
Votre montre est derangee. 
II faudra lu faire nettoyer. 
La sonnerie en est derangee. 
Votre pendule et ma montre ne 

s'accordent pas. 
Les pendules a ressort vont mieux 

que les pendules a poids. 
L'horloge a sonne deux heures. 



Does your watch go well ? 
It loses half an hour a day. 

It gains a quarter of an how a week. 

How much has it gained ? 

I have just set my watch rig \t. 

If your watch loses, why do you not 

set it forward ? 
My clock gains ; I have just set U 

back. 
What o'clock is it by your watch. ? 
My clock strikes the hour and tfa. half 

hour. 
I have forgotten to wind it up. 

Your watch is out of order. 
It will be necessary to have it cleaned. 
The striking part is out of order. 
Your clock and my watch do not 

agree. 
Spring clocks go better than weight 

clocks. 
The clock has struck two. 



Exercise 181. 



Aiguille, f. hand; 
Arret-er, (s') 1. ref. to 

Stop ; 

Balancier, m. pendu- 
lum ; 
Boite, f. watch-case ; 
Cadran, in. face, dial; 
Cass-cr, 1. to break; 
Double, double; 



Droit, e, straight; 
Fele, e, cracked; 
Juste, right, correct; 
Matin, m. morning; 
Perfection, f. perfection 
Plat, e, flat, thin; 
Regl-er, 1. to regulate; 
Repetition, (montre a) Vite, quick, quickly 
f. repealer ; 



Ressort, (grand) m. 

main-spring ; 
Secondes, (montre a) 

watch with a second 

hand ; 
Timbre, m. bell of e» 

clock ; 



1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a repetition? 2. J'ai une montre 
d'or, a double boite. 3. Va-t>elle mieux que la mienne ? 4. Elle ne 
va pas bien, elle retarde d'une heure par jour. 5. Est^ce une montre 
a secondes? 6. C'est une montre a secondes et a cadran d'or. 7. 
Votre horloge ne sonie-t-elle pas ? 8. Elle up. sonne plus, le timbre 
en est casse. 9. Pourquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles pas' 



244 LESSON XCIf. 

10. Parcequo Tune avance etl'autre retarde. 11. N'avez vous point 
casse le grand ressort de votre montre ? 12. Je l'ai casse en la re- 
montant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste? 14. Oui, Monsieur 
•He est juste; je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonnerie de cette 
pendule est-elle derangee ? 16. La sonnerie en est derangee et Je 
timbre en est fele. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est 
cassee. 18. Le balancier de votre horloge n'est pas droit? 19. De 
combien votre pendule avance-t-elle ? 20. Elle avance de cinq mi- 
nutes par jour. 21. La perfection d'une pendule n'est pas d'aller vite, 
mais d'etre reglee (Delille). 22. Votre montre s'arrete-t-elle 
souvent? 23. Elle s'arr£te tous les matins. 24. Votre pendule 
s'est arretee. 

Exercise 182. 

1. Does your watch gain or lose ? 2. It does not lose ; it goes 
very well. 3. It loses twenty-five minutes a day. 4. Does your 
clock gain much ? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6. How much 
does your son's gold watch lose ? 7. It loses much ; it loses one 
hour in (en) twenty-four (heures). 8. I have put it forward one 
hour. 9. I will put it back half an hour. 10. Does not your clock 
strike the half hour? 11. No, Sir; it only strikes the hour. 12. 
Have you forgotten to wind up your repeater? 13. I have forgot- 
ten to wind it up, and it has stopped. 14. Is your silver watch out 
of order ? 15. It is out of order, and it will be necessary to have it 
cleaned. 16. What o'clock is it by your watch? 17. It is three 
o'clock by my watch ; but it gains. 18. How much does it gain a 
week ? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 20. Is your 
watch right? 21. No, Sir; it is not right; it is out of order. 22. 
Does your clock strike right? 23. It does not strike right; the 
striking part is out of order. 24. Have you broken the hands of 
your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. 
Has the clock struck three ? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It has 
stopped. 29. Does it stop every morning ? 30. It does not stop 
every morning; it stops every evening. 31. Your watch does not 
agree with mine. 32. Have you not broken the main-spring of your 
brother's watch ? 33. He has broken it in winding it up. 34. My 
brother's watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated. 



LESSON XCIIL 245 



LESSON XCHI. LEgON XCUL 

1. Se demettre [4. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to the 
English expression to dislocate one's arm, wrist, to put one's arm, wrist 
out of joint. In this sense se demettre takes no preposition before 
its object : — 

Je me suis demis l'epaule. J have dislocated my shoulder. 

2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes 
the preposition de before its object : — 

II s'est demis de sa place. He has resigned his place. 

3. S'emparer, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object :— 
II s'est empare de ce chapeau. He seized upon this hat. 

4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- 
fore another verb : — 

Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. J cannot help laughing. 

Je ne puis m'en empccher. / cannot help doing so. 

5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to be or become 
uneasy, to trouble one's self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- 
ject noun, pronoun or verb :— 

Je ne m'inquiete pas de cela. lam not uneasy about that. 

6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport 
one's self. 

7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes d before its ob- 
ject: — 

Je ne m'attendais pas a. cela. / did not expect that. 

Je ne m'y attendais pas. / did not expect it. 

Resume of Examples. 



Votis etes-vous demis l'epaule ? 

Je me la suis demise [L. 45. 2. 
$ 135]. 

Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- 
gnet. 

Qui le lui a remis 1 

Le Dr. L. a remis l'epaule a ma 
soeur. 

Vous etes-vous demis de votre 
place 1 

Je m'en suis demis [§ 135. 7]. 

Nous ne pouvions nous empccher 
de sourire pendant ce recit. 

Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre 1 

Je m'en suis empare. 

De quoi vous inquietez-vous 7 



Have you dislocated your shoulder ? 
I dislocated it. 

That young lady dislocated her wrist 

Wlw set it for her? 

Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. 

Have you resigned your situation 7 

I have resigned, it. 

We could not help smiling during 

tliat narration. 
Have you seized that book ? 
I laid hold of it. 
Why do you trouble yourself? 



246 LESSON XCIII. 



Je ne m'inqui&te de rien. 
Comment ce jeune homme se com- 

porte-t-il 1 
II se comporte cc mme il faut. 
Je ne m'attendais pas a une telle 

rcponse. 
Je ne m'y attendais nullement. 



I trouble myself about nothing. 
How does that young man behave ? 

He behaves properly. 

I did not expect such an answer. 



I did not expect it, by any means. 

Exercise 183. 

A Favenir, in future,- Gauche, left; Paysan, m. peasant; 

Bras, m. arm ; Mieux, better ; Prusse, f. Prussia : 

CasG-er, 1. to break; Monde (tout le), every Sejour, m. stay; 

Droit, e, right ; body ; Traitement, m. treat- 

Xmrant, during; Oblige, obliged; ment; 

Ecritoire, f. inkstand ; Pareil, le, similar ', such ; Ville, f. city. 

Ennemi, m. enemy ; Part, f. part ; 

1. Ne vous 6tiez-vous pas demis le bras? 2. Je ne me l'etais pai 
demis; je me l'etais casse. 3. Si vous alliez en Amerique, vous de- 
mettriez-vous de votre place ? 4. Je serais oblige de m'en demettre ? 

5. Y a-t-il longtemps que votre cousin s'est demis de la sienne 1 

6. II y a un mois qu'il s'en est demis. 7. L'ennemi s'est-il empare de 
la ville? 8. II s'en est empare. 9. Votre fils se comportera-t-i! 
mieux a l'avenir? 10. II s'est tres bien comporte durant son sejour 
en Prusse. 11. Vous attendiez-vous a un pareil traitement de sa 
part? 12. Je ne m'y attendais pas. 13. A quoi vous attendiez- 
vous? 14. Je m'attendais aetre traite comme il faut. 15. Pourquoi 
vous etes-vouo moque de lui? 16. Parceque je n'ai pu m'en empe- 
cher. 17. Si vous laissiez votre ecritoire ici, le paysan s'en empare- 
rait-il? 18. II s'en emparerait certainement. 19. Votre associe se 
comporte-t-il bien envers vous ? 20. II se comporte bien envers tout 
le monde. 21. Qui a remis le poignet a votre soeur? 22. Le Dr. 
G. le lui a remis. 23. M. votre pere ne s'est-il pas demis le bras 
droit ce matin ? 24. II ne se Test pas demis ; il se Test casse ce 
r/tetin a cinq heures. 

Exercise 184. 

1. Has not Dr. L. resigned his place? 2. He has not resigned it. 
5. He would resign it, if he went to Germany. 4. Are you obliged 
to resign your place ? 5. I am not obliged to resign it. 6. Has your 
cousin dislocated his arm ? 7. He has not dislocated his arm, but his 
shoulder. 8. Who set it for him? 9. Doctor F. set it for him. 
10. Has not your mother dislocated her wrist? 11. She has not 
dislocated her wrist; she has broken her arm. 12. Has the enemy 
seized the town? 13. The enemy has seized the town. 14. Wili 
not some one lay hold of your hut, if you leave it here ? 15. Some 



LESSON XCIV. 241 

one will lay hold of it. 16. How has your son behaved tLis morning? 
17. He behaved very well. 18. He always behaves properly. 
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inutilement) 1 20. I do 
not trouble myself at all (du tout). 21. Did you expect such treat- 
ment from (de la part de) your son ? 22. I did not expect such 
treatment from him (de sa part). 23. Does that young lady behave 
well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every 
body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave 
well. 27. Have you broken your finger (doigt) ? 28. I have broken 
my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) ? 
30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help 
laughing. 32. Why are you uneasy? 33. Because (parceque) my 
son does not behave well. 34. Did your father expect to be well 
treated ? 35. He expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not 
expect such an answer. 



LESSON XCIV. LEgON XCIV. 

1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il nHmporte, answers to the English 
expression " no matter" it does not matter, never mind : — 

Donnez-moi un livre, n'importe le Give me a book, no matter which. 
quel. 

2. Qu'importe ? answers to the English phrase what matter ? 
Wliat does it matter ? When that expression is followed by a plural 
subject the verb importer is put in the plural : — 

Que nous importent leurs mur- What do ice care for their murmurs ? 
mures? 

3. N'est-ce pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not 1 
is he not, dfC. 1 do they not ? following an assertion : — 

II fait froid ; n'est-ce pas 1 It is cold ; is it not ? 

4. N'est-ce pas'- frequently precedes the assertion: — 

N'est-ce pas que votre frere est Your brother is come ; is lie noil 
arrive'? 

5. Regarder, to look at, is used in the sense of to concern : — 

Cela regarde votre frere. That concerns your brothzr. 

G. En voul-oir (3. ir.) a quelqu'un, a quelque chose, means to have 
. g design, against or upon ; a grudge against any one ; to be angry with 
*ne on account of something : — 

II en veut a, notre vie. ' He has a design against our tgft. 



948 



LESSON XCIV. 



R£sum£ of Examples. 



Pourvu que vous veniez, n'importe 

par quel chemin. 
Pourvu qu'il le fasse, n'importe 

comment. 
Apportez-moi quelque chose, n'im- 
porte quoi. 

'enmourrai; n'importe. 
1 n'est pas satisfait; qu'importe'? 

f 1 refuse nos presents ; qu'importe ^ 

Que nous importe cette affaire ? 
Que vous importe son arrivee'? 
Vous viendrez ; n'est ce pas 1 ) 
N'est-ce pas que vous viendrez 1 ) 
Est-ce que cela me regarde 1 

Cela ne regarde personne. 

II en veut a nos biens. 
Hen veut a nos amis. 
Cela vous regarde-t-il 1 



Provided you come, no matter whicA 

way. 
Provided he does it, no matter how. 

Bring me sornething, no matter whet. 

I shall die through it ; no matter. 
He is not satisfied with it; what 

matters it? 
He refuses our presents ; what does U 

matter ? 
What do we care for that affair ? 
What is his arrival to us? 

You will come ; will you not ? 

Does that concern me? Is that any 
thing to me? 

That concerns nobody. That is no- 
body's business. 

He has a design upon our property. 

He has a grudge against our friend. 

Is that your business? 



Exercise 185. 

Accord-er, 1. to grant ; Hasard, m. chance ; Pouv-oir, 3. ir. to be 
Approuv-er, 1. to ap-Loin,far; able; 

prove; Moqu-er, (se) 1. ref. foSang, m. blood; 

Auteur, m. author ; laugh at ; Va, from aller, to go ; 

Bien, very ; Murmure, m. murmur ; Velours, m. velvet ; 

Condamn-er, 1. to con-V 'eu, little; Vers-er, 1 to pour, shed; 

demn ; Plainte, f. complaint; Vil, e, vile ; 

Demande, f. request ; 

1. Que vous apporterai-je de Londres ? 2. Apportez-nous ce que 
vous pourrez, n'importe quoi. 3. Lui avez-vous dit d'apporter du 
velours? 4. Je lui ai dit d'en apporter, n'importe de quelle qualite. 
5. Pourvu que quelqu'un vienne, n'importe qui. 6. Que m'importe 
qu'Arnaud m'approuve ou me condamne ? (Boileau.) 7. Vous 
accorde-t-il votre demande ? 8. II refuse ; qu'importe ? 9. Est-il 
satisfait des efforts que vous avez faits? 10. II n'en est pas satisfait; 
qu'importe? 11. II n'a pas voulu nous recevoir; peu m'importe 
12. Qu'importent les plaintes et les murmures des auteurs, si le public 
s'en moque? (Feratjd.) 13. Qu'importe qu'au hasard un sang vil 
soit verse ? (Racine.) 14. Cela vous regarde ; n'est-ce pas ? 15. Cela 
ne me regarde pas. 16. Cela ne regarde que moi. 17. Vous leur 
avez dit que ces affaires ne les regardaient pas ; n'est-ce pas ? % 
18. Vous m'en voulez ; n'est-ce pas? — N'importe. 19. A qui en 
voulez-vous? 20 Nous n'en voulons a personne. 21, Nous ne vous 



LESSON xcv. 249 

en vouluns pas. 22. Vous m'en voudrez ; n'est ce pasl 23. Ed 
voulez vous k la vie de votre ami ! 24. Je n'en veux pas a sa vie. 
25. II m'en veut ; qu'importe ! 26. Va, Cesar est bien loin d'en 
vouioir a sa vie ! (Voltaire). 

Exercise 186. 

1. Which way will your brother come? 2. Provided he comes to- 
morrow, it does not mattei which way. 3. Will he write to your 
brother? 4. He will not write to him; but it is no matter. 5. 
Will you not lend me a book ? 6. Which book do you wish to 
have ? 7. No matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from 
Paris ? 9. Bring me what you can ; no matter what. 10. Does 
that concern your brother ? 11. That does not concern him, but it 
concerns me. 12. Does he refuse to write to us? 13. He refuses 
to (de) write; but what does it matter? 14. Bring me a book, no 
matter which. 15. Your brother will come, will he not? 16. Has 
he been willing to receive your brother? 17. He has refused to re- 
ceive him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not? 19. He is 
not pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business? 21. It 
is my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told 
you that it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against 
your father's life ? 25. He has no design against his life ; but he 
has a design upon his property. 26. Are you angry with us on that 
account ? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have you a 
grudge against my friends ? 29. I have no grudge against them. 
30. That concerns you, does it not? 31. That concerns me. 32. 
Is that your business? 33. It is very warm this morning; is it not 1 
34. My sister will come this afternoon; will she not? 35. If she 
does not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming to us ? 



LESSON XCV. LEgON XCV. 

1. The word monde, world, is often used in French in a restricted 
sense. It has then the meaning of people, company, retinue, servants, 

Y avait-il beaucoup de monde a Were there many people at church? 

l'eglise 1 
Be mettant a la tMe de son monde, il Placm? himself at the head of his 

ouvrit lui-meme la porte. people, he himself ipencd the door. 

Voltaire. 

2. The word gens also means people, and is of the masculine gen- 

ii* 



250 



LESSON XCV. 



tier; but, by a singular anomaly, the adjectives which precede gens 
are put in the feminine, while those which follow it must be in the 
masculine gender : — 

Ce sont les meilleures gens du monde. They are the best people in the world, 
Ces gens sont fort dangereux. Those people are very dangerous. 

3. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, not preceding immediately 
the word gens, are put in the masculine, except when the word 
coming between is an adjective having a different termination in the 
two genders : — 

Tous ces gens la etaient-ils chre- Were all those people Christians ? 

tiens % Pascal. 

Tous ces gens la sont sottement All those people are foolishly ingenU 

ingenieux. J. J. Bousseau. ous. 

4. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, are put in the feminine when 

they precede immediately the word gens, or are separated from it 

by an adjective having a different termination in the feminine: — 

Quelles gens etes-vous 1 Quelles sont What people are you ? What is your 

vos affaires 1 (Racine.) business ? 

Quelles bonnes et dignes gens ! What good and worthy people ! 

Resume of Examples. 



Apres s'etre fait craindre de tout le 
monde, il craignit tout le monde 
aussi. Fl£chier. 

II dit du mal de tout le monde. 

Tout le monde le dit. 

Avez vous amene beaucoup de 
monde 1 

Le monde n'est pas encore arrive. 

II n'y avait pas grand monde. 

II y a du monde avec lui. 

II a congedie tout son monde. 

Ce capitaine a tout son monde. 

Voila de sottes gens. 

II s'arrete chez les premieres bonnes 

gens qu'il trouve. Boiste. 

II y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, de 

fort sottes gens, des gens fades, 
' oisifs, desoccupes. LaBruyere. 
Quels braves gens ! 
Quelles viles et mechantes gens ! 



After having inspired every body with 
fear, he feared every body. 

He slanders every body. 

Every body says so. 

HosVe you brought many people ? 

The company is not yet come. 
There were not many people there. 
There is some person with him. 
He has discharged all his servanda 

(people). 
That captain has all his crew. 
Those are foolish people. 
He stops with the first good people 

that he finds. 
There are in the city, as elscwhers i 

very silly people , tedious, idle, U7h» 

employed people. 
What worthy people! 
What vile and wicked people! 



Exercise 187. 

Accommoder (s\) 1. rcf. Campagne, f. country; Gens d'epee, military 
to put up with, to agrez Demel-er, 1. to settle, or- men ; 

with ; range ; Gens de lettres. men of 

Attend-re, 4. to await, to Des que, as soon as; letters; 

expect: Equipage, m. crew; Gens de robe, lawyers; 

Bord (a), on board; Eveill-er. 1. to avake; Patron, m. patron saint 



LESSON xcv. 251 

Perd-re. 4. to lose • Reven-ir, l.ir. to return; Voyag-er, 1. [§ 49.] to 

Rassembl-er. 1. to bring Salon, m. drawing-room; travel; 
together; Serv-ir 3 2. ir. to serve; Terre, f. land, shore. 

1. Avez-vous rasseinble beaucoup de monde chez vous? 2. Hn'est 
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner au- 
jourd'hui? 4. On le servira des que notre monde sera venu. 5. Le 
capitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord? 6. Non, Monsieur, il a en- 
roye du monde a terre. 7. Vos gens se levent-ils de bonne heure ? 
8. II faut que tous les jours j'eveille tout mon monde (Moliere). 
9 Les Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que les 
Suedois (Voltaire). 10. Oa est Madame votre mere? 11. Elle est 
dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle (company). 12. Tout le 
monde peut voyager comme moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le 
monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde Fait 
B (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne? 
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a-t-il ici une societe 
de gens de lettres ? 18. Non, Monsieur ; il n'y a qu'une societe de 
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces braves gens'? 20. Je crois 
que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sont les gens aujourd'hui. 
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens 
eont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens 
(L'Acadeiuie). 25. Que pouvez-vous avoir a dem£ler avec de 
telles gens ? 

Exercise 188. 

1. Are there many people at your brother's? 2. There are not 
many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body? 
4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with 
you ! 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- 
pany with your mother? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who 
has told you that ? 1 0. Every body says so. 11. Is the company come ? 
12. The company is not yet come. 13. Has your mother discharged 
ervants (domesliques) ? 14. She has discharged all her people. 
15. Do you know those people? 16. I know them very well ; thej* 
are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he stops always with 
good people. 18. Are there foolish people here? 19. There are 
foolish people everywhere (parlout). 20. Do you awake your people 
-'very morning? 21. Yes, Sir; I must awake them everyday. 22. 
What can your brother have to settle with those people? 23. They 
are the beat people in the world. 24. Were there many people at 
ehurch this morning? 25. There were not many people there. 26. 
Are your people sick? 27. Yes, Sir; all my people are sick. 28. 



252 LESSON XCVI. 

There is here a society of learned men. 29. There are in Pans 
several societies of lawyers. 30. What worthy people ! SI. What 
good people ! 32. Do you expect your people to-day ? 33. We ex 
pect them this evening. 34. So goes the world. 35. Has your cap. 
tain all his cre\ 1 36. He has all his crew on board. 



LESSON XCVI. LEQON XCVI. 

' 1. When property or possession is affirmed of things inanimate, 

the relation of possession is often expressed by the relative pronoun 

en [$95,(5.)]:- 

Voila un bel arbre; le fruit en est That is a fine tree; its fruit is excel- 
excellent. lent. 

2. When, however, the inanimate possessor is the subject of the 
same clause, the possessive adjective is used [§ 95, (4.)] : — 

Cet arbre a perdu son fruit. That tree has lost its fruit. 

3. Entendre, to hear, is used in the sense of to understand. It 
is also used reflectively. It means then, to be understood, to under- 
stand one's self, or one another, or to agree with one another. It means 
also, to be expert in any thing. In this latter sense it takes d before 
its regimen. This regimen is at times replaced by the pronoun y : — 

Comment entendez-vous cela 1 How do you understand that ? 

Cela s'entend. That is understood. 

II s'entend aux affaires. He is expert in business. 

4. Se faire entendre corresponds to the English, to make one's self 
understood, to make one's self heard : — 

Nous nous sommes fait entendre. We made ourselves understood. 

5. Taire [4. ir.] means, to conceal, to keep to one's self. Se taire. 
ref., tc be silent. 

Taisez-vous. Taisons-nous. Be silent (hold your tongue). Let us 

be silent. 
Dites-lui de »e taire. Tell him to be silent. 

Kesume of Examples. 



L'auteur d'un bienfait est celui qui 
en re9oit les plus doux fruits. 
Duclos. 

Votre jardin est rnagnifique; les 
arbres en sont superbes. 

La vie a ses plaisirs et ses pcines. 

L'etude a ses charmes. 



The author of a good deed is the on* 
who receives its sweetest fruits. 

Your garden is magnificent; its trees 

arc very beautiful. 
Life has its pleasures and it$ trmbUs* 

Study has its charm*. 



LESSON XCVI. 



253 



Entendez-vous bieii le latin 1 

Cet avoue n'entend rien aux affaires. 

II ne s'y entend pas. 

Je lui ai donne a entendre, qu'il 

etait de trop ici. 
Qu'entendez-vous par la 1 
II y avait tant de bruit, que nous 

n'avons pu nous faire entendre. 
Taisez le premier, ce que vous vou- 

lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. 
Pourquoi ne vous taisez-vous pas 1 
Nous l'avons fait taire. 



Do you understand Latin well? 

That attorney has no knowledge of 
business. 

He is not expert in this. 

I gave him to understand thai /u 
was in the way here. 

What do you mean by that ? 

There was so much noise, that »e 
could not make ourselves heard. 

Keep to yourself that which you would 
wish to have kept secret. 

Why are you not silent ? 

We made him hold his tongue {si- 
lenced him). 



Exercise 189. 

Agrement, m. pleasure ; Chirurgien, m. surgeon ; Manche, f. sleeve ; 

Avantage, m. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1. to mix ; 

tage ; sent ; Muet, te, dumb, mute ; 

Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country ; 

coat; Force, f. force, power ; Raison, f. reason; 

Brave, worthy ; Fort, very ; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 

1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte? 2. C'est un habit 
neuf, le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont elles pas trop 
courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manches en sont trop courtes et les 
basques trop longues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages ] 
6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses 
agrements. 8. J'aime Paris ; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- 
rurgien s'entend-il a la medecine ? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 
11. Entendez-vous la medecine. 12. Je ne m'y entends pas. 13. Je 
ne l'entends pas. 14. Je n'y entends rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi a 
vous faire entendre ? 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- 
sin est un brave homme et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Faiie 
taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les 
muets (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pays est cet homme? 
20. II tait son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, 
eUe apprit l'art de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- 
vous vous taire impertinente, vous venez toujours m£ler vos imper 
tinences a toutes choses (Moliere). 23. Qui se tait consen 
(Proverb). 

Exercise 190. 

1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. We have a very large one, 
but its soil (lerre, f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new? 
4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not its 
■kirts too long? 6. No, Sir; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you 
tK>t heard that preacher (prtdicatenr) ? 8. There was so much noise 



254 LESSON XCVII. 

that I could not hear nim. 9. Does not the country have its plea 
sures? 10. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your bra. 
ther like the city? 12. He likes the country; he knows its pleasures. 
13. What does your brother mean by that? 14. Ha means what ha 
says. 15. Is your father expert in business ? 16. My father has no 
knowledge of business. 17. Does that young man understand Eng- 
lish well? 18. He understands French and English very well. 19. 
Do you agree well with your partner ? 20. My partner is an honest 
man [$ 86.] ; I agree very well with him. 21. Does that young 
man conceal his age ? 22. He conceals his age and his country. 23. 
Does your father understand medicine? 24. He does not under- 
stand it. 25. He has no knowledge of it. 26. Be silent, my child. 
27. Tell that child to be silent. 28. Silence gives consent. 29. 
Will you not be silent ? 30. What have you given him to under- 
stand? 31. We gave him to understand that study has its charms. 
32. Have you silenced him? 33. Yes, Sir; we silenced him. 34. 
Tell him to be silent. 35. I have already (dejoL) told him to be si- 
leat. 36. Let us be silent. 



LESSON XCVII. LEgON XCVII. 

THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE THE VERBAL ADJECTIVE. 

1. The present participle is invariable, and ends always in ant. It 
expresses action, not situation. It cannot be rendered into English 
by an adjective, but is rendered by the participle present or by the 
present of the indicative preceded by a relative pronoun. The pres- 
ent participle has often, or may have a regimen. [5 64.] 

Ces hommes, prevoyant le danger, Those men, foreseeing tlie danger, 
s'enfuirent. fled. 

2. The part of the verb used after the preposition en, is always th 
present participle : — 

En ecrivant, en lisant. In writing, in reading. 

3. When the word ending in ant, is used to express the qualities, 
properties, or moral or physical situation of a noun, it is a verbal 
adjective, and assumes in its termination the gender and number of 
the noun which it qualifies. It must in this case be rendered into 
English by an adjective : — 

Ces hommes eont prevoyants. Those men are cautious, provident. 

4. The verbs entendre, to hear ; faire, to cause, to make ; laisser, to let s 



LESSON XCVII. 



255 



&e., follow ed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in 
French separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences in 
English, the two verbs are usually separated by other words : — 

J'ai laisse tomber mon ccmteau. I have let my knife fall {dropped). 
J'ai entendu dire cela. I ho.ve heard that said. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je connais des personnes dormant 
d'un sommeil si profond, que le 
bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- 
rait pas. Bescher. 

Les eaux dormantos sont meilleures 
pour les chevaux que les eaux 
vives. Buff on. 

Nous avons trouve cette femme 
mourante. 

Cette femme mourantdans la crainte 
de Dieu, ne craignait point la 
mort. 

On est heureux en se contentant de 
peu. 

iivez-vous laisse passer ce voleur ? 

Je l'ai laisse passer. 

Pourquoi avez-voujs fait faire un 
habit 1 

Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. 

J'ai lasse tomber quelque chose. 

Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela 1 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire a ma scenr. 



I knoio persons, sleeping {wlw sleep 
so profoundly, that the noise ofthun- 
der would not awake them. 

Sleeping {still) waters are better for 
horses than living waters. 

We found that woman dying. 

That woman dying in the fear of 
God, did not fear death. 

One is happy in contenting one's u]f 

with little. 
Have yon let that thief pass ? 
I let him pass. 
Why have you had a coat made ? 

I have had no coat made. 

I let something fall. 

Have you heard him say that ? 

I Jieard him say it. 

I heard it said. 

I heard my sister say it. 



Exercise 191. 

Appliqu-er, (s ? ) 1. ref. Ilat-er (se), 1. ref. to Prevenant, e. obliging; 

to a hasten; Preven-ir, 2. ir. to an* 

Besoin, m. want; Lecture, treading; tic/pate; 

Changement. ni. altera- Obligeant, e. obliging ; Repet-er, 1. to repeat; 

^ Hon; riai-re, 4. ir. to please ; Suivant, e, following ; 

fimouss^er, 1. U> blunt; Pointe, f. point; Suiv-re, 4. ir. tc follow ; 

Empccher, 1. to prevent; Pleuv-oir, 3. ir. to rain ; Voyant, e, bright, sliowy. 
Essay er, 1. to try; 

1. Ma cousine est-elle aussi obligeante que la votre? 2. Elle est 
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Vos en- 
fants sont-ils prevenants? 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tons mea be* 
Boins, ne me laissent rien a desirer. 5. Lisez bien attentivement lea 
pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant L'exemple de Leurmere, 
B'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaiaent 
point. 8. Mes soeurs voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se h&terent de re- 
venir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisso tomber? 10. J'ai laisse tomber ma 



256 LESSON XCVIII. 

plume; la pointe en est emoussee. 11. Les avez-vous faitparler! 

12. Je les ai faitparler, mais avec difficulte. 13. Avez-vous fa't faire 
des changements dans votre maison? 14. Pyen ai fait faire. 15. A 
quoi en avez-vous fait faire? 16. Pen ai fait faire a la salle a man- 
ger et au salon. 17. Avez-vous laisse passer cet homme ? 18. Je 
n'ai pas essay e de Ten empecher. 19. A qui (whom) avez-vous en- 
tendu dire cela ? 20. Je Tai entendudire a mon pere. 21. Je le lui 
ai entendu repeter. 22. II vous Pa entendu dire. 23. II vous a vu 
faire cela. 24. II vous l'a vu faire. 25. Je l'ai vu passer. 

Exercise 192. 
1. Are still waters good for horses? 2. BufFon says, that they are 
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautious ? 
4. They are not very cautious. 5. My sisters, foreseeing that it was 
going to rain, brought their umbrellas. 6. What have you let fall ? 
7. I have let my knife and book fall. 8. Do very bright colors please 
your brother? 9. Very bright colors do not please him. 10. Have 
you read the following pages? 11. Have you seen the dying wo- 
man? 12. Your sister, dying in the fear of God, was very happy. 

13. Your sister, following your example, applip^ herself to study. 

14. Have you made them read? 15. I made them read and write. 
16. I made my brother write. 17. I have had a book bound (relier). 
18. Has your father had alterations made in his house? 19. He lias 
had some made in it. 20. In which room has he had some made ? 
21. He has had some made in my brother's room. 22. Whom have 
you heard say that ? 23. I heard my sister say it. 24. Have you 
heard him say that ? 25. I have not heard him say it. 26. Have you 
seen my father pass ? 27. I have not seen him pass. 28. I have 
neard him speak. 29. Make him speak. 30. Let it fall. 31. Do not 
let it fall. 32. What has your brother dropped ? 33. He has dropped 
nothing. 34. Whom have you heard say that ? 35. I heard your 
brother say it. 36. I have heard you repeat it. 37. We have seen 
you do that. 



LESSON XCVIII. LECON XCVIH. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. L 

The participle past is variable under any of the following coni 
ditions : — 

1. When employed as an adjective; in which case it agrees ia 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies : — 



LESSON XOVIII. 257 

Des livres im primes. Printed books. 

Ces femmes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected. 
tues. 

2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs ; 
when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition :— 

Elles sont bien re9ues de tout le They are well received by every 
monde. body. 

3. When employed in forming the compound tenses of neuter 
verbs having itre as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preced- 
ing case, it agrees with the subject or nominative : — 

Votre soeur est partie ce matin. Your sister went away this morning. 

4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having 
avoir as an auxiliary ; in which connection it agrees not with the 
subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object 
precedes it : — 

Les maisons que nous avons ache- The houses which we have bought. 
tees. 

5. When used along with ttre in the formation of the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct 
object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct 
object : — 

Ces dames se sont flattees. Those ladies have flattered themselves. 

6. When used along with tire (as in Rule 5.) in the formation of 
the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective 
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition; 
in which event it agrees with the direct object, provided (as in Rule 
4.) that object precedes it : — 

Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- The stories which they related to each 
tees. other. 

7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a 
succeeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob 
ject which is represented as performing the action denoted by the in 
finitive ; in whicli condition it agrees with that direct object: — 

Les dames que j'ai entendues chan- The ladies whom I heard sing (sing- 
ter. ing). 

8. When in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle is 
preceded by another object or regimen which is direct ; in which case 
it agrees with that direct object: — 

Je les en ai avertis. 7 have warned them of it. 

Vous les en avez informed. You have informed them of U. 



258 



LESSON XCVIII. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vous avez des livres bien relies." 
Vos lilies sont estimees. 
Ces terres sont bien labourees. 
Mes voi sines sont tombees d'ac- 

cord. 
Elles sont venues nous trouver. 
La victoire que nous avons rem- 

portee. 
Les champs que vous avez laboures. 
Vous vous etes repentis de votre 

faute. 
Elle s'est souvenue de sa promesse. 
Les soldats que j'ai vus passer. 
Les musiciennes que j'ai enten- 

dues jouer. 
L'indiscretion que nous nous som- 

mes reprochee. 
Les evenements qu'elles se sont 

racontes. 
Les fruits que j'en ai re^us. 
Les nouvelles que j'en ai apportees. 



You have well bound books 
Your daughters are esteem*!. 
Those lands are well ploughed. 
My neighbors have come to an>u%> 

derstanding. 
They came to us. 
The victory which we have gained. 

The fields which you have ploughed. 

You have repented (you) of your 
fault. 

She remembered her premise. 

The soldiers whom I saw passing. 

The musical ladies whom I heari 
playing. 

TJie indiscretion with whi.A we re- 
proached one another. 

The events which they relates ■ on* 
anotlier. 

The fruits vjhich I received from <i 

The news which I brought from u-. 



Exercise 193. 

A l'ordinaire, as usual ; Fleur, f. flower; Reproch-er (se), 1. ref. 

Avert-ir, 2.*to warn ; Malade, sick person ; to reproach one's self; 

Boue f. mud; Merveille (a), wonder- Ri-re, 4. ir. to laugh; 

Coutume (de), usually, fully, perfectly ; Serieux, se, serious ; 

usual ; Parven-ir, 2. ir. to sue- Souri-re, 4. ir. to smile ; 

Cueill-ir, 2. to gather ; ceed ; Suivant, according to ; 

Dechiffr-er, 1. to deci- Port-er (se), 1. to be, to Tomb-er, 1. to fall; 

pher; do; Trouv-er, to find; 

Decourag-er, 1. to cfo-Plus tot, sooner, earlier ; Vol-er, 1. to steal. 

courage ; 

1. Cette demoiselle ne se trouve-t-elle pas bien fatiguee? 2. Elle 
est fatiguee et decouragee. 3. Votre soeur est-elle allee a l'eglise 
suivant sa coutume? 4. Ma mere et ma soeur y sont allees. 5. 
Votre sceur est-elle revenue plus tot que de coutume. 6. Elle est 
revenue plus tard qu'a l'ordinaire. 7. Cette pauvre malade est-elle 
tombee? 8. Elle est tombee dans la boue. 9. Ma mere est-elle 
parvenu e a dechiffrer ma lettre ? 10. Elle n'y est pas parvenue. 1 1 , 
Quelles fleurs avez-vous cueillies? 12. Les fleurs que j'ai trouvees 
w"ont plus belles que celles que vous m'avez envoyees. 13. Votre 
cousine ne s'est-elle pas bien portee ? 14. Elle s'est portee a mer- 
veille. 15. De quel livre vous etes-vous servie, Mademoiselle? 16. 
Je me suis servie du votre. 17. Nous nous sommes servies dea 
notres. 18. Quelles fautes votre fils s'est^il reprochees? 19. Lea 
fautes qu'il s'est reprochees ne sont pas serieuses. 20. Les avez* 



LESSON XCIX. 259 

tous vus rire ? 21. Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vua 
voler des fruits? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pommes. 24. Les avez- 
vous avertis de lturs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les 
en ai pas avertis. 

Exercise 194. 
1. Are your books well bound 1 ? 2. They are well bound, and 
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged? 
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis- 
ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un- 
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 8. 
Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Is not your 
sister gone to church? 11. My sister is gone to church as usual. 
12. Did your sister return sooner than usu^l ? 13. My sister re- 
turned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have ploughed 
large? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 16. 
Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies 
whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud? 20. Did your sister 
eucceed in reading that book ? 21. She succeeded in reading it. 22. 
Have you warned your sisters of their danger? 23. I have warned 
them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What pen has 
your mother used ? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not those 
young ladies used my book? 28. They have not used it. 29. Has 
your mother been well? 30. She has been perfectly well. 31. 
Has she remembered her promise? 32. She has remembered it. 33. 
Have you seen those boys laugh? 34. I have seen them smile. 35 
Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play. 



LESSON XCIX. LEQON XCIX. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— TT. 

The participle past is invariable : — 

1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle : — 

'cccs out etudie lcurs le^ns. My nieces hare studied their lessons. 
Ellcs ant neglige lcurs etudes. They have ne^Lcicd their studies. 

2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir: — 

Mes consines ont disparu. My cousins have disappeared. 

Les cinq heures qu'elles ont dormi. Tlie five hours which they have slept 



2 **0 LESSON XOIX. 

In the latter sentence, the word pendant is understood after 
heures : — 

3. In unipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with etre or wi 
avoir: — 

Les chaleurs qu'ila fait cette annee. The heat there has been this year 
II est arrive bien des malheurs. Many misfortunes have Z$Z 

4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second pronott 
is an indirect regimen, when no direct regimen precedes:— 

Me s'est propose de partir. She proposed to herself to leave. 

5. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by a 
direct regimen, and this direct regimen is not the actor, but the ob- 
ject acted upon. In this case the infinitive is generally rendered in 
Jimglish by the passive voice: — 

Le^chansonsquej'aientenduchan- The song which I heard {being) 



6 When the direct regimen preceding a participle is not the object 
ot this participle, but of a verb following : 

La d'etud 6 ier qUe je V ° US ai C ° nSei116 T%e ruU whkh * advised V™ *> 

7. The participle of faire, fait, followed by an infinitive, is always 
invariable : — ' 

Je les ai fait raccommoder. J have had them mended. 

8. After the pronoun, en, when no direct regimen precedes :— 

OnW^fV 1011 " 6 d6S flCUrS ? Bave the V S iven Von flowers'? 

On m en a donne. They have%ivenme\some) of them. 

Resume op Examples. 

They have given us good advice. 



Elles nous ont donne de bons con- 

seils. 

Elles nous en ont donne. 
Les trois lieues qu'il a couru. 
Les annees que ces edifices ont 

dure. 
La belle journee qu'il a fait hier ! 

C'est la plus belle fete qu'il y ait 

eu. 
II s'est presente deux de vos amis. 
Ces demoiselles se sont nui. 

Les Asiatiques se sont fait une es- 
p£ce d'art de l'education de l'ele- 
phant. Buffon. 



They have given us some. 
The three leagues which he ran. 
The years that those edifices have 
lasted. 

What a beautiful day it was yester- 
day! 

It is the finest feast that there has 

been. 
There appeared two of your friends. 
Those young ladies have injured one 

another. 
The Asiatics have made the education 

of the elephant a kind of art. 



LESSON XCIL 261 

Elle s'est imagine l'idee de pouvoir ' She conceived the idea, that she might 
reussir. succeed. 

Les fruits que j'ai vu voler. \ The fruits which I sau being <tolen. 

Les soldats blesses que j'ai vu por- 
ter. 

La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- 
ter. 

Les pommes que je vous ai defendu 
de manger. 

Je les ai fait partir. 

Elles m : ont apporte des oranges. 

Elles m'en ont apporte. 



The wounded soldiers whom I saw 

{being) carried. 
The song which I heard sung. 

The apples which I forbade you to 

eat. 
I obliged them to leave. 
They have brought me oranges. 
They have brought me {some) of them. 



Exercise 195. 

Auberge, f. inn; Jou-er, 1. to play ; Piece, f. piece ; 

Bien, m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Racont-er, 1. to relate; 

Dernier, e, last; Dorm-ir, 2. to sleep; Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re~ 

Disparait^re, 4. ir. to dis- Lion d'Or, m. Golden turn ; 

appear ; Lion ; Soieries. silk goods. 

Enterr-er. 1. to bury ; Mort, e, dead; 

1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recom- 
mande Pauberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-vous 
apportees ! 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. 5. Vos voisines 
sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habillees. 7. Ont- 
elles bien dormi la nuit derniere? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 
9. Quand sont-elles arrivees 1 ? 10. Elle3 sont arrivees a quatre 
heures et demie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures 1 12. Les 
six heures qu'elles ont dormi leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos 
sceurs se sont-elles amusees ? 14. En jouant elles se sont fait mal 
au bras. 15. Se sont-elles raconte notre conversation? 16. Elles 
se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu? 18. Elles 
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats 
que vous avez vus partir; sonUils revenus'? 20. lis sont morts; 
je les ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait etudier? 22. Je 
les ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai 
pas apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. 

Exercise 196. 
1. Have you not recommended my nieces ? 2. I have recommended 
them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4. I have brought 
you some. 5. Have you given any to my two daughters .• 6. I have 
given them some. 7 I would have given them some, if I had had 
many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies? 9. I have not 
neglected them; I never neglect them. 10. The years which that 
ehurch has lasted, speak in favor (en faveur) of the architect. 
11. The ten miles which he haa run, have fatigued him. 12. Have 



262 



LESSON C. 



your sisters injured each other ? 13. They have flattered themselves* 
14. Did my friends present themselves? 15. There came three of 
your sisters. 16. What did they imagine % 17. They conceived the 
idea of reading Tasso (Le Tasse). 18. Have you seen them (m.) 
steal my apples? 19. I saw them steal your peaches. 20. Have 
you heard them (f.) sing? 21. I have heard them sing. 22. The 
songs which I heard sung, are not new. 23. I found in your room 
the books which I had forbidden you to take. 24. The peaches 
which I have forbidden you to eat, are not ripe (mures). 25. Have 
you seen those soldiers ? 26. I saw them pass last week. 27. I saw 
them carried to the hospital (d Vhopital) this morning. 28. Have 
you brought oranges from France ? 29. I brought some. 30. The 
oranges which I brought from it (en) are good. 31. Have you 
brought silk goods ? 32. I have brought some. 33. I have brought 
none. 34. Are the silk goods which you brought from that place, 
good? 35. I brought but two pieces. 



LESSON C. 



LEgON c. 



EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATING THE VARIOUS USES OF THE PRINCIPAL 
CONJUNCTIONS. 



A MOINS QUE. 



11 n'en fera rien, a moins que 
vous ne lui parliez. 

A moins que vous ne preniez bien 
votre temps, vous n'en viendrez pas 
a bout. 
Quel indigne plaisir peut avoir l'ava- 

rice, 
Et que sert d'amasser, a moins 

qu'on ne jouisse ? Boursault. 



He will do nothing of the kind, 
unless you speak to him. 

Unless you choose your time well t 
you will not accomplish it. 

What unworthy pleasure can ava- 
rice offer ? 

What is the use of hoarding up un- 
less we enjoy $ 



Aussi, ils n'ont aucune force pour 
*e posseder surement. Pascal. 

Ma douleur serait trop mediocre, 
si je pouvais la depeindre ; aussi je 
ne l'entreprendrai pas. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 



Therefore, they have no strength 
to possess it safely. 

My grief would be too trifling if 1 
could depict it ; so that f will not 
undertake it. 



C'est ce qu'il y a de plus sage ; au 
reste, c'est aussi ce quil y a de plus 
juste. Marmontel. 



TJils is the wisest way ; betid a } it 
is alto the ?nostju$t. 



LESSON C. 



263 



Voila les perils, voici le rnoyen de 
les eviter ; car enfin, le bras de Dieu 
n'est pas raccourci. Massillon. 

Le peuple se figure une felicite 
irnaginaire dans les situations ele- 
vees, oil il ne peut atteindre, et il 
croit (car tel est 1'homme) que tout 
ce qu'il ne peut avoir, c'est cela 
meme qui est le bonheur qu'il 
cherche. Massillon. 



Those are the daggers, this is the 
way of avoiding them ; for finally, 
the influence of God is not less 
powerful. 

The people picture to taemselves 
an imaginary happiness in elevate 
stations which they cannot reach 
and they believe {for such is man 
that all that which they cannot ob 
tain, forms that very happines 
which tltey seek. 



COIIME — QUE. 



Comme l'ambition n'a pas de I 
frein, et que la soif des richesses 
nous consume tous, il en resulte, que 
le bonheur nous fuit a mesure que 
nous le cherchons. Th. Corneille. 

La reconnaissance est le plus 
doux, comme le plus saint des de- 
voirs. Thomas. 

Comme il sonna la charge, il 
Bonne la retraite. La Fontaine. 

DON' 

Votre maitre vous aime ; done, 
vous devez l'aimer. 

Je Buis, done, un temoin de leur 
peu de puissance. Racine. 

Et dou peut done venir ce 
changement extreme ? Voltaire. 

Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton j 
frere. — Je n'en ai pas. — C'est done, 
quelqu'un des tien3. La Fontaine. 

Allons done ! repondit on, et la 
transaction n'eut pas lieu. 

De Cussy. 



As ambition has no limits, and as 
the thirst of riches devours us all, 
the result is, that happiness avoids 
us, as we proceed in our search after 
it. 

Gratitude is the sweetest as well as 
the holiest of duties. 

As he sounded the charge, so he 
sounds the retreat. 



Your master loves you ; therefore, 
you should love him. 

I am, therefore, a witness of their 
want of power. 

Whence, therefore, can this extreme 
change proceed ? 

If it is not you, then it is your 
brother. I have none. Then it must 
be some one of your family. 

" Well doneT replied they, and 
the affair did not take place. 



de mkme que. 
De mSnie que le soleil brille sur ] As the sun shines upon the earthy 
la terre, de m6me le juste brillera ! so will the just shine in heaven. 
dans les cieux. L'academie. 



C'est 6trs faible et timide que 
d'etre inaccessible et fier. 

Massillon. 

Une farnille vertueuse est un vais- 
Bean tenu pendant la tempcte par 
deux ancres, la religion et les meeurs. 

Chateaubriand. 
Quel camage de toutes parts I 
On 6gorge a la enfants, les 

vieillards, 



To be inaccessible and proud, is tc 
be weak and timid. 

A vhtuous family is a vessel 
strengthened dm nig *he trnpest by 
two atichors, religion and morals. 

What carnage on all sidrs! 

1% • children, 

">>■{ (Jtc broth- 



i 



264 



LESSON C. 



Et la sceur et le frere, 
Et la fille et la mere, 
Le fils dans les bras de son pere. 
Racine, Esther. 

LORSQUE- 

Lorsque l'innocence habitait la 
*«rrre. Bossuet. 

Quand vous me hairiez, je ne m'en 
plaindrais pas. Racine. 

Quand nous n'aurions egard qu'au 
repos seul de notre vie, quand nous 
n'aurions point d'autre interet ici- 
bas que de nous preparer des jours 
heureux, quel bonheur de prevenir 
d'avance et d'etouffer dans leur 
naissance tant de passions violentes. 
Massillon. 



er, the daughter and the mother, thi 
son in the arms of his father. 



-QUAND. 

When innocence inhabited th* 
earth. 

If even you hated me, I woula no* 
complain. 

If even we considered merely the 
repose of our lives, if even we had 
no other interest here than to pre- 
pare for ourselves happy days, what 
happiness it would be, to prevent 
beforehand, to stifle in their birth, 
so many violent passions. 



C'Stait deja la puissance impe- 
riale qu'on lui a vue depuis, mais 
avec l'assentiment universei des 
peuples, avec des formes moins 
royales, mais plus dignes peut-etre. 
Thiers. 

L'harmonie ne frappe pas simple- 
ment l'oreilie, mais l'esprit. 

Boileau. 

C'est un parti sage k la guerre de 
de se tenir sur la defensive, mais ce 
H'est pas le plus brillant. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

II n'y a point de mais qui tien- 
ne ; je ne donnerai point ma fille a 
un muet. Brueys. 



It was already the imperial power 
of which we have since seen him 
possessed, but with the consent of the 
people, with forms less regal, but 
perhaps more worthy. 

Harmony does not only strike the 
ear, but the mind. 

To keep on the defensive is a wise 
resolution in war, but it is not the 
most brilliant. 

There is no * but' in the matter ; 
I will not give my daughter to a 
mute. 



Heureux celui qui sait se conten- 
ter de peu! Son sommeil n'est 
trouble ni par les craintes, ni par 
les desirs honteux de l'avarice. 

Trad. d'Horace. 

Vous perdez ainsi la confiance de 
vos amis, sans les avoir rendus ni 
meilleurs ni plus habiles. 

Voltaire. 

On n'est jamais si heureux, ni si 
malheureux qu'on se l'imagine. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

Cette loi sainte ne connait plus, ni 
pauvre, ni riche, ni noble, ni roturier, 
ni maitre ni esclave. Massillon. 



Happy is he who can content him- 
self with little! His sleep is dis- 
turbed neither by the fear, nor by 
the shameful desires of avarice. 

You lose thus the confidence of 
your friends without having render- 
ed them either better or more skilful. 

We are never so happy nor so un- 
happy as we fancy. 

That holy law knows no longer 
either poor or rich, noble or plebeian 
master or slave. 



Or bus, mettons nous a l'mur-rag*. | Now &<en, let us go to work. 



LESSON C. 



265 



Or 9a, Gil Bias, me di£ il un jour, 
le temp3 de ton enfance est passe. 
Le Sage. 



"Now, then, Gil Bias," said he to 
me one day, " the time of your child- 
Iwod is over." 



La fortune, soit bonne ou mau- 
vaise, soit passagere ou constante, 
a3 peut rien sur Tame du sage. 

Marmoxtel. 
La liberte de publier ses pensees, 
ou la liberte de la presse, doit etre 
r^glee sur la Liberte menae d'agir. 
B. de St. Pieeee. 



Fortune, be it good or bad, be it 
transient or constant, has no power 
over the soul of the wise. 

Hie liberty of publishing one's 
thoughts, or the liberty of the press, 
should be regulated upon the liberty 
of action itself. 



PAECEQUE. 



Les grands hommes entreprennent 
de grandes choses parcequ'elles 
sont grandes, et les fous parcequ'ils 
les croient faciles. Vauvenaegues. 

La tout est beau, parceque tout 
est vrai. J. J. Rousseau. 

pourtant. 
Le style le moins noble a pour- I The least elevated style has, never- 
tant sa noblesse. Boileau. | theless, its elevation. 



Great men undertake great things 
because they are great; and fools, 
because they believe them easy. 

Every thing there is beautiful, be- 
cause every thing is true. 



PUISQUE. 



Pourquoi le demander, puisque 
vous le savez ? Racine. 

Ne vous lassez jamais d' examiner 
les causes des grands changements ; 
puisque rien ne servira jamais tant 
a voire instruction. Bossuet. 

Puisque vous le voulez, je vais 
changer de style. Boileau. 



Why ask about it, since you know it f 

Never be weary of examining into 
the causes of great changes; for 
nothing will ever be of so much ser- 
vice to your instruction. 

Since you will have it so, I will 
cliange my style. 



QUE. 



Jamais on ne vit un si grand exem- 
ple, que le courage n'est point in- 
compatible avec la molle- 

Voltaire. 

Nous n'avons que peu de temps a 
vivre, et loin d'en profiter, nous ne 
cherchons qu'a le perdre. Lay 

A quoi vous servira d'avoir de 
l'esprit, si vous ne l'employez pas, et 
que voss ne vous appliquiez pas ? 
Bossuet. 

Toutefois que sert-il de me justi- 
6er ? Raci.n 1:. 

Qu'il fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. 

Que le monde est grand ! Qu'il 
est magnifique ! Massillon. 

Que de beaux jours n'ont pas de 
beaux soirs ! Boiste. 

Sais tu quelque chose de plus ? 

Oh 1 que oui Beuets. 

12 



Never was such a striking exam- 
ple seen, that courage is not incom- 
patible with effeminacy. 

We have but little time to live, 
and instead of improving it, we only 
seek to ivaste it. 

Of what use will be your wit, if 
you do not employ it, and do not ap- 
ply yourselves i 

Ilowwe-r, irfiat is the use of j 
fying myself? 

Let him do what he plea 

How great is the world! Jlouf 
magnificent I 

How many fine days have not 
beautiful evenings ! 

Do you know any thing more f 

T/uUldo! 



266 



LESSON C. 



(Test une inaladie d'esprit, que de 
eouhaiter des choses impossibles. 
Fenelon. 

II n'y aura jamais de meilleur di- 
recteur que l'Evangile. 

Ganganelli. 

La veritable conversion du coaur 
fait autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aime 
les creatures. Pascal. 

Crois tu que dans son coeur, il ait 
jure ta mort ? Racine. 

Ce n'est pas que j'eusse mieux fait 
que vous. Mme. de Sevigne. 

H a fallu que mes malheurs m'aient 
instruit, pour m'apprendre ce que je 
ne voulais pas croire. Fenelon. 



Wishing for impossible thvigs, is 
a disease of the mind. 

There will never be any better 
guide than the Gospel. 

The true conversion of the heart 
makes us love God as much as we 
liave loved the creatures. 

Do you believe that he has sworn 
your death in his heart ? 

It is not that I might have done 
better than you. 

It was necessary that my misfor- 
tunes should instruct me, to teach 
me what I would not believe. 



QUOIQUE — QUOI . . . QUE. 



Quoique Dieu et la nature aient 
fait tous les hommes 6gaux en les 
formant d'une meme boue, la vanite 
humaine ne peut sounrir cette ega- 
lite. Bossuet. 

Quoi que vous ecriviez, evitez la 
bassesse. Boileau. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'elle dise, elle 
ne me persuadera pas. 

GlRAULT-DUVTVTER. 



Although God and nature have 
made all men equal informing them 
from the same earth, human vanity 
cannot bear that equality. 

Whatever you may write, avoid 
vulgarity. 

Whatever she may say, she will 
not persuade me. 



SL 



Si vous le vouliez, nous partirions 
ensemble. 

Si vous le prenez sur ce ton, je 
me retire. 

Nul empire n'est sur, s'il n'a 
1'amoui pour base. Racine. 

S'il le faut, nous partirons. 

Votre esprit a toujours en reserve 
quelque si, quelque mais. 

Destouches. 



If you wished it, we would go to- 
gether. 

Jf you go on in this way, I with- 
draw. 

No empire is safe, unless it has 
affection for its basis. 

If it must be so, we will go. 

Your mind has always in reserve 
some ' if/ some l but.' 



Da repondirent, qu'il fallait re- 
t&blir l'equilibre europ£en rompu, 
qu'il fallait le retablir sinon sur le 
continent, ou il etait tout a fait 
detruit, au moins sur l'Oce'an. 

Thiers. 



They replied, that it was necessary 
to re-establish the disturbed Euro- 
pean balance ; thai it was necessary 
to restore it, if n( on the continent, 
where it was enthdy destroyed, ai 
least on the Ocean. 



Soit qu'il le fasse, soit qu'il ne le 
fasse pas. 

Soit la hardiesse de I'entreprise, 
soit la 8eule presence de ce grand 



sorr. 

Whether he does it, whether he 
does it not. 

Be it the boldness of the enter- 
prue t be it the presence alone of this 



LESSON C. 



267 



homme, soit Li protection visible du 
ciel, il etonne par sa resolution. 

Flecuter. 

Soit en bien, soit en mal, mon ami, 
la prudence dit, qu'il faut rarement 
juger sur l'apparence. Cheron. 

Yous le voulez ? ainsi soit il ! 

Un rnal funeste et contagieux se 
repandit dans les principales yilles 
de la Normandie ; soit que riutem- 
perie des saisons eut laisse daus les 
airs quelque maligne impression, soit 
qu'un commerce fatal eut apporte 
des pays eloignes, avec de fragiles 
richesses, des semences de maladie 
et de mort, soit que l'ange de Dieu 
eut etendu la main pour frapper 
cette malheureuse province. 

Flechter. 



great man, be it the visible protec- 
tion of heaven, he astonishes by his 
resolution. 

Be it for good, be it for evil, my 
friend, prudence says, that we must 
rarely judge from appearances. 

You will have it so ? So be it ! 

A fatal and contagious diseas 
spread in the principal cities of 
Normandy ; be it that the inclemen- 
cy of the season had left in the air 
some malignant impression, be it 
that a fatal commerce had brought 
from distant countries, with perish- 
able riches, the seeds of disease and 
death, be it that the angel of God 
had stretclied forth his hand to smite 
that unfortunate province. 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING. 

The words in the following lists are given, as before intimated 
(page 59), as suggestive of thought. In conducting the exercise, the 
Teacher selects a particular word, as Relieur (Bookbinder), and re- 
quires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this term. 
The pupil is duly notified, that he is at liberty to take any thought 
suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any form found 
in any of the foregoing Lessons : regard being had all along to all 
the Rules, Notes, Exceptions, &c, that may bear upon the case. 
Thus, adopting as a model the sentence, Voire marchand est bien obli- 
geant (Lesson 17, Resume), or, Le Danois a-Uil quelques pommes? 
(Lesson 18, R. 7) &c. &c, let him endeavor to produce others of the 
like kind 

A little practice will render the exercise both easy and interesting. 
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only one, but IwOf 
three, or more of the words taken from the lists. 



L — Professions et Metiers. 

Acteur, m. actor. 
Apothicaire, m. apothecary. 
Artiste, m. artist. 
Aumonier, m. chaplain. 
Auteur, m. author. 
Barbier, m. barber. 
Bijou tier, m. jeweller. 
Blancnibcpuse, f. washerwoman. . 
Boucher, m. ouicher. 



Professions and Trade*. 

Brasseur, m. brewer. 
Brodeuse, f. embroiderer. 
Charbonnier, m. coal-man. 
Charlatan, m. quark. 
Charretier, m. cartman. 
Chaudronnier, m. copper wxitK 
Chirurgien, m. surgeon. 
Cordier, m. ropcmaker. 
Corroyeur, m. currier. 



268 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Ooutelier, m. cutler. 

Oouturiere, f. seamstress. 

Couvreur, m. slater, tiler. 

Cure, m. vicar. 

Dentiste, m. dentist. 

Drapier, m. draper. 

Ecclesiastique, m. clergyman. 

Epicier, m. grocer. 

Eveque, m. bishop. 

Faucheur, m. mower. 

Fripier, m. fripperer. 

Fruitiere, i. fruit-woman. 

Gantier, m. glover. 

Graveur, m. engraver. 

Horloger, m. clock and watch maker. 

Instituteur, m., Institutrice, f., schooU 

master, mistress. 
Imprimeur, m. printer. 
Joaillier, m. jeweller. 
Ma 9011, m. mason, bricklayer. 
Maitre d'ecole, m. schoolmaster. 
Manouvrier, m. day-laborer. 
Marchand-de-chevaux, maquignon, 

m. horse-dealer. 
Marechal ferrant, m. farrier, shoe- 

ing-smith. 
Marechal, m. blacksmith. 

II. — L'Homme. 

Ancetres, m. p. ancestors. 

Arriere-petit-fils, m. great-grandson. 

Beau-fils, m. son-in-law, step-son. 

Beau-frere, m. brother-in-law. 

Beau-pere, m. father-in-law, step-fa- 
ther. 

Belle-fille, f. daughter-in-law, step- 
daughter. 

Belle-mere, £ mother-in-law, step- 
mother. 

Belle-soeur, f. sister-in-law. 

Bisaieul, m. great-grandfather. 

Bru, f. daughter-in-law. 

Descendants, pi. descendants. 

Enfance, f. childhood. 

£poux,m. ) . 

•6 r c consort. 

Epouse, f. ) 

Famille, f. family. 

Femme, f. woman, wife. 

Fiancailles, f. p. betrothing. 

Fiance, m., fiancee, f., betrothed. 

Futur, m. bridegroom. 

III. — Le coeps humain. 

Artere, f. artery. 
Barbe, £ beard. 



Moissonneur, m. reaper. 

Musicien, m. musician. 

Naturaliste, m. naturalist 

Orateur, m. orator. 

Orfevre, m. gold and silver smith 

Pape, m. pope. 

Patre, m. shephera, herdsman. 

Perruquier, m. hairdresser. 

Philosophe, m. philosopher. 

Poissonnier, m., Poissonniere, i.,fish 

monger. 
Predicateur, m. preacher. 
Pretre, m. priest. 
Raifineur de sucre, de sel, sugar 

salt refiner. 
Ranioneur de cheminees, m.chimney 

sweeper. 
Relieur, m. bookbinder. 
Savetier, m. cobbler. 
Sculpteur, m. sculptor. 
Sellier, m. saddler. 
Serrurier, m. locksmith. 
Tapissier, m. upholsterer. 
Teinturier, m. dyer. 
Tisserand, m. weaver. 
Tonnelier, m. cooper. 
Yitrier, m. glazier. 

Man. 
Future, f. bride. 
Gendre, m. son-in-law. 
Grand-pere, rn. grandfather. 
Grand'mere, f. grandmother. 
Jeune homme, m. young man. 
Jeune fille, f. young woman, girl. 
Jeunesse, f. youth. 
Jumeau, m., jumelle, f , twin. 
Marraine, f. godmother. 
Mari, m. husband. 
Naissance, f. birth. 
Nourrice, f. nurse. 
Nouveau marie, bridegroom. 
Nouvelle mariee, bride. 
Orphelin, m., orpheline, f, orphan, 
Parrain, m. godfather. 
Petit-fils, grandson. 
Petite-fille, grand-daughter. 
Veuf, m. widower. 
Veuve, widow. 
Vieillesse, f. old age. 

The human bodx 
Bouche, £ mouth. 
Bras, m. arm. 



1.IST OF WORDS. 



269 



Cervelle, f brain. 

Chair, i. flesh. 
Cils, m. p. eyelash 33, 
Cceur, m. heart. 
Corp3, m. body. 
Cote, m. side. 
Cdte, f. rib. 
Cou, m. neck. 
Coude, m. elbow. 
Crane, m. skull. 
Cuisse, f. thigh. 
Doigt, m. finger. 
Dos, m. back. 
Epaule, £ shoulder. 
fipine (du dos), £ spine. 
Favoris, m. p. whiskers. 
Foie, m. liver. 
Front, m.fos'ehead. 
Gencives,/. p. gums. 
Genou, m. knee. 
Gorge, f. throat. 
Hanche, £ hip. 
Jambe, f. leg. 
Joue, f. cheek. 
Langue, f. tongue. 
Levre, £ lip. 
Membre, m. limb. 

IV. — Maladies, infiemttes, etc. 

Attaque, f. attack, fit. 

Baume, nx balsam. 

Begaiemeut, m. stammering. 

Blessure, f. wound. 

Cecity, £ blindness. 

Chancre, m. cancer. 

Cicatrice, f. scar. 

Colique, £ colic. 

Contusion, £ bruise. 

Crampe, £ cramp. 

Dislocation, £ dislocation. 

Em^tique, m. emetic. 

Enflure, £ swelling. 

Enroument, m. hoarseness. 

Entorse, £ sprain. 

Epilepsie, £ epilepsie. 

Evanouissement, m. fainting. 

Fievre, £ fever. 

Fievre nerveuse, £ nervous fever. 

V. — Habillements. 
Agrafe, £ clasp. 
Aiguille, £ needle. 
Aiguille de cheveux, £ hair-pin. 
Bague, £ ring. 
Bas, m. stocking. 



Menton, m. chin. 

Moelle, £ marrow. 

Moustache, £ moustache^ mvattathuk 

Muscle, m. muscle. 

JS T erf, m. nerve. 

Nez, m. nose. 

Ongle, m. nail. 

Orteil, m. toe. 

Os, m. bone. 

Palais, m. palate. 

Paupiere, £ eyelid. 

Peau, £ thin. 

Pouce, m. thumb. 

Poumon, m. lungs. 

Prunelle, £ pupil of the eye 

Rate, £ spleen. 

Reins, m. p. loins. 

Sang, m. blood. 

Sein, bosom. 

Sourcils, m. p. eyebrows. 

Squelette, m. skeleton. 

Talon, m. heel. 

Teint, m. complexion. 

Tempes, £ p. temples. 

Trait, m. feature. 

Veine, £ vein. 

Visage, m.face. 

MALADEES, INFIRMITIES, ETC. 

Fievre scarlatine, £ scarlet fever 
Gue'rison, £ cure. 
Goutte, £ gout. 
Hydropisie, £ dropsy. 
Indisposition, £ indisposition. 
Louche, adj. squinting. 
Malaise, m. indisposition. 
Mutisme, m. dumbness. 
Ordonnance, £ prescription. 
Onguent, m., pom made, £, solve 
Petite-verole, £ small-pox. 
Pulmonic, £ consumption. 
Remcde, m. remedy. 
Rhume, in. cold 
Rougeole, £ measles. 
Surdite, £ deafness. 
Toux, £ cough. 
Ulcere, m. ulcer. 
Vertigo, m. dizziness. 

Articles of Dress* 

Basin, m. d'> 
Batiste, f. cambric. 
Bijouterie, f.jaoelry. 
Bonnet, m. cap. 
Boucle, £ buckle. 



2T0 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Boucle, f. lock of hair curl. 

Boucles d'oreilles, f. p. ear-rings. 

Bourse, f purse. 

Bracelet, m. bracelet. 

Bretelles, f. p. braces, suspenders. 

Brosse, f. brush. 

Brosse-a-dents, f. tooth-brush. 

Cale9on, m. s. drawers. 

Ceinture, f. sash, belt, band. 

Chaussons, m. p. socks. 

Cirage, m. blacking. 

Ciseaux, m. p. scissors. 

Coiffure, f. head-dress. 

Collet, m. collar. 

Collier, m. necklace. 

Coton, m. cotton. 

Cravate, f. cravat. 

Crepe, m. crape. 

Dianiant, m. diamond, 

Dentelle^ f. lace. 

Doublure, f. lining. 

Ecrin, m. casket, jewel-box. 

ippee, f. sword. 

Eperons, m. p. spiers. 

iEpingle, f. pin. 

J&tui, rn. needle-case, 

ISventail, m.fan. 

Flacon. m. smelling-bottle. 

Fourrure, i.fur. 

Frac, m. dress-coat 

VI. — La ville, la maison, etc. 

Antichambre, f. antechamber, 

Ardoise, f. slate. 

Arsenal, m. arsenal. 

Banc, m. bench, seat, 

Barriere, f. gate. 

Bibliotheque, f. library. 

Bourg, m. borough, small town. 

Bourse, f. exchange. 

Brique, f. brick. 

Capitale, f. capital city, metropolis. 

Carillon, m. chime of bells. 

Caserne, f. barrack. 

Cave, f. cellar. 

Chambre, f. chamber, room. 

Chambre a coucher, f. bedroom. 

Chapelle, f chapel. 

Chateau, m. country -hov&e, villa. 

Chaumiere, £ hut, cottage. 

Chaux, f. lime. 

Chemine'e, f. chimney. 

Cinietiere, m. burying-ground, 

churchyard. 
Cloche, f. bell (large), church bell, dec. 



Frange, f. fringe. 

Garniture, f. trimming. 

Gilet, m. vest, ivaistcoat. 

Grenat, m. garnet. 

Guetres, f. p. gaiters. 

Habit, m. coat, 

Ivoire, f. ivory. 

Linge, m. linen. 

Lunettes, f. p. spectacles. 

Manche, f. sleeve. 

Mousseline, f. muslin, 

Pantalon, m. sing, pantaloons. 

Parapluie, m. umbrella. 

Parasol, m. parasol. 

Peigne, m. comb. 

Pendants-d'oreilles, m. p. ear~f)e* 

dants. 
Perle, f. pearl. 
Poche, f. pocket. 
Pommade, f. pomatum. 
Redingote, f. great-coat 
Robe, f. dress, robe. 
Robe de chambre, f. dressing-gown. 
Satin, m. satin. 
Soie, f. silk. 
Tablier, m. apron. 
Taffetas, m. taffeta. 
Velours, m. velvet 
Veste, f. vest. 
Voile, m. veil. 

Town, House, Era 

Clocher, m. church-steeple. 

Clochette, f. small bell. 

Cloitre, m. cloister. 

Cour, f. yard, court. 

Couvent, m. convent. 

Cuisine, f. kitchen. 

Douane, f. custom-house. 

E curie, f. stable. 

Environs, m. p. environs* neighbor* 

hood. 
£tage, n. m. story, floor. 
Escalier, m. stairs. 
Faubourg, m. suburb. 
Ferine, i.farm. 
Fontaine, f. fountain, well. 
Four, m. oven. 
Gouttiere, f. gutter. 
Grand chemin, ) , . , 
Grand'route, 'J *•%*■"* 
Grange, f. barn. 
Grenier, m. garret. 
Haie, f. hedge. 
Hameau, m. hamlet 



LIST OF WORDS. 



2Vl 



Hopital, m Juspital. 
Hotel-de-ville, town-house, city-house, 

guild-hall, city -hall, town-hall. 
Meuble, m. piece of furniture. 
Meubles, m. p. furniture. 
Monnaie, f. mint. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Mur, m. ) J7 
Huraille, f. P att 
Palais, m. palace. 
Paroisse, f parish. 
Pave, m. pavement. 
Pepiniere, f. nursery of trees. 
Persienne, blind, open shutters. 
Plafond, m. ceiling. 
Planche. f. board. 
Plancher, m. floor. 
Poele, m. stove. 
Pompe^ f. pump. 
Pont, m. bridge. 
Porte, f, door, gate. 
Poste, f. post, post-office. 
Poutre, f. beam, 



Prairie, £ ) , 

Pre,m. \ meadow ' 



VII. — Meubles. 
Allumette, n. f. match. 
Allumette chimique, f. friction- 
match. 
Amadou, m. tinder. 
Armoire, f cupboard. 
BariL, m, cask, barrel. 
Bassin, m. bowl, washbowl. 
Bassinoire, f. warming-pan. 
Berceau, m. cradle. 
Boite-a-fusil, f. tinder-box. 
Bougie, f. taper. 
Bouilloire, f. kettle. 
Briquet, m. fire-steel. 
Cadre, m. frame. 
Candelabre, m. chandelier 
Casserole, f. saucepan. 
Cassette, f. box, casket. 
Chandelle, £ candle. 
Charbon de bois, m. charcoal. 
Charbon de terre, stone coal. 
Chaudiere, f. boiler. 
Coffre, m. clvest. 
Commode, f. chest of drawers. 
Corbeille, f. basket. 
Crible, m. sieve. 
Cruche, f. pitcher. 
Cuvier, m. tub. 
Drap, m. sJieet. 



Prison, £ prison, 

Puits, m. well. 

Quartier, m. quarter 

Kampe (d'escalier) balustrade of a 

staircase. 
Rez-de-chaussee, nx ground-floor. 
Sacristie, f. vestry. 
SaDe, f. parlor, sitting-room. 
Salon, m. drawing-room, hall 
Serre, f. conservatory. 
Serre-chaude, f. hot-hous:. 
Serrure, f. lock. 
Sonnette, f. bell. 
Theatre, m. theatre 
Tolt, m. roof. 
Tour, f. tower. 
Tuile, f. tile. 
Verger, nx orchard. 
Verrou, m. bolt. 
Vestibule, nx hall, entry. 
Vigne, f., vignoble, m., vineyard. 
Village, m. village. 
Volet, window-shutter. 
Voute, f. vault. 

Furniture. 
Ecumoire, f. skimmer. 
Entonnoir, m. funnel. 
Essuie-main, m. towel. 
Fer a repasser, m. iron* 
Fourgon, m. poker. 
Foyer, nx hearth. 
Lampe, f. lamp. 
Lanterne f. lantern. 
Lit, m. bed. 

Lit de plume, ra.feat1ier bed. 
Lumiore, f. light. 
Lustre, nx sconce. 
Marchepied, m. footstool. 
Mouchettes, f. p. snuffers. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Moutardier, m. mustard-vot. 
Nappe, f. tablecloth. 
Oreiller, nx pillow. 
Panier, m. basket. 
Paravent, nx screen. 
Peinture, f. painting, picture, 
Pelle, f. shovel. 
Pierre a fusil, f. flint. 
Pincettes, £ p. tongs. 
Poele, m. store. 
Poede, {.frying-pan. 
Poivriere, f. pepper-box. 
Pot, in. kettle. 



212 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Pupitre, in. desk. 
Saliere, f. saltcellar. 
Savon, m. soap. 
Sean, m. pail. 
Serviette, f. napkin. 
Sofa, m. sofa. 
SoriSet, m. bellows. 
Sov.piere, f. soup-tui ten. 
Sucrier, m. sugar-dish. 

VIII. — Plats, etc 

Boeuf, m. beef. 

Bouilli, m. boiled beef boiled meat. 

Bouillon, m. broth. 

Confitures, f. p. preserves. 

Cotelette, f. cutlet. 

Gigot de mouton, m. leg of mutton. 

Jarnbon, m. ham. 

Mouton, m. mutton. 

CEuf, m. egg. 

Omelette, f. omelet. 

Pore, m. pork. 

IX. — Legumes, Grain, etc. 

Ail, m., pL aulx or aux, garlic. 
Asperge, £ asparagus. 
Avoine, f. oats. 
Betterave, f. beet. 
Ble, m. wheat. 
Carotte, f. carrot. 
Celeri, m. celery. 
Champignon, m. mushroom. 
Chou, m. cabbage. 
Choufleur, m. cauliflower. 
Concombre, m. cucumber. 
Cresson, m. cress. 
Epinards, m. pi. spinage. 
Feve, f. bean. 
Grain, m. kernel. 
Herbe, f. herb. 
Lentille, f. lentil. 
Mais, m. maize. 

X. — Arbbes fruitiers, fruits. 
Abricot, m. apricot. 
Abricotier, m. apricot-tree 
Am and e, m. almond. 
Amandier, m. almond-tree 
Ananas, m. pineapple. 
Aveline, f. filbert. 
Chataigne, f. chesnut. 
Citron, m., citron, lemon. 
Coing, m. quince. 
Datte, f. date. 
Figue, {.fig. 



Tableau, m. picture. 

Tablette, f. shelf 

Tapis, m. carpet. 

Tire-bouelion, m. corkscrew. 

Tiroir, m. drawer. 

Traversin, m. bolster. 

Ustensiles de cuisine, m p. kitchen 

utensils. 
Yerre, m. glass. 

Dishes, etc. 

Rafraichissements, m. p. refii&h 

ments. 
R6ti, m. roast meat. 
Saucisse, f. sausage. 
Soupe, f. soup. 

Soupe maigre, f. vegetable soup. 
Tarte, f. tart. 
Veau, m. veal. 
Vermicelli, m. vermicelli. 
Volaille, {.fowl. 

Vegetables, Grain, etc 

Millet, m. millet. 
"Navet, m. turnip. 
Ognon, m. onion. 
Orge, f. barley. 
Oseille, f. sorrel. 
Panais, m. parsnip. 
Persil, m. parsley. 
Plante, {.plant. 
Pois, m. pea. 
Racine, i. root. 
Radis, m. radish {turnip). 
Rave, f. radish {long). 
Riz, m. rice. 
Sauge, f. sage. 
Seigle, m. rye. 
Thyrn, m. thyme. 
Truffe, f. i 



Fruit Trees, Frdits. 

Fraise, f. strawberry. 

Framboise, f. raspberry. 

Groseille, f. gooseberry, currant 

Melon, m. melon. 

Mure, f. mulberry. 

Nefle, f. medlar. 

Noisette, f. hazel-nut. 

Noix, f. nut. 

Orange, f. orange. 

P6che, f. peach. 

Poire, i pear. 



LIST OF WORDS. 



278 



Poirier, m. pear trse, 
Pomme, f. apple. 
Pommier, m. apple-tree. 
Prune, f. plum. 

XL — Arbres Forestiers. 

Bouleau, m. birch. 
Chfine, m. oak. 
Ecorce, f. bark. 
Erable, m. maple. 
Frene, m. ash. 
Hetre, m. beech. 
Melese, rn. larch. 
Ornie, m. elm. 

XIX — Fleurs, etc. 

Auricule, f. auricula. 
Chardon, m. thistle. 
Chevre-feuille, m. honeysuckle. 
Giroflee, f. gillyflower. 
Jasmin, m. jessamine. 
Lis, m. lily. 
Marguerite, f. daisy. 
Mauvaise herbe, £ weed. 
Mvrte, m. myrtle. 
(Eillet, m. pink. 

XIIL — OlSEAUX. 

Aigle, m. eagle. 
Aile, f. wing. 
Alouette, £ lark. 
Autour, m. hawk. 
Autruche, f. ostrich. 
Bee, m. beak. 
Becasse, f. woodcock. 
Becassine, f. snipe. 
Bergeronnette, f. wagtail. 
Caille, f. quail. 
Canard, m. duck. 
Canari, m. canary-bird. 
Chardonneret, m. goldfinch, 
Chauve-souris, f. bat. 
Cigogne, f. stork. 
Colombe, f. dove. 
Corbeau, m. raven, 
CJomeille, f. crow. 
Coucou, m. cuckoo. 
Oygne, m. swan. 

on, m. turkey. 
Paisan, m. pheasant. 

XIV. — QUADRUPEDES. 

Agneau, m. lamb. 
Blaireau, m. badger. 
Castor, ni. beaver, 
Cerf. m. stag. 

12* 



Prunier, nx plum-tree. 
Eaisin, m. grape. 
Vigne, f. vine. 

Forest Trees. 

Peuplier, m. poplar. 
Rameau, ni. bough. 
Sapin, m. pine. 
Saule, m. willow 
Tilleul, m. linden-tree. 
Tremble, m. aspen. 
Tronc, m, trunk. 

Flowers, Era 

Ortie, £ nettle. 
Pavot, m. poppy. 
Pensee, £ forget-me-not. 
Pied d'alouette, m. larkspur 
Primevere, f. cowslip. 
Rose, f. rose. 
Tournesol, m. sunflower. 
Tulipe, f. tulip. 
Yiolette, £ violet. 

Birds. 
Geai, m. jackdaw. 
Grive, f. thrush. 
Heron, m. heron. 
Hirondelle, f. swallow, 
Linotte, f. linnet. 
Merle, m. blackbird. 
Oie, f. goose. 

Oiseau de proie, m. bird of prey, 
Paon, m. peacock. 
Passereau, m. sparroic. 
Perroquet, m. parrot. 
Perdrix, f. partridge. 
Pie, f. magpie. 
Pigeon, m. pigeon. 
Puule, f. hen. 
Poulet, m. chicken. 
Roitelet, m. wren. 
Rossignol, m. nightingale. 
Rouge-gorge, m. redbreast 
Serin, m. canary-bird. 
Tourterelle, f. turtle-dove. 
Vautour, m. vulture. 

Quadrupeds. 
Chamois, m. chamois. 
Cbbvre, f. goat. 
Chevreuil, m. roebuck. 
Ecureuil, m. squirrel. 



274 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Furet, m. ferret. 
Herisson, m. hedg:hog. 
Lapin, rabbit. 
Lievre, m. hare. 
Lion, m. lion. 
Lonp, m. wolf. 
Mule, f. mule. 

XV. — Poissons. 

ADguille, f. eel. 
Baleine, f. whale. 
Brochet, m. pike. 
Carpe, f. carp. 
Chevrette, f. shrimp. 
Ecrevisse, f. crawfish. 
Esturgeon, m. sturgeon. 
Hareng, m. herring. 
Hareng saur, red herring. 
Homard, m. lobster, 

XVI. — Insectes, ETa 

Abeille, f. bee. 
Araignee, £ spider. 
Chenille, f. caterpillar. 
Cigale, f. grasshopper. 
Couleuvre, f. adder. 
Cousin, m. gnat. 
Crapaud, m. toad. 
Escarbot, m. beetle. 
Fourrni, f. ant. 
Grillon, m. cricket. 
Grenouille, tfrog. 
Guepe, £ wasp. 

XVIL— Outils 

Alene, f. awl. 
Balance, f. scale. 
Beche, f. spade. 
Brosse, f. brush. 
Brouette, f. wheelbarrow 
Cachet, m. seal. 
Carabine, f. rifle. 
Charrue, f. plough. 
Chevalet, m. easel. 
Cire, f. ivax. 
Cognee, f. hatchet. 
Colle, f. glue. 
Compas, m. compasses. 
Echafaudage, m. s< xffold 
Echelle, f. ladder. 
Enclume, f. anvil. 
Etau, m. vice. 
Faucille, f. sickle. 
Faux, f. scythe. 
Fleau, m. flail. 
Fusil, m. gtm 



Ours, m. bear. 
Poulain, m. colt. 
Pourceau, m. hog, swim, 

Renard, m.fox. 
Singe, in. monkey. 
Taupe, f. mole. 
Tigre, m. tiger. 

Fishes. 
Merlan, m. whiting. 
Morue, f. codfish. 
Perche, f. perch. 
Requin, m. shark. 
Saumon, m. salmon. 
Sole, f. sole. 
Tanche, f. tench. 
Tortue, f. turtle. 
Truite, f. trout. 
Turbot, m. turbot. 

Insects, 6& 
Lezard, m. lizard. 
Lima9on, m. snail. 
Mouche, tfly. 
Papillon, m. butterfly. 
Puce, tflea. 
Punaise, f. bug. 
Sangsue, f. leech. 
Sauterelle, f. locust. 
Serpent, m. serpent. 
Teigne, f. moth. 
Ver, m. worm. 
Vipere, f. viper. 

Tool* 

Hache, f. ax. 
Hame9on, m. fish-hook. 
Herse, f. harrow. 
Houe, f. hoe. 
Ligne, f. line. 
Lime, {.file. 
Meule, f. grindstone. 
Pain a cacheter, m. wafef 
Pelle, f. shovel. 
Pince, f. crowbar. 
Pinceau, m. brush, pencil. 
Poulie, f. pulley. 
Rabot, rn. plane. 
Rouleau, m. roller. 
Sabliere, f. sand-box. 
Scie, f. saw. 
Serrure, f. lock. 
Tenailles, f. p. pincers* 
Truelle, f. trowel 
Vis, f. screxo. 



abrogations. 

A. P. A protester. 

A S. P. Accepte sous prot^t. 

A S. P. C. Accepte sous protdt pour 
a-compte. 

B 0E - Baron. 

C er - Chevalier 

C te - Comte. 

Ctesse. Comtesse. 

D r Docteur. 

D r - M n - Docteur-medecin. 

E. Est 

J.-C. Jesus- Christ. 

LL. AA. II. Leurs Altesses Impe'- 
riales. 

LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Roy- 
ales. 

LL. A A. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- 
nissimes. 

LL. Em. Leurs Eminences. 

LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. 

LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. 

LL. MM. Leurs Majeste's. 

LL. MM. II. Leurs Majeste's Impe'- 
riales. 

LL. MM. RR. Leurs Majest^s Roy- 
ales. 

M. ou M r - Monsieur. 

M tre - Maitre. 

M. A. Maison assure e. 

M. A. C. I. Maison assuree contre 
Tincendie. 

M d - Marchand. 

M ,]e - Marchande. 

M lle - Mademoiselle. 

M» r - Monseigneur. 

M 1S - Marquis. 

M ise - Marquise. 

MM. Messieurs. 

M me - Madame. 

Mst. Manuscrit. 

N. B. Nota bene. 

N.-D. Notre-Dame. 

ET.-N.-E. ]S"ord-nord-est. 

X.-N.-O. Xord-nord-ouest. 

H"*" Negociant. 

N" le - Negociante. 

N°- Numero. 

N. S. Notre-Seigneur. 

N. S. J.-C. Notre-Seigneur J6sus- 
Ohrist. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

To be protested. 
Accepted under protest 
Accepted under protest on account. 

Baron. 

Chevalier, knight, sir. 

Count. 

Countess. 

Doctor. 

Doctor of medicine. 

East. 

Jesus Christ. 

Their Imperial Highnesses. 

Their Royal Highnesses. 

Their Most Serene Highnesses. 

Their Eminences. 
Their Excellencies. 
Their Highnesses. 
Their Majesties. 
Their Imperial Majesties. 

Their Royal Majestic*. 

Sir, Mr. 

Master. 

House insured. 

House insured against fire. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, m. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, t 

Miss. 

My lord. 

Marquis. 

Marchioness. 

Messrs. Gentlemen. 

Madam. Mrs. 

Manuscript. 

Nota Bene. 

Our Lady. 

North-north-east. 

North-north-west. 

Merchant, m. 

Merchant, f. 

Number. 

Our Lord. 

Our Lord Jesut ChrtsL 



276 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



O. Ouest. 

°/o Pour cent 
O.-K Oucst-nord 
O.-S. Ouest-sud. 
P. S. Post-scriptum. 
R. P. Reverend pere. 
S. Sud. 

S. A. I. Son Altesse Imperiale. 
S. A. R. Son Altesse Royale. 
S. A. S. Son Altesse Serenissime. 
S.-E. Sud-est. 
S. Em. Son Eminence. 
S. Ex. Son Excellence. 
S. G-. Sa Grandeur. 
S. H. Sa Hautesse, 

S. M. Sa Majeste. 

S. M. B. Sa Majeste Britannique. 

S. M. C. Sa Majeste Catholique. 

S. M. I. Sa Majeste Imperiale. 

S. M. R. Sa Majeste* Royale. 

S. M. S. Sa Majeste Suedoise. 

S. M. T. 0. Sa Majeste Tres Chre- 

tienne. 
S. M. T. F. Sa Majeste Tres Fidele. 
S.-O. Sud-ouest 
S. P. Saint Pere. 
SS. PP. Les Saints Peres. 
S. S Sa Sainted. 
S.-&-E. Sud-sud-est. 
S.S.-O. Sud-sud-ouest. 



West. 

Per cent. 

West-north. 

West-south. 

Post scriptum. 

Reverend father. 

South. 

His or Her Imperial HighneiS. 

His or Her Royal Highness. 

His Most Serene Highness. 

South-east. 

His Eminence. 

His Excellency. 

His Grace (to a Bishop). 

His Highness (the Turkish Emper 

or). 
His or Her Majesty. 
His or Her Britannic Majesty. 
His Catholic Majesty. 
His Imperial Majesty. 
His Royal Majesty. 
His Swedish Majesty. 
His Most Christian Majesty. 

His Most Faithful Majesty, 

South-west. 

Holy Father. 

The Holy Fathers. 

His Holiness. 

Soutkrsouth-easL 

Soutk-soutk-mH. 



NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

PART SECOND. 



§ 1. — Parts of Speech. 
(1.) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech. 
Nouns or Substantives, Participles, 

Articles, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Pronouns, Conjunctions, 

Verbs, Interjections. 

(2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. 
(3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- 
mits of various changes ; by these changes various modifications of 
meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : 
The Noun, The Pronoun, 

The Article, The Verb, 

The Adjective, The Participle. 

(4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which 
never changes : 

The Adverb, The Conjunction, 

The Preposition, The Interjection. 

(5.) AH variable parts of speech have two numbers : the singular , 
which denotes but one, and the plural, which denotes more than one. 
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen 
ders: the masculine and the feminine. 

§ 2. — Cases. 

The cases adopted by French grammarians are : 

(1.) The nominaiif or sujet: answering to the nominative or sub- 
ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin. 

(2.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative 
of the Latin. 

(3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to 
the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 



278 



GENDER. § 3, 4, 5. 



§ 3. — The Noun or Substantive. 

(1.) The noun or substantive is a word which serves to name a 
person or a thing ; as, Jean, John ; maison, house. 

(2.) There are two sorts of nouns: proper and common. 

(3.) A proper noun is applied to a particular person, or thing ; as, 
Napoleon, Napoleon; Paris, Paris. 

(4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects ; as, livre, 
oook ; homme, man. 

(5.) Some common nouns, although singular in number, present 
to the mind the idea of several persons or things, forming a collec- 
tion : they are for this reason denominated collective nouns ; as, troupe, 
troop ; peuple, people. 

(6.) Collective nouns are general, or partitive : general, when they 
represent an entire collection ; as, l'armee des Francais, the army of 
the French: partitive, when they represent a partial collection; as, 
une troupe de soldats francais, a troop of French soldiers. 

(7.) A common noun composed of several words, as, chef-d'oeuvre, 
masterpiece, avant-coureur, forerunner, is called a compound noun. 

(8.) Of the two properties of nouns, gender and number, we shall 
commence with the first. 

§ 4.— Gender. 

(1.) There are, in the French language, only two genders: the 
masculine and the feminine. 

(2.) The masculine belongs to men, and animals of the male kind 
as, Charles, Charles ; lion, lion. 

(3.) The feminine gender belongs to women, and animals of the 
female kind; as, Sophie, Sophia; lionne, lioness. 

(4.) Through imitation — often on account of derivation, often 
without any real motive — the masculine and feminine genders have 
been given, in French, to 1$ie names of inanimate objects: thus, pa- 
pier, paper, is masculine, and plume, pen, is feminine. 

8 5. — Rules for determining Gender by the Meaning. 



Masculine. 

(1.) Male beings; as, homme, 
man ; lion, lion. 

(2.) Objects to which male qua- 
lities are attributed : ange, angel ; 
genie, genius (a spirit) ; soleil, 
sun. 

(3.) The names of the seasons: 
le prin temps, the spring, &c. ; and 
of the months, Janvier, January ; 
fevrier, February, &c. 

(4.) The days of the week: 



Feminine. 

(1.) Female beings : as, femme, 
woman; lionne, lioness. 

(2.) Objects to which femae 
qualities are attributed : fee, fairy; 
lune, moon. 

(3.) Virtues : la charite, charity : 
except courage, courage ; merite, 
merit, which are masc. 

(4.) Vices : la mechancete, wick- 
edness: except Porgueil, pride, 
masc. 



GENDER. § 5. 



279 



Masculine. 
.undi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, 
&c. 



(5.) The names of the cardinal 
points and the winds : as, Test, the 
East ; l'ouest, the West, &c. [See 
exceptions opposite.] 

(6.) The names used in the 
French decimal system : as, cen- 
time (hundredth part of a franc) ; 
kilogramme (1000 grammes, about 
two pounds) ; metre, &c. 

(7.) Metals : le fer, iron ; l'acier, 
steel, &c. 

(8.) Colors: le vert, green ; le 
jaune, yellow. 

(9.) The names of empires and 
kingdoms when ending with a con- 
sonant: le Danemarc, Denmark; 
e Bresil, Brazil. 

(10.) Mountains : le Juvsi,Mount 
Jura , le Puy-de-Dome, (*) the 
Puy de Dome ; le Cenis, le St. Ber- 
nard, Mount Cents, Mount St. Ber- 
nard. 

(11.) The names of rivers when 
ending with a consonant : le Rhin, 
the Rhine; le Nil, the Nile. 



(12.) Trees, shrubs: le chene, 
the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, 
the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- 
posite.] 

(13.) The name of a language : 
as, le francais, French ; l'alle- 
mand, German, &c. 

(14.) The letters of the alpha- 
bet : un a, an a ; un z, a z. 

(15.) Compound words formed 
of a verb and of a noun, either 
masculine or feminine, or of a 
pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille, 
pocket-book ; rendez-vous, rendez- 



Feminine. 

(5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, Le 
la fete de St. Jean, St. John's 
day ; la Chandeleur, Candlemas . 
except Noel, Christmas, masc. 

Bise, a poetical term for North 
wind. Tramontane, a term applied 
on the Mediterranean to the North 
wind. Brise, breeze; moussons, 
trade-winds. 



(5.) The names of countries 
when ending in e mute : la France ; 
l'Espagne, TAmerique, &c. 

Exc. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- 
xique, Peloponese. 

(6.) Chains of mountains in the 
plural: les Alpes, the Alps; lea 
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees; les Vo- 
ges, les Cevennes, &c. 

(7.) The names of rivers when 
ending with e mute : la Seine, the 
Seine ; la Loire, the Loire. 

Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone; le 
Danube, le Tibre, le Cocyte, masc. 

(8.) Aubepine, hawthorn ; bour- 
daine, black alder; epine, thorn; 
hieble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier ; 
yeuse, ilex. 



(9.) Garde-robe, wardrobe ; 
perce-neige, spring-crocus ; perce- 
feuille, hare's-ear. 



• The word Pny, from the Celtic pucch, mountain, is applied to a number of place* 
In France : Puy-en-Velay ; Puy-notre-Dame, &c 



280 



GENDER BY THE TERMINATION. § 0. 



Feminine 



(10.) Moitie, half ; and all num- 
bers ending with aine : douzaine, 
dozen; centaine, hundred, &c. 



Masculine. 

(16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, 
&c, used substantively : le boire 
et le manger, eating and drinking. 

(17.) Numbers — cardinal, ordi- 
nal, and proportional — used sub- 
stantively : le dix, the tenth ; le 
neuvieme, the ninth ; le tiers, the 
third. [Exceptions opposite.] 

§ 6. — Gender, by the termination. 

(1.) The exceptions to the masculine will be found opposite the 
termination, in the feminine column ; and the exceptions to the fem- 
inine, in the masculine column, also opposite : 



(2.) Consonants. 


B 


Masculine Terminations, Feminine Terminations. 


'SSJT Exam P le - English. T Si?~ Exam P le - English, 


eb Horeb, Mount Horeb. 




tjb radoub, refitting a ship. 




mb plomb, lead. 




C 


AC sac, sack. 




ec bee, beak. 




ic mastic, putty. 




oc soc, ploughshare. 




uc due, duke. 




nc tronc, trunk. 




rc clerc, clerk. 




sc fisc, revenue. 





ed pied, foot. 

id nid, nest. 

ob tripod, tripod. 

ud Talmud, Talmud. 

nd marchand, merchant. 

rd bord, border. 



ef chef, 

if suif, 

uf oeuf, 

bf cerf, 

mo rang 

ck arack, 



chief, 
tallow. 

egg- 
stag. 

rank. 

arrack. 



F 



G 

I 
K 

I 



Exc. — clef, key ; nef, shifr 
nave ; soif, thirst. 



oiNDER BY THE TERMINATION. § 6. 



281 



MaszuTine Terminations. 



Feminine Termination*, 



AL 


bal, 


ball. 


EL 


sel, 


salt. 


IL 


soleil, 


sun. 


OL 


sol, 


soil. 


T7L 


calcul, 


calculation. 


AM 


Adam, 


Adam. 


EM 


harem, 


liar em. 


IM 


daim, 


deer. 


OM 


nom, 


name. 


UM 


parfum, 


perfume. 


A5 


cadran, 


dial. 


EN 


examen, 


examination. 


IN 


I /-an, 


grape. 


ON 


not preceded by is or gi, 




si, ti, xi 






baton, 


stick. 




gazon, 


turf. 




blason, 


blazon. 



M 



N 



bison, bison; horizon, ho- 
rizon; oison, gosling; 
poison, poison ; tison, 

firebrand ; 

bastion, bastion; bestion, 
figure-head of a ship. 



ISON 



Exc. — faim, hunger ; male- 
faim, excessive hunger. 



Exc. — -fin, end; main, hand. 

Exc. — chanson, song; cuis- 
son, baking ; contre- 
facon, counterfeiting : 
facon. mode; moisson, 
harvest: moussons, trade- 
winds ; rancon, ransom 

maison, house. 

Exceptions opposite. 



gion region, region. 

sion pension, pension. 

tion question, question. 

xion reflexion, reflection 



AP 
OP 
UP 


drap, cloth. 
galop, gallop. 
coup, blow. 










OQ 


coq-d'Inde, turkey. 


Q 

1 
R 






AR 


char, car. 










£R 


fer, iron. 






Exc. — cuiller, spotr* 
sea. 


nioi. 


IP. 


plaisir, pleasure. 






chair, flesh. 





or or, gold. 

rjR not preceded by e, 
azur, azure. 

bonheur, happiness ; coeur, 
heart; choeur, chorus; de- 
nominateur, denominator; 
deshonneur, dishonor; equa- 
teur, equator ; exterieur, 



Exc. — tour, towe^. 

eur chaleur, heat 
hauteur, lteighi. 
Exceptions opposite. 



282 



GENDER BY THE TERMINATION. § 6. 



Masculine Terminations, 
exterior; honneur, honor; 
interieur, interior; labeur, 
labor ; malheur, misfor- 
tune; multiplicateur, mul- 
tiplier; pleurs, tears re- 
gulateiir, regulator ; vsnti- 
lateur, ventilator. 



R — Continued. 

Feminine Terminations. 
eur — Continued. 



kS 


bras, 


arm. 


E3 


gres, 


sandstone. 


IS 


souris, 


smile. 


OS 


OS, 


bone. 


us 


blocus, 


blockade. 


PS 


temps, 


weather. 


£S 


vers, 


verse. 


AT 


climat, 


climate. 


ET 


arr6t, 


arrest. 


IT 


lit, 


bed. 


OT 


cachot, 


dungeon. 


UT 


bout, 


end. 


NT 


pont, 


bridge. 



rt tort, 



wrong. 



S 



T 



Exceptions opposite. 



amaryllis, amaryllis ; bre 
bis, sheep ; fois, time : sou- 
ris, mouse ; vis., screw ; oa- 
sis, oasis. 



foret, forest 

nuit, night 

dot, dower. 

dent, tooth ; gent, people > 

jument, mare. 

part, share ; la plupart, the 

most 



AX 
EX 


climax, 
silex, 


climax, 
silex. 






IX 


prix, 


price. 






UX 

NX 


courroux, 
lynx, 


anger, 
lynx. 


: 


5 


AZ 

EZ 


gaz, 
nez, 


gas. 
nose. 






JZ 


riz, 


rice. 












(3.) Voioels. 








A 


A 


acacia, 


acacia. 







Exc— croix, cross ; noix, 
nut ; paix, peace ; voix, 
voice ; perdrix, partridge , 
poix, pitch. 

Exc. — chaux, lime ; faux, 
scythe ; toux, cough. 



E 



Exc. — vinula, a sort of cat- 
erpillar; sepia, sepia. 



A complete classification of nouns ending in c mute (a majority of 
which are feminine) would be, from its length, of little practical use to 
the student, who would find it easier to apply to his dictionary than to 



GENDERS BY THE TERMINATION. 8 6. 



283 



guch a list. TVe will give here the principal terminations, classing them 
according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the examples 
given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, in the 
opposite column. 



Masculine Terminations. 
abe astrolabe, astrolab. 

Exc. — Souabe, Suabia; 
syllabe, syllable. 
ACLE miracle, miracle. 

Exc. — debacle, breaking 
up of the ice ; made, a 
mineral. 
acre sacre, consecration. 

Exc. — nacre, mother of 
pearl. 
4.GE courage, courage. 

Exc. — image,image; rage, 

rage; page, page of a 

book ; cage, cage ; nage, 

swimming; plage, beach. 

ai^e salaire, salary. 

Exc. — affaire, affair ; aire, 
floor; glaire, white of 
egg ; grammaire, gram- 
mar ; paire, pair ; jugu- 
loirQ fugular-xein;\\2C\.v^ 
hair-cloth; chaire, pul- 
pit ; serpentaire, snake- 
root; parietaire, pelli- 
tory, and a few other 
names of plants, 
hectare, hectare (a 

measure), 
cadastre, register. 
chaume, thatch. 
Exc. — paume, tennis. 
e not immediately preceded 
by t or li : abrege, 
abridgment. 
egf college, college. 

Exc. — Norvege, Norway. 
eme careme, lent. 

Exc. — cr&me, cream ; 
breme, bream ; bireme, 
trireme, galley with two 
or three rows of oars. 
etre pre t re, priest. 

Exc. — fenetre, window ; 
guetre, gaiter. 
HURRE beurre, butter. 

idre cidre, c'n' 



ARE 



ASTRE 
AUME 



Feminine Terminations. 
ace grace, grace. 

Exc. — espace, space. 
ade parade, parade. 

Exc. — stade, stadium 
grade, grade. 
aie haie, hedge. 

ance importance, importance. 
anse danse, dance. 

asse masse, mass. 

Exc. — Parnasse, Par* 
nassus. 
ee nuee, cloud. 

Exc. — apogee, apogee ; 
athee, atheist ; camee, 
cameo ; colisee, coli- 
seum ; coryphee, cory- 
pheus ; empyree, highest 
heaven; lycee, lyceum; 
mausolee, mausoleum ; 
musee, museum ; hy- 
menee, marriage ; pe- 
rigee, perigee ; pygmee, 
pygmy; trochee, trochee ; 
trophee, trophy; spon- 
dee, spondee; scarabee, 
scarabee. 
eine baleine, whale. 

ence cadence, cadence. 

Exc. — silence, silence. 
enne antienne, anthem. 

Exc. — renne, reindeer. 
ense offense, offence. 

esse tristesse, sadness. 
IE charpie, lint. 

Exc. — genie, genius ; peri- 
helie, perihelion ; incen- 
die, conflagration ; para- 
pluie, umbrella; pavie, 
clingstone peach. 
iere chaudiere, boiler. 
ine doctrine, doctrine. 
ique pratique, practice. 
ive rive, shore. 

isse coulisse, sliding-shutler. 
lle paille, straw. 

Exc. — intervalle, interval; 



284 



GENDER. — § 1. 



Masculine Terminations. 



ISME 
ISQUE 



UG-E 
CJSTE 



prisme, prism. 

risque, risk. 

Exc. — bisque, soup. 
ebeniste, cabinet-maker. 
Exc. — batiste, cambric ; 

liste, list ; piste, track. 
refuge, refuge. 

arbusto, shrub. 



OSSE 



PPE 
RRE 



TIB 
TTE 



URE 

USE 
UVE 



Feminine Terminations. 

libelle, libel ; vermicelle, 
vermicelli; violoncelle, 
violoncello ; chevre* 

feuille, honeysuckle , 
portefeuille, pocket-bookj 
vaudeville, vaudeville. 

bosse, bunch. 

Exc. — colosse, colossus; 
carrosse, coach. 

nappe, table-cloth. 

not preceded by u. 

terre, land. 

Exa — lierre, wy, parterre, 
flower-garden ; tonnerre, 
thunder ; paratonnerre, 
lightning-rod ; verre, 
glass. 

amitie, friendship. 

patte, paw. 

Exc. — amulette, amulet ; 
squelette, skeleton. 

nature, nature. 

excuse, excuse 

cuve, tub. 



I 



U 



1 midi, noon. 

Exc. — foi, faith ; fourmi, 
ant; apres-midi, after- 
noon; loi> law; merci, 
mercy. 

u revenu, revenue. 
Exc. — bru, daughter-in- 
law ; vertu, virtue ; glu, 
bird-lime; eau, water; 
peau, skin ; tribu, tribe. 

\ 1. — Nouns Masculine in one acceptation, and Feminine 
in the other. 





Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Aigle, 




eagle. 


Aigle, 


standard. 


Aune, 




alder. 


Aune, 


ell. 


Barbe, 




Barbary horse. 


Barbe, 


beard. 


Carpe, 




wrist {anatomy). 


Carpe, 


carp. 


Cartouche, 




ornaments (sculp- 
ture). 


Cartouche, 


cartridge. 


Couple, 




male and female. 


Couple, 


apair.abraceytto^ 


Crepe, 




crape. 


Crepe, 


pancake. 


Dehce (sing.), 


delight. 


Polices (pL), 


deligJitsi. 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. § 8. 



285 



Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Espace, 


space. 


Espace, 


leading (in y<\ 

ing) r 
writing-copy. 


Exemple, 


example. 


Exemple, 


Faux, 


forgery. 


Faux, 


scythe. 


Foret, 


drill. 


Foret, 


forest. 


Greffe, 


office of cleric of a 
court. 


Greffe, 


graft. 


Heliotrope, 


sunflower. 


Heliotrope, 


a mineral 


Hymne, 


classical chant. 


Hymn, 


Christian hymn. 


Livre, 


book. 


Livre, 


pound. 


Manche 


handle. 


Manche, 


sleeve. 


Mernoire, 


memoir, bill. 


Mernoire, 


memory. 


Mode, 


mode,(grammar,) 
system. 


Mode, 


fashion. 


Moule. 


mould, model. 


Moule, 


shell-fish. 


GEuvre, (m. & f.) 


work. 


(Euvres, 


literary works 


Office, 


divine service. 


Office, 


pantry. 


Ombre, 


a game. 


Ombre, 


shadow, spectre 


Orgue (sing.), 


organ. 


Orgues (pi.), 


organ. 


Palme, 


hand, a measure. 


Palme, 


the advantage. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Panache, 


pea-hen. 


Parallele, 


comparison. 


Parallele, 


parallel line. 


Pendule, 


pendtdum. 


Pendule, 


clock. 


Periode, 


acme, height. 


Periode, 


period, epoch. 


Pivoine, 


a bird. 


Pivoine, 


a flower. 


Plane, 


plane-tree. 


Plane, 


joiner's tool. 


Platine, 


platina. 


Platines, 


small metallic 
plates. 


?oele, 


stove, pall. 


Poele, 


frying-pan. 


Poste, 


place, office. 


Poste, 


post-office. 


Pretexte, 


pretence. 


Pretexte, 


a Roman robe. 


Regale, 


organ-pipe. 


Regale, right 


of receiving the rex 






cnues of a 


vacant bishopric. 


Remise, 


hackney-coach. 


Remise, 


carriage-house. 


Serpentaire, 
Solde, 


constellation. 


Serpentaire, 


dragon-wort. 


balance of account. 


Solde, 


pay. 


Somme, 


nap, sleep. 


Somme, 


sum. 


Souris, 


smile. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Tour, 


tour, turn, trick. 


Tour, 


tower. 


Vague, 


space, emptiness. 


Vague, 


wave. 


Vase, 


vase, vessel. 


Vase, 


mire, slime 


Voile, 


veil. 


Voile, 


sail. 



§ 8. — Formation of the Plural Nouws. 

(1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition 
of s to the singular : 

Singular. Plural. 

maison, house ; maisons, houses. 

ville, town ; villes, towns. 

(2 ) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with s, #, or z, 
have the same form in the plural : 



286 PLURAL OF NOUNS. § 8. 



Singular, 


Plural. 


fils, son ; 


fils, sons. 


voix, voice ; 


voix, voices. 


nez, nose ; 


nez, noses. 



(3.) Second exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with au and 
«£, take x in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

chapeau, hat ; chapeaux, hats. 

feu, fire; . feux, fires. 

(4,) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take x 
in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

bijou, jewel ; bijoux, jewels. 

caillou, pebble ; cailloux, pebbles. 

chou, cabbage ; choux, cabbages. 

genou, knee ; genoux, knees. 

hibou, owl ; hiboux, owls. 

joujou, plaything ; joujoux, playthings. 

(b.) Fourth exception. — The following nouns ending in ail, change 
that termination into aux in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

bail, lease ; baux, leases. 

corail, coral ; coraux, corals. 

email, enamel; emaux, enamels. 

soupirail, air-hole ; soupiraux, air-holes. 

sous bail, under-lease ; sous-baux, under-leases 

travail, labor ; travaux, labors. 

(6.) Fifth exception. — The following nouns form their plural irreg- 
ularly : 

Singular. Plural. 

ail, garlic ; aux. 

betail, cattle. bestiaux. 

Bercail, sheepfold y has no plural. 
(7.) Sixth exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with aZ, change 
that termination into aux in the plural :* 

Singular. Plural. 

general, general ; generaux, generals. 

cheval, horse ; chevaux, horses. 

mal, evil ; maux, evils. 

(8.) Ciel, oeil, ai'eul, travail, have two plurals : 

Singular. Plural. 

ciel, heaven; cieux, heaven*. 

ciel \ testcr °f a bcd; ciels I tcsters °f bed *' 

{ sky of a picture; ( skies of pictures. 

* Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, jackal ; regal, treat, foUcw tha 
general rule. 



PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. § 9. 287 

ckIL. eye; yeux, eyes. 

ceil de-bceu£ oval window ; ceils-de-boeuf, oval windows* 

aieul ancestor ; aleux, ancestors. 

aieul, grandfather ; aieuls, grandfathers. 

travail, labor ; travaux, labors. 

travail, trave ; travails, traves. 

§ 9. — Plural of Compound Xouns. 

(1.) When two nouns form a compound substantive, both take the 
plural ending : 

Singular. Plural. 

chef-lieu, chief place ; chefs-lieux, chief places 

lieutenant-colonel, lieutenant- lieutenants -colonels, lieutenant- 
colonel. colonels. 

(2.) When a compound noun is formed of two substantives joined 
by a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending: 
Singular Plural. 

arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

chef-d'oeuvre, masterpiece ; chefs-d'oeuvre, masterpieces. 

'The words tete-a-t6te and coq-a-l'&ne (an incongruous discourse), remain 
unchanged in the plural. 

(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, botn 
are varied in the plural : 

Singular. Plural, 

gentilhomme, nobleman ; gentilshommes, noblemen. 

porte-cochere, carriage-door ; portes-cocheres, carriage-doors. 
basse-cour, poultry -yard ; basses-cours, poultry-yards, 

(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the plural* is emoted 
fi. the adjective of the following compound words: 
Singular. Plural. 

grand'mere, grandmother ; grand'meres, grandmothers. 

grand'messe, high-mass ; grand'messes, high-masses. 

(5.) The words, Monsieur, Sir, Mr., gentleman; Madame, Madam, 
or Mrs., Mademoiselle, Miss, form their plural as follows: 
Singular. Plural. 

Monsieur, Sir, etc. ; Messieurs, sirs, gentlemen. 

Madame, Madam, etc. ; Mesdames, ladies, etc. 

Mademoiselle, Miss, etc. ; Mesdemoiselles, young ladies, etc. 

(6.) In words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or an 
adverb, the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however 
there ia plurality in the idea. 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-port, passport ; passe-ports, passports. 

avant-garde, vanguard; avant-gardes, vanguard*. 

* The mark of the feminine also 



£88 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. § 10, 11, 12. 



(7.) Compound nouns of which the second word indicates plu- 
rality, take s in the singular and plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

cure-dents, a tooth-pick ; cure-dents, tooth-picks. 

caste-noisettes, nut-crackers ; caste-noisettes, nut-crackers. 

(8.) Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb joined to an ad- 
verb, or a preposition, are invariable : 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-partout, master-key ; passe-partout, master-keys. 

pour-boire, coachman } s fee ; pour-boire, coachman' 's fees. 

§ 10. — Nouns which have no Plural. 

(1.) The nouns of metals considered in themselves: as, or, gold, 
argent, silver ; plomb, lead; etain, pewter ; fer, iron; cuivre, copper ; 
vif argent, quicksilver, &c. 

(2.) Aromas : such as baume, balsam ; encens, incense, &c. 

(3.) The names of virtues and vices, and some names relating to 
physical and moral man: as, la jeunesse, youth; la beaute, be-auty ; la 
bonte, goodness ; le courage, courage. 

(4.) Adjectives used substantively : as, le beau, the beautiful ; Futile. 
'he useful, &c. 

§ 11. — Nouns which have no Singular in the sense herb 

given. 

Arrhes, 

Annales, 

Appas, 

Arrearages, 

Arrets (etre a 

Assises, 

Broussailles, 

Catacombes, 

Ciseaux, 

Confins, 

Denrees, 

Vivres, 

Decombres, 

Etrennes, 

Environs, 

Alentours, 

§ 12. — Proper Names. 

(I.) Proper names, when not used figuratively, are invariable, even 
when preceded by the plural article, les.(*) 



earnest money. 


Entraves, 


difficulties. 


annals. 


Fi an failles, 


betrothin'g. 


charms. 


Fune"railles, 


funeral. 


arrears. 


Frais, 


expenses, costs. 


, to be under arrest. 


Gages, 


wages. 


assizes. 


Gens, 


people. 


brushwood. 


Lunettes, 


spectacles. 


catacombs. 


Mceurs, • 


manners. 


scissors. 


Mouchettes, 


smiffers. 


confines. 


Pierreries, 


jewels, diamonds. 




Pincettes, 


tongs, 
tears. 


provisions. 


Pleurs, 


ruins. 


Semailles, 


seeding time. 


new year's presents. 


Tenebres, 


darkness. 


environs. 


Tenailles, 
Vitraux, 


pincers, 
window-glass. 



L'Espagne s'honore d'avoir pro- 
duit les deux Senequc. 

Kaynouard. 



Spain prides itself on having 
given b'ntJi to the two Senecas. 



* Often used by the French before the names of celebrated individuals 



THE ARTICLE. 8 13. 289 



Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. Rous- 
seau, as they arose in Europe, called 
upon modern nations to claim their 

liberty. 



Lea Locke, lea Montesquieu, lea 
/. J. Rousseau en se levant en 
Europe, appelerent lea peuples 
modernea a la liberie. 

Chateaubriand. 

(2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form 
of the plural. 

La France a eu sea Cesars et aea | France has had its Ccesars and 
Pompees. Noel et CHArsAL. | Pompeys. 

That is, generals like Pompey and Caesar. 

Un coup d'oeil de Louia enfan- I A glance from Louis produced 
taita dea Corneilles. Delille. | Corneilles. 

That is, poets like Corneille. 

§ 13. — The Article. 

(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word used 

substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. 

(2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, le. 

(3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used 
before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] 

(4.) The words un, masc, une, fern., answering to the indefinite 
article a or an in English, are now very properly* classed with 
the numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of conven- 
ience, devote a few lines to them under this head. 

(5.) The article le, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. 

(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes: elision [§ 146] 
and contraction. 

' (7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, which are replaced 
by an apostrophe [ ' ] before a vowel, or an h mute [seeL.3 (11)] : thus, 

l'eaprit, the mind, in8tead of le eaprit. 

Famine, the friendship, " la amitie\ 

l'homme, the man, u le hocune. 

l'humanite, humanity, * la humanity. 

(8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the 
prepositions, a, de. Thus, we say by contraction : 

au livre, to the book, inatead of a le xivre. 

aux fruita, to the fruits, " a lea fruita. 

du livre, of the book, " de le livre. 

dea fruita, of the fruits, " de lea fruits. 

(9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words 
commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before feminine words : 

* No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between 
a and one, bo that in French un homme meana a man, or one man. Tbs 
other numeral adjectives might with aa much propiiety have been called 
articles as this word un. 

13 



£90 



THE ARTICLE. § 13. 



a l'homme, to the man. 

a l'ami, to the friend. 

de rhomme, of the man. 

de l'ami, of the friend. 

(10.) The arti< le used before words taken in a partitive sense [5 78 
^1)], comes in connection or contraction with the preposition de; it is 
rendered in English by some or any, expressed or understood : 

du pain, m. some bread, or of the bread {a part of). 

de l'argent, m. money, some money, of the money (a part of) 

de la viande, f. meat, some meat, of the meat (a part of) 

de l'argenterie, f. silver-plate, some silver-plate, of the silver-plate(a part of). 
des livres, m. books, some books, of the books (apart of). 

(11.) The English indefinite article, a or an, is rendered in French 
by un for the masculine, and une for the feminine ; when those words 
are connected with the preposition de, the e of the preposition is 
elided . 



Masculine. 
un homme, a man. 
d'un homme, of or from a man. 
a un homme, at or to a man. 



Feminine. 
une femme, a woman 
d'une femme, of or from a woman. 
a une femme, at or to a woman. 



a consonant, 
! commencing with 
| a vowel or h micte, 

commencing with" 

a consonant, 
commencing with 
a vowel or h mute, 



Resume of the above Observations. 

le, before a masculine word, ( commencing with 
la, before a feminine word, \ 
T, before a word of either 

gender, 
les, for the plural, in all cases. 
du, before a masculine word, 
de la, before a feminine word, 
de T, before a word of either 

gender, 
des, for the plural, in all cases. 
au, before a masculine word, j commencing with 
a la, before a feminine word, \ a consonant, 
a T, before a word of either j commencing with 

gender, ( a vowel or h mute, 

aux, for the plural, in all cases. 
un, before a masculine noun, 
une, before a feminine noun, 
d'un, before a masculine noun, 
d'une, before a feminine noun, 
a u n, before a masculine noun, 
A une, before a feminine noun, 

Le pere et la mere sont au de- 
sespoir. B. de St. Pierre. 

2/amitie* dans nos coaurs verse mi 
bonheur paisible. Demoustier. 

X'honneur aux grands cceurs est 
plus cher que la Tie. Corneille. 

Zwfilles et les gar 90ns chanter ent 
en chceur. B. de St. Pierre. 



the. 



of the, 
from the, 
some, 
any. 



at or to the. 



a, an, one. 

of or from a, a*, on 

at or to a, an, one. 

The father and mother are t 1 
despair. 

Friendship pours a peaceful h<*£ • 
phiess into our hearts. 

Honor is dearer than life to m V « 
hearts. 

The boys and girls sang in cha *' < 



THE ADJECTIVE. § 14-1, § 14-2. 291 



Sur les rives du Gauge on voit 
fleurir /'6bene. Delille. 

La violette se cache tiroidement 
au milieu des fiiles de /'ombre. 
Deleuze. 

Le rernords se reveille au cri de 
la nature. De Bellot. 

La moitie des humains vit aux 



On the banks of the Ganges we see 
the ebony in bloom. 

The violet conceals herself 'timidly 
in the midst of the daughters of the 
shade. 

Remorse is aroused by the cry of 
nature. 

The half of mankind lives at the 



depens de /'autre. Destouches. ; expense of the other. 

§ 14-1. — The Adjective. 

(1.) The adjective serves to denote the quality or manner of being 
of the noun. 

(2.) Adjectives are of two sorts : qualifying adjectives and determin- 
ing adjectives. 

(3.) We call qualifying adjectives those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a quality proper to it; as bon, good; noble, noble; 
courageux, courageous. 

(4.) Determining adjectives are those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a particular limitation or determination ; as quelque, 
some ; tout, all ; autre, other ; mon, my ; nul, no ; un, one ; deux, two. 

§ 14-2. — Qualifying Adjectives. 

(1.) These adjectives may express qualities: 1. Simply; 2. With 
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de- 
grees of qualification : the positive, the comparative, and the superla- 
tive. 

(2.) The positive is nothing but the adjective in its simplest signi- 
fication : 

Moi, je suis a Paris, trisie, pauvre, I At Paris I am sad, poor, and Be- 
nches. Boileau. I eluded. 

(3.) The comparative is the adjective expressing a comparison be- 
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objects 
compared, a relation of equality, superiority, or inferiority. 

(4.) The comparison of equality expresses a quality in the same de- 
gree in the objects compared; it is formed* by placing aussi, as, or 
autant, as much, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, as, 
after it : 



L'AUemagne est aussi peuple*e 
que la France. Voltaire. 

A lour t6te est le chien, superbe 
autant ^w'utile. Delille. 



Germany is as populous as France 

At their head stands the dog, as 
noble as uscft*. 



* In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in English, by means of 
changes in the termination : with the exception of meilleur, better ; moin- 
dre, less ; and pire, worse, all comparisons must be formed by means of 
adverbs. 



292 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. § 14-2. 

(5.) Tha relation or comparison of superiority expresses a quality 
In a higher degree in one object than in another ; this comparison ia 
formed by placing plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than % 
after it : 



Actions are more sincere than 
words. 

The foot of the stag is better 
formed than that of the ox. 

(6.) The comparison of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower 
degree in one object than in another ; it is formed by placing moins, 
Jess, before the adjective, and que, than, after it: 



Les actions sont plus sinceres que 
les paroles. Mlle. de Scudery. 

Le pied du cerf est mieux fait que 
celui du boeuf. Buffon. 



Shipwreck and death are less fatal 
than those pleasures which attack 
virtue. 



Le naufrage et la mort sont moins 
funestes que les plaisirs qui atta- 
quent la vertu. Eenelon. 

(7.) We have only three adjectives which are comparatives of them- 
selves : meilleur, letter ;* moindre, less ; pire, worse. 

Meilleur, instead of plus Ion, which is never used in the sense of 
better : 

II n'est meilleur ami ni parent I We have no better friend, no bet- 
que soi-m6me. La Fontaine. | ter relation than ourselves. 

Pire, instead of plus mauvais, which may however be used: 

Le remede est parfois pire que le I The remedy is at times worse than 
mal. Lenoble. | the evil. 

Moindre, instead of plus petit, an expression also in use :- 

Ce n'est pas 6tre petit que d'etre I Being less than great is not being 
moindre qu'un grand. Boiste. j small. 

(8.) The superlative, or third degree of qualification, expresses the 
quality carried to a very high, or to the highest degree ; thence there 
are two sorts of superlatives : the relative and the absolute. 

* Mieux, better; pis, worse; moins, less. The English words better, 
worse, less, are sometimes adverbs, and when they are so, should be ren- 
dered by the several words placed at the commencement of this note. A 
practical way of determining the nature of those words in English is : 

1. To change the word better into the expression " in a better manner." 
If this change may be made without changing the sense, the word better 
is an adverb, and must be rendered by mieux : 

He reads better {in a better man- I II lit mieux que son frere. 
tier) than his brother. 

2. If you can change loorse into " in a worse manner" it should be trans- 
lated pis, or, more elegantly, plus mal : 

He reads worse {in a \oorse man- I II lit p is (plus mal) que son 
ner) than his brother. | frere. 

3. When you may substitute "a s)7ialler amount or quantity" for the 
word less, it should be rendered moint : 

He reads less {a smaller amount) I II lit moins que son frfere, 
than his brother. 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. § 15, 1C 



293 



(9.) The superlative relative marks a very high or the highest de- 
gree relatively, or with comparison : it is formed by placing la, la, les, 
the; mon, my; ton, thy; son, his; notre, our ; votre, your ; le'ir, leurs, 
their, before the comparative of superiority or inferiority : 



Un bienfait re9U est la plus sacree 
de toutes les dettes. Mme, Xecker. 

La probite reconnue est leplus sur 
U£ tous les serments. (The same) 



A benefit received is the most sa- 
cred of all debts. 

Acknowledged probity is the motf 
secure of all oaths. 



(10.) The words le plus, le moins, must be repeated before every ad- 
jective : 



Ce sont les livres les plus agre- 
ables, les plies universellement lus, 
et les plus utiles. 

Bernardix de St. Pierre. 



These books are the most agree- 
able, the most universally read, and 
the most useful. 



(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree, 
but, absolutely, without comparison : it is formed by placing before 
the adjective one of these words, tres,fort, infiniment, extremement, &c. : 



H y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, 
de fort sottes gens. La Bruyere. 

Je vou3 prie de croire que je ne 
Bonge qua vous, et que vous m'etes 
entremement chtre. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 



There are in cities, as elsewhere, 
very silly people. 

I beg you to believe that you are 
my only thought, and that you are 
extremely dear to me. 



§ 15. — Gender and number of Adjectives. 

(1.) The adjective has, of itself, neither gender nor number ; it must 
assume the gender and number of the noun to which it belongs. 

(2.) The termination of the adjective varies according to the gender 
and number of the noun which it qualifies or determines : 



Un homme prudent. 

A prudent man. 
Des homme s prudents. 

Prudent men. 



Une femme prudente. 

A prudent woman. 
Des femmes prudtntes. 

Prudent women. 



§ 16. — Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives. 
(1.) All adjectives ending with e mute, remain unchanged in the 
feminine : 



Masculine. 
Un homme agreable. 

An agreeable man. 
Un mur solide. 

A strong wall. 



Feminine. 
Une femme agreable. 

An agreeable woman. 
Une maison solide. 

A strong {well built) house. 



(2.) Adjectives not ending in e mute form, their feminine by the ad- 
dition of e: 



Masculine. 
Un garden diligent, 

A diligent boy. 
Un homme poll. 

A polite man. 



Feminine. 
Une fille diligente. 

A diligent girl. 
Une dame polie. 

A polite lady. 



204 

(3.) Exceptions : 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. — § lb, 





' BL^ 




EIL 




EX 


djecth es 


ET 


ending uT 


ON 




F 




S 




, X > 



Change those 
terminations 
for the femi- \ 
nine into 



ELLE, 
EILLE, 
ENNE, 
ETTE, 
ONXE, 
VE, 
SSE, 
SE, 



Mas. 
tel, _ 
pareil, 
ancien, 
muet, 
bon, 
neuf, 
gras, 



Fern. 

telle, 

pareille, 

ancienne, 

muette, 

bonne, 

neuve, 

grasse, 



tuck, 
like, 
ancieni 
mute, 
good, 
new. 
fat. 



heureux, heureuse, happy. 
(4.) The following, although ending with these terminations, fori* 
their feminine otherwise : 



complet, 
concret, 
discret, 


complete y 
concretiy 
discreet, 


inquiet, 

secret, 

replet, 


uneasy, 

secret, 

replete. 


mauvais, 

niiis, 

ras, 


bad, ) 
silly, 
close-shorny ] 


doux, 

faux, 

prefix, 

roux, 

tiers, 


softy sweety 

false. 

prefixedy 

reddish, 

third, 



make in the feminine 



r complete. 

concrete. 

discrete. 

inquiete. . 

secrete. 
te replete. 

follow the general rule C mauvaise. 
and make in the < niaise. 
feminine ( rase. 

" douce. 



make in the feminine- 



fausse. 
prefixe. 
rousse. 
tierce. 



(5.) Adjectives ending in eur, as also some substantives of the 

game termination, have three several modes of forming the feminine : 

1st. Those which are derived from the participle present of a 

French verb by dropping ant, and substituting ear, change the final 

letter (r) into se, as 

Pres. Part Masculine. Feminine. 

dansan£, whence dansmr; and thence danseusf 
trompan^, " trompewr; " trompeuse. 

Here, however, note that chanteur, when signifying a professional 
singer, takes for the feminine cantatrke. Like anomalies appear in 
the following : 



ambassadeur> ambassador, 
bailleur, lessor, 
chasseur, hunter, 
demandeur, plaintiff, 
defendeur, defendant, 
devineur, gucsser, 
enchanteur, enchanter, 
gouverneur, governor, 
pecheur, sinner y 
serviteur, servant. 



make in the 
feminine 



" ambassadrice. 
bailleresse. 
chasseresse. 
donianderesse. 
defenderease. 
devineresse. 
enchanteresse. 
gouvemante. 
pecheresse. 
servante. 



2 d. Those ending in teur and derived from the Latin, and, consequent* 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. § 16. 



205 



y, not falling under the ruie (1st) just given, form the feminine by 
changing teur into trice; as, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

acteur, actor y actrice, actress. 

admirateur, admirer, admiratrice, admirer 

Exceptions to this, however, are the following: 



debiteur, debtor, 
executeur, executor, 
inspeeteur, inspector, 
inventeur, inventor, 
persecuteur, persecutor, 



make in the 
feminine 



" debitrice. 

executrice. 

inspectrice. 

inventrice. 
h persecutrice. 



3 d. Those ending in erieur. also majeur, mineur, meilleur, follow 
the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, 

f exterieure. 

make in the] ^^ 
feminine \ .J 



exterieur, exterior, 
6uperieur, superior, 
majeur, of age, major, 
mineur, minor, 
meilleur, better, 



nuneure. 
[meilleure. 



(6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exe: 
rised by men, are alike in the masculine and the feminine ; as, 
auteur, author ; litterateur, literary person. 

(7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the masculine 
form their feminine as follows : 

Masculine before Masculine before 

a consonant. a vowel or h mute. Feminine. 

beau, bel, belle, handsome. 

fou, fol, folle, foolish. 

mou, mol, molle, soft. 

nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new. 

vieux, vieil, vieille, old. 

Irregular Adjectives. 
(8.) The following adjectives form their feminine ii regularly . 



Masculine. 
ab:-ous, absolved, 
benin, benign, 
blanc, white, 
caduc, decrepit, infirm, 
coi, quiet, 
dis-ous, dissolved, 
favori, favorite, 
frais, fresh, 
franc, free, frank, 
gentil, pretty, genteel, 
grec, Grecian, Greek, 
hebrew, Hebrew, 

jouvenceau (obsolete), a stripling, 



Feminine. 
absoute. 
benigne. 
blanche, 
caduque. 
coite. 
dissoute. 
favorite, 
fraiche. 
franche. 
gentille. 
grecque. 
hebraique, used only of the 

Hebrew tongue, 
jouvencelle. 



296 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. § 17. 

Masculine. Feminine, 

jumeau, twin, jumelle. 

long, long, slow, longue. 

maitre, master, masterly, maitresse. 

malin, cunning, malignant, maligne. 

mulatre, mulatto, mulatre or mulatreese. 

muscat, muscat, muscade. 

nul, null, none, nulle. 

oblong, oblong, oblongue. 

public, public, publique. 

resous, resolved, changed, resolue. 

sec, dry, barren, seche. 

sot, silly, sotte. 

traitre, traitor, treacherous, traitresse. 

turc, Turkish, turque. 

vieillot, oldish, vieillotte. 
(9. The following have no feminine : 

artisan, mechanic. partisan, partisan. 

chatain, chesnut color. temoin, witness. 

dispos, active, velin, vellum, of vellum. 

§ 17. Formation of the Plural of Adjectives. 
(1.) General Rule. — The plural of adjectives is formed by the ad« 
dition of s to the masculine, or to the feminine termination : 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Singular. Plural. 


Singidar. Plural 


grand, great, grands ; 


grande, grandes. 


petit, small, petits ; 


petite, petites. 



(*2.) This rule has no exceptions with regard to the feminine ter- 
mination. 

(3.) With regard to the masculine termination, it is subject to the 
three following exceptions : 

First Exception. — Adjectives ending in the singular with s or a\ do 
not change their form in the plural : _ 

Singular. Plural. 

heureux, happy, heureux. 

doux, sweet, soft, doux. 

Second Exception. — Adjectives having in the singular the termina- 
tion eauy form their plural masculine by the addition of x : 
Singular. Plural. 

beau, handsome, beautiful, beaux. 

jumeau, twin, jumeaux. 

nouveau, new, nouveaux. 

Third Exception. — Adjectives ending in al, form their plural ma* 
euline by changing al into aux : 

Singular. Plural. 

liberal, liberal, liboraux. 

national, national, nationaux. 

rural, rural, rurauec 



AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. § 18. 



297 



We quote from Bescherelle's Grammaire nationale, the adjectives 
which form their plural in als : 

Singular. Plural. 

amical, friendly, amicals. 

bancal, bandy-legged, bancals. 

fatal, fatal, fatal,?, 

final, final, finals, 

frugal, frugal, frugals. 

filial, filial, filiate. 

glacial, frozen, icy, glacials, 

initial, initial, initials, 

labial, labial, labials, 

matinal, early, matinals. 

medial, medial, medials. 

naval, naval, navals. 

pascal, paschal, pascals, 

penal, penal, penals. 

theatral, theatrical, theatrals. 



§ 18. — Agreement of Adjectives with Nouns. 

(1.) The adjective must agree, in gender and number, with the 
noun or pronoun which it qualifies : 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



Singular. 
le beau jardin, 
the fine garden, 
le grand livre, 
the large book, 



Plural. 
les beaux jardins ; 
the fine gardens ; 
les grands livres ; 
the large books ; 



Singular. 
la belle maison, 
the fine house, 
la grande carte, 
the large map, 



Plural. 
les belles maisons. 
the fine houses. 
les grandes cartes, 
the large maps. 



(2.) This agreement must take place, not only when the adjective 
immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when 
it is separated by other words : 



Masculine. 

Singular. — Plaise a Dieu de te 
rendre assez bon pour meriter la vie 
heureuse ! Fenelon. 

May God render thee sufficiently 
good to deserve the blessed life. 

Plural. — Jamais, en quoi que ce 
puisse 6tre les mechants ne sont 
tons a rien de bon. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

The wicked are never, in any cir- 
cumstances, fitted {good) to perform 



Feminine. 

Singular. — L'honneur de passer 
pour bonne l'empdchait de se mon- 
trer mauvaise. Marivaux. 

The honor of passing for good pre- 
vented her showing herself bad. 

Plural. — Loin de nous raidir con- 
tre les inclinations qui sont bonnes, 
il faut les suivre pour servir Dieu. 
Mme. de Maintenon. 

Far from resisting our good incli- 
nations, we should follow them in 
order to serve God. 



any tiling good. 

(3.) When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, 
whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it 
must agree with the nouns in gender, and be put in the plural ; 

Le riche et r indigent, l'imprudent et I The rich and the poor, the twi- 
le sage, | prudent and the mse, being 

13* 



298 



ADJECTIVES. — § 19, 20. 



Sujets a meme loi, subissent m6me 1 Subject to the same law, experience 
sort. J. B. Rousseau. | the same fate, 

(4.) When ihe words which the adjective qualifies are of different 
genders, the adjective must be put in the masculine plural : 



Je tache de rendre heureux, ma 
femme, mon enfant, et rneme mon 
chat et mon chien 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 
L'ordre et l'utilite publics ne peu- 
vent etre le fruit du crime. 

Massillon. 



/ try to render happy, my wife t 
my child, and even my cat and my 
dog. 

Public order and utility cannot be 
the fruits of crime. 



For special rules on this point, see \ 83. 



§ 19. — Determining or Determinative Adjectives. 

There are four sorts of determining adjectives — the demonstrative, 
the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite. 

§ 20. — Demonstrative Adjectives. 

(1.) The demonstrative adjectives are used, when an object is to 
be particularly specified or pointed out. They are never, in French, 
used substantively, that is, without the nouns which they determine : 

Singular. 
Masculine. — Ce, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 

consonant. 
Cet, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 
vowel or an h mute. 
Feminine. — Cette, this or that, placed before all sorts of nouns. 

Plural. 
Ces for both genders. 

Examples. 



Masculine singular. 
ce soldat, this or that soldier. 

cet ami, that or this friend. 

cet homme, this or that man. 



Plural. 



Feminine singular. 
cette femme, this or that woman. 
cette e'pee, that or this sioord. 
cette harpe, this or that harp. 



ces hommes, these or those men ; 

Voyez ce papillon echappe du tom- 

oeau ; 
Sa mort fut un sommeil, et sa tombe 

un berceau. Delille. 

. . . . Cet admirable don, 

L'instinct, sans doute est loin de 

l'auguste raison. (The same.) 

La, cette jeune plante en vase dis- 
posed, 

Dans sa coupe elegante accueille la 
rasee. (The same.) 



ces femmes, these or those women. 

See that butterfly escaped from the 
tomb ; his death was a slumber, and 
his tomb a cradle. 

That admirable gift, i?istinct, is 
doubtless far beneath majestic rea- 
son. 

There that young plant prepared 
as a vase, receives the dew in its 
elegant cup* 



POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. — 8 21. 



299 



Do these honors, admired by the 
vulgar, awake the dead from their 
sepulchres ? 



Oes honneurs que le vulgaire ad- 
mire, 

ReVeillent-ils les morts au sein de 
monuments ? Soulie. 

(2.) When it is necessary to make, in French, a difference similar 
to that existing between the English words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and Id must be placed after the nouns : 



ce livre-ci, this book (here), 
ces livres-ci, these books, 



ce livre-la, that book (there), 
ces livres-la, those books. 



§ 21. — Possessive Adjectives. 

(1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined to a noun, 
relate to possession or property; they are: 

Singular. Plural 

Masculine. Feminine. for both genders. 



mon, 


ma, 


ton, 


ta, 


son, 


sa, 


notre, 


notre, 


votre, 


votre, 


leur, 


leur, 



mes, 
tes, 

ses, 


my. 
thy, 
his, her, its. 


nos, 


our. 


vos, 
leurs, 


your, 
their. 



(2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of 
the object possessed, and not, as in English, those of the possessor* 



Masc. sing. Fern. sing. 

mon frere, my brother, ma soeur, my sister, 

ton livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, 

eon papier, his or her sa table, his or her ta- 

paper. ble. 

notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, 
votre lit, your bed, 
leur foin, their hay, 



PL both genders. 
mes cousins, my cousins. 
tes maisons, thy houses. 
ses habits, his or Jier 

clothes. 
nos prairies, our meadows. 
votre chaise, your chair, vos crayons, your pencils. 
leur paille, their straw, leurs fermes, their farms. 



Sobri^te dans toute chose, 
Mon ami, c'est l'art de jouir. 

Du Tremblay. 

Ma main de quelque fleur es- 
quisse la peinture. Castel. 

Mes sens sont glaces d'eflroi. 

J. B. Rousseau. 

De son propre artifice on est sou- 
rent victime. 

Colin d'Harleville. 

A sa vocation chaque etre doit 
repondre. Fr. de Neufchateau. 

II faut de ses amis endurer quel- 
le chose. Moliere. 

Notre vie est une maison, 
Y mettre le feu c'est folic 

Nivernais. 



Sobriety in all things, is, my 
friend, the true enjoyment. 

My hand sketches the picture oj 
some flower. 

My senses are frozen with fear. 

One is often the victim of his own 
artifice. 

Every being should fulfil his vo- 
cation. 

We must bear something from our 
friends. 

Our life is a house ; to set it on 
fire is folly. 



300 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 22. 



Vos mailles se rompront sous la 
charge pesante. Castel. 

Leurs fleurs suivront mes pas, en 
recreant ma vue. (The same.) 



Your meshes will break under th* 

heavy burden. 

Their flowers will follow my steps, 
and please my sight. 

(3.) The adjectives mon, my; ton, thy ; son, his or her, are used in- 
stead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine words commencing with a vowel 
or an h mute, in order to prevent the meeting of two vowek, or of a 
vowel and an h mute ; thus we say : 

mon dpee, my sword, and never ma epe*e. 
ton epouse, thy wife, instead of ta epouse. 
son armee, his army, but never sa armee. 

C'en est fait, mon heure est venue. All is over, my hour is come. 

Boileau. 

(4.) The possessive adjectives must be repeated before every 
noun: 



Mon freVe, ma sceur et mes cou- ! 
Bins sont a Paris. 



My brother, sister, and cousins art 
at Paris. 



§ 22. — Numeral Adjectives. 

(1.) There are two kinds of numeral adjectives: the cardinal and 
the ordinal. 

(2.) The cardinal numbers indicate simply the number or quantity, 
without any reference to order: as, un, one; deux, two, &c. 

(3.) The ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persons 
and things occupy : as, premier, first ; second, second, &c. 

We shall, for the purposes of comparison, place the cardinal and 
ordinal numbers in parallel columns: 



(4.) Cardinal Numbers. 




(5.) Ordinal Numbers 




un, feminine une, 


one. 


premier, feminine 


premiere 


, first. 


deux, 


2 


deuxieme or seccnd,/. seconde, 2d. 


trois, 


3 


troisieme, 




3d 


quatre, 


4 


quatrieme, 




4th. 


cinq, 


5 


cinquieme, 




5th. 


six, 


6 


sixieme, 




6th. 


sept, 


7 


septieme, 




7th, 


huit, 


8 


huitieme, 




8th. 


neuf, 


9 


neuvieme, 




9th. 


dix, 


10 


dixieme, 




10th. 


onze, 


11 


onzieme, 




11th. 


douze, 


12 


douzieme. 




12 th. 


treize, 


13 


treizieme, 




13th. 


quatorze, 


14 


quatorzieme, 




14th. 


quinze, 


15 


quinzieme, 




15th. 


seize, 


16 


seizieme, 




16th. 


dix-sept, 


17 


dix-eeptieme, 




nth. 


dix-huit, 


18 


dix-huitieme, 




18th. 


dix-neu£ 


19 


(lix-nouvieme, 




19th. 


vingt, 


20 


vingtieme, 

1 vingt-et-unieme, 




20th. 


vingt-et-un, 


21 




21st 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 23. 



301 



Ordinal Nwnibtri 

vingt-deuxieme, <fcc, 22cL 

trentienie, 30th, 

trente-et-unieme, 31st. 

trente-deuxieme, 32d. 

quarantieme, 40th. 

quarante-et-unieme, 41st. 

quarante-deuxieme, 42d. 

cinquantieme, 50 th. 

cinquante-et-uni&me, 51st. 

cinquante-deuxieme, 5 2d. 

soixantieme, 60th. 

soixante-et-unieme, 61st. 

soixante-deuxieme, 62d. 

soixante-dixieme, 70th. 

soixante-onzieme, 7 1st. 

soixante-douzieme, 7 2d. 

soixante-treizieme, 73d. 

soixante-quatorzieme, 74th. 

soixante-quinzieme, 75th. 

soixante-seizieme, 76th. 

soixante-dix-septieme, 77th. 

soixante-dix-huitieme, 78 th. 

soixante-dix-neuvieme. 79th. 

quatre-vingtienie, 80th. 

quatre-vingt-unieroe, 81st. 

quatre-vingt-deuxieme, 82d. 

quatre-vingt-dixienie, 90th. 

quatre-vingt-onzierne, 91st. 

quatre-vingt-douzieme, 92d. 

centieme, 100th, 

cent-unieme, 101st. 

deux-centieme, 200th. 

deux-cent-unieme, 201st. 

trois-centieme, 300th. 

trois-cent-unienie, 301st. 

millieme, 1000th. 

deux-millieme, 2000th. 
deux-mille-cinquantierne, 2050th. 
millionieme, 1,000000th. 

§ 23. — Variations of the Cardinal Numbers. 
(1.) The following cardinal numbers vary: 

(2.) Un, one, a or an, takes the gender of t le noun to which it l 
prefixed : 

un livre, a book ; une feuille, a leaf. 
When used substantively, un takes, at times, the form of tht 
plural. 

Jllasc. Les uns et les autres, These and those, 

Fern. Les unes et les autres, {The ones and the others). 

(3.) Vingl and cent, when multiplied by one number, and not fol- 
lowed by another, take the form of the plural : 

qu&tre-vingts, eighty ; six cents, six hundred. 



Cardinal Numbei s. 


▼ingt-deux, (fee, 


22 


trente, 


30 


trente-et un, &c, 


31 


trente-de ux, 


32 


quarante, 


40 


quarante-et-un, (fee,, 


41 


quarante- deux, 


42 


cinquanie, 


50 


cinquante-et-un, 


51 


cinquante-deux, 


52 


soixante, 


60 


soixante-et-un, 


61 


soixante-deux, <fec, 


62 


soixante-dix, 


70 


soixante-onze, 


71 


soixante-douze, 


72 


soixante-treize, 


73 


soixante-quatorze, 


74 


soixante-quinze, 


75 


soixante-seize, 


76 


soixante- dix-sept, 


77 


soixante-dix-huit, 


78 


soixante-dix-neuf, 


79 


quatie-vingts, 


80 


quatre-vingt-un, 


81 


quatre-vingt-deux. 


82 


quatre-vingt-dix. 


90 


quatre-vingt-onze 


91 


quatre-vingt-douze, <fcc., 


92 


cent, 


100 


cent-un, 


101 


deux-cents, 


200 


deux-cent-un, 


201 


trois-cents, 


300 


trois-cent-un, 


301 


mille, 


1000 


deux-mille, 


2000 


deux-mille-cinquante, 


2050 


un million, 


1,000000 



303 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 24. 



L'homme vit quax re-vingts ans, 
le chien n'en vit que lix. Buffon. 

On m'app >rta chez moi, douze 
oe?Us francs. J. J. Rousseau. 



Man lives eighty years, the dog 

only ten. 

They brought me, at my house t 

twelve hundred francs. 

(4.) Vingt and t ent, however, when multiplied by one number, and 
followed by another, or, if not followed by a number, used to indi- 
cate a particular epoch, do not take the form of the plural. 

quatre-wY^-cinq honimes, eighty-five men. 

cinq-ce?^-deux hommes, five hundred and two men. 



Charlemagne fut prociame em- 
pereur d'Occident, le jour de Noel, 
en huit cent. Voltaire. 



Charlemagne was proclaimed em- 
peror of the West, Christmas-day, 
in the year eight hundred. 



(5.) Mille — (thousand.) For the date of the year, reckoned from 
the commencement of the Christian era to the year two thousand 
of the same, we use the abbreviated form, mil. 

L'an mil huit cent cinquante, The year one thousand eight hun- 

I dred and fifty. 

(6.) With regard to the years which have preceded our era, and 
those which will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, 

mille. 

La premiere irruption des Gaulois, 
eut lieu sous le regne de Tarquin, 
environ l'an du monde trois mille 
quatre cent seize. Vertot. 



The first irruption of the Gauls 
took place under the reign of Tar- 
quin, about the year of the world 
3416. 



(7.) Million, billion take the plural form. 

§ 24. — Miscellaneous Observations on the Cardinal 

Numbers. 

(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty 
&c, the larger number must always precede the smaller. We may 
not say, as often in English, one and twenty, but always vingt-et-un^ 
vingt-deux, &c. 

(2.) The conjunction et, after vingt, trente, &c, is only used before 
un : thus, we say vingt-et-un, twenty (and) one, and simply vingt-deux, 
twenty-two, &c. 

(3.) The word one frequently precedes in English the words hun~ 
dred and thousand; it must not be rendered in Frencn. We say: 

mille hommes, one thousand men. 

cent francs, one hundred francs. 

(4.) When the words cent and mille are used substantively before 
the name of c bjects generally reckoned or sold by the hundred or 
thousand, in number or in weight, the word un may be placed before 
them ; the name of the object being preceded by the preposi- 
tion de 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 25, 308 

Un cent, un rnille (millier) de briques, 
One hundred, one thousand (of) bricks. 
Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, 
One hundred {weight) of sugar. 

(5.) The words septante, seventy ; octante, eighty; and nonante, 
mnety, are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces 
of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced 
by awkward expressions soixante-dix, sixty-ten ; quatre-vingts, fortr- 
iwenlies (four score) ; quatre-vingt-dix, four-score-ten, &c. 

(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the arti- 
cle i3 not elided. We say le onze, le onzieme, la onzieme. In pro- 
nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this articJe pre- 
cedes onze or onzieme. 

§ 25. — Observations on the Ordinal Numbers. 

(1.) It will be seen that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of 
premier and second, are formed from the cardinal — 

1. By the change of/ into vieme in neuf; 

2. By the change of e into vieme in those ending with that vowel ; 

3. By the addition of vieme in those ending with a consonant : 

4. Cinq requires uieme to make cinquieme, fifth. 

(2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural. 

(3.) Premier and second alone vary for the feminine, and make 
premiere, seconde, &c. 

(4.) Unieme (first) is only used in composition with vingt, trente, &c. 

(5.) Second, deuxieme, (second) — Deuxieme supposes a series, a con- 
tinuation ; second merely indicates the order : 

1st. We may say of a work which has four or more volumes : 
J'ai le deuxieme (or le second) vo- 1 / have tlie second volume of that 
lume de cet ouvrage. | work. 

2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumes, we should say ■ 



I have the second volume of Bes- 
cherdle's dictionary. 



JTai le second (not le deuxieme) 
volume du dictionnaire de Bescher- 
dle. 

3d. Under tlie ordinal numbers may be placed the following words, 
which are often used substantively : 

Trentenaire, thirty, of thirty years' luration; 

Quarantenaire, forty, of forty " " 

Cinquantenaire, fifty years old, of fifty " " 

Sexagt'naire, sexagenarian, of sixty " " 

Septuagenaire, septuagenarian, of seventy " " 

Octogenaire, octogenarian, of eighty u M 

Nonagenaire, nonogenarian, of ninety " u 

Centenaire, centenarian, of one hundred u 

4th. Trentenaire and quarantenaire are law terms: 
Possession trentenaire, quarante- | Thirty, forty years 1 po*8e$$ion. 
nfdre. 



304 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 26, x7. 



5th. Of the others, sexagSnaire, septuagenaire, and octogenaire only ore 
in frequent use : 

IJn octogenaire plantait, <fcc. A man eighty yean old was plant 

La Fontaine. j ing trees. 

§ 26. — Rules. 
(1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- 
dinal, not the ordinal number ; 

le deux mars, the second of March. 

le dix-sept avril, the seventeenth of April. 

L'ouverture des Etats-gene*raux 1 The opening of the States-general 

eut lieu le cinq mai, 1789. — Thiees. f took place on the fifth of May, 1789. 

(2.) We must, however, say : 

le premier (not Vun) juin, the first of June. 

(3.) The cardinal numbers are also employed in speaking of sove- 
reigns and princes : 



Charles the Tenth. 
Lewis the Eighteenth. 
Lewis the Eleventh was thirty-eight 
years old when he ascended the 
throne. 

The death of Gregory the Seventh 
did not extinguish the fire which he 
had kindled. 



Henry the First. 



Charles dix, 
Louis dix-huit, 
Louis onze avait trente-huit ans, 
quand il monta sur le tr6ne. 

Anquetil. 
La mort de Gregoire sept n'6tei- 
gnit pas le feu qu'il avait allume. 
Voltaire. 

(4.) We must say, however : 

Henri premier, 
(5.) Deux and second are, in this case, used indifferently : 

Charles deux, Charles second, Charles the Second. 

(6.) In speaking of Charles the Fifth, of Germany, and of the Pope 
Sixtus the Fifth, the obsolete word quint (fifth) is used : 

Charles-^wm*, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte-quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

We shall, in order to render reference easier, place here some ob- 
servations on nouns and adverbs of number. 

§ 27. — Numeral Nouns. 
(1.) The numeral nouns in use 



units', 

couple, paire, 

trio, 

demi-douzaine, 

huitaine, 

neuvamn 

dizaine, 
douzaine, 
quinzaine, 
vingtaine, 



unit ; 

couple, pair ; 
trio, three; 
half dozen ; 
eight days ; 
nine {nine days of 

prayer) ; 
ten, half a score ; 
dozen ; 

fifteen, fortnight ; 
score, twenty ; 



with the French are 


: 


trentaine, 


thirty ; 


quarantaine, 


two score ; 


cinquantaine, 


fifty ; 


soixantaine, 


sixty ; 


quatre-vingtaine, 


eighty ; 


1 centaine, 


hiuuirea ; 


deux centaines, dte. 


two hundred ; 


1 millier, 


one thousand; 


deux milliers, 


two thousand; 


1 myriade, 


a myriad; 


1 million, 


a million* 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. — § 28, 29, 30. 



305 



(2.) The termination aine signifies nearly, and when added to words 
of number i3 equivalent to the English some, in cases like the follow- 
ing : I have some twenty books, i. e. about twenty books. Pai une 
vingtaine de livres. 



28. — Fractional Numerals. 



un quart, 
deux quarts, 
trois quarts, 
le tiers, 
deux tiers, 
la moitie> 



one quarter ; 
two quarters; 
three quarters; 
the third; 
two thirds ; 
the half; 



un cinquieme, 
deux cinquiemes, 
un sixieme, etc., 
un dixieme, eta, 
un centieme, 
un millieme, 



one fifth; 
two fifths ; 
one sixth, etc, ; 
one tenth, etc, ; 
one hundredth ; 
one thousandth. 



(1.) It will be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and moi- 
tie, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They may, 
therefore, take the form of the plural when necessary. 

(2.) The word demi, when used adjectively and preceding the noun, 
is invariable : 

une demi-he-are £, half an hour ; 

une demi-swie f., half an ell, 

(3.) When coming after the noun to denote an additional half, it 
agrees in gender with the noun : 

une heure et demie, one hour and a half; 

une aune et demie, one ell and a half 

(4.) When used substantively, demi may take the form of the plural : 

Cette horloge sonne les heures et I This clock strikes the hours and 
les demies. \ the half hours. 



■\ 



29. — Ordinal Adverts. 



first; 
in the first 
place ; 

secondly ; 
thirdly ; 

(2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition oi 
merit to the feminine form of the adjective. 



(1.) Premierement, 



Deuxiemement, \ 
Secondement, ( 
Troisiemement, 



Quatriemement, 

Cinquiemement, 

Sixiemement, 

Septiemement, 

Dixiemement, 



fourthly ; 
fifthly; 
sixthly ; 
seventhly; 
tenthly. 



§ 30. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) The indefinite adjectives are used when any thing is to be 
represented or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They 
are,— 

what ; 

whatever ; 

some ; 

such; 

all 



aucun, not any, not one ; 


quel, 


chaque, every, each; 


quelconque, 


me me, same; 


quelque, 


nul, no ; 


tel, 


plusieura, several; 


tout, 



306 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 



(&) Aucun is generally followed by a noun, with which it must 
agree. It is followed by ne when it comes before a verb : 

aucun homme, no man ; aucune femme, no woman. 



Aucun chemin de fleurs ne conduit 
a la gloire. La Fontaine. 

On raeprise tous ceux qui n'ont 
aucune vertu. La Rochefoucauld. 



No flowery path leads to glory 

All those who have no virtue art 
despised. 



(3.) Aucun is by the French authors sometimes used in the plural . 



They can bear no legitimate do- 
minion, set no bounds to their crimes. 



Us ne peuvent souffrir aucun em- 

Eire legitime, ne mettent aucunes 
ornes a leurs attentats. 

Montesquieu. 

Aucun and nul should be put in the plural only before such words 
as are not used in the singular, or have in the singular a different 
acceptation. 

(4.) Chaque is of both genders, and is used only in the singular. 
It always precedes the noun, and cannot be separated from it by an 
adjective or by a preposition. It should never be used without a 



Chaque age a ses plaisirs, chaque I Every age has its pleasures, every 
e'tat a ses charmes. Delille. | situation its charms. 

(5.) Meme, placed before the noun, has the sense of same, in 
English. Placed after the noun, it means, generally, himself, herself 
itself or themselves. It may often be rendered by the word even. 
When meme is an adjective it may take the form of the plural, but 
does not vary on ace ;>unt of gender : 



e'est la meme vertu ; 
it is the same virtue. 

Le peuple et les grands n'ont ni 
les memes vertus, ni les mimes vices. 
Vauyenargues. 
Les e'eorces memes des vegetaux 
Bont en harmonie avec les tempera- 
tures de l'atmosphere. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 



e'est la vertu meme ; 
it is virtue itself. 

The people and the great have 
neither the same virtues nor the same 
vices. 

The bark even of vegetables is in 
harmony with the temperature of the 
atmosphere. 



(6.) It is at times difficult to distinguish meme an adjective from 
meme an adverb, which is invariable. [See \ 97 (2,) (3.)] 

(7.) Nul is a stronger negative than aucun. It agrees in gender 
and number with the noun which it qualifies. Like aucun, when re 
lating to the subject of the sentence, it requires ne before the verb 



Nul homme n'est heureux ; nulle 
chose ne peut le rendre tel. Boiste. 

Nulle paix pour Timpie; il la 
cherche, elle le fuit. Racine. 



No man is happy ; nothing can 
render him so. 

No peace for the impious ; he seeki 
it, it avoids him. 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 



307 



(8.) Nul i3 sometimes used aloae, in the sense of no one: 



Nul n'est content de sa fortune, 
ni mecontent de son esprit. 

Mme. Deshoulieres. 



No one is pleased toith his fortune, 
nor displeased with his own wit* 



(9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural. 
*ary its form : 



It does not 



V. faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs 
••aisons d'ennui, quand tout le inonde 
«?st d'accord pour bailler. Florian. 



There must necessarily be several 
reasons for ennui, ichen all agree in 
yawning. 

(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which it 
nlates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from 
which it may be separated by one or several words : 



Quel tableau ravissant presentent 
les campagnes 1 Delille. 

Quelle invisible force a sounds 
1'univers ? L. Racine. 

Quels sons harmonieux, quels efforts 

ravissant s, 
De la reconnaissance egalent les 

accents ? 



What a delightful picture the 
country offer* I 

What invisible hand lias con- 
quered the universe ? 

What harmonious sounds, what 
ravishing strains, equal the voice of 
gratitude ? 



(11.) Quelconque is always placed after the noun, and varies only 
for the plural : 



Toutes les jouissances sont pre- 
cedees d'un travail quelconque. 

Mme. Camp an. 

Deux points quelconques etant 
donnes The Academy. 



All enjoyments are preceded by 
some sort of exertion. 



Two points of some kind being 
given 

(12.) Quelque in the sense of some (a certain number), or whatever, 
agrees in number with the noun : 



H y a du merit e sans elevation, 
mais il n'y a point d'elevation sans 
quelque merit e. La Rochefoucauld. 
Quelques vains lauriers que pro- 

mette la guerre, 
On peut 6tre heros sans ravager la 

terre. Boileau. 



There is merit without elevation, 
but there is no elevation without some 
merit. 

Whatever vain laurels war may 
promise, one may be a hero without 
ravaging the earth. 



(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however, is in- 



variable : 

Quel age avez-vous ? Vous avez 
bon visage ! Eh ! quelque soixante 
ano. Racine, les Plaideurs. 

Alexandre perdit quelque trois 
cents hoinmes, quaud il vainquit 
Porus. D'Ablancourt. 

Quelque mechants que soient les 
hommes, ils n'oseraient paraitre 
ennemis de la vertu. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



How old are you ? You looJc well. 
Oh ! some sixty years. 

Alexander lost so?ne three hundred 
men when he vanquished Porus. 

However wicked men may be, they 
do not dire to appear enfmiet of 

virtue. 



308 the rRONOUN. — § 31, 32. 

(14.) Tel makes in the feminine telle; in the plural masculir^ 
tels ; in the plural feminine, lelles. It agrees with the noun which it 
qualifies : 

tel livre, such book; telle lettre, such letter ; 

tels livres, such books ; telles lettres, such letters. 

(15.) Tout meaning every, is of course always in the singular, 
bat varies for the feminine: 



Tout citoyen doit servir son pays ; 
le soldat de son sang, le pretre de 
son zele. La Motte. 

En toute chose, il faut considerer 
la fin. La Fontaine. 



Every citizen should serve his 
country ; the soldier with his bloody 
the priest with his zeal. 

In every thing we must consider 
the end. 



(16.) Tout, in the sense of all, agrees in gender and number with 
the noun to which it relates : 

tout Targent, all the money ; toute la toile, all the cloth. 



He was above all those vain objects 
which form all the desires and all the 
hopes of men. 



H etait au-dessus de tous ces 
vains objets qui forment tous les 
d^sirs et toutes les esperances des 
hommes. Massillon. 

See 5 97 (5). 

§ 31. — The Pronoun. 

(1.) The pronoun, in French, as in other languages, is a word 
used to represent the noun, in order to prevent its too frequent 
repetition. 

(2.) The pronoun serves also to designate the parts which each 
person or thing takes in speech. This part is called person. 

(3.) There are three persons : the first, or that which speaks ; the 
second, or that spoken to; the third, or that spoken of. 

(3.) There are five sorts of pronouns : 

The personal ; The demonstrative ; 

The possessive ; The relative ; 

The indefinite. 

§ 32. — The Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The personal pronouns are so called because they seem to 
designate the three persons more especially than the other pronouns. 
These pronouns are : 

Nominative Form. Relative Form. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

1. je, /; nous, we ; me, myself; nous, ourselves; 

2. tu, thou; vous, you, ye ; te, thyself; vous, yourselves ; 
' il, he, it, m. ; ils, m. they; C himself ; 

j < herself; so, themselves 
[ elle, she, it, f. ; elles, f. they. • ( itself; 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS.— § 33 309 

(2.) Direct regimen, or Accusative, 
When pliced before the verb. When placed after a verb; 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

me, me , nous, us ; moi, me ; nous, us ; 

2. te, thee; to us, yo u ; toi, thee; vous, you; 

Ue, him, it, m.'., ., (both le, him, it, m. : ■ *• - ( both 

3 -il a ; /^^i-.^-^'^lgend. la! A,r,Vf.; les ' iAm 'i genders. 

(3.) Indirect regimen, or Dative. 

When placed before the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. me, tome; nous, to us ; 

2. te, to thee ; vous, to you; 



( to him; 
3. lui, < to her ; 
( to it ; 



leur, to them; 

(both genders). 



. When placed after the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

moi, a moi, to me ; nous, a nous, to us , 

toi, a toi, to thee ; vous, a vous, to you ; 

, . fa lui, ) to him; , \ a eux, m. ) . ,. 

lm, j . i, }■ . t leur, { . ,, ' ,, Wo tltem 

' ( a elle, j to for , ' ( a elles, t. J 

(4.) Indirect regimen ; Genitive and Ablative. 

Always placed after the verb 
Singular. Plural. 

de moi, of or from me ; de nous, of or from us ; 

de toi, " thee ; de vous, " you ; 

de lui, " him ; d'eux, " them, m. , 

tfelle, " her ; d' elles, " them, i 

§ 33. — Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The French, as well as the English, use the second person 
plural for tne second person singular, in addressing one person. 

(2.) The second person, however, is used, as in English, in address- 
ing the Supreme Being : 

Grand Pieu ! tes jugements sont ] Great God! thy judgments are 
remphs d'equite. Des Bahreaux. | full of equity. 

(3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. 

O mon souverain roi ! my sovereign king I 

Me voici done tremblante et seule t Here I am, trembling and alom 
devant toi. Racine, Esther. before thee. 

(4.) It is used by parents to children, and also imong intimate 
friends. 

(5.) The pronoun il is used unipersonally, in the «arae manner as 
the English pre noun it. 

il pleut, it rains ; il gele, it freeze*. 

(5.) Observe that the personal pronouns of the third person are 
not used for the indirect regimen to represent inanimate objects, 



310 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 33. 

The relative pronouns en, of or from it [\ 39 (17)], T, to it [) 39 (18)] 
are used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of u 
house, we do not say, Je lui ajouterai une aile, I will add a wing tv 
it. We must say : 

J'y ajouterai une aile ; I will add a wing to it (tJiereto). 

In speaking of an author, we may say : 

Que pensez-vous de lui ? What do you think of him i 

But in speaking of his book, we should say : 

Qu'm pensez-vous ? What do you think of it (tliereof) ? 

(6.) The word meme, plural memes, may be used after the pronoun 
in the sense of self, selves : 

le roi lui-meme, the king himself. 

la reine elle-meme, the queen herself 

les princes eux-memes, the princes themselves. 

les princesses elles-memes, the princesses themselves. 

(7.) The pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are often used after the verb, 
to give greater force to a nominative pronoun of the same person, 
in those cases where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in 
English, or where the auxiliary do is used. 

je le dis, moi, I say so, or / do say so. 

il le dit, lui, he says so, or he does say so. 

(8.) The same pronouns, moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the 
nominative pronouns, je, tu, il, Us, for the English pronouns, I, thou, 
he, they, when those pronouns are employed without a verb in an 
answer, when they are used by themselves, or have a verb under- 
stood after them : 

Qui est arrive ce matin ? Moi Who arrived this morning f I. 

Lui et moi. Vous et eux. He and I. You and they. 

Vous e'crivez mieux que lui. You write better than he. 

Vous lisez aussi bien que moi. You read as well as I. 

(9.) The same pronouns are used in exclamations, and in those 
cases where the English pronouns, I, thou, &c, are followed by tha 
relative pronoun who ; also after c'est, c'etait, &c. 

Moi lui c6der ! I yield to him 1 

Eux aller a Londres ! They go to London ! 

Moi qui suis malade . . / toho am sick . . . 

Lui qui est officier. He who is an officer. 

Eux qui sont savants. They xoho are learned. 

C'est moi; c'est lui. It is I; it is he. 

Ce sont eux. It is thry. 

P6n61ope, sa femme, ct moi qui Penelope his wife, and I who crm 
Tiis son fils, nous avons perdu Tes- his son, have lost the hope oj seeing 
pe'rance de le revoir. Fenelon. him again. 

(10.) These same pronouns are also used Loghead of the nomi* 
natives,^, tu, &c, when the verb has several subjects wnicb are all 



Your father &nd I were a long 
time enemies. 

Rica and I are, perhaps, the first. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOU*NS. § 34. 31] 

pronouns, or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The vert may then 
be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the plural, representing in 
one word all the preceding subjects. 

Votre pere et moi, nous avons 
ete longtemps ennemis Tun de 
l'autre. Fenelon. 

Rica et moi sommes peut-etre les 
premiers. Montesquieu. 

(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come 
iirst in the sentence. 

Nous avons, vous et moi, besoin I You and I have need of tolerance, 
de tolerance. Voltaire. 

(12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself, &c, is used for both 
genders, and for both numbers; for persons and for things; and 
always accompanies a verb. 

Les yeux de 1'amitie se trompent I The eyes of friendship are seldom 
rarement. Voltaire. | deceived {deceive themselves). 

(13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes 
a reflective meaning, according to the context : 

ils se flattent, they flatter themselves. 

ils se flattent, they flatter one another, each other. 

(14.) Soi, himself itself &c, is of both genders and numbers, 
and is applied to persons and things. It is used in general and inde- 
terminate sentences ; having commonly an indefinite pronoun for the 
nominative : 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus We have often need of one more 
petit que soi. La Fontaine. humble than ourselves. 

II dipend toujours de soi d'agir It is always in our power to act 
honorablement. Girault-Duvivier. honorably. 

Etre trop me'content de soi est To be too much displeased with 
une faiblesse. Mme. de Sable. one's self is a weakness. 

For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, § 98, 
and following. 

§ 34. — Possessive Pronouns. 

(1.) The possessive pronouns, which are formed from the personal 
pronouns,, represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while in termina- 
tion they always agree with the thing possessed. Some relate to ono 
person, some to several. 

(2.) POSSESSIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON : 

The object possessed being in the — 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

1. le mien, la miemie, les miens, les miennes, mine; 

2. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; 

8. le sien, la eienne, les siens, les siennes, his % hers, itt 



312 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 35. 



(3.) Two or more Persons : 

The object possessed being in the — 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Mas. and Fern 

le n6tre, la notre, les n6tres, ours ; 
le votre, la votre, les v6tres, yours ; 
le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

§ 35. — Remarks on the Possessive Pronouns. 
(1.) It may be seen from the above table that, as before said, the 
termination of the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and number 
with the object possessed. 



Yotre canif et le mien. 
Your penknife and mine. 

Vos freres et les miens. 
Your brothers and mine. 

On voit les maux d'autrui, d'un 
autre ceil que les siens. Corneille. 

Les ministres du roi sentent que 
leur gloire, comme la sienne, est 
dans le bonheur national. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 



Votre plume et et la mienne. 
Your pen and mine. 

Vos soeurs et les miennes. 
Your sisters and mine. 

We see the misfortunes of others 
differently from our own. 

The ministers of the king feel thai 
their glory, like his own, is in na- 
tional happiness. 



(2.) These pronouns should relate to a noun previously expressed 
This rule is often violated in mercantile correspondence : 

J'ai recu la votre en date du, etc., I received yours dated the t &c> 

is incorrect. It should read thus : 

J'ai recu votre lettre en date du, etc., I received your letter dated, &6 

(3.) These pronouns may, however, be used absolutely when we 
mean thereby our family, near relatives, or intimate friends : 



Moi, j'ai les miens, la cour, le peu- 
ple a contenter. La Fontaine. 

Malheureux .... qui porte chez les 
siens le glaive et les flambeaux. 

COLARDEAU. 

C'est a nous a payer pour les 
crimes dss notres. Racine. 



/ have my family or friends, the 
court, the people to please. 

Wretched is he who carries among 
his fellow-citizens the sword and the 
torch. 

We must bear the penalty of th 
crimes of our family or people. 



(4.) Le mien and le den are also used absolutely as the words mine 
and thine in English, in the sense of possession, property : 



Et le mien et le tien, deux freres 
pointilleux Boileau. 

Le tien et le mien, sont les sources 
de toutes les divisions et de toutes 
les querelle8. Girault-Duvivier . 



And mine and thine, two punctili- 
ous brothers. 

Mine and thine {inenm and tuum) 
arc the sources of all divisions and 
quarrels* 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 36, 37. 313 



celui-ci, 
celui la, 



Feminine. 

celle, 

celle-ci, 
celle-la, 



( these; 

I those, 

these ; 

those. 



§ 36. — Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine, 

celui, celle, \ ' t j**j ceux, celles, 

this, ceux-ci, celles-ci, 
that, ceux-la, celles-la, 
ce, it, they. 
Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. 
ceci, this, ) not used in the 
cela, that, J pluraL 

§ 37. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, &c, assume the gen- 
der and number of the nouns which they represent : 



Je ne connais d'avarice permise 
que celle du temps. 

Stanislas Leczinsky. 

Les seules louanges que le cceur 
donne, sont celles que la bonte s'at- 
tire. Massillox. 

(2.) These pronouns are sometimes used absolutely before qui, que 
dont, etc., in the same manner as the English personal pronouns he> 
they, &c, before who, whom, &c. : 

Celui qui rend un service doit He ivho renders a service should 



Methinks no avarice is allowable 
unless it be that of time. 

The only praises which the heart 
gives are tJiose which goodness de- 
serves. 



1'oublier, celui qui le recoit, s'en sou- 
veuir. Barthelehy. 

Aimer ceux qui yous haissent ceux 
qui vous persecutent, e'est la charite 
du chretien, e'est 1' esprit de la reli- 
gion. BOURDALOUE. 



forget it ; he who receives it should 
remember it. 

To love those who hate you, those 
who persecute you, is the charity of 
the Christian ; it is the spirit of re- 
ligion. 



(3.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, etc. ; celui-la, celle-la, are used when it is de- 
sirable to denote the comparative proximity or remoteness expressed 
in English by the words this and that : 

celui-ci, CtU one. celui-la, that one. 

(4.) Celui-ci, celui-la, etc., are often used to express contrast or 
comparison. They are then equivalent to the English expressions 
(he former, the latter; this one, that one: 

An upright magistrate and a brave 



Un magistrat integre et un brave 
ofacier, sont egalement estimables : 
celui-la fait la guerre aux ennemis 
domestiques, celui-ci nous protege 
contre les ennemis exterieurs. 

GlRAULT-DUYIVIER. 

Tel est l'avantage ordinaire 
Qu'ont sur la beaute les talents : 
Ceux-ci plaisent dans tous les temps ; 
Celle-la n'a qu'un temps pour plaire. 
Voltajbe. 

14 



officer are equally estimable : the 
former makes war against domestic 
enemies, the latter protects us against 
foreign enemies. 

Such is the ordinary advantage 
which talents possess over beauty: 
the former plrase at all times ; the 
latter has but one time to please. 



3l4 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 38, 39. 

(5 ) Ceci, cela, have no plural, and are used only of things. They 
do not refer to a word expressed before, but serve to point out objects : 
prenez c&&, take this. donnez-moi cela, give me that, 

«Fai deja dit ce qu'il faut faire, I have already said what should be 
quand un enfant veut avoir ceci et done when a child will have this and 
cela. J. J. Rousseau. that. 

(6.) Ce, a pronoun, must not be confounded with the demonstra- 
tive adjective ce. The pronoun ce is often used without an antece- 
dent, as the nominative of the verb etre in the same manner as the 
English pronoun it : 

c'est moi, it is I c'est vous, it is you. 



Ce n'est plus le jouet d'une flamme 
servile. 



It is no longer the sport of an 
unworthy flame. 

It is Pyrrhus; it is the son and 
the rival of Achilles. 

For particular rules on this pronoun, see § 108. 



C'est Pyrrhus, c'est le fils et le 
rival d'Achille. Racine. 



§ 38. — Relative Pronouns. 

(1.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- 
mate relation which they have to a noun or pronoun which precedes, 
and of which they recall the idea. The noun or pronoun so preced- 
ing the relative pronoun is called the antecedent. 

(2.) Table of the Relative Pronouns . 
qui, uho, which; (sujet, nominat.) de qui, of from whom, ) Regime mA- 
que, whom, which ; (r6g. direct, ace.) dont, of from whom; > ^d'ablati^ 

which ; ) 

a qui, to whom ; (regime indirect, dative.) 

lequel, who, which ; composed of the article and quel 

Singular Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine, Feminine. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, which ; 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of, from whit A ; 
auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles, to which, 

y, to it, of it, etc. en, of it, of them, etc. 

quoi, what, which, why, etc. 

§ 39. — Remarks on the Relative Pronouns. 

{!,) Qui, who, which, IB generally the subject or nominative. It is 
used for both genders and numbers, for persons and for things. (See 
No. 6 of this }.) 

(2.) When used for things, qui oann >t be preceded by a preposi- 
tion. Its use, in this respect, is restricted to the nominative, 

(3.) It is used relatively and absolutely. 

(4.) It is used relatively when it has an antecedent expressed : 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. §39. 



315 



Le piamier qui fat roi, fat un 
pere adore. Aubeet. 

L'amour avidement croit tout ce 
qui le flatte. Racine. 



The first who became king wo* an 
adored father. 

Love believes eagerly all that flat- 
ters it 



(5.) It is used absolutely when it has no antecedent expressed. 
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It is ren- 
dered in English by he who, she who, they who. 



Qui veut parler sur tout, souvent 
parle au hasard. Andrieux. 

Lache, qui veut mourir, courageux 
qui peut vivre. Racine, Jun. 



WJio (he who) wishes to speak on 
every subject, speaks often at random. 

He who wishes to die is a coward; 
he who can support life has courage. 



Qui ne fait des heureux, n'est He who does not render other* 
pas digne de l'etre. | happy is not worthy to be so. 

(6.) Qui is also used absolutely when it is interrogative. It may 
then be nominatif or regime : 

qui parle ? who speaks ? qui voyez-vous ? whom do you see ? 

(7.) Que, whom, what, which, stands generally for the regime direct. 
This pronoun is used for persons and things. It is of both genders 
and numbers : 



les lettres que j'ai, 

les hommes que j'ai vus, 



the letters which I have, 
the men whom I have seen. 



(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent : 



La gloire pr£te un charme aux 
horreurs quon affront e. 

Delavigne. 

Des lois que nous suivons, la pre- 
miere est l'honneur. Voltaire. 



Glory lends a charm to the horror* 
which we face. 

Of the laws which we follow, the 
first is honor. 

(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies quelle 
chose? what thing ? quoi? what? 

que voulez-vous ? what will you (have) ? 

que dit-on ? what do people say ? 

(10.) Quoi, what, is invariable, and said only of things. It may 
be used absolutely and relatively : 

j'ignore ce a quoi il pense, / am ignorant of what he think*. 

In the above sentence it is relative, being preceded by its ante- 
cedent ce. 

(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means quelle chose ? what thing? and is 
ased mostly in interrogative and doubtful sentences : 



II y a dans cette affaire je ne sais 
quo*, que je n'entends pas. 

L'academie. 
II y avait je ne sais quoi dans ses 
yeux pedants,, qui me faisait peur. 
Fenelon. 



There is in that affair I know not 
what, which I do not understand. 

There was I know not what in hi* 
piercing eyes, which inspired me with 
fear. 



816 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS.— 8 39. 



(12.) Dont, of whom, of which, whose, is used for both genders and 
numbers ; for persons and for things. It is always employed rela. 
tively, and is, therefore, always preceded by an antecedent: 



Un plaisir do%.t on est assure de 
se repentir ne peut jamais etre tran- 
quille. Mme. de La Valliere. 

11 faut plaindre le sort du prince 
infortune, dont le coeur endurci n'a 
jamais pardonne\ Chenier. 



A pleasure of which we are sur6 
to repent, can never be a peaceful 
one. 

We must pity the fate of that un- 
fortunate prince, whose hardened 
heart has never forgiven. 



(13.) Dont is preferable to de qui, of whom, and duquel, of which. 
When, however, the pronoun has the sense of from whom, i. e., when 
used to denote a transfer, de qui is better : 



Le libraire de qui j'ai recu ces 
livres. 



The bookseller from whom I have 
received these books. 



(14.) Lequel, laquelle, lesquelles, who, which, should only be used 
in the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid am- 
biguity. They may relate to persons or things : 

It is an act of divine Providence, 
which (act) attracts the admiration 
of every one. 



C'est un effet de la divine Provi- 
dence, lequel attire l'admiration de 
tout le monde. Bussi-Rabutin. 



(15.) Lequel, preceded by a preposition — that is, duquel, auquel, duns 
lequel, &c, must always be used for things in the indirect regimen. 
The word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to things 
in the oblique cases : 



Un livre curieux serait celui dans 
lequel on ne trouverait pas un men- 
songe. Napoleon. 

La Seine, dans le lit de laquelle, 
viennent se jeter l'Yonne, la Marne, 
et l'Oise. 



That would be a curious book in 
which not a falsehood were found. 

The Seine, in the bed of which the 
Tonne, the Marne, and the Oise 
empty themselves. 

(16.) Lequel, in all its modifications, may be used absolutely or 
interrogatively : 

duquel ? of which one ? 
which one do you see ? 

This pronoun is of both genders and 
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things. It is often 
used for the English words, some, any, when employed absolutely, 
or even when understood. It is also used as an indirect regtmen 
in relation to things, and sometimes, but not often, in relation to 
persons [§ 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, elles, eur, 
dies. [} 103, Rule 1.] 

Vous en parlez, you speak of it Fen ai, J have some of iU 



lequel? which one? 
lequel voyez-vous ? 

(17.) En, of it, of them. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 40, 41. 



317 



La fortune a son prix : rimprudent 

en abuse, 
L'hypocrite en medit, et l'bonndte 

homnae en use. Delille. 

Les liroites des sciences sont com- 
me l'horizon ; plus on en approche, 
plus elles reculent. Mme. Necker. 
La vie est un d^p6t confie par le 

ciel ; 
)ser en disposer, c'est etre crimineL 
Gresset. 

(18.) Y, to it, to them, thereto, of it, &c. This relative pronoun, of 
both genders and numbers, is used instead of a lux, a elle, en lui, &c. 
It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. 



Fortune has its worth: the im- 
prudent abuses it; the hypocriU 
speaks evil of it, and the worthy 
man uses it. 

The limits of science are like the 
horizon, the more we approach 
(them), the more they recede. 

Life is a trust confided by heaven : 
to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. 



J'y pense, / think of it. 

J'ai connu le malheur, et j'y sais 
compatir. Guichard. 

N'y songeons plus, cher Paulin ; plus 

j'y pense, 
Plus je sens cbanceler ma cruelle 

Constance. RAcixe. 

Vous avez peu de bien ; joignez 
y ma fortune. Dorat. 

En quelque pays que j'aie 6te, j'y 
ai vecu com me si j'eusse du y passer 
ma vie. Montesquieu. 



J'y donne mes soins, / devote my 
care to it. 

I have known misfortune, and 1 
can sympathize with it. 

Let us think no more of this, dear 
Paulin ; the longer I think of it, the 
more I feel my cruel constancy waver. 



You have but little property ; join 
my fortune to it. 

In whatever country I have been, 
I lived {there) as if I was to spend 
my life in it. 

(19.) Although numerous instances may be found in which French 
authors have used y with regard to persons, these are licenses whxb 
\i> is not desirable to imitate. 



§ 40. — Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) The indefinite pronouns indicate persons and things witl jut 
particularizing them : they are — 

autrui, others. 

chacun, every one. 

on, one, people, they. 

personne, no one, nobody. 

quelqu'un, some one, somebody. 

§ 41. — Remarks on the Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) Autrui, others. This pronoun is applied only to persons. It 
has no change of form for gender or number, and is used only as an 
indirect regimen. 



quiconque, 


whoever. 


l'un l'autre, 


one another. 


Tun et l'autre, 


loth. 


tel, 


such. 


tout, 


every thing, s^koU 



L'honnGte horame est discret ; il 
remarque les defauts & autrui, niais 
il n'en parle jamais. St. Evremond. 

Ne fais point a autrui ce que tu ne 
veudrais pas qu'on te fit. 



The gentleman is discreet ; he ob- 
serves the defects <f others, but never 
alludes to them. 

Do not unto otlierz that which thou 
wouldst not like to be done unto thee. 



$18 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 41. 



(2.) Chacun, every one, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, 
and means every one, everybody, it i3 invariable : 

chose 



Le sens cc minim n'est 

commune, 
Chacun pour t ant, croit en avoir 

assez. Valaincourt. 

Chacun est prosterne devant les 
gens heureux. Destouches. 

(3.) When chacun is used relatively it may take the form of the 
feminine : 



Common sense is no common 
thing, though every one believes he 
has enough of it. 

Every one bows before the for 
tunate. 



Chacune de nous (des femmes) se 

Eretendait superieure aux autres en 
eaute. Montesquieu. 



Every one of us (women) thought 
herself superior in beauty to ths 
others. 



(4.) On (one, people, they) is always in the nominative ; and although 
always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys 
most generally the idea of plurality. It is commonly used in indefinite 
sentences : 



On dit, people say, they say, it is said. 

On garde sans remords ce qyCon 
acquiert sans crime. Corneille. 

On relit tout Racine : on choisit 
dans Voltaire. Delille. 

On ne surmonte le vice qu'en le 
fuyant. Fenelon. 

(5.) On, coming immediately after the words et, si, on, que, and qui, 
is generally preceded by the article V, used for euphony : 

Ce que Von concoit bien, s'ex- 
prime clairement. Boileau. 

C'est d'un roi que Von tient cette 

maxime auguste, 



On parle, somebody speaks, &c. 

We (one, people) keep without re- 
morse that which we (one, people] 
acquire without crime. 

We (people, they) read again and 
again all Racine : we (&c.) select in 
Voltaire. 

We conquer vice only by avoid- 
ing it. 



Que jamais on n'est grand, qu'autant 
que Von est juste. Boileau. 



That which one understands well, 
he clearly expresses. 

It is from a king that we derive 
this august maxim, that one is only 
great in proportion as he is just 



(6.) Personne, no one, nobody, used as an indefinite pronoun, is 
always masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb 
expressed, it is followed by ne : 



H n'est personne qui ne cherche a 
ee rendre heureux. — Chinese the 

Personne nc veut 6tre plaint de 
ses erreurs. Vauvenaik 



There is no one who does not seek 
to render himself happy. 

No one ivishes to be pitied on 
account of his mistakes. 



Note. — The word personne, used as a noun, and meaning a particular 
person, is of the feminine gender. 

(7.) Quelqu'un, somebody, some one, any one, anybody, used abso- 
lutely, is invariable : 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. §41. 



919 



Envfer quelqu'un c'est s'avouer 
boh inferieur. Mlle. de L'Espinasse. 

Quelqu'un a-t-il jamais doute 
B^rieusemeat de '.'existence de Dieu \ 
G IE ault-Duvi VIES. 



To envy any one is cc&ifessing one's 
self his inferior. 

Has any one ever had serioui 
doubts on the existence of God? 



(8.) Quelqu'un, used relatively, changes for gender and number. It 
has then the sense of some of, some one of: 

CoDnaissez-vous quelqxCune de ces I Do you know any one of thos 
dames quelques-uns de ces mes- ladies, any of those gentlemen $ 
aieurs ? Girauxt-Duvtvier. 

(9.) Quiconque, whoever, whosoever, is generally masculine, and has 
no plural. It is only said of persons : 

Quiconque flatte ses maitres, les 
trahit. Massillon. 

Quiconque est capable de nieniir, 
est indigne d'etre cornpte au nombre 
des hommes. Fenklon. 

Quiconque est soupconneux, invite 
la trahison. Voltaire. 



WJwever flatters his masters be- 
trays them. 

Whoever is capable of falsehood is 
unworthy to be counted among the 
number of men. 

Whoever is suspicious, invites 
treachery. 



(10.) L'un Pautre, one another, each other, the one and the other. 
This pronoun makes in the feminine Vune V autre, and in the plurai 

les uns les autres, les unes les autres : 



Tout le monde se confiait Vicn a 
V autre cette confidence. Rulhieres. 

Tout le peuple suivit Yirginie, les 
uns par curiosity, les autres par con- 
sideration pour Icilius. Veetot. 

II y a deux sortes de mines ; Vune 
l'ouvrage du temps, V autre l'ouvrage 
des hommes. Chateaubriand. 



Everybody confided one to another 
this communication. 

All the people followed Virginia, 
some through curiosity ', some through 
respect for Icilius. 

There are two sorts of ruins ; one 
the work of time, the other the work 
of men. 

(11.) L'un et l'autre, les uns les autres (both). This expression 
may be used of persons and things : 



La Condamine a parcouru Fun et 
Pautre hemisphere.* Bcffon. 

L'un et V autre consul suivaient 
ses etendarts. Corneille. 

Sous Vune et l'autre epoque, il 
perit un tres grand nombre de ci- 
toyens. Barthelemy. 

lis se rdunissaient les uns et les 
autre3 contre l'ennemi commun. 

GlRAULT-DuVIVIER. 



La Condamine travelled over both 
hemispheres. 

Both consuls followed his stand- 
ard*. 

At both epochs a large number oj 
citizens perished. 

They united with one another 
against the common enemy. 



(12.) Tel, telle, feminine, such, many a person, many, is an indefinite 
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences: 



* The noun is in the singular, because the word hemisphere is under- 
itood afnr the word l'un. This rule is observed by tne best French 
authors. 



320 



VERBS. — § 42. 



Tel donne, a pleines mains, qui 
n'oblige personne. Corneille. 

Tel brille au second rang, qui 
s'eclipse au premier. Voltaiee. 

Tel est pris qui croyait prendre. 
La Fontaine. 

Telle, sans aucun attrait pour la 
retraite, se consacre au Seigneur par 
pure fierte. Massillon. 

Teh que Ton croit d'inutiles amis, 
Dans le besoin rendent de bons 
services. Boursault. 



Many a one may give bountifully 
without obliging any one. 

Many a person may shine in tfu 
second rank, vjho is eclipsed in the 
first. 

Many are caught while attempting 
to catch others. 

Many [a nun] for whopi retreat 
has no attractions, consecrates her- 
self to the Lord through mere pride. 

Many friends whom we think use- 
less render us, in our need, valuable 
services. 



(13.) Tel, in connection with Monsieur, Madame, &c, as Monsieur 
un tel, Madame une telle, Mr., Mrs. such-a-one, is used substantively. 

(14.) Tout, every one, every thing. This word, employed absolutely, 
is invariable. 



A la seule vertu, sois sur que 
tout prospere. F. de Neufchateau. 

Tout n'est pas Caumartin, Bignon, 
ni d'Aguesseau. Boileau. 

Son grand genie embrassait tout. 
Bossuet. 



Be assured that it is with virtue 
alone that every thing prospers. 

Every one is not Caumartin, 
Bignon, nor d'Aguesseau. 

His great genius embraced every 
thing. 



§ 42. — Verbs. 

(1.) The verb is that part of speech which expresses an action 
done or suffered by the subject ; or simply indicates the condition of 
the subject. 

(2.) The subject or nominative of a verb is the person or thing 
doing the action, or being in the condition expressed by the verb. It 
replies to the question qui esl-ce-qui ? who ? for persons ; and qifest- 
ce qui ? which ? what ? for things. 

(3.) Verbs admit two kinds of regimen : the direct regimen and the 
indirect regimen. 

(4.) The direct rtgimen, or immediate object, is that which com- 
pletes in a direct manner the signification of a verb ; that is to say. 
without the aid of any other intermediate word. It answers to the 
question qui ? whom ? for persons, and quoi 1 what ? for things. 

(5.) The indirect regimen, or remote object, is that which completes 
the signification of the verb by means of an intermediate word, such 
as the prepositions a, de, pour, avec, dans, &c. — a qui ? to whom J de qui] 
of or from whom? .pom qui? for whom I avec cui ? &c, for persons, 
and a quoi? to what? do quoi? of or from what? &C, for things. 

(6.) Verbs are regular, irregular, or defective. \ 44 (ii). 



VERB 8.- 



"§ 43. 



321 



§ 43. — Different Sorts of Verbs. 

(1.) There are five sorts of verbs: active, passive., neuter, reflective 
or pronominal, and unipersonal. 

(2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed by 
the subject, and having some person or tiling for its object. This ob- 
ject is the direct regimen of the verb. 

(3.) Every French verb after which quelqiiun. some one, quelque- 
chose, something, may be plaeed,'is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, proteger, changer, chanter, &c, are active verbs, be- 
cause we may say proteger quelquhin, to protect some one ; charger 
: uelquechose, to change something: 



Dieu protege finnocence. — Ractxe. 
L'habit change les moeurs. 

Voltaire. 
Les cygnes ne chantent pas leur 
mort. Buffox. 



God protects innocence. 
Dress changes the manners. 

Swans do not sing their death. 



(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The active 
verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately directed 
towards an object; whereas the passive verb presents the subject as 
suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb is composed of 
the past participle of an active verb and the auxiliary eire, to be. 
(See [ 54.) 



Nos carnpagnes sont fertilises par 
la pluie. L'academie. 

II ttait guide par la force de son 
genie. Massillox. 

Les petits esprits sont trop blesses 
des petite s chose 3. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



Our fields are fertilized by the 
rain. 

He was guided by the force of his 
genius. 

Little minds are too much vexed 
with trifles. 



(5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per 
formed by the subject ; but this action can only reach the object in- 
direct lv ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is that the neu- 
ter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu'un and 
quetquechose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never 
be used in the passive voice. 

Socrates spent the last day of his 
life in discoursing upon the immor- 
tality of the soul. 

The fire which seems extinct sleeps 
often tinder its ashes. 

The Plateaus cited the Lacedemo- 
nians to appear before the Amphyc- 
tionx. 



Sucrate passa le dernier jour de 
ea vie a discourir de l'immortalite 
de Tame. L'Academie. 

Le feu qui semble eteint, dort 
eouvent sou:< sa cendre. — Corneillr 

Les Plateens eiterent les Lacedt'- 
moniens a comparaitre devant les 
Amphyctions. Le Gexdre. 



(6.) The reflective or pronominal verb L co iju gated witn two t>" 



14* 



322 CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. §44,45. 

nouns of the same person ; je me, tu te, il se, nous nous, vous vous, Hi 
se. (See § 56.) 

Je me fiVte, I flatter myself. Vous vous felicitez, you congratu 

late yourselves. 



II ne faut pas se flatter, les plus 
exp6rimentes out fait des fautes ca- 
pitales. Bossuet. 

Les peuplcs se feliciteront d'avoir 
un roi qui lui ressemble. 

Massillon. 
11 ne faut pas permettre a l'homme 
de se mepriser entierement. 

Bossuet. 



We should not flatter ourselves : the 
m.ost experienced have committed cap- 
ital errors. 

The noMons will congratulate th em- 
selves upon having a king who re- 
sembles him. 

We should not allow a man to de 
spise himself entirely. 



(7.) The unipersonal verb can only be used in the third person sin- 
gular: H pleut, it rains; il gele, it freezes; il tonne, it thunders. 



Pour bien juger les grands, il faut 
les approcher. Aubert. 

It faut rendre meilleur le pauvre 
quon soulage. Saint-Lambert. 



To judge properly of the great, it 
is necessary to approach them. 

We should (it is necessary to) im- 
prove the poor whom we relieve. 



(8.) There are two verbs called auxiliary, because they serve to 
conjugate all others. They are — avoir, to have ; and etre, to be. 

§ 44. — Conjugations. 

(1.) The French verbs are divided into four large classes or conju- 
gations : 

1st. The first conjugation comprises all verbs of which the present of the 
infinitive ends in er ; as parler, to speak ; aimer, to love, <fcc. 

2d. The second conjugation embraces all those of which the infinitive 
ends in ia ; as cherir, to cherish ; punir, to punish, <fcc 

3d. The third conjugation contains all the verbs which, in the infinitive, 
end in oir ; such as recevoir, to receive ; pouvoir, to be able, &a 

4th. The fourth conjugation comprises all the verbs terminating with 
re in the infinitive ; as rendre, to render ; prendre, to take, <kc. 

(2.) The verbs are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec- 
tive : 

1st. The regular verbs are those which, in all their tenses, are conjugated 
like the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. 

2d. The irregular verbs are those which are not conjugated like the 
model verb. 

3d. The defective verbs are those which want certain tenses or persons 

§ 45. — Modes and r i 

(1.) There are six modes: the indicative* the conditional, the im- 
perative, the subjunctive, the infinitive, and the participle : 

1st The indicative, whatever may be the tense, indicates or declares 
in a positive, absolute manner: fabandonne, 1 abandon ; j'ai abandonne, 
I have s>h"~idoncd ; j'abandonnerai, Twill abandon. 



MODES AND TENSES. § 45. 



323 



2d. The conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- 
nerais si ... . I would abandon if ... . 

3d. The imperative i3 used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- 
tion : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child. 

4th. The subjunctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con- 
tingency, or necessity : ii est douteux que je l'abandonne : it is not certain 
that I may abandon him. 

5th. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an iinlimited 
manner : abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 

6th. The participle, while retaining the power of the verb, at the same 
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents, 
abandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by his 
thildren. 

(2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 

1st. The presen . : je parle, 1 speak ; je donne, I give. 
2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfect: je parlais, I was speaking. 
3d. The past definite : je parlai, I spoke, I did speak. 
4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, I have spoken ; j'ai donn6, 1 have given. 
5th. The past anterior, j'eus parle, / had spoken. 

6th. The pluperfect, j'avais parle*, I had been speaking. 

7th. The future absolute, je parlerai, I shall, will speak. 

8th. The future anterior, ) ., . •,, r v n . 7 

or future perfect, \ J aurai P ar1 ^' J shaU have V * 6 * 

(3.) The conditional has two tenses : 



1st. The present or future, je parlerais, 
2d. The past, j'aurais parle, 

(4.) The imperative has one tense : 

parle, 

(5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : 

1st. The present or future, que je parle, 

2d. The imperfect, que je parlasse, 

3d. The past indefinite, que j'aie parle, 

4th. The pluperfect, que j'eusse parle, that I might have sp >ken* 

(G.) The infinitive has two tenses : 



/ should, would speak. 
I should have spoken. 



speak. 



that I may speak, 
that I might speak, 
that I may have spoken. 



1st. The present relative, parler, 
2d. The past, avoir parte, 

(7.) The participle has three tenses: 



1st. The present relative, 
2d. The past active, 
3d. The past or passive, 



parlant, 
ayant parle\ 
parld, 



to speak. 

to have spoken. 



speaking, 
having spoken, 
spoken. 



(8.) Tense3 are simple or compound. 

1. Simple, w*ien they are expressed in a single word: je parle, / 
tpeak. 

2. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir or 
etre : j'ai parle, I ham spoken; je suie arrive, I am ctrrixtJL 



324 



USE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS.- 



-§46. 



§ 46. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs avoir and etrb. 
(1.) The auxiliary avoir is used : 

1. In the conjugation of its own compound tenses: j'ai eu, Ihav6 
had. 

2. In the conjugation of the compound terases of the verb etre : 
j'ai ete, J have been. 

3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : j'ai aime, 1 have 
loved. 

4. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an 
action : j'ai marclie, J have walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3) 
below.] 

5. It is also used in the conjugation of verbs which are always 
unipersonal : il a plu, it has rained; il a grele, it has hailed, &c. 

(2.) The verb etre is used in the conjugation of: 

1. All the tenses of passive verbs: je suis aime, I am loved. 

2. The compound tenses of all reflective or pronominal verbs : je me 
suis flatte, I have flattered myself; je me suis promene, I have ivalked. 

3. The compound tenses of the following neuter verbs, though the 
same, express action : 

aller, 

arriver, 

choir, 

decider, 

mourir, 

4. A few unipersonal verbs, which are not always but occasionally 
rtuch : il lui est arrive un malheur, a misfortune has happened to him. 

(3.) A certain number of neuter verbs : as — 



to go ; 


naltre, 


to be born ; 


to arrive ; 


tomber, 


to fall ; 


to fall ; 


venir, 


to come ; 


to decease ; 


parvenir, 


to succeed; 


to die ; 


devenir, 


to become; 


revenir, 


to return. 





accourir, 


to run toioards ; 


entrer, 


to enter ; 


disparaitre. 


to disappear ; 


sortir, 


to go out ; 


croitre, 


to grow ; 


passer, 


to pass ; 


cesser, 


to cease ; 


partir, 


to depart; 


V ( rir > 


to perish ; 


yieillir, 


to groiv old; 


monter, 


to mount to ascend; 


grand ir, 


to grow ; 


duscendre, 


to go down ; 


rest or, 


to remain, to dwell, 



take sometimes avoir, and sometimes etre. 

1. They take avoir when we have in view the action expressed by 
tiie verb ; 

2. And etre when situation or condition is the principal idea which 
we wish to express: 

F samples. 

WUh AVOIR. With ETRE. 

EUe a disparu subiiement. T\lle eat disparue depuis quint* 

jours. 
She disappeared suddenly. Sh$ has been ao*ie a fortnight. 



T7SE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. § 46 

La fievre a cesse* hier. 
The fever ceased yesterday. 



325 



Le barometre a descendu de 
plusieurs degres en peu d'heures. 

The barometer went down several 
degree* in a few hours. 

II a passe en Anierique en tel 
temps. 

He went to America at such a time. 

Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. 
L'academie. 

The dart went with impetuosity. 

Le sang avait cesse de couler. 
Boiste. 
The blood had ceased to flow. 



La fievre est cesse'e depuis quel- 

que temp3. 

It is some time since ihe fever 
ceased. 

H est descendu depuis une heure. 



He has been down one hour. 
Les chaleurs sont passees. 

The heat is past. 

Les troupes sont parties depuis 
six mois. L'academie. 

The troops have been gone six 
months. 

Ce grand bruit est cesse. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 

That great noise is over (has 
ceased). 



(4.) Rester and demeurer, meaning to dwell, to reside, take the 
auxiliary avoir; when they mean to remain, to be left, they take etre: 



AVOIR. 

J'ai reste* plus d'un an en Italie. 

. . . Montesquieu. 

/ resided more than a year in 
Italy * 

II a demeure* deux ans a la cam- 
pagne. L'academie. 

He lived (dwelt) two years in the 
country. 



etre. 
Elle donnerait pour vous sa vie, 
le seul bien qui lui soit reste. 

Marmootel. 
She toould give, for you, her life, 
the only possession which remains to 
her. 

Deux cents hommes sont de- 
meures sur le champ de bataille. 
L'academie. 
Two hundred men remained on 
the field of battle. 

(5.) fichapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to be forgotten, takes the 
auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertently, it takes etre. 



AVOIR. 

Cette difference ne m'a pas echap- 
pe. Rousseau. 

That difference has not escaped 
me. 

J'ai retenu le chant, les vers 
moni echappe". Voltaire. 

I retained the tune, but the verses 
?iave escaped my memory. 



ETRE. 

Ce mot m'est echappe ; pardunnez 
ma franchise. Voltaire. 

That word escaped my -ips ; excuse 
my frankness. 

Excusez les fautes qui pourront 
m'etrc echappees. Boileau. 

Excuse the faults which I may 
have committed inadvertently. 



(6.) Convenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is u*ed in 
the sense of agreeing, or settling vpon a price for an article it takes 
itre. 

Cette maisou m y a convenu. 



That house suited me. 



Nous aomnes convenus du prix. 
L'acadbviie. 
We agreed upon the price. 



ne 



AUXILIARY VERBS. § 47. 



§ 47. — Paradigms of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

To familiarize the student with the frequent use made by th« 
French, of the indefinite pronoun on [§ 41, (4.)], we have introduced 
it in our conjugation of the verbs. 

CI.) AVOIR, TO HAVE,— AFFIRMATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 





PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


J'ai, 


/ have 


J'ai eu, 


/ have had 


Tu as, 


thou hast 


Tu as eu, 


thou hast had 


11 a, 


he has 


11 a eu, 


he has had 


On a, 


one has, people have 


On a eu, 


one has had 


Nous avons, 


we have 


Nous avons eu, 


we have had 


Vous avez, 


you have 


Vous avez eu, 


you have had 


lis ont, 


they have 


lis ont eu, 


they have had 




IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 


J 'avais, J haa 


, was having, or J used 
to have 


J'avais eu, 


I had had 


Tu avais ; 


thou hadst 


Tu avais eu, 


thou hadst had 


11 avait, ' 


he had 


11 avait eu, 


he had had 


On avait, 


one had, people had 


On avait eu, 


one had had 


Nous avions, 


we had 


Nous avions eu 


we had had 


Vous aviez, 


you had 


Vous aviez eu, 


you had had 


lis avaient, 


they had 


lis avaient eu, 


they had had 


PAST DEFINITE. PAST 


ANTERIOR. 


J'eus, 


I had, or did have 


J'eus eu, 


/ had had 


Tu eus, 


thou hadst, etc. 


Tu eus eu, 


thou hadst had 


11 eut, 


he had 


11 eut eu, 


he had had 


On eut, 


one had, etc. 


On eut eu, 


one had had 


Nous eumes, 


we had 


Nous eumes eu 


we had had 


Vous eutes, 


you had 


Vous eutes eu, 


you had had 


lis eurent, 


tliey had 


lis eurent eu, 


ihey /tad hat 




FUTURE. FUTURE 


ANTERIOR. 


J'aurai, 


/ shall or will liave 


J'aurai eu, / shall, will have hex 


Tu auras, 


Hum ivilt have 


Tu auras eu, 


thou shall have had 


11 aura, 


he will have 


11 aura eu, 


he will have had 


On aura, 


one will have 


On aura eu, 


one will have had 


Nous aurons, 


we shall have 


Nous aurons eu, 


■III have had 


Vous aurcz, 


you will have 


Vous aurez cu, 


you will have had 


fls ariront, 


tlwy will have i 


lis auront eu, 


then will /uive had 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47. 327 

Conditional Mode. 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

T'aurais, / should have ' J'aurais eu, J should have had 

Tu aura is, thou couldst have Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had 

II aurait, he would have' II aurait eu, he should have -lad 

On aurait, one would have \ On aurait eu, one should have had 

Nous aurions we would have j Nous aurions eu, we slwuld have Juzd 

Vous auriez, you would have\ Vous auriez eu, you should have had 

Us auraient, they would have\ lis auraient eu, they should have had 

Imperative Mode. 



Aie, 

Qu'il ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Ayons, 
Ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



have thou 

let him have 

let one, people, them i have 

let us have 

have ye or you 

let them have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que j 'aie, 
Que tu aies, 
Qu'il ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Que nous ayons, 
Que vous ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



that I may 

that thou may est 

that he may 

that one may 

that ice may 

that you may 

that they may ^ 



Que j'aie eu, that I may 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may 

Qu'on ait eu, that one may 

Que nous ayons eu, that ice may 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que j 'eusse, that I might \ 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightest 

Qu'il eut, that he. might 

Qu'on eut, that one might 

Que nous cussions, t/iat we might ' ^ 



Que vous eussiez, that you might 
Qu ;ls eusient, that they mighty 



PLUPERFECT 



Que j'eusse eu, 
Que tu eusses 

Qu'il eut eu, 
Qu'on eut eu, 



that I might 

eu, that thou 

mightest 

that lie might 

that one might 



Que nous eussions eu, that ice 
might 

Que vous eussiez eu, that you 
might 

Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might 



2 
r £ 



Infinitive Mode. 



Avoir, 



Ayant, 



Eu, 



to have | Avoir eu, 
Participle. 

having j Ay ant eu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 



to have ,t^a 



COMPOUND. 



having had 



had 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — $ 47. 



(2.) AVOIR, TO HAVE: CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSED. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je n'ai pas, 


J have not 


Je n'ai pas eu, 


I haw 


Tu n'as pas, 


thou hast not 


Tu n'as pas eu, 


thou hast 


II n'a pas, 


he has not 


11 n'a pas eu, 


he has 


Oa n'a pas, 


one has not 


On n'a pas eu, 


one has 


Nous n'avons pas, 


we have not 


Nous n'avons pas eu, 


we have 


Vous n'avez pas, 


yon have not 


Vous n'avez pas eu, 


you have 


lis n'ont pas, 


they have not 


lis n'ont pas eu, 


they have ^ 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je n'avais pas, 


I had not 


Je n'avais pas eu, 


I had" 


Tu n'avais pas, 


thou hadst not 


Tu n'avais pas eu, 


thou hadst 


11 n'avait pas, 


he had not 


11 n'avait pas eu, 


he had 


On n'avait pas, 


one had not 


On n'avait pas eu, 


one had 


Nous n'avions pas, 


we had not 


Nous n'avions pas eu 


we had 


Vous n'aviez pas, 


you had not 


Vous n'aviez pas eu, 


you had 


Us n'avaient pas, 


they had not 


Us n'avaient pas eu, 


they had^ 


PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je n'eus pas, 


I had not 


Je n'eus pas eu, 


I had ' 


Tu n'eus pas, 


thou hadst not 


Tu n'eus pas eu, 


thou hadst 


11 n'eut pas, 


he had not 


11 n'eut pas eu, 


he had 


On n'eut pas, 


one Jiad not 


On n'eut pas eu, 


one /tad [> 


Nous n'eumes pas, 


we had not 


Nous n'eumes pas eu 


, we had 


Vous n'eutes pas, 


you had not 


Vous n'eutes pas eu, 


you had 


Us n'eurent pas, 


they had not 


lis n'eurent pas eu, 


i/tey had , 


FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


Je n'aurai pas, 


I shall not^ 




Je n'aurai pas eu, 


IshalV 


Tu n'auras pas, 


thou wilt not 




Tu n'auras pas eu, 


thou shall 


11 n'aura pas, 


he w ill not 


jo 


U n'aura pas eu, 


hi will 


On n'aura pas, 


one will not 


y § 


On n'aura pas eu, 


one will )• 


Nous n'auronspas, 


we shtdl not 


*< 


Nous n'aurons pas eu 


we will 


Vous n'aurez pas v 


you shall not 




Vous n'aurez pas eu, 


you will 


Us n'auront pas, 


they will not ^ 




Us n'auront pas eu, 


ilicywill^ 



I 



Conditional Mode. 



Je n'aurais pas, 
Tu n'aurais pas, 
II n'aurait pas, 
On n'aurait pas, 
Nous n'aurions pas, 
Vous n'auriez pas, 
Us n'auraient pas. 



I should^ 

thou would st 

he would 

one would )■ 

we would 

you would 

they would 



Je n'aurais pas eu, I should" 
Tu n'aurais pas eu t tkoushotUdst 

11 n'aurait pas eu, he would 

On n ; i rait pas eu, one would 
Noir aurions pas eu, we would 
Vou ] auriez pas eu, you would 
lis mraient pas eu, ihey vionld 



ti 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47. 



329 



Imperative Mode. 



N'aie pas 
Qu'il u'ait pas, 
Qu'on n'ait pas, 
N'ayons pas 
N'ayez pas 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, 



have not 
let him not have 
let one not have 
let ns not have 
have not ye or you 
let them not have 



SIMPLE TENSES 
PRESENT. 



Subjunctive Mode. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 



Que je n'aie pas, that I may " 
Que tu n'aies pas, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may 

Qu'on n'ait pas, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas. that we )> 

may 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you 

may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, that ImigkT 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il n'eiit pas, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas, that one might 



Que nous n'eussions pas, that 

v:e might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you 

might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, thai they 
might 



\: 



PAST. 

Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may^ 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may 
Qu'on n'ait pas eu, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that 

we may 
Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that 

you may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they 
may 

PLUPERFECT 

Que je n'eusse pas eu. that r 

might 
Que tu n'eusses pas eu, that 

thou mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas eu, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one 

might 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu. that 

you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that, they 
might 



Infinitive Mode, 
present. past. 

Ns pas avoir, not to have | N'avoir pas eu, not to have had 

Participle. 

PRESENT. COMPOUND. 

N'ayant pas, not having | N'ayunt pas eu, noi having had 

Past or Passive. 
Pas eu, Not had 



330 



AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47. 



(3.) AVOIR,— INTERROGATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Ai-je? 
As-tat 

A-t>il ?(*) 
A-t-on ?(*) 
Avons-nous 1 
Avez-vous 1 
Ont-ils 1 



IMPERFECT. 



Avais-je 7 
Avais-tu? 
Avait-il 1 
Avait-on 1 
Avions-nous 1 
Aviez-vous 1 
Avaient-ils 1 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Eus-je % 
Eus-tu? 
Eut-il 1 
Eut-on? 
Eumes-nous 1 
Eutes-vous 1 
Eurent-ils 1 



have I? 

hast thou ? 

has he? 

has one ? 

have we ? 

have you ? 

have they ? 

had I? 

hcdst thou ? 

had he ? 

had one ? 

had we ? 

had you ? 

had they ? 

had I? 

hadst tlwu ? 

had he ? 

had one ? 

had we ? 

had you ? 

had they ? 



Ai-je eu 1 
As-tu eu 1 
A-t-il eu 1 
A-t-on eu 1 
Avons-nous eu 1 
Avez-vous eu 1 
Ont-ils eu 1 



have r 

hast thou 

has he 

has one 

have we 

have you 

have they 



PLUPERFECT. 



Avais-je eu, 
Avais-tu eu, 
Avait-il eu, 
Avait-on eu, 
Avions nous eu, 
Aviez-vous eu, 
Avaient-ils eu, 



had r\ 

hadst thou 

had he 

had one 

Jiad we 

had you 

had they 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Eus-je eu 1 
Eus-tu eu 1 
Eut-il eu 1 
Eut-on eu 1 
Eumes-nous eul 
Eutes-vous eu? 
EurenMls eu 1 



had n 

hadst thou 

had he 

had one 

had we 

had you 

had they ^ 



FUTURE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Anrai-je 1 
Auras- tu 1 
Aura-Mil 
Aura-t-on ? 
Aurons-nous ? 
Aurez-vous 1 
Auront-ils % 



shall I have ? 
shalt tlwu have ? 

will he have ? 
shall one have ? 
shall we have ? 
will one have? 
shall they have 



Aurai-je eu ? 
Auras-tu eu ? 
Aura-t-il eu 1 
Aura-t-on eu 1 
Aurons-nous eu ? 
Aurez-vous eu 1 
Auront-ils eu ? 



shall I 

shalt thou 

shall he 

shall one 

shall we 

shall you 

shaU they 






Conditional Mode. 



Aurais-je? 
A urais-tu ? 
Aurait-il 1 
Aurait-on ? 
Aurions-nous'* 
>Hriez-vous 1 
/ qraienMls ] 



should I have? 

should st thou, have ? 

should he have? 

would I key have? 

icon Id wc have ? 

shmdd you have ? 

sJundd t/icy have ? 



Aurais-je eu ? 
Aurais-tu eu ? 
Aurait-il eu 1 
Aurait-on eu ? 
Aurions-nous eu 1 
Auriez-vous eul 
Auraient-ils eu 1 



should I 

woiihht thou 

would he 

shoul I one 

should ice 

should you 

would they J 



(*) See Lesson 4, Rule 6. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 47. 



381 



(4.) AVOIR,— NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



N'ai-je pas 7 
N'as-tu pas 1 
Na-t-il pas 1 
N'a-t-on pas 7 
N'avons-nous pas ? 
N ; avez-vous pas 7 
N'ont-ils pas % 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

have I not ? N'ai-je pas eu 1 have JT] 

Aas£ tliou not ? N'as-tu pas eu? hast ihau 

has he not ? N'a-t-il pas eu ? has he 

has one not ? N'a-t-on pas eu 7 has one y 

have we not ? , N'avons-nous pas eu 7 have we 

have you not ? | N'avez-vous pas eu 7 have you 

have they not ? | N'ont-ils pas eu 7 have they 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



N'avais-je pas 7 
N'avais-tu pas ? 
N'avait-il pas 1 
N'avait-on pas 1 
N'avions-nous pas 7 
N'aviez-vous pas 1 
N'avaient-ils pas? 



had I not? N'avais-je pas eu 7 liad P\ 

hadst tlwu not ? N'avais-tu pas eu 7 hadst thou 

had he not ? N'avait-il pas eu 1 had he -g 

had one not ? N'avait-on pas eu 7 had one )• 4 

had we not ? N'avions-nous pas eu 7 had we 

had you not ? N'aviez-vous pas eu 7 had you 

liad they not ? N'avaient-il pas eu 7 had they ^ 



PAST DEFINITE. 



N'eus-je pas 7 
N'eus-tu pas 7 
N'eut-il pas 7 
N'eut-on pas 7 
N'eumes-nous pas 7 
N'eutes-vous pas 7 
N'eurent-ils pas 7 



had I not ? 

hadst thou not ? 

had he not ? 

had one not ? 

had we not ? 

had you not ? 

had they not ? 



N'aurai-je pas 7 
N'auras-tu pas 7 
N'aura-t-il pas 7 
N'aura-t-on pas 7 
N'aurons-nous pas 7 
N'aurez-vous pas 7 
N'auront-ils pas 7 



shall t\ 

shalt thou 

shall he 

shall one 

shall we 

shall you 

shall they \ 



\ 3 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

N'eus-je pas eu 7 had I 

N'eus-tu pas eu 7 hadst thou 
N'eut-il pas eu 7 had he 

N'eut-on pas eu 7 had one 

N'eumes-nous pas eu 7 had we 
N'eutes-vous pas eu 7 had you 
N'eurent-ils pas eu 7 had they ^ 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

N'aurai-je pas eu 7 shall r 

N'auras-tu pas eu 7 shall thou 
N'aura-t-il pas eu7 shall lie 
N'aura-t-on pas eu 7 shall one y ^ 
N'aurons-nous pas eu 7 slwll we 
N'aurez-vous pas eu 7 shall you 
N'auront-ils pas eu 7 shall they 



Conditional Mode. 



N'anrais-je pas 7 should I^\ 

N'aurais-tu pas 7 slwuldst thou j 
N'aurait-il pas 7 shcmldiie 

N'aurait-on pas 7 should one 
N'aurions-nous pas 7 should use 
N'auriez-vous pas 7 should you 
N'auraient-ils pas 7 should they 



N'aurais-je pas eu 7 should V 
N'aurais-tu pas eu 7 shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas eu? should he 
N'aurait-on pas eu 7 should one 
N'aurions-nous pas eu? should we 
N'auriez-vous pas eu? should you 
N'auraient-ils pas eu? should 
they 






332 



AUXILIARY VERBS.- 



§ 47. 



(5.) £tre, to ^—affirmatively. 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je suis, 


I am 


J'ai ete, 


I lave been 


Tu cs, 


thou art 


Tu as ete, 


thou hast been 


11 est, 


he is 


11 a ete, 


he has been 


On est, 


one is 


On a ete, 


one has been 


Nous sommes, 


we are 


Nous avons ete, 


we have been 


Vous ctes, 


ye or you are 


Vous avez ete, 


you have been 


lis sont, 


tltey are 


lis ont ete, 


they have been 


IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 


J'ctais, 


I was or I used to be 


J'avais et6, 


I had been 


Tu etais, 


thou wast 


Tu avais ete, 


thou hadst been 


11 etait, 


he was 


11 avait ete, 


\e had been 


On etait, 


one was 


On avait ete, 


one had been 


Nous etions, 


we were 


Nous avions ete, 


we had been 


Vous etiez, 


you were 


Vous aviez ete, 


you had been 


lis etaient, 


they were 


lis avaient ete, 


tliey had been 


PAST 


DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je fus, 


/ vas 


J'eus ete, 


I had been 


Tu fus, 


iicou wast 


Tu eus ete, 


thou hadst been 


11 fut, 


he was 


li eut ete, 


he had been 


On fut, 


one a as 


On eut ete, 


one had been 


Nous fumes, 


we were 


Nous eumes ete, 


we had been 


Vous futes, 


you were 


Vous eutes ete, 


you had been 


lis furent, 


they were 


lis eurent ete, 


they had been 


FUTURE. FUTURE 


ANTERIOR. 


Je serai, 


I shall be, will be 


J'aurai ete, 


IshaU^ 


Tu seras, 


thou wilt be 


Tu auras ete, 


thou shalt 


8 


11 sera, 


he shall be 


11 aura ete, 


he shall 


On sera, 


one shall be 


On aura ete, 


one shall 


r v 


Nous serons, 


we shall be 


Nous aurons ete, 


we shall 


I 


Vous serez, 


you shall be 


Vous aurez ete, 


you will 


lis seront, 


they shall be 


lis auront ete, 


they will J 





Conditional Mode. 



present. 



PAST. 



Je serais, 
Tu serais, 
II serait, 
On serait, 
Nous serions, 
Vous seriez, 
lis seraient, 



I should be 

tliou should st be 

he would be 

one sliould be 

we would be 

you should be 

they would be 



J'aurais ete, 
Tu aurais ete, 
II aurait ete, 
On aurait ete, 
Nous aurions ete, 
Vous auriez ete, 
lis auraient 6te, 



I should 

thou should st 

he would 

one would 

we should 

you should 

ihry should 



i 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 47. 



333 



Imperative Mode. 

Sois, be thou 

Qu'il soit, let him be 

Qu'on soit, let one be 

Soyons, let us be 

Soyez, be ye or you 

Qu'ils soient, let them be 

Subjunctive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUNr TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



Jue je sois, 
Jue tu sois, 
Qu'il soit, 
Qu'on soit, 
Que nous soyons, 
Que vous soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 



that I may be 

that thou mayest be 

that he may be 

that one may be 

that we may be 

that you may be 

that they may be 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je fusse, 
Que tu fusses, 



that I might be 
that thou mightest be 



Qu'il fut, that he might be 

Qu'on fiit, that one might be 

Que nous fussions, that we might be 

Que vous fussiez, that you might be 

Qu'ils fussent, that they might be 



PAST. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may y 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may 

Qu'on ait, ete, that one may ^ 
Que nous ayons ete, that we may 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may 
Qu'ils aient ete, that tliey may 

PLUPERFECT 



Que j'eusse etc, that I might 
Que tu eusses ete, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might 

Qu'on eut ete, that one mig/U 
Que nous eussions ete, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez ete, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they 

might 



tt 



rt, 



fitant, 



PRESENT. 



fttf 



Infinitive Mode. 

to be | Avoir ete, 
Participle. 

being | Ayant ete, 
Past or Passive. 



PAST. 



to have been 



compound. 



having been 



been 



334 



REGULAR VERBS. §48. 



§ 48. — Regular Verbs. 
FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN ER. 

MODEL VERB. 

CHANTER, TO SING. 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 




Je chante, 


I sing 


J'ai chante, 


I have sung 


Tu chantes, 


thou singest 


Tu as chante, 


then hast sung 


11 chante, 


he sings 


11 a chante, 


he has sung 


On chante, 


one sings 


On a chante, 


one has sung 


Nous chantons 


toe sing 


Nous avons chante, 


we have sung 


Vous chantez, 


you sing 


Vous avez chante, 


you have sung 


lis chantent, 


tJwy sing 


lis ont chante, 


they have sung 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je chantais / was singing, or I 


J'avais chante, 


Ihad^ 






used to sing 






bxj 


Tu chantais, 


thou wast singing 


Tu avais chante, 


thou hadst 


| 


11 chantait, 


he was singing 


11 avait chante, 


he had 


► §? 


On chantait, 


one was singing 


On avait chante, 


one had 




Nous chantions, 


we were singing 


Nous avions chante, 


we had 


1 


Vous chantiez, 


you were singing 


Vous aviez chante, 


you had 




lis chantaient, 


they were singing 


lis avaient chante, 


they had^ 




PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Jc chantai, 


I sang or did sing 


J'eus chante, 


I had sung 


Tu chantas, 


thou sangest 


Tu eus chante, 


thou hadst sung 


11 chanta, 


he sang 


11 eut chante, 


he had sung 


On chanta, 


one sang 


On eut chante, 


one Jiad sung 


Nous chantames, 


vie sang 


Nous eumes chante, 


we had sung 


Vous chantates, 


you sang 


Vous eutes chante, 


you had sung 


lis chanterent, 


they sang 


lis eurent chante, 


they had sung 


FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


Je chanterai, 


I shall or will sing 


J'aurai chante, 


Iwiir 




Tu chanteras, 


thou wilt sing 


Tu auras chante, 


thou shalt 


*q 


11 chant-era, 


he will sing 


11 aura chante, 


he will 




On chantera, 


one will sing 


On aura chante, 


one will 


>! 


Nous chant erons, 


we shall sing 


Nous aurons chante, 


we shall 


I 


Vous chanterez, 


you will sing 


Vous aurez chante, 


you will 


lis chanteront, 


they ivill sing 


lis auront chante, 


they shall i 






Condition 


al Mod}., 




PRESENT 


p>ST 




Je chanterais, I shouhr, would sing 


J'aurais chante. 


I should^ 




Tu chanterais, 


thou shou Id est sing 


Tu aurais chante, thou wouL.-si 


* 


11 chanterait, 


he should sing 


11 an rait chante, 


k jcould 


5J 


On chanterait, 


one should sing 


On aura it chante. 


one would 


y * 


Nous chanterions 


, we would sing 


Nous aurions chante, 


we wouM 


1 


Vous chanteriez, 


you would sing 


Vous auriez cnante, 


you would 


lis chanteraient, 


they would sing 


lis auraient chante, 


they would 





RE OU L AR VERBS. 



§48. 



335 



Imperative Mode. 



Chante, 
Qu'il chante, 
Qu'on chante, 
Chantons, 
Chantez, 
Qu'ils chantent, 



sing tfwu 
let him sing 
let one sing 
let us si?ig 
sing ye or you 
let them sing 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



Que je chante, that I may sing 

Que tu chantes, that thou may est sing 

Qu'il chante, that he may sing 

Qu'on chante, that one may sing 

Que nous chantions, that we may sing 

Que vous chantiez, that you may sing 

Qu'ils chantent, that they may sing 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je chantasse, that I might sing 
Que tu chantasses, that thou mightest 

sing 
Qu'il chantat, that he might sing 

Qu'on chantat, that one might sing 
Que nous chantassions, that we might 

sing 
Que vous chantassiez, that you might 

sing 
Qu'ils chantassent. thai they might 

sing 



| Que j'aie chante, that I may ) 
' Que tu aies chante, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait chante, that he may 
Qu'on ait chante, that one may 
Que nous ayons chante, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez chante, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient chante, that they may t 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse chante, that ImighP 
Que tu eusses chante, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut chante, that he might 
Qu'on eut chante, that one might 
Que nous eussions chante, that J» 

we might 
Que vous eussiez chante, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent chante, that they 
mi^ht 



r 



Infinitive Mode. 



present. 



PAST. 



Chanter, 



Cfeantant, 



to sing | Avoir chante, to have sung 

Participle. 

compound. 

singing | Ayant chants hcving sung 

PA.ST OR PASSIVE. 

Chante sun? 



336 PECULIAR VERBS. — § 49 



§ 49. — Remarks on the Peculiarities op some Verbs 
of the First Conjugation. 

(I.) In verbs ending in ger, in order to retain the soft pronuncia* 

tion of the g,* the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g 

would come before a, or o : 

Nous mangeons, we eat ; instead of nous mangons / 
Je mangeai, I did eat ; " je mangai ; 

Jugeant, judging; " jugant. 

(2.) In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i, before e, es, ent, 
and e (not accented), followed by r, and one or more vowels : 

Je paie, I pay; instead of jepaye; 

lis essaient, they try ; tl Us essay ent ; 

Je paierai, I will pay; " jepayerai. 

(3.) In verbs terminating in cer,\ to preserve to the c its soft pro- 
nunciation, a cedilla (q) is put under it, when it comes before a or o : 

Commencant, commencing ; instead of commencant ; 
Nous pla^ons, we place ; " nous placons. 

(4.) In verbs ending in eter and eler, the t or I of the infinitive is 
doubled, when it comes before e, es, ent and e (not accented), followed 
by r, and one or more vowels : 

J'appelle, / call ; instead of fappele ; 

Je jetterai, / will tin oio ; " je jeterai ; 

J'appelleraiSj IioouldcaU; " fappelerais. 

(5.) The following verbs form exceptions to the last rule : 



Acheter, to buy ; 

Bourreler, to torment ; 

Congeler, to' congeal; 

Colleter, to collar ; 

Coqueter, to coquet; 

Deceler, to detect ; 

Degeler, to thaw. 



Decolleter , to uncover the thro J, ; 
Etiqueter, to ticket ; 

Geler, to freeze ; 

Harceler, to teaze ; 

Peler, to peel ; 

Suracheter, to over buy. 



In the above verbs, when the t or I comes before e, es, ent, or e (not 

accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent Q 

is put over the e, which precedes the t or Z : 

Je pcle, I peel; Je pelerai, I will peel ; 

J'achete, 1 buy ; J'acheterai, 1 7C ill buy. 

(6.) A grave accent is also used in verbs ending in 

ecer, emer, ener. ever: 



* See L. 3, 9. 

f This rule applies also to o and u in verbs of the third conjugation, 
ending in evoir, Je re^ois, I receive; J'aper^ois, I perceive. 



REGULAR VERBS. — 8 50. 



337 



and the acute accent of the infinitive of those ending in 
ecer, egler, eler, 



erer, 
eter, 
6trer, 



ebrer, egner, emer, 

echer, egrer, ener, 

edcr, eguer, equer, 

!s changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first 
e of these terminations, comes before e, es, ent, and e {not accented) 
followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je seme, I sow ; Je mene, / lead ; 

Je celebrerai, i" will celebrate ; II regnera, he will reign. 

(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersonal 
verbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- 
ceding remarks, and also include in the same table the names of the 
principal verbs coming under these remarks, with references to the 
models. 

§ 50.- Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
SECOND CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN IR. 

MODEL VERB. 

FINIR, TO FINISH. 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit, 
On finit, 
Nous finissons, 
Vous finissez, 
lis finissent, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



I finish 

thou finishest 

he finishes 

one finishes 

we finish 

you finish 

theyfinish 



J'ai fini, 
Tu as fini, 
II a fini, 
On a fini, 
Nous avons fini, 
Vous avez fini, 
lis ont fini. 



IMPERFECT. 

Je finissais, I was finishing, or used 
to finish 
thou wast finishing 
he was finishing 



I have finished 

thou hast finished 

he has finished 

one has fini Tied 

we have finished 

you have finished 

they have finished 



Tu finissais, 
II finissait, 
On finissait, 
Nous finissions 
Vous finissiez, 
lis finissaient, 



one was finishing 

we were finishing 

you were finishing 

they were finishing 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais fini, J had finished 

Tu avais fini, 
II avait fini, 
On avait fini, 
Nous avions fini, 
Vous aviez fini, 
lis avaient fini, 



thou hadst finished 

he had finished 

one had finished 

we had finished 

you had finished 

they hadfinislied 



PAST INTERIOR. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit, 
On finit, 
Nous finimes, 
Vous finites, ' 
0s finirent, 



I finished, did finish 

thou didst finish 

he finished 

onedidfinisli 

we finished 

youfinished 

they finished 

15 



J'eus fini, 
Tu eus fini, 
II eut fini, 
On eut fini, 
Nous eumes fini, 
Vous elites fini, 
lis eurent fini, 



I had finished 

thou hadst finished 

lie had finished 

one had finished 

we had finished 

you had finished 

they had finished 



S88 



HKGULAB VERBS. §50. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


compoun 


D TENaBS. 






TUTURE. FUTURE 


ANTERIOR. 




Je finirai, 


I shall finish 


J'aurai fini, 


/ shall hate s 




Tu finiras, 


thou wilt finish 


Tu auras fini, 


thou wilt have 




11 finira, 


he will finish 


11 aura fini, 


he shall have 




On finira, 


one will finish 


On aura fini, 


one will have 


i 


Nous finirons, 


we shall finish 


Nous aurons fini, 


we shall have 


Vous finirez, 


you will finish 


Vous aurez fini, 


you will have 




lis finiront. 


they will finish 


lis auront fini, 


they shall have j 






Conditional Mode. 








PRESENT. PAST. 




Je finirais, 


I would finish 


J'aurais fini, 


I should^ 




Tu finirais, 


thou shouldst finish 


Tu aurais fini, 


thou wouldst 


i 


11 finirait, 


he would finish 


11 aurait fini, 


he might 


On finirait, 


one might finish 


On aurait fini, 


one should 


►4 


Nous finirions 


we would finish 


Nous aurions fini. 


we loould 


^ 


Vous finirlez, 


you might finish 


Vous auriez fini, 


you might 


1 


lis finiraient, 


they should finish 


lis auraient fini, 


they should 






Imperative Mode. 








Finis, finish thou 








Qu'il finisse, let him finish 








Qu'on finisse, let one finish 
Finissons, let us finish 














Finissez, finish ye or yov 






Qu'ils finissent, let them finish 








Subjunctive Mode. 






PRESENT. 


PAST. 





Que je finisse, that Imay^ 

Que tu finisses, that thou mayest 
Qu'il finisse, that he may 

Qu'on finisse, that one may 

Que nous finissions, that we may 
Que vous finissiez, that you may 
Qu'ils finissent, that they may J 

IMPERFECT. 

J 

one je finisse, that I migh£j\ 

Quetu finisses, that thou migW" 



*5 



Qu'il finit, 
Qu'on finit, 



a/it ! 



that he might 
that ojie might 



Que nous finissions, that toe might 
Que vous finissiez, that you might 
Qu'ils finissent, that they wight 



y 



Que j'aie fini, that lmay 

Que tu aies fini, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait fini, that he may 

Qu'on ait fini, that one may 

Que nous ayons fini, that we may 
Que vous ayez fini, that you may 
Qu'ils aient fini, that ihey may 

A PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse fini, 
Que rAi eusses 



that I might} 
fini, that thou 
wmgAh'st 

that he might 
that one mi^ht 



Qu'il put fini, 
Qu'on out fini 
Que nous eussions firi. that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent fimjhat they might) 



REGULAR VERBS.— §51. 



389 



Infinitive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



Finir 



Finissant, 



PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



to finish | Avoir fini, 
Participle. 



to liave finished 



compound. 

having finished 



finishing | Ayant fini, 
Past or Passive. 
Fini, finished 

§ 51. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 

THIRD CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN OIR. 

model verb. 
RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 

Indicative Mode, 
present. past indefinite. 



Je re9ois * 
Tu re^is, 
11 refoit, 
On re9oit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
lis re^oivent, 



/ receive 

thou receivest 

he receives 

one receives 

we receive 

you receive 

they receive 



J'ai refu, 
Tu as refu, 
11 a refu, 
On a re9U, 
Nous avons re9U, 
Vous avez re^u, 
lis ont re9U, 



/ have received 
thou hast received 

he has received 

one has received 

we have received 

you have received 

they have received 



IMPERFECT. 

Je recevais, / was receivings or / 

used to receive 
Tu recevais, thou wast receiving 
II recevait, he was receiving 

On recevait, one was receiving 

Nous recevions, we were receiving 
Vous receviez, you were receiving 
Is recevaient, they were receiving 

PAST definite. 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais re9U, I had received^ 

Tu avals re9U, thou hadst received 
II avait re9U, he had received 
On avait re9U, one had received 
Nous avions re$ u, we had received 
Vous aviez re9U, you had received 
lis avaient re9U, they had received 

past anterior. 



* 



Je re9US, J received or did receive \ J'eus re9U, J had received 

Tu re9US, thou receivedst i Tu eus re9U, thou hadst received 

II rec;ut, he received II eut re9U, he had received 

On re9Ut, one received \ On eut re9U, one had received 

Nous re9umes, we received \ Nous eumes re9U, we had received 

Vous refutes. you received j Vous eutes re9U, you had received 

lis re$urent, they received \ lis eurent re9U, t/uy had received 



* See note f § 49, (3.) Also, § 62. 



340 



REGULAR VERBS. § 61. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
FUTURE. 



Je recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
On recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
lis recevront, 



I shall 
thou wilt 

he shall 
one will 

we shall 
you will 
they will 



receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai re^u, I shall have 

Tu auras re9U, thou wilt have 
II aura re^, he will have 

On aura re9U, one will have 
Nous aurons re9U, we shall have 
Vous aurez re9U, you will have 
lis auront re9U, they shall have) 



Conditional Mode. 



present. 



PAST. 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevraiSj 
II recevrait, 
On recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Vous recevriez, 
lis recevraient, 



J should receive 

thou wouldst receive 

he sJwuld receive 

one might receive 

you should receive 

you might receive 

they should receive 



J'aurais re9U, 
Tu aurais re9U, 
II aurait re9U, 
On aurait re9U, 
Nous aurions re9U, 
Vous auriez re9U, 
lis auraient re9U, 



J should" 

thou wouldst 

he might 

one would, 

we should 

you might 

they should 



I 



Imperative Mode. 



Re9ois, 
Qu'il re9oive, 
Qu'on rey.oive, 
Recevons, 
Recevez, 
Qu'ils re9oivent, 



receive thou 
let him receive 
let one receive 
let us receive 
receive ye or you 
let them receive 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je re9oive, tliat I may" 

Que tu re9oives, that thou mayest 
Qu'il re9oive, that he may 

Qu'on re9oive, that one may 
Que nous recevions, that we may 

Que vous receviez, that you may 
Qu'ils re9oivent, that they may ^ 

imperfect. 



Que je re9usse, that I might 
Que tu re9usses, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il re9ut, that he might 

Qu'on re9ut, that one might 

Que nous ^ussions, that we y& 

might 
Que vous re9ussiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils re9ussent, that they might 



Que j'aie re9U, that 1 may" 

Que tu aies re9U. that thou may est 
Qu'il ait re9U, that he may 

Qu'on ait re9U, that one may 
Que nous ayons re9U, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez re9U, that you may 
Qu'ils aient re9U, thai iiey may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse re9u, that I might' 
Que tu eusses re9U, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut re9U, that he might 
Qu'on eut re9U, that one might 
Que nous eussions re9U, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez re9U, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent re9U, that they 

might 



REGULAR VERBS. § 52,53, 



841 



Infinitive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Recevoir, to receive | Avoir re^u, to have receittd 

Participle. 
present. compound. 

Recevant, receiving \ Ayant re$u, having received 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Begu, received, 

§ 52. — Remarks. 
(1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending * ith cevoir, in order to 
preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (g) is put under it, 
when it comes before a, o, u : — 

Je resois, / receive ; J'ape^ois, I perceive, 

(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They 
are : — 



Apercevoir, 
C once voir, 
Decevoir, 
Devoir, 



to perceive ; 
to conceive ; 
to deceive; 
to owe; 



Percevoir, to collect duties, taxes ; 
Recevoir, to receive ; 

Rede voir, to owe again. 



§ 53. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN RE. 

MODEL verb. 

VENDUE, TO SELL. 

Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je vends, / sell 


J'ai vendn, 


J have sold 


Tu vends, thou sellest 


Tu as vendu, 


thou hast sold 


11 vend, he sells 


11 a vendu, 


he has sold 


On vend, one sells 


On a vendu, 


one has sold 


Nous vendons, we sell 


Nous avons vendu, 


we have sold 


Vous vendez, you sell 


Vous avez vendu, 


you have sold 


Us vendent, they sell 


lis ont vendu, 


they have sold 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je vendais, J was selling, or used to 


J'avais vendu, / had sold or been sell- 


sett 




ing 


Tu vendais, thou wast selling 


Tu avais vendu, 


thou hadst sold 


H vendait, he was selling 


11 avait vendu, 


he /uid sold 


On vendait, one was selling 


On avait vendu, 


one had sold 


Nous vendions, we were selling 


Nous avions vend a, 


we had sold 


Vous vendiez, you were selling 


Vous aviez vendu, 


you had sold 


U& vendaient, they were selling 


lis avaient vendu, 


they had sold 



342 



REGULAR VERBS . § 54. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 




Je vendis, 


J sold or did sell 


J'eus vendu, / had sold 


Tu vendis, 


tliou soldest 


Tu eus vendu, thou hadst sold 


11 vendit, 


lie sold 


11 eut vendu, he had sold 


On vendit, 


07ie sold 


On eut vendu, one had sold 


Nous vcndimes, we sold 


Nous eumes vendu, we had sol 


Vous v, ndites, 


you sold 


Vous eutes vendu, you had sold 


lis vendit ent^ 


tJiey sold 


lis eurent vendu, they had sold 


FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


Je vendrai, 


I shall sell 


J'aurai vendu, J shall have sold 


Tu vendras, 


thou wilt sell 


Tu auras vendu, thou wilt have sold 


11 vendra, 


he will sell 


11. aura vendu, he shall have sold 


On vendra, 


one will sell 


On aura vendu, one will have sold 


Nous vendrons 


we shall sell 


Nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold 


Vous vendrez, 


you will sell 


Vous aurez vendu, you will have sold 


lis vendront, 


they will sell 


lis auront vendu, they shall have sold 




Conditional Mode. 


PRESENT. PAST. 


Je vendrais, 


J should sell 


J'aurais vendu, / should * 




Tu ^cndrais. 
11 vendit, 


thou wouldesl sell 


Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldest 




he might sell 


11 aurait vendu, he might 


3 


On vendrait, 


one would sell 


On aurait vendu, one should 


5j 


Nous vendrions, we should sell 


Nous aurions vendu, we should 


I 


Vous vendriez, 


you might sell 


Vous auriez vendu, you should 


Us vendraient, 


they would sell 


lis auraient vendu, they should^ 






Imperative Mode. 




Vends, sell thou 




Qu'il vende, let him sell 




Qu'on vende, let one sell 




Vendons, let us sell 




Vendez, sell ye or you 




Qu'ils vendent, 


let them sell 





Subjunctive Mode. 



present. 



PAST. 



Que je vende, that I may sell 

Que tu vendes, that thou mayest sell 

Qu'il vende, that he may sell 

Qu'on vende, that one may sell 

Que nous vendions, that we may sell 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell 



Que j'aie vendu, thatlmay^ 
Que tu aies vendu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 
Qu'on ait vendu, that one may 
Que nous ayons vendu, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may 



PASSIVE VERBS . — § 54. 



343 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES, 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je vendisse, that I might sell 
Que tu vendisses, that thou mightest 

sell 
Qu'il vendit, tluit he might sell 

Qu'on vendit, that you might sell 
Que nous vendissions, tlial we might 

sell 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might 

sell 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that I might* 
Que tu eusses vendu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might 
Qu'on eut vendu, that one might 
Que nous eussions vendu, that 

we might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they 
might 



Vendre, 



Vendant. 



PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 



Infinitive Mode. 

to sell | Avoir vendu, 
Participle. 



to have sold 



COMPOUND. 



selling \ Ayant vendu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Vendu, sold 

54. — Conjugation of a Passive Verb. 

£tre aime, to be loved. 

Indicative Mode. 



having sold 



I 



PRESENT. 

Je suis aime, m. aimee,/. 

Tu es aime or aimee, 

II est aime, 

Elle est aimee, 

On est aime, 

Nous sommes aimes or aimSes, 

Vous etes aimes or aimees, 

lis sont aimes, m. 

Elles sont aimees, /. 



/ am loved 
thou art loved 
he is loved 
she is loved 
one is loved 
we are loved 
you are loved 
they are loved 
they are loved 



IMPERFECT. 



J'etais aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu etais aime or aimee, 
II etait aime, 
Elle etait aimee, 
On etait aime, 

Nous etions aimes or aimees, 
Vous etiez aimes or aimees, 
lis etaient aimes, m. 
Elles etaient aimees,/. 



I was loved, was being loved 
thou wast loved, wast being loved 
he was loved, was being loved 
she was loved, was being loved 
one was loved, was being loved 
we were loved, were being loved 
yon were loved, were being loved 
tfvey were loved, were being loved 
they were loved, were being loved 



J 

i>3 



J 



344 



PASSIVE VERBS. — § 54, 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je fus aim6, m. aimee,/. 

Tu fus aime or aimee, 

II fut aime, 

Elle fut aimee, 

On fut aime, 

Nous fumes aimes or aimees, 

Vous futes aimes or aimees, 

lis furent aimes, m. 

Elles furent aimees, /. 

PAST 

J'ai ete aime or aimee, 

Tu as ete aime or aimee, 

II a ete aime, 

Elle a ete aimee, 

On a ete aime, 

Nous avons ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous avez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis ont ete aimes, m. 

Elles ont ete aimees, /. 



J was loved 
tlwu wast loved 
he was loved 
she was loved 
one was loved 
we were loved 
you were loved 
they were loved 
they were loved 

INDEFINITE. 

I have been loved 
thou hast been, loved 
he has been loved 
she has been loved 
one has been loved 
we have been loved 
you have been loved 
they have been loved 
they have been loved 



PAST ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 



J'eus ete aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu eus ete aime or aimee, 

II eut ete aime, 

Elle eut ete aimee, 

On eut ete aime, 

Nous eumes ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous eutes ete aimes or aimees, 

lis eurent ete aimes, m. 

Elles eurent ete aimees, /. 



/ had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 



J'avais ete aime or aimee, 
Tu avais ete aime or aimee, 
II avait ete aime, 
Elle avait ete aimee, 
On avait ete aime, 
Nous avions ete aimes or aimees : 
Vous aviez ete aimes or aimees, 
lis avaient ete aimes, m. 
Elles avaient ete aimees, /. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 



FUTURE. 



Je serai aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu seras aime or aimee, 

II sera aime, 

Elle sera aimee, 

On sera aime, 

Nous serons aimes or aimees, 

Vous serez aimes or aimees, 

lis seront aimes, m. 

EHes seront aiweesj f, 



I shall or trill be loved 
thou shall or will be loved 
he shall or will be loved 
she shall or will be loved 
one shall or will be loved 
we shall or will be loved 
you sliall or will be loved 
they shall or will be loved 
they shall or will be lovtd 






PASS IT B VERBS. — 8 54. 



845 



FUTURE 

J'aurai ete aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu auras ete aims or aimee, 

II aura ete aime, 

Elle aura ete aimee, 

On aura ete aime, 

Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous aurez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis auront ete aimes, m. 

Elles auront ete aimees, /. 



ANTERIOR. 

I shall, ivill have been loved 
thou shalt, wilt have been loved 
he shall, will have been loved 
she shall. wAll have bee-n loved 
one shall, will have been loved 
we shall, will have been loved 
you shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 
they shall, vnll have been loved 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais aime, m. aimee,/. 
Tu serais aime or aimee, 
II serait aime, 
Elle serait aimee, 
On serait aime, 
Nous serions aimes or aimees, 
Vous seriez aimes or aimees, 
lis seraient aimes, m. 
Elles seraient aimees,/. 

J'aurais ete aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, 
II aurait ete aime, 
Elle aurait ete aimee, 
On aurait ete aime, 
Nous aurions ete aimes or aimees. 
Vous auriez ete aimes or aimees, 
lis auraient ete aimes, m. 
Elles auraient ete aimees, /. 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, might be loved 

thou shouldst, couldst, migniest be loved 

he would or might be loved 

she might be loved 

one could be loved 

we should or would be loved 

you would or might be loved 

they might or should be loved 

they might, could, should be loved [ 

PAST. 

J should, would have been loved 

thou wouldst have been loved 

he vjould have been loved 

she would have been loved 

one would have been loved 

we might have been loved 

you would have been loved 

they might have been loved 

they should or might have been Uved 



Imperative Mode. 



Sois aime, m. aimee, /. 


be thou loved 


Qu'il soit aime, 


let him be loved 


Qu'elle soit aim' e, 


let her be loved 


Qu'on soit aime 


let one be loved 


Soyons aimes 01 aimees, 


let us be loved 


Soyez aimes or aimees, 


be ye or you loved 


Qu'ils soient aimes, m. 


let them be loved 


Qu'elles soient aimees, /. 


let them be loved 


Subjunctive Mode. 


PRESENT. 


Que je sois aime, m. aimee, / 


that I may be loved 


Que tu sois aime or aimee, 


that thou mayest be loved 


Qu'il soit aime, 


that he may be loved 


Qu'elle soit aimee, 


that she may be loved 


Qu'on soit aime, 


that one may be loved 


Que nous soyons aimes or aimees 


that we may be loved 


Que vous soyez aimes or aimees, 


that you may be loved 


Qu'ils soient aimes, 


that they may be loved 


Qu'elles soient aimees, 


that they may be loved 




16* 



346 PASSIVE VERB s. — § 54, 55. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je fusse aime, m. aimee,/. that I might be loved 

Que tu fusses aime or aimee, that thou mightest be loved 

Qu'il fut aime, thai he might be loved 

Qu'elle fut aimee, that she might be loved 

Qu'on fut aime, that one might be loved 

Que nous fussions aimes or aimees, that we might be loved 

Que vous fussiez aimes or aimees, that you might be loved 

Qu'ils fussent aimes, m. that they might be loved 

Qu'elles fussent aimees,/. that they might be loved 

PAST. 

Que j'aie ete aime, m. aimee,/. that I may have been loved 

Qu3 tu aies ete aime or aimee, that thou may est have been loved 

Qu'il ait ete aime, that he may have been loved 

Qu'elle ait ete aimee, that sJie may have been loved 

Qu'on ait ete aime, that one may have been loved 

Que nous ayons ete aimes or aimees, that we may have been loved 
Que vous ayez ete aimes or aimees, that you may have been loved 
Qu'ils aient ete aimes, m. that they may have been loved 

Qu'elles aient ete aimees, /. that they rn^ay have been loved 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse ete aime, m. aimee,/. that I might have been loved 

Que tu eusses ete aime or aimee, that thou mightest have been loved 

Qu'il eut ete aime, tJiat he might have been loved 

Qu'elle eut ete aimee, that she might have been loved 

Qu'on eut ete aime, that one might have been loved 

Que nous eussions ete aimes or that we might have been loved 

aimees, 

Que vous eussiez ete aimes or that you might have been loved 

aimees, 

Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, that they might have been loved 

Qu'elles eussent ete aimees, that they might have been loved 

Infinitive Mode, 
present. 
Etre aime, m. aimee, /. to be loved 

Participle. 

PRESENT. 

Etant aime, m. aimee, /. being loved 

COMPOUND. 

Ayant ete aime, m. aimee,/ having been loved 

PAST. 

Avoir ete aime, m. aimee, / to have been loved 

§ 55. — Rule. 

There is only one conjugation for passive verbs. It is formed of 
the auxiliary etre in all its tenses, simple and compound, and the par- 
ticiple past of the active verb which we wish to conjugate in the pas« 
■ive voice. See } 43, (4.) 



reflective verbs. §56. 347 

§ 56. — Conjugation of Reflective Verbs [§ 43, (6.)} 

model verb. 

SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. 

Je me flatte, 1 flatter myself 

Tu te flattes, tliou flatterest thyself 

H se flatte, he flatters himself 

On se flatte, one flatters himself or one's self 

Nous nous flattons, we flatter ourselves 

Vous vous flattez, you flatter yourselves 

lis se flattent, tliey flatter themselves 

IMPEEFECT. 

Je me flattais, I was flattering or used to fiiMei mf> 

self 

Tu te flattais, thou wast flattering thyself 

•II se flattait, he was flattering himself 

On se flattait, one was flattering one's self himself 

Nous nous flattions, we were flattering ourselves 

Vous vous flattiez, you were flattering yourselves 

lis se flattaient, they were flattering themselves 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Je me flattai, I flattered or did flatter myself 

Tu te flattas, thou didst flatter thyself 

II se flatta, he flattered himself 

On se flatta, one flattered one's self himself 

Nous nous flattames, we flattered ourselves 

Vous vous flattates, you flattered yourselves 

lis se flatterent, they flattered themselves 

PAST INDEFINITE, 

Je me suis flatte, m. flattee,/. I have flattered myself 

Tu t'es flatte or flattee, thou hast flattered thyself 

II s'est flatte, he has flattered himself 

Elle s'est flattee, she has flattered herself 

On s'est flatte, one has flattered himself ox one's self 

Nous nous sommes flattes or flattees, we have flattered ourselves 

Vous vous etes flattes or flattees, you have flattered yourselves 

lis se sont flattes, m. they have flattered themselves 

Elles se sont flattees,/. they have flattered themselves 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je me fus flatte, m. flattee,/. I had flattered myself 

Tu te fus flatte or flattee, " thou hadst flattered thyself 

II se fut flatte, he had flattered himself 

Elle se fut flattee, she had flattered herself 

On se fut flatte, one had flattered himself one't self 

Nous nous fumes flattes or flattens, we had flattered ourselves 

Vous vous futes flattes or flattees, you had flattered yourselves 

Ilsse furent flattes, m. they had flattered themselves 

Elles se furent flattees, /. they hadflatUred themselves 



348 



RBFLEOTIVB VERBS. — §56. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu t'etais flatte or flattee, 

II s'etait flatte, 

Elle s'etait flattee, 

On s'etait flatte, 

Nous nous etions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous etiez flattes or flattees, 

lis s'etaient flattes, m. 

Elles s'etaient flattees,/. 



I had flattered myself 

thou hadst flatten ed thyself 

he had flattered himself 

she had flattered herself 

one had flattered himself one's self 

we had flattered, ourselves 

you had flattered yourselves 

they had flattered themselves 

they had flattered themselves 



Je me flatterai, 
Tu te flatteras, 
II se flattera, 
On se flattera, 
Nous nous flatterons, 
Vous vous flatterez, 
lis se flatteront, 



I shall or will flatter myselj 
thou shalt or wilt flatter thyself 
he shall or will flatter himself 
one will flatter himself one's self 
we will flatter ourselves 
you will flatter yourselves 
they will flatter themselves 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je me serai flatte, m. flattee,/. 

Tu te seras flatte or flattee, 

II se sera flatte, 

Elle se sera flattee, 

On se sera flatte, 

Nous nous serons flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous serez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seront flattes, m. 

Elles se seront flattees, /. 



/ shall have flattered myselj 
Thou wilt have flattered thyself 
He will have flattered himself 
She will have flattered herself 
One will have flattered himself 
We will have flattered ourselves 
You will have flattered yourselves 
They will have flattered themselves 
They will have flattered themselves 



Conditional Mode. 



Je me flatterais, 

Tu te flatterais, 
II se flatterait, 
On se flatterait, 
Nous nous flatterions, 
Vous vous flatteriez, 
lis se flatteraient, 



J should, would, could, might flaUei 

myself 
thou would st flatter thyself 
he would flatter himself 
one would flatter himself one's self 
we would flatter ourselves 
you ivould flatter yourselves 
they would flatter themselves 



Je me serais flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu te serais flatte or flattee, 

tl se serait flatte, 

Elle se serait flattee, 

On se serait flatte, 

Nous nous serions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous seriez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seraient flattes, m. 

Elles se seraient flattees, / 



I should, would, could, might nav* 

fluttered myself 
thou wouldst have flattered thyself 
he would have flattered himself 
she would have flattered herself 
one would have flattered one's self 
we might have flattered ourselves 
you would have flattered yourselves 
they would have flattered' themselves 
they would have flaUered themselves 



REFLECTIVB VERBS. — § 56. 



849 



Flatte-toi, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Flattons-nous, 
F latter- vous, 
Qi'ils se flattent, 



Imperative Mode. 



flatter thyself 

let him flatter himself 

let one flatter one's self himself 

let us flatter ourselves 

flatter yourselves 

let them flatter themselves 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je me flatte, 
Que tu te flattes, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Que nous nous flattions, 
Que vous vous flattiez, 
Qu'ils se flattent, 

Que je me flattasse, 

Que tu te flattasses, 

Qu'il se flattat, 

Qu'on se flattat, 

Que nous nous flattassions, 

Que vous vous flattassiez, 

Qu'ils se flattassent, 



that I may flatter myself 
that thou mayest flatter thyself 
that he may flatter himself 
that one may flatter himself 
that we may flatter ourselves 
that you may flatter yourselves 
that they may flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



that I might flatter myself 
thai thou mightest flatter thyself 
that he might flatter himself 
that one might flatter himself 
that we might flatter ourselves 
that you might flatter yourselves 
that they might flatter themselves 



Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se soit flatte, 

Qu'elle se soit flattee, 

Qu'on se soit flatte, 

Que nous nous soyons flattes 01 

flattees, 
Que vous vous soyez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se soient flattes, m. 
Qu'elles se soient flattees, /. 



that I may have flattered myself 
that thou mayest have flattered thyself 
that he may have flattered himself 
that she may have flattered herself 
that one may have flattered himself 
that we may have flattered ourselves 

that you may have flattered yourselves 

that they may have flattered tJiemselves 
that tJiey may have flattered themselves 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee,/. 
Que tu te fusses flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se fut flatte, 

Qu'elle se fut flattee, 

Qu'on se fut flatte, 

Que nous nous fussions flattes or 

flattees, 
Que vous vous fussiez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se fussent flattes, m. 

Qu'eJles se fussent flattees, /. 



that I might have flattered myself 
that thou mightest have flattered thy 

self 
that he might have flattered himself 
that she might have flattered herself 
that one might have flattered himself 
that we might have flattered ourselves 

that you might have flattered your- 
selves 

that they might have flattered tkem, 
selves 

that they might have flattered tkem~ 
selves 



350 



BEFLECTIVE VERB 8. § 57. 



Infinitive Mode. 

"resent. past. 

Se flatter, to flatter one's self | S'etre flatte, to have flattered one's self 

Participle. 

PRESENT. COMPOUND. 

Se flattant, flattering one's self | S'etant flatte, having flattered one's set) 

PAST. 

Flatte, m. flattee, /. flattes, m. p. flattees, f p. flattered 

§ 57. — Negative Form of the Reflective Verb. 

NE PAS SE FLATTER, NOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Te ne me flatte pas, 
Tu ne te flattes pas, 
H ne se flatte pas, 
On ne se flatte pas, 
Nous ne nous flattons pas, 
Vous ne vous flattez pas, 
Us ne se flattent pas, 
&c. &c. 



I do not flatter myself 
thou dost not flatter thyself 
he does not flatter himself 
one does not flatter himself 
we do not flatter ourselves 
you do not flatter yourselves 
they do not flatter themselves 



We will add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated to 
this form. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je ne me suis pas flatte, m. flattee,/. 

Tu ne t'es pas flatte or flattee, 

II ne s'est pas flatte, 

Elle ne s'est pas flattee, 

On ne s'est pas flatte, 

Nous ne nous sommes pas flattes 

or flattees, 
Vous ne vous etes pas flattes or 

flattees, 
(Is ne se sont pas flattes, m. 
Giles ne se sont pas flattees, /. 
&c. &c. 



I have not flattered myself 
thou hast not flattered thyself 
he has not flattered himself 
she has not flattered herself 
one has not flattered himself 
vje have not flattered ourselves 

you have not flattered yourselves 

they have not flattered themselvet 
they have not flattered themselvc 



Imperative Mode. 



tfe te flatte pas, 
Qu'il ne se flatte pas, 
Qu'on ne se flatte pas, 
Ne nous flattons pas, 
Ne vous flattez pas, 
Qu'ils ne se flattent pas, 
&c. &c 



do not flatter thyself 

let him not flatter himself 

let one not flatter himself 

let us not flatter ourselves 

do not flatter yourselves 

let them not flatter themselvet 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. §58,59. 351 

§ 58. — Interrogative Form of the Reflective Verb 
Indicative Mode. 

PRESENT. 

Me flatte-je % or* est-ce-que je me do I flatter myself? 

flatte 1 

Te flattes-tu % dostthou flatter thyself ? 

Se iiatte-t-il If d° es he flatter himself ? 

Se flatte-t-on 1 does one flatter himself? 

Nous flattons-nous % do we flatter ourselves ? 

Vous flattez-vous % do yon flatter yourselves? 

Se flattent-ils 1 do they flatter themselves 7 
&c. &c. <frc. fyc. 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

Me suis-je flatte, m. flattee If have I flattered myself? 

T'es-tu flatte or flattee 1 hast thou flattered thy sell ? 

S'est-il flatte 1 has he flattered himself? 

S'est-elle flattee 1 has she flattered herself? 

S'est-on flatte 1 has one flattered himself? 

Nous sommes-nous flattes or flat- have we flattered ourselves ? 

tees'? 

Vous etes-vous flattes or flattees 7 have you flattered yourselves? 

Se sont-ils flattes 1 m. have they flattered themselves ? 

Se sont-elles flattees 7 /. have they flattered themselves ? 
&c. &c. fyc. <f<c. 

§ 59. — The Reflective Verb Conjugated Negativeli 

and Interrogatively. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. 

Ne me flatte-je pas % Est-ce que je do I not flatter myself? 

ne me flatte pas 1 
Ne te flattes-tu pas % dost thou not flatter thyself? 

Ne se flatte-t-il pas 1 does he not flatter himself? 

Ne se flatte-t-on pas 1 does one not flatter himself? 

Ne nous flattons-nous pas 1 do we not flatter ourselves ? 

Ne vous flattez-vous pas 1 do you not flatter yourselves ? 

Ne se flatten t-ils pas 1 do they not flatter themselves ? 

&c. &c. fyc. 4*c. 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

Ne me suis-je pas flatte, m. flat- have I not flattered myself ? 

teeV- 

Ne t'es-tu pas flatte or flattee 1 hast thou not flattered thyself? 

Ne s'estril pas flatte 1 has he not flattered himself? 

Ne s'est-elle pas flattee 1 has she not flattered herself? 

Ne s'est-on pas flatte 1 has one not flattered himselj ? 

Ne nous sommes-nous pas flattes have we not flattered ourselves 7 

or flattees 1 

Ne vous etes-vous pas flattes or have you not flattered yourselves? 

flattees 1 

Ne se sont-ils pas flattes 1 m. have they not flattered themselves ? 

Ne se sont-elles pas flattees?/. have they not flattered t/iemselves? 



* See $ 98, and L. 25. t See L. 4. R. ft. 



§ 60. TABLE 
REGULAR TERMINATIONS 



OOM' 

rati* 

TIOM. 


INFINITIVE. 


Present 
Participle. 


Past 

Participle. 


in 

o 

00 

PS 

H 
P-i 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 




er. 


ant. 


Sing. 


1 


Gj 


ais, 








fc, W#S. 


l?2 


es, 


ais, 


1st 


£ 

£ 


£ 

2 


g ee,/em, 


* 3 


s* 


gait, 


ER. 


a 




w PZw. 


1 


w ons, 


fflions, 




o 


o 


o 


5* 


o ' 


o ' 








6s, m<zs. 


1 2 


ez, 


iez, 








ees, fern. 


^3 


ent. 


aient. 




ir. 


issant. 


Sing. 


1 


is, 


. issais, 








i, 77MW. 


•1 2 


is, 


issais, 


2d 


i 


i 


• ie, fern. 

2 


*s 


S tt ' 


• issait, 


IR. 


E 


E 


£ PZw. 


. 1 


E issons, 


E issions, 








is, m#s. 


I 2 


issez, 


issiez, 








ies,/em. 


3 


issent. 


issaient. 




evoir. 


evant. 


Sing. 


. 1 


ois, 


evais, 








u, ra#s. 


J 2 


ois, 


evais, 


3d 


6 


i 
o 


^ue,/m. 


3 


& °*% 


6 evait, 


OIR. 


3 


OS 


« P£w. 


1 


tf evons, 


S evions, 








us, mas. 


1 2 
^3 


evez, 


eviez, 








uesjem. 


oivent. 


evaient 




re. 


ant. 


Sing. 


. 1 


s, 


ais, 








u, mas. 


1 2 


9, 


ais, 


4th 


ft 


A 


q ue, /h#. 


3 


i 
Q 


£ ait, 




fc 


% 


fc ^ 




£ 


z, 


RE. 






« «W\ 


1 


£ ons, 


jjions, 






US, 771&S. 


*.: 


ez, 


iez, 


1 






nes,/em. 


ent. 


aient. 



OF THE 

OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 



Past 

Definite. 


Future. 


i 

Conditional. Imperative. 


Sub- 
junctive. 


Imperfect. 


ai, 

as, 

a ames, 
ates, 
erent. 


erai, 
eras, 

5 era ' 

a erons, 
erez, 
eront. 


erais, 
erais, 

g erait, 

< 

a enons, 

eriez, 

eraient. 


a ons. 

o ' 

ez, 
ent, 


es, 

* e 

-< . 
a ions, 

iez, 

ent. 


asse, 
asses, 

a assions, 
assiez, 
assent. 


is, 
is, 

E imes, 
ites, 
irent. 


irai, 
iras, 

^ira, 

fc irons, 
irez, 
iront. 


irais, 
irais, 
i irait, 
£ irions, 
iriez, 
iraient. 


is, 

i isse, 

S issons, 
issez, 
issent, 


isse, 
isses, 

i isse, 

£ issions. 
issiez, 
issent. 


isse, 
isses, 

i it, 

S issions, 
issiez, 
issent. 


us, 
ns, 

« umes, 
utes, 
urent. 


evrai, 
evras, 
6 evra, 
3 evrons, 
evrez, 
evront. 


evrais, 
evrais, 
^ evrait, 
« evrions, 
evriez, 
evraient. 


ois, 
± oive, 
« evons, 
evez, 
oivent. 


oive, 
oives, 

6. oive > 

£ evions. 

eviez, 
oivent 


usse, 
usses, 

2 ussions, 
ussiez, 
ussent. 


is, 

c it, 

£ imes, 
ites, 
Irent 


rai, 

ras, 

q ra, 

g 

£ rons, 

rez, 

ront. 


rais, 

rais, 
c rait. 
£ rions, 

riez, 

raient. 


s, 

P ons, 
en, 
ent. 


e, 

es, 

£ iona 
iez, 
ent 


isse, 
isses, 

* it, 

£ issions, 
issiez, 
issent. 



364 FOBMATUN Otf THE TENSES. § 61, 



§ 61. Formation of the Tenses. 

(1.) The tenaes are simple or compound. 

1. We call those si'uple tenses, which do not borrow one of tht 
teases of the auxiliaries avoir and tire. 

2. We call those compound tenses, which are composed of the 
lenses of avoir and etre, and the participle past of a verb. 

(2.) Among the simple tenses, five are called primitive, because 
they serve to form the other tenses. They are 

1. The present of the indicative ; 

2. The past definite ; 

3. The present of the infinitive ; 

4. The participle present ; 

5. The participle past. 

(3.) The other simple tenses, called derived tenses, are formed 
from the primitive. 

(4.) 1. The present of the indicative forms the imperative by sup- 
pressing the pronouns : as, je chante, chante ; nous chantons, vous 
chantez, chantons, chantez. It will be seen that the third person of 
the singular and plural of the imperative, is properly the third per- 
son of the singular and plural of the subjunctive, used imperatively. 

(5.) The past definite forms the imperfect of the subjunctive, by 
changing i into sse for the first conjugation : as, je chantai, que je 
chantasse, and by adding se for the other conjugations : as, je finis, 
queje jinisse; je re§us, queje regusse ; je vendis, queje vendisse. 

(6.) The present of the infinitive forms : — 

1. The future absolute, by adding ai for the first and second con- 
jugations: as, chanter, je chanterai ; finir, je finirai; and by chang- 
ing oir and re into rat for the other two conjugations : as, recevoir, 
je recevrai; rendre,ye rendrai. 

2. The conditional present is by French grammarians formed from 
the future by the addition of s : as, je chanterai, je chanterais ; jo 
finirai, je jinirais ; je recevrai, je recevrais ; je vendrai,ye vendrais. 

(7.) The participle present forms : — 

1. The imperfect of the indicative by changing ant into ais : as, 
chantant, je chantais ; finissant, je jinissais ; recevant, je recevais ; 
vendant,ye vendais. 

2. The present of the subjunctive by changing ant into e : as, 
chantant, queje chante ; finissant, quejefinisse ; vendant, queje vende. 

Exception : In verbs of the third conjugation the termination 
evrnt is changed into oive : as, recevant, queje recoiw 



y avoir. — § 6 1-2. 355 

(8.) This formation m ist not prevent the change of y into i, ac« 
tording- to Rule (2.) \ 49. 

(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verba 
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and etre : aSyfai cliante,je suis 
time*/ avals chante,fetais aime. 



§ 61-2. Paradigm of the Unipersonal Verb Y Avoir, 
to be there. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. past indefinite. 

II y a, there is ; there are | II y a eu, there has been ; there have 

been 

IMPERFECT, PLUPERFECT. 

II y avait, there was ; there were | II y avait eu, there had been 

PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. 

II y eut, there was; there were | II y eut eu, there had been 

FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

H y aura, there will be | II y aura eu, there will have been 

Conditional Mode. 

PRESENT. PAST 

II y aurait, there would be | II y aurait eu, there would have been 

Imperative Mode. 

Qu'il y ait, Let there be. 

Subjunctive Mode. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Qu'il v ait, that there may be | Qu'il y ait eu, that there may have 

been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

Qu'il y eut, that there might be \ Qu'il y eut eu, tlcat there migfit iave 

been 

Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Y avoir, to be there | Y avoir eu, to hove been there 

Participle. 

fresent. comfound. 

F ayant, there being | Y ayant eu. theie having been 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Eu. 



§ 62 ALPHABET 

OF THE IRKEGULAR, DEFECTIVE, 

SEE § 44, RULE (2.) 

The figures placed after the infinitive of the verbi 
The tenses not given in 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


Abatyre, 4. to 


abattant 


j'abats 


j'abattais 


j'abattis 


pull down 


abattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






Ibsoudre, 4. 


absolvant 


j'absous 


j'absolvais 




to absolve 


absous 


tu absous 


tu absolvais 




aux. avoir 


absout 


il absout 


il absolvait 




defective. 




n. absolvons 
v. absolvez 
ils absolvent 


n. absolvions 
v. absolviez 
i. absolvaient 




Abstenir (s') 


s'abstenant 


je m'abstiens 


je m'abstenais 


je m'abstins 


2. to abstain 


abstenu, /. e. 


ref. see tenir 






Abstraire, 4. 


abstrayant 


j'abstrais 


j'abstrayais 




to abstract 


abstrait, /. e. 


See TRAIRE 






Accourir, 2. 


accourant 


j'accours 


j'accourais 


j'accourus 


to run to 


accouru, /. e. 


see courir 






AccroItre, 4. 


accroissant 


j'accrois 


j'accroissais 


j'accrus 


to increase 


accru, /. e. 
accueillant 


see croItre 


also reflec. 




Accueillir, 2. 


j'accueille 


j'accueillais 


j'accueillis 


to welcome 


accueilli,/. e. 


see CUEILLIR 






ACHETER, 1. 


achetant 


j 'achete 


j'achetais 


j'achetai 


to buy 


achete, /. e. 


tu achates 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il achete 






% 49, (5) 




n. achetons 






peculiar. 




v. achete z 
i. achdtent 






Achever, 1. 


achevant 


j 'acheve 


j'achevais 


j'achevai 


to complete 


acheve, e. 


tu acheves 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il acheve 






§ 49, (6) 




n. achevons 






peculiar. 




v. achevez 
i. achevent 






AcauKRiR, 2. 


acquerant 


j'acquiers 


j'acquerais 


j 'acquis 


to acquire 


acquis,/, e. 


tu acquiers 


tu acquerais 


tu acquis 


aux. avoir 




il acquiert 


il acquerait 


il acquit 


irregular. 




n. acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquimes 






v. acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquites 






i. acquierent 


ils acqueraient 


ils acquirent 


Adjoindre, 4. 


adjoignant 


j 'adjoins 


j'adjoignais 


jadjoignw 


to associate, tyc. 


adjoint, /. e. 


see JOINDRE. 






Admettre, 4. 


admettant 


j'admets 


j'admettais 


j'admis 


K to admit 


admis/. e. 


See METTRE 







ICAL TABLE 

PECULIAR AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ 43, nuLE (7) and § 49, 

indicate the conjugations to which they belong 

this Table are not used. 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect 


j'ab&ttrai 


j'abattrais 


abats 


j'abatte 


j'abattUae 


j'absoudrai 


j'absoudrais 




j 'absolve 




tu absoudras 


tu absoudrais 


absous 


tu absolves 




il absoudra 


il absoudrait 


q. absolve 


il absolve 




n. absoudrons 


n. absoudrions 


absolvons 


n. absolvions 




v. absoudrez 


v. absoudriez 


absolvez 


v. absolviez 




i. absoudront 


i. absoudraient 


q. absolvent 


i. absolvent 




je m'abstien- 


je m'abstien- 




je m'abstienne 


je m'abstinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


abstiens-toi 






j'abstrairai 


j'abstrairais 


abstrais 


j'abstraie 




j'accourrai 


j'accourrais 


accours 


j'accoure 


j'accourusse 


j'accroitrai 


j'accroitrais 


accrois 


j'accroisse 


j'accrusse 


j'accueillerai 


j'accueillerais 


accueille 


j 'accueille 


j'accueillisse 


j'acheterai 


j'acheterais 




j 'achete 


j'achetasse 


tu acheteras 


tu acheterais 


achete 


tu achetes 


like 


il achetera 


il acheterait 


q. achete 


il achete 


CHANTER 


n. acheterons 


n. acheterions 


achetons 


n. achetions 




v. acheterez 


v. acheteriez 


arhetez 


v. achetiez 




ils acheteront 


i. acheteraient 


q. achetent 


ils achetent 




j'acheverai 


j'acheverais 




j'acheve 


j'achevasse 


tu acheveras 


tu acheverais 


acheve 


tu acheves 


like 


il achevera 


il acheverait 


q. acheve 


il acheve 


CHANTER 


n acheverons 


n. acheverions 


achevons 


n. achevions 




v. acheverez 


v. acheveriez 


achevez 


v. acheviez 




ils acheveront 


i. acheveraient 


q. achevent 


i. achevent 




j'acquerrai 


j'acquerrais 




j 'acquiere 


j'acquisse 


tu acquerras 


tu acquerrais 


acquiers 


tu acquiercs 


tu acquisses 


il acquerra 


il acqucrrait 


q. acquiere 


il acquiere 


il acquit 


n. acquerrons 


n. acquerrions 


acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquissiona 


n. acquerrez 


v. acquierriez 


acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquissicz 


ils acquerront 


i. acquerraient 


q. acquierent 


i. acquierent 


i. acquissent 


j'adjoindrai 


j'adjoindrais 


adjoins 


j'adjoigne 


j'adjoignisso 


j'admettrai 


j'admettrais 


admets 


j'admette 


j'admiBM 



358 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, P&CTjLIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definiti« 


Aller, 1. to 


allant 


je vais 


j'allais 


j'allai 


g° 


alle/. e. 


tu vas 


tu allais 


tu alias 


aux. etre 




il va 


il allait 


il alia 


irregular. 




n. allons 


n. allions 


n. allaraes 






7. allez 


v. alliez 


v. allates 






ils vont 


ils allaient 


i. allcrent 


Amener. 1. to 


amenant 


j 'amene 


j'amenais 


j'amenai 


bring 


amene /. e. 


§ 49, (6) 


see ACHEVER 




Amonceler, 1 


amonceiant 


j'amoncelle 


j'amoncelais 


j'amoncel&! 


to heap 


amoncele /: e. 


% 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




APPARAiTRE,4. 


apparaissant 


j'apparais 


j'apparaissais 


j'apparus 


to appear 


apparu /. e. 


see paraItre 






Appartenir, 2 


appartenant 


j'appartiens 


j'appartenais 


j'appartins 


to belong 


appartenu /. e. 


see tenir. 






Appeler, 1. to 


appelant 


j'appelle ' 


j'appelais 


j'appelai 


call 


appele, /. e. 


tu appelles 


like 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appelle 


CHANTER 


CHANTER 


4 49, (4) 




n. appelons 






peculiar 




v. appelez 
ils appellent 






Apprendre. 4. 


apprenant 


j'apprends 


j'apprenais 


j 'appris 


to learn 


appris /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






Appuyer, 1. to 


appuyant 


j'appuie 


j'app'uyais 


j'appuyai 


support 


appuye /. e. 


tu appuies 


t. appuyais 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appuie 


il appuyait 


CHANTER 


% 49, (2) 




n. appuyons 


n. appuyions 




peculiar. 




v. appuyez 
ils appuient 


v. appuyiez 
i. appuyaient 




Assaillir, 2. 


assaillant 


j'assaille 


j'assaillais 


j'assaillis 


to assault 


assailli /. e. 


tu assailles 


t. assaillais 


t. assaillis 






il assaille 


i. assaillait 


i. assaillit 






n. assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n. assaillimei 






v. assaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assailites 






ils assaillent 


i. assaillaient 


i. assaillirent 


Asseoir, 3. to 


asseyant 


j'assieds 


j'asseyais 


j 'assis 


set something 


assis /. e. 


see s'asseoir 






down; to seat. 










Asseoir,(s') 3. 


s'asseyant 


j. m'assieds 


je m'asseyais 


j. m'assis 


to sit down 


assis, /. e. 


t. t'assieds 


t. t'asseyais 


t. t'assis 


aux. etre 




i. s'assied 


i. s'asseyait 


t. s'assit 


irregular. 




n. n. asseyons 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assimet 






v. v. asseyez 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assitea 






i. s'asseient 


i. s'asseyaient 


i. s'assireut 


ASTREINDRE,4. 


astreignant 


j'astreins 


j'astreignais 


j'astreignis 


to compel 


astreint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Atteindre, 4. 


atteignant 


j'atteins 


j'atteignais 


j'atteignis 


io attain 


atteint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Atteler, 1. to 


attelant 


j'attelle 


j'attelais 


j'att^lai 


put to, harness 


attele,/. e. 


% 49, (4) 
j'attrais 


see APPELER 




Attraire, 4. to 


attrayant 


j'attrayais 




attract 


attrait f. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Avenir, 2. to 


avenant 


il avient 


il avenait 


il avint 


happen 


avenu 


it happens 


it was happen- 


it happened 


Avoir, to have 


see model $ 47 




ing 





Aim UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



§ 62 



359 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


j'irai 


j'irais 




j 'aille 


j'allasse 


tu iras 


tu irais 


va 


tu allies 


tu all asses 


il ira 


il irait 


q. aille 


il aille 


il allat 


n. irons 


n. irion3 


allons 


n. allions 


n. allassions 


v. irez 


v. iriez 


allez 


v. alliez 


v. allassiez 


lis iront 


i. iraient 


g aillent 


i. aillent 


i. allassent 


j'amenerai 


j'amenerais 


amene 


j 'amene 


j'amenasse 


j'amoncellerai 


j'amoncelle- 
[rais 


amoncelle 


j'amoncelle 


j'amoneelasse 


j'apparaitrai 


j'apparaitrais 


apparais 


j'apparaisse 


j'apparusse 


j'appartien- 


j'appartien- 




j'appartienne 


j'appartinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


appartiens 






j'appellerai 


j'appellerais 




j 'appelle 


j'appelasse 


tu appelleras 


t. appellerais 


appelle 


tu appelles 


like 


il appellera 


i. appellerait 


q. appelle 


i. appelle 


CHANTER 


n. appellerons 


n. appellerions 


appelons 


n. appelions 




v. appellerez 


v. appelleriez 


appelez 


v. appeliez 




i. appelleront 


i.appelleraient 


q. appellent 


i. appellent 




j'apprendrai 


j'apprendrais 


apprends 


j'apprenne 


j'apprisse 


j'appuierai 


j'appuierais 




j 'appuie 


j'appuyasse 


t. appuieras 


t. appuierais 


appuie 


tu appuies 


like 


i. appuiera 


i. appuierait 


q. appuie 


il appuie 


CHANTER 


n. appuierons 


n. appuierions 


appuyons 


n. appuyions 




v. appuierez 


v. appuieriez 


appuyez 


v. appuyiez 




i. appuieront 


1. appuieraient 


q. appuient 


ils appuient 




j'assaillirai 


j'assaillirais 




j 'assaille 


j'assaillisse 


t. assailliras 


t. assaillirais 


assaille 


t. assailles 


t. assaillisses 


i. assaillira 


i. assaillirait 


q. assaille 


i. assaille 


i. assailit 


n. assaillirons 


n. assaillirions 


assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n.assaillissions 


v. assaillirez 


v. assailliriez 


assaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assaillissiez 


i. assailliront 


i. assailliraient 


q. assaillent 


i. assaillent 


i. assaillissent 


j'assierai 


j'assierais 


assieds 


j'asseie 


j'assisse 


je m'assierai 


j. m'assierais 




je m'asseie 


je m'assisse 


t. t'assieras 


t. t'assierais 


assieds toi 


t. t'asseies 


t. t'assisses 


i. s'assiera 


i. s'assierait 


q. s'asseie 


i. s'asseie 


i. s'assit 


to. n. assierons 


n. n. assierions 


asseyons n. 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assissiona 


v. v. assierez 


v. v. assieriez 


asseyez v. 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assissiez 


i. s'assieront 


i. s'assieraient 


q. s'asseient 


i. s'asseient 


i. s'assissent 


j'astreindrai 


j'astreindi^is 


astreins 


j'astreigne 


j'astreignisse 


j'atteindrai 


j'atteindrais 


atteins 


j'atteigne 


j'atteignisse 


j'attellerai 


j'attellerais 




j'attelle 


j'attelasse 




attelld 






j'attrairai 


j'attrairais 

lattra's 


j'attraie 




d aviendra 


il aviendrait 


il avienne 


il avint 


it voiU happen 


it wld. haypen 




it trgi. happen 


it mgt. happen 



360 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



INFIX2TIVE. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite* 


Avoir (y)tobe 


y ayant 


il y a 


il y avait 


il y eut 


there 


eu (unip.) 


there is, are 


there was, were 


there was, wert 


Battre, 4. to 


battant 


je bats 


je battais 


je battis 


beat 


battu, /. e. 


tu bats 


tu battais 


tu battis 


aux. avoir 




il bat 


il battait 


il battit 


irregular. 




n. battons 


n. battions 


n. battimes 






v. battez 


v. battiez 


v. battites 






ils battent 


i. battaient 


ils battirent 


Boire, 4. to 


buvant 


je bois 


je buvais 


je bus 


drink 


bu, /. e. 


tu bois 


tu buvais 


tubus 


aux. avoir 




il boit 


il buvait 


il but 


irregular. 




n. buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bumes 






v. buvez 


v. buviez 


v. butes 






ils boivent 


i. buvaient 


ils burent 


Bouillir, 2. to 


bouillant. 


je bous 


je bouillais 


je bouillis 


boil 


bouilli, f. e. 


tu bous 


tu bouillais 


tu bouillis 






il bout 


il bouillait \ 


il bouillit 






n. bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillimes 






v. bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillites 






i. bouillent 


ils bouillaient 


ils bouillirent 


Bourreler, 1. 


bourrelant 


je bourrele 


je bourrelais 


je bourrelai 


to torment 


bourrele,/. e. 


() 49, (5) 






Braire, 4. to 




il brait 






bray 




ils braient 






defective. 










Bruiner, 1. to 


bruinant 


il bruine 


il bruinait 


il bruina 


drizzle 


bruine 


it drizzles 


it was driz- 


it drizzled 


unipersonal. 






[zling 


■ 


Bruire, 4. to 


bruissant 


il bruit 


il bruyait, or 




roar, rustle 






il bruissait 




defective. 






ils bruyaient 
ils bruissaien*- 




Cacheter, 1. 


cachetant 


je cachette 


je cachetais 


je cachetai 


to seal 


cachete,/. e. 


% 49, (4) 






Ceindre, 4. to 


ceignant 


je ceins 


je ceignais 


je ceignis 


gird 


ceint, /. e. 


tu ceins 


tu ceignais 


tu ceignis 


aux. avoir 




il ceint 


il ceignait 


il ceignit 


irregular. 




n. ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignimes 






v. ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignites 






ils ceignent 


ils ceignaient 


ils ceignirent 


Chanceler, 1. 


chancelant 


je chancelle 


je chancelais 


je chancelai 


to dagger 


chancele, /. e. 


% 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




Changer, 1. to 


changeant 


je change 


je changeais 


je changeai 


change 


change,/, e. 


tu changes 


tu changeais 


tu changeas 


aux. avoir 




il change 


il changeait 


il changea 


<> 49. (1) 




n. changeons 


n. changions 


n. changeamefr 


peculiar. 




v. changez 


v. changiez 


v. cliangeates 






ils changent 


ilschangeaient 


ils changerent 


Circonscrire, circonscrivant 


je circonscris 


je circonscri- 


j. circonscrivil 


4. to circum- 


circonscrit, 


see ECRIRE 


[vais 




scribe 


[/.e. 








ClECONVENIR, 


circonvenant 


j. circonviens 


je circonve- 


je circonving 


2. to circum- 


circonvenu, 


see venir 


[nais 




[vtnt 


[/. e . 









JlKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



361 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


il y aura 


il y aurait 




il y ait 


il y eut 


titer e will he 


there would be 




tliere may be 


there might ba 


je battrai 


je battrais 




je batte 


je battisse 


tn battras 


tu battrais 


bats 


tu battes 


tu battisses 


il battra 


il battrait 


q. batte 


il batte 


il battit 


ji, battrons 


n. battrions 


battons 


n. battions'" 


n. battissions 


v. battrez 


v. battriez 


battez 


v. battiez 


v. battissiez 


i. battront 


i. battraient 


q. battent 


i. battent 


i. battissent 


je boirai 


j. boirais 




je boive 


je busse 


tu boiras 


tu boirais 


bois 


tu boives 


tu busses 


il boira 


il boirait 


q. boive 


il boive 


ilbtit 


n. boirons 


n. boirious 


buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bussions 


v, boirez 


v. boiriez 


buvez 


v. buviez 


v. bussiez 


i. boiront 


i. boiraient 


q. boivent 


i. boivent 


ils bussent 


je bouillirai 


je bouillirais 




je bouille 


je bouillisse 


tu bouilliras 


tu bouillirais 


bous 


tu bouilles 


tu bouillisses 


il bouillira 


il bouillirait 


q. bouille 


il bouille 


il bouillit 


n. bouillirons 


n. bouillirions 


bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillissions 


v. bouillirez 


v. bouilliriez 


bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillissiez 


; bouilliront 


i. bouilliraient 


q. bouillent 


il bouillent 


i. bouillissent 


je bourrelerai 


jebourrelerais 


bourrele 


je bourrele 


je bourrelasse 


il braira 


il brairait 








ils brairont 


ils brairaient 








il bruinera 


il bruinerait 


q. bruine 


q. bruine 


q. bruinat 


it 'will drizzle 


it wld drizzle 


let it drizzle 


it may drizzle 


it mgt. drizzle 


je cachetterai 


je cachette- 
[rais 


cachette 


je cachette 


je cachetasse 


je ceindrai 


je ceindrais 




je ceigne 


je ceignisse 


tu ceindras 


tu ceindrais 


ceins 


tu ceignes 


tu ceignisseg 


il ceindra 


il ceindrait 


q. ceigne 


il ceigne 


il ceignit 


n. ceindrons 


n. ceindrions 


ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignissiong 


v. ceindrez 


v. ceindriez 


ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignissiez 


ils ceindront 


ils ceindraient 


q. ceignent 


ils ceignent 


i. ceignissent 


je chancellerai 


je chancelle- 
[rais 


chancelle 


je chancelle 


je chancelasso 


je changerai 


je changerais 




je change 


je changeass** 


like 




change 


tu changes 


tu change asse» 


CHANTER 




q. change 


like 


il changeat 






changeons 


CHANTER 


changeassions 






changez 




v changeassiez 






q. changent 




i.ehangeassent 


je cirsconcri- 


je circonscri- 




je circonscrive 


je circonscri- 


[rai 


[rais 


circonscris 




[visse 


Je circonvien- 


je circonvien- 




je circonvi- 


jc circonvinaw 


[drai 


[drais 


circonviens 


[enne 





Id 



362 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Clorb. 4. to 
close 
defective 

COLLETER, 1. 

to collar 

^OMBATTRE, 4. 

to combat 

C0MMETTRE,4. 

to commit 
ComparaItre, 
4. to appear 

COMPLAIRE, 4. 

to humor 

CoMPRENDRE, 

4. to under- 
stand 

COMPROMET- 

tre, 4. to com* 
promit 

CONCLURE, 4. 

to conclude 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



Concourir, 2. 
to concur 

CONDUIRE, 4 

to conduct 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



CONPIRE, 4. to 

preserve 
aux. avoir 
irregular 



CONGELER, 1. 

to congeal 

CONJOINDRE, 4 

to conjoin 

C»>NNA1TRE, 4. 

to know 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



clos 



colletant 
collete,/. e. 
combattant 
combattu, /. e, 
commettant 
commis, /. e. 
comparaissant 
comparu 
complaisant 
complu 
comprenant 
compris,/. e. 



Participles. 



Indicative. 



compromet- 

[tant 
compromis,/.e 
concluant 
conchL /. e. 



concourant 
concouru,/. e, 
conduisaut 
conduit, f. e. 



confisant 
confit,/ e. 



congelant 
congele*,/. e. 
conjoignant 
conjoint, /. e. 
connaissant 
connu, /. e. 



Conquerir, 2 
to conquer 

CoNSENTIR, 2. 

u> c&wnt 



conquSrant 
conquis, /. e. 
consentant 
consenti, f. e. 



je colletais 

see ACHETER 

je combattais 
je commettais 



IxMPERFECT. 



je clos 
tu clos 
il clot 
je collete 
§ 49, (5) 
je combats 

see BATTRE 

je commets 

see METTRE 

je comparais 

see PARA1TRE 

je complais 
see plaire 
je comprends 

see PRENDRE 

je compromets 

see METTRE 

je conclus 
tu conclus 
il conclut 
n. concluons 
v. concluez 
i. concluent 
je concours 
see courir 
je conduis 
tu conduis 
il conduit 
n. conduisons 
v. conduisez 
ils conduisent 
je conrls 
tu confis 
il confit 
n. confisons 
v. conflsez 
i. confisent 
je congele 
§ 49, (5) 
je conjoins 

see CEINDRE 

je connais 
tu connais 
il connait 
n. connaissons 
v. connaissez 
i. connaissent 
je conquiers 

See ACQ.UERIR 

je consens 

see SENTIR. 



Past. Di finite. 



je colletai 
je combattis 
jo commis 



je comparais- je comparaa 

[sais 
je complaisais je complus 

je comprenais je compris 



je compromet- 
[tais 

je concluais 
tu concluais 
il concluait 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
i. concluaient 
je concourais 

je conduisais 
tu conduisais 
il conduisait 
n. conduisions 
v. conduisiez 
i. conduisaient 
je confisais 
tu confisais 
il confisaH 
n. confisions 
v. confisiez 
i. confisaient 
je congelais 

je conjoignais 

je connaissais 
tu connaissais 
il connaissait 
n. commissions 
v. connaissiez 
i.connaissaient 
je oonquerais 



U consent ais 



je compromif 



je conclus 
tu conclus 
il conclut 
n. conclumes 
v. conclutes 
ils conclurent 
je concourus 

je conduisis 
tu conduisis 
il conduisit 
n. conduisimes 
v. conduisitos 
i. conduisircrrt 
je confis 
tu confis 
il confit 
n. confimej 
v. confites 
ils confirent 
je congelais 

je conjoignia 

je connus 
tu connus 
il connut 
n. connumea 
v. connut<e 
i. connurent 
je conquis 

je coaseirfii 



AND UNIPERSOBTAL VERBS. § 62 



363 



Future. 1 Conditional. 



je clorai 
tu cloras 
il clora. &c. 
je colleterai 

je combattrai 

je ccmmettrai 

je comparai- 

[trai 

je complairai 

je compren- 
[drai 

je compromet- 
[trai 

je conclurai 
tu concluras 
11 conclura 
H. conclurons 
v. conclurez 
lis concluront 
je concourrai 

je conduirai 
tu conduiras 
il conduira 
n. conduirons 
v. conduirez 
lis conduiront 
je confirai 
tu confiras 
il confira 
n. confirons 
v. confirez 
i. confiront 
je congelerai 

je conjoindrai 

je connaitrai 
tu connaitras 
il connaitra 
n. connaitrons 
v. connaitrez 
ils connaitront 
je coTiquerrai 



je consentirai je consenti- 
[rais 



je clorais 
tu clorais 
il clorait, etc. 
je colleterais 

je cornbattrais 

je commet- 
[trais 

je coroparai- 
[trais 

je complairais 

je compren- 
[drais 

je corupromet- 
[trais 

je conclurais 
tu conclurais 
il conclurait 
n. conclurions 
y. concluriez 
concluraient 
je concourrais 

je conduira is 
tu conduirais 
il conduirait 
n. conduirions 
v. conduiriez 
i conduiraient 
je confirais 
tu confirais 
il confirait 

confirions 
v. confiriez 
ils confiraient 
je congelerais 

je conjoin- 

[drais 
je connaitrais 
tu connaitrais 
il connaitrait 
n. connaitrions 
v. connaitriez 
i.cormaitraient 
je conquerrais 



Imperative. 



Subjunctive. 



collete 

combats 

commets 

comparais 

complais 

comprends 

compromets 



conclus 
q. conclue 
concluons 
concluez 
q. concluent 

concours 

conduis 
q. conduise 
conduisons 
conduisez 
q. conduisent 

conn's 
q. confise 
confisons 
confisez 
q. confisent 

congele 

conjoins 

connais 

q. connaisse 

connaissons 

connaissez . 

q. connaissent 

conquiers 

consens 



je collete 

je combatte 

je commette 

je compa- 

[raisse 
je complaise 

je comprenne 



je compro- 
[mette 

je conclue 
tu conclues 
il conclue 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
ils concluent 
je concoure 

je conduise 
tu conduises 
il conduise 
n. conduisions 
conduisiez 
ils conduisent 
je confise 
tu confises 
il confise 
n. confisions 
v. confisiez 
i. confisent 
je congele 

je conjoigne 

je connaisse 
tu connaisses 
il connaisse 
n. connaissions 
v. connaissiez 
ils connaiesent 
je conquiere 

je consente 



iMPKR! ECT. 



je colletasse 
je combattisse 
je commisse 
je comparusse 
je complusse 
je comprisse 



je compro- 
[miss© 

je conclusse 
tu conclusses 
il conclut 
n. conclussions 
v. conclussiez 
ils conclussent 
je concourusse 

je conduisisse 
tu conduisisses 

conduisit 
conduisissions 
v.conduisissiez 
i.conduisissent 
je confisse 
u confisses 
il conf it 
confissions 



v. confissiez 
ils confissent 
je congelasse 

je conjoignisse 

je connusse 
tu connusses 
il connut 
n. connussions 
v. connussiez 
ils connussent 
je cc-nquisse 

jd jxcneDtisM 



364 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


m 

Past Definite* 


C0KSTRUIRE,4. 


const ruisant 


je coustruis 


je construisais 


je construisis 


to construct 


const ruit, /. e. 


see coxduire 






CONTENIR, 2. 


contenant 


je contiens 


je contenais 


je contins 


to contain 


contenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






CONTRAINDRE, 


con,traignant 


je con trains 


je contraignais 


je contraignij 


4. tn constrain 


contraint, fie. 


see CE1NDRE 






CONTREDIRE, 4 


contredisant 


je contredis 


je contredisais 


je contredis 


to contradict 


contredit, /. e. 


tu contredis 


like dire 


like dire 


aux. avoir 
\ 




il contredit 
n.contredisons 
v. contredisez 
i. contredisent 






CONTREFAIRE, 


contrefaisant 


je contrefais 


je contrefai- 


je contrefis 


4. to counter- 


contrefait,/. e. 


see faire 


[sais 




feit 










CONTREVENIR, 


contrevenant 


je contreviens 


je contreve- 


je contrevins 


2. to contra- 
vene 

CoNVAINCRE, 4 


contrevenu./.e 


see tenir 


Jnais 




convainquant 


je convaincs 


je convain- 


je convainqui* 


to convince 


convaincu,/.e. 




[quais 




CONVENIR, 2. 


convenant 


je conviens 


je convenais 


je convins 


to suit, fit, tyc. 


convenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






CoQUETER, 1. 


coquetant 


je coquete 


je coquetais 


je coquetai 


to coquet 


coquete 


see acheter 


peculiar. 




CORROMPRE, 4 


corrompant 


je corromps 


je corrompais 


je corrompis 


to corrupt 


corronipu,/. e. 


see ROMPRE 






COUDRE, 4. to 


cousant 


je couds 


je cousais 


je cousis 


sew 


cousu,/. e. 


tu couds 


tu cousais 


tu cousis 


aux. avoir 




il coud 


il cousait 


il cousit 


irregular. 




n. cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousimes 






v. cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousites 






ils cousent 


ils cousaient 


ils cousirent 


Jourir, 2. to 


courant 


je cours 


je courais 


je courus 


run 


couru 


tu cours 


tu courais 


tu courus 


aux. avoir 




il court 


il courait 


il courut 


irregular. 




n. courons 


n. courions 


n. courumes 






v. courez 


v. couriez 


v. courutes 






ils courent 


ils couraient 


ils courureut 


CouvriRj 2. to 


couvrant 


je couvre 


je couvrais 


je couvris 


cover 


couvert,/. e. 


see ouvrir 






Craindre, 4. 


craignant 


je crains 


je craignais 


je craignis 


to fear 


craint, f. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Croire, 4. to 


croyant 


je crois % 


je croyais — 


je crus 


believe 


cru,/. e. 


bu crois 


tu croyais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir 




il croit 


il croyait 


il crut 


irregular. 




n. croyons 


n. croyions 


n. cr limes 






v. croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crutes 






ils croient 


ils croyaient 


ils crurent 


Croitre, 4. to 


croissant 


je crois 


je croissais 


je crus 


grow 


cru, f e. 


tu crois 


tu croissais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir & 




il croit 


il croissait 


il crut 


Atre 




n. croissons 


n. croissions 


q. criimes 


irregular. 




v. croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crutes 




1 


ils croissent 


ils croissaient 


ils crurent 



AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



365 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je eonstruirai 


je const ruirais 


construis 


je construise 


je constrrusis- 
[se 


je contiendrai 


je contien- 

[drais 


contiens 


je contienne 


je continsse 


je contrain- 


je contrain- 




je contraigne 


je contraignis- 


[drai 


[drais 


contrains 




[se 


je contredirai 


jecontredirais 




je contredise 


je contredisse 


lilce DIRE 


like dire 


contredis 
q. contredise 
contredisons 
contredisez 
q. contredisent 




- 


je contreferai 


je contreferais 


contrefais 


je contrefasse 


je contrefisse 


je contrevien- 


je contrevien- 




je contrevien- 


je contrevinsso 


[drai 


[drais 


contreviens 


[ne 




je convaincrai 


je convaincrais 


convaincs 


je convainque 


je convain- 
[quisse 


je conviendrai 


je convien- 
[drais 


conviens 


je convienne 


je convinsse 


je coqueterai 


je coqueterais 


coquete 


je coquete 


je coquetasse 


je corromprai 


je corromprais 


corromps 


je corrompe 


je corronipissa 


je coudrai 


je coudrais 




je couse 


je cousisse 


tu coudras 


tu coudrais 


couds 


tu couses 


tu coussisses 


il coudra 


il coudrai t 


q. couse 


il couse 


il cousit 


n. coudrons 


n. coudrions 


cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousissions 


v. coudrez 


v. coudriez 


cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousissiez 


ils coudront 


i. coudraient 


q. cousent 


i. cousent 


ils cousissent 


je courrai 


je courrais 




je coure 


je courusse 


tu courras 


tu courrais 


cours 


tu coures 


tu courusses 


il courra 


il courrait 


q. coure 


il coure 


il courut 


n. courrons 


n. courrions 


courons 


n. courions 


n. courussions 


v. courrez 


v. courriez 


courez 


v. couriez 


v. courussiez 


ils courront 


ils courra ient 


q. courent 


ils courent 


ils courussent 


je couvrirai 


je couvrirais 


couvre 


je couvre 


je couvrisse 


je craindrai 


je craindrais 


crains 


je craigne 


je craignisse 


je croirai • 


je croirais 




je croie 


je crusse 


tu croiras 


'i croirais 


crois 


tu croies 


tu crusses 


il croira 


il croirait 


q. croie 


il croie 


il criit 


n. croirons 


n. croirions 


croyons 


r. croyions 


n. cruseiona 


v. croirez 


v. croiriea 


croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crussiez 


ils croiront 


ils croiraient 


q. croient 


ils croient 


ils crussent 


je croitrai 


je croitra is 




je croisse 


je crusse 


tu croitras 


tu CToitraia 


crois 


tu croisses 


tu crusiec 


il croitra 


il croitrait 


q. croisse 


il croisse 


il crut 


n. croitrons 


n. croitrions 


croissons 


n. croissions 


n. crussions 


▼. croitrez 


v. croitriez 


croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crussiez 


Us croitront 


ils croitraient 


q. croissent 


ils croissent 


ils crussent 



366 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Ikfimtvivb. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


CUEILLIR, 2. to 


cueillanl; 


je cueille 


jw. ^aeillais 


je cueillis 


gather 


cueilli./. e. 


tu cueilles 


tu cueillais 


tu cueillis 






i] cueille 


il cueillait 


il cueillit 






n. sueillons 


n. cueillions 


n. cueillimes 


' — ' 




v. cveillez 


v. cueilliez 


v. cueillites 






ils cueiilent 


ils cueillaient 


ils cueillirent 


CtJIRE, 4. to 


cuisant 


je cuis 


je cuisais 


je cuisis 


bake, cook, fyc. 


cuit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






De*EATTRE, 4. 


debattant 


je debats 


je debattais 


je debattis 


to debate 


debattu,/. e. 


see battre 






Decacheter, 


decachetant 


je de cache tte 


je de cache tais 


je decachetai 


1. to unseal 


decachete, fe. 


§ 49, (4) 






Dechoir, 3. to 




je dechois 


je dechoyais 


je dechus 


decay 


dechu, /. e. 


tu dechois 


tu dechoyais 


tu dechus 


aux. avoir & 




il dechoit 


il dechoyait 


il dechut 


etre 




n. dechoyons 


n. dechoyions 


n. dechumes 


defective 


{Bescherelle) 


v. dechoyez 


v. dechoyiez 


v. dechutes 






ils dechoient 


ilsdechoyaient 


ils dechurent 


Mcoudre, 4. 


decousant 


je decouds 


je decousais 


je decousis 


to rip 


decousu, /. e. 


see coudre 






Decouvrir, 2. 


decouvrant 


je decouvre 


je decouvrais 


je decouvris 


to discover 


decouvert,/.e. 


see ouvrir 






Decrire, 4, to 


decrivant 


je deer is 


je decrivais 


je decrivis 


describe 


decrit,/. e. 


see £crire 






D£dire, 4. to 


dedisant 


je dedis 


je dedisais 


je dedis 


unsay 


dedit,/. e. 


SeeCONTREDIRE 






De'duire, 4. to 


deduisant 


je deduis 


je deduisais 


je deduisis 


deduct 


deduit, /. e. 


see conduIre 






De>aillir, 2. 


defaillant 


il defaille 


je defaillais 


je defaillis, 


to fail, faint 


defailli 


n. defaillons 


etc. 


etc. 


defective. 


{Bescherelle) 


v. defaillez 
ils defaillent 






De"faire, 4. to 


defafsant 


je defais 


je defaisais 


je defis 


undo 


defait,/. e. 


see fa ire 






D^GELER, 1. to 


degelant 


il degele 


il degelait 


il degela 


thaw 


degele, f e. 








Dejoindre, 4. 


dejoignant 


je dejoins 


je dejoignais 


je dejoignis 


disjoin 


dejoint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






D^MENTIR, 2. 


dementant 


je demens 


je dementais 


je dementis 


to belie 


dementi, /. e. 


see SENTIR 






D^METTRE, 4. 


demettant 


je demets 


je demettais 


je demis 


to disjoint 


demis,/. e. 


see METTRE 






De>eindre, 4. 


depeignant 


je depeins 


je depeignais 


je depeignig 


to depict 


depeint, f. e. 


see CEINDRE 






De>[,aire, 4. 


dcplaisant 


je deplais 


je deplaisais 


je deplus 


to displease 


deplu, /. e. 


see plaire 






DfSAPPREN- 


desapprenant 


je desap- 


je desappre- 


je desappris 


dre, 4, to un- 


desappris,/. e. 


[prends 


[nais 




learn 




see prendre 






Desservir, 2. 


desservant 


je dossers 


je desservais 


je desservia 


to clear the ta- 
ble 

DlTEINDRE, 4. 


desservi, /. e. 


see servir 






deteignant 


je deteins 


je deteignais 


jo deteignii 


to discolor 


dfcteint,/. et 


see TEINDRE 







— iTI> UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



§ 62 



367 



Future 


OOJsT.-TlONAL. 


Imperative* 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je cueillerai 


je cuelllerais 




je cueille 


je cueillisse 


tu cueilleras 


tu cueillerais 


cueille 


tu cueilles 


tu cueillisses 


il cueillera 


il cueillerait 


q. cueille 


il cueille 


il cueillit 


n. cueillerons 


n. cueillerions 


cueillons 


n. cueillions 


n. cueillissions 


v. cueillerez 


v. cueilleriez 


cueillez 


v. cueilliez 


v. cueillissiez 


ils cueilleront 


i. cueilleraient 


q. cueillent 


i. cueillent 


ils cueillissent 


je cuirai 


je cuirais 


cuis 


je cuise 


je cuisisse 


je debattrai 


je debattrais 


debats 


je debatte 


je debattisso 


je de cache t- 


je decachet- 




je decacbette 


je decacbe- 


[terai 


[terais 


decacbette 




[tasse 


je decberrai 


je decberrais 




je decboie 


je decbusse 


tu decherras 


tu decberrais 


decbois 


tu d«cboies 


tu dechusses 


il decberra 


il decherrait 


q. decboie 


il decboie 


il decbut 


n. decberrons 


n. decberrions 


decboyons 


n. decboyions 


n. decbussiona 


v. decherrez 


v. decberriez 


decboyez 


v. decboyiez 


v. decbussiez 


ils decherront 


i. decberraient 


q. decboient 


ils decboient 


ils decbussent 


je decoudrai 


je decoudrais 


decouds 


je decouse 


je decousisso 


je decouvrirai 


jedecouvrirais 


decouvre 


je decouvre 


je decouvrissQ 


je decrirai 


je decrirais 


decris 


je decrive 


je decrivisse 


je dedirai 


je dedirais 


dedis 


je dedise 


je dedisse 


je deduirai 


je deduirais 


deduis 


je deduise 


je deduisissa 


see Bescherelle, 










Dictionnaire 










National. 










je deferai 


je deferai 


defais 


je defasse 


je defisse 


:1 degelera 


il degelerait 


q. degele 


il degele 


il degelat 


je dejoindrai 


je dejoindrais 


dejoins 


je dejoigne 


je dejoignisse 


je dementirai 


je dementirais 


demeus 


je demente 


je dementisse 


je demettrai 


je demettrais 


demets 


je demette 


je demisse 


je depeindrai 


je depeiidrais 


depeins 


je depeigne 


je depeignisse 


je deplairai 


je deplairais 


deplais 


je deplaise 


je deplusse 


je desappren- 


je desappren- 




je desappren- 


je desapprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


desapprends 


[ne 




*e desservira: 


jedesservirais 


dessers 


je desserve 


je desaerTisse 


Je dStein Irai 


Je deteindrais 


deteins 


je deteigne 


je d6teignis»e 



368 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infiw.tivi. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


D£tenir, 2. to 


detenant 


je detiens 


je detenais 


je detins 


detain 


detenu,/, e. 


see tenir 






B^TRUIRE, 4 


detruisant 


je detruis 


je detruisais 


je detrui&is 


to destroy 


detruit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Devknir, 2. to 


devenant 


je deviens 


je devenais 


je devins 


become 


devenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Mvetir, 2. to 


devetant 


je devets 


je devetais 


je devetis 


divest 


devetu,/. e. 


see vetir 






Dire. 4, to 


disant 


je dis 


je disais 


je dis 


say 


dit,/. e. 


tu dis 


tu disais 


tu dis 


aux. a7oir 




il dit 


il disait 


il dit 


irregular. 




n. disons 


n. disions 


n. dimes 






v. dites 


v. disiez 


v. dites 






ils disent 


ils disaient 


ils dirent 


Discourir, 2. 


discourant 


je discours 


je discourais 


je discounts 


to discourse 


discouru 


see courir 






DisparaItre, 


disparaissant 


je disparais 


je disparais- 


je disparus 


4. to disappear 


disparu./ e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




Dissoudre, 4. 


dissolvant 


je dissous 


je dissolvais 




to dissolve 


dissous,/ te. 


see absoudre 






Distraire, 4. 


distrayant 


je distrais 


je distrayais 




to divert 


distrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Dormir, 2. to 


dormant 


je dors 


je dormais 


je dormis 


sleep 


dormi 


tu dors 


tu dormais 


tu dormis 


aux. avoir 




il dort 


il dormait 


il dormit 


irregular. 




n. dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dormi mes 






v. dormez 


v. dormiez 


v. dormi tes 






ils dorment 


ils dormaient 


ils dormirent 


ficHOIR, 3. to 


echeant 


il echoit 




il echut 


^ fall due 


echu, /. e. 


or il echet 






EcLORE, 4. to 




il eclot 






^ hatch 


eclos 








ficONDUIRE, 4. 


econduisant 


j'econduis 


j'econduisais 


j'econduisis 


^ to refuse 


econduit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






ficRIRE, 4. to 


ecrivant 


j'ecris 


j'ecrivais 


j'ecrivis 


write 


ecrit, /. e. 


tu ecris 


tu ecrivais 


tu ecrivis 


aux. avoir 




il ecrit 


il ecrivait 


il ecrivit 


irregular. 




n. ecrivons 


n. ecrivions 


n. ecrivimes 






v. ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


v. ecri rites 






ils C-orivent 


ils ccrivaient 


ils ecrivirent 


£lire, 4. to 


elisant 


j'elis 


j'elisais 


j'elus 


elect 


elu,/ e. 


see lire 






JEmettre, 4. to 


emettant 


j'emets 


j'emcttais 


j'emis 


emit 


emis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Emmener, l.to 


emmenant 


j'emmene 


j'emmenais 


j'emmenai 


take away 


emmene. /. e. 


« 49. (6) 

j em on ds 


see MENER 




£moudre, 4. 


emoulant 


j'emoulais 


j'emoulus 


^ to sharpen 


emoulu./. e. 


see MOX7DRE 






Emouvoir, 3. 


emouvant 


j emeus 


j'emouvais 


j'emus 


to excite, tyc. 


emu. /. e. 


see mouvoir 






Employer, 1. 


employant 


j'emploie 


j'employaia 


j'employai 


to employ 


employe./, e. 


(> 49, (2) 
j'empreins 


Sec APPUYKR 




Empreindre, 


empreignant 


j'empreignais 


j'empreignia 


4. to imprint 


empreint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 







AND UNIPER80NAL VERBS. § 62 



369 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive, j 


Imperfect, 


je detiendrai 


je detiendrais 


detieus 


je detieime 


je detinsse 


je detruirai 


je detruirais 


detruis 


je detruise 


je detruisisse 


je deviendrai 


je deviendrais 


deviens 


je devienne 


je devinsse 


je devetirai 


je devetirais 


devets 


je devete 


je devetisse 


je dirai 


je dirais 




je dise 


je disse 


tu diras 


tu dirais 


dis 


tu dises 


tu disses 


il dira 


il dirait 


q. dise 


il dise 


il dit 


n. dirons 


n. dirions 


disons 


n. disions 


n. dissions 


v. direz 


v. diriez 


dites 


v. dislez 


v. dissiez 


ils diront 


ils diraient 


q. disent 


ils disent 


ils dissent 


je discourrai 


je discourrais 


discours 


je discoure 


je discourusse 


je disparaitrai 


je disparai- 
[trais 


disparais 


je disparaisse 


je disparusse, 


je dissoudrai 


je dissoudrais 


dissous 


je dissolve 




je distrairai 


je distrairais 


distrais 


je distraie 




je dormirai 


je dormirais 




je dorme 


je dormisse 


tu dormiras 


tu dormirais 


dors 


tu dormes 


tu dormisses 


il dormira 


il dormirait 


qu'il dorme 


il dorme 


il dor mi t 


n. dormirons 


n. dormirions 


dormons 


n. dormious 


n. dormissions 


v. dorrairez 


v. dormiriez 


dormez 


v. dormiez 


v. dormissiez 


ils dormiront 


ils dormiraient 


q. dorment 


ils dorment 


ils dormissent 


il echerra 


il echerrait 






qu'il echut 


il eclora 


il eclorait 




q. eclose 




j'econduirai 


j'econduirais 


econduis 


j'econduise 


j'econduisisse 


j'ecrirai 


j'eerirais 




j 'ecrive 


j'ecrivisse 


tu ecriras 


tu ecrirais 


ecris 


tu ecrives 


tu ecrivisses 


il ecrira 


il ecrirait 


q. ecrive 


il ecrive 


il ecrivit 


n. ccrirons 


n. ecririons 


ecrivons 


n. ecrivions 


n. ecrivissions 


v. ecrirez 


v. ecririez 


ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


v. ecrivissiez 


ils ccriront 


ils ecriraient 


q. ccrivent 


ils ecrivent 


ils ecrivissent 


j'elirai 


j'elirais 


elis 


j'elise 


j'elusse 


j'eniettrai 


j'emettrais 


crnets 


j'emette 


j'emisse 


j'emmenerai 


j'emmenerais 


emmene 


j'emmene 


j'emmenasse 


j'emoudrai 


j'emoudrais 


emouds 


j'emoule 


j'emoulusse 


j'emouvrai 


j'emouvrais 


emeus 


j'emeuve 


j'emusse 


j'emploierai 


j'emploierai3 


emploie 


j'emploio 


j'employasse 


j'empreindrai 


j'empreindrais 


empreins 
16* 


j'empreigue 


j'empreignisue 



870 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


Enclore, 4. to 




j 'enclos 






enclose 


enclos, /. e. 








Encourir, 2. 


encourant 


j'encours 


j'encourais 


j'encourus 


to incur 


encouru,/ e. 


see courir 






Endormir, 2. 


endorinant 


j'endors 


j'endormais 


j'endormis 


to lull asleep 


endormi, /. e. 


see DORMIR 






Enduire, 4. to 


enduisant 


j'enduis 


j'enduisais 


j'enduisis 


plaster 


enduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Enfreindre, 


erifreignant 


j'enfreins 


j'enfreignais 


j'enfreignis 


4. to infringe 


enfreint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Enfuir,"(s')^2. 


s'enfuyant 


je m'enfuis 


j. ni'enfuyais 


je m'enfuis 


to run away 


enfui. /. e. 


see fuir 






Enjoindre, 4. 


enjoignant 


j 'enjoins 


j'enjoignais 


j'enjoignis 


to enjoin 


enjoint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Ennuyer, (s') 


s'ennuyant 


je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyais 


je m'ennuyai 


1. to be weary 


ennuye,/. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49, (2) 




EnQJUERIR, (s') 


s'enquerant 


j. m'enquiers 


j. rn'enquerais 


je m'enquis 


2. to inquire 


enquis, f. e. 


see acque*rir 






Entremettre s'entremettant 


j. m'entremets 


je m'entre- 


j. m'entremia 


(s') 4. to in- 


entremis, /. e. 


see METTRE 


[mettais 




terpose 










Entrepren- 


entreprenant 


j'entreprends 


j'entreprenais 


j' entrepris 


dre, 4. to un- 


entrepris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






dertake 










Entretenir, 


entretenant 


j'entretiens 


j'entretenais 


j'entretins 


2. to entertain 


entretenu, /. e. 


see tenir. 






Entrevoir. 3. 


entrevoyant 


j'entrevois 


j'entrevoyais 


j'entrevis 


to glimpse at 


entrevu, /. e. 


see voir 






Envoyer, 1. to 


envoyant 


j'envoie 


j 'envoy ais 


j'envoyai 


send 


envoye./. e. 


tu envoies 


tu envoyais 


tu envoyas 


aux. avoir 




il envoie 


il envoyait 


il envoya 


irregular. 




n. envoyons 


n. envoy ions 


n. envoyames 






v. envoy ez 


v. envoyiez 


v. envoyates 






ils envoient 


ils envoyaient 


ils envoyerent 


£prendre,(s') 


s'eprenant 


je m'eprends 


je m'eprenais 


je m'epris 


4. to be smit- 
ten 
Essayer, 1. to 


epris, /. e. 


see prendre 






essayant 


j'essaie 


j'essayais 


j'essayai 


- tr V 


essaye, /. e. 


see APPUYER 


<) 49, (2) 




Eteindre, 4. 


eteignant 


j'eteins 


j'eteignais 


j'eteignis 


^ to extinguish 


eteint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






finNCELER, 1. 


etincelant 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelai 


to sparkle 


etincele,/. e. 


see APPELER 


§ 49 (4) 




finaUETER, 1. 


etiquetant 


j 'etiquete 


j'etiquetais 


j'etiquetai 


to label 
Etre, 4. to be 


etiquete, /. e. 


see ACHETER 


f4flt (5) 




see model 


ft 47, (5) 

j'ctreins 






Etreindre, 4. 


etreignant 


j'etreignais 


j'etreignis 


to press 


etreint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Exclure, 4. U 


excluant 


j 'exclus 


j'excluais 


j'exclua 


exclude 


exclu, exclus 


see CONCLURE 






Extraire, 4. 


extrayant 


j'extrais 


j' ex tray ais 




U extract 


extrait,/. e. 


see TRAIRE 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



371 



Future 


Conditional. 


Imperative* 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect, 


j'enclorai 


j'enclorais 








j'encourrai 


j'encourrais 




j'encoure j'encourasse 






sncours 






j'endormirai 


j'endormirais 


endors 


j'endorme 


j'endormisse 


j'enduirai f 


j'enduirais 


enduis 


j'enduise 


j'enduisisse 


j'enfreindrai 


j'enfreindrais 


enfreins 


j'enfreigne 


j'enfreignisse 


je m'enfuirai 


je ni'enfuirais 


enfuis-toi 


je m'enfuie 


je m'enfuisse 


j'enjoindrai 


j'enjoindrais 


eojoins 


j'enjoigne 


j'enjoigiaisse 


jein'ennuierai 


je m'ennuie- 




je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyas- 




[rais 


ennuie-toi 




[se 


jem'enquerrai 


je ra'enquer- 
[rais 


enquiers-toi 


je m'enquiere 


je m'enquisse 


je m'entre- 


je ni'entre- 




je m'entre- 


je m'entre- 


[mettrai 


[mettrais 


entremets-toi 


[mette 


[misse 


j'entrepren- 


j'entrepren- 




j'entreprenne 


j'entreprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


entreprends 






j'entretiendrai 


j'entretien- 

[drais 


entretiens 


j'entretienne 


j'entretinsse 


j'entreverrai 


j'entreverrais 


entrevois 


j'entrevoie 


j'entrevisse 


j'enverrai 


j'enverrais 




j'envoie 


j'envoyasse 


tu enverras 


tu enverrais 


envoie 


tu envoies 


tu envoyasses 


il enverra 


il enverrait 


q. envoie 


il envoie 


il envoyat 


n. enverrons 


n. enverrions 


envoyons 


n. envoyions 


nenvoyassiona 


v. enverrez 


v. enverriez 


envoyez 


v. envoyiez 


v. envoy assiez 


lis enverront 


ils enverraient 


q. envoient 


ils envoient 


ilsenvoyassent 


je m'epren- 


je m'epren- 




je m'eprenne 


je m'eprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


eprends-toi 






j'essaierai 


j'essaierais 


essaie 


j'essaie 


j'essayasse 


j'eteindrai 


j'eteindrais 


eteins 


j'eteigne 


j'eteignisse 


j'etincellerai 


j'etincellerais 


etincelle 


j 'etincelle 


j'etincelagse 


j'etiqueterai 


j'etiqueterais 


etiquete 


j 'etiquete 


j'Stiquetasse 


j'etreindrai 


j'etreindrais 


etreins 


j'etreigne 


j'etreignisse 


j'exelurai 


j'exclurais 


exclus 


j'exclue 


j'excluase 


j'extrairai 


j'extrairais 


extrais 


j'extraie 


1 



372 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 



Participles. 



Faillir, 2. to faillissant 

JaU faiUi 

(New form) ( Bescherelle) 

(Old form, faillant 

still used* failli 

irregular. {Academie) 



Faire, 4. to do 
to make 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 

Falloir, 3, to 
he necessary 

Feindre, 4. to 
feign 

FlCELER, 1. to 

cord 
Frire, 4. to 

fry 

defective 
Fuir, 2. to 
fiee 



faisant 
fait,/, e. 



fallant 
fallu 
feignant 
feint, f. e. 
ficelant 
Ificele./. e. 

frit,/.e. 

fuyant 
fui 



Geler, 1. to 
freeze, unip. 

G£sir, 2. to lie 
defective 



gelant 
gele,/. e. 
gisant 



Grasseyer, 1 

to lisp 
Gr^ler, 1. to 

hail. unip. 
Gr£siller. 1. 

to sleet, unip. 
Hair, 2. to 

hate 

aux. avoir 

irregular 

Harceler, 1. 
lo torment 



grassej^ant 

grasseyg 

grelant 

grcle 

gresillant 

gresille 

haissant 

hai, f. e. 



harcelant 
harcele, /. 



Indicative. 

je faillis 
now regular 

je faux 

tu faux 

il faut 

n. faillons 

v. faillez 

il faillent 

je fais 
tu fais 
il fait 
n. faisons 
v. faites 
ils font 
il faut 
unipersonal 
je feins 

see CEINDRE 

je ficelle 
see appeler 
je fris 
tu fris 
il frit 
je fuis 
tu fuis 
il fuit 
n. fuyons 
v. fuyez 
ils fuient 
il gele 



Imperfect. 



a git 

n. gisons, 
y. gisez 
ils gisent 
je grasseie 
see appuyer 
il grele 

il gresille 

je hais 
tu hais 
il bait 
n. hai'ssons 
v. haissez 
i. haissent 
ie harcele 
% 49, (5) 



je faillissais 
see finir, § 50 

je faillais 

tu faillais 
il tail I ait 
n. faillions 
v. failliez 
ils faillaient 
je faisais 
tu faisais 
il faisait 
n. faisions 
v. faisiez 
ils faisaient 
il fallait 



Past Definite, 

je faillis 



je faillis 
tu faillis 
il faillit 
n. faillimes 
v. faillites 
ils faillirent 
je fis 
tu fis 
il fit 
n. f imes 
y. fites 
ils firent 
il fallut 



je feignais je feignis 

je ficelais je ficelaia 
§ 49, (4) 



je fuyais 
tu fuyais 
il fuyait 
n. fuyions 
v. fuyiez 
ils fuyaient 
il gelait 



je gisais 
tu gisais 
il gisait 
n. gisions 
v. gisiez 
ils gisaient 
je grasseyais 
$ 49, (2) 
il grelait 



je fuis 
tu fuis 
il fuit 
n. fuiniea 
v. fuites 
ils fuirent 
il gela 



je grasseraS 
il grela 



ilgresillait ,'ilgresilla 



je haissais 
tu haissais 
il haiissait 
ii. hai'ssions 
v. haissiez 
ils haissaient 
je harcelais 



je hais 
tu hais 
il hait 
n. haimes 
v. haites 
ils haircut 
je harcelais 



AWD HN1PERB0NAL VERBS. § 62 



373 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je faillirai 


je faillirais 


faillis 


je faillisse 


je faillisse 


je faudrai 


je faudrais 




je faille 


je faillisse 


tu faudras 


tu faudrais 




etc. 


etc. 


il faudra 


il faudrait 








n. faudrons 


n. faudrions 








v. faudrez 


v. faudriez 








Us faudront 


ils faudraient 








je ferai 


je ferais 




je fasse 


je fisse 


tu feras 


tu ferais 


fais 


tu fasses 


tu rlsses 


il fera 


il ferait 


q. fasse 


il fasse 


ilfit 


n. ferons 


n. ferions 


faisons 


n. fassions 


n. fissions 


v. ferez 


v. feriez 


faites 


v. fassiez 


v. fissiez 


ils feront 


ils feraient 


q. fassent 


ils fassent 


ils fissent 


il faudra 


il faudrait 


q. faille 


q. faille 


q. fallut 


je feindrai 


je feindrai 


feins 


je feigne 


je feignisse 


je ficellerai 


je ficelle rais 


je ficelle 


je ficelasse 






ficelle 






je frirai 


je ffirais 








tu friras 


tu frirais 


fris 






il frira, &c. 


il frirait, &c. 








je fuirai 


je fuirais 




je fuie 


je fuisse 


tu i uiras 


tu fuirais 


fuis 


tu fuies 


tu fuisses 


il fuira 


il fuirait 


q. fuie 


il fuie 


il fait 


n. fuirons 


n. fuirions 


fuyons 


n. fusions 


n. fuissions 


v. fairez 


v. fuiriez 


fuyez 


v. fuyiez 


v. fuissiez 


ils fuiront 


ils fuiraient 


q. fuient 


ils fuient 


ils faissent 


il gelera 


il gelerait 


qu'il gele 


qu'il gele 


q. gelat 


Je grasseierai 


je grasseierais 


grasseie 


je grasseie 


je grasseyasse 


il grelera 


il grelerait 


q. grele 


qu'il grele 


qu'il grelat 


fi gresillera 


il gresillerait 


q. gresille 


q. gresille 


q. gresillat 


je hairai 


je hairais 




je haisse 


je haisse 


tu hair as 


tu hairais 


hais 


tu haisses 


tu haisses 


il haira 


il hairait 


q. haisse 


il haisse 


il hait 


n. hairons 


n. hairions 


haissons 


l. haissions 


n. haissions 


v. hairez 


v. hairiez 


haissez 


v. haissiez 


v. haissiez 


ils hairont 


ils hairaient 


q. haissent 


ils haissent 


ils haissent. 


je harcelerai 


je harcelerais 


harcelo 


je harcele 


je harailasse 



374 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



IHFINlllVE. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definits 


Importer, 1. 


important 


il importe 


il importait 


il importa 


to matter. 


importe 


it matters 






unipersonal. 










Induire, 4. to 


induisant 


j'induis 


j'induisais 


j'induisis 


induce 


induit. /. e. 


see conduire 






Inscrire, 4. to 


inscrivant 


j'inscris 


j'inscrivais 


j'inscrivis 


inscribe 


inscrit, /. e. 


see £crire 






Instruire, 4. 


instruisant 


j'instruis 


j'instruisais 


j'instruisis 


to instruct 


instruit,/. e. 


see conduire 






Interdire, 4. 


interdisant 


j'interdis 


j'interdisais 


j'interdis 


to interdict 


interdit,/. e. 


S^CONTREDIRE 






Interrompre, 


interrompant 


j'interromps 


j'interrompais 


j'interrompia 


4. to interrupt 


interrompu/.e 


see ROMPRE 






Intervenir, 2. 


intervenant 


j'interviens 


j'intervenais 


j'intervins 


to intervene 


intervenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Introduire, 4*. 


introduisant 


j'introduis 


j'introduisais 


j'introduisia 


to introduce 


introduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Jeter, 1. to 


jetant 


je jette 


je jetais 


je jetai 


throw 


jete,/. e. 


tu jettes 


tu jetais 


tu jetas 


aux. avoir 




il jette 


iljetait 


iljeta 


peculiar. 




n. jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetames 


§ 49, (4.) 




v. jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jetates 






ils jet tent 


ils jetaient 


ils jeterent 


Joindre, 4. to 


joignant 


je joins 


jejoignais 


je joignis 


join 


joint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Lire, 4. to 


lisant 


je lis 


je lisais 


je lus 


read 


lu, /. e. 


tu lis 


tu lisais 


tu lus 


aux. avoir 


il lit 


il lisait 


il lut 


irregular. 




nous lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lumes 






vous lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lutes 






ils lisent 


ils lisaient 


ils lurent 


Luire, 4. to 


luisant 


je luis 


je luisais 




shine 


lui 


see CONDUIRE 






Maintenir, 2. 


maintenant 


je maintiens 


je maintenais 


je maintins 


to maintain 


maintenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Malfaire, 4. 


malfaisant 


seldom 


used except 


in the 


to do wrong 


malfait,/. e. 








Maudire, 4. to 


maudissant 


je maudis 


je maudissais 


je maudis 


curse 


maudit,/. e. 


tu maudis 


tu maudissais 


like dire 


aux. avoir 


il maudit 


il maudissait 




irregular. 




n. maudissons 
v. maudissez 
ils maudissent 


n. maudissions 
v. maudissiez 
i.maudissaient 




M£connaitre, 


meconnaissant 


je meconnais 


je meconnais- 


je me conn ns 


4. to disown 


meconnu, /. e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




M^dire, 4. to 


medisant 


je medis 


je medisais 


je medis 


slander 


medit 


scccontredire 






MtfFAIRE, 4. to 


mefaisant 


je mefais 


je mefaisais 


je mefis 


do wrong 


me fait 


see faire 






Mener, 1. to 


menant 


je mene 


je menais 


je menai 


lead, take 


mene,/. e. 








Mentir, 1. to 


mentant 


je mens 


je mentais 


je mentis 


lie 


menti 


see sentir 







AND U-NIPERSONAL VERB8. § 62 



376 



Future 


CONDITIOr kL. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive, i 


Imperfect. 


U importera 


il importerait 


q. importe 


q. importe 


q. importat 


j'induirai 


j'induirais 


induis 


j'induise 


j'induisisse 


j'inscriFft! 


j'inscrirais 


inscris 


j'inscrive 


j'inserivisse 


j'instruirai 


j'instniirais 


instruis 


j'instruise 


j'instruisisse 


j 'inter dirai 


j'interdirais 


interdis 


j'interdise 


j'interdisse 


j'interromprai 


j'interrom- 




j'interrompe 


j'interromp- 




[prais 


interromps 




[isse 


j'interviendrai 


jintervien- 
[drais 


interviens 


j'intervienne 


j'intervinsse 


j'introduirai 


j'introduirais 


introduis 


j'introduise 


j'introduisisse 


je jetterai 


je jetterais 




je jette 


je jetasse 


tu jetteras 


tu jetterais 


jette 


tu jettes 


tu jetasses 


il jettera 


il jetterait 


q. jette 


il jette 


il jetat 


n. jetterons 


n. jetterions 


jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetassions 


v. jetterez 


v. jetteriez 


jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jetassiez 


ils jetteront 


ils jetteraient 


q. jettent 


ils jettent 


ils jetassent 


je joindrai 


p joindrais 


joins 


je joigne 


je joignisse 


je lirai 


je lirais 




je lise 


je lusse 


tu liras 


tu lirais 


lis 


tu lises 


tu lusses 


il lira 


il lirait 


q. lise 


il lise 


il lut 


n. lirons 


n. lirions 


lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lussions 


v. lirez 


v. liriez 


lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lussiez 


ils liront 


ils liraient 


q. lisent 


ils lisent 


ils lussent 


je luirai 


je luirais 




je luise 




je maintien- 


je maintien- 




je maintienne 


je maintinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


maintiens 






tenses 


given 


here 






je maudirai 


je inaudirais 




je maudisse 


je maudisse 


like dire 


like dire 


maudis 

q. maudisse 

maudissons 

maudissez 

q. maudissent 


tu maudisses 
il maudisse 
n. maudissions 
v. maudissiez 
ils maudissent 


like dire 


je meconnai- 


je meconnai- 




jemeconnaisse 


je meconnusse 


[trai 


[trais 


meconnais 






je medhai 


je medirais 


medis 


je medise 


je medisses 


je meferai 


je m^ferais 


mefais 


je mefasse 


je mefisse 


je menerai 


je menerais 


raene 


je mene 


je menasse 


je mentirai 


J3 mentirais 


mens 


je mento 


je mentisao 



S1Z 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


M*PRENDRE,4. 


se meprenant 


j.m. meprends 


j. me mepre- 


je me mepris 


(se) to mis- 


mepris, }. e. 


see PRENDRE 


[nais 




take, ref. 










Mettre, 4. to 


mettant 


je mets 


je mettais 


je mis 


put 


mis,/, e. 


tu mets 


tu mettais 


tu mi^ 


aux. avoir 




il met 


il mettait 


il mit 


irregular. 




n. mettons 


n. mettions 


n. mimes 






v. mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. mites 






ils mettent 


ils mettaient 


ils mirent 


MOLTDRE, 4. to 


moulant 


je mouds 


je moulais 


je moulus 


grind 


moulu,/. e. 


tu mouds 


tu moulais 


tu moulus 


aux. avoir 




il moud 


il moulait 


il moulut 


irregular. 




n. moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulumes 






v. moulez 


v. mouliez 


v. moulu tes 






ils moulent 


ils moulaient 


ils moulurent 


Mourir, 2. to 


mourant 


je meurs 


je mourais 


je mourns ;— ■ 


die 


mort,/. e. 


tu meurs 


tu mourais 


tu mourus 


aux. etre 




il meurt 


il mourait 


il mourut 


Irregular. 




n. mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourumes 






v. mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. moumtes 






ils meurent 


ils mouraient 


ils moururent 


Mouvoir, 3. to 


mouvant 


je meus 


je mouvais 


je mus 


move 


mu./. e. 


tu meus 


tu mouvais 


tu mus 


aux. avoir 




il meut 


il mouvait 


il mut 


irregular. 




n. mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mumes 






v. mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mutes 






ils meuvent 


ils mouvaient 


ils murent 


Mouvoir, (se) 


se mouvant 


je me meus 


j. me mouvais 


je me mus 


3. to move. 


mu, /. e. 


see mouvoir 






reflective. 










NaItre, 4. to 


naissant 


je nais 


je naissais 


je naquis 


be born 


ne,/. e. 


tu nais 


tu naissais 


tu naquis 


aux. 6 tre 




il nait 


il naissait 


il naquit 


irregular. 




n. naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquimes 






v. naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquites 






ils naissent 


ils naissaient 


ils naquirent 


N£gliger, 1. 


negligeant 


je neglige 


je negligeais 


je negligeai 


to neglect 


neglige,/ e. 


% 49, (1.) 






Neiger. 1. to 


neigeant 


il neige 


il neigeait 


il neigea 


snoiv. unip. 


neige 








NlVELER, 1. to 


nivelant 


je nivelle 


je nivelais 


je nivelai 


level 


nivele,/ e. 


see APPELER 


§ 49, (4) 




Nuire, 4. to 


nuisant 


je nuis 


je nuisais 


je nuisis 


injure 


nui 


see CONDUIRE 






Obtrnir, 2. to 


obtenant 


j'obtiens 


j'obtcnais 


j'obtins 


obtain 


obtenu,/ e. 


SCe TENIR 






Offrir, 2. to 


ofFrant 


j'offre 


j'olfrais 


j'offris 


offer 


offert,/. e. 


see ouvrir 






OlNDRE, 4. to 


oignant 


j'oins 


j'oignais 


j'oigpQis 


anoint 


oint 


see ceindre 






Omettre, 4. 


omettant 


j'omets 


j'omettais 


j'omia 


to omit 


omis,/. e. 


see METTRE 






Ouir, 4. to 




j'ouis 


i 




hear. def. 


ou'i, /. e. 


il ouit 


t 





AND TJIOTERSONAI. VERBS. 



§ 62 



377 



Fitture. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je me mepren- 


jememepren- 




j. me mepren- 


je me niepris- 


[drai 


[drais 


meprends-toi 


[ne 


[se 


je mettrai 


je mettrais 




je mette 


je misse 


tu mettras 


tu mettrais 


mets 


tu mettes 


tu misses 


il mettra 


il met trait 


q. mette 


il mette 


il mit 


. mettrons 


n. mettrions 


mettons 


n. mettions 


u. missions 


. mettrez 


v. mettriez 


mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. missiez 


lis raettront 


ils mettraient 


q. mettent 


ils mettent 


ils missent 


je moudrai 


je moudrais 




je moule 


je moulusse 


tu moudras 


tu moudrais 


mouds 


tu moules 


tu moulusses 


il moudra 


il moudrait 


qu'il moule 


il moule 


il moulut 


n. moudrons 


n. moudrions 


moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulussions 


v. moudrez 


v. moudriez 


moulez 


v. monliez 


v. moulussiez 


ils moudront 


ils moudraient 


q. moulent 


ils moulent 


ils moulussent 


je niourrai ^ 


je mourra is 




je meure . 


je mourusse 


tu mourras 


tu mourrais 


meurs 


tu meures 


tu mourusses 


il mourra 


il mourrait 


q. meure 


il meure 


il mourut 


n. mourrons 


n. mourrions 


mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourussions 


v. mourrez 


v. mourriez 


mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. mourussiez 


ils mourront 


ils mourraient 


q. meurent 


ils meurent 


ils mourussent 


je mouvrai 


je mouvrais 




je meuve 


je musse 


tu mouvras 


tu mouvrais 


meus 


tu meuves 


tu musses 


il mouvra 


il mouvrait 


q. meuve 


il meuve 


il mut 


n. mouvrons 


n. mouvrions 


mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mussions 


v. mouvrez 


v. mouvriez 


mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mussiez 


ils mouvront 


ils mouvraient 


q. meuvent 


ils meuvent 


ils mussent 


je me mouvrai 


je rne mouv- 
[rais 


meus-toi 


je me meuve 


je me musse 


je naitrai 


je naitrais 




je naisse 


je naquisse 


tu naitras 


tu naitrais 


nais 


tu naisses 


tu naquisses 


il naitra 


il naitrait 


q. naisse 


il naisse 


il naquit 


n. naitrons 


n. naitrions 


naissons 


n. naissions 


n. uaquissions 


v. naitrez 


v. naitriez 


naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquissiez 


ils naitront 


ils naitraient 


q. naissent 


ils naissent 


ils naquissent 


je negligerai 


je negligerais 


neglige 


je neglige 


je negligeasse 


il neigera 


il neigerait 


q. neige 


qu'il neige 


q. neigeat 


je nivellerai 


je nivellerais 


nivelle 


je nivelle 


je nivelasse 


je nuirai 


je nuirais 


nuis 


je nuise 


je nuisisse 


j'obtiendrai 


j'obtiendrais 


obtiens 


j'obtienne 


j'obtinsse 


j'offrirai 


j'offrirais 


offre 


j 'offre 


j'offrisse 


j'oindrai 


j'oindrais 


oins 


j 'eigne 


j'oignisse 


j'omettrai 


j'omettrais . 


omets 


j'omette 


j'omisse 

j'ouisse 
il ouit 



378 



IRUEGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


Ouvrir, 2. to 


ouvrant 


j'ouvre 


j'ouvrais 


j'ouvris 


open 


ouvert,/. e. 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrais 


tu ouvris 


aux, avoir 




il ouvre 


il ouvrait 


il ouvrit 


irregular 




n. ouvrons 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrimes 


j 
i 


v. ouvre z 


v. ouvriez 


v. ouvrites 




ils ouvrent 


ils ouvraient 


ils ouvrirent 


PaItrEj 4. to 


paissant 


je pais 


je paissais 




graze 


pu 


tu pais 


tu paissais 




aux. avoir 




il pait 


il paissait 




defective 




n. paissons 
v. paissez 
ils paissent 


n. paissions 
v. paissiez 
ils paissaient 




Parfaire, 4. to 


parfaisant 


je parfais 


je parfaisais 


je partis 


complete 


parfait. / e. 


see faire 


seldom used 




Paraitre, 4. 


paraissant 


je parais 


je paraissais 


jeparus 


to appear 


paru 


see CONNA1TRE 






Parcourir, 2. 


parcourant 


je parcours 


je parcourais 


je parcourus 


to go through 


parcouru, /. e. 


see coueir 






Parti r, 2. to 


partant 


je pars 


je partais 


je partis 


depart 


parti, f. e. 


see SENTIR 






Parvenir, 2. 


parvenant 


je parviens 


je parvenais 


je parvms 


to succeed)tyc 


parvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Payer, 1. to 


payant 


je paie 


je payais 


je payai 


pay 


paye,/. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49, (2.) 




Peindre, 4. to 


poignant 


je peins 


je peignais 


je peignis 


paint 


peint, f. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Peler, 1. to 


pelant 


je pele 


je pelais 


je pelai 


peel 


pele,/. e. 


% 49, (5.) 






Permettre, 4. 


perrnettant 


je permets 


je permettais 


je permis 


to permit 


permis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Plaindre, 4. 


plaignant 


je plains 


je plaignais 


je plaignis 


to pity 


plaint,/, e. 


see CEINDRE 






Plaindre, (se) 


se plaignant 


je me plains 


je me plai- 


je me plaignia 


4. to complain 


plaint, /. e. 




[gnais 




reflective. 










Plaire, 4. to 


plaisant 


je plais 


je plaisais 


je plus 


please 


plu 


tu plais 


tu plaisais 


tu plus 


aux. avoir 




il plait 


il plaisait 


il plut 


irregular. 




n. plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n. plumes 






v. plaisez 


v. plaisiez 


v. plutes 






ils plaisent 


ils plaisaient 


ils plurent 


Pleuvoir, 3. 


pleuvant 


il pleut 


il pleuvait 


il plut 


to rain. unip. 


plu 








Poindre, 4. to 




il point 






dawn. def. 










Poursuivre,4. 


poursuivant 


je poursuis 


je poursuivais 


je poursuivLs 


to pursue 


poursuivi, /. e. 


see suivre 






Pourvoir, 3. 


pourvoyant 


je pourvois 


je pourvoyais 


je pourvus 


to provide 


pourvu,/. e. 


tu pourvois 


tu pourvoyais 


tu pourvus 


aux. avoir 




il pourvoit 


il pourvoyait 


il pourvut 


irregular. 




n. pourvoyons 


n. pourvoyiona 


n. pourvumea 






v. pourvoyez 


v. pourvoyiez 


v. pourvutes 






ils pourvoient 


i.pourvoyaient 


ils pourvurent 



AND TNIPERSONAL VESBS. § 02 



379 



Future. 

j'ouvrirai 
tu ouvriras 
il ouvrira 
n. ouvrirons 
v. ouvrirez 
ils ouvriront 
je paitrai 
tu paitras 
il paitra 
n. paitrons 
v. paitrez 
ils paitront 
je parferai 

je paraitrai 

je parcourrai 

je partirai 

je parviendrai 

je paierai 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrai 

je plaindrai 

je me plain- 
[drai 

je plairai 
tu plairas 
il plaira 
u. plairons 
v. plairez 
ils plairont 
il pleuvra 

il poindra 



Conditional 



j'ouvrirais 
tu ouvrirais 
il ouvrirait 
n. ouvririons 
v. ouvririez 
ils ouvriraient 
je paitrais 
tu paitrais 
il paitrait 
n. paitrions 
v. paitriez 
Ds paitraient 
je parferais 

je paraitrais 

je parcourrais 

je partirais 

je parviendrais 

je paierais 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrais 

je plaindrais 

je me plain- 
[drais 

je plairais 
tu plairais 
il plairait 
n. pi air ions 
v. plairiez 
ils plairaient 
il pleuvrait 

il poindrait 



Imperative. 



ouvre 
q. ouvre 
ouvrons 
ouvrez 
q. ouvrent 

pais 

q. paisse 

paissons 

paissez 

q. paissent 

parfais 

parais 

parcours 

pars 

parviens 

paie 

peins 

pele 

permets 

plains 

plains-toi 



plais 
q. plaise 
plaisons 
plaisez 
q. plaisent 
q. pleuve 



jepoursuivrai jepoursuivrais 



je pourvoirai 
tu pourvoiras 
ll pourvoira 



je pourvoirais 
tu pourvoirais 
il pourvoirai t 



n. pourvoironsjn.pourvoirions 
v. pourvoirez Iv. pourvoiriez 
ils pourvoirontj i.pourvoiraient 



poursuis 

pourvois 
q. pourvoie 
pourvoyons 
pourvoyez 
q. pourvoient 



Subjunctive. Impkrf 



j'ouvre 
tu ouvres 
il ouvre 
n. ouvrions 
v. ouvriez 
ils ouvrent 
je paisse 
tu paisses 
il paisse 
n. paissions 
v. paissiez 
ils paissent 
je parfasse 
obsolete 
je paraisse 

je parcoure 

je parte 

je parvienne 

je paie 

je peigne 

je pele 

je permette 

je plaigne 

je me plaigne 



je plaise 
tu plaises 
41 plaise 
n. plaisions 
v. plaisiez 
ils plaisent 
q. pleuve 



je poursuive 

je pourvoie 
tu pourvoie 
il pourvoie 
n. pourvoyions 
v. pourvoyiez 
ils pourvoient 



j'ouvrisse 
tu ouvrisses 
il ouvrit 
n. ouvrissions 
v. ouvrissiez 
ils ouvrissent 



je parfisse 

je parusse 

je parcourusse 

je partisse 

je parvinsse 

je payasse 

je peignisse 

je pelasse 

je permisse 

je plaignisso 

je me plai- 
[gnisse 

je plusse 
tu plusses 
il plut 
n. plussions 
v. plussiez 
ils plussent 
q. plut 



je poursuivis- 

fsc 

je pourvusse 
tu pourvusses 
il pourvut 
n.pourvussiomi 
v. pourvussiez 
ils pounrussent 



980 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite, 


PouRvom,(se) 


se pourvoyant 


je me pour- 


je me pour- 


je it e pourvxa 


3. to provide. 


pourvu, /. e. 


[vois 


[voyais 




Pogvoir, 3. to 


pouvant" 


je puis* 


je pouvais 


je pus 


be able 


pu 


tu peux 


tu pouvais 


tu pus 


anx. avoir 




il peut 


il pouvait 


il put 


irregular. 




n. pouvons 


n. pouvions 


n. pumes 






v. pouvez 


v. pouviez 


v. putes 






ils peuvent 


ils pouvaient 


ils purent 


Pr*dire, 4. to 


predisant 


je predis 


je predisais 


je predis 


predict 


prcdit,/. e. 


SgCCONTREDIRE 






Prendre, 4. to 


prenant 


je prends 


je preuais 


je pris 


take 


pris, /. e. 


tu prends 


tu prenais 


tu pris 


aux. avoir 




il prend 


il prenait 


il prit 


irregular. 




n. prenons 


n. prenions 


n. primes 






v. prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prites 






ils prennent 


ils prenaient 


ils prirent 


Prescrire, 4. 


prescrivant 


je prescris 


je prescrivais 


je prescrivia 


to presciibe 


present,/, e. 


see £crire 






Pressentir, 2. 


pressentant 


je pressens 


je pressentais 


je pressentis 


to foresee 
Pr^valoir, 3. 


pr^ssenti,/. e. 


see SENTIR 






prevalant 


je prevaux 


je prevalais 


je prevalus 


to prevail 


prevalu 


see valoir 






Pr£venir, 2. 


prevenant 


je previens 


je prevenais 


je previns 


to prevent 


prevenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Pr£voir, 3. to 


prevoyant 


je prevois 


je prevoyais 


je pre vis 


foresee 


prevu, /. e. 


like voir 


like voir 


like voir 


Produire, 4. 


produisant 


je produis 


je produisais 


je produisis 


to produce 


produit./. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Projeter, 1. 


projetant 


je projette 


je projetais 


je projetai 


to project 


projete,/. e. 


see jeter 


§ 49, (4.) 




PROMETTRE, 4. 


promettant 


je promets 


je promettais 


je prom is 


to promise 


promis,/. e. 


see METTRE 






pROMOUVOIR, 


promouvant 


je pronieus 


je promouvais 


je promus 


3. to promote 


promu./. e. 


see mouvoir 






PROSCRIRE, 4. 


proscrivant 


je proscris 


je proscrivais 


je proscrivis 


to proscribe 


proscrit,/. e. 


see ^crire 






PROVENIR, 2. 


provenant 


je provieus 


je provenais 


je provins 


to proceed 


provenu, /. e. 








Qu£rir,&? fetch 


only used 


in the infinitive 


except in the 


composition cf 


Rabattre, 4. 


rabattant 


je rabats 


je rabattais 


je rabattis 


to abate 


rabattu,/. e. 


see battre 






Racketer, 1. 


rachetant 


je rachete 


je rachetais 


je rachetai 


to buy again 


rachete, /. e. 


see ACHETEIi 


() 49, (5.) 




Rappeler, 1. 


rappelant 


je rappelle 


je rappelais 


je rappelai 


to recall 


rappele, /. e. 


see APPELER 


*§ 49, (4.) 




Ratprendre,4 


rapprenant 


je rapprends 


je rapprenais 


je rappris 


to learn again 


rappris,/. e. 








RaTTEFNDRE,4. 


ratteignant 


je ratteins 


je ratteignais 


je ratteignis 


to reach again 


ratteint,/. e. 








Rebattre. 4. 


rebattant 


je rebats 


je rcbattais 


je : n battis 


to beat again 


rebattu,/. e. 
reconduisant 


see BATTRE 






Reconduire, 


je reconduis 


je recondui- 


je r econdulsU 


4. to conduct 


reconduit,/. e. 


see Of NDUIBE 


[sais 




again 











AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS, §62 



381 



FLTrRE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je me pour- 


je me pour- 




je me pour- 


je me pour- 


[voirai 


[voirais 


pourvois-toi 


[voie 


[vusse 


je pourrai 


je pour rais 




je puisse 


je pnsse 


tu pourras 


tu pourrais 




:u puisses 


tu pusses 


il pourra 


il p\ urrait 




il puisse 


ilput 


n. pourrons 


n. pourrions 




d. puissions 


n. pussions 


v. pourrez 


v. pourriez 




v. pnissiez 


v. pussiez 


ils pourront 


ils pourraient 




ils puissent 


ils pussent 


je predirai 


je predirais 


predis 


je predise 


je predis^e 


je prendrai 


je prendrais 




je prenne 


je prisses 


tu prendras 


tu prendrais 


prends 


tu prennes 


tu prisses 


il prendra 


il prendrait 


q. premie 


il prenne 


il prit 


n. prendrons 


n. prendrions 


prenons 


n. prenions 


n. prissions 


v. prendrez 


v. prendriez 


prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prissiez 


ils prendront 


ils prendraient 


q. prennent 


ils prennent 


ils prissent 


je prescrirai 


je prescrirais 


prescris 


je prescrive 


je prescrivisse 


je pressentirai 


je pressenti- 
[rais 
je prevaudrais 




je pressente 


je pressentisse 


je prevaudrai 




je prevale 


je prevalusse 






prevaux 






je previendrai 


je previen- 

[drais 


previens 


je previenne 


je previnsse 


je prevoirai 


je prevoirais 




je prevoie 


je previsse 


like pourvoir 


like pourvoir 


prevois 


like voir 


like voir 


je produirai 


je produirais 


produis 


je produise 


je produisisse 


je projetterai 


je projetterai 


projette 


je projette 


je projetasse 


je promettrai 


je promettrais 


je promette 


je promisse 






promets 






je promouvrai 


je promou- 
[vrais 


promeus 


je promeuve 


je promusse 


je proscrirai 


je proscrirais 


proscris 


je proscrive 


je proscrivisse 


je proviendrai 


je provien- 
[drais 


proyiens 


je provienne 


je provinsse 


other verbs 










je rabattrai 


je rabattrais 


rabats 


je rabatte 


je rabattisse 


je racheterai 


je racheterais 


rachete 


je rachete 


je rachetasse 


je rappellerai 


je rappellerais 


rappelle 


je rappelle 


je rappelasse 


je rapprendrai 


je rappren- 
[drais 


rapprends 


je rapprenne 


je rapprisse 


je ratteindrai 


je ratteindrais 


ratteins 


je ratt eigne 


je ratteignisse 


je rebattrai 


i je rebattrais 


rebats 


je rebatte 


je rebattisse 


je reconduirai 


' je recondui- 




je reconduise 


je recondui- 




; [rais 


reconduis 




lateae 



382 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definit» 


ReconnaItrk, 


reconnaissant 


je reconnais 


je reconnais- 


je reconnus 


4. to recogniz3 


reconnn,/. e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




ReconqujSrir, 


reconqnerant 


je reconquiers 


je reconque- 


je reconquis 


2. to conquer 


reconquis,/". e. 


see Acau^RiR 


[rais 




again 










Reconstruire 


reconstruisant 


je reconstruis 


je reconstrui- 


je leconstnii 


4. to recon- 


reconstruit,/.e 


see C0NDU1RE 


[sais 


[sis 


struct 










Recoudre, 4. 


recousant 


je reconds 


je recousais 


je reconsis 


to sew again 


reconsu,/. e. 








Recourir, 2. 


recourant 


je recours 


je recourais 


je recourus 


to have re- 


recouru 


see courir 






course 










Recouvrir, 2. 


recouvrant 


je recouvre 


je recouvrais 


je recouvris 


to cover again 


reconvert,/, e. 


see ouvrir 






Recueillir, 2. 


recueillant 


je recueille 


je recueillais 


je recueillis 


to reap 


recueilli,/. e. 


see CUEILLIR 






Redire, 4. to 


redisant 


je redis 


je redisais 


je redis 


say again 


redit, f. e. 


see dire 






R^duire, 4. to 


reduisant 


je reduis 


je reduisais 


je reduisis 


reduce 


rednit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Refaire, 4. to 


refaisant 


je refais 


je refaisais 


je refis 


make again 


refait, /. e. 


see faire 






Rejoindre, 4. 


rejoignant 


je rejoins 


je rejoignais 


je rejoignis 


to rejoin 


re joint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Relire, 4. to 


relisant 


je relis 


je relisais 


je relus 


read again 


relu, /. e. 


see lire 






Reluire, 4. to 


reluisant 


je relnis 


je reluisais 


je reluisis 


shine 


relui 


see luire 






Remettre, 4. 


remettant 


je remets 


je remettais 


je remis 


to remit 


remiS; / e. 


see METTRE 






Remoudre. 4. 


remoulant 


je remouds 


je remonlais 


je remoulus 


to grind again 


remoulu, /. e. 


see MOUDRE 






RenaItre, 4. 


renaissant 


je renais 


je renaissais 


je renaquis 


to revive 


rene, /. e. 


see naItre 






Rendormir, 2. 


rendormant 


je rendors 


je rendcrmais 


je rendormis 


to lull to sleep 


rendormi,/. e. 


see DORMIR 






Rentraire, 4. 


rentrayant 


je rentrais 


je rentrayais 




to da.rn 


rentrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Renvoyer, 1. 


renvoyant 


je renvoie 


je renvoyais 


je renvoyais 


to send back 


renvoye, /. e. 


see ENVOYER 


§ 49, (2.) 




Repaitre, 4. 


repaissant 


je repais 


je repaissais 


je repus 


to feed 


repu 


see paitre 




&c. 


Repartir, 2. 


repartant 


je repars 


je repartais 


je repartis 


to set off again 


reparti, /. e. 


see sentir 






Repeindre, 4. 


repeignant 


je repeins 


je repeignais 


je repeignis 


to paint again 


repeint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Repentir, (se) 


se repentant 


je me repens 


je me repen- 


je me repentii 


2. to repent, ref. 


repentl f. e. 


see SENTIR 


[tais 




Reprendre, 4. 


reprenant 


je reprends' 


je reprenais 


je repiis 


to take again 


repris,/. e. 


see PRENDRE 






Reproduire,4. 


reprodiiisant 


je reproduis 


je reprodui- 


jeitpioditeia 


tr reproduce 


reproduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 


[sais 





AKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



383 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive, 


Imperfect. 


je reconnai- 


je reconnai- 




je reconnaisse 


je reconnusse 


[trai 


[trais 


reconnais 






je reconquer- 
[rai 


je reconquer- 




je reconquiere 


je reconquisse 


[rais 


reconquiers 






j« reconstrui- 


je reconstrui- 




je reconstru- 


je reconstrui- 


[rai 


[rais 


reconstruis 


[ise 


[sisso 


je recoudrai 


je recoudrais 


recouds 


je recouse 


je recousisse 


je recourrai 


je recourrais 


recours 


je recoure 


je recourusse 


je recouvrirai 


je recouvrirais 




je recouvre 


je recouvrisse 


je recueillerai 


je recueille- 
[rais 


recouvre 
recueille 


je recueille 


je recueillisse 


je redirai 


je redirais 


redis 


je redise 


je redisse 


je reduirai 


je reduirais 


reduis 


je reduise 


je reduisisse 


je referai 


je referais 


refais 


je refasse 


je refisse 


je rejoindrai 


je rejoindrais 




je rejoigne 


je rejoignisse 


je relirai 


je relirais 


rejoins 
relis 


je relise 


je relusse 


je reluirai 


je reluirais 


reluis 


je reluise 


je reluisisse 


je remettrai 


je remettrais 


remets 


je remette 


je remisse 


je remoudrai 


je remoudrais 


remouds 


je remoule 


je remoulussc 


je renaitrai 


je renaitrais 


renais 


je renaisse 


je renaquisse 


jerendormirai 


je rendormi- 
[rais 


rendors 


je rendorme 


je rendormisse 


je rentrairai 


je rentrairais 


rentrais 


je rentraie 




je renverrai 


je renverrais 


renvoie 


je renvoie 


je renvoyasse 


je repaitrai 


je repaitrais 


repais 


je repaisse 


je repusse 
&c. 


je repartirai 


je repartirais 


repars 


je reparte 


je repartisse 


fe lepeindrai 


je repeindrais 


je repeigne 


je iepeignisse 






repeins 






je me repenti- 


je me repenti- 




je me repente 


je me repen- 


[rai 


[rais 


repens-toi 




[tisse 


je reprendrai 


je reprendrais 


reprends 


je reprenne 


je reprisse 


Je reproduirai 


je reprodui- 




j ■» reproc ulse 


jf reproduis. 




'rais 


reproduis 




[isse 



384 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


Reciu^rir, 2. 


requerant 


je requiers 


je requerais 


je requis 


to require 


requis./ e. 


see acqjj^rir 






RfsOUDREj 4. 


resolvant 


je resous 


je resolvais 


je resolus 


to resolve 


resolu, re sous 


see ABSOUDRE 






Ressentir, 2. 


ressentaut 


je ressens 


je ressentais 


je ressentis 


to resent 


ressenti, /. e. 


see SENT1R 






Ressortir, 2. 


ressortant 


je ressors 


je ressortais 


je ressortis 


o go out again 


ressorti,/. e. 


see sortir 






Ressouvenir. 


se ressouve- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou« 


(se) to remem- 


[nant 


[viens 


[venais 


[vins 


ber, ref. 


souvenu,/ e. 


see tenir 






Restreindee, 


restreignant 


je restreins 


je restrei- 


je restreiguia 


4. to restrain 


restreint,/. e. 


see CEINDRE 


fgnais 




Retenir, 2. to 


retenaut 


je retiens 


je retenais 


je re tins 


retain 


retenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Retraire, 4. 


retrayant 


je retrais 


je retrayais 




to redeem 


re trait./, e. 


see TRAIRE 






Revenir, 2. to 


revenant 


je reviens 


je revenais 


je revins 


return 


revenu,/. e. 


see venir 






Revetir, 2. to 


re ve taut 


je revets 


je revetais 


je revetis 


clothe 


revetu,/. e. 


see v&tir 






Revivre, 4. to 


revivaut 


je revis 


je revivals 


je revecus 


live again 


revecu 








Revoir, 3. to 


revoyaut 


je revois 


je revoyais 


je revis 


see again 


revu, /. e 


see voir 






Rire, 4. to 


riant 


je ris 


je riais 


je ris 


laugh 


ri 


tu ris 


tu riais 


tu ris 


aux. avoir 




il rit 


il riait 


ilrit 


irregular. 




n. rious 


n. riions 


n. rimes 






v. riez 


v. riiez 


n. rites 






ils rient 


ils riaient 


ils rirent 


Rompre, 4. to 


rompant 


je romps 


je rompais 


je rompis 


break 


rompu,/. e. 


tu romps 


tu rompais 


tu rompis 


aux. avoir 




il rompt 


il rompait 


il rompit 


irregular. 




n. rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompimes 






v. rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompites 






ils rompent 


ils rompaient 


ils rompirent 


Rouvrir, 2. to 


rouvrant 


je rouvre 


je rouvrais 


je rouvris 


re- open 


rouvert,/. e. 


see ouvrir 






Saillir, 2. to 


saillant 


il saille 


il saillait 




project 


sailli 








Satisfaire, 4. 


satisfaisant 


je satisfais 


je satisfaisais 


je satisfis 


to satisfy 


satisfait /. e. 


see faire 






Savoir. 3. to 


sauhant 


je sais 


je savais 


je sus 


know 


su,/. e. 


tu sais 


tu savais 


tu sus 


aux. avoir 




il sait 


il savait 


il sut 


irregular. 




n. savons 


n. savions 


n. siimes 






v. savez 


v. saviez 


v. su tes 






ils savent 


ils savaiept 


ils surent 


Secourir, 2. to 


secourant 


je secours 


je secourais 


je secourua 


succor 


secouru, /. e. 


see courir 






SiDUIRE, 4. to 


neduisant 


je seduis 


je seduisais 


je sednisii 


satuce 


eeduit./. e. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §6 


2 385 


Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je requerrai 


je requerrais 


requiers 


je requiere 


je requisse 


je rSsoudrai 


je resoudrais 


resous 


je resolve 


je resolusse 
&c. 


je ressentirai 


je ressentirais 


ressens 


je ressente 


je ressentisse 


je ressortirai 


je ressortirais 


ressors 


je ressorte 


je ressortisse 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 




je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


[viendrai 


[viendrais 


ressouviens-toi 


[vienne 


[vinsse 


je restreindrai 


je restrein- 




je restreigne 


je restrei- 




[drais 


restfeins 




[gnigse 


je retiendrai 


je retiendrais 


retiens 


je retienne 


je retinsse 


je retrairai 


je retrairais 


retrais 


je retraie 




je reviendrai 


je reviendrais 


reviens 


je revienne 


je revinsse 


je rev^tirai 


je revetirais 


revets 


je revete 


je revetisse 


je revivrai 


je revivrais 


re vis 


je revive 


je revecusse 


je reverrai 


je reverrais 


revois 


je revoie 


je revisse 


je rirai 


je rirais 




je rie 


je risse 


tu riras 


tu rirais 


ris 


tu ries 


tu risses 


il rira 


il rirait 


q. rie 


il rie 


ilrit 


n. rirons 


n. ririons 


rions 


n. riions 


n. rissions 


v. rirez 


v ririez 


riez 


v. riiez 


v. rissiez 


lis riront 


ils riraient 


q. rient 


ils rient 


ils rissent 


je romprai 


je romprais 




je rompe 


je rompisse 


tu rompras 


tu romprais 


romps 


tu rompes 


tu rompisses 


il rompra 


il romprait 


q. rompe 


il rompe 


il rompit 


n. romprons 


n. romprions 


rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompissions 


v. romprez 


v. rompriez 


rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompissiez 


ils rompront 


ils rompraient 


q. rompent 


ils rompent 


ils rompissent 


je rouvrirai 


je rouvrirais 


rouvre 


je rouvre 


je rouvrisse 


il saillera 


il saillerait 




q. saille 


q. saillit 


je satisferai 


je satisferais 


satisfais 


je satisfasse 


je satisfisse 


je saurai 


je saurais 




je sache 


je susse 


tu sauras 


tu saurais 


sache 


tu saches 


tu susses 


il saura 


il saurait 


q. sache 


il sache 


il sut 


n. sar.rons 


n. saurions 


sachons 


n. sachions 


n. sussions 


v. saurez 


v. sauriez 


sachez 


v. sachiez 


v. sussiez 


ils sauront 


ils sauraient 


q. sachent 


ils sachent 


ils sussent 


je secourrai 


je secourrais 


secours 


je secoure 


je secourusse 


je seduirai 


je seduirais 


s^duis 


je £/6duise 


jo s6duisU»e 



11 



S86 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


Semer, 1. to 


semant 


je seme 


je semais 


je semai 


im. pec. 


seme,/, e. 








Sentir, 2. to 


sentant 


je sens 


je sentais 


je sentis 


pel 


senti, /. e. 


tu sens 


tu sentais 


tu sentis 


aux. avoir 




il sent 


il sentait 


il sentit 


irregular. 




n. sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentimes 






v. sentez 


v. sentiez 


v. sentites 






ils sentent 


ils sentaient 


ils sentirent 


Seoir, 3. to Jit, 


seyant 


il sied 


il seyait 




become 


sis 








Servir, 2. to 


servant 


je sers 


je servais 


je servis 


serve 


servi, f. e. 


tu sers 


tu servais 


tu servis 


irregular. 




il sert 


il servait 


il servit 






n. servons 


n. servions 


n. servimes 






v. servez 


v. serviez 


v. servites 






ils servent 


ils servaient 


ils servirent 


Sortir, 2. to 


sortant 


je sors 


je sortais 


je sortis 


go out 


sorti,/. e. 


see sentir 






SoUFFRIR, 2. to 


souffrant 


je souffre 


je souffrais 


je souffris 


suffer 


souffert,/ e. 


see ouvrir 






SOUMETTRE, 4. 


soumettant 


je soumets 


je soumettais 


je soumis 


to submit 


soumis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






SOURIRE, 4. to 


souriant 


je souris 


je souriais 


je souris 


smile 


souri 


see rire 






SOUSCRIRE, 4. 


souscrivant 


je souscris 


je souscrivais 


je souscri* 


to subscribe 


souscrit 


see £crire 






SOUSTRAIRE, 4. 


soustrayant 


je soustrai3 


je soustrayais 




to subtract 


soustrait, / e. 


see traire 






SoUTENIR, 2. 


soutenant 


je soutiens 


je soutenais 


je soutins 


to sustain 


soutenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Souvenir, (se) 


se souvenant 


jemesouviens 


je me souve- 


je me sourVs* 


2. to remember 


souvenu,/ e. 


see tenir 


[nais 




Subvenir, 2. 


subvenant 


je subviens 


je subvenais 


je subvins 


to relieve 


subvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Buppire, 4. to 


suffisant 


je suffis 


je suffisais 


je suffis 


suffice 


suffi 


tu suffis 


tu suffisais 


tu suffis 


aux. avoir 




il suffit 


il suffisait 


il suffit 


irregular. 




n. suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suff imes 






v. suffi sez 


v. suffisiez 


v. suff ites 






ils suffisent 


ils suffi saient 


ils suffiren* 


Soivre, 4. to 


suivant 


je suis 


je suivais 


je suivis 


follow 


sum,/, e. 


tu suis 


tu suivais 


tu suivis 


aux. avoir 




il suit 


il suivait 


il suivit 


irregular. 




n. suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivimes 






v. suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivites 




* 


ils suivent 


ils suivaient 


ils suivirenl 


Scrfaire, 4. to 


surfaisant 


je surfais 


je surfaisais 


je surfis 


exact 


surfait,/ e. 


see faire 






Surprendre, 


surprenant 


je surprends 


je surprenais 


je surpris 


4. to surprise 


surpris, /. e. 


see prendre 







AKD UNIPERSONAl VERBS. §62 



SSI 



Future. 



Conditional. 



Imperative. 



je semerai 

je sentirai 
tu sentiras 
il sentira 
n. sentirons 
v. sentirez 
ils sentiront 
il siera 

je servirai 
tu serviras 
il servira 
D. servirons 
v. servirez 
ils serviront 
je sortirai 

je souiFrirai 

je soumettrai 

je sourirai 

je souscrirai 

je soustrairai 

jfc soutiendrai 

je me souvien- 
[drai 
je subviendrai 

je suffirai 
tu suffiras 
il suffira 
n. suffirons 
v. suffirez 
ils suffiront 
je suivrai 
tu suivras 
il suivra 
n. suivrons 
v. suivrez 
lis suivrout 
je surferai 



je semerais 

je sentirais 
tu sentirais 
il sentirait 
n. sentirions 
v. sentiriez 
ils sentiraient 
il sierait 

je servirais 
tu servirais 
il servirait 
n. servirions 
v. serviriez 
ils serviraient 
je sortirais 

je souffrirais 

je soumettrais 

je sourirais 

je souscrirais 

je soustrairais 

je soutiendrais 

je me souvien- 
[drais 
je subvien- 

[drais 
je suffirais 
tu suffirais 
il suffirait 
n. suffirions 
v. suffiriez 
ils suffiraient 
je suivrais 
tu suivrais 
il suivrait 
n. suivrions 
v. suivriez 
ils suivraient 
je surferais 



Je surprendrai 



seme 

sens 
q. sente 
sentons 
sente z 
q. sentent 



sers 

q. serve 
servons 
servez 
q. servent 

sors 

souiFre 

soumets 

souris 

souscris 

soustrais 

soutiens 

souviens-toi 

subviens 

suffis 
q. suffise 
suffisons 
suffisez 
q. suffisent 

suis 

q. suive 
suivons 
suivez 
q. suivent 



je surpren- 
[drais 



Subjunctive. Imperfect. 



surfais 
surprends 



je seme 

je sente 
tu sentes 
il sente 
n. sentions 
v. sentiez 
ils sentent 
q. siee 

je serve 

tu serves 
il serve 
n. servions 
v. serviez 
ils servent 
je sorte 

je souffre 

je soumette 

je sourie 

je souscrive 

je soustraie 

je soutienne 

je me souvien- 

[ne 
je subvienne 

je suffise 
tu suffises 
il suffise 
n. suffisions 
v. suffisiez 
ils suffisent 
je suive 
tu suive s 
il suive 
n. suivions 
v. suiviez 
ils suivent 
je surfasse 

je surprenne 



je semass© 

je sentisse 
tu sentisses 
il sentit 
n. sentissions 
v. sentissiez 
ils sentissent 



je servisse 
tu servisses 
il servit 
n. servissiona 
v. servissiez 
ils servissent 
je sortisse 

je souffrisse 

je soumisse 

je sourisse 

je souscrivisse 



je soutinsse 

je me sou- 

[vinsse 
je subvinsse 

je suffisse 
tu suffisses 
il sufifit 
n. suffissions 
v. suffissiez 
ils suffissent 
je suivisse 
tu suivisses 
il suivit 
n. suivissions 
v. suivissiez 
ils suivissent 
je surfisse 

je surprise 



i 



888 IRREGULAR, 


DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 


Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


SUQSEOIR, 3. 


sursoyant 


je sursois 


je sursoyais 


je sursis 


to supersede 


sursis,/. e. 


tu sursois 


tu sursoyais 


tu sursis 


aux. avoir 




il sursoit 


il sursoyait 


il sursit 


irregular. 




n. sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursimes 






v. sursoyez 


v. sursoyiez 


v. sursites 






ils sursoient 


ils sursoyaient 


ils sursirent 


SURVENIR, 2. 


survenant 


je surviens 


je survenais 


je survins 


to happen, etc. 


survenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Survivre, 4. 


survivarit 


je survis 


je survivals 


je survecus 


to survive 


survecu 


see vivre 






Taire, (se) 4. 


se taisant 


je me tais 


je me taisais 


je me tus 


to be silent 


tu, /. e. 


see pl aire 






Teindre, 4. to 


teignant 


je teins 


je teignais 


je teignis 


dye 


teint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Tenir, 2. to 


tenant 


je tiens 


je tenais 


je tins 


hold 


tenu, /. e. 


tu tiens 


tu tenais 


tu tins 


aux. avoir 




il tient 


il tenait 


il tint 


irregular. 




n. tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinmes 






v. tenez 


v. teniez 


v. tintes 






ils tiennent 


ils tenaient 


ils tinrent 


Tonner. 1. to 


tonnant 


il tonne 


il tonnait 


il tonna 


thunder, unip. 


tonne 








Traduire, 4. 


traduisant 


je traduis 


je traduisais 


je traduisis 


to translate 


traduit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Traire, 4. to 


trayant 


je trais 


je trayais 




milk 


trait 


tu trais 


tu trayais 




aux. avoir 




il trait 


il trayait 




defective 




n. trayons 
v. trayez 
ils traient 


n. trayions 
v. trayiez 
ils trayaient 




Transcrire,4. 


transcrivant 


je transcris 


je transcrivais 


je transcrivis 


to transcribe 


transcrit 


see icRiRE 






Transmettre. 


transmettant 


je transmets 


je transmettais 


je transmis 


4. to transmit 


transmis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Tressaillir, 


tressaillant 


je tressaille 


je tressaillais 


je tressaillis 


2. to start 


tressailli 


see ASSAILLIR 






Vaincre, 4. to 


vainquant 


je vaincs 


je vainquais 


je vainquis 


vanquish 


vaincu,/. e. 


tu vaincs 


tu vainquais 


tu vainquis 


aux. avoir 




il vainc 


il vainquait 


il vainquit 


irregular. 




n. vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n. vainquimes 






v. vainquez 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquites 






ils vainquent 


ils vainquaient 


ils vainquiren 


Valoir, 3. to 


valant 


je vaux 


je valais 


je valus 


be worth 


valu 


tu vaux 


tu valais 


tu valus 


aux. avoir 




il vaut 


il valait 


il valut 


irregular. 




n. valons 


n. valions 


n. valumes 






v. valez 


v. valiez 


v. valutes 






ils valent 


ils valaient 


ils valurent 


Venie, 2. U venant 


je viens 


je venais 


je vins 


come J 


venu,/. o. 


see tenir 







AND tTNIPBRSONAL VERBS. §62 



88 



Future. 



je surseoirai 
fcu surseoiras 
il surseoira 
n. surseoirons 
v. surseoirez 
ils surseoiront 
je surviendrai 

je surviviai 

je me tairai 

je teindrai 

je tiendrai 
tu tiendras 
il tiendra 
n. tiendrons 
v. tiendrez 
ils tiendront 
il tonnera 

je traduirai 

je trairai 
tu trairas 
il traira 
n. trairons 
v. trairez 
ils trairont 
je transcrirai 

je transmet- 
[trai 
je tressaillirai 

je vaincrai 
tu vamcras 
il vaincra 
n. vaincrons 
v. vaincrez 
ils vaincront 
je vaudrai 
tu vaudras 
il vaudra 
n. vaudrons 
v. vaudrez 
Us vaudront 
je viendrai 



Conditional. 



je surseoirais 
tu surseoirais 
il surseoirait 
n. surseoirions 
v. surseoiriez 
i.surseoiraient 
jesurviendrais 

je survivrais 

je me tairais 

je teindrais 

je tieudrais 
tu tieudrais 
il tiendrait 
n. tiendrions 
v. tiendriez 
ils tiendraient 
il tonnerait 

je traduirais 

je trairais 
tu trairais 
il trairait 
n. trairions 
v. trairiez 
ils trairaieut 
je transcrirais 

je transmet- 
[trais 
je tressaillirais 

je vaincrais 
tu vaincrais 
il vaincra it 
n. vaincrions 
v. vaincriez 
ils vaincraient 
je vaudrais 
tu vaudrais 
il vaudrait 
n. vaudrions 
v. vaudriez 
ils vaudraient 
je viendrais 



sursois 
q. sursoie 
sursoyons 
sursoyez 
q. sursoient 

surviens 



Imperative. Subjunctive. 



sums 

tais-toi 

teins 

tiens 

q. tienne 

tenons 

tenez 

q. tiennent 

q. tonne 

traduis 

trais 
q. traie 
trayons 
trayez 
q. traient 

transcris 

transmets 

tressaille 

vaincs 

q. vainque 

vainquons 

vainquez 

q. vainquent 

vaux 

q. vaille 

valons 

valez 

q. vaillent 

viena 



je sursoie 
tu sur soles 
il sursoie 
n. sursoyions 
v. sursoyiez 
ils sursoient 
je survienne 

je survive 

je me taise 

je teigne 

je tienne 
tu tiennes 
il tienne 
n. tenions 
v. teniez 
ils tiennent 
q. tonne 

je traduise 

je traie 
tu traies 
il traie 
n. trayions 
v. trayiez 
ils traient 
je transcrive 

je transmette 

je tressaille 

je vainque 
tu vainques 
il vainque 
n. vainquions 
v. vainquiez 
ils vainquent 
je vaille 
tu vailles 
il vaille 
n. valions 
v. valiez 
ils vaillent 
je vienne 



Imperfect. 



je sursisse 
tu sursisses 
il sursit 
n. sursissions 
v. sursissiez 
ils sursisse nt 
je survinsse 

je survecusse 

je me tusse 

je teignisse 

je tinsse 
tu tinsses 
il tint 
n. ^'nssions 
v. tinssiez 
ils tinssent 
q. tonn&t 

je traduisisse 



je transcri- 

[visse 
je transmisse 

je tressaillisso 

je vainquisse 
tu vainqnisses 
il vainquit 
vainquissions 
v. vainquissiez 
i. vainquissent 
je valusse 
tu valusses 
il valut 
n. valussions 
v. valussiez 
ils valussent 
je vinsse 



390 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definiti 


V&TIR, 2. to 


vetant 


je vets 


je vetais 


je vetis 


clothe 


vetu,/. e. 


tu vets 


tu vetais 


tu vetis 


aux. avoir 




il vet 


il vctait 


il vetit 


irregular. 




n. vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetimes 






v. vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetites 






ils vetent 


ils vetaient 


ils vetirent 


V£tir, (se) 2. 


se vetant 


je me vets 


je mev6tais 


je me vetis 


to clothe one's 


vetu,/. e. 


&c. 


&c. 


&c. 


self. ref. 










Vivre, 4. to 


vivant 


je vis 


je vivais 


je vecus 


live 


vecu 


tu vis 


tu vivais 


tu vecus 


aux. avoir 




il vit 


il vivait 


il vecut 


irregular. 




n. vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecumes 






v. vivez 


v. viviez 


v. vecutes 






ils vivent 


ils vivaient 


ils vecurent 


Voir, 3. to 


voyant 


je vois 


je voyais 


je vis 


see 


vu, / e. 


tu vois 


tu voyais 


tu vis 


aux. avoir 




il voit 


il voyait 


ilvit 


irregu ar. 




n. voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vimes 






v. voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vites 






ils voient 


ils voyaient 


ils virent 


Vouloir, 3. to 


voulant 


jeveux 


je voulais 


je voulus 


be willing 


voulu 


tuveux 


tu voulais 


tu voulus 


aux. avoir 




il veut 


il voulait 


il voulut 


irregular. 




n. voulons 


n. voulions 


n. voulumes 






v. voulez 


v. vouliez 


v. voulutes 






ils veulent 


ils voulaieut 


ils voulurent 



ASD CKIPER80NAL VERBS. §62 



891 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. | 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je retirai 


je vetirais 




je vete 


je vetisse 


tu vetiras 


tu vetirais 


vets 


tu vetes 


tu vetisses 


il vetira 


il vetirait 


q. vete 


il vete 


il vetit 


n. vetirons 


n. vetirions 


vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetissions 


v. vetirez 


v. vetiriez 


vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetissiez 


ils vetiront 


ils vetiraient 


q. vetent 


ils vetent 


ils vetissent 


je me vetirai 


je me vetirais 




je me vete 


je me vetisse 


&c. 


&c. 


vets-toi 


&c. 


&c. 


je vivrai 


je vivrais 




je vive 


je vecusse 


tu vivras 


tu vivrais 


vis 


tu vives 


tu vecusses 


il vivra 


il vivrait 


q. vive 


il vive 


il vecut 


n. vivrons 


n. vivrions 


vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecussions 


v. vivrez 


v. vivriez 


vivez 


v. viviez 


v. vecussiez 


ils vivront 


ils vivraient 


q. vivent 


ils vivent 


ils vecussent 


je verrai 


je verrais 




je voie 


je visse 


tu verras 


tu verrais 


vois 


tu voies 


tu visses 


il verra 


il verrait 


q. voie 


il voie 


il vit 


n. verrons 


n. verrions 


voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vissions 


v. verrez 


v. verriez 


voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vissiez 


ils verront 


ils verraient 


q. voient 


ils voient 


ils vissent 


je voudrai* 


je voudrais 




je veuille 


je voulusse 


tu von dras 


tu voudrais 




tu veuilles 


tu voulusses 


ii voudra 


il voudrait 




il veuille 


il voulut 


n. voudrons 


n. voudrions 




n. voulions 


n. voulussions 


v. voudrez 


v. voudriez 


veuillez 


v. vouliez 


v. voulussiez 


ils Youdront 


ils voudraient 




|ilfl veuillent 


ils voulussent 



392 



THE PARTICIPLE. §68,64,65,66. 



§ 63. — The Participle. 

(1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na- 
ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature 
of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- 
ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro ■ 
nouns. 

(2.) There are two sorts of participles ; the present and the past 

§ 64.— -The Participle Present. 

(1.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action 
answers to the English participle in ing. 

(2.) This participle is invariable ; always terminating in ant ; aa< 

chantant, singing ; finissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving ; vendant, 

selling. 

une dame marchant, 
des hommes marchant, 

J'ai vu les vents grondant sur ces 



a lady walking ; 
men walking. 



I have seen the winds roaring over 
those superb harvests, root up tie 
grain, and contend for the sheaves. 



moissons superbes, 
Deraciner les bles, se disputer les 
gerbes. Delille. 

§ 65. — Verbal Adjectives ending in ant. 

(1.) The verbal adjective in ant expresses merely the condition, 
the manner of being, the quality of the noun. It never denotes ac- 
tion. 

(2.) This adjective varies in gender and number. We give below 
examples of the same words, used as participles and as adjectives:— 



Adjectives. 

Une femme obligeante est aimee 
de tout le monde. 

An obliging woman is loved by 
tvery person. 

Les tribus err antes de l'Afrique. 

The wandering tribes of Africa. 

II n'y a que les natures ahnantes 
qui soicnt propres a l'etude de la 
nature. Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Affectionate natures (dispositions) 
only, are fit for the study of nature. 



Participles. 

Une femme obllgeant tout le 
monde est generalement aimee. 

A woman obliging every body is 
generally loved. 

Les tribus errant dans l'Afrique. 

TJie tribes wandering in Africa. 

Les natures aimant la solitude, 
aiment generalement l'etude 

Natures (dispositions) loving soli- 
tude, are in general fond of study. 



§ 66. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) The participle past denotes the completion of the action. 
(2.) It is susceptible of variations for gender and number. 
(3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agrees in gen- 
der and number with the noun which it qualifies, whether the noun 



THE ADVERB. — § 67, 68. 393 

precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- 
ment of the adjective with the noun, may be applied to this par- 
ticiple. 

des enfants cheris, beloved children ; 

des femmes estimees, esteemed women ; 

Comme une lampe d'or dans l'azur 

suspendue, 
La lime se balance aux bords de 

Fhorizon : 



Like a golden lamp suspended in 
the azure vault, the moon balances 
herself in the confines of the horizon % 
her weakened rays sleep on the turf. 



Bes rayons affaiblis dorment sur le 
gazon. Lamartine. 

,(4.) For further rules on the participle past, see Syntax, $ 134, and 
following. 

§ 67. — The Adverb. 

(1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, 
or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. 
(2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : — 

1. Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; &c. 

m % Of order; premierement, first; d'abord, at first; ensuite, af- 

terwards; &c. 

3. Of place ; ici, here ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- 

where ; &c. 

4. Of time ; hier, yesterday ; aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to- 

morrow ; &c. 

5. Of quantity ; peu, little ; trop, too much ; tant, so much ; &c. 

6. Of comparison ; plus, more ; moins, less ; tres, very. 

7. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes ; certes, certainly ; non, no ; nullement, 
gation and doubt ; by no means ; peut-etre, perhaps ; ne, pas, point, 

not ; &c. 

(3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are 

then invariable : — 

chanter juste, to sing in tune ; 

couter cher, to cost dear ; 

parler haut, to speak loud. 

(4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad 
verb, are called an adverbial phrase : — 

tout-a-coup, suddenly ; 

peu-a-peu, by degrees ; 

tout-a-1'heure, immediately; 

de-temps en-temps, now and then, &c. 

§ 68. — Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives. 

(1.) Adverbo ending in ment, may be formed from adjectives in the 
following manner : — 

(2.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, ment 
fe added to form the adverb : — 

I7 # 



OfkA 



THE ADVER B. — § 69, 70. 



Adjective. Adverb. 

utile j useful; utilement, usefully; 

poli, polite; poliment, politely; 

aise, easy; aisenient, easily. 

(3.) Exceptions. 

bean, beautiful; bellement, beautifully; 

foil, foolish; folleraent, foolisldy ; 

mou, soft; mollement, softly; 

nouveau, new ; nouvellemcnt, nevjly ; 

traitre, treacherous; traitreusement, treaclierously. 

4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a consonant, 
the syllable merit is added to its feminine termination: as, 
masc. fern. 

bon, bonne, good ; bonnement, in a good manner ; 

doux, douce, soft; doucement, softly; 

beureux, heureuse, happy; heureusement, happily. 

(5.) Adjectives ending in nt, change that termination into mment :— . 
prudent, prudent; prudemment, prudently; 

elegant, elegant; elegamment, elegantly. 

Exceptions. 
lent, slow; lentenient, slowly; « 

present, present; presentement, presently. 

(6.) The following adverbs require an acute accent over the e pre- 
ceding ment, which e is mute in the adjective : — 

aveuglement, 

commodement, 

communement, 



conformement, 
confusement, 
difFusement, 
enormement, 



blindly ; 
commodiously ; 
commonly ; 
conformably ; 
confusedly ; 
diffusely ; 
enormously ; 



expressement, expressly; 

importunement, importunately; 
incommodement, incommodiously ; 

obscurement, obscurely ; 

opiniatrement, obstinately ; 

preciseDient, precisely ; 

profondement, profoundly. 



69. — Degrees 



of Signification in Adverbs ending in 

MENT. 

(1.) Adverbs ending in menl, are, like all the adjectives from which 
they are formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification ; the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

(2.) The first expresses the manner simply. 

(3.) The second expresses it in a degree of equality, superiority, 
or inferiority, by adding to the adverb the words, si, so; aussi, as 9 
plus, more; moins, less. 

(4.) The third, by the addition of the words bien, tres, fort, very, 
carries that signification to the highest degree. 

§ TO. — Adverbs making of themselves a Comparison. 

thus ; 
> moret 



comme 
de meme, 
pareillement, 



A , I ainsi. 

trie same man- Dmg 



ner; 



| davantage, 



PREPOSITION S. § 72. 



305 



De plus, 


besides; 


Moins, 


less ; 


Mieux, 


better ; 


Pis, 


worse ; 


Tres, 


very ; 


Ni plus ni moins, 


neither more %or 




less; 


Presque, 
Quasi, 


> almost ; 



A-peu-pr&s, 
Pour le plus, 
Tout au plus, 
A qui mieux 

mieux, 
A l'envi, 
De mieux en 

mieux, 



nearly ; 
for the most ; 
at most ; 

vying with one 
another ; 

better and better. 



§ 71. — The Preposition. 

(1.) The preposition is an invariable word used to express the re- 
lations of things. l 

(2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The 
preposition and the word which it governs, form what is called an 
indirect regimen. 

§ 72. — Table of the Principal Prepositions. 



A cause de, 


to, at, in; 
on account of; 


Excepts, 
Hormis, 


I except, but; 


Apres, 


after ; 


Hors, 


save ; 


Attendu, vu, 
Aupres de, 


on account of; 
near ; 


Jusqu'a, 
Jusques a, 


> until, as far as; 


Autour de, 


about, around; 


Loin de, 


far from; 


Avant, 


before {earlier) ; 


Le long de, 


along; 


Avec, 


with; 


Malgre, 


in spite of; 


Chez, 


at the house of; 


Moyennant, 


by means of; 


Contre, 


against ; 


Nonobstant 


notwithstanding ; 


Dans, 


in, within ; 


Outre, 


besides ; 


D'apres, 


from, after ; 


Par, 


by, through; 


D'avec, 


from; 


Pardevant, 


before, (lawierm)t 


De, 


of from, with ; 


Parmi, 


among, amongst; 


Dela.au dela de 


) beyond, on that 
j side of; 


Pendant, 


during ; 


Dedela.pardela 


Pour, 


for; 


Depuis, 


since, for ; 


Pres de, 


near, close by; 


Derriere, 


behind ; 


Proche, proche 


de,7iear by; 


Des, 


from ; 


Quant a, 


as for, with respect i 


Devant, 


before, opposite; 


Sans, 


without ; 


Durant, 


during ; 


Sauf, 


saving, except; 


En, 


in, at, to; 


Selon, 


according to; 


En de9a de, 


1 this side ; 


Sous, 


under; 


De defa, par 


C on this side : 


Suivant, 


according to; 


de9a, 


) ' 


Sur, 


upon, on ; 


Entre, 


between ; 


Touchant, 


touching ; 


Envers, 

A l'egard de, 


> towards ; 


Concernant, 
Vers, 


concerning ; 
towards, to; 


Environ, 


about ; 


Vis-a-vis de, 


opposite. 



(2.) The prepositions are divided into several classes. 
(3.) Among those denoting place are — 



Autour, around; 



fCe n'est qn'autour de lui que vole la victolre. 
<J Racine, 

{Around him alon* hovers victory. 



396 



Proposition s. — § 1*2. 



Chez, with; at the 
house of; among; 
{apud of the Latin.) 

Pans, in ; 

Parmi, among ; 
Vers, towards; 



Sous, under ; 



Sur, upon i 



i Enfin, chez les Chretiens les moBurs sont innoceih 

( teS. CORNEILLE. 

{ Among Christians, finally., the manners are innocenu 
\ Chez mon pere, at my father's house. 

!Rome n'est plus dans Rome. Corneille. 

Rome is no longer in Rome. 
(Parmi les rochers, vers le milieu de ces montagnes 
J escarpees. F^nelon. 

j Among the rocks, towards the middle of those steep 
^ mountains. 

[ L'autel couvert de feux, tombe et fuit, sous la 
terre. Voltaire. 

The altar covered with fire, falls and disappears un- 
der the earth. 
Les riches ne sont sur la terre que pour faire du 

bien. F£n£lon. 

The rich are placed on the earth merely to do good. 



(4.) Some, denoting time, are — 

Durant, ) during • $ Durant la nuit, elle n'a point dormi. C 
Pendant, ) I During the night she has had no sleep. 



ORNEILLE. 



Des, from ; 
" {place;) 

11 (time ;) 



(5.) Some mark place and time, as :— 

SDes Orleans ; Des sa source. L'Acadrmie. 

from Orleans ; from its source. 
f L'homme, des sa naissance, a le sentiment du plaisir 

et de la douleur. Massillon. 

I Man from his birth hois the sensation of pleasure and 
^ of pain. 

Depuis,>m; since ;^ Erance s ' 6tend de ^ lis le B ^ Ja g5jJ2J" 



{place ;) 



{time ;) 



\^France extends from the Rhine to the Ocean. 
f En Orient, en Occident, depuis deux mille ans on 
J ne parle que d'Alexandre. Massillon. 

| In the East, in the West, since two thousand years, 
[^ they speak continually of Alexander. 

Dans, en, sous, vers, &cs, may also be placed under this head. 
(6.) Some prepositions mark order; as: — 

Avant, before; f La conscience nous avertit, en ami, avant de noua 

{at an earlier time;) <j punir. Stanislas. 

I Conscience warns us, as a friend, before punishing ut. 
[ Je crains Dieu, et apres Dieu. je crains principale- 

ment celui qui ne le craint pas. Sadi. 

| I fear God, and, after God, I fear principally the man 
y who does not fear him. 

f L'homrno est place libre entrc le vice et la vertu. 
< Marmontbl. 

\^Ma?i is placed free between vice and virtue. 
fll so met tonjours derriere celui qui parle. 

L\ Bruy£re. 
He places himself always behind the speaker. 
Fais marcher devant toi l'ange extermiuatcur. 

Voltaiie. 
Send before thee the exterminating angeU 



Apres, after; 



Entre, between ; 



Derriere, behind; 

Devant, before ; 
{in front of;) 



F REPOSITIONS. § 12. £97 

(1 ) The prepositions marking union, are, 

f Je veuxvivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. 
Avec, with; ^ Cornkille, 

^Iwill live with her, die vnth her. 
' Outre l'estime de soi-meme, l'honnete homme 
possede encore l'estime et la eonfiance univei- 
Outre, besides; -{ selles. Marmontel. 

| Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal 
\^ esteem and confidence. 

(8.) Those of separation, exception, are : — 

f II travaille toute la semaine, excepte le dimanche. 
Excepte, except; <j L'Acad£mie. 

\^He works tlie whole week, except Sunday. 

Hon™ errmt • $ Hormis toi, tout le monde est content, 

normis, except , ^ M ^ pleased ^ except yo ^ 

fNul n'aura de l'esprifc, hors nous et nos amis. 
Hors, except; + Moliere. 

I No one shall have wit but ourselves and our friends. 
[Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonheur 

Sans without' < sansYev ^- Diderot. 

' ' j No virtue without religion, no happiness without 

[ virtue. 
f On peut tout sacrifier a l'amitie, sauf l'honnetetS 

Sauf save • excevt • \ et la J ustice - Martmontel. 

' ' I We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and 

\^ justice. 

(9.) The prepositions of opposition are : — 

f Le travail est une meilleure ressource contre l'ennui 
p , ^ . , J que le plaisir. Trublet. 

^ ) S in * i Labor is a better resource against ennui than 

^ pleasure. 

f Nous suivrons malgre nousle vainqueur de Lesbos. 
M , . . v r \ Racine. 

Maigre, m spite oj; < m shaU f oUow against our will the conqueror of 

I Lesbos. 

[La verite nonobstanU le prejuge, l'erreur et le 
Nonobstant, notwith-J mensonge, se fait jour a la fin. Marmontel. 
standing ; ] Truth, prejudice, error and falsehood notwithstand* 

(_ ing, comes at last to light. 

(10.) The prepositions of conformity are : — 

fLa terre, cette bonne mere, multiplie ses dona 
selon le nombre de ses enfants. F£n£lon. 

c , . , • | The earth, that good mother, multiplies her gifts ac 

Beion, 9 arxoraing^ cording to the numoer ffo r children. 
buivant, ) o ; j ^ eg ta j ents p r0( i u i S ent suivant la culture. 

Marmontel. 
^ Talents produce according to their cultivation. 

(11.) Several words placed together and performing the part of a 
preposition, are called a prepositional phrase : — 

A l'egard de, with regard to ; 

En faveur de, in favor of; 

A la r6serve de, reserving; <f^. 



CONJUNCTIONS. — § 73. 



§ 73.— The Conjunction. 

(1.) ^onjunctDns are invariable words which serve to connect 
words and sentences. 

(2.) French grammarians divide the conjunctions into nin» 

classes : — 

1 Copulative : "] f et, and ; ni, nor ; que, that ; de sorte que, so 
that; &c. 

2 Adversative, mais, but; quoique, though; cependant, 
yet ; &c. 

ou, or ; ou bien, else ; ni, neither ; &e. 
savoir, namely ; comme, as ; c'est-a-dire, 

that is to say ; &c. 
quand, lorsque, when ; pendant que, while , 
si, if; sans quoi, without which ; suppose que, 

supposing that ; &c. 
car, for ; puisque, since ; pourquoi, why , 

wherefore; &c. 
or, done, therefore ; ainsi, thus ; d'ailleurs, 

besides; &c. 
que, that. 

(3.) We here present a list of the conjunctions and conjunctive 
phrases most commonly used in French. We will divide them into 
two classes. 

1. Conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which may be placod id 
the first or in the second part of a period : — 



3 Disjunctive, 

4 Explanatory, 

5 Circumstantial, 

6 Conditional, 

7 Causal, 

8 Transitive, 

9 Determinative, 



A cause que, 
A moins que, 
Aussitot que, 
Au cas que, 
Apres que, 
Ainsi que, 
Attendu que, 
Afin que, 
Au reste, 
Avant que, 

Cependant que, 
De crainte que ; 
Be meme que, 
De peur que, 
Depuis que, 
Desorte que, 
Durant que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 



because ; 

unless ; 

as soon as ; 

in case that, if; 

after that ; 

as, as well as ; 

tvhereas ; 

in order that ; 

besides ; 

before that, sooner 

than ; 
although ; 
for fear that, lest ; 
in ike same way as; 
for fear that, icst ; 
since that; 
so that ; 
while ; 

in case that ; 
although i 



Jusqu'a ce que, 

Lorsque, 

Ou bien, 

Outre que, 

Pendant que, 

Parce que, 

Pourvu que ; 

Puisque, 

Quand, 

Quoique, 

Si, 

Sans que, 

Sitot que, 

Soit que, 

Si ce n'est que, 

Suppose que, 

Tant que, 

Tandis que, 

Vu que, 



until that; 
if, wlten; 
or, else ; 
besides that ; 
while that ; 
because ; 
provided ; 
since ; 
if, when; 
although, though; 

if; 

unless ; 

provided that; 
be it that ; 
unless ; 

supposing that; 
provided that; 
while that ; 
provided that. 



INTERJECTIONS. § 74. 



399 



2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which usually come 
between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- 
course momentarily interrupted, are : — 



Aussi bien que, as well as ; 

Apres tout, nevertheless; 

A condition que, on condition that ; 



Au surplus, 

C'est pourquoi, 

Cependant, 

C'est-a-dire, 

C'est-a-savoir, 

Car, 

Done, 



besides ; 
therefore ; 
however ; 
that is to say ; 
that is ; 
for, because; 
tlierefore ; 



En effet, 

Et puis, 

Mais. 

Partant, 

Par consequent, 

Pourtant, 

Sans quoi, 

Savoir, 

Sinon, 

Toutefois, 



in fact; 
and, then ; 
but; 

therefore; 
consequently; 
however;] 
unless that; 
to wit ; 
unless ; 
nevertheless. 



See Lesson 100 — Examples on the different uses of conjunctions. 

§ 74. — Interjections. 
(1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion 
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place 
of entire propositions, 

(2.) Some imply astonishment : — 

( Beaux arts, eh ! dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit 
Ah ! eh ! &c. \ * e plaire '- Delille. 

please. 
(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, &c. : — 

Ouais ! ce maitre d'armes vous tient bien au coeur. 

Moliere. 
Ah ! indeed ! this fencing master displeases you much, 

(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : — 

Foin ! away with, &c. \ * oin du .J™P et d * sa J a , ce ! , 
y ' ( Away with the wolf and his race ! 

Tout beau ! softly ! * ^out beau, monsieur ; tout beau ! 



( Fine arts, ah ! in what place have you not a right to 



Ouais, ah I indeed! 
Oui da, truly, &c. 



La Fontaine. 
MoliHre. 



( Softly, sir ; softly ! 
(5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our* 
selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : — 



Ah! 

Ahi! 

Bah! 

Chut! 

Eh! 

Fi! 

Gare! 

Ha! 

Helas 

Heu! 

Hola! 

Ho! 

Hem! 

Hein! 

Hum! 



<5rc. 



ah! 


Oh! 


eigh ! 


Ouais ! 


bah! 


Ouf! 


silence! hist! 


Paf! 


eh! 


St! 


fy! 


Sus! 


take care ! 


Zest! 


ha! 


Fi done ! 


alas! 


Ho 9a! 


alas ! 


He bien ! 


holla ! 


Eh bien ! 


ho! 


Oui da ! 


hem! 


Or 9a ! 


eh! 


Tout beau ! 


hum! 


Silence ! Paix ! 



oh! 

ah, indeed ! so, sol 

eigh! 

crack ! 

hist ! 

quickly ! 

quickly ! 

fv then ! 

holla! 

now then! 

well then t 

truly! 

quickly ! 

softly ! 

silence? 



&a 



400 48TKTAX.~-§ 75, §76. 

§ 75,— SYNTAX 

(1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement 
of words in sentences. 

(2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the 
same modification of gender, number, and person. 

(3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the 
former the latter is made to assume a particular form or place. 

(4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them id 
the order sanctioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best 
reputable custom. 

(5.) For the cases adopted by the modern French grammarians, 
the student is referred to § 2, and $ 42, (2.) (3.) (4.) (5.) 

§ 76. — The Noun. — Place of Nouns. 

(1.) In French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject 
or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- 
cedes the verb : — 

The most humble man loves liberty. 



Vhomme le plus obscur aime la 
liberte. Chateaubriand. 

Vesperance tient lieu des biens 
qu'elle promet. La Chauss£e. 

(2.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject is sometimes 
placed after the verb : — 



Hope takes the place of the benefits 
which it promises. 



II n'est point de noblesse, ou 
manque la vertu. Cr^billon. 

La fortune est a craindre ou 
manque la sagesse. Boursault. 



Nothing noble can exist, where vir- 
tue is wanting. 

Where wisdom is wanting, for- 
tune is to be feared. 



(3.) In interjected sentences, that is, in sentences which we, 
while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, 
to indicate that person as the speaker; the subject, in French, must 
always follow the verb : — 



Heureux, disait Mentor, le peuple 
qui est conduit par un sage roi! 
F£n£lon. 



Happy, said Mentor, the peopU 
who are governed by a wist king. 



(4.) In interrogative sentences, the noun generally precedes the 
verb which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond- 
ing in gender, number and person with the noun : — 

La mort est-clle un mal 7 La vie 



e&t-clle un bien 1 Gn£ billon. 



Is death an evil ? Is life a bene- 
fit ? Literally, Death, is it an evil 7 
&c. 

(5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following 
words, oil, where ; que, what ; combien, how micch ; quand, when , 



SYNTAX OF NOUNS. — §76. 



401 



the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in ac- 
cordance with the last rule : — 



Where is your father ? 

Of what use is a long 
less it be glorious ? 



, un- 



Ou est vttre pere ? or 1 

Oil votre pere est-il ] < I 

Mais que sert un long regne, a 
moins qu'il ne soit beau 1 

BOURSAULT. 

(6.) The noun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the 

sentenc 3 in French as in English : — 

La force fonde, etend et main- I Poiver founds, extends and main- 
tient un empire. Sai/rin. | tains an empire. 

(7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used 
as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the 
words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct 
regimen should precede the indirect : — * 

Le malheur ajoute un nouveau 
lustre a la gloire des grands hom- 
ines. F£n£lon. 

Avez-vous donne les livres a mon 
frere % Girault Duvivier. 

(8.) When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render 
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect is 
placed first : — 

Avez-vous donne a mon frere les 
livres que vous lui aviez promis 7 

Les hypocrites parent des dehors 
de la vertu les vices les plus honteux. 
Noel. 



Misfortunes add anew lustre to the 
glory of great men. 

Have you given the books to my 
brother ? 



Have you given my brother the 
books, which you had promised him ? 

Hypocrites adorn with the appear- 
ance of virtue, tlie most shameful 
vices. 



(9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the 
meaning would otherwise be doubtful : — 



Tachez de ramener par la dou- 
ceur ces esprits egares. 

Bescherelle. 



Try to bring backs by mildness, 
these erring spirits. 



Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal. 

(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes 
the name of the object possessed ; and the two are connected by 
means cf 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the 
order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of 
the possessor, and the connecting link is a prepoiition: — 

Les livres de mon ami. 



Vous avez vu la montre de ma 
soeur. 



My friend, s books. 

You have seen my sister's watch. 



* This must also be the case when the regime direct is shorter than 
the r6gime indirect. 



402 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. §77. 



(11.) Tke name of an object always precedes the name of th« 
substance of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi- 
tion de comes between them : — 



Une table de marbre. 
La France a beaucoup de 
rieres de marbre. 
Un bouteille de vin. 



A marble table. 

France has many marble quarries. 



A bottle of wine. 

(12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that 
describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which he 
disposes : — 

Un maitre de danse. 
Un maitre de langues. 
Un marchand de drap. 



A dancing master. 

A teacher of languages. 

A draper, or dealer in cloth. 



(13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the 
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose 
to which it is adapted. The connecting preposition is generally d :— 



A wind-mill. 

A grist-mill. 

Water-mills. 

A steam carriage. 

A steamboat. 

A two horse carriage. 

(14.) The name of an object precedes the noun representing its 
particular produce, use, or appendages, &c. A generally connects 
these nouns : — 



Un moulin-a-vent. 

Un moulin-a-farine, 

Des moulins-a-eau. 

Une voiture-a-vapeur. 

Un bateau-a-vapeur. 

Une voiture a deux chevaux. 



Le gout du fruit de Varbre a pain 
ressemble celui de l'artichaut. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Le nom de vertu, dans la bouche 
de certaines personnes, fait tressail- 
lir comme le grelot du serpent a 
sonnettes. Mme. Necker. 

Les betes a comes ne sont pas si 
nombreuses que les betes a laine. 

La salle-a-manger. 
Du bois-a-bruler. 
Un verre-a-eau. 

See % 81, (2.) 



The taste of the fruit of the bread- 
tree resembles that of the artichoke. 

The name of virtue in the mouth 
of certain persons makes one shud- 
der, like the noise of the rattlesnake. 

Horned animals {neat cattle) are 
not so numerous as sheep (wool ani- 
mals). 

The dining room. 

Fire wood. 

A water glass, i. e. glass for water. 



§ 77. — The Article. — Use of the Article. 

(1.) The article* must be used in French before every noun em- 
ployed in a general sense, or denoting a whole species of objects ; 
although in similar cases, the article is not used in English. Ex. :— 

* The student will recollect that the French have only one article, U. 
The word un being by modern French grammarians, very properly class- 
ed with the numeral adjectives. 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. § 77. 



403 



Les bieiifaits peuvent tout sur 
tine aine bien nee. Voltaire. 

L'honneur, aux grands coeurs, est 
plus cher que la vie. Corneil^e. 

La honte suit toujours un lache 
desespoir. Crebillon. 

(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun 
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : — 



Benefits are all powerful with a 
well disposed mind. 

Honor is with magnanimous hearti 
more precious than life. 

Shame always follows a cowardly 
despair. 



Le bonheur des mechants conime 
un torrent s'ecoule. Racine. 

.L'arbrisseau le plus sain a be- 
soin de culture. 

Fabre d'Eglantine. 

Le moment du peril est celui du 
courage. La Harpe. 



TJie happiness of the wicked runs 
avjay like a torrent. 

The healthiest shrub needs cultiva- 
tion. 

The time of peril is the time for 
courage. 



(3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : — 



La France est bornee au midi 
par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee ; 
a Z'est par la Suisse et la Savoie ; 
au nord par la Belgique et a Z'ouest 
par V Ocean. Ses principales rivieres 
sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la, Seine, la 
Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. 



France is bounded on the south by 
the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 
nean; on the east by Switzerland 
and Savoy ; on the north by Bel- 
gium, and on the ivest by the Ocean. 
Its principal rivers are the Meuse, 
the Rhine, tlie Seine, the Loire, the 
Garonne and the Rhone. 

(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or 
some other city within their boundaries, take no article : — 



Naples est un pays delicieux. 
Venise etait un etat puissant. 
New York est un etat sain. 



Naples is a delightful country 
Venice vjas a powerful state. 
New York is a healthy state. 



(5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : — 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le president Bonaparte. 



General Cavaignac ; 
President Bonaparte. 



(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- 
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned 
below : — 

La monarchic, monarchy ; 
Le parlement, parliament; 
Le gouvernement, government ; 
Le christianisme, Christianity ; 
L'episcopat, episcopacy ; 

A l'eglise, at church ; 

(7.) Bsfore the names of the seasons, and the following expres- 
sions : — 



A l'ecole, 


at school; 


Au college, 


at college ; 


Au marche, 


at, to market i 


Au lit, 


in bed. 


&c. 


&c. 



L'annee prochaine, next year ; 
L'annee deraiere, last spring ; 

Le printemps prochain, next spring ; 



L'automne dernier, 
La semaine derniere, 
&c. 



last fall ; 
last week; 



404 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. — § 78. 

(8.) The names of several cities take the article. Those nouni 
have generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects : — 

Le Havre, Havre ; La Rochelle, RocheUe ; 

La Haie, The Hague ; | Le Detroit, Detroit ; 

(9.) In speaking of the parts of the body or of the qualities of the 
mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a 
possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : — 

Votre frcre a les cheveux noirs. Your brother has black heir. 

II s'est blesse a la main. He has hurt his hand,. 

Charles a la memoire excellente. Charles has an excellent memory. 

§ 78. — Use op the Article before Words taken in a Par- 
titive Sense. 

(1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- 
jects, is said to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed 
to indicate a part of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- 
ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word 
taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often 
be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wooa\ 
abstractedly, I take them in the general sense : but if I say, give me 
wood, your brother has courage, I use them in the partitive sense, that 
is, I ask for a part of that substance called wood, and attribute to your 
brother something of that quality called courage. 

(2.) The article accompanied by, or in combination with the prep- 
osition de, called by some grammarians the partitive article [} 13, 
(10.)] is used before nouns taken in a partitive sense . — 

Du pain et de l'eau lui suflSsent. 



Apportez-nous du sel et du vi- 
naigre. 

Toujours la patrie a des charmes 
pair moi. La Harpe. 



Bread and water are sufficient for 
him ; that is, some bread. 

Bring us salt and vinegar ; that 
is, some salt. 

My native land has always {some) 
charms for me. 

(3 ) The preposition de only is used, when the noun taken in a 

partitive sense, is preceded by an adjective : — 

II possede de belles maisons. 
Proposons-nous a nous-memes de 
grands exeraples a imiter, plu- 



tot que de vains systemes a suivre. 
J. J. Rousseau. 



He possesses fine houses. 

Let us propose to ourselves rather to 
imitate great examples ; than to fol- 
low vain systems. 



(4.) When, however, the noun preceded by the adjective, is con, 
nected with it; and the two form a compound noun that noun takes 
the article according to rule (2.), as, 

Des jeunes gens ; des grands horn- I Young people / g~eat men (some). 



STUTAX OF THE ARTICL E. § 79, 80. 



405 



Heureux si de son temps, pour de 

bonnes raisons, 
La Macedoine eut eu des petites 

raaisons ! Boileau. 



Fortunate would it have been, if in 
his time (Alexanders) Macedon had 
had lunatic asylums. 



(5.J The pieposition alone is used before a noun, when it is pre- 
ceded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : — 

A multitude of nations. 
Many person's. 

Of what use are so many friends 
A single one suffices if he loves us. 



Une multitude? de peuples. 
Beaucoup de personnes. 
A quoi bon tant d'arnis 1 
Unseulnous suffit s'il nous aime. 
Florian. 



(6.) The article, however, is used, when the noun preceded by a 
collective word, is limited by what follows. The words la plupart, 
the most ; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely, form also exceptions 
to the preceding rule : — 



Un grand nombre des personnes 
quej'aivues. Noel. 

II me reste peu des livres qui 
m'ont ete donnes. Noel. 

Les mechants ont bien de la peine 
a demeurer unis. Fenelon. 



Many of the persons whom I have 
seen. 

I have few left, of the books which 
have been given me. 

The wicked have much trouble to 
remain united. 



(7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a 
verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same 
time : — 



Je ne vous ferai pas de reproches. 

L'on ne dit jamais que Ton n'a 
point d'esprit. Boursault. 

On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu 
en faisant du mal aux honimes. 
Voltaire. 

(8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen- 
tence : — 



/ shall cast upon you no reproaches. 
We never say, that we have no wit. 

We never can do good in respect to 
God, by doing evil to men. 



Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu'il 
Boit dangereux de suivre. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



Never give advice which it is dan- 
gerous to follow. 



§ 79. — English Indefinite Article A or An. 
The French numeral adjective un, masc. une, fern, answers to th 
English article a or an [\ 13, (4.) (11.)]. 

The restrictions to its use are specified in the remarks on the ar- 
ticle. 

§ 80. — Repetition of the Article. 
(1.) General rule. The article* is repeated before every noun 
and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : — 

* This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ton, son, ce, 
eet, &c 



406 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. §81. 



Xje coeur, Z'esprit, les moeurs, tout 
gagne a la culture. 

Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- 
citer leur petite compagne a s'en 
repaitre la premiere. Buffon. 



The heart, the mind, the manner* 
every thing improves by cultivation. 

The father and mother seemed U 
excite their little companion to feed 
upon it first. 



(2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- 
jectives united by the conjunction et, qualifies a noun expressed, and 
the other a noun understood : — 

L'histoire ancienne et la moderne. | Ancient and modern history. 
that is, l'histoire ancienne et l'histoire moderne. 

Ancient and modern philosophers. 



Les philosophes anciens et les mo- 

dernes. 
Le premier et le second etage. 



The first and second stories. 



(3.) Should, however, the two adjectives qualify the same ex- 
pressed word, the article must not be repeated. 

Le sage et pieux Fenelon a des 
droits bien acquis a l'estime gene- 
rale. GlRAULT DUVIVJER. 

A ces mots il lui tend le doux et 
tendre ouvrage. Boileau. 



The wise and pious Fenelon has well 
established rights to general es- 
teem. 

At these words he presents to him the 
sweet and tender book. 



(4.) When two nouns are joined by the conjunction ou, and th' 

second is merely a repetition or explanation of the first, the articl 

should not be repeated. 

The cheeks or sides of the head of tha 
condor, are covered withblack down. 



Les joues ou cotes de la tete du 
condor, sont couvertes d'un duvet 
noir. Buffon. 

On distinguait parmi les nobles les 
palatins ou gouverneurs des pro- 
vinces. J. J. Rousseau. 



They distinguished among the nobles 
the palatines or governors of prov- 
inces. 



§ 81. — Miscellaneous Kemarks on the Use of the Article. 

(1.) The article is not used before numbers placed after the names 
of sovereigns, to designate their order of succession [§ 26, (3.)]. 
Louis dix-huit, Charles dix. \ Louis the eighteenth, Charles the tenth, 

(2.) The French put no article before nouns placed in apposition 
with, or explanatory of, other preceding nouns : — 



Louis treize^Zs de Henri quatre, fut 
bien different de son pere. 

Le Tartufe, comedie de Moliere. 
Lamartine, celebre poete et prosa- 

teur fran^ais. 
Je suis francais, vous etes americain. 



Louis the thirteenth, the son of Henrf 

the fourth, was very different from 

his father. 
Tlie Tartufe, a comedy of Moltire. 
Lamartine, a celebrated French, pott 

and prose writer. 
I am a Frenchman, you are an 

American. 

(3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or rcstr'cted by 
other words, the un is then placed before it: — 



SYKTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 81. 407 



Cet homme est un Fran^ais 
d'une famille illustre, mais malheu- 
reuse. 

Cos messieurs sont des rnarchands 
de Lyon. 



That man is a Frenchman, of ai* 
illustrious, but unfortunate family. 

Those gentlemen are merchants 

from Lyons. 



(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed th© 
words mentioned in \ 76, Rules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) :— 

une montre d'or, a gold watch ; 

un maitre de dessin, a drawing-master ; 

un moulin-a-vapeur, a steam mill ; 

une chambre-a-coucher, a bed-room. 

(5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex 
amples than by precepts : — 

un magasin a foin, a hay-loft ; 

une bouteille a vin, a wine-bottle, 

are a loft intended for hay, a bottle intended for wine, but not actu- 
ally containing hay or wine. 

un magasin an foin. a hay-lop ; 

la bouteille au vin, the wine-bottle. 

i 

That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for 

wine. 

un magasin de foin, a loft > r -,-, r { hay ; 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle \J J \ wine. 

(6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it 
forms a part of the name ; as, Lebrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La 
Fontaine ; as also in some gallicised Italian names ; as, Le Tasse, 
Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, &c. An adjective, however, coming before 
proper names, is generally preceded by the article. 

Le bon et naif La Fontaine. I The good and candid La Fontaine. 

Le pieux Fenelon. | The pious Fenelon. 

(7.) It has been seen [J 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article is 
often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- 
viduals : — 



Nous avons vu a la fois a la tete 
des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, 
Us Kellermann, les Lassalle, les Mon- 
tonux Le G£n£ral Foy. 



We have seen at once at the head 
of the imperial squadrons, Murat } 
Kellerman, Lassalle, Montorun. 



(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the 
preposition en, take no article : — 

En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. 

(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- 
minately ; or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is the 
direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative : — 



408 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 82. 



Nous irons en voiture. 

Vous etes en peine. 

Nous n'avons ni or ni argent. 



We shall go in a carriage. 

You are in trouble. 

We have neither gold nor silver. 



(10.) The article is omitted before plus and moins in comparative 
sentences, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding place, be 
inserted: — 

PI as une action est utile, plus | The more useful an action is, the 
lie est loua'ule. | more praiseworthy it is. 

(11.) The article precedes plus and moins to express comparison 
in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : — 



Votre soeur ne pleurait pas, quoi- 
qu'elle fut la plus affligee de toutes 
ces dames. 



Your sister did not weep, although 
she was the most grieved of all those 
ladies. 



(12.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a su- 
perlative, in which, however, no direct comparison is intended : — 



Votre soeur ne pleure pas lors 
meme qu'elle est le plus affligee. 
Noel. 



Your sister does not weep, even 

wlien she is most grieved. 



(IS.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted 
in a rapid enumeration of individuals : — 



Citoyens, etrangers, amis, enne- 
mis, tous le reverent. 



Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- 
mies, all reverence him. 



§ 82. — Idioms in which the Article is omitted. 



Aj outer foi, 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir chaud, 
Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir dispute. 
Avoir envie, 
Avoir appetit, 
Avoir faim, 
Avoir froid, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir mal, 
Avoir patierxe, 
Avoir reur. 
Avoir pitie, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir sommeil, 
Avoir soif, 
Avoir soin, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir tort, 
Chercher fortune, 

Courir risque, 
Demander justice 



to give faith , 
to have need ; 
to be warm; 
to be accustomed ; 
to intend; 
to have difficulties ; 
to wish, to desire ; 
to have an appetite; 
to be hungry ; 
to be cold; 
to be ashamed; 
to have a pain ; 
to have patience ; 
to be afraid; 
to take pity ; 
to be right ; 
to be sleepy ; 
to be thirsty ; 
to take care ; 
to have reason ; 
to be wrong ; 
to seek one's for- 
tune ; 
to run the risk ; 
Jto demand justice ; 



Demander pardon,^ beg pardon ; 
Donner avis, ) , . r 
Fairepart, \ t°™f°™> 
Entendre raillerie * to bear jokes t 
Faire attention, to pay attention ; 
Faire bonne chere,fo live well; 
Faire credit, to give credit ; 

Faire envie, to excite envy. 

Faire honneur, to honor ; 



Faire horreur, 
Faire peur, 
Faire mention, 
Faire naufrage, 
Faire place, 
Faire plaisir, 
Faire present, 
Faire reflexion, 
Faire tort, 
Mettre fin, 
Mettre ordre, 
Perdre courage, 
Porter envie. 
Porter malheur, 

Prendre conge\ 



w inspire horror \ 
to frighten ; 
to mention ; 
to suffer shipwreck j 
to make room ; 
to oblige ; 
to present ; 
to reflect ; 
to injure : 
to put an end , 
to arrange ; 
to lose courage ; 
to envy ; 

to cause misfor- 
tune ; 
to take leave ; 



* Entendre la raillerie is afro said, but it means to understand joking. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §83,84. 



409 



Prendre feu, to 

Prendre garde, to- 

Prendre haleine, to 
Prendre medecine to 

Prendre racine, to 

Rendre compte. to 

Rendre justice, to 

Rendre service, to 

Rendre visite. to 



Tenir compagnie, to 



catch fire ; 
take care; 
take breath ; 
take medicine ; 
take root ; 
account ; 
render justice ; 
oblige ; 
visit ; 
accompany ; 



Tenir lieu, 
Tenir parole, 
Trouver moyen, 
Avec ardeur, &a, 
Par depit, &c., 
Pour recompense, 

&c., 
Sans peine, 
Sans souci, 



to take the place ; 
to keep one's word; 
to find means; 
with ardor ; 
through spite ; 
as a reward ; 

without difficulty • 
without sorrow f 
care. 



83. — The Adjective. 



(1.) We have seen [§ 18, Rule (3.)] that an adjective relating tt> 
two substantives of the same gender must agree with them in gender, 
and be put in the plural : 

(2.) And Rule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouns 
of 'different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. 

(2.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunction et, 
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to 
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied 
with the last noun, seems to forget the others; the adjective will 
assume the gender and number of the last noun only. 



His whole life has been nothing but 
continual labor and occupation. 

I know no romance, no Spanish 
comedy, without combats. 

The sword, the band, the flame is all 



Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, 
qu'une occupation coatinuelle. 

Massillon. 

Je ne connais point de roman, 
point de comedie espagnole sans 
combats. Florian. 

Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est 
toute pr ete. Racine. 

(4.) Sometimes the adjective preceded by two or more substan- 
tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must 
then, of course, agree with that noun only. 

Le bon gout des Egyptiens leur 
fit aimer la solidite et la regularite 
toute nue. Bossuet. 

Le sourire est une marque de 
bienveillance, d'applaudissement, 
et de satisfaction int&ieure. 

Buffon. 



The g$od taste of the Egyptians 
made tliem like solidity and un- 
adorned regularity. 

The smile is a mark of good-will, 
of applause, and of inward satisfac- 
tion. 



§ 84. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Adjectives. 
(1.) The adjective feu (late, deceased), is invariable, when placed 
before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when 
placed, after the determining word : — 

J'ai oui dire a feu ma sceur, que / have heard my laic sister say, 
sa fille et moi naquimes la meme that her daughter and I were bam 
annee. Montesquieu. | the same year 

18 



410 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJBCTIV B. § 84. 



Le due de. . . doit a la bienveil- 
lance dont l'honorait la feue reine, 
les bonnes graces de l'empereur. 
De Salvandy. 



T7ie duke of . . . owes to the good* 
will of the late queen towards him, 
the good graces of the emperor. 



(2.) The adjectives nu, hare 
placed before the noun : — 

II etait nu-tete ; les pieds chausses 
de petites sandales. Voltaire. 

Une demi-henre apres avoir quitte 
ie vaisseau, je foulai le sol ameri- 
cain. Chateaubriand. 



and demi, half; are invariable when 



He was bare-headed ; he wore on hu 
feet small sandals. 

Half an hour after having left ike 
ship, I trod the American soil. 



(3.) The adjectives nu and demi, when coming after the naun 
agree with it : — 



Accoutumez vos entantsa demeu- 
rer ete et hiver, jour et nuit toujours 
t£te nue. J. J. Rousseau. 

Opimius paya la tete de Caius 
Gracchus, dix-sept livres et de?nie 
d'or. Vertot. 



Accustom your children to remain 
summer and vnnter, day and nighty 
always bare-headed. 

Opimius paid for the head of Cams 
Gracchus, seventeen pounds and a 
half of gold. 



(4.) The adjectives excepte, except ; passe, past; y-compris, includ- 
ing; ci-joint, ci-inclus, annexed, inclosed; franc-de-port, postage free; 
come under the two last rules : — 



Vous trouverez ci-joint la copie 
de la lettre que M. . . m'a ecrite. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Le dessin de cet oiseau m'a ets 
envoye d'Angleterre, avec la des- 
cription ci-jointe. Buffon. 

Vous trouverez ci-inclus, copie de 
ma lettre. Domergues. 

Je vous recommande les cinq 
lettres ci-incluses. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

J'ai re^u, franc-de-\)ort, une lettre 
anonyme. J. J. Rousseau. 

Le Contrat social est imprime, 
et vous en recevrez douze exem- 
plaires, francs de port. 

The same. 



You will find annexed the copy of 
the letter which M. . . has written 
to me. 

The drawing of that bird came to 
me from England, with the descrip- 
tion here annexed. 

You will find inclosed, a copy of 
my letter. 

1 recommend to you the five letters 
inclosed 

I received, postage free, an anony- 
mous letter. 

The Social Contract is printed, 
and you will receive twelve copies fret 
of postage. 



(5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, modifying a verb, is of 
course invariable [{ 67, (3.)] : — 

In Lupland the skin of the hermin 
costs four or five sovs ; the flesh of 
this animal, smells bad. 



En Laponie, une peau d'hermine 
coute quatre ou cinq sous ; la 
chair de cet animal sent tres mau- 
vais. Regnard. 

De ma vie je n'ai entendu-des voix 
de femme monter si haut. 

Mme, de SfviGN*. 



Never in my life have I 
women's voices sound so hud. 



hsard 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 85. 411 

§ 85. — Place of the Qualifying Adjective. 

(1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective 
in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than 
it precedes it : — 

(2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are :— . 

L All participles present and past used adjectively; 

une personne recounaissante, a grateful person ; 

une histoire amusante, an amusing history ; 

un enfant den, a beloved child ; 

de la viande rotie, roast meat ; 

2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape; 

une table ronde, a round table ; 

une chambre. carree, a square room ; 

(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object is com- 
posed ; — 

acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid , 

corps aerien, aerial body ; 

(4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and touch 

ms; 

un habit noir, a black coat ; 

du fruit amer } bitter fruit ; 

des sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds ; 

de la cire r.wlle, soft wax; 

(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively; 

un homme riche, a rich man ; 

une femme aveugle, a blind woman ; 

(6.) Adjectives representing nation ;* 

une grammaire fra^aise, a French grammar; 

une dictionnaire allemand, a German dictionary; 

(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind ; 

un homme boiteux, a lame man ; 

un esprit aliene, an unsound mind ; 

(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if, 

un homme liberal, a liberal man ; 

une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; 

un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; 

un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. 

* The French often use the name of the country instead of the ad- 
jective of nation j particularfy when speaking of the produce of tha 
country : — 

De la laine d'Espagne, Spanish wool. 

Du fromage d' Angleterre, English cheese. 



412 



STNTAX OP THB ADJECTIV K. ^ 86. 



(9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective 
always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent; and 
no other reason t/ian taste can be assigned for them. We give a 
few examples, in which the same adjective is, by different authors, 
placed before and after the noun : — 

After the Noun. 



Before the Noun. 
Jamais nous ne goutons de par- 
taite allegresse. Corneille. 

We never enjoy perfect {unalloyed) 
pleasure. 

II fallut reveiller d'un profond 
sommeil cet autre Alexandre. 

Bossuet. 

It was necessary to rouse front a 
profound sleep that second Alexan- 
der. 

Craignez, d'un vain plaisir les 
trompeuses amorces. Boileau. 

Fear the deceitful allurements of a 
vain pleasure. 



Qu'a-t-il dit, qu'a-t-il fait, 

Qui ne promette a Rome un em- 

pereur parfait? Racine. 

What has he said, what has he done 
which does not promise to Rome a 
perfect emperor? 

Dans un sommeil profond ils ont 
passe leur vie. Boileau. 

They spent their life in a profound 
sleep. 

Le monde est une figure trompeuse 
qui passe. Buffon. 

The world is a deceitful picture, 
which passes before us. 



(10.) We find, however, in our best writers, few examples of a long 
adjective placed before a short noun; although they often place the 
adjective before the noun to give variety or force to the diction, they 
never, for instance, would say (in prose) dHmaginaires lois, for des 
lois imaginaires, imaginary laws. 

(11.) The following adjectives when used in a literal sense, gene- 
rally precede the noun : See § 144, Note : — 



Beau. 


fine, handsome ; 


Mauvais, 


bad; 


*Bon, 


good; 
brave ; 


Mechant, 


wicked ; 


*Brave, 


Meilleur, 


better ; 


Cher, 


dear (loved) ; 


Moindre, 


less ; 


Chetif, 


mean; 


Petit, 


small; 


Grand, 


tall ; 


Saint, 


holy ; 


Gros, 


large ; 


Vieux ; 


old; 


Jeune, 


young ; 


Vrai, 


true. 


Joli, 


pretty ; 







Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table, 

§ 86.— List of Adjectives having a Different Meaning, 
according as they precede or follow the noun. 

Un homme bon, a good, benevolent 
man (un homme de bien) ; 

Un homme brave, a brave man ; 

Une histoire certaine, a reliabU 
story; 

Une robe chere, an expensive dress; 

Une voix commune, an ordinary 
voice; 



Un bon homme, a simple, artless 

man ; 
Un brave homme, a worthy man ; 
Une certaine histoire, a certain 

story ; 
Un cher enfant, a dear child ; 
Une commune voix, a unanimous 

voice; 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJBCTIV E. § 87. 



413 



Un cruel homme, a tiresome man ; 

La dernie:e annee, the last year (of 
a series) ; 

Une fausse clef, a false key ; an imi- 
tation key ; 

Un furieux menteur, an excessive 
liar ; 

Un gal ant homme, a gentleman ; 

Un grand homme, a great man ; 

Le grand air, the air of good society ; 

Le haut ton, a haughty tone ; 

Un honnete homme, an honest man ; 

Le jeune Pline, young Pliny ; 

Un malhonnete homme, a dislionest 

man ; 
Mauvais air, awkward appearance; 

Un mechant livre, a poor book ; 

Morte eau, lowest tides ; 

Un nouveau livre, a new book, (ano- 
ther book) ; 

Un pauvre historien, a wretched his- 
torian ; 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man ; 

Un petit homme, a man of small 
size ; 

Mes propres mains, my own hands ; 

Un seui enfant, a single child ; 

Un simple soldat, a private soldier; 

Un triste homme. a pitiful man; 

Un unique tableau, a single 'pic- 
ture ; 

Un vilain homme, an ugly, unplea- 
sant man; 

Une vraie histoire, a mere story ; 



Un homme cruel, a cruel man; 
L'annee derniere, last year ; 

Une clef fausse, « key belonging to 

anotJwr lock, (the wrong key) ; 
Un lion furieux, a furious lion; 

Un homme galant, a man attentive 

to the ladies ; 
Un homme grand, a tall man; 
L'air grand, a, noble appearance ; 
Le ton haut, a loud tone ; 
Un homme honnete, a polite man ; 
Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger ; 
Un homme malhonnete, an unpolite 

man ; 
L'air mauvais, malicious appear- 
ance; 
Un livre mechant, a biting, caustic 

book ; 
Eau morte, stagnant water; 
Un livre nouveau, a book recently 

published ; 
Un historien pauvre, a historian 

vnthout pecuniary means ; 
Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 

man ; 
Un homme petit, a mean man ; 

Mes mains propres, my clean hands ; 
Un enfant seul, a child alone ; 
Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; 
Un homme triste, a sorrowful man: 
Un tableau unique, a matchless pic* 

ture ; 
Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly 

man ; 
Une histoire vraie, a true history. 



§ 87. — Regimen of Adjectives. 
(1.) The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb 
completing or defining their sense. Between the noun and the ad- 
jective comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, &c. : — 

Cet homme est digne de louange. I This man is worthy of praise. 

Ce general est digne de commander. \ That general is worthy to command. 

In the first phrase, louange, in the second, commander, is the regi- 
men of the adjective digne. 

(2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is 
idded to it only to give it a particular limitation : — 

Wit/unit a regimen. With a regimen. 

Cet homme n'est pas content. Cet homme n'est pas content de 

son fils. 
That man is not pleased. That man is not pleased itrith his son* 



414 



SYNTAX OF THK ADJBCTIV E. § 88. 



(3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- 
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- 
ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content, the 
French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- 
tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes- 
cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging 
the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that " L'usage et les 
dictionnaires les feront connaitre" (use and dictionaries will make us 
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after 
the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be satisfait de cela, we 
give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add lists of adjectives 
with their proper accompanying prepositions. 

(4.) When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
the preposition de is placed after that adjective, and before the verb 
following : — 



It is sweet to die for one's country. 
It is easier to be wise for another than 
for one's self. 

It is more glorious to conquer one's 
self than to conquer others. 



II est doux de mourir pour son pays. 
II est plus aise d'etre sage pour les 
autres que pour soi-meme. 

La Rochefoucauld. 
II est plus glorieux de se vaincre 
soi-meme, que de vaincre les 
autres. Scud^ry. 

(5.) It should be recollected, that it is only when the verb etre is 
unipersonal, that it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo- 
sition. In other cases, the adjective must be followed by the prepo- 
sition proper to it. See § 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, below. 



Cela est doux au toucher. 
Cela n'est pas aise a faire. 



That is soft to the touch. 
That is not easy to be done (easily 
done.) 

§ 88. — List of Adjectives requiring the Preposition De. 



Absent de, 
Ambitieux de, 
Amoureux de, 
Avide de, 
Approchant de, 
Capable de, 
Cheri de, 
Complice de, 
Content de, 
Curieux de, 
Desireux de, 
Dedaigneux de, 
Desole de, 
Different de, 
Digne de, 
Envieux de, 
fcloignc de, 
>f *clave de, 



absent (from) 
ambitious of 
in love with 
eager for 

approaching, near 
capable of, to 
beloved by 
accomplice in 
pleased with 
curious to 
desirous to, of 
disdaining to 
grieved with 
different from 
worthy of to 
envious of 
remote, far from 
a slave to 



Exempt de, 
Fache de, 
Fatigue de, 
Fier de, 
Fort de, 
Fou de, 
Glorieux de, 
Honteux de, 
Impatient de, 
Incapable de, 
Inconsolable de, 
Indigiie de, 
Indigne de, 
Inquiet de, 
Ivre de, 
Las de, 
Mecontent de, 
Parent de, 



exempt from 
sorry for 
tired ivith, of 
proud of 
confident in 
excessively fond of 
proud of 
ashamed of 
impatient of 
incapable of 
inconsolable for 
unworthy of 
indignant with 
imeasy about 
intoxicated with 
weary of 
displeased with 
related to 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E. § 89, 90. 



415 



Plein de full of 

Ravi de, glad to, of 

Rassasie de, satiated vjith 

Reconnaissant de. grateful for 
Renipli de, filled with 

Redevable de. indebted for 

Qui vit content de rien, possede 
toute chose. Boileau. 

II n'est pas de Remain, 
Qui ne soit desireuz de vous donner 

la main. Corxeille. 



Soigneux de, careful of to 
Sur de, sure of 

Surpris de, surprised of 

Tributaire de, tributary to 
Victime de, victim to i of 

Vide de, void of 

He who lives content wit\ a little, 
possesses all. 

T/iere is no Roman that is not desir- 
ous to reach you his hand. 



§ 89. — List of Adjectives Requiring the Preposition A. 

Accessible a, accessible to Formidable a, formidable to 

Accoutume a, accustomed to Fatal a, fatal to 

Adherent a, adhering to Importun a, importunate to 

Agreable a, agreeable to Impenetrable a, impenetrable to 

Ajuste a, fitted for Indispensable a, indispensable to 

Anterieur a, prior to Interesse a, interested in 

Aise a, easy to Invisible a, invisible to 

Ardent a, zealous for Insensible a, insensible to 

Assidu a, assiduous to Naturel a, natural to 

Attentif a, attentive to Necessaire a, necessary to 

Bon a, good for Nuisible a, hurtful to 

Cher a, dear to Odieux a, odious to 

Conforme a, similar to Posterieur a, posterior to 

Contraire a, contrary to Preferable a, preferable to 

Cruel a, cruel towards Propice a. propitious to 

Difficile a. difficult to Propre a, fit for 

Enclin a. prone to Rebelle a, rebellious toward* 

Etranger a, a stranger to Redoutable a, formidable to 

Exact a, exact in Semblable a, similar to 

Facile a, easy to Sujet a, subject to 

Favorable a, favorable to 

L'ignorance toujours. est prete a 
s'admirer. Boii.eau. 

Insensible a la vie, insensible d la 

mort. 
II ne sait quand il veille, il ne sait 

quand il dort. Racine. 

§ 90. — Adjectives requiring a Different Preposition in 

French and in English, not included in the above List, 
with the following signification. 



Ignorance is always ready to ad- 
mire itself. 

In sensible to life, insensible to death, 
he does not know when he is awake, 
or when he sleeps. 



Bon pour, 



dc- 



■ rds, 
1 to 

Cel Vbre pour, par celebrated for 
Civil env< polite to 

Quand on est bon pour tout le 
monde, on ne Test pour personne. 
C. Dklavigne. 
II fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- 
tant que par sa naissance. 

Bossuet. 



Ignorant en, not versed in 

Indulgent pour, indulgent toward* 

Insolent avec. insolent to 

Poll envers, polite to 

When one is devoted to every body 
one is so towards nobody. 

He was celt hated for his doctrine % tu 

wdl as for his birth. 



416 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §91,92,93. 



§ 91. — Remark. 

It must not be forgotten, that when the verb tire is used uiiiper- 
sonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections 
these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) \ 87. 

II est indispensable d'etudier I It is indispensable to study much, U 
beaucoup pour devenir savant. | become learned. 

§ 92. — Important Rules. 

(1.) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having 
one and the same regimen, provided those adjectives require the 
same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : — 



Ce pere est utile et cher a sa fa- 
mille. Girault Duvivier. 

La religion est necessaire et na- 
turelle a 1'homme. Anonymous. 



That father is useful and dear to 
his family. 

Religion is necessary and natural 
to man. 



These two sentences are correct, because the adjectives, utile, and 
cher, in the first, and necessaire and naturel, in the second, require the 
same preposition, a. 

(2.) We could not in the first of these two sentences, substitute 
the adjective cheri (beloved) for the word cher, and say as in English, 
That father is useful to, and beloved by his family. Such a construc- 
tion in French, is never admissible. We must say, That father is use- 
ful to his family, and is beloved by them; because the adjective cheri, 
requires the preposition de, or its substitute, the relative pronoun en 
[§ 39, (17.)].* Ce pere est utile a sa famille et en est cheri, i. e. est 
cheri d'elle. 

§ 93. — Determining Adjectives. — Demonstrative Adjec- 
tives. 

The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with 
the demonstrative pronoun [§ 36.], always precedes the noun, and 
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender 
nd number of the word which it determines [§ 20, (1.)] : — 



Cet air pur, ces gazons, cette voute 

mobile : 
Ici tout plait au coeur, toutenchante 

les yeux. Castel. 



That pure air, that turf, that chang- 
ing vault ; here every thing pleases 
the heart and charms tlie eyes. 



* The rule with regard to the regimen of verbs is equally imperative. 
We could not say in French, as in English, Evr.nj week I write letters to, 
and receive letters from my brother. We must say, Evcty week I write let- 
ters to my brother, and receive some from, Mm. Toutes les semaines j'dcris 
des lettres a mon frere, et j'en re^ois de lui. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJB T I V E. § 94, 95 417 

§ 94.-— Agreement, Eepetition, and Place of the Posses- 
sive Adjective. 

We have said [5 21, (2.)] that the possessive adjective assumes the 

gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be 

repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjective 

is the same in French, as in English, that is, before the noun. These 

adjectives must not be confounded with the possessive pronouns 

[} 34, (2.)] :- 

Mon pere, ma mere et mes soeurs i My father, mother, and sisters are 
sont arrives. | arrived. 

§ 95. — Remarks. 
(1.) It has been said [§ 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in- 
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of the 
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession is 
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance : — 

My head aches. (J have a pain m 
the head). 

Charles has broken his arm. 

because the possession is sufficiently explained by the pronouns je 
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say, 

Je vois que mon bras s'enfie, I see that my arm swells. 

because without the mon, the possession of the arm would not be 
indicated. 

(2.) The English expressions, a book of mine, a cousin of his, can- 
not be translated literally into French. We must say un de mes 
amis, one of my friends ; un de ses cousins, one of his cousins. 



J'ai mal a la tete. 
Charles s'est casse le bras. 



Cinna et Carbon, un de seslieuten- Cinna and Carlo, a lieutenant of 
ants, se camperent sur les bords du his, encamped on the banks of the 



Cinna and Carbo. a lieutenant of 
his, encamped on the banks of i 
Tiber. 



Tibre. Vertot. 

(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessive 
pronoun, mien, tien, sien, without the article, to expiess the same 
relation : — 

A tr avers d'un mien pre, certain Through a meadow of mine a 



anon passa. Racine 

Un w.izn cousin est juge-maire. 

La Fontaine. 



young ass passed. 

A cousin of mine is judge and 
mayor. 

(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives son, 

%a, ses, leurs, can be placed before the object possessed only when 

the possessor is the subject of the same proposition : — 

The country has its pleasures. 
Those languages have their becAi* 
ties. 



La eampagne a ses agrements. 
Ces langu.es ont leurs beautes. 



18* 



418 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E, — § 96, 97. 



(5.) When the (inanimate) possessor is not the subject of th« 
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, but of a preceding 
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are used [$ 39, (17.) 
j 110.]:— 



Ce livre est bien imprime, le pa- 
pier en est excellent. 

J'habite la campagne ; les agree- 
ments en sent sans nonibre. 



That book is well-printed, its paper 
(tlie paper of it) is excellent, 

I inhabit the country ; its pleasure* 
(the pleasures of it) are without nu r m^- 
her. 

Those languages are rich, I admire 
their beauties (the beauties of them,). 

(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, les, 
leurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same 
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- 
sition : — 



Ces langues sont riches, j 'en ad- 
mire les beautes. Noel. 



Paris est une ville remarquable ; 
les etrangers admirent la beaute de 
ses edifices. Noel. 



Paris is a remarkable city, foreign* 
ers admire the beauty of its edifices. 



§ 96. — Numeral Adjectives. 
(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not 
order, precedes the noun. 

(2.) When used to indicate order [§ 26, (3.)], the cardinal number 
generally follows the noun (except when indicating the day of the 
month) [} 26, (1.)] :— 

Leon dix. — Chapitre dix. Leo the tenth. — Chapter ten. 

(3.) The ordinal number is placed before the noun : — 
La dixieme annee. Tlie tenth year. 

(4.) It follows the words chapitre, lime, article, page, &c. in the 
division of a book. 

Livre sixieme, chapitre dixieme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. 

§ 97. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) Quelque is written in three ways : — 

1. Followed by a verb, it is written in two words, quel que ; the 
first, quel, which is an adjective, agrees in gender and number with 
the subject of the verb, and the second, que, which is a conjunction, 
is invariable. 



Mais quels que soient ton eulte et 

ta patrie. 
Dors sous ma tente avec securite. 
Campenon. 
Cet liomme quelle que fut sa for- 
tune ou son merite, ne put reussir 
dans ses entreprises. Boniface. 



But, whatever may be thy religion 
or thy country, sleep in security under 
my tent. 

That man, whatever his fortune of 
his merit might be, could net succeed 
in his undertakings. 



SYNTAX 1 THE ADJECTIVE, § 97. 



419 



2. Followed by a noun, it is then an adjective [\ 30, (12.)], and 
agrees in number with that noun : — 

Princes, quelques raisons que vous I Princes, whatever reasons you may 
puissiez me dire. Racine. | give me. 

3. Quelque followed by an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable. 



Les jeux de hasard, quelque me- 
diocres qu'ils paraissent, sont tou- 
iours chers et dangereux. 

Mme. de Genlis. 



Games of chance, hovjeve? trifling 
they may seem, are always expensive 
and dangerous. 



(2.) Meme is an adjective or an adverb : 
It is an adjective [§ 30, (5.)] : 

1. When it precedes the noun, and means same : — 

Vous retombez toujt>urs dans les 1 You always fall into the same ap- 
memes alarmes. Racine. j prehensions. 

2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of him- 
self, herself themselves, even, very, and cannot be turned into de la 
meme maniere, in the same manner : — 

Les dieux ewK-memes devinrent, J The gods themselves became jealous 
jaloux des bergers. Fenelon. of the shepherds. 

Ces murs memes, seigneur, peu- Tliese very walls, my lord, may have 
vent avoir des yeux. Racine, \eyes. 

(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, an ad- 
jective, or a participle. It has then the sense of aussi, also ; quoique, 
although, or de la meme maniere, in the same manner ; — 



Frappez. Tyriens et meme Israel- 
ites. Racine. 

Leurs vertus et meme leurs noms 
Staient ignores. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Exempts de maux reels les hom- 
ines s'en forment meme de chimeri- 
ques. 



Strike, Tyrians and Israelites also. 

Their virtues, as well as their 
names, were unknown. 

When exempt from real misfor- 
tunes, men create to themselves imagi- 
nary ones. 



(4.) We have seen that tout, when an adjective, that is, when sig- 
nifying every, all, is variable [{ 30, (15,) (16.)]. 

(5.) Tout, when it means entirely, quite, nothing but, is an adverb, 
nd, as such, invariable : — 

Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles. The lion is nothing but nerves and 
Buffon. muscles. 

II montra pour rimer des chemins He showed us, in poetry, paths en- 
tout nouveaux. Boileau. tirely new. 

Le chien est tout zele, tout ardeur, The dog is nothing but zeal, ardoi 
taut obeissance, Buffon. and obedience. 

(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphony 
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an h as- 
pirate : — 



Les plaisanteries ne sont bonnes 
que quand elles sont servies toutes 
chaudes. Voltairf. 



Jokes are only good, when the% cm 
served up quite warm 



420 SYNTAX OF TBE PRONOUN. — £ 98. 

The following extract (for the historical accuracy of which wt 
eannot vouch) offers an example on the last rule, and on the excep. 
tion : — 

La vanite est sortie toute paree de 
la tete des femmes comme Minerve 
est sortie tout armee de la tete de 
Jupiter. Saint Lambert. 



Vanity issued quite adorned from 
woman's head, as Minerva issued 
quite armed from the head of Ju- 
piter. 



§ 98. — The Pronoun. — Place of the Personal Pronoun, 
Subject of the Verb. 

(1.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, are in French 
as well as in English, placed before them in affirmative and negative 
sentences : — 



J'inventai des couleurs, j'armai la 

calomnie, 
J'interessai sa gloire ; U trembla 

pour sa vie. Racine. 



I invented colors, I armed cal- 
umny, I touched his glory ; he trem- 
bled for his life. 



(2.) In affirmative or negative sentences commencing with au 
moins, a peine, encore, peut-etre, en vain, du moins, combien, &c, the 
pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- 
struction is not imperative : — 

Peut-etre zvez-vous raison. Noel. 
Peut-etre vous entretiendrai-Je 
aussi de l'astronomie. 

Aim^-Martin. 
Combien (l'homme) perd-zZ de 
voeux, combien fait-fZ de pas ! 

La Fontaine. 



Perhaps, you are right. 
Perhaps, I will converse with you 
on astronomy. 

How many wishes Iw loses, hovi 
many steps he takes I 



(3.) In exclamations, the nominative pronoun is often placed after 

the verb in French, as well as in English :— « 

Puisse~je de mes yeux y voir torn- I May I with my own eyes see the 
ber la foudre ! Corneille. J thunder crush it ! 

(4.) In interrogative sentences the nominative pronoun is placed 
immediately after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the compound : — 

Ou suis-je ? qu'ai-je fait 1 que dois- I Where am I ? what have I done ? 
je faire encore ! | what have I yet to do ? 

(5.) In interrogative sentences with verbs having only one* sylla- 
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with 
some verbs having more than one syllable, but in which that person 
ends with an s preceded by a consonant, the pronounce is not placed 

* We may say, however, suis-je? am I? ai-je? have I? fais-je 1 do 2 
make? dois-je^ should J? ought I? vois-jel do I see? vais-je? dr I go? 
entends-je 1 do J hear ? 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — § 99. 421 

after the verb. In such case another construction must be given 
to the sentence . — 



Est-ce-que je cours 1 

Est-ce-que je dors? 
Est-ce-que je cornprends 1 



Do I run ? literally, I< it. that 1 
run? 

Do I sleep ? 

Do I understand ? 

(6.) The same construction is admissible, though not desirable 
is ith all the persons and tenses which may be used interrogatively 

§ 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative 
Pronoun. 

(1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns je, & il, nous % 
Us, before every verb : — 

Je lis, j'ecris, je me promene. | / read, write, and walk. 

(2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, Us, before 
the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and 
subject to the following restrictions :— 

Those pronouns must be repeated : 

1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : — 

Je pretends et je pr6tendrai tou- I I maintain and will always main- 
jours. I tain. 

2. When the first verb is in the negative and the second in the 
affirmative : — 

Je ne plie pas et je romps. J do not bend and I break. 

3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other 
than et, and ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; mais, but : — 

Nous detestons les mechants, par- I We detest the wicked because we 
ceque nous les craignons. | fear them. 

(3.) Although we would advise the student to follow the 1st rule 
of this 5? particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nous, vous, 
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where 
the pronouns after the first are — 



Repeated : 
Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux 

peuples efFrayes, 
II fut des Juifs, il fut une insolente 

race. Racine. 

I vrish that they may one day say to the 

frightened nations, there were Jews, 

there was an insolent race. 



Omitted : 

11 s'arrache les cheveux, se roule 
sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux 
leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son 
secours la cruelle mort. 

F£n t £lon. 

He (Telemachus) tears his hair, 
rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods 
with their rigor, and calls in xain^ 
cruel Death to his aid. 



422 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — § 100. 



II s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 

He listen s to himself, he adorns him- 
self, he loves himself. 

Nous avons dit, et nous allons 
prouver, qu'il n'y a pas de bonheur 
sans vertu. Beau zee. 

We have said, and we are going to 
IP eve, that there is no happiness 
without virtue. 



L'Eternel est son nom, le mtmde 

est son ouvrage, 
II entend les soupirs de l'humble 

qu'on outrage, 
Juge tons les mortels avec d'egales 

lois, 
Et du haut de son trone interroge 

les rois. Racine. 

The Eternal is his name, tJie world 
is his work; he listens to the sighs 
of the humble oppressed, judges all 
mankind with equal lajws, and in- 
terrogates the mighty from his lofty 
throne. 

§ 100. — Place of Personal Pronouns used as Regimens of 

Verbs. 
(1.) The personal pronoun used as regime direct, (direct object or 
accusative) [§ 42, (4.)], and the pronoun used as regime indirect, (indi- 
rect object) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in Eng- 
lish, (dative of the Latins), [§ 42, (3.)] are in French placed before 
the verb : — 



Direct Regimen. 
Je vous vois, / see you ; 
Vous les voyez, you see them. 

Madame, enfin le ciel pres de 
vous me rappelle. Racine. 

Madam, at last heaven recalls me 
near you, 

Pauvre science humaine ! 
Un fil 2'arrete helas, conime le 

moucheron 
Du bon Jean La Fontaine. 

Aime Martin. 

Poor human science ! a web stops 
thee, Like the gnat of the good Jean La 
Fontaine. 

(2.) 1st Exception: When the verb is in the second person singu- 
lar, or in the first or second person plural of the imperative used af- 
firmatively, these pronouns must be placed after it : — 



Indirect Regimen. 
Je vous parle, I speak to you ; 
Vous leur parlez, you speak to them. 

A ce prix je leur permets de 
vivre. Racine. 

Chi that condition I allow them to 
live. 

II faut compter sur l'ingratitude 
des hommes, et ne laisser pas de 
leur faire du bien. F£n£lon. 

We should expect ingratitude from 
men, but not cease, on that account, to 
do them good. 



T&rlez-leur, speak to them. 

Make me a, Christian and free, 1 
submit to every thing. 

Let us divest ourselves from a vain 
pride. 

Go, conduct her into the next room. 



Yoyez-les, see them. 

Rends-moi chretienne et libre, a 
tout je me soumets. Voltaire. 

Depouillons-vttfus aussi d'une vaine 
fierte. Boileau. 

Allez, coniuisez-ZiJ dans la cham- 
bre prochaine. Racine. 

(3.) Remark: But if the verb in those persons of the imperative 
be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to 
Rule (1.) :— 
Ne les voyez pas, do not see them. | Ne ki*r parlez pas,<fo not speak to them. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 100. 



423 



Si 1 on vous propose de faire une If they propose to yon to commit a 

Rianvaise- action, ne la faites pas. bad action, do it not. 

Dissipe tes douleurs. Dissipate thy grief, end trouble me 

Et ne me trouble pas par ces in- not by these unworthy tears. 

dignes pleurs. Boileau. 

(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the regime indi 
direct* is a person, the pronoun representing it must follow the verb 
This must also be the case with the following verbs : — 



Alier a. to go to. towards. 

Coun> 'a *" \ t0 run t0 -> iowards ' 

Je m'adresse a lui, a eux. 
Je vais a toils ou a eux. 
Vous courez a lui ou a elle. 
Elle vient a rnoi ou a vous. 
Vous pensez a nous ou a lui. 
lis songent a eux et a vous. 



Venir a, to come to. 

Boire a, to drink to. 

Penser a, songer a, to think of 

I apply to him, to them. 
I go to yon or to them. 
You run to him or to her. 
She comes to me or to you. 
You think of us or of him. 
They think of them and of you. 



(5.) The pronoun used as the indirect regimen of the French, 
which answers to the indirect object of the English preceded "by a 
preposition other than to, and to the genitive and ablative cases of 
the Latin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded 
by one of the prepositions de, of; pour, for; avec, with, &c. 



Je parle de lui et de vous. 

J'ecris pour lui et pour elle. 
Qui rit d'autrui, 
Doit craindre qu'en revanche on 

rie aussi de lui. Moliere. 



J speak of him and of you. 

I write for him and for her. 

He who laughs at others, must fear 
that in their turn, they may also laugh 
at him. 



(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together 
by the conjunction et, the pronoun regimen of the second mav be 
placed before it, or after it, as in English : — 

Before the Verb. 

Sortez et me laissez dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Laissez-mtfi cette chaine, ou ra'ar- 
rachez le jour. La Harpe. 

Leait me this chain, or deprive me 
of life. 
Vous attendez le roi; parlez et lux 

montrez, 
Contre le fils d'Hector tous les Grecs 

conjures. Racine. 

You expect the king; speak and, de- 
pict to him all the Gi eeks conspiring 
against tJie son of Hector. 



After the Verb. 

Sortez et laissez-??iM dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Marche, et suis-nous du moins ou 
l'honneur nous appelle. Boileau. 

March and follow us, at least, where 
honor calls us. 

Cessez, vous dis-je et laissez-moi, 
Madame, executer les volontes du 

roi. Racine. 

Cease, I tell you, and suffer me, 
Maiam, to execute the commands of 
ite king. 



* Object of the verb preceded in English by to, expressed or under- 
stood, dative of the Latins. 



424 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — § 101. 



§ 101. — Respective Place of the Pronouns when two occu> 

with one Verb. 

(1.) When two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and 

the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indirect, if not 

in the third person singular or plural, mi>st precede the pronoun re~ 

ime direct : — 



II me le donnera. 

II te le pretera. 

lis nous les montreront. 

Vous nous le direz. 
Quand je puis obliger, ma joie est 

assez grande ; 
Pour n'attendre jamais que Ton, 

me le commande. Boursault. 

Je vous le dis encore, vous n'aurez 
l'estime des hommes que par une 
solide vertu. Mme. De Maintenon. 



He will give it to me. 

He will lend it to thee. 

They will show them to us. 

You vjill say it to us. 

When I can oblige, my joy is great 
enough, without my wishing to wait 
until they command me (i. e., they 
command it to me.) 

I repeat it to you : you can obtain 
the esteem of men only by real virtue. 



(2.) When the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person singu- 
lar or plural, it must then be placed after the regime direct : — 



On le lui donnera. 
Vous le lui preterez. 
Nous ne le leur preterons pas. 
Vous le leur ecrirez. 
Le plus stir appui de l'homme est 
Dieu. et vous voulez le lui ravir. 
Boiste. 



They will give it to him. 
You will lend it to him. 
We will not lend it to them. 
You will write it to them. 
The surest support of man is Goa l 
and you wish to deprive him of it. 



(3.) Remark : The reflective pronoun se, used as an indirect regi- 
men, makes an exception to the above rule, as it takes precedence of 
the direct regimen : — 

Si les hommes pensent mal les If men think ill of each other, at 
uns des autres, du moins ils ne se le least they do not say it to each other. 
disent pas. Anonymous. 

(4.) The Rules (1.) and (2.), also the Exception (3.), apply to tne 
imperative used negatively; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the impera- 
tive used affirmatively. 



Examples of the Imperative used Negatively. 

Do not give it to us. 

Do not lend it to them. 

Let them say it to their, jives. 



Ne nous le donnez pas [Rule (1.)]. 
Ne le leur pretez pas [Rule (2.)]. 
Qu'ils ne se le disent pas [Remark 

(a.)]. 

I)u sang de tant de rois c'est l'u- 

nique heritage ; 
Ne me l'enviez pas, laissez-moi mon 

partage. Voltaire. 



Of the blood of so many kings, it u 
my only inheritance; do not envy it 
{to me), leave me my portion. 



(5.) When the imperative used affirmatively baa two regimens, 



SYNTAX OF THE PBONOUN, § 102, 103. 425 



the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the 
persons : — 



Envojez-le-moi. 
Doimez.-le-nous. 
Qu'ils le lui donnent. 
Montrez-le-moi, ce mortel privi- 
egie. Ballanche. 

'Mets-le-toi dans l'esprit ; qui fait 
mal, trouve nial. Anonymous. 



Send it to me. 

Give it to us. 

Let them give it to him. 

Show him to me, that privileged 
mortal. 

Put this into thy mind; he who 
does evil, finds evil. 



§ 102. — Rule. 
When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- 
ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in 
the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the 
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow 
the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition : — 



II nous a recomrnandes a eux. 

II vous a presents a elle. 

Nul ne peut se comparer a lui. pour 
faire en peu de temps, un travail 
fort inutile. La Bruyere. 



He has recommended tcs to them. 

He has presented you to her. 

No one can compare himself to him t 
for doing in a short time, a ver% 
useless piece of work. 



§ 103. — Rule. 
(1.) The personal pronouns lui, elle, eux, elles, used as indirect re- 
gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate 
to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it ; o/*o> 
from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [} 39, 
(17.)]:- 



I speak of it, of them; I give of it 
{some). 

I prize valor too highly to be jealous 
of it. 

He who is in prosperity should feat 
to abuse it. 



yen parle ; $en donne. 

J'aime trop la valeur. pour en etre 
jaloux. La Harpe. 

Celui qui est dans la prosperity, 
doit craindre d'en abuser. 

Fenelon. 

(2.) The relative pronoun y [§ 39, (18.) § 111], is used in French 

in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English by 

at or to (dative). It means at or to it; or to them; thereto, &c: — 

J'y songerai, / will think of it. \ Faites-?/ attention, Pay attention to it. 

C'estlorsque nous sommes eloignes It is when we are far from our conn- 

de notre pays, que nous sentons try that we feel, above all, the in- 

surtout Tinstinct qui nous y at- ( stinct which attaches us to it. 
tache. Chateaubriand. 

Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le ! All our days travel towards death, 

dernier y arrive. Montaigne. | the last one arrives at it (reaches 

! *)• 

Les choses de la terre ne valent I The things of the earth ai e not vmrik 
pas qu'on s'y attache. Nicole. I our attachment to them. 



426 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN/ 



104, 105, 100. 



§ 104. — Place of En and Y. 

^1.) Tb3 place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Rule 
(1.) \ 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex- 
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same }. See examples above. 

(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns re- 
gimes : — 



II nous en a parle. 

II lui en a dit quelque chose. 

Parlez-Zm-ew. 

Ne nous en parle z pas. 

Je Vy ai renvoye. 

Renvoyez-nous-^. 

Ne nous y renvoye z pas. 



He has spoken to us of it. 

He has told him something oftf. 

Speak to him of it. 

Do not speak to us of it. 

I have referred him to it. 

Refer, or send us back to it. 

Do not refer us to it. 



§ 105. — Repetition of the Pronouns, Regimes. 
These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb :• 

Ah ! mon enfant, que je voudrais 
bien vous voir un peu, vous enten- 
dre, vous embrasser, vous voir pas- 
ser. Mme. De S£vign£. 

Je veux le voir, le prier, le presser, 
Z'importuner, le flechir. 

Bescherelle. 



Ah! my child, how I would like to 
see you for a short time, to hear you, 
embrace you, see you pass. 

I will see him, entreat him, press 
him, importune him, bend him. 



§ 106. — The Possessive Pronoun. 

(1.) The possessive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by 
the article [§ 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as the pronoun itself, agrees 
in gender and number with the noun represented [{ 35, (1.)] : — 



L'ambition ni la fumee ne tou- 

chent point un coeur comme le mien. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

Au lieu de deplorer la mort des 

autres, je veux apprendre de vous 

a rendre la mienne sainte. 

Bossuet. 



Neither ambition nor smoke have 
power on such a heart as mine. 

Instead of bewailing the death of 
others, I wish to learn from you how 
to render my own holy. 



(2.) The pronouns le notre, le voire [§ 34, (3.)], &c, unlike the 
adjectives notre, votre, &c, always take the circumflex accent : — 

The music of the ancient Greeks 
was very different from ours. 



La musique des anciens Grecs 
6tait tres differente de la notre. 
Voltaire. 

(3) When the English possessive pronouns, mine, thine, &c, 

come after the verb to be, they are often rendered into French by the 

indirect pronouns d moi, d toi : — 

Ce livre est a moi. That book is mine. 

Ces plumes sont-elles a vous ? Are these pens yours? 



STNTAX OF THE PROKQUN. §107. 



427 



§ 101. — The Demonstrative Pronoun. 

(1.) Ths demonstrative pronouns [§ 36] can never be placed be- 
fore nouns. They merely represent them : — 

La meilleure le9on est celle des 
exempies. La Harpe. 

N : oubIie jamais les bienf aits que 
tu as reyus; oublie promptement 
cc.ux que tu as accordes. 

Boiste. 



The best lesson is that of examples. 

Never forget the benefits which thou 
hast received; forget quicldy i 
which thou hast conferred. 



(2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, as has been said [§ 37, 
(2.)], are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also 
in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he 
who, him whom, of whom ; that which, of which. They apply, in this 
sense, as well to things as to persons : — 

Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en 
a pas un. Malesherbes. 

On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne 
veut pas. 

L'harmonie la plus douce est la 
voix de celle qu^on aime. 

La Bruyere. 



He who reckons ten friends ,has not 
one. 

We cannot compel him who vnU not. 

Tlie sweetest harmony is the voice 
of her whom vje love. 



(^3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, celles, indifferently for this, 
that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix the 
adverbs* ci (id) and la to the pronouns [} 37, (3.)] : — 



Corneille nous assujettit a ses 
caracteres et a ses idees ; Racine 
se conforme aux notres. Celui-ld 
peint les hommes, comme ils dev- 
raient etre, celui-ci les peint tels 
qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. 



Corneille subjects us to his charac- 
ters and to his ideas; Racine con- 
forms himself to ours. That one {the 
former) paints men as tliey should be, 
this one (the latter) paints them as 
they are. 



(4.) CeluUci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, may be used absolutely in 
French in the sense of this one, that one, &c. : — 



On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- 
suyer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- 
voir aux besoins de celui-ld. 

Fl^chier. 



Every week, she was seen wiping 
the tears of this one, providing for the 
wants of that one. 



(5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve ta 
point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to a 
noun [j 37, (5.)] : — 

* The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the 
demonstrative adjectives ce, cct, &c. They are not placed immediately 
after those adjectives, but after the nouns which they determine : cet 
honime-ci, this man, cet homme-la, that man. The commencement of 
Remark (3.) applies also to the adjectives ce, cct, celle, ces, &c. 



428 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — § 108. 



Tant que le jour est long, il gronde 

entre ses dents, 
Fais ceci, fais cela, va, viens, monte, 
descends, Regnard. 

Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. 

Massillon. 

Vous n'avez pu desavouer cela. 

Pascal. 



The livelong day he mutters between 
his teeth, do this, do that, go, cornc, 
go up, come down. 

I am a little surprised, at all this. 

You have not been able to disavow 
that. 



§ 108. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronoon Ce. 
(1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always 
construed with the verb etre, or followed by a relative pronoun : — 



C'est un poids bien pesant qu'un 
grand nom a soutenir. 

Montesquieu. 
Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. 

L^VIZAC. 



A great name is a very heavy weiglU 
to sustain. 



That which pleases me is her mod- 
esty. 

(2.) Ce is used for he, she, they, preceding any part of the verb to 
be, when that verb is followed by a noun, or an adjective used sub- 
stantively and preceded by the, a or an, or a possessive or demonstra- 
tive adjective. 

(3.) Observe, that the verb etre following the pronoun ce, is put in 
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro- 
noun ce, however, remains unchanged. 



C'est un trompeur. 

C'est la ferame que je cherche. 

C'etaient mes amis. 

Ce seraient paroles exquises. 

Si c'etait un grand qui parlat. 

Moliere. 
N'etaient-ce pas les memes hom- 
ines 1 Chateaubriand. 

All those sentences are elliptical ; a noun being understood after 
the ce : — 



He is a deceitful man. 

She is the woman whom I seek. 

They were my friends. 

They would be exquisite viords. 

If a great man were to speak then. 

Were they not the same men ? 



Cet homme est un trompeur. 
Cette femme est la femme que je 
cherche. 



That man is a deceitful one 
That woman is the woman whom 1 
seek. 



(4.) This is, that is, these are, those are, may also be rendered by 
£est ici, ce sont id : — 



Ccst ici la place. 

Ce sont la mes enfants. 



This is the place. 
Those are my children. 



Void la place. 
Voila mes enfants. 



Void, voilci, are, however, to be preferred to c'est ici, &c : — 

This is the place. 
TJwse are my children. 

(5.) Ce answers to the English pronoun it, when this latter wyrd 
stands as the nominative of the verb to be, without defjiite reference 
to an antecedent • — 



SYNTAX OF THE PROKOUN. §109. 



429 



Ce n'est que par les sens que l'ame 
pout s'instruire. Fontanes. 

Ce fut d'une retraite de patres et 
d'aventuriers, que sortirent les con- 
querants de Funivers. Rollin. 

Cest un defaut capital qu'il faut 
eviter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. 
Voltaire. 



It is only through the senses that the 
mind can receive instruction. 

It io as from a refuge for shepherds 
and adventurers, that emerged the 
conquerors of the world. 

This is a capital defect which should- 
be avoided in whatever subject it may 
be. 



(6.) When the verb etre, however, is used unipersonally, and fol 
lowed by an adjective [J 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by 
ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : — 



II est necessaire d'etudier. 

II est plus difficile pour les na- 
tions que pour les individus, de re- 
couvrer l'estime de leurs voisins 
quand elles Font perdue. Boiste. 



It is necessary to study. 

It is more difficult for nations than 
for individuals to recover the esteem 
of their neighbors, when they have 
lost it. 



§ 109. — The Eelative Pronoun. 
(1.) The relative pronoun que, whom, which, can in French never 
be suppressed like the corresponding English pronouns :* — 

Les I'vianges que nous donnons, i The praises (which) toe give, have 



always in some way a relation to our- 
selves. 



se rapportent toujours par quelque 
chose * nous-memes. 

Massillon. 

(2 j The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English 

pronouns which or what used interrogatively. 

X. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : — 

Quel livre lirons-nous 1 Wliat or which book shall we read * 

Quel est done votre mal ? What then is your ailment ? 

Moliere. 

2. Que is used before a verb :— 

Que dites-vous 1 What do you say ? 

3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : — 

Quoi ! est-ce vous 1 What ! is it you ? 

4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : — 

Void deux plumes ; laquelle vou- I Here are two pens ; which (whic/k 
Wz-vous 1 I one ) vnll you have ? 

(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, an 

preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means 

whom, of whom, to whom, whose, &c. : — 

Qui avez-vous vu 1 Whom lave you seen ? 

De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle 1 | From whom have you this news ? 

A qui est ce livre 1 W/iose book is this ? 

* The conjunction, that, is often omitted in English; its equivalent que, 
must always be expressed in French. 

Je crois qu } il est ici. I believe (that) he is here. 



430 SYNTAX OF THE PHO NOUN.— § 110-113. 

§ 110. — The Pronoun En. 

(1.) We have already [} 39, (17.) J 95, (5.) § 103, Rule (l. N J mad« 
several remarks on this pronoun. 

(2.) En signifies of it, from it, i*nzh it, about it, of them, from them 
&c, expressed or understood. Though en is by some French writers 
often used in relation to persons, their example should be imitated 
n such cases only as that presented by the example [§ 92, (2.)]. 

(3.) En, used as an equivalent for the English some or any, ex- 
pressed or understood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, 
and has, in the same manner as the French article placed before a 
noun used partitively, the sense of of it, of them ; the word partie 
being understood : — 

Avez vous des pommes % | Have you apples ? 

That is, some, or rather, of the, a fart of the apples. 

J'en ai. / have, I have some ; I have of 

J them or I have {a part) of them. 

(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a proposition : — 

L'on ne saurait voir, sans en etre 



pique, 
Posseder par un autre un bien qu'on 

a manque. Mo lie re. 

Wen disputons plus ; chacun a sa 
pensee. Moliere. 



We cannot see, without being 
piqued, another person in possession 
of goods which we have failed in ob- 
taining. 

Let us no longer argue about this; 
every one has his own opinion. 



§ 111.— The Pronoun Y. 
Some remarks have already been made on this pronoun [5 39, 
(18.) \ 103, (2.)]. Y means to it, at it, to them, at them. It is seldom 
used in relation to persons or animals, but frequently in relation to 
things : — 



Je re9ois votre lettre, ma chere 
enfant, et j'y fais reponse avec 
precipitation. Mme. de Sevign*. 

Tirer vanite de quelque chose, 
c'est prouver, qu'on n'y est pas 
accoutume. Boiste. 

Chargez-vous de cette affaire ; 
donnez-y tous vos soins. 

Boniface. 



J receive your letter, my dear chila, 
and answer it {make answer thereto) 
in haste. 

To feel vanity on account of any 
thing, is proving, that we are noi 
accustomed to it. 

Take this affair upon yourself; 
give all your care to it. 



§ 112. — Place of the Pronouns En and Y. 
See } 104, (1.) (2.) 

§ 113. — The Indefinite Pronoun On [§ 41, (4.)]. 
(1.) On, which is very extensively used in the French language, it 
said only of persons. The verb, of which it Is always tVe nomina- 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §113. 



431 



tive, must be in the singular. This pronoun is of the masculine 
gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one, 
we, (hey, whenever these words have a general and indefinite meaning, 
and do not refer to any particular word :— 

On pardonne aisement le mal I We, {people, they, fyc.) easily far- 
involontaire. De la Boutraye. | give involuntary injuries. 

O.i cherche les rieurs, et moi je People (they, we) seek laughing or 
es evite. La Fontaine. | merry people, and I avoid them. 

Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that the 
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, 
which they always prefer to the passive.* Thus the two examples 
last given, may be rendered as follows : — 



Active Voice in French. 

On pardonne aisement le mal 
mvoloDtaire. 

On cherche les rieurs, mais moi 
je les evite. 



Passive Voice in English. 

Involuntary injuries are easily for- 
given. 

Merry or joyful people are generally 
sought ; for my part, I avoid them. 



A few more examples, from some of the best French authors, 
elucidating the use of this pronoun, will be useful to the student :— 



Quand on est Chretien de quelque j 
sexe que Von soit, il n'est pas permis 
d'etre lache. Fen£lon. 

On peut etre honnete homme, et 
faire mal des vers. Moliere. 

On aime peu celui qui n'ose 
aimer personne. Delille. 

A-t-on jamais pleure d'avoir fait 
son devoir 1 Chamfort. 

Quand on a meme but, rarement 
on s'accorde. Lebrun. 

Artistes, ecrivains, poetes, si vous 
vous copiez toujours, on ne vous 
copiera jamais. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) If the word, on, denotes definitely a female, the adjective re* 
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : — 

Quani on est belle, on ne V ignore I When one (a lady) is handsome t 
pas. L'Acade*mie. [ she is not ignorant of it. 

(3.) The pronoun, on, must be repeated before every verb : — 



A Christian of whichever sex he may 
be, is not allowed to be cowardly. 

One may be a worthy mam, and 
make bad verses. 

We feel but little love for him who 
dares love nobody. 

Have we ever grieved en account 
of having done our duty ? 

Those who have the same aim, 
rarely agree. 

Artists, writers, poets I if you al- 
ways copy each other, no person will 
copy you. 



On leve l'ancre, on part, on fuit loin 

de la terre. 
On decouvrait deja les bords de 

l'Angleterre. Voltaire. 



They raise the anchor, they depart, 
they flee far from the land, already 
they discovered the shores of England, 



* On dit, U is said ; on rapporte, it is related ; on craint. it is feared, 
dtc. Cela se fait ainsi, literally, that makes itself thus, that is mad* in ihu 
manner, &a 



432 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 114. 



§ 114. — The Verb. — Agreement of the Verb with itb 
Subject. 

(1.) The verb agrees with its nominative or subject, whether that- 
nominative precedes or follows : — 

Vhomme est ne pour rggner sur Man is born to reign over aU tnfi 

tous les animaux. Voltaire. animals. 

Les hommes sont encore enfants a Men are still children (even) vd 

soixante ans. Aubert. sixty. 

Par ces portes sortaient les fieres Through those gates issued the 

legions. Saint Victor. proud legions. 

(2.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatives connected 
by the conjunction et, the verb is put in the plural : — 



La colere et la precipitation sont 
deux choses fort opposees a la pru- 
dence. Fenblon. 

La violence et la vertu ne peuvent 
rien Tune sur l'autre. Pascal. 



Anger and precipitation are two 
things very much opposed to pru- 
dence. 

Violence and virtue have no power 
over each other. 



(3.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected 
by et, it is put in the singular or in the plural according to circum- 
stances : — 

1. It is put in the singular, if the nominatives are in some way 
synonymous : — 



La douceur, la bonte du grand 
Henri, a ete celebree de mille 
louanges. Pelisson. 

D'ou. pent venir cet ennui, ce 
dcgout 7 

Colin d'Harleville. 



The mildness, the goodness of the 
great Henry, has been celebrated by a 
thousand praises. 

Whence can proceed that ennui, 
that disgust? 



2. When, in a series of. nominatives, the last has more force 
or interest attached to it, and therefore, makes us. as it were, overlook 
the others : — 



Ce sacrifice — votre interet, votre 
honneur, Dieu vous le commande ! 



This sacrifice — your interest, your 
honor, God commands it ! 



3. The verb is put in the plural, when the affirmation is intended 
to be made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of each 
In particular : — 

La douceur, les soupirs de cette TJic sweetness, the sighs of that un- 

femme infortunee ne purent lc fortunate woman could not move 

flechir. Wailly. him. 

Savez vous, si demain, Do you know, if to-morrmo, 

Sa liberie, ses jours, seront en votre his liberty, his life, will be in your 

main 1 Racine, power ? 

(4.) On the forms of the verbs when connected by on, See L. 84, 
*,3 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 115,116. 



433 



§ 115,-— Number of the Verb after a Collective Noux. 

(1.) Every verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun 
[{ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totality V infinite, &c, 
takes the number of that noun : — 



L'arnee des mfL&elesfut entiere- 
ment detruite. L'Acade*mie. 

La multitude des bonnes choses 
que Ton trouve dans un ouvrage, 
fait perdre de vue la multiplicite 
des mauvaises. Caminade. 



The army of the infidels was en- 
tirely destroyed. 

The multitude of the good things 
which we find in a work, makes us 
lose sight of the multiplicity of the bad 



(2.) When a partitive collective noun [} 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- 
ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies 
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. 

The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following 
the collective word, if the collective acts only a secondary part, or 
if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : — 



Agreement with the Collective. 

Une troupe d'assassins entra dans 
la chambre de Coligny. 

Voltaire. 

A gang of assassins entered Co- 
ligny's chamber. 

Une nuee de traits obscurcit l'air. 

A cloud of arrows darkened the air. 

Cette espece de paons parait avoir 
eprouve les monies effets par la 
merae cause. Buffon. 

That species of peacocks seems to 
have experienced the same effects 
through the same cause. 



Agreement with the folloicing Noun, 

Une troupe de nymphes couron- 
nees de fleurs, nageaient autour do 
son char. F£n£lon. 

A troop of young nymphs, crowned 
with flowers, were swimming around 
her chariot. 

Une nuee de barbares desolerent le 
pays. L'Acade'mie. 

A cloud of barbarians desolated the 
country. 

Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- 
pelle chiens de Laconie, ne vivent. 
que dix ans. Boileau. 

That species of dogs which they call 
Laconian dogs, live only ten years. 



§ 116. — Number of the Verb Etre after the Pronoun Ce. 

(1.) The verb etre preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical 
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with tb?i 
pronoun [} 108, (3.)] :— 



Ce sont les moeurs qui font la 
bonne compagnie. La Chaussee. 

Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- 
tres qui parlent ainti 1 sont-ce des 
Chretiens 1 Pascal. 



It is morals which form good com- 
pany. 

Are they monks and priests who 
speak so ? are they Christians ? 



(2.) The verb etre may also be put in the plural, when the pro- 
nouns eux and elles are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This 
rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before nou$ 

19 



434 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 117,118. 



and vous similarly placed, the verb is always in the singular : c'esf 
nous; c'est vous: — 



Singular. 

West eux qui ont bati ce superbe 
labyrinfche. Bossuet. 

It is they who have built that su- 
perb labyrinth. 



§ 11?-- 



Plural. 
Ce sont eux qui viennent. 

Bescherelle, 

It is they who come. 



-The Verb relating to several Nouns in Different 
Persons. 

A verb having several subjects in different persons, is put in the 
plural, and assumes the termination of the first person in preference 
to that of the second, and that of the second in preference to that 
of the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the 
person preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects : — 

Votre pere et moi, nous avons ete 
longtemps ennemis Fun de l'autre. 
F£n£lon. 

Allez; vous et vos semblables 
n'etes point faits pour etre trans- 
plants. Montesquieu. 

§ H8, 



Your father and I have long been 
enemies to each other. 

Go ; you and such as you are not 
fit to be transplanted. 



-Use of the Tenses.— The Present of the Indica- 
tive. 
(1.) This tense denotes what exists, or is taking place at the time 
we speak : — 

Je lis ; vous parlez. | / read ; you speak. 

(2.) The French have only one form of the indicative present : — 
Je lis means, therefore, I read, do read, or am reading. 
(3.) The indicative present is used in French, as well as in Eng. 
lish, for expressing things which are and will always be true : — 



God is eternal, his power is bound- 
less, and his clemency is great. 



Dieu est eternel, sa puissance est 
sans bornes, et sa clemence est 
grande. Girault Duvivier. 

(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future : — 



J shall be back in a moment. 



Je suis de retour dans un mo- 
ment. Moliere. 

Si Titus a parle, s'il Yepouse, je 
pars. Racine. 

(5.) The present is frequently used for the past, to awaken atten 
tion,and plac° the event, as it were, before the reader: — 



If Titus has spoken, if he marria 
her, I go (will go). 



J'ai vu, Seigneur, j'ai vu votre 

malheureux fils, 
Traine par les chevaux que sa main 

a nourris : 
II veut les rappeler, mais sa voix 

let effraie. Racine. 



/ saw, my lord, I saw your un- 
fortunate son dragged by the horses 
which his own hand has fed; hi 
wishes to recall them, but his ooic4 
frightens them. 



SYNTAX OP THE V E RB.— § 119, 120. 435 

§ 119. — The Imperfect. 
(1,) The mperfect, or simultaneous past, is used to express some- 
thing which was in progress, while another thing ?ras taking place. 
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter- 
mined : — 

J'ecrivais, quand je re9us votre ! / was writing, when I received 
lettre. | your letter. 

(2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, 
represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be, and 
the participle present of a principal verb. 

(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary 

action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive 

of the verb preceded by " used to" : — 

When I was in London, I walked 
{used to vjalk) in the morning, after- 
wards dined (usually dined), and 
spent (usually) the remainder of the 
day in reading and writing. 

(4.) The use of tins tense will be further explained in the next 
Section. 

§ 120. — The Past Definite. 

(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- 
tirely past : — 

Z^al^ii a Londres, ou je vis votre j / went to London, where I saw 
pere ; je finis mes affaires dans your farther ; I finished my business 
cette ville, et revins aussitot ici. ; in that city, and returned hither 

immediately. 
M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir un ! Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening 
sixain a Mademoiselle une telle. six verses to Miss such-a-one. 

Moliere. 

(2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, 
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. 
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day, this 
morning, this week, this month, this year, &c. [See § 121, Past Indefi- 
nite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last week, last year, 
&c.:— 



Lorsque yitais a Londres, ydllais 
me promener le matin, ensuite je 
dxnais, et je passais le reste de la 
journee a lire et a ecrire. 



Je vous envoie, mon cher frere, 
line lettre que yecrivis hier pour 
Madame de Laval. F£n*lon. 



/ send you, my dear brother, a let- 
ter which I wrote yesterday for Ma- 
dame de Laval. 



(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by 
the participle present of the verb and the auxiliary to le; or by pre- 
fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The preterite definite can 
eever be so rendered. 



436 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB 



120. 



(4.) The imperfect might be called the descriptive tense of the 
French. 

(5.) The past definite might be called the narrative tense. It ex- 
presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will 
endeavor to illustrate this difference between these two tenses. — A 
traveller has entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage ; he 
wishes to describe what he saw there, and makes use of the imper- 
fect or descriptive tense ; he says : — 



An old man wls walking under the 
trees ; he held {was holding) a book in 
his hand ; from time to time he raised 
his eyes towards heaven, or concealed 
them with his hand, and seemed to 
sink into a profound revery. Before 
the door of the hut, sat {was sitting) 
O; female rocking {who was rocking) a 
child on her knees ; she was pale ; her 
hair waved (was waving) at the 
mercy of the wind; tears flmoed (were 
flowing) down her cheeks. 

The traveller has here drawn a picture of what presented itself to 
his eyes, as he approached the cottage. Not content with represent- 
ing merely the then present situation of things, he wishes also to 
narrate what took place. He has described the theatre on which 
the occurrence took place, which he is going to relate ; he now pro- 
ceeds to the narrative, and uses the past definite or narrative tense :— « 



Un vieillard se promenait sous les 
arbres ; it tenait un livre a la main ; 
de temps en temps, il elevait les 
yeux vers le ciel, ou les couvrait de 
la main, et semblait s'abimer dans 
une profonde reverie. Devant la 
porte de la cabane etait assise une 
femme qui bercait un enfant sur ses 
genoux ; elle etait pale ; ses cheveux 
flottaient au gre du vent ; des larmes 
coulaient Je long de ses joues, &c. 



Je m'approchai du vieillard ; lors- 
qu'il mlapercut, il s'avanca vers moi, 
me salua, et me pria de ne pas trou- 
bler cette paisible retraite du mal- 
heur. II retourna a la cabane, prit 
l'enfant des bras de la femme, et 
rentra ; elle le suivit, &c. 



J approached the old man ; when he 
perceived me he came towards me, 
greeted me, and besought me not to 
disturb this peaceful retreat of the 
unfortunate. He returned to the cot- 
tage, took the child from the woman's 
arms, and went in; she followed him. 



Another example might be taken from La Fontaine's well-known 
fable :— 



LE CORBEAU ET LE RENARD. 

Maitre corbeau sur un arbre per- 

che, 
Tenait en son bee un fromage ; 
Maitre renard, par l'odeur allechg, 
Lui tint a peu pres ce langage. 



THE RAVEN AND THE FOX. 

Master raven perched upon a tree, 
held (was holding) in his beak a 
cheese ; master fox, attracted by the 
smell, addressed him nearly in the fol- 
lowing words. 



Here the poet uses the imperfect of tenir in describing the situa- 
tion in which Lie fox found the raven, but in relating the action of 
the fox, La Fontaine uses the narrative tense of the same verb. 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB. § 12L 



437 



The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- 
cellent illustration of what we have here advanced on the use of the 
.mperfect and the past definite. 

§ 121. — The Past Indefinite. 

(1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, 
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- 
day, this month, this year, &si. 



Le roi m'a nomme aujourd'hui 
archeveque de Cambray. F£n£lon. 

Ce matin j'#i trouve le pave si glis- 
sant, que j'ai pense que si je venais 
a tomber sur le bras droit, je serais 
tout a fait desempare. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Je Vai defendu (see (2.) below) 
cent fois de racier ton mechant 
violon ; cependant, je Vai entendu ce 
matin — Ce matin 1 Ne vous souvient- 
il pas que vous me le mites [§ 120 
(2.)] hier en pieces 1 Palaprat. 



The king appointed me to-day 
archbishop of Cambray. 

TJiis morning I found the street so 
slippery, that I thought in case 1 
happened to fall on my right arm, 1 
should then be completely helpless. 

" 1 have forbidden thee a hundred 
times to scrape thy wretched violin; ne- 
vertheless, I heard thee this morning" 
" This morning! Do you not re- 
collect that you broke it to pieces yes- 
terday ?" 



(2.) The past indefinite is, also, used with regard to a time en 
tirely past, but not specified : — 



The fruits of the earth were the 
first aliments of mankind. 



Les fruits de la terre ont ete la 
premiere nourriture des hommes. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 

Les Fran^ais ont gagne la bataille 
de Marengo. 

(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- 
definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently 
with the past definite : — 



The French gained the battle of 
Marengo. 



Past Definite: 

Huit jours apres son depart 3 il 
m'ecrivit une lettre. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

A week after his departure, he wrote 
me a letter. 

Je fus bien fache hier. ma chere 
cousine, de vous avoir quittce avec 
tant de precipitation. F£n£lon. 

/ was very sorry yesterday, my dear 
cousin, for liaving left you in so much 
liaste. 



Past Indefinite. 
Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinze 
jours. The Same. 

I wrote to you a fortnight ago. 

Hier en travaillant a mon qua- 
trieme dialogue, j'ai eprouve un 
vrai plaisir. Mirabeau. 

Yesterday, while working at my 
fourth dialogue, I experienced real 
pleasure. 



(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, 
every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to 
it, should be in the same tense : — 



Ou avez-vous eie ? 
J'ai d'abord ete a l'eglise, ensuite 
Je suis venu diner, 



WJiere have you been ? 
I first went to chmch; and Hen 
came home U dinner. 



438 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 122, 123, 124. 

§ 122. — The Past Anterior. 

The past anterior expresses what took place immediately before 
another event winch is also past : the latter event being usually the 
result of, or dependent upon the former : — 



Wlien I had perceived my error, 1 
'was asliamed of my bad conduct te 
wards (dm. 



I had breakfasted, when you came 
to inquire for me. 



Quand feus reconnu mon erreur, 
*e fus honteux de mauvais procedes 
q-ie j'avais eus pour lui. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 

See (3.) ofthe§ below. 

§ 123. — The Pluperfect. 

(1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but as 

past with regard to another past event : — 

T'avais dejeune, quand vous 
vintes me demander. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 

(2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the 

verbs avoir, or etre, partakes of the signification of that tense. It 

may, therefore, often be used to denote customary action : — 

Des que $avais lu quelques pages, | As soon as I had read a few pages, 
je me promenais. I / used to take a walk. 

In such cases, it generally precedes or follows another verb in the 
imperfect. 

(3.) When the action is not a customary one, and the sentence 

commences with one of the adverbs quand, lorsque, aussitot que, des 

que, &c, the past anterior is generally used : — 

Des que feus lu quelques pages je I As soon as I had read a few pages, 
sortis. I / went out. 

§ 124. — The Two Futures. 

(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will be, or will take 
place, at a time not yet come : — 

Votre frere partira demain. | Your brother will go to-morrow. 

(2.) The future is used, iii French, after an adverb of time, in cases 

where the English use the present of the indicative : — 

Quand vous viendrez, vous appor- I When you come, you will bring my 
terez mon livre. | book. 

(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like 

the following: — 

Croira qui voudra, l'historien Ca- I Believe who will the historian Ca- 
pitolin et quelques autres ecrivains | pilolinus and several other writers, 
qui font danser les elephants sur la | who make elephants dance on a rope 
coTde. F^RAUD. 



BTSTAX OP THE VERB. — § 125, 126, 127. 439 



(4.) Th.e future anterior is used to signify what will have been at 
& future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where 
the past indefinite is used in English : — 

Quand faurai fini mes affaires, je I When I have finished my affair s } I 
vous irai vou\ Girault Duvivier. | will go and see you. 

§ 125.— The Two Conditionals. 

(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under 
a certain condition : — 



Nous gouterions bien des jouis- 
sances, si nous savions faire un bon 
usage du temps. 

Girault Duvivier. 



We should have many enjoyments, 
if we knew how to make a good use 
of time. 



(2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, 
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- 
filled :— 

II serait alle a la campagne, si le I He would have gone into the coun- 
temps le ltd avait permis. | try, if the weather had allowed him. 

(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, 
follow the conjunction si, meaning in case that. The indicative pres- 
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of 
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- 
dom by the Americans or English who have acquired a good knowl 
edge of the French language. 

§ 126. — The Imperative. 

(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, 
permission, or ent A °aty : — 



Connais-moi tout entire. 

Corneille. 

Ah ! demeurez, seigneur, etdaignez 
m'ecouter. Racine. 

Ne lardons plus, marchons et s'il 

faut que je meure, 
Mourons. Racine. 



Know mc entirely. 

AJt! remain, my lord, and deign 
to listen to me. 

Let us tarry no longer ; let us 'pro- 
ceed ; and, if J mvst, die, let us die. 



§ 127. — The Subjunctive. 
(1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : — 

Obeis si tu veux qu'on Vobeisse I Obey, if thou wishest that erne day 
in jour. Voltaire. I others may obey Uiee. 

(2.) A V3rb, which is governed by the conjunction que, must be 



440 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. §127, 



put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it may be ir the in 
dicative or conditional in English :* — — 

1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes qiie,beivg inter* 
rogative or negative, expresses a doubt : — 



Pensez-vous que vous reussissiez 
dans cette affaire 1 

Je ne voudrais pas assurer, qu'on 
k doive ecrire. Boileau. 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? 



Do you think that you will succeed 
in this affair ? 

I would not affirm, that it should 
be written. 

Do you believe he will come ? 



2. When the verb preceding que expresses consent, command, doubt 
desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, fear, apprehension: — 



Je permcts, je souhaite, je doute, je 
veux, fordonne, je suis surpris que 
vous veniez. 

Des ce meme moment, ordonnez 
que je parte. Racine. 

Tu veux, qu'en ta faveur nous 
croyions 1' impossible. Corneille. 

Je suis ravi, que nous logions en- 
semble. Destouches. 



I permit, I wish, I doubt, I desire, 
I order, I am surprised, that you may 
or should come. 

Order, that I may depart this very 
moment. 

Thou wishest that for thy sake we 
may believe in impossibilities. 

I am delighted that we happen to 
live together. 



3. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne : — 



Je crains, je tremble, j'appre- 
hende, j'ai peur, qu'il ne vienne. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



I fear, I tremble, I apprehend, 1 
am afraid he may come. 



(3.) The pronouns qui, que, lequel, dont, and the word ou, meaning 
in which, should be followed by the subjunctive, when that part of 
the sentence which precedes them, expresses an interrogation, or im- 
plies a wish, a doubt, or a condition. They must also be followed 
by the verb in the subjunctive, when they are preceded by a super- 
lative relative [§ 14, (9.)] : — 



Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui ne respecte 
le malheur 1 

La meilleure chose que vous puis- 
siez I aire. 

Choisissez une retraite ou vous 
oyez tranquille. 

(4.) A verb preceded by que, and one of the unipersonal verbs 
falloir, importer, convenir, suffii-e, valoir mieux, or by the verb tire, 
used unipersonal] y in connection with the adjectives fdcheux, juste, 



Is there any one who loes not re- 
spect misfortune. 

The best thing that you can do. 

Choose a retreat in which you may 
enjoy repose. 



* When two verbs are united by the conjunction que, the second is put 
in the indicative, if the first expresses something certain, positive: — 

On m'assure que vous avez re9U I They assure me that you have re* 
nne lettre de votre pere. | ceived a letter f rim yo%r father. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 128. 



441 



'ry'uste, suprenant, possible, or with a propos, temps, & desirer, & 
souhaiter, &c, must be put in the subjunctive [see L. 73, R. 1.] : — 



Jlfaut que vous veniez. 



II est temps que vous partiez pour 
Rome. 

II ns me plait pas, que vous alliez 
ia. L Academie. 

II ricst pas certain, que vous ayez 
?aison, 

(6.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si 
yue, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : — 



You must come, or it is necessary 
that you should come. 

It is time that you should go to 
Rome. 

It does not please me that you should 
go there. 

It is not certain, that you are right. 



Quelqu* 'effort quefossent les hom- 
ines, leur ncanfc parait par tout. 

BOSSUET. 

Qui que ce w#, parlez et ne le 
sraignez pas. Racine. 

Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- 
veu fait de l'ombro. Villefr*. 



Whatever effort men may make, 
their nothingness appears everywhere. 

Whoever he may be, speak, and do 
not fear him. 

However thin it may be, a hair has 
a shadow. 

(6.) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the 
subjunctive, see \ 143. 

§ 128. — The Infinitive. 

^1.) The infinitive represents the being, action or passion in an 

indefinite manner and without number or person : — 

To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly 
in men. 



The ardor of conquest (to conquer) 
yields to the fear of death (to die). 
To hate is a torment. 



Vouloir tromper le ciel. e'est folie 
a la terre. La Fontaine. 

L'ardeur de vainer e, c&de a la 
peur de mourir. Corneille. 

Hair est un tourment. 

Se*gur. 

(2.) The infinitive is often used substantively : — 

Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux I Or rather, why can I not at the. 
tomber du jour 1 Lamartine. | sweet close of the day ? 

(3.) The infinitive present is used in French after certain verbs, 
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction 
and : — 

Allez chercher mon pere. | Go and fetch my father. 

(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- 
ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and ttre excepted) or by 
a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive: — 

All that the fancied that she held } 



Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, 
lui echappait tout-a-coup. 

F£n£lon. 
Vos raisons sont trop bonnes 
d'elles-memes, sans etre appuyees de 
ces secours etrangers. 

Racine. 



escaped her suddenly. 

Your recsons are too good in Hum* 
selves to need that foreign assistance. 



19* 



442 



StNlAX OF THE VERB. — § 129, 130. 



Vous pensez tout savoir. 

Pieyre. 
Croit-il lepouvoir rompre? 

Th. Corneille. 



You think that you know every 
thing. 

Does he celieve he can break it ? 



(5.) The French language preferring the active to the passiv* 
voice, requires the use of the active verb in the following and simila 
oases wherein the English use the passive voice : — 

Oette dame est bien a plaindre. That lady is much to be pCtied* 

' Cette maison est a vendre. This house is to be sold. 

La chose est de trop peu de con- The matter is of too little u%, 

sequence pour la trailer serieuse- sequence to be treated seriously. 
menfc. 

Voltaire. 

§ 129. — Government of Verbs. 

Some verbs are in English governed by prepositions different from 
those which connect or govern the same verbs in French. Some, 
again, which are in English, joined by prepositions, require none 
between them in French. We give below, lists of verbs with the 
appropriate prepositions, according to the best French authorities. 

§ 130. — Verbs requiring no Preposition before another 
Verb in the Infinitive. 



Accourir, 


to run 


Observer, 


to notice, to observs 


Aimer mieux, 


to prefer 


Oser, 


to dare 


Aller, 


to go' 


Paraitre, 


to seem 


Apercevoir, 


to perceive 


Penser, 


to think, to fancy 


Assurer, 


to assure 


Pouvoir, 


to be able 


Avouer, 


to confess 


Pretendre, 


to pretend 


Compter, 


to intend 


Preferer, 


to prefer 


Confesser, 


to confess 


Protester, 


to protect 


Courir, 


to run 


Rappeler (se), 


to remember 


Croire, 


to believe 


Rapporter, 


to report 


Daigner, 


to deign 


Reconnaitre, 


to acknowledge 


Declarer, 


to declare 


Regarder, 


to look at 


Desirer, 


to desire 


Retourner, 


to return 


Devoir, 


t? be obliged 


Revenir, 


to come back 


Ecouter, 


io hear, to listen 


Savoir, 


to knoio 


Entendre, 


to hear 


Sembler, 


to seem 


Envoy or, 


to send 


Sentir, 


to feel 


Esperer, 


to hope 


Souhaiter, 


to wish 


Faire, 


to make 


Soutenir, 


to maintain 


Falloir, 


to be necessary 


Temoigner, 


to testify 


Imaginor (s"') ? 


to imagine 


Valoir mieux, 


to be ' 


Laisser, 


to let, to suffer 


Venir, 


to come 


Mener, 


to take, to lead 


Voir, 


to see 


Nier, 


to deny 


Vouloir, 


io be willing 



Jo pretends vous traiter comme I / intend to treat you as my i 
mon propre fils. Racine. [ son. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 8 131 



448 



Et le Rhin de ses fiojs ira grossir 

la Loire, 
Avant que tes faveurs sortent de 

ma memoire. Boileau. 



And the Rhine will go and swell 
the Loire with its waves, before the 
remembrance of thy goodness leave* 
my memory. 



§ 131. — Verbs requiring the Preposition A 
Infinitive. 



BEFORE AN 



Abaisser (s 5 ), 
Aboutir, 
Accorder (s') 5 
Accoutumer, 
Acharner (s'), 
Adm^ttre, 
Aguerrir (s'), 
Aider, 
Aimer, 

Appliquer (s') ; 
Apprendre, 
Appreter (s') 5 
Aspirer, 
Assigner, 
Assujettir (s'), 
Attacher (s'), 
Attendre (s'), 
Attendre, 
Augmenter (s'), 
Autoriser, 
Avilir (s'), 
Avoir, 
Avoir peine, 
Balancer, 
Borner (se). 
Chercher, 
Complaire, 
Concourir, 
Condamner (se). 

Condescendre, 

Consentir, 

Consister, 

Conspirer, 

Consumer, 

Contribuer, 

Convier, 

Co titer 

Determiner, 

Determiner (se), 

Disposer (se), 

Divertir (se). 

Employer, 

Encourager 

Engager, 

Enhardir, 

JEnseigner, 



to help in 

to like 

to endeavor, to apply 

to learn 

to prepare 

to aspire 

to summon 

to subject one's self 

to apply 

to expect 

to put off 

to increase 

to authorize 

to debase one's self 

to have 

to have difficulty in 

to hesitate 

to confine one's self 

to endeavor 

to delight in 

to co-operate 

to condemn 

self 
to condescend 
to consent 
to consist 
to conspire 
to destroy 
to contribute 
to invite 
to cost 
to induce 
to resolve 
to prepare one's self 
to amuse one's self 
to employ, to devote 
to encourage 
to induce 
to encourage 
to teach 



,}to 



The (5') placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. 

to stoop Etre, etre a lire, 
to end in a ecrire, &c. 

to agree Entendre (s'), 

to accustom Evertuer (s'), 

to strive Exceller, 

to admit, to permit Exciter, 

to become inured Exhorter, 



Exposer (s 5 ). 

Fatiguer (se), 

Habituer (s'), 

Hasarder (se), 

Hesiter, 

Instruire, 

Interesser. 

Inviter, 

Mettre, 

Mettre (se), 

Montrer, 

Obstiner (s)', 

Offrir (s'), 

Pencher, 

Penser, 

Perseverer. 

Persister, 

Plaire (se), 

Prendre plaisir, 

Preparer (se) 

Porter, 

Provoquer, 

Pousser, 

Reduire, 

Reduire (se), 

Renoncer, 

Repugner, 

Resigner (se), 

Rester, 

Reussir, 

Risquer, 

Servir, 

Songer, 

Suffire (not unip.) ; ^ suffice 

Tarder, to tarry 

Tendre, to tend 

Tenir, to intend, to aim 

Travailler, to labor 

Viser, to aim 

Vouer, to deveU 



be reading, 
writing, <f»c. 

to be expert in 

to strive 

to excel 

to excite 

to exhort 

to expose one's self 

to weary one's self 

to become used to 

to venture 

to hesitate 

to instruct 

to interest 

to invite 

to set, to put 

to commence 

to show, to teach 

to persist in 

to offer 

to incline 

to think, to intend 

to persevere 

to persist 

to delight in 

to take pleasure 

to prepare 

to induce, to excUe % 
to urge 

to urge 

to constrain 

to tend, to end 

to renounce 

to be repugnant 

to be reconciled 

to tarry too long 

to succeed 

to risk 

to serve 

to think, to intend 



444 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 132. 



I/homme n'aime point a s'occu- 
per de son neant, et de sa bassesse. 
Massillon. 
Avez-vous jamais pense a offrir a 
Dieu toutes ces souffrances % 

The same. 



Man does not like to corn 
his nothingness and his vileness. 

Have you ever thought of offering 
all these sufferings to God ? 



§ 132. — Verbs requiring the Preposition De before an 
Infinitive. 



Abstenir (s'), 
Accuser (s') } 
Achever, 
Affecter, 
Affliger (s'), 
Agir (s'), unip., 
Applaudir (s'), 
Apprehender, 
Avertir, 
Aviser (s'), 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir envie, 
Avoir garde, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir intention, 
Avoir le temps, 
Avoir le courage, 
Avoir peur, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir regret, 
Avoir tort, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir soin, 
Blamer, 
Bruler, 
Censurer, 
Cesser. 

Chagriner (se), 
Charger, 
Charger (se), 
Choisir, 
Commander, 
Conjurer, 
Conseiller, 
Contenter (se), 
Convaincre, 
Convenir, 
Corriger, 
Craindre, 
Decourager, 
Dedaigner, 
Defendre, 
Defendre (se) 
Defler, 
Dep&cber (se), 



to abstain 
to accuse one's self 
to finish 
to affect 
to grieve 
to be the question 
to rejoice 
to apprehend 
to warn 

to bethink one's self 
to want 

to be accustomed 
to intend 
to wish 
to take care 
to be ashamed 
to intend 
to have time 
to have courage 
to be afraid 
to be right 
to regret 
to be wrong 
to have reason 
to take care 
to blame 
to wish ardently 
to censure 
to cease 

to grieve one's self 
to desire, to intrust 
to take on one's self 
to clwose 
to command 
to beseech 
to advise 
to be satisfied 
to convince 
to become, suit 
to correct 
to fear 
to discourage 
to disdain- 
to forbid 
to decline 
to challenge , to dare 
to hasten 



Desaccoutumer " 

(se), 
Deshabituer 

(se), 
Desesperer, 
Desoler (se), 
Detourner, 
Differer, 
Dire, 

Disconvenir, 
Discontinue^ 
Dispenser, 
Dispenser (se), 
Disculper (se), 
Dissuader, 
Douter, 
Effbreer (s'), 
Effrayer (s'), 
Empecher, 
Empresser (s'), 
Epouvanter (s'), 
Entreprendre, 
Enrager, 
fitonner (s'), 
Bviter, 
Excuser (s'), 
^eliciter, 
Feindre, 
Flatter (se), 
Fremir, 
Garder (se), 
Gemir, 

Glorifier (se), 
Hasarder (se), 
Hater (se), 
Imputer, 
Indigner (s'), 
Ingerer (s'), 

Inspirer, 
Jurer, 
Manquer, 
Mediter, 
Meier (se), 
Menace r, 
Meriter, 
Moquer (se), 



•to leave off 

to despair 

to grieve 

to dissuade 

to put off 

to say, tell 

to deny 

to discontinue 

to dispense 

to forbear 

to apologize 

to dissuade 

to doubt 

to endeavor 

to be frightened 

to prevent 

to hasten 

to be frightened 

to undertake 

to be vexed 

to wonder 

to avoid 

to excuse one's sdj 

to congratulate 

to feign 

to flatter one's self 

to shudder 

to take care 

to lament 

to pride one's lelf 

to venture 

to hasten 

to impute 

to be indignant 

to take into one 1 

head 
to inspire 
to swear 
to fail 

to' think, to intend 
to meddle 
to threaten 
to deserve 
to laugh at 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 133. 



446 



Mourir (flgu,), 

Negliger, 

Nier, 

Pardonner, 

Parler, 

Passer (se), 

Permettre, 

Persuader, 

Piquer (se), 

Plaindre, 

Plaindre (se), 

Prendre garde ; 

Prendre soin 

Prescrire, 

Presser, 

Presser (se), 

Presumer, 

Prier, 

Promettre, 

Proposer, 

Proposer (se), 

Protester, 

Punir, 

Rebuter (se), 

Recomniander, 



to long 

to neglect 

to deny 

to excuse 

to speak 

to do without 

to permit 

to persuade 

to take pride in 

to pity 

to a)mplain 

to take care, heed 

to take care 

to prescribe 

to urge 

to hasten 

to presume 

to desire 

to promise 

to propose 

to intend 

to protest 

to punish 

to be weary 

to recommend 



Refuser, 
Regretter, 
Rejouir (se), 
Remercier, 
Repentir (se), 
Reprendre, 
Reprimander, 
Reprocher (se), 

Resoudre, 

Ressouvenir (se), 

Rire. 

Rougir, 

Scandaliser (se), 

Seoir (unip.) } 

Sommer, 

Soup9onner, 

Souvenir (se), 

Suffire (unip.), 

Suggerer, 

Supplier, 

Tenter, 

Trembler, 

Vanter (se), 



to refuse 

to regret 

to rejoice 

tr thank 

to repent 

to censure 

to reprimand 

to reproach one* 

self 
to resolve 
to remember 
to laugh 
to blush 
to take offence 
to become, suit 
to summon 
to suspect 
to remember 
to suffice 
to suggest 
to beseech 
to attempt 
to tremble 
to boast 



II vaut mieux hasarder de somver 
un coupable que de condamner un 
innocent. Voltaire. 

Le monde se vante de faire des 
heureux. Massillon. 



It is better to run the risk of sparing 
a guilty person, than to condemn an 
innocent one. 

The world boasts that it can rendei 
men happy. 



§ 133.— Rule. 

(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided 

they require the same regimen : — 

Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et I We love, we instruct, and we praise 
nous louons nos enfants. \ our children. 

This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being 
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. 

(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot 
govern one and the same noun; and therefore another form must be 
given to the sentence. We could not say in French, — \Jn gran 
nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tous les mois, — A 
great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- 
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition 
dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : — 



Un grand nombre de vaisseaux en- 
trent dans ce port et en sortent tous 
les mois. 



A large number of vessels enter thit 
port and lea ve it every month. 



See J 92, (1.) (2.), also note, and \ 140. 



446 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 134. 



§ 134. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) We have seen [} 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not accom 
panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the nouu 
which it qualifies : — 



Les inimities sourdes et cachees 
sont plus a craindre que les haines 
efuverles et dietaries. Noel. 



Quiet and concealed enmity is 
more to be feared than open and de- 
clared hatred. 



(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary tire, agrees 
in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the sub- 
ject be placed before or after it. [See § 135, (1.)] 

The sword is blunted ; the piles are 
extinguished . 

Humble virtue is often despised. 



Le fer est imousse ; les biichers 
sont iteints. Voltaire. 

La vertu obscure est souvent 
miprisie. Massillon. 

Les Grecs etaient persuades, que 
] a me est immortelle. 

Barth£lemy. 

Quand il vit l'urne ou etaient 
renfermies les cendres d'Hippias, il 
versa un torrent de larmes. 

F£n£lon. 



The Greeks ivere persuaded, 
the soul is immortal. 



thai 



When he perceived the urn in 
which vjere enclosed the ashes of Hip- 
vias, he shed a torrent of tears. 



(3.) The participle past, having avoir as its auxiliary, never agrees 
with the nominative : — 



Vous riez 1 Ecrivez qu'elle a ri. 

Racine. 
Mes amis out parte ; leurs coeurs 
BAnt attendris. Vol taire . 

Mes cousines out lu. 

Bescherelle. 



You laugh? 
laughed. 

My friends have spoken; 
hearts are moved. 

My cousins have read. 



Put down that she 
their 



(4.) The participle past, having avoir for an auxiliary, agrees with 
its direct regimen, when that regimen precedes the participle : — 



La lettre que vous avez ecrite. 

Pedro, qu'as tu fait de nos mon- 
tures 1 — Seigneur, je les ai attachies 
a la grille. Le Sage. 

Les meilleures harangues sont 
celles que le coeur a dicte.es. 

Marmontel. 

Je les ai cherches dans tous les 
coins, et je ne les ai pas trouvis. 
Mme. De Genlis. 



The letter which you have vjritten. 

Pedro, what hast thou done with 
our horses ? My lord, I have fast- 
ened them to the grate. 

The best addresses are those which 
the heart has dictated. 

I have sought them in every Garner, 
but have not found them. 



(5.) But, if the direct regimen is placed after the participle, this 
participle remains invariable : — 



J'ai re$u votre lettre. 
C'est la verita elle-meme qui lui 
a dicti ces belles parties. 

BOSSUET. 



/ have received your letter. 
It is truth itself which has dictated 
to him tJwsefine words. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 135. 447 



Les dieux ont attache presque 
autant de malheurs a la liberte. qu'a 
la servitude. Montesquieu. 



The gods have attached almost a 
many misfortunes to liberty , as to ser- 
vitude. 



§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules, 

(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal 
verbs [5 43, (6.)? \ 46, (2.), 5 56] take tire as an auxiliary, the past 
participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding 
section; but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with 
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes 
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : — 

Your sister has bought (Jierself) 
handsome dresses, i. e.,for herself. 

That woman has rendered herself 
unhappy. 

Achete in the first example does not vary, because se, placed before 
it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- 
sative, robes, is placed after the participle. Rendue in the second ex- 
ample varies,-because the word se, representing femme, is a direct 
regimen, and precedes the participle. 

We will add a few extracts as examples : — 

reflective pronouns 



Votre soeur s'est achete de belles 
robes. 

Cette femme s'est rendue mal- 
heureuse . 



Used as indirect Objects. 
Us ne se sont propose, pour exem- 
ple, que la constitution la plus sim- 
ple des anciens. Voltaire. 

They have proposed to tliemselves, 
as an example, only the most simple 
constitution of the ancients. 

II est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous 
nous sommes parte des yeux. 

Moliere. 
It is true, that she and I have spo- 
ken to each other with our eyes. 

Neanmoins, il s'etait conserve 
l'autorite principale. Bossuet. 

Nevc/th/jless, he had preserved to 
himself the principal authority. 



Used as direct Objects. 
Elles se sont proposees comme des 
mo deles de douceur. 

Quoted by Bescher. 
They have proposed themselves as 
poMerns of gentleness. 

La lacgue latine et la languo 
grecque se sont longtemps parlees. 
Lemare. 

The Latin and Greek languages 
were long spoken. 

La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- 
vee dans l'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- 
lence. Voltaire. 

The pastoral life which has been 
preserved in Asia, is not without opu- 
lence. 



(2.) When pronominal cr reflective verbs, of which the second 
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, 
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this 
latter pronoun or noun when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- 
riable, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (4.) (5.) of the 
preceding section • — 



448 STNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135. 



Invariable. 

Nous nous sommes reprochS fto. 
discretion. 

We have reproached ourselves with 
the indiscretion. 



Elle a obtenu toutes les faveurs 
quelle a voulu (obtenir). 
La maison que j'ai fait batir. 
Ces hommes se sont laisse battre. 



Variable. 

L'indiscretion que nous nous 
BOinmes reprochee. 

The indiscretion with which we 
have reproached ourselves. 

Or to render in English the relations the same as in French :— . 

The indiscretion which we have I We have reproached to ourselves 
reproached to ourselves. \ the indiscretion. 

(3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded by a 
direct regimen, is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such 
cases, when the direct regimen is under the government of the inSni- 
tive rather than of the participle, the latter of course remains un- 
changed : — 

La regie que j'ai commence a ex- | The rule which I commenced to 
pliquer. | explain. 

(4.) The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood; yet the 

participle must follow the same rule, as if it were expressed. The 

participle fait, followed by an infinitive, and laisse, followed by the 

infinitive of an active verb, are always invariable : — 

She obtained all the favors which 
she wished {to obtain). 

The house which I have had built. 

These men have suffered themselves 
to be beaten. 

(5.) In some cases, it may be difficult to ascertain whether the 
regime direct is under the government of the participle or of the 
infinitive. 

If the regime direct is to be represented as performing the action 
expressed by the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that 
regime in gender and number : — 

Je les ai vus secourir leurs enne- I J saw them relieving their enemies. 
mis. 

In this example it will be seen that les (the regime direct) is repre- 
sented as actually doing what is expressed by the infinitive, and that 
the infinitive itself is translated by the present participle. 

If, however, the regime direct is to be represented as suffering the 
action expressed by the infinitive, then the participle will remain un- 
changed, and the infinitive will be translated as a passive. Thus :— 

Je les ai vu secourir par leurs I / saw them relieved by their tiw- 
ennemis. | mies. 

Further examples : — 

Variable. Invariable. 

Je les ai vus repousser les enne- Je les ai vu repousser par let 
mis. ennemis. 

/ saw them repel (repelling) the I saw them repelled by ike ens 
enemies. mies. 



SYNTAX OP THE PABTICIPLE. — § 135. 



449 



Je les ai vus prendre la fuite. 

J saw them taking flight 

Je les ai vus frapper. 

J • aiv them striking. 

Les personnes que j'ai entendues 
thanter. 

The persons whom I heard sing- 
ing. 

(6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated with avoir 
and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : — 



Je les ai vu prendre sur le fait. 
/ saw them taken in the deed. 
Je les ai vu frapper. 
/ saw them struck. 
Les chansons que j'ai entendu 
chanter. 

The songs which I heard sung. 



How much good has she not done, 
during the few days that she reigned) 

The excessive heat which we have 
had, has caused much sickness. 



Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, 
pendant le peu de jours qu'elle a 
regne ! Fl£chier. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a 
fait, ont cause beaucoup de mala- 
dies. CONDILLAC. 

(7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have 
no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen.* 
The presence of en does not of course prevent the agreement of the 
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : — 

Avez-vous mange des fruits 1 
J' en ai mange. 

Tout le monde m'a offert des 
services, et personne ne m!en a 
rendu. M^e. de Maintenon. 



Have you eaten of the fruits ? I 
have eaten of them. 

Every body tendered me services, 
and no person rendered me any. 



En, preceded by the direct Regimen of the Participle. 

Cassius naturellement tier et im- 
perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte 
de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- 
ques injures qu'il en avait reoues. 
Vertot. 

Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en 
a venges. Corneille. 



Cassius naturally proud and im- 
perious, sought in the death of Cesar 
only revenge for some injuries which 
he had received from him. 



Render thanks to Heaven which has 
revenged us for it. 

(8.) Le peu has in French two meanings : it signifies a small 
quantity, or the want of. 

When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the 
noun which follows le peu : — 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui 
avez temoignee, lui a rendu le cou- 
rage. 



The little affection which you hav 
shown him, has restored his courage. 



* Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians Qd\\en at times a 
regime direct. We think with Bescherelle (Didionnaire national, page 
1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a 
part of it. or rather merely refers to it; the direct regimen being itself 
understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres? J'en ai. Have you books ? I 
have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques-uns. the direct object 
is understood after the verb. J : en ai quelques wis, and en is /ather a re- 
ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sea- 
tence will show this : / have of them a few. 



450 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 136, 137. 

When le peu is used in the sense of the want of, the participle ret 
mains unaltered. 

Le pm d'affection que vous lui I The want of affection which you 
avez temoigne, Fa decoirage. | have shown him, has discouraged him, 

§ 136. — The Adverb. — Rules. — Place of the Adverb. 

(1.) In French the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tenss 
is generally placed after the verb :— 



Que de gens prennent hardiment 
le masque de la vertu ! 

SCUDBRI. 



How many people assume boldly 
the mask of virtue ! 



(2.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogations, have the 
same place in French as in English : — 

Oil est votre frere 1 II est id. \ Where is your brother ? He is here. 

(3.) In compound tenses the adverb is placed between the auxi- 
liary and the participle : — 

Vous avez mat fait. You have done wrong. 

II nous a bien re£us. He received us well. 

(4.) Adverbs of manner ending in merit, may, in compound tenses, 
be placed before the participle or after it, when they are not very 
long, or followed by other modifying words. When, however, they 
are followed by such words they must be placed after the par- 
ticiple : — 

Cela est lieureusement exprime. ) ,™ . . , ., , 

Cela est exprime heureusement. ] That ts ha PP ll V «V™"*- 
II est venu heureusement a temps. | He came fortunately in time. 

(5.) The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day; demain, to-morrow; hier, 
yesterday, may be placed before or after the verb, but never between 
the auxiliary and the participle. The adverb davantage, more, must 
always follow the participle : — 



Nous sommes arrives aujourd'hui. 
Votre frere s'est blesse hier. 
Aujourd'hui il fait beau- temps ; 
demain il pleuvra. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



We came to-day. 

Your brother hurt himself yesterday. 
To-day, it is fine weather; to* 
morrow it will rain. 



§ 137. — Observations. 

(1.) Tl e adverbs of comparison, plus, moins, must be repeated be- 
fore every adjective which they modify: — 

II est moins paresseux 3t moins I He is less idle and obstinate than 
obstinc que son frere. | his brother. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 138 



451 



There would not be so muck trou- 
ble and misery in the world. . . . 

This bookseller has many good and 
bad works in his establishment. 



(2.) These adveibs and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- 
peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must always 
rome between peu, trop, beaucoup, tant, plus, mains, and a noun or an 
adjective, used substantively, must be repeated in every case : — 

II n r y aurait pas tant de peine et 
de misere dans ce monde. . . . 

Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons 
et de mauvais ouvrages dans son 
m?.gasm. 

(3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounded 
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). 

§ 138. — Adverbs of Negation. 

(1.) The negation is composed of ne placed before the verb, and 
fas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes 
between the auxiliary and the verb, in the compound tenses : — 



Heaven does not regulate things 
according to our wishes. 

Rome does not by any means con- 
fine offices to the nobility. 

Esteem is the true principle of con- 
sideration, which is not always at- 
tached to offices. 

Kings are by no means protected by 
laws. 



Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie 
pas les ckoses. Corneille. 

Rome ?t'attache point le grade a 
la noblesse. Corneille. 

L'estime est le vrai principe de 
la consideration, qui Tt'est pas tou- 
jours attache aux dignites. 

FONTENELLE. 

Les rois ne sont point proteges 
par les lois. Chenier. 

It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative, point, is 
stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in fact 
substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, wil* 
sufficiently explain this : 

N'allez pas means rtallez un pas, do not go or move one pace or 
step. N'allez point means n'allez un point, do not go, or move a 
point or dot. 

(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou- 
voir, oser, savoir and cesser : — 



Non. deesse ; jc ne puis souffrir, 
qu'un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- 
frage. F£n£lon. 

Dans son appartement. elle ?t'osait 
rentrer. Voltaire. 

Qui vit hai de tous, ne saurait 
longtcmps vivre. Corneille. 

La liberte ne cesse d'etre amia- 
ble. Corneille. 



No, goddess ; I cannot suffer that 
single one of their vessels perish. 



She dared not re-enter her apart- 
ment. 

He who lives hated by all, cannet 
exist long. 

Liberty cannot cease to be worthy 
of love. 

(3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is modified by an- 
other negative word, such as jamais, gutre, nul, nullement, aucun^ 



452 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. — § 138, 



yersonne, ni, ne, or followed by que, meaning only, and plus usea 
negatively : — 



L'ambition, seigneur, n , & guere 
de limites. Boursault. 

Nul w'est heureux, s'il ne jouit 
de sa propre estime. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

Personne w'aime a recevoir de 
conseils. De S£gur. 

Un mechant ne sait jamais par- 
donner. Noel. 



Ambition, my lord, has scarcely 
any limits. 

No one is happy, unless he can 
esteem himself. 

No one likes to receive advice. 

A wicked man never knows how to 
forgive. 



(4.) Ne used Idiomatically. 
The negative ne is used without any negative sense after the 
conjunctions a moins que, unless ; de peur que, de crainte que ; for 
fear that : — 



A moins que vous ne lui parliez. 
De peur qu'on ne vous trompe. 
L'Acad^mie. 



Unless you speak to him. 
For fear ; or lest you might be de- 
ceived. 



(5.) Ne is used in the same manner after autre, different ; autre- 
tnent, otherwise ; plus, moins, mieux, forming a comparison, and after 
the verbs craindre, avoir peur, trembler, apprehender, empecher : — 

II est tout autre qu'il w'etait. 



II parle autrement qu'il w'agit. 

II est plus modeste qu'il ne le 
parait. 

Je crains presque, je crains,qu'un 
songe ne m'abuse. Racine. 

Vous avez bien peur que je ne 
change d'avis. Marivaux. 

La pluie empecha qu'on ne se 
promenat dans les jardins. 

Racine. 

(6.) Remark. — Ne is not used when the verb of the preceding pre- 
position is accompanied by a negative : — 



He is very different from what he 
was. 

He speaks and acts very differently. 
He is more modest than he appears. 

I am almost afraid that (lest) a 
dream is deceiving me. 

You fear much, lest I may change 
my mind. 

The rain prevented their taking a 
walk in the gardens. 



II ne parle pas autrement qu'il 
agit. 

II nest pas plus modeste qu'il 
le parait. 



He does not speak otherwise tha*% 
he acts. 

He is not more modest than he ap- 
pears. 



(7.) After craindre, apprehender, avoir peur, trembler, we put pas 
after the ne when we wish for the accomplishment of the action ex- 
pressed by the second verb : — 



Je crains, qu'il ne vienne pas. 
J'ai peur, que mon frere ^'arrive 
fas. 



I fear, that he may not come. 
i / am afrai i, t/uit my brother nvtf 
not come. 



SYNTAX OP THE PREPOSITION. — §139. 453 



§ 139. — The Preposition. — Regimen of Prepositions *nd 
Prepositional Phrases. 

(1.) Prepositions may be divided according to their regimen, into 
three classes : — 

1st. Prepositions governing nouns without the aid of another 
preposition. They are :* — 



A, 

Be ; 
Bes, 

Apres, 

Attendu, 

Avant, 

AveQ, 

Chez, 

Concernant, 

Contre, 

Bans, 

Bepuis, 

Berriere, 

Bessus, 

Bessous, 

Bevers, 

Bevant, 

Burant, 

En, 

Entre, 

Envers, 

Excepte, 



at or to 

of, from 

from, as soon as 

after 

on account of 

before 

with 

with, at the house 

of 

touching 

against 

in 

since 

behind 

above 

under 

towards 

before 

during 

in 

between 

towards 

except 



Hors, 

Hormis, 

Malgre, 

Moyennant, 

Joignant, 

Nonobstant, 

Outre, 

Par, 

Pour, 

Parmi, 

Pendant, 

Sans, 

Sauf, 

Selon, 

Sous, 

Suivant, 

Sur, 

Toil chant, 

A travers, 

Vers, 

Voici, 

Voila, 

Vu, 



S except, {see hors fe« 
low) 
in spite of 
by means of 
joining 

notwithstanding 
besides 
by 
for 
among, amongst 



without 
safe, save 
according to 
under 

according to 
upon 
touching 
through 
toioards 
here is 
there is 
considering 



2d. Prepositions requiring the preposition de after them :f — 



Aupres, 
Autour, 
Ensuite, 
Faute, 
Hors, 
Loin, 
Pres, 
Proche, 
A cause, 
A cote, 
A couvert, 
A fleur, 
A force, 
A la faveur, 
A l'abri, 
A la mods, 



near 
around 
after 
for want 
out of 
far 
near 
near 

on account 
by the side 
under cover 
even with 
by dint 
by means 
under hh/tier 
accordiv.tr to 
fashion 



the 



A la reserve, 
A l'exceptron, 
A l'exclusi^n, 
A l'egard, 
A Tinsu, 
A l'opposite 
A moins, 
A raison, 

Au rez, 
Au deca, 
Au dela, 
Au dessous, 
Au dessus, 
Au dedans, 
Au dehors, 
Au devant, 



reserving 


excepting 
excluding 
with regard 


unknown 


contrary 
unless, for less 


by reason, at th 


rate 


on a level 


this way 

that way, beyond 

under 


above 


within 


without 


befcre. ic meet 



* Governing the accusative. 

t Governing the genitive or ablative. 



454 SYNTAX OP THE PREPOSITION. — § 140, 141. 



All milieu, 
Au lieu, 
An moyen, 
An niveau, 
Au peril, 
Au prix, 
Au risque, 



in the middle 
instead 
by means 
on a level 
at the peril 
at the price 
at the risk 



Au travers. 
Aux depens, 
Aux environs, 
En depit, 
Le long, 
Vis-a-vis, 



through 

at the expense 

in the "leigliborkood. 

in spite of 

along 

opposite 



3d> The prepositions followed by d are : — 

Attenant, joining | Par rapport, with regard 



Jusque, 



as far as 



Quant, 



as io 



(2.) Many of the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are 
formed from active verbs. Almost all the prepositions requiring de 
before the regimen, are formed of a preposition and a noun. Those 
requiring the preposition d, have a relation of tendency, of aim, &c 

§ 140. — Eemark. 

The rules which we have given, [§ 92, (1.) (2.) note, and 
§ 133], with regard to the regimen or government of verbs and adjec- 
tives, apply also to prepositions. When two prepositions require 
the same regimen, it is useless to repeat this regimen after each one, 
but, if they require a different regimen, it is necessary to give to 
each its proper object. It would, therefore, be incorrect to say, — Un 
magistrat doit toujours juger suivant et conformement aux lois : — A 
magistrate should always judge in accordance with, and conformably to y 
thelaws; because the preposition suivant governs the noun in the 
regime direct, that is without the aid of another preposition, and 
conformement governs the noun in the regime indirect by means of d. 
We should say: — 



Un magistrat doit toujours juger 
suivant les lois, et conformement a 
ce Relies prescrivent. 

Marmontel. 



A magistrate should always judge 
in accordance with the laws and con- 
formably to what they prescribe. 



§ 141. — Repetition of Prepositions. 

1. The prepositions d, de, en and sans, must be repeated before 
very regimen, be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb : — 

Ce monde ci n'est qu'une loterie 
de biens, de rangs, de dignites, de 
droits. Voltaire. 

L'eloquence est un art tres 
serieux, destine a instruire, a rc- 
primer les passions, a corriger les 
moeurs, a soutenir les lois, &c. 

F^N^LON. 

Telle est la multitude, et sans 
frein et sans lois. La Harpe. 



This world is but a lottery of 
goods, of ranks, of dignities, of 
rights. 

Eloquence is a very important an, 
destined to insl "net, to repress pas* 
sions, to correct manners, to support 
the laics, fyc. 

Such is the multitude, without re* 
sU aint and without lawt. 



StNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIO N. — § 142, 143. 455 



2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before overy 
noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have 
a similarity of meaning ; in which case the prepositions may be 
placed before the first regimen only, or before all, at the option of the 
speaker : — 



Je vous donne ceci pour vous et 
vour votre frere. 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mol- 
esse et (dans) la volupte. 



/ give you this for you and for 
your brother. 

He wastes his youth in effeminacy 
and voluptuousness. 



Je marche avant vous. 
Je marche devant vous. 



§ 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. 

(1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place; — Devant meam 
simply opposite, in front of: — 

( I walk before you, i. e. I walk 
} earlier than you, or J have the prece- 
f dence of you in walking. 
I walk in front of you. 

(2.) En, a, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- 
sive tnan that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a 
division of the earth, a kingdom, &c. ; a before the name of a town, 
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative 
adjective : — 

En Europe, en France, a Paris, 
dans ma chambre. 

En Amerique, ce sont les bisons 
qui ont une bosse sur le dos. 

Buffon. 
Dans l'Amerique meridionale le 
boeuf etait absolument inconnu. 
Buffon. 

(3.) Chez might be rendered in English by at the house of, with t 
among, &c. : — 



In Europe, in France, in Paris, 
in my room. 

In America the bisons have a 
bunch on their back. 

In South America the ox was en- 
tirely unknown. 



Chez votre pere ; chez vous. 

La condition des comediens etait 
infame chez les Romains, et hono- 
rable chez les Grecs. 

La Bruyere. 



At your father's ; at your house. 

The condition of comedians w^ 
infamous among the Romans, and 
honorable with the Gretks. 



143. — The Conjunction. — Government of Conjunctions. 
[See § 127.] 

(1 ) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infinitive, 
the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 

1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction when ia 
followed by the preposition de, and after all those which differ from 



466 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. — §143. 

prepositions, only because they are followed by a verb instead of * 

noun : — 

Etudiez diligemment afin de sur- I Study diligently that you may (in 
passer vos compagnons. | order to) surpass your companions. 

We think with M. Bescherelle that the words described in the pre- 
ceding rule, belong more properly to the prepositions than to the 
onj unctions. 

(2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive 
after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English. 
Those marked with an asterisk require ne before the verb [{ 138, 
(4.)] :- 



Afin que, in order that 

*A moins que, unless 
Au cas que, if 

Avant que, before that 

Bien que, although 

*Be crainte que, for fear 
*De peur que, lest 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 
Jusqu'a ce que. 
Loin que, 



in case 
although 
till, until that 
far fr 07)i, not that 



Malgre que, although 

Nonobstant que, notwithstanding 



Non que, 
Non pas que, 
Pose que, 
Pour que, 
Pourvu que, 
Quoique, 
Sans que, 
Soit que, 
Suppose que, 



not that 
not that 
supposing that 
that, in order thai 
provided that 
although, though 
without that 
whether 
suppose that 



Although I can scarcely bear my 
misfortunes, I would rather suffer 
under them, than deserve them. 

In case you persist, I must men- 
tion your bad health to the prince 
and even to the king. 



Quoiqu'a peine a mes maux je 

puisse re sister. 
J'aime mieux les soufFrir, que de 

les meriter. Racine. 

En cas que vous persistiez, il fau- 
dra que j'allegue au prince et au 
roi meme votre mauvaise sante. 
F*n£lon. 

(3.) The following conjunctions : — De maniere que, de sorte que, 
en sorte que, so that ; tellement que, in such a manner that ; si ce n'est 
que, sinon que, unless that, but that; govern the following verb in 
the indicative or conditional modes, when the preceding verb ex- 
presses a positive assertion ; but they govern the subjunctive, when 
the preceding verb expresses a desire or a command : — 



II se conduisit tres mal, de sorte 
qu'il fut contraint de se retirer. 

Faites en sorte qu'on soit content 
de vous. 



He behaved very ill, so that he was 

obliged to loithdraw. 

Behave in such a manner that 
people may be pleased with you. 

(4.) When there are in a sentence two or more verbs governed by 
a conjunction, que must be placed before the second and the follow- 
ing verbs, or the conjunction itself may be repeated : — 

Since we plead, we die and we be~ 
come sick, wc must have physicians 



Puisqu'on plaide, qu'on meurt, et 

qu'on devient malade, 
.11 faut des medecins, il faut des 

avocato. La Fontaine. 



we must have lawyers. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. §144. 46 V 



Si vous partez et que vous vou- 
liez me prendre avec vous. 

Bescherelle. 



If you go and wish to tab, me with 
you. 



(5.) The other conjunctions generally govern the same tense in 
French as in English : — 



Fais du bien aujourd'hui puisque 
tu. vis encore. Villefr^. 

Rien neblouit les grandes ames, 
pcrcequc rien n'est plus haut qu'el- 
les. " Massillon. 



Do good to-day, since thou yet 
livest. 

Nothing dazzles great minds, be 
cause nothing is higher than they. 



(6.) With regard to the conjunction, si, see \ 125, (3.) 

§ 144. — Collocation of Words. 
(1.) The place of the different parts of speech has been mentioned 
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts 
of the work. A resume of the principal rules of construction may, 
however, not be unacceptable here. 

(2.) The collocation of words is the order according to which the 
several words which form a sentence should follow one another. 
This order is fixed for the several forms of sentences, affirmative, 
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the 
practice of the best writers. 

(3.) The construction of the affirmative sentence is as simple in 
French as it is in English. The following is the arrangement of the 
words : — 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Adverb. 

Le marchand est ici. 

The merchant is here. 

(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an adjective, or another 
attribute, the order is as follows : — 



L The Subject. 


2. lis Attribute* 


3. The Verb. 


4. The Adverb. 


Le marchand 


anglais 


est 


ici. 


The merchant 


English 


is 


here. 


Le "ds 


de votre ami 


est 


la. 


The son 


of your friend 


is 


there. 


Le marteau 


de fer 


est 


ici. 


Tlie hammer 


of iron 


is 


here. 


Le bateau 


a vapeur 


est 


la. 


Tlve boat 


steam 


is 


t/icre. 



* Some adjectives [(> 85, (11.)] are generally placed before the noun, 
when used alone with a noun ; but when another adjective comes with 
them, they follow the noun :— un petit homme, a little man ; un homme 
petit et gros, a short, stout man ; others have a different meaning before 
the noun or after it [% 86.] 

20 



458 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — § 144, 

(5.) When the attribute is placed in apposition with the subject, the 
construction is the same in the two languages : — 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Attribute. 

Le marchand est anglais. 

The merchant is English. 

(6.) When the verb is in a compound tense, many adverbs are 
placed between the auxiliary and the participle : — 

J , The Subject 2. The Auxiliary. 3. The Adverb. 4. TheParticiple, 
Nous avons souvent lu. 

We have often read. 

(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in merit, other long adverbs, 
and the adverbs of time and place, aujourd'hui, demain, hier, ici, Zd, 
are not placed between the auxiliary and the participle [§ 136, 
L.41,5.]:— 

Nous avons ecrit aujourd'hui, We have written to-day. 

(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed 
after the verb : — 

1. Subject 2. Attribute. 3. Verb. 4. Adverb. 5. Regime Direct 
L'ecolier attentif apprend toujours sa \q§qu. 

The scholar attentive learns always his lesson. 

(9.) When there are two regimens of equal length, or nearly so, 
the direct prece'des the indirect : — 

1. Subject 2. Verb. 3. Direct Regimen. 4. Indirect Regimen, 
Jean a donne le livre a mon pere. 

John has given the book to my father. 

(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, 
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the 
latter is placed first : — 
1. Sub;. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. 4. Direct Regimen. 

Jean a donne a mon pere le livre qu'il lui avait promis. 

John has given to my father the book which he had promised him. 

(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those 
representing the indirect regimen, preceded by to, expressed or un* 
derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French : — 
I. Subject 2. Direct Reg. 3. Verb. I. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb 

Nous les voyons. Nous leur parlous 

We them see. We to them speak. 

(12.) In the imperative used affirmatively, those pronouns folio* 

the verb: — 



1. Verb. 2. Direct Reg. 
Vojez- les. 

S"» them. 



1. Verb. 2. Ind. Reg. 
Parlez- leur. 

Speak to them 



OOLLOOATION 1? WORD S. — § 144, 459 

(13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- 
tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the 
direct : — 

1. Subject 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Direct Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul nous le donne. 

Paul to us it gives. i 

Paul vous le donne. 

Paul to you it gives. 

(14.) Should, however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, 
it is placed after the direct : — 

1. Subject 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul le lui donne. 

Paul it to him gives. 

(15.) In the imperative used affirmatively, the direct regimen pre- 
cedes always the indirect : — 



1 . Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les nous. 

Give them to us. 



1. Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les- lui. 

Give them to him. 



(16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- 
erally preceded in English by a preposition other than to, is, in French, 
placed after the verb : — 



1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Je parle de lui. 

/ speak of him. 



1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Je parle avec lui. 

/ speak with him. 



(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be- 
fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, &c. after it: — 

1. Subj. 2. Negat 3. Verb. 4. Negat 

Je ne vois pas. 

J not see not. 

Je ne lis jamais. 

J not read never. 

(18.) When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is 

placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxiliary 

and the participle : — 



1. Subject. 


2. Negat. 


S.Reg. 4. 


Aux. 


5. Negat. 6. 


Participle. 


Je 
/ 


ne 
not 


P 

him 


ai 

have 


pas 
not 


vu. 

seen. 


Je 


ne 
not 


leur 
to them 


ai 

have 


jamais 

never 


parlo. 
spoken. 


Je 
/ 


ne 

not 


leur 
to them 


ai 

have 


rien 
nothing 


donne\ 
given. 



(19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 



460 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — §144. 

mens, are placed before the imperative, used negatively. They art 
subject to the rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 

1. NegaL 2. Reg. 3. Reg, 4. Verb. 5. Negat. 
[Rule (13.)] Ne nous le donnez pas. 

Not to us it give not. 

[Rule (14.)] Ne le lui donnez pas. 

Not it to him give not. 

(20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has p 
noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following 
examples will show the order of the words in French : — 

1. The Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Duplicate Sub;. 4. Regimen. 

Le marchand resoit- il son argent 1 

The merchant receives he his money ? 

Mon frere ecrit- il des lettres 1 

My brother .writes he letters? 

(21.) When the sentence commences with oh, where; que, what; 

quel, what, which ; combien, how much, how many ; the noun may be 

placed after the verb : — 

Ou est votre ami'? Where is your friend? 

Que dit votre pere 1 What says your father ? 

(22.) The construction of interrogative sentences, in which the 
subject of the verb is a pronoun, is very simple. The pronoun is 
placed after the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in 
compound tenses : — 

1, Regimen Ind. 2. Verb. 3. Subject. 4. Direct Reg. 

Nous envoyez- vous notre argent 1 

To us send you our money? 

1. Reg. Ind. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 4, Part 5. Direct Reg. 
Leur avez- vous donne cet argent 1 

To them have you given that money ? 

(23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative ani 

nterrogative, is as follows : — 

1. IstNeg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Direct Reg. 
Ne nous envoyez- vous pas de l'argent '» 

Not to us send you not money ? 

(24.) In a compound tense : — 

1. IstNeg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 6. 2d Neg. 6. Part. l.Dir.Reg 

Ne nous avez- vous pas envoye de l'argentl 

Not to us have you not sent money ? 

(25.) The first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
most verbs, which have in that person only one syllable, and of a fe* 



USB OP CAPITAL LETTERS. § 145. 461 

ethers having more than one syllable, but ending in s, car not admit 

of the construction mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To 
render the sentence interrogative, est-ce-que is prefixed to the affir- 
mative form of the verb : — 

Est-ce-que vous parlez? 
Is it that you speak? 
Do you speak? 

Est-ce-que je pretends lui parler % 

Is it that I pi'ctend to speak to him ? 

Do I pretend to speak to him ? 

(26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- 
terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce-que to the 
affirmative form : — 

Est-ce-que vous lisez 7 Do you read? 

Est-ce-que votre frere est arrive 1 | Is your brother arrived ? 

(27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative 
sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : — 



Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- 
lant de la zone torride, succede 
une nuit universelle et profonde ; a 
la parure d'un printemps cternel, 
la nudite des plus tristes hivers. 
Raynal. 



Suddenly to the vivid and brilliant 
day of the torrid zone, succeeds a 
universal and profound night ; to the 
attire of an eternal spring, the naked* 
ness of the saddest winters. 



(28.) The article, the demonstrative, and the possessive adjective 
are repeated before every word which they determine [L. 86]. 

(29.) Pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, may be repeated before 
every verb [} 99, L. 87]. 

(30.) Pronouns, used as regimens of verbs, must be repeated be- 
fore every verb [§ 105, L. 87]. 

(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word which 
they govern [J 141]. 

§ 145. — Use of Capital Letters. 

The only important difference existing in the two languages, in the 
use ot capital letters, is that the French do not use a capital for an 
adjective, unless it be used substantively, and applied to a person or 
persons, or unless it form an integral part of a name : — 

Ce monsieur est-\\fra?igais? 

C'est un Frangais. 

Est-il franrais ? 

Cette dame est-elle anglaise 1 

C'est une Anglaise. 



Elle est anglaise. 
Apprenez-vous le franrais 1 
Je n'apprends pas l'anglais. 



Is that gentleman French ? 

He is a Frenchman. 

Is he French? 

Is that Uuhj English ? 

She is an English lady. 

She is English. 

Do you learn Fhcnch ? 

I do not learn English, 



462 ANALOGY OF ENGLISH AND 7BBNOH. §147. 

J'att ends leFran^ais qui demeure I I am waiting for tlie Frenchman 
ici % I who lives here. 

Le departement des Basses- Alpes. The department of the Lower Alps. 
Le royaume des Pays-Bas. The kingdom of iiie Netherlands. 

§ 146. — Elision 
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vowel of a word, and 
the substitution of an apostropliG (') before words commencing with 
a vowel or an h mute : — 

a is only elided in la, article or pronoun — L'ame,tfie soul, instead 
of la time; 1'humilite, humility, instead of la humilite; je 
Tadmire, je l'honore, I admire her, I honor her, instead of je 
la admire, je la honore. 
E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce (meaning 
it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, parceque, quoique, puisque,jusque^ 
quelque, — l'ami, the friend ; l'homme, the man. 
I is only elided in si coming before il, he ; ils, they. 
u is never elided. 

(2.) Although the words onze and onzieme commence with a 
vowel, the article is not elided before them, le onze, le onzieme. 

§ 147. — Analogy between many English and French 

Words. 

(1.) Most words ending in al, ce, de, ge, le, me, ant, ent, ion, are the 
same in both languages : — 
al Mineral, general, animal, principal, fatal. 
ce Race, prudence, notice, sacrifice, edifice. 
DE Parade, grade, ambuscade, parricide, prelude. 
ge Courage, page, vestige, orange, deluge. 
le Docile, capable, table, possible, fertile, ridicule. 
ne Doctrine, mine, scene, famine, machine, heroine. 
ant Dormant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant 
ent Present, content, accident, president, resident. 
ion Question, fraction, legion, pension, religion. 

(2.) Most words ending in ary, ory, gy, ncy, ty, ous, or, ine^ \ve 
become French by changing : — 
ary into aire Necessaire, militaire. 

Memoire, gloire, victoire. 
Energie, geologic, effigie. 
Clemence, decence, excellence 
Charite, alacrite, divinite. 
Industrieux, curieux, fameux. 



1 



ORY 


t< 


OIRE 


GY 


(C 


GIE 


NCY 


« 


NCE 


TY 


(C 


l£ 


OUS 


« 


EUX 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. § 148. 



463 



or into eur Candeur, ardeur, acteur. 
ine " in Masculin, feminin, clandestin. 
ive " if Actif, passif, massif. 

§ 148. — Gallicisms or Idiomatic Phrases. 
Gallicisms, or idioms peculiar to the language, are very numerous 
in French. We have already in the first part of this work, presented 
ii considerable number of such expressions, and will here give a 
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ex- 
ercises. In proverbial sayings, we have endeavored to give the equi- 
valent English phrase. We would advise the student to analyze 
carefully the following idiomatic sentences, and particularly those 
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro- 
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and customs 
of a nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the ac- 
quisition of a language : — 



Ce piano n'est pas d'accord. 
Arrangez cette affaire a l'amiable. 
Nous sommes d'accord sur ce point. 
Quel age donneriez-vous a cet 

homme 1 
Cela fera bien mon affaire. 
Allons au fait. 

Vous mettez ma patience a bout. 
Ce sont deux tetes dans un bonnet. 
Vous avez toujours ces propos a la 

bouche. 
Entre nous soil dit, ce n'est pas la 

mer a boire. 
Vous ne savez plus de quel bois 

faire flcche. 
J'avais ce mot sur le bout des 

levres. 
C'est son brns droit. 
II nous a ferme la porte au nez. 
Vous allez toujours droit au but. 
En tout cas ; je ieur remettrai votre 

lettre. 
Ne voyez-vous pas qu'il tit sous 

capo 1 
Nous avons pique des deux. 
Nous en sommes sur ce chapitre. 
Oh ! pour ie coup, von ! avez raison. 
Cet orateur bat la campagne. 

Parlez-mo! u cceur ouvert. 
Nous avons couche a la belle etoile. 
Je n'ai quo fa ire do son argent. 
J'ai fait si bien mon compte, que 

j'ai obtonu cet argent. 
Cela ne me fait rien du tout. 



This piano is out of tune. 

Settle that business amicably. 

We agree upon that point. 

How old would you take that man to 

be? 
Tho.t will suit me exactly. 
Let us come to the point. 
You exhaust my patience. 
They are both of the same mind. 
You always use those expressions. 

Between ourselves, the thing is not so 

very difficult. 
You are put to your last shift. You 

are at yov.r wifs end. 
I had that word at my tongue 1 s end. 

He is his right hand. 

He shut the door in our face. 

You come always to the main point. 

At all events, I will give them your 

letter. 
Do you not see that he laughs in hti 

sleeve ? 
We put spurs to our horses. 
We are speaking about this matter. 
Oh! for this lime, you are right. 
That speaker wanders from his 

jecl. 
Speak to me without reserve, openuu 
We slept in (he open air. 
I do not want his money. 
I managed matters so well, that 1 ofr 

t dined, that money. 
That is nothing at all to me. 



464 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. § 148. 



Faites- moi grace de tous ces details. 

C'en est fait. 

Comme vous voila fait ! 

II m'a prie de vous faire ses amities. 

En attendant, faites-lni mes com- 
pliments. 

Chemin faisant, nous le rencon- 
trames. 

Le plus fort est fait. 

Je soldat n'a jamais vu le feu. 

II s'est bien tire d'affaire. 

Nous sommes au fort de l'hiver. 

Qu'allait-il faire dans cette galere ? 

C'est un homme comme il faut. 

L? 'rap est hors de prix. 

II se fit jour a tr avers les ennemis. 

Je vois cela dans un autre jour. 

Dites-moi au juste ce qu'il en est. 

II ne laisse pas de depenser beau- 
coup. 

C'est une autre paire de manches. 

C'est un tour de son metier. 

Vouf l'avez mis au pied du mur. 

Voila qui va le mieux du monde. 

Eevenons a nos moutons. 

Cela est d'un bon naturel. 

Ces arbustes grandissent a vue d'ceil. 

Je regarde cela d'un autre ceil. 

II a vendu sa montre pour un mor- 
ceau de pain. 

Vous lui avez donne la monnaie de 
sa piece. 

II a trouve a qui parler. 

Vous etes un homme de parole. 

Je lui ai coupe la parole. 

Vous avez cela sur le coeur. 

II se creuse la cervelle. 

Le jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 

Vous avez pris le change. 

Chansons que tout cela. 

Les bons comptes font les bonsamis. 

II met la charrue devant les bceufs. 

Vous batissez des chateaux en Es- 
pagne. 

Je suis au comble de la joie. 

Ce n'est pas a vous de lui reprocher 
sa faute. 

II est tombe de Scyila en Charybde. 

Oethomme cherche a vous enconter. 
Nous sommes en pays de connais- 

sance. 
La sentinelle nous coucha en joue. 
Ce maiade n'en reviendra pas. 
Nous sommes au courant de tout 

cela. 



Spare me all those particulars. 
It is all over. All is gone. 
WJiat a condition you are in ! 
He wished me to give his love to y?u. 
In the mean white, present my cor&* 

pliments to him. 
Going along, we met him. 

The most difficult part is done. 
That soldier has never smelt gw&* 

powder. 
He came off very well. 
We are in the depth of winter. 
What business had he there ? 
He is a gentleman. 
That cloth is extravagantly dear. 
He forced his way through the enemy t 
I see that in a different light. 
Tell me exactly hoiv the matter stands, 
He spends a great deal, nevertheless 

That is quite another thing. 

That is one of his tricks. 

You left him no excuse. 

That is going on finely. 

Let us resume our subject. 

That bespeaks a good disposition. 

Those shrubs grow perceptibly. 

I look upon that in a different light. 

He sold his watch for a mere song. 

You paid him in his awn coin. 

He met with his match. 

You are a man of your word, 

I cut him short. 

You cannot digest that. 

He racks his brain. 

The toll is more than the grist. 

You started upon tlte wrong scent 

That is all nonsense. 

Short reckonings make long friends. 

He puts the cart before the horse. 

You build castles in the air. 

I am overjoyed. 

II does not become you to reproacX 
him with his fault. 

He fell from the frying pan into the 

fire. 
That man- is trying to deceive you. 
We are here among acquaintances. 

The sen Unci levelled his gun at us. 
That sick man will not recover. 
We are per ft jly acquainted with ad 
that. 



IDIOMATIC PHRASE S. 8 148. 



465 



Cela fait dresser les cheveux. 

lis chantent but une autre note. 

Ce vers est frappe au bon coin. 

Je lui ai donne le clef des champs. 

II ne sait ou donner de la tete. 

Vous vous donnez tonjours raison. 

II a donne dans le piege. 

Cela lui donne de Phumeur. 

Je n'entre point la dedans. 

II entre dans vos interets. 

Je m'ernbarrasse fort peu de cela. 

Son aruitie est a toute epreuve. 

Vos propos nrechaurfent les oreilles. 

Finissez ce badinage. 

Repose z-vous-en sur moi. 

Cette marcliandise n'a point de de- 
bit. 

II est toujours sur le qui-vive. 

Cette maison est a vendre au plus 
offrant et dernier encherisseur. 

De quelle part ce domestique vient- 
il?- 

Doublons le pas ; il se fait tard. 

J'y vais de ce pas. 

Passe pour ceci. 

II faut en passer par la. 

Vous m'avez peint avec de beaux 

traits. 
Pour moi. je m'y perds. 
Peu s'en fallut qu'il ne me frappat. 
Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en 

pensez. 
II nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. 
Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on 

vous prenait au mot. 
Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. 
Le malade n'en pouvait plus. 
Je l'ai envoyc promener. 
Le bon homme que c'est ! 
Brisons la dessras. 
II en fut quitte pouT ia peur. 
Vous en etes quitte a bon marche. 
Cela n'est pas de refus. 
Je l'ai entrevu ce matin. 
Je ne m'en soucie guere. 
II a des affaires par dessus la tete. 
Qu a cela ne tienne. 
A la bonne heure. 
Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est trompe. 
Ce n'est pas la Tin trait d'ami. 
Tieve de compliments. 
Je vous vois venir, monsieur. 
Voila comme vous etes. 
Tout cela va le mieux du monde. 
Vous n'y etes pas. 
Vous voila bien avance. 



That makes one's hair stand on end. 
They have changed their tone. 
That verse bears the rigid stamp. 
I sent him about his business. 
He does not know which way to turn. 
You pretend to be always in the right. 
He fell into the snare. 
That puts him out of temper. 
That is no business of mine. 
He interests himself for you. 
1 care very Utile about that. 
His friendship will stand any test. 
Your expressions provoke my ange 
Put an end to this trifling. 
Trust to me about this matter. 
This article has no sale. 

He is always on the watch. 

That house is to be sold to the Molest 

bidder. 
Who sent that servant ? 

Let us mend our pace ; it is g< owing 

late. 
I am going thither this mom- nt. 
Let this pass. 

We must submit to those te?,ns. 
You have given a fine account of me. 

As for me, I cannot see into it. 
He came very near striking me. 
Just tell me what you think of it. 



He casts a mist before our eyes. 

Yon would be at a great loss, if you 

were taken at your word. 
Do not blame me about this, 
The patient was quite exhausted. 
I told him to mind his bunness. 
What a simple man he is ! 
No more of this. 
He escaped, though frightened. 
You came off c/teaply. 
That is not to be refused. 
I had a glimpse of him this morning . 
/ care but little about it. 
He is over head and ears in business. 
That shall not make us disagree. 
Well and good. 

Cunning as he is, he made a mistake. 
That is not acting like a friend. 
No more compliments. 
I see what you are about, sir. 
That is the uou. 

All goes on as well as possible. 
That is not it. 

You are much the better for it. 
20* 



READING LESSONS, 



I.— FABLES. 



1. LE CHENE ET LE SYCOMORE. 

Un ch£ne etait plante pres d'un sycomore. Le dernier poussa &e% 
[§78, L. 12. 3.] feuilles des le commencement du printemps, et me* 
prisa Tinsensibilite du [L. 5. 1.] premier. Voisin, dit (dire, ir.) le 
ehene, ne compte pas trop sur les caresses de cLaque zephyr incons- 
tant. Le froid peut (pouvoir, 3. ir.) revenir. Pour moi, je ne suis 
(elre, 4. ir.) pas presse de pousser des feuilles ; j'attends que la cha- 
leur soit (eire) constante. II avait raison : [L. 8. 1.] une gelee de- 
truisit (detruire, 4. ir.) les beautes naissantes [L. 13.] du sycomore. 
Eh bien! dit Pautre, n'avais-je pas raison de ne me pas presser? 

Ne comptez ni sur [§ 77, (1.) (2.)] les caresses ni sur les protes- 
tations excessives; [L. 13. 5.] elles sont ordinairement de courte 
duree. Perrin. 

2. LE LOUP DEGUISE. 

Un loup, la terreur d'un troupeau, ne savait (savoir, 3. ir.) com- 
ment faire pour attraper des [L. 12. 3.] moutons ; le berger etait con- 
tinuellement sur ses gardes. L'animal vorace s'avisa de se deguiser 
[{ 43, (6.)] de la peau d'une brebis qu'il avait enlevee ["{ 134, (4.) J 
quelques jours auparavant. Le stratageme lui [L. 27.], reussit pen- 
dant quel que temps ; mais enfin, le berger decouvrit l'artince, agaca 
les chiens contre lui ; ils lui [L. 27.] arracherent la toison de iessus 
les epaules, et le mirent (mettre, 4. ir.) en pieces. 

Ne vous fiez pas toujours a l'exterieur. Un homme de jngement 
et de penetration ne juge pas selon les apparences. Perrin. 

3. L'ANE ET SON maItre. 

Un ane trouva par hasard une peau de lion, [L. 5. 3.] et s'en [} 39^ 
(17.)] revetit, (revetir, 2, ir.) Ainsi deguise il alia dans les for£t% 



BEADING LESSONS. 467 

et repandit partout la [L. 8. 2.] terreur et la consternation. Toub 
les animaux fuyaient (fuir, 2. ir.) devant lui. Eniin il rencon- 
tra s.on maitre qu'il voulut epouvanter aussi ; mais le bon Lomme 
aperoQvant quelque chose de [L. 18. 3.] long, aux deux cotes de la 
tete de Panimal, lui dit : maitre baudet, quoique vous soyez [L. 73. 
4.] vetu comme un lion, vos oreilles vous trahissent et montrent que 
vous n'etes reellement qirun ane. 

Un sot a toujours un endroit qui le decouvre et le rend ridicule. 
L'aifectation est un juste sujet de mepris. Perrin. 

4. L'AIGLE ET LE HIBOU. 

Laigle et le hibou, apres avoir [L. 21. 2.] fait longtemps la guerre, 
convinrent d'une paix ; les articles preliminaires avaient ete prealable- 
ment signes par des [L. 12. 3.] ambassadeurs : Particle le plus essen- 
tiel etait que le premier ne mangerait pas les petits de l'autre. — Les 
connaissez (connaitre, 4. ir.) vous, demanda le hibou ? — Non, repon- 
dit 1'aigle. — Tant pis. — Peignez, (peindre, 4. ir.) les moi [L. 28. 4.] ou 
me les montrez ; [5 100, (6.)] foi d'honnete aigle je n'y [§ 39, (18.)] 
toucherai jamais. — Mes petits, repondit l'oiseau nocturne, sont mi- 
gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont la voix douce et melodieuse [L. 13. 
5.] ; vous les reconnaitrez aisement a ces marques. — Tres bien, je ne 
1'oublierai pas. II arriva un jour que 1'aigle apercut dans le coin 
d'un rocher de [L. 8. 4.] petits monstres tres laids, rechignes, avec un 
air triste et lugubre. Ces enfants, dit-il, n'appartiennent (apparte?iir, 
2. ir.) pas a notre ami ; mangeons les : aussitot il se mit k en [L. 15. 
7.] faire un bon repas. L'aigle n'avait pas tort [L. 8. 1.] Le hibou 
lui avait fait une fausse peinture de ses petits ; ils n'en avaient pas le 
moindre trait. 

Les parents devraient (dev oir, 3. reg), &\iter avec soin ce faible en- 
ters leurs enfants, il les rend souvent aveugles sur leurs defauts. 

Perrin. 

5. LE PAYSAN ET LA COULEUVRE. 

Un paysan, allant au bois avec un sac pour y [o 39, (18.)] mettre 
des noisettes, (c'etait [L. 82. 1.] la saison,) trouva une couleuvre. 
Ah ! ah ! dit le manant, je te tiens (tenir, 2. ir.) & present ; tu ne 
m'echapperas pas : tu viendras (venir, 2. ir.) dans ce sac et tu mourras 
{rnourir,2. ir.) L'anirnal pervers, (je veux dire [L. 32. 5.] la cou- 
leuvr.% et non pas Fhornme,) lui dit : qu'ai-je fait pour meriter un 
pareil traitement ? — Ce que tu as fait 'i Tu es le symbole de ringra- 
titud?, le plus gdieux de tons les vices. — S'il faut (falloir^ 3. ir.) que 



468 READING LESSONS. 

les ingrats ineurent, repliqua hardiment le reptile, vous vous conaam- 
nez vous meme : de tous les animaux Fhomme est le plus ingrat. — » 
L'homme ! dit le paysan, surpris de la hardiesse de la couleuvre ; je 
pourrais (pouvoi?*, 3. ir.) t'ecraser dans l'instant, mais je veux (vou* 
loir, 3. ir.) m'en rapporteV a quelque juge. — J'y consens [$ 39, (18.)] 
'Une vache etait a quelque distance : on [§ 41, (4.) (5.)] 1'appelle, elle 
vient (venir, 2. ir.) ; on lui propose le cas. — C'etait bien la peine de 
m'appeler, dit-elle ; la chose est claire ; la couleuvre a raison. Je 
nourris rhomme de mon lait ; il en fait du beurre et du fromage ; et 
pour ce bienfait, il mange mes enfants. A peine sont-ils nes (naitre, 
4. ir.) qu'ils sont egorges [§ 134, (2.)] et coupes en mille morceaux. 
Ce n'est pas tout : quand je suis vieille, et que je ne lui donne plus 
de lait, 1 'ingrat m'assomme sans pitie ; ma peau meme n'est pas a 
l'abri de son ingratitude ; il la tanne et en fait des bottes et des sou- 
liers. De la, je conclus que Fhomme est le vrai symbole de l'ingra- 
titude. Adieu ; j'ai dit ce que je pense. 

L'homme, tout etonne, dit au reptile : je ne crois pas ce que cette 
radoteuse a dit ; eile a perdu 1 'esprit : rapportons-nous en a la deci- 
sion de cet arbre. — De tout mon coeur. — L'arbre etant pris pour juge, 
ce fut bien pis encore. — Je mets l'homme a l'abri [L. 69. 1.] des 
orages, de la chaleur, et de la pluie. En ete, il trouve sous mes 
branches une ombre agreable; je produis des fleurs et du fruit; ce- 
pendant, apres mille services, un manant me fait tomber a coups de 
hache : il coupe toutes mes branches, en fait du feu, et reserve mon 
corps, pour etre scie en planches. L'homme se voyant ainsi con- 
vaincu : je suis bien sot, dit-il, d'ecouter [L. 21. 2.] une radoteuse efc 
un jaseur. Aussitot k iou.u m couleuvre aux pieds et l'ecrasa. 

Le plus fort a tmijotirs raison, it opprime le plus faible. La force 
et la passion sont sourdes a ia voix de la justice et de la verite. 

Perrin. 

6. LE SINGE. 

Un vieux singe malin etant mort, son ombre descendit dans la som 
ure demeure de Pluton, oq elle demanda a retourner parmi les vivants. 
Pluton voulait [§ 119.] la renvoyer dans le corps d'un ane pesant et 
stupide, pour lui 6ter sa [5 21, (2.)] souplesse, sa vivacite, et sa ma 
lice. Mais elle fit tant de tours plaisants et badins, que rinflexibie 
roi des enfers ne put [5 138, (2.)] s'empecher de rire, et lui laissa le 
choix d'une condition. Elle demanda a entrer dans le corps d'un 
perroquet. — Au moins, disait-elle, je conserverai par la quelque res- 
eemblance avec les hommes que j'ai longtemps imites. fitant singe 



READING LESSONS. 469 

je faisais des gestes tomme eux ; et, etant perroqiet, je parlerai avec 
eux dans les plus agreables conversations. 

A peine 1'ombre du singe fut introduite dans ce nouveau metier, 
qu'une vieille femrae causeuse l'acheta. II fit (faire, 4. ir.) ses de- 
uces; elle le mit dans une belle [L. 13. 6.] cage. II faisait bonne 
chere, et discourait toute la journee avec la vieille radoteuse, qui n6 
parlait pas plus sensement que lui. II joignit (joindre, 4. ir.) a son 
nouveau talent d'etourdir tout le monde je ne sais (savoir, 3. ir.) quoi 
de son ancienne profession. II remuait sa tete ridiculement, il fai- 
sait craquer son bee, il agitait ses ailes de cent facons, et faisait de 
ses pattes plusieurs tours qui sentaient encore les grimaces de Fago- 
tin. La vieille prenait a toute heure ses lunettes pour Fadmirer ; elle 
etait bien fachee d'etre un peu sourde, et de perdre quelquefois des 
paroles de son perroquet, auquel elle trouvait plus d'esprit qu'a per- 
sonne. Ce perroquet gate, devint bavard, importun, et fou. II se 
tourmenta si fort dans sa cage, et but (boire, 4. ir.) tant de vin avec 
la vieille, qu'il en mourut. 

Le voila revenu devant Pluton, qui voulut (vouloir, 3. ir.) cette 
fois le faire passer dans le corps d'un poisson. Mais il fit (faire, 4. 
ir.) encore une farce devant le roi des ombres; et les princes ne 
resistent guere [L. 17. 5.] aux demandes des mauvais plaisants qui les 
flattent. Pluton accorda done a celui-ci,qu'il irait (aller, 1. ir.) dans 
le corps d'un homme; mais comme le dieu eut honte [L. 21, (4.)] de 
Penvoyer dans le corps d'un homme sage et vertueux, il le destina 
au corps d'un harangueur ennuyeux et importun, qui mentait, qui se 
vantait sans cesse, qui faisait des gestes ridicules, qui se moquait de 
tout le monde, qui interrompait toutes les conversations les plus 
polies et les plus solides, pour dire rien, ou les sottises les plus gros- 
sieres. Mercure qui le reconnut [L. 51.] dans ce nouvel etat, lui dit 
en riant. — Ho ! ho ! je te reeonnais ; tu n'es qu'un compose du singe 
et du perroquet que j'ai vus [L. 42. 7.] autrefois. Qui [$ 39, (5.)] 
t6terait tes gestes et tes paroles apprises par coeur sans jugement, 
ne laisserait rien de toi. D'un joli singe et d'un bon perroquet o 
nVn fait qu'un sot homme. Fenelcn. 



4-fO READING LESSONS, 

H.— APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 

6. LE BERGER ET LE TROUPEAU. 

Q,uand \ous voyez quelquefois un nombreux troupeau qui, repandu 
ur une colline vers le declin d'un beau jour, pait (paitre, 4. ir.) 
ranquillement le thym et le serpolet, ou qui broute dans une prairie 
Une herbe menue et tendre qui a echappe a la faux du moissonneur, 
ie berger, soigneux et attentif, est debout aupres de ses brebis ; il ne 
les perd pas de vue, il les suit (suivre, 4. ir.) il les conduit, il les 
[L. 27. 7.] change de paturage ; si elles se dispersent, il les rassemble ; 
si un loup avide parait, il lache son chien qui le met en fuite ; il lea 
nourrit [L. 87.] il les defend ; Faurore le trouve deja en pleine cam- 
pagne, d'oii il ne se retire qu'avec le soleil. Quels [§ 30, (10.)] soins ! 
quelle vigilance ! quelle servitude ! Quelle condition vous parait la 
plus delicieuse et la plus libre, ou du berger, ou des brebis ? Le 
troupeau est-il fait pour le berger, ou le berger pour le troupeau ? 
Image naive [L. 13. 5.] des peuples, et du prince qui les gonw Tie, 
s'il est bon prince. La Bhuyere. 

2. LES PARVENUS. 

Ni les troubles, Zenobie, qui agitent votre empire, ni la guerre que 
vous soutenez virilement contre une nation puissante, depuis la mort 
du roi votre epoux, ne diminuent rien de votre magnificence : vous 
avez prefere [} 134, (5.)] a toute autre contree les rives de FEuphrate 
pour y elever un superbe edifice ; Fair y est sain et tempere, la situ- 
ation en [^ 39, (17.)] est riante, un bois sacre l'ombrage du cote du 
couchant ; les dieux de yrie qui habitent quelquefois la terre, n'y 
auraient pu choisir une p s belle demeure : la campagne autour, est 
couverte [J 134, (2.)] d'hormes qui tail lent et qui coupent, qui vont 
( alter, \. ir.) et qui viennent {venir, 2. ir.) qui roulent ou qui charrieni 
le bois du Liban, 1'airain et le porphyre ; les grues et les machines ge- 
raissent dans l'air, et font esperer a ceux qui voyagent vers l'Arabie, 
de revoir a leur ret our en ieurs foyers ce palais acheve, et dans cetto 
splendeur ou vous desirez le porter, avant de l'habiter, vous et les 
princes vos enfants. N'y [J 39, (18.)] epargnez rien, grande reine 
employ ez y Tor et tout l'art des plus excel lents ouvriers ; que les 
Phidias et les Zeuxis de votre siecle deploient [5 49, (2.)] toute leur 
science sur vos plafonds et sur vos lambris : tracez y de vastes et 
delicieux jardins, dont Fenchantement soit tel, qu'ils ne paraissent pas 
faits de la main des hommes. fipuisez vos tresors et votre industrie 



READING LESSONS. 47 1 

sur cct ouvrage incomparable; et, apres que vous y aurez [L. 61. 5.] 
mis, Zenobie, la derniere main, quelqu'un de ces patres qui habitent 
les sables voisins de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos ri- 
vieres, achetera [} 49, (5.)] un jour a deniers comptants cette royale 
maison, pour rembellir et la rendre plus digne de lui et de sa for- 
tune La Bruyere. 

3. LE PALAIS DE LA EENOMMEE, 

aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont [L. 31. 8.] Pintrepide 
v>ook mesura la circonference a travers les vents et les tempetes ; au 
milieu desterres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a la curio- 
site des hommes, s'eleve [$ 49, (6.)] une montagne qui surpasse en 
hauteur les sommets les plus eleves des Andes dans le Nouveau- 
Monde, ou du Thibet dans l'antique Asie. 

Sur cette montagne est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- 
fernales. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits 
viennent (yenir. 2. ir.) frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence 
n'a jamais franchi le seuil. 

Au centre du monument est une voute tournee en spirale comme 
une conque, et faite de sorte que tous les sons qui penetrent dans 
le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de Tarchitecte 
des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent [L. 36. 2.] fausse- 
ment reproduits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en 
entrant par la voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre, tandis que les 
roulements de la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses 
[L. 13. 5.] destinees aux faibles bruits. 

C'est la que, Foreille placee a l'ouverture de cet immense echo, 
est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette 
puissante fille de Satan et de l'orgueil, naquit (nailre y 4. ir.) autrefois 
pour annoncer le mal. Avant le jour oa Lucifer leva l'etendard 
contre le Tout-Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un mondo 
venait a s'animer ou a s'eteindre ; si l'fiternel avait tire un univera 
du neant, ou replonge un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait 
jete un soleil dans l'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de seraphins, essaye 
[5 49, 2.] la bonte d'une lumiere, toutes ces choses etaient aussitut 
connues [L. 42. 6.] dans le ciel par un sentiment intime d'admiration 
et d'amour, par le chant mysterieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, 
apres la rebellion des mauvais anges, la reriomm-'c usurpa la place 
de cette intention divine. Bientot, prccipitee [{ (16, (3.)] aux enfers, 
ce[L.81. 1.] fut elle qui publia dans l'abyme la naissance de notre 
globe, et qui porta Tenncmi de Dieu a tenter ra chute de l'homme. 



472 BEADING LESSONS. 

Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort, et des ce moment elle etablit m 
demoure sur la montagne, ou elle entend et repete confusement ce 
qui se passe sur la terre, aux enfers, et dans les cieux. 

GtfATEAUBRIAND. 

4.— L'ACADEMIE SILENCIEUSE OU LES EMBLEMES. 

II y avait [§ 61, 2. ] a Amadan une celebre academie, dont le premiei 
tatut etait concu (concevoir, 3.) en ces termes : Les academiciens 
penseront beaucoup, tcriront peu, et ne [L. 19. 2.] parleront que le moins 
possible. On [$ 41, (4.)] l'appelait V Academie silencieuse, et il n'etait 
point en Perse de vrai savant qui n'eut l'ambition d'y etre admis. 
Le docteur Zeb, auteur d'un petit livre excellent, intitule le Bdillon, 
apprit (apprendre, 4. ir.), au fond de sa province, qu'il (unip.) vaquait 
une place dans 1' Academie silencieuse. II part aussitot ; il arrive a 
Amadan, et, se presentant a la porte de la salle oii les academiciens 
sont assembles, il prie l'huissier de remettre au president ce billet . 
Le docteur Zeb demande humblement la place vacante. L'huissiei 
s'aequitta sur-le-champ de la commission ; mais le docteur et son bil- 
let arrivaient [§ 119.] trop tard, la place etait deja remplie. 

L'academie fut desolee de ce contre-temps ; elle avait recu un peu 
malgre elle un bel [L. 13. 6.] esprit, dont [L. 31. 8.] Feloquence vive 
et legere faisait l'admiration de la cour, et elle se voyait (voir, 3. ir.) 
reduite a refuser le docteur Zeb, le fleau des bavards, une tete si 
bien faite, si bien meublee ! Le president charge d'annoncer au doc- 
teur cette nouvelle desagreable [J 85.] ne pouvait presque s'y re- 
soudre, et ne savait comment s'y prendre. Apres avoir un peu reve, 
il fit [L. 32. 3, 4.) remplir d'eau une grande coupe, mais si bien rem- 
plir, qu'une goutte de plus eut fait deborder la liqueur ; puis il fit 
signe qu'on introduisit le candidat. II parut (paraitre, 4. ir.) avec 
cet air simple et modeste qui annonce presque toujours le vrai me- 
rite. Le president se leva, et, sans proferer une seule parole, il lui 
montra d'un air afflige la coupe emblematique, cette coupe si exacte- 
ment pleine. Le docteur comprit (comprendre, 4. ir.) de reste, qu'il 
n'y avait [§ 61, 2. ] plus de place a l'academie ; mais, sans perdre cou- 
rage, il songeait a faire comprendre qu'un academicien surnumeraire 
n'y derangerait rien. II voit a ses pieds une feuille de rose [5 76, (1 1.)] 
il la ramasse, il la pose delicatement sur la surface de I'eau, et fait si 
bien, qu'il n'en echappe pas une seule goutte. 

A cette reponse ingenieuse, tout le monde battit des mains, on 
iaissa dormir les regies pour ce jour-la, et le docteur Zeb fut rccu 
par acclamation. On lui presenta sur-le-champ, le registre ou lea 
recipiendaires devaient (devoir, 3.) s'inscrire eiix-m&mes. II s'y ins- 



READING LESSONS. 4*73 

crivit done, et il (wrap.) ne lui restait plus qu'a prononcer selon 
l'usage une phrase de remereiment. Mais, en academicien vraiment 
silencieux, le doeteur Zeb remercia sans dire mot. II ecrivit (e'erore, 
4. ir.) en marge le nombre cent, e'etait [$ 108, (1.)] celui de ses nou- 
veaux confreres ; puis, en mettant un zero devant le chiffre, il ecrivit 
au dessous : llsn'en xaudront (valoir, 3. ir.) ni moins ni plus (0100). 
Le president repondit au modeste doeteur avec autant de politessa 
que de presence d'esprit. II mit le chiffre un devant le nombre cent 
et i] ecrivit : lis en xaudront dix fois davantage (1100). 

L'abbe Blanche t. 



HI— ANECDOTES. 
1. LE BON MINISTRE. 



Le puissant Aaron-Rashid commencait a soupconner que son vi- 
sir Giafar, ne meritait pas la confiance qu'il lui avait donnee [§ 134, 
(4.) J les femmes d' Aaron, les habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, les 
derviches, censuraient le visir avec amertume. Le calife aimait Gia- 
far ; il ne voulut point le condamner sur les clameurs de la ville et 
de la cour [§ 141]. II visita son empire; il vit partout la terre bien 
eultivee, la campagne riante, les hameaux opulents, les arts utiles en 
honneur, et la jeunesse dans la joie. II visita ses places de guerre et 
ses ports de mer ; il vit de nombreux vaisseaux qui menacaient [§ 119.] 
les cotes de l'Afrique et de l'Asie ; il vit (voir, 3. ir.) des guerriers 
disciplines et contents. Ces guerriers, les matelots, et les peuples 
des campagnes s'ecriaient : O Dieu ! benissez les fideles en prolon- 
geant les jours d' Aaron-Rashid et de son visir Giafar; ils maintien- 
nent dans Fempire la paix, la justice, et Fabondance ; tu manifestes, 
grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fideles, en leur donnant un calife 
comme Aaron et un visir comme Giafar ! Le calife, touche de ces 
acclamations, entre dans une mosquee, s'y precipite a genoux, et 
s'ecrie : Grand Dieu ! je te rends graces : tu m'as donne un ministre 
dont mes courtisans me disent du mal, et dont mes peoples me disent 
du Uen. Saimt-JLambebt. 

2. BONAPARTE ET LA BENTINELLB.* 

Apres avoir gagne la bataille d'Arcole, qui avait durr [J 135, (6.)] 
trois jours, Bonaparte, toujours infatigeLle, pan-ourait son camp, soua 

* The word sentinelle is always feminine. 



474 READING LESSONS. 

tra vehement fort simple, qui ne decelait point en lui le genera, en chef, 
a Peffet d'examiner par lui-meme si les fatigues de trois journees aussi 
penibles que :ette bataille, n'avaient rien fait perdre a ses soldats de 
leur discipline et de leur surveillance habituelles [§ 18, (3.)]. Le ge- 
neral trouve [$ 118, (5.)] une sentinelle endormie, lui enleve douce- 
men t son fusil sans Feveiller, et fait faction a sa place. Quelques 
[L. 88.] moments apres, le soldat se reveille ; se voyant ainsi de- 
sarme et reconnaissant son general, il s'ecrie : Je suis perdu ! — Ras- 
sure toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, apres tant de fatigues, ij 
peut etre permis a un brave tel que toi de succomber au sommeil 
mais une autre fois choisis mieux ton temps. 

3. BIENFAISANCE. 

Le due de Montmorenci, qui fut decapite a Toulouse, aimait a re- 
pandre des bienfaits. Ce seigneur, voyageant [§ 49, (1.)] en Lan- 
guedoc, apercut dans un champ, quatre laboureurs qui dinaient a 
l'ombre d'un buisson. Approchons nous de ces bonnes gens, dit-il 
a ceux qui le suivaient, et demandons leur s'iis se croient heureux. 
Trois repondirent, que bornant leur felicite a certaines commodites 
de leur condition, que Dieu leur avait donnees, [L. 42. 7.] ils ne sou- 
haitaient rien dans le monde. Le quatrieme avoua franchement 
qu'une chose manquait a son bonheur : e'etait de pouvoir acquerir 
certain heritage que ses peres possedaient. — Et si tu Favais, [L. 62. 
6.] cet heritage, dit M. de Montmorenci, serais-tu content ? — Autant 
que je le [L. 46.4, 5.] puis etre, repondit le paysan. — Combien vaut- 
(valoir, 3. ir.) il ? demanda le due. — Deux mille francs, repondit le 
paysan. — Qu'on [L. 28.] les lui donne, reprit le due, et qu'il soit 
dit que j'ai rendu un homme heureux en ma vie. 

Le Vassob. 



IV.— MAXIMES ET REFLEXIONS. 

l.f La religion donne a la vertu les plus douces esperances, au vice 
impenitent de [§ 78, (3.)] justes alarmes, et au vrai repentir les plus 
puissantes consolations ; mais elle tache surtout d'inspirer aux 
hommes de Tamour (§ 78, (2).], de la douceur, et de la pitie pour lea 
hommes. Montesquieu. 

f This extract and several of the following, furnish excellent illustra- 
tions of the Rules on the use of the article. 



READING LESSOKS. 4^5 

2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste meurt, elle ne meurt ja- 
maie, Fenelon. 

3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme 

Lacretelle. 

4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a ceux qui commandent, 
qu'a ceux qui obeiesent. Bossuet. 

5. Prier ensembie, dans quelque langue, dans quelque rite que co 
scit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie 
que les homines puissent contracter sur cette terre. 

Mme. de Stael. 

6. La conscience est un juge place dans 1'interieur de notre etre. 

Segur. 

7. La conscience est la voix de l'ame, les passions sont la voix du 
corps. J. J. Rousseau. 

8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parceque rien ne la re- 
leve a nos yeux. Massillon. 

9. La vertu est un effort fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- 
trui, dans Pintention de plaire a. Dieu seul. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

10. II y a une amitie chretienne que la philosophic humaine ne 
comprend guere; c'est l'association de deux ames qui mettent en 
commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. 

Laurentie. 

11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un 
tableau ; elle lui donne de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 

12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de l'erreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent 
rien a la lumiere. Lamartine. 

13. On n'est pas digne d'aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer 
quelque chose plus qu'elle. Massillon. 

14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par 
notre vanite. La Rochefoucauld. 

15. On ne triomphe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. 

Mme. de Maintenon. 

16. Ce n'est que pour l'innocence, que la solitude peut avoir des 
charmes. Leczinska. 

17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiles 

Massillox. 

18. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- 
ples, ressemblent a ces noteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent le9 
ihemins sans les parcourir. Rivarol, 



476 READING LESSONS. 

V.— POESIE. 

HYMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON RfiVEH* 

O Pere qu'adore mon pere ! 
Toi qu'on ne nomme qu'a genoux, 
Toi dont le nom terrible et doux 
Fait courber le front de ma mere ; 

On dit que ce brillant soleil 
N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance, 
Que sous tes pieds il se balance 
Comme une lampe de vermeil. 

On dit que c'est toi qui fais naitre 
Les petits oiseaux dans les champs, 
Et qui donnes aux petits enfants 
Une ame aussi pour te connaitre. 

On dit que c'est toi qui produis 
Les fleurs dont le jardin se pare ; 
Et que sans toi, toujours avare, 
Le verger n'aurait point de fruits. 

Aux dons que ta bonte mesure, 
Tout l'univers est convie ; 
Nul insecte n'est oublie 
A ce festin de la nature. 

L'agneau broute le serpolet ; 
La chevre s'attache au cytise ; 
La mouche, au bord du vase, puiss 
Les blanches gouttes de mon lait 

L'alouette a la graine am ere 
Que laisse envoler le glaneur, 
Le passereau suit le vanneur, 
Et l'enfant s'attache a sa meio. 

Et, pour obtenir chaque don 
Que chaque jour tu fais ec.ore, 
A midi, le soir, a l'aurore, 
Que faut-il ? — prononcer ton nom. 



READING LES80KS. 

O Dien, ma bouche balbutie, 
Ce nom, des anges redoute, 
Un enfant merue est ecoute 
Dans ie choeur qui te glorifie ! 

Ah ! puisqu'il entend de si loin 
Les voeux que notre bouche adresse , 
Je veux lui demander sans cesse 
Ce dont les autres ont besoin. 

Mon Dieu ! donne Tonde aux fontamea 
Oonne la plume aux passereaux, 
Et la laine aux petits agneaux, 
St Tombre et la rosee aux plainea. 

Donne aux malades la sante 
Au mendiant le pain qu'il pleure, 
A l'orphelin une demeure, 
Au prisonnier la liberte. 

Donne une famille nombreuse 
Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, 
Donne a* moi sagesse et bonheur 
Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. 



m 



Lamartike. 



2. LA FEUILLE. 

De ta tige detachee 
Pauvre fruille dessechee, 
Ou vas lui — Je n'en sais rieu. 
L'orage a brise le chene 
Qui seul etait mon soutien. 
De son inconstante haleine 
Le zephyr on l'aquilon, 
Depuis ce jour me promene 
De la foret \i la plaine, 
De la montagne au vallon. 
Je vais ou le vent me mene, 
Sans me plaindre ou m'eifrayer , 
Je vais ou va toute chose, 
Ou va la feuille de rose 
Et la feuille de laurier. 

The a in this line is a poetical licenM. 



Arnault 



4-T8 BEADING LESSONS. 

3. LE MONTAGNARD EMIGR& 

Combien j'ai douce souvenance 

Du joli lieu de ma naissance ! 

Ma soeur, qu'ils etaient beaux ees jours 

De France ! 
O mon pays, sois mes amours ! 

Toujours. 

Te souvient-il que notre mere 
Au foyer de notre chaumiere 
Nous pressait sur son sein joyeux, 

Ma chere ! 
Et nous baisions ses blonds chevetts 

Tous deux. 

Ma sceur, te souvient-il encore 
Du chateau que baignait la Dore 
Et de cette tant vieille tour 

Du More, 
Oft l'airain sonnait le retour 

Du jour ? 

Te souvient-il du lac tranquille 
Qu'efiieurait Thirondelle agile, 
Du vent qui courbait le roseau 

Mobile, 
Et du soleil couchant, sur l'eau, 

Si beau? 

Te souvient-il de cette amie, 
Douce compagne de ma vie ? 
Dans les bois en cueillant la fleur 

Jolie, 
Helene appuyait sur mon coeur 

Son cceur. 

Oh ! qui me rendra mon Helene, 
Et la montagne et le grand chene ! 
Leur souvenir fait tous les jours 

Ma peine : 
Mon pays sera mes amours 

ToUJOUrs. ClZATEAUBXIAini 



READING LESSONS. 479 

4. STANCES. 

Et j'ai dit dans raon coeur ; que faire de la vie 1 
[rai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, 
Comme Fagneau qui passe oa sa mere a passe, 
Imiter des mortels, l'immortelle folie ? 

L un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon 
Et la vague engloutit ses vceux et son navire ; 
Dans le sein de la gloire oa son genie aspire, 
L'autre meurt, enivre par l'echo d'un vain nom. 

Avec nos passions, formant sa vaste trame, 
Celui-la fonde un trone, et monte pour tomber ; 
Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, 
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme 

Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim , 
Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; 
Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue ; 
Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du chemin. 

Oa vont-ils cependant? — lis vont ou va la feuille 
Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. 
Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers 
Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. 

lis luttaient contre lui, mais le temps a vaincu; 
Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives. 
Je l'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives. 
Us sont nes, ils sont morts : Seigneur, ont-ils vecu ? 

Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j'adore, 
Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts, 
Couche sur le rivage, ou flottant sur les mers, 
Au declin du soleil, au lever de Taurore. 

La terre ra'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? 
— Celui dont l'ame immense est partout repandue, 
Celui dont un seul pas mesure l'etendue, 
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur ; 

Celui qui du neant a tire la matiere, 
Celui qui sur le vide a fonde runivere, 



480 READING LESSONS. 

Celui qui sans rivage a renferme les mere, 
Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; 

Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lendemain, 
Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meme s'enfante, 
Qui vit dans l'avenir comme a l'heure presente, 
Et rappelle les temps echappes de sa main. 

C'est lui, c'est le Seigneur ! Que ma langue redwe 
Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des morals ! 
Comme la harpe d'or pendue a ses autels, 
Je chanterai pour lui, jusqu'a ce qu'il me brise ! . . . 

5. LAFAYETTE EN AMERIQUE 

Republicans, quel cortege s'avance ? 

— Un vieux guerrier debarque parmi nous. 

— Vient-il d'un roi vous jurer l'alliance? 

— II a des rois allume le courroux. 

— Est-il puissant ? — Seul il franchit les ondes. 

— Qu'a-t-il done fait ? — II a brise des fers. 

Gloire immortelle a l'homme des deux mondes ? 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Europeen, partout sur ce rivage 

Qui retentit de joyeuses clameurs, 

Tu vois regner, sans trouble et sans servage, 

La paix, les lois, le travail, et les mceurs. 

Des opprimes ces bords sont le refuge ; 

La tyrannie a peuple nos deserts, 

L'homme et ses droits ont ici Dieu pour juge. 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez Funivers ! 

Mais que de sang nous couta ce bien-etre ! 
Nous succombions ; Lafayette accourut, 
Montra la France, eut Washington pour mattre, 
Lutta, vainquit, et 1' Anglais disparut. 
Pour son pays, pour la liberte sainte, 
H a depuis grandi dans les revers. 
Des fers d'Olmutz, nous effacons Tempreinte. 
Tours de triomphe, Eclairez l'univers I 



READING LESSONS. 481 

Ce vieil am' que iant d'ivresse accueille 
Par un heros, ce heros adopte, 
Benit jadis, a sa premiere feuille, 
L'arbre naissant de notre liberte. 
Mais aujourd'hui, que l'arbre et son feuillage 
Bravent en paix la foudre et les hiveis, 
II vient s'asseoir sous son fertile ombrage. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Autour de lui, vois nos chefs, vois nos sages, 
Nos vieux soldats se rappelant ses traits ; 
Vois tout un peuple, et ces tribus sauvages 
A son seul nom sortant de leurs forets. 
L'arbre sacre, sur ce concours immense 
Forme un abri de rameaux toujours verts. 
Les vents au loin porteront sa semence, 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

L'Europeen que frappent ces paroles, 

Servit des rois, suivit des conquerants ; 

Un peuple esclave encensait ces idoles ; 

Un peuple libre a des honneurs plus grands. 

Helas, dit-il, et son ceil sur les ondes 

Semble chercher des bords lointains et chers. 

Que la vertu rapproche les deux mondes ! 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! Besangee* 

6. LA MARSEILLAISE. 






Allons, enfants de la patrie : 

Le jour de gloire est arrive : 

Contre nous de la tyrannie 

L'etendurd sanglant est leve. 

Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 

Mugir ces feroces soldats ? 

lis viennent jusque dans vos bras 

Egorger vos fils, vos compagnes- 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formez vos bataillons; 
Marchez, — qu'un sang impur abreuve vos sillons ! 

Chceur. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formons nos bataillons ; 
Marehons ;— qu'un sang impur abreuve nos Killons ! 

21 I 



482 BEADINa LESSONS. 

Que veut cette horde d'esclaves, 
De traitres, de rois conjures 1 
Pour qui ces ignobles entraves, 
Ces fers des longtemps prepares ? 
— Francais, pour nous, ah ! quel outrage 
Quels transports il doit exciter ! 
C'est nous qu on ose menacer 
De rendre a 1 antique esclavage ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Quoi ! des cohortes Strangeres 
Feraient la loi dans nos foyers ! 
Quoi ! ces phalanges mercenaires 
Terrasseraient nos fiers guerriers ! 
Grand Dieu ! par des mains enchained 
Nos fronts sous le joug se plieraient I 
De vils despotes deviendraient 
Les maitres de nos destinees ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Tremblez, tyrans ! et vous, perfides 
LTopprobre de tous les partis ; 
Tremblez ... vos projets parricides 
Vont enfin recevoir leur prix. 
Tout est soldat pour vous combattre 
S'ils tombent, nos jeunes heros, 
La France en produit de nouveaux, 
Contre vous tout prets a se battre. 
Aux armes, etc. 

Francais ; en guerriers magnanimttf* 
Portez ou retenez vos coups : 
Epargnez les tristes victimes, 
A regret s'armant contre vous ;— 
Mais ces despotes sanguinaires, 
Mais les complices de Bouille . . . 
Tous ces tigres qui, sans pitie, 
Dechirent le sein de leur mere . , 
Aux armes, etc. 

Amour sacre de la patrie, 

Conduis, soutiens nos bras vengeura 



READING LESSONS. 483 

Liberte, liberte cherie 
Combats avec tes defenseurs. 
Sous nos drapeaux, que la victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents ; 
Que nos ennemis expirants 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gioire J 

Aux armes, etc. Rouget be l'isle 



7. LE RETOUR DANS Li ^ATRIE. 

Qu'ii va lentement le navire 
A qui* j'ai confie mon sort! 
Au rivage oa mon coeur aspire, 
viu'il est lent a trouver un port ! 

France adoree ! 

Douce contree ! 
Mes yeux cent fois ont cru te iecoovm' 

Qu'un vent rapide 

Soudain nous guide 
Aux bords sacres oa je rewns B»o«ri?. 
Mais enfin le matelot crie : 
Terre, terre, la-bas, voyez ! 
Ah ! tous mes maux sont oublie& 

Salut a ma patrie ! 

Oui, voila les rives de France ; 
Oui, voila le port vaste et sftr* 
Voisin des champs od mon enfanee 
S'ecoula soils un chaume obscur f 

France adoree! 

Douce contree ! 
f pres vingt ans, enfin je te revois; 
De mon village 
Je vois la plage, 
Je vois fumer la cime de mes toits. 
Combien mon ame est attendrie ! 
La furent mes premieres amours ; 
da ma mere m'attend toujours, 

Salut a ma patne ! ! 

* A poetical license ; this should be auqael. $ 39 (2). 



484 READING LESSORS* 

Au bruit des transports (fallegresa*, 
Enfin le navire entre au port. 
Dans cette barque ou Ton se presse 
Hatons-nous d'atteindre le bord. 

France adoree ! 

Douce contree ! 
Puissent tes fils te revoir ainsi tous ! 

Enfin j'arrive 

Et sur la rive, 
Je rends au ciel, je rends grace a grecowx* 
Je t'embrasse, 6 terre cherie I 
Dieu ! qu'un exile doit souffrir ! 
Mci, desormais, je puis mourir. 

Salut a ma patrie ! Bekangsr 



VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. 





ABBREVIATIONS. 




adj. 


adjective. 


P- 


participle. 


adj. v. 


verbal adjective. 


pi. 


plural. 


adv. 


adverb. 


pre. 


preposition. 


art. 


article. 


prn. 


pronoun. 


conj. 


conjunction. 


v. a. 


active verb. 


f. 


feminine gender. 


v. a. & n. 


active and neuter verb. 


ind. p 


present of indicative. 


v. aux. 


auxiliary verb. 


int. 


interjection. 


v. unip. 


uniperaonal verb. 


m. 


masculine gender. 


v. ir. or ir. 


irregular verb. 


n. 


noun. 


v. n. 


neuter verb. 


p.d. 


past definite. 


v. r. 


reflective verb. 




The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. 




A-AD. 




AD-AM. 



A, a (with a grave accent), pre. at or 
to. 

Abondance, n. f. abundance, plenty. 

Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come 
to, 

Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to fill. 

Abyme, n. m. abyss, depth. 

Abri, n. m. shelter. 

Academicien, n. m. Academician. 

Academie, n. f. academy. 

Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. 

Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. 

Accompagner, v. a. 1. w accompany. 

Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant, (s') v. r. 
to agree. 

Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to lias- 
ten to. 

Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. 

Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. 

Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com- 
plete. 

Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. 

Acquitter (s'), v. r. to acquit one's 
self of , to discharge. 

Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, 
leave. 

Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. 

Admiration, n. f. admiration. 

Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. 

Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt.. 

Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore. 



Adresser, v. a. 1. to address , (sM 
ref. to apply. 

Affectation, n. f. affzztaiion. 

Afllige, p. & adj. v. grieved, af- 
flicted. 

Agacer, v. a. to entice, to tease. 

Agile, adj. nimble, light. 

Agiter, v. a. to agitate. 

Agneau, n. m. lamb. 

Ah ! int. Ah. 

Aigle, n. m. eagle. 

Aile, n. f. wing. 

Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to like. 

Ainsi, adv. thus, so. 

Air, n. m. air. 

Airain, n. m. brass. 

Aisement, adv. easily. 

Aj outer, v. a. 1. to add. 

Alarm, n. f. alarm. 

Allegorie, n. f. allegory. 

Aller, v. n. ir. 1. (ind. p. je vaia,] 
to go. 

Alliance, n. f. alliance. 

Allumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. 

Alouette, n. f. lark. 

Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. 

Ambition, n. f. ambition. 

Ame, n. f. soul. 

Amer, a, adj. bitter. 

Amertume, n. f. bitterness, sorrow. 

Ami, e, n. m. &. f. friend. 



486 



AM-AU, 



AU-BLo 



Amour, n. m. love. 
An, n. m. annee, f. year. 
Ancien, m. adj. ancient, old. 
Ange, n. m. angel. 
Animal, (pi. aux,) n. m. animal. 
Animer, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. 
Annoncer, v. a. 1. to announce. 
Antique, adj. ancient, antique. 
A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. 
Apercevoir, v. a. 3. to perceive. 
Apologue, n. m. apologue. 
Apparence, n. f. appearance. 
Appartenir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- 

partiens), to belong. 
Appeler, v. a. 1. to call. 
Apprendre, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to 

learn. 
Approcher, v. a. 1. to bring near, (s') 

v. r. to approach. 
Appuyer, v. a. 1. to lean. 
Apres, pre. after. 
Aquilon, n. m. north wind. 
Arbre, n. m. tree. 
Architecte, n. m. architect. 
Armer, v. a. 1. to arm, (s') v. r. to arm 

one's self. 
Arracher, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Arriver, v. n. 1. to arrive. 
Art, n. m. art. 
Article, n. m. article. 
Artifice, n. m. artifice, cunning, 

trick. 
Aspirer, v. n. 1. to aspire. 
Assembler, v. a. 1. to assemble. 
Asseoir, (s') v. r. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

m'assieds, p. assis), to sit down. 
Association, n. f. association, com- 
pany. 
Assommer, v. a. 1. to strike down, to 

kill. 
Atteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'at- 

teignis), to reach, to hit. 
Attendre, 4. to await, to expect. 
Attendri, e, a. v. p. moved, grieved. 
Attentif, ve, adj. attentive. 
Attraper, v. a. 1. to catch. 
Au, art. at, or to the. 
Aujourd'hui, adv. to-day. 
Auparavant, adv. before. 
Aupres, pre. & adv. near. 
Aurore, n. f. dawn, aurora. 
Aussi, conj. & adv. as, so, also, 
Aussitot, adv. immediately. 
Austral, e, adj, austral. 
Autant, adv. as much, as many 
Autel, n. m. altar. 



Auteur, n. m. author. 

Autour, pre. & adv. round, arouna\ 

Autre, adj. other. 

Autrefois, adv. formerly. 

Autrui, prn. ot/ier, others. 

Avancer (s'), v. r. 1. to advance^ 

approach. 
Avant, pre. before. 
Avare, n. & adj. miser, ava?-icious. 
Avec, pre. with. 
Avenir, n. m.. future. 
Aveugle, adj. blind. 
Avide, adj. anxious, eager. 
Aviser (s') v. r. 1. to think, to takt 

into one's head. 
Avoir, v. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'eus), 

to have. 
Avouer, v. a. 1. to confess. 



B. 



Badin, e, adj. playful. 

Baigner, v. a. 1. to bathe. 

Baillon, s. m. gag. 

Baiser, v. a. 1. to kiss. 

Balancer, v. n. 1. to balance, hesi- 
tate. 

Balbutier, v. a. & n. 1. to stammer. 

Barque, n. f. bark, boat. 

Barriere, n. f. gate. 

Bataille, n. f. battle. 

Bataillon, n. m. battalion. 

Batir, v. a. 2. to build. 

Battre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. battu,) to beat 

Baudet, n. m. donkey. 

Bavard, e, n. & adj. talkative, prat* 
tier. 

Beau, bel, f. belle, adj. fine, handr 
some. 

Beaucoup, adv. much, many. 

Beaute, n. f. beauty. 

Bee, n. m. beak. 

Bel esprit, n. m. wit. 

Benir, v. a. 2. to bless. 

Berger, n. m. shepherd. 

Besoin, n. m. need, want. 

Beurre, n. m. butter. 

Bien, n. m. property, adv. well. 

Bien-etre, n. m. welfare, comfort. 

Bienfaisance, n. f. beneficence, be- 
nevolence. 

Bienfait, n. m. benefit. 

Bientot, adv. soon. 

Billet, n. m. note. 

Blanc, blanche, adj. white. 



BO-CH. 



CH-CO. 



481 



Boire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je bus, p. 

bu) 5 to drink. 
Bois. n. m. vsood, forest. 
Bon, ne, adj. good, kind, simple. 
Bonkeur, n. m. happiness. 
Bonne-chere, n. f. good living. 
Bonte, n. f. goodness, kindness. 
Bord, n. in. border, shore. 
Borner, v. a. 1. to confine, to bound. 
Botte. n. f. boot, bundle. 
Bouche, n. f. month. 
Brancke, n. f, branch. 
Bras, n. m. arm. 
Brave, adj. brave, worthy. 
Braver, v. a. 1. to brave, affront. 
Brebis, n. f. sheep. 
Brillant, e, adj. shining, brilliant. 
Briser, v. a. 1. to break. 
Brouter, v. a. & n. 1. to browse, to 

graze. 
Bruit, n. m. noise. 
Buisson, n. m. bush. 



C, prn. it. 

Cacher, v. a. 1. ft? hide, conceal, (se) 

v. r. to hide one's self. 
Cage, n. f. cage. 
Calife, n. m. calif. 
Camp. n. m. camp. 
Carnpagne. n. f. country, campaign. 
Candidat, n. m. candidate. 
Caresse, n. f. caress. 
Causeur, se, adj. talker. 
Ce, prn. & adj. this, that. 
Celebre, adj. celebrated. 
Celeste, adj. celestial. 
Celui, prn. this, that. 
Censurer, v. a. 1. to censure. 
Cent, adj. num. hundred. 
Centre, n. m. centre. 
Cependant, conj. however. 
Certain, adj. certain. 
Cesse (sans) without ceasing. 
Chaleur, n. f. heat. 
Champ, n. m. field. 
Changer, v. a. & n. 1. to change. 
Chant, n. m. song, singing. 
Chanter, v. a. & n. 1. to sing. 
Chaos, n. m. chaos. 
Chaque, adj. each. 
Charger, v. a. 1. to charge, load. 
Charme, n. m. charm. 
Charrier, v. a. 1. to transport, carry. 



Chasser, v. a. & n. 1. to hunt, to chase, 
to drive away. 

Chateau, n. m. castle, villa. 

Chaunie, n. m. thatch. 

Chaumiere, n. f. cottage. 

Chef, n. m. chief. 

Chemin, n. m. way, road. 

Chene, n. m. oak. 

Cher, e, adj. dear. 

Chercher, v. a. to seek. 

CheveuXj n. m. pi. hair. 

Chevre, n. f. goat. 

Chien, n. m. dog. 

Chiffre. n. m. figure. 

Chceur, n. m. choir, chorus. 

Choisir, v. a. 2. to choose. 

Chose, n. f. thing. 

Chute, n. I fall. 

Ciel, n. m. (pi. cieux,) heaven. 

Cime, n. f. peak, top. 

Circonference, n. f. circumference. 

Cite, n. f. city. 

Citoyen, n. m. citizen. 

Clair, e, adj. clear, n. m. light. 

Clameur, n. f. cry, clamor. 

Coeur, n. m. heart. 

Cohorte, n. f. cohort. 

Coin, n. m. corner. 

Colline, n. f. hill. 

Commander, v. sl. 1. to command, U 
order. 

Combattre, v. a. & n. 4. to combat, 
to fight. 

Combien, adv. Iww much, how many. 

Comme, adv. & conj. as, tike, when. 

Commencement, n. m. beginning. 

Commencer, v. sl. 1. to begin. 

Comment, adv. how. 

Commission, n. f. commission. 

Commodite, n. f. convenience. 

Commun. e, adj. common, usual. 

Compagne, n. f. companion. 

Complice, n. m. accomplice. 

Composer, v. sl. 1. to compose. 

Comprendre, v. a. ir. 4. tn under- 
derstand, to compnse. 

Comptant, adj. &adv. ready, for cash. 

Compter, v. a. 1. to count, to intend. 

Concevoir, v. a. 3. to conceive. 

Conclure, v. a. ir. 1. to conclude. 

Concours, n. m. concourse, assembly. 

Condamncr, v. sl. 1. to condemn. 

Condition, n. f. condition. 

Conduire, v. a. ir. 4. to conduct. 

Confiance, n. f. confidence, depen- 
dence. 



488 



co-cu. 



CTT-OE. 



Conner, v. a. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Confrere, n. m. brother, fellow. 

Confusement, adv. confusedly. 

Conjure, a. v. sworn together. 

Connaitre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je con- 
nus, p. connu), to know, to be ac- 
quainted with. 

Conque, n. f. shell. 

Conquerant, n. m. conqueror. 

Conscience, n. f. conscience. 

Conseil, n. m. advice, counsel. 

Consentir, v. n. 2. to consent, agree. 

Conserver, v. a. 1. to preserve. 

Consolation, n. f. consolation. 

Constant, e, adj. constant. 

Consternation, n. f. consternation. 

Content, e, adj. pleased,, content. 

Continuellement, adv. continually. 

Contracter, v. a. 1. to contract. 

Contre, pre. against. 

Contree, n. f. country, district. 

Contre-temps, n. m. disappointment. 

Convaincre, v. a. ir. 4. to convince. 

Convenir, v. n. 2. to agree, to suit, 
to confess. 

Conversation, n. f. conversation. 

Convier, v. a. 1. to invite. 

Corps, n. m. body, corps. 

Cortege, n. m. retinue. 

Cote, n. f. coast. 

Cote, n. m. side. 

Couehant, n. m. West. 

Coucher (se), v. ref. 1. to lie down. 

Couleuvre, n. f. snake, adder. 

Coup, n. m. blow. 

Coupe, n. f. cup, vessel. 

Couper, v. a. 1. to cut. 

Cour, n. f. court. 

Courage, n. m. courage. 

Courber, v. a. 1. to bend, to bow. 

Courroux, n. m. anger. 

Court, e, adj. short. 

Cours, n. m. course. 

Courtisan, n. m. courtier. 

C outer, v. n. 1. to cost. 

Couvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to cover. 

Craindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je craignis, 
p. craint), to fear. 

Creer, v. a. 1. to create. 

Crier, v. n. 1. to cry. 

Croire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je crus, p. 
cru), to believe. 

Croquer, v. a. 1 . to eat greedily. 

Cueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to gather, to 
pick. 

Cultiver, v. a. 1 to cultivate. 



Curiosite, n. f. curiosity 
Cytise, n. m. cytisus. 



D. 

Dans, pre. in, into. 
Davantage, adv. more. 
De, pre. of or from. 
Debarquer, v. a. & n. 1. to land. 
Deborder, v. n. 1. to run over. 
Debout, adv. standing. 
Decapiter, v. a. 1. to behead. 
Deceler, v. a. 1. to discover. 
Dechirer, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Decision, n. f. decision. 
Declin, n. m. decline, fall. 
Decouvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to discover, un* 

cover. 
Dedaigner, v. a. 1. to disdain. 
Defaut, n. m. defect. 
Defendre, v. a. 1. to defend, to forbid, 
Defenseur, n. m. defender, protector. 
Deguiser, v. a. 1. to disguise. 
Deja, adv. already. 
Delicat, e, adj. delicate. 
Delicaternent, adv. delicately. 
Delice, n. m. delight. 
Delices, n. f. pi. delights. 
Delicieux, se, adj. delightful, deh* 

cious. 
Demande, n. f. request, question. 
Demander, v. a. 1. to ask, to request 
Demeure, n. f. abode, dwelling. 
Demon, n. m. demon. 
Deniers, n. m. p. money, means. 
Deploy er, v. a. 1 . to display. 
Depuis, pre. since. 
Deranger, v. a. 1. to disturb, to put 

out of order. 
Dernier, e, adj. last, latter. 
Derober, v. a. 1. to steal, to conceal, 
Derviclie, n. m. dervise. 
Des, pre. from. 

Desagreable, adj. disagreeable. 
Desarme, adj. v. disarmed. 
Descendre, v. n. 4. to descend, U> 

come down. 
Desert, n. m. desert. 
Desirer, v. a. 1. to wish,, desire. 
Desormais, adv. henceforth. 
Dessecher, v. a. 1. t diy up, to 

drain. 
Dessous, adv. under. 
Dessus, adv. above. 
Destinee, n. f. fate. 



DE-EF. 



EF-EP. 



489 



fJcstiner, v. a. 1. to destine. 

Detacher, V. a. 1. to detach, to sepa- 
rate. 

Detruire, t. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je de- 
truisis), to destroy. 

Devancer. v. a. 1. to outstrip, to come 
before. 

Devant, pre. before, opposite. 

Devenir, v. n. 2. to become. 

Devoir, v. a. ir. 3. to owe. 

Devorer, v. a. 1. to devour. 

Dieu, n. m. God. 

Digne, adj. worthy. 

Diminuer, v. a. 1. to diminish. 

Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit.). to say, tell. 

Discourir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse. 

Discipline, n. f. discipline. 

Disparaitre, v. n. ir. 4. to disappear. 

Disperser. v. a. 1. to disperse. 

Distance, n. f. distance. 

Divers, adj. diverse, different. 

Divin, e, adj. divine. 

Docteur, n. m. doctor. 

Dome, n. m. dome. 

Don. n. m. gift. 

Done, conj. tlierefore, tlien. 

Donner, v. a. 1. to give. 

Dont. prn. of which, of whom. 

Dormir, v. n. ir. 2. to sleep. 

Doucement, adv. softly, sweetly. 

Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness. 

Doux. ce, adj. soft, sweet. 

Drapeaux, m. p. colors, standards. 

Droit, n. m. right. 

Droit, adj. straight. 

Due, n. m. duke. 

Duree, n. f. duration. 

Durer, v. n. 1. to last, to endure. 



E. 

Eau, n. f. vjater. 
Kchapper, v. n. 1. to escape. 
Echo, n. m. echo. 
Eclairer, v. a. 1, to light. 
Eclat, n. m. brightness, splendor, 
Eclore, v. n. ir. 4. to hatch. 
Ecouler (s') 3 v. r. 1. to elapse, to 

pass. 
ficouter, v. a. 1. to listen, to hear. 
Ecraser, v. a. 1. to crush. 
fierier (s'X v. r. 1. fe exclaim. 
Ecrire, v. a. ir. 4. to viriU. 
Edifice, n m. edifice, 
Effacer, v. a. to efface. 



Effet, n. m. effect. 

Effleurer, v. a. 1. to g'.'aze. to touch 
slightly. 

Effort, n. m. effort, endeavor. 

Effrayer, v. a. 1. to frighten, (s') ref. 

^ to be frightened. 

Egorger, v. a. 1. to slaughter, to mwr-> 
der, to cut the ttirooi. 

Eh bien ! int. well I 

Elever, v. a. 1. to raise. 

Embrasser. v. a. 1. to embrace, it* 
hiss. 

Elle, prn. she, it. 

Eloquence, n. f. eloquence. 

Embellir, v. a. 2. to embellish. 

Emblematique, adj. emblematical. 

Emigre, n. & adj. emigrant. 

Empecher, v. a. 1. to prevent. 

Empive, n. m. empire. 

Employer, v. a. 1. to employ, to use 

Empreinte, n. f. mark, print. 

Emprunter, v. a. 1. to borrow. 

En, pre. in, into, at, to. 

En, rel. prn. of it, of them, &c. 

Encenser, v. a. 1. to flatter, to adore, 

Enchainer, v. a. 1. to chain. 

Enchantement, n. m. enchantment, 
charm. 

Encore, adv. yet, still, again. 

Endormir, v. a. ir. 2. to put or lull 
to sleep, (s') ref, to go to sleep 

Endroit, n. m. spot, place 

Enfant, n. m. child. 

Enfanter, v. a. to produce. 

Enfer, n. m. hell. 

Enfin, adv. at last, finally. 

Enfler, (s') v. r. 1. to swell, to increase. 

Engloutir, v. a. 2. to swallow up. 

Enivrer, v. a. 1. to intoxicate. 

Enlever, v. a. 1. to take or carry 
away. 

Ennemi, n. m. & adj. enemy, in- 
imical. 

Ennuyeux, se, adj. tiresome, weari- 
some. 

Ensemble, adv. together. 

Entraves, n. f. pi. bands, obstacles, 
stocks. 

Entrer, v. n. 1. to enter, to go in. 

Envers, pre. towards, to. 

Envoler (s'j. v. r. 1. to fly away. 

Envoyer, v. a. 1. to send. 

fipargner, v. a. 1. to spare. 

E panic, n. f. shoulder. 
Epouvanter, v. a. 1. to figh'en. 
fipoux, se, n. in. & f. husband, wife. 



2V 



490 



EP-FA. 



FA-GA. 



Spuisei, v a. 1. to exhaust. 

Erreur, n. f. error. 

Esclave, n. m. slave. 

Espace. n. m. space. 

Esperance, n. f. hope. 

Esperer, v. a. 1. to hope. 

Esprit, n. m. wit, mind. 

Essay er, v. a. 1. to try, attempt. 

Et, conj. and. 

Etablir, v. a. 2. to establish. 
-Etat, n. m. stole, condition, trade. 

Etc, n. m. summer. 

Eteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'eteignis), 
to extinguish, put out. 

Etendard, n. m. standard. 

Etendue, n. f. extent. 

Eternel, le, adj. & n. eternal. 
Etonner, v. a. 1. to astonish. 

Etourdir, v. a. 2. to stun, to disturb. 
"Eire, v. aux. & n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je 

A suis, p. d. je fus), to be. 
Etre, n. m. being. 
Europeen, ne, n. & adj. European. 
Eux, prn. m. pi. them. 
Eveiller, v. a. 1. to awake. 
Eviter, v. a. 1. to avoid. 
Exactement, adv. exactly. 
Examiner, v. a. 1. to examine. 
Excellent, e. adj. excellent. 
Excessif, ve, adj. excessive. 
Exciter, v. a. 1. to excite. 
Exemple, n. m. example. 
Exile, n. m. & adj. exile, exiled. 
Expirant, adj. v. expiring, dying. 
Expirer, v. n. 1. to expire. 
Exterieur, n. m. outside, exterior. 
Exterieur, e, adj. exterior. 
Extremite, n. f. extremity. 



Fache, e, adj. v. angry, sorry. 

Facon, n. f. fashion, way. 

Faction, n. {.faction, vjatch. 

Faible, adj. weak, feeble. 

Faim, n. f. hunger. 

Faire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je fis), to 

make, to do, to cause. 
Falloir, v. unip. ir. 3. (ind. p. il 

faut), to be necessary. 
Famille, n. f. family. 
Farce, n. f. farce, trick. 
Farouche, adj. wild, stem. 
Fatigue, n. f. fatigue, weariness. 
Faussement, adv. falsely. 



Faux, se, adj. false. 

Felicitc. n. f. happiness, felicity* 

Femme, n. f. woman, wife. 

Fers. n. m. pi. chains, irons. 

Fertile, adj. fruitful, fertile. 

Feu, n. in. fire. 

Feuillage, n. m. foliage. 

Feuille, n. f. leaf. 

Festin, n. m. sumptuous meal, repa.ii 

Fidele, n. m. & adj. faithful. 

Fier, e. adj. uroud, formidable. 

Fier (se), v. r. 1. to trust, to confide 

Fille, n. f. daughter, girl. 

Fils, n. m. son. 

Flatterie, n. {.flattery. 

Fleau, n. m. scourge. 

Fletrir, v. a. & n. 2. to fade, withe*, 

Fleur, n. f. flower. 

Fleuve, n. m. river, stream. 

Flotter, v. n. 1. to float, to wave, 

Foi, n. f. faith. 

Fois, n. f. lime. 

Folie ; n. f. folly. 

Fond, n. in. bottom. 

Fonder, v. a. 1. to found. 

Fontaine, n. f. fountain, spring. 

Force, n. f. strength, force. 

Foret, n. f. forest, wood. 

Former, v. a. 1. to form. 

Fort, e, adj. strong. 

Fortune, n. f. fortune. 

Foudre, n. f. thunderbolt. 

Fou, folle, adj. & n. m. & f. foo\ 

foolish. 
Fouler, v. a. 1. to tread under foot. 
Foyer, u. m. hearth. 
Foyers, n. m. pi. hearth, home, na- 
tive country. 
Franchement, adv. frankly. 
Franchir, v. a. 2. to step over, to pas. 

over. 
Frapper. v. a. 1. to strike. 
Frateraite, n. f. brotherhood. 
Froid, n. m. cold. 
Fromage. n. m. cheese. 
Front, n. m. forehead, brow. 
Fruit, n. m. fruit. 
Fugitif, ve, '^.fugitive. 
Fuite, n. f. flight. 
Fumer, v. n. & a. 1. to smote. 
Fusil, n. m. sun. 



er, v. a. 1. to win, gain. 



OA-HO, 



HO-XV. 



491 



Garde, n. f. guard, watch, care. 

Gate, adj. v. spoiled. 

Geiee, n. i. frost. 

Gernir, v. n. 2. to moan, groan. 

General, n. m. & adj. general. 

Generation, n. f. generation. 

Genie, n. m. genius. 

Genou, n. m. knee. 

Gens, n. pi. people. 

Gestes, n. in. pi. gestures. 

Glace, n. f. ice. looking-glass. 

Glaneur, n. m. gleaner. 

Globe, n. m. globe. 

Gloire, n. f. glory. 

Glorifier, v. a. 1. to glorify, praise. 

Goutte, n. f. drop. 

Gonverner, v. a. 1. to govern. 

Graces, n. f. pi. graces, t/ianks. 

Graine, n. f. grain. 

Grand, e. adj. great, large. 

Grandir, v. n. 2. to grow. 

Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces. 

Gronder, v. a. & n. 1. to scold, to 

roar. 
Gros, se. adj. large. 
Grossier, e, adj. coarse. 
Grue, n. f. crane. 
Guere, adv. but little, butfevj. 
Guerre, n. f. war. 
Guerrier, n. m. warrior. 
Guide, n. m. guide. 



H. 

Habitant, n. m. inhabitant. 

Habiter, v. a. 1. to inhabit. 

Habituel, le. adj. usual, habitual. 

Hache, n. f. axe. 

Hameau, n. m. hamlet. 

Harangueur. n. m. orator. 

Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. 

Hardiment, adv. boldly. 

Harpe, n. f. harp. 

Hasard, n. m. chance. 

Ilauteur, n. f. Jieight, haughtiness. 

Herbe, n. f. herb^grass. 

Heros, n. m. hero. 

Heure, n. f. hour. 

Heritage, n. m. inheritance, property. 

Heureux, se, adj. happy, fortunate. 

Hibou, n. m. owl. 

Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. 

Hiver, n. m. winter. 

Homme, n. m. man. 

Honnete, adj. honest, polite. 



Honneur, n. m. honor. 

Honte, n. f. shame. 

Horde, n. f. horde, troop. 

Huissier, n. m. doorkeeper , attendant* 

Humain, e, adj. human, humane. 

Humblement, adv. humbly. 



Idole, n. f. idol. 

Ignoble, adj. mean, low, debasing. 

II, ils, prn. he, it, they. 

Image, n. f. image, resemblance. 

Imiter, v. a. 1. to imitate. 

Immense, adj. immense, vast. 

Immortel, le, adj. immortal. 

Impenitent, adj. impenitent, unre- 
penting. 

Importun, e, adj. importunate, trou- 
blesome. 

Impur, e, adj. impure. 

Incomparable, adj. incomparable, 
matchless. 

Inconnu, e, adj. unknown. 

Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant 
changeable. 

Indiquer, v. a. 1. to indicate, tc 
point out. 

Industrie, n. f. industry. 

Infatigable, adj. indefatigable, un- 
tiring. 

Infernal, e, adj. infernal. 

Inflexible, adj. inflexible, unbend- 

™g- „. . 

Ingenieux, se ; adj. ingenious. 

Ingrat, e, adj. & n. ungrateful. 

Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude. 

Innocence, n. f. innocence. 

Inscrire, v. a. ir. 4. to inscribe. 

Insecte, n. m. insect. 

Insensibilite, n. f. insensibility. 

Inspirer, v. a. 1. to inspire. 

Instant, n. m. instant, moment. _ 

Intention, n. f. intention, meaning. 

Interieur, e, adj. & n. interior, in- 
side. 

Interrompre, v. a. ir. 4. to inter- 
rupt. 

Intime, adj. intimate, close. 

Intitule, adj. v. entitled, called. 

Intrepide, adj. intrepid. 

Introduce, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j rotro- 
duisis), 1 1 introduce. 

Ivresse, n. f. intoxication, excessive 
joy. 



492 



JA-LE. 



LE-ME. 



Jadis, adv. formerly. 

Jamais, adv. never. 

Jardin, n. m. garden. 

Jaseur, se, n. m. & f. talker, prat- 
tler. 

Je,j' 3 prn. I. 

Jeter, v. a. 1. to throw, cad. 

Jeunesse, n. f. youth. 

Joie, n. f. joy. 

Joindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je joigris, 
p. joint), to join, to connect, to add. 

Joli, e, adj. pretty. 

Jouet, n. m. plaything, sport. 

Joug, n. m. yoke, subjection. 

Jour, n. m. day, light. 

Journee, n. f. day, day's work. 

Joyeux, se, adj. joy fid, glad. 

Juge, n. m. judge. 

Jugenient, n. m. judgment, decision. 

Juger, v. a. 1. to judge, to decide. 

Jurer, v. a. & n. 1. to swear, to promise. 

Jusque, pre. as far, as far as. 

Juste, adj. & n." just. 

Justice, n. f. justice. 



La. r, art. the. 

La, 1', prn. her, it. 

La, adv. there ; la-bas, yonder. 

Laboureur, n. m. husbandman. 

Lac, n. m. lake. 

Lacher, v. a. 1. to loose hold of, to 

let go. 
Laid, e, adj. ugly. 
Laine. n. f. v:ool. 
Laisser, v. a. 1. to leave, to let. 
Lait, n. m. milk. 
Lambris, n. m. wainscot. 
Lampe, n. f. lamp. 
Lancer, v. a. 1. to dart, to send forth 

with violence, to launch. 
Langue, n. f. tongue, language. 
Laurier, n. m. laurel. 
Le, 1', les, art. the. 
Le, \\ les, prn. it, them. 
Leger, e, adj. light. 
Lenclemain, n. m. next day, morrow. 
Les, art. pi. the, les, prn. them. 
Leur, adj. pi. their. 
Leur, prn. to them. 
Lever, v. a. 1. to raise, (se) v. r. to 

rise, to arise. 



Lever, n. m. rising. 
Liberte, n. f. liberty, freedom. 
Libre, adj. free. 
Lieu. n. in. place, spot. 
Lion, n. ni. lion. 
Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. 
Livre, n. m. book. 
Loi, n. f. law. 
Loin, adv. far. 

Loin tain, e, adj. remote, distant. 
Long, ue, adj. long. 
Long-temps, adv. long, long time. 
Loup, n. m. wolf. 
Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. 
Lui, prn. to him, to her. 
Lumiere, n. f. light. 
Lunettes, n. f. pi. spectacles. 
Lutter, v. n. 1. to contend with, U 
wrestle, 



M. 

Ma, sdj. po\ £ my. 

Machine, n. f. machine. 

Magnamme, adj. magnanimous. 

Magnificence, a. f. magnificence. 

Main, n. f. hand. 

Maintenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. ja 

inanitions, p. d. je maintins), U 

maintain. 
Mais, conj. but. 
Maison, n. f. house. 
Maitre, n. m. master. 
Mai, n. m. evil, adv. badly. 
Malacte, n. & adj. patient, sick. 
Male, adj. manly, dignified. 
Malgre, pre. in spite of. 
Malice, n. f. cunning, malice. 
Malin, gne, adj. sarcastic, sly. 
Manant, n. m. peasant, clown. 
Manger, v. a. 1. to eat. 
Manifester, v. a. 1. to manifest, to tes* 

tify, to show. 
Manquer v. a. & n. 1. to miss, to fail 
Marge, n. f. margin. 
Marque, n. f. mark. 
Marseillaise, n. f. Marseillaise hy°owv 
Matelot, n. m. sailor. 
Matiere, n. f. matter. 
Mauvais, e, adj. bad. 
Me, prn. me, to me. 
Melodieux, se, adj. melodious. 
Meme, adj. & adv. same, self, e»er± 
Menacer, v. a. 1. to threaten. 
Mendiant, n. m. beggar. 



ME-MY. 



KA-OT. 



493 



Mener, v. a. to lead, to take. 
Mensonge, n. m. falsehood. 
Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, to tell a 

falsehood. 
Menu, e, adj. small, short. 
Mepris, n. m. contempt. 
Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise. 
Mer. n. f. sea. 

Mercenaire, adj. mercenary. 
Mere, n. f. mother. 
Merite, n. in. merit. 
Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to deserve. 
Mes. adj. pos. pi. my. 
Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. 
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. 
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets, 

p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to 

set. 
Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. 
Midi. n. m, south, noon. 
Mignon, ne, adj. delicate, pretty. 
Milieu, n. m. middle. 
Mille, adj. num. thousand. 
Ministre, n. m. minister. 
Mobile, adj. movable, light. 
Modeste, adj. modest. 
Moeurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. 
Moi, prn. me. 
Moindre, adj. lesser, less. 
Moins, adv. less, (au) at least. 
Mois, n. m. month. 
Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, 

reaper. 
Moment, n. m. moment. 
Monde, n. m. world, people, (toutle) 

every body. 
Monnaie, n. f. money, change. 
Monstre, n. m. monster. 
Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. 
Montagne, n. f. mountain. 
Monter, v.. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to 

mount. 
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point 

out. 
Monument, n. m. monument. 
Moquer (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to 

mock. 
Morceau. n. m. piece, morsel. 
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. 
Mosquee, n. f. mosque. 
Mot, n. m. word. 
Mouche, n. f.fly. 
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. 
Mou ton, n. m. sliecp. 
Mugir, v. n. 2. to roar. 
Mvsterieux, adj. mysterious. 



N. 

Naif, ve, adj. arilesi unaffected^ 

simple, innocent. 
Naissance, n. f. birth. 
Naissant, e, adj. v. rising, growing. 
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, 

p. d. je naquis, p, ne), to be born 
Nation, n. f. nation. 
Nay ire, n. m. ship, vessel. 
Ne, adv. not. 
Ne, p. born. 
Ne — pas, adv. not. 
Ne — que, adv. only, but. 
Neant, n. m. nothingness. 
Ni, conj. nor, neither. 
Nocturne, adj. nocturnal, nightly. 
Noisette, n. f. hazel-nut. 
Nombre, n. m. number. 
Nommer, v. a. 1. to name, to call. 
Non, adv. no. 

Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish. 
Nouveau, nouvel, ntMivelle, adj. 

new. 
Nouvelle, n. f. news. 



O. 

Obeir, v. n. 2. to obey. 
Obscur, e, adj. dark, obscure. 
Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to tdkt 

notice of. 
Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ob- 

tiens, p. d. j'obtins), to obtain. 
Odieux, se, adj. odious, hateful. 
Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes. 
Oiseau. n. m. bird. 
Ombrage, n. m. shade. 
Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shadz, to shelter. 
Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow. 
On, prn. indefinite, one, they, we, 

people ; on dit, it is said {one says). 
Onde, n. f. wave, water. 
Opprime, adj. v. oppressed. 
Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame 
Opulent, e, adj. rich, wealthy. 
Or, n. m. gold. 
Orage, n. m. storm. 
Ordinairement, adv. commonly. 
Ordre, n. m. order. 
Oreille, n. f. car. 
Orgueil. n. m. pride. 
Orphelin, e, n. m. & f. orphan. 
Oter, v. a. 1. to take away, t*) <&» 

prive of. 



494 



OTJ-PE. 



PE-PO. 



On, ecnj. or. 

Ou. adv. where, in which, wherein 

Oublier, v. a. 1. to forget, to neglect. 

Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. 

Ouverture. n. f. opening. 

Ouvrage, n. m, work. 

Ouvrier, n. in. workman. 



Paitre, v. a. & n. 4. to graze. 

Paix, n. f. -peace. 

Palais, n. m. palace. 

Par, pre. by. 

Paraitre, v. n. ir. 4. (p. paru), to ap- 
pear. 

Parcourir, v. a. ir. 2. to travel over, 
to cross, to look over. 

Pareil, le, adj. equal, similar. 

Parer (se), v. r. 1. to adorn one's 
self. 

Paresseux. se, adj. idle, lazy, indo- 
lent. 

Parler, v. n. 1. to speak. 

Parmi, pre. among, amongst. 

Parole, n. f. word. 

Parricide, adj. parricidal. 

Parti, n. m. part, party, resolution. 

Partir, v. n. ir. 2. to set out, to leave, 
to depart. 

Partont, adv. everywhere. 

Parvenu, adj. v. (used as a noun), 
upstart. 

Pas, adv. not, n. m. step, pace. 

Passer, v. n. 1. to pass. 

Passereau, n. m. sparrow. 

Passion, n. f. passion. 

Patre, n. m. herdsman, shepherd. 

Patrie, n. f. country, native country. 

Patte, n. f. paw. 

Paturage, n. m. pasture, pasturage. 

Pays, n. m. country. 

Paysan, n. m. peasant, countryman. 

Peage, n, m. toll. 

Peau, n. f. skin. 

Pcindre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je peins, 
p. d. je peignis), to paint, describe. 

Peine, n. f. trouble, pain. 

Peine (a), adv. hardly, scarcely. 

Penible, adj. laborious, painful. 

Pendant, pre. during. 

Pendre, v. a. 4. to hang. 

Penetration, n. f. penetration. 

Penetrer, v. a. 1. to penetrate. 

Penser, v. n. 1. to think. 



Pere, n. m. father. 

Perfide, adj. perfidious, treacherous. 

Perdre, v. a. 4. to lose. 

Perniettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, ah 
low. 

Perroquet, n. m. parrot. 

Personne, prn. ind. nobody. 

Pervers, adj. perverse. 

Petit, e, adj. small, little. 

Pesant, adj. v. heavy. 

Peu, adv. little. 

Peuple, n. m. people. 

Peupler, v. a. 1. to people. 

Phalange, n. m. phalanx. 

Philosophic, n. f. philosophy. 

Phrase, n. f. phro.se, sentence. 

Piece, n. f. piece. 

Pied, n. m. foot. 

Piege. n. m. irap, snare. 

Pis, adv. worse, tant pis, so much ti* 
worse. 

Pitie, n. f. pity. 

Place, n. f. place, spot. 

Placer, v. a. 1. to place. 

Plafond, n. m. ceiling. 

Plage, n. f. shore, beach. 

Plaindre (se), v. r. ir. (ind. p. je ma 
plains, p. d. je me plaignis), to 
complain. 

Piaine, n. f. plain. 

Plaire, v. n. ir. 4. (p. d. je plus, p. 
plu), to please. 

Plaisant, n. m. wag, joker. 

Plein, e, adj. full, open. 

Pleurer, v. a. & n. 1. to weep, U 

mourn. 
Plier, v. a. 1. to bow, to bend. 
Pluie, n. f. rain. 
Plume, n. f. feather, pen. 
Plupart (la), n. col. the most, most. 
Plus, adv. more. 
Plusieurs, adj. several. 
Point, n. m. point, adv. not. 
Poisson, n. m. fish. 
Pole, n. m. pole. 
Poli, e, adj. polite, polished* 
Politesse, n. f. politeness. 
Porphyre, n. m. porphyry. 
Port, n. m. port. 
Porter, v. a. 1. to carry, to bear. 
Portique, n. m. portico. 
Poser, v. a. 1. to lay, to set, to place 
Posseder, v. a. 1. to possess. 
Possible, adj. possible. 
Poteau, n. m. stake, post. 
Pour, pre. for. 



PO-QU. 



QC-RE. 



495 



Poussei, v. a, 1. to push, to hapten. 

Pouvoir, v. n ir. (ind. p. je puis, p. 
d. je pus. p, pu), to be able. 

Prairie, n. f. meadov). 

Prealablement, adv. previously. 

Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- 
tate. 

Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. 

Preliminaire, n. & adj. preliminary. 

Premier, e, adj. first. 

Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris, p. 
priS), to take, (s'y) ref. to go about 
it, to open the matter. 

Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. 

Pres de, pre. near, nearly. 

President, n. m. president. 

Presence, n. f. presence: 

Present, n. m. present. 

Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to present 
one's self. 

Presque, adv. almost. 

Presser, v. a. & r. (se) to hasten, to 
press. 

Pret, e, adj. ready, prepared. 

Prier, v. a. & n. 1. to pray, to entreat. 

Priere, n. f. prayer. 

Prince, n. m. pri.ice. 

Printemps, n. m. spring. 

Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. 

Prix. n. m. price, prize. 

Produire, v. a. ir. 4. to produce, 

Proferer, v. a. 1. to utter, to 

Profession, n. f. profession. 

Projet, n. m. project. 

Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. 

Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. 

Protestation, n. f. protest, protesta- 
tion. 

Province, n. f. province, district. 

Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. 

Puis. adv. then. 

Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. 

Puisque, conj. since. 

Puissance, D. f. power. 

Puissant, e, adj. powerful. 



q. 

Quand, adv. when. 

Quatre, adj. num. four. 

Qu', que, conj. 'that, prn. which, 

whom. 
Quel. adj. what, which. 
Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. 
Quelque chose, n. m. something. 



Quelquefols, adv. sometimes. 

Qui. prn. yjho, which. 

Quoi, prn. which, what. 

Quoi ! int. what ! 

Quoique, conj. although, though. 



R. 

Radoteur, se, n. m. & f. dotard. 

Raison, n. f. reason, right. 

Ramasser, v. a. 1. to pick up, to coU 
lect. 

Rameau, n. m. branch. 

Rappeler, v. a. 1. to recall, to re- 
mind, (se) v. r. to remember, to 
recollect. 

Rapporter, v. a. 1. to bring backj to 
relate. 

Rapprocher, v. a. 1. to b?ing near 
or together. 

Rarement, adv. rarely, seldom. 

Rassembler, v. a. 1. to collect, to 
bring together. 

Rassurer (se), v. r. 1. to take cour- 
age, to cheer up, to settle. 

Re ce voir, v. a. 3. to receive. 

Rechigne, adj. gruff, awkward, re- 
pulsive. 

Recipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one 
chosen to a post. 

Reconnaitre, v. a. ir. 4. to recognize^ 
know again. 

Redire, v. a. ir. to say again, re- 
peat. 

Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. 

Reduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je redui- 
sis), to reduce, to compel. 

Reellement, adv. really. 

Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. 

Refuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. 

Regard, n. m. look. 

Registre, n. m. register, book. 

Regner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. 

Regret, n. m. regret. 

Reine. n. f. q 

Religion, n. f. reli£ 

Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. 

Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em* 
bos 

Remerdment, n. m. thank. 

Bemettre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je re- 
niis. ]>. remis), to /-'place, to give, 
to ha, /id, to di liver. 

Remplir, v. a. 2. to fill, to fulfil. 
Remuer, V. a. 1. U more, to stir. 



496 



RE-RI. 



RI-SE. 



Renccntrer, v. a. 1. to meet. 

Rendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, 
to give back. 

Renfermer, v. a. to inclose, to con- 
tain. 

Renommee, n. f. fame, report. 
•Renvoyer, v. a. ir. 1. to send back, 
to send again. 

Repandre, v. a. 4. to spread, spill, 

f shed. 

Repas, n. m. repast, meal. 

Repentir (se), v. r. to repent. 

Repeter, v. a. 1. to repeat. 

Repliquer, v. a. 1. to reply. 

Replonger, v. a. 1. plunge, or cast 
again. 

Repondre, v. a. 4. to answer, reply. 

Reponse, n. f. reply. 

Reproduire, v. a. ir. 4. to reproduce. 

Reptile, n. m. reptile. 

Republicain, n. & adj. republican. 

Reserver, v. a. 1. to reserve, to keep. 

Resister, v. n. 1. to resist. 

Resoudre, v. a. & n. ir. 4. (p. d. je 
resolus, p. resolu), to resolve, to 
decide. 

Ressemblance, n. f. resemblance, 
likeness. 

Reste, n. m. rest, remainder, remnant. 

Reste (de), adv. sufficiently, fully, 
besides. 

Rester, v. n. 1. to remain, to dwell. 

Retentir, v. n. 2. to resound. 

Retentissant, a<y. v. resounding. 

Retirer (se), v. r. 1. to retire, with- 
dravj. 

Retour, n. m. return. 

Retourner, v. n. 1. to return, to go 
back. 

Reussir, v. n. 1. to succeed. 

Reveil, n. m. act of awaking. 

Reveiller (se), v. r. 1. to awake. 

Revenir, v. n. ir. 2. to return, come 
back. 

Rever, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 

Revers, n. m. reverse, wrong side. 

Revetir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je re- 
vets), to clothe, invest. 

Revoir, v. a. ir. (p. revu), to see 
again. 

Riant, adj. v. laughing, smiling, 
pleasant, cheerful. 

Riche, adj. rich, wealthy. 

Ridicule, n. m. ridicule, adj. ridicu- 
lous. 

Ridiculement, adv. ridiculously. 



Rien, adv. nothing. 

Rite, n. m. rite. 

Rivage, n. m. bank, shore, 

Rive, n. f. bank, shore. 

Rire, v. n. ir. 4. (ind, p. je ria, f 

ri), to laugh. 
Rocher, n. m. rock. 
Roi, n. m. king. 
Rose, n. f. rose. 
Roseau, n. m. reed. 
Rosee, n. f. dew. 
Route, n. f. road, way, path. * 
Roulement, n. m. rolling. 
Rouler, v. a. 1. to roll. 
Royal, e, adj. royal, kingly. 
Rumeur, n. f. rumor, report, not** 



Sa, adj. poss. f. his, her, its. 

Sable, n. m. sand. 

Sac, n. m. sack, bag. 

Sacre, e, adj. sacred, holy. 

Sage, adj. wise, good. 

Sagesse, n. f. wisdom. 

Sain, e, adj. healthy, wholesome. 

Saint, e, adj. holy. 

Saison, n. f. season. 

Salle, n. f. hall, parlor, room. 

Salut ! int. Hail I good luck ! 

Sang, n. m. blood. 

Sanguinaire, adj. bloodthirsty, san 

guinary. 
Sanglant, e, adj. bleeding, bloody. 
Sans, pre. without. 
Sante, n. f. health. 
Sauvage, adj. wild, savage. 
Savant, adj. & n. m. learned, learnei 

man. 
Savoir, v a. ir. 3. (ind. p. je sais, p 

d. je sus, p. su), to know. 
Science, n. f. knoioledge, science^ 
Scier, v. a. 1. to saw. 
Se, prn. him, her, himself, hetself. 
Seigneur, n. m. Lord. 
Sein, n. m. bosom. 
Selon, pre. according to. 
Sembler, v. n. & unip. 1. to swm, U 

appear. 
Semence, n. f. \eed. 
Semer, v. a. 1 . to sow, to scatter. 
Sentiment, n. m. sentiment, thought 
Sentinelle, n. f. sentinel. 
Sentir, v. a. ir. 2 (ind. p. je seng), 

to feel, smell. 



fiE-SO. 



SO-TE. 



497 



Beraphin, n. m. seraphim. 
Serpolet, n. ra. wild tkyme. 
Servage, n. m. bondage. 
Servir, v. a. & a (ind. p. je sers), to 

serve , to be used. 
Servitude, n. f. servitude, slavery. 
Ses. adj. pos. pi. his, her, its. 
Seuil, n. m. threshold, door-step, sill. 
Si. conj. if, adv. so. 
Siecle, n. m. age, time, century. 
Signe, n. m. sign. 
Signer, v. a. 1. to sign. 
Silence, n. m. silence. 
Silencieux. se, adj. silent, not loqua- 
cious. 
Sillon. n. m. furrow. 
Simple, adj. simple. 
Singe, n. m. ape, monkey. 
Sinueux, se, adj. sinuous, winding. 
Situation, n. f. situation. 
Soigneux, se, adj. careful. 
Soi-meme, prn. himself, one's self. 
Soin, n. m. care. 
Soir, n. m. evening. 
Soldat, n. m. soldier. 
Soleil. n. m. sun. 
Solide. adj. strong, solid. 
Solitude, n. f. solitude. 
Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad. 
Sommeil, n. m. sleep. 
Sommet. n. m. summit, top, pinnacle. 
Son, n. m. sound. 
Son, adj. pos. m. s. his, her, its. 
Songer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 
Sonner, v. n. 1. to ring. 
Sort, n. m. lot, fate. 
Sorte, n. f. kind, de sorte, adv. so 

that. 
Sortir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sors), 

to go out. 
Sot. sotte, n. & &dj. fool, foolish. 
Sottise. n. f. nonsense. 
Soudain, e. adj. sudden, unexpected, 

adv. sud''' 
Souffle, n. m. breath, wind. 
Souffrir, v. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear. 
Souhaiter, v. a. 1. to vnsh, to desire. 
Soulier, n. m. shoe. 
Soup9ormer, v. a. 1. to suspect. 
Souplesse. n. f. swppleness t docility. 
Sourd, e, adj. deaf. 
Sous, pre. under. 
Boutenir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. je sou- 

tiens), to sustain, to support, to 

bear, to maintain. 
Bontien, n. m. support. 



Souvenance, n. f. remembrance, re 
collection. 

Souvenir, n. m. remembrance, recol- 
lection. 

Souvenir (se), v. r, ir. 2. (ind. p. je me 
souviens), to remember, recollect. 

Souvent, adv. often. 

Spirale (en), winding. 

Splendeur, n. f. brilliancy, splendor. 

Statut. n. m. statute. 

Stratageme, n. m. stratagem, trick. 

Stupide, adj. stupid,, silly. 

Succomber, v. n. 1. to fall. 

Suivre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je suis), 
to follow. 

Sujet, adj. & n. subject. 

Superbe, adj. proud, superb, mag- 
nificent. 

Sur, e, adj. sure, certain, safe. 

Sur, pre. on, upon. 

Sur-le-champ, adv. immediately. 

Surface, n. f. surface. 

Surnumeraire, adj. supernumerary. 

Surpasser, v. a. 1. to surpass. 

Surprendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je sur- 
pris. p. surpris), to surprise, 

Surpris, e, adj. v. surprised. 

Surtout, adv. above all. 

Surveillance, n. f. watch, care. 

Symbol, n. m. symbol. 

Sycomore, n. m. sycamore. 

Sympathie, n. f. sympathy. 



Tableau, n. m. wjoU, picture. 

Tacher, v. n. 1. to endeavor, to try. 

Tailler, v. a. 1. to cut, to shape. 

Talent, n. m. talent. 

Tandis, adv. while. 

Tanner, v. a. 1. to tan. 

Tant. adv. so much. 

Tant mieux, adv. so much the better 

Tant pis, adv. so much the worse. 

Tard, adv. late. 

Te, prn. thee. 

Tel, telle, adj. such. 

Temper^, e, adj. temperaie. 

Tempete. n. f. tempest. 

n. ni. time, weather. 
Tendre, adj. U nder, kind. 
Teiiir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je tiens, p. 

d. j« i tins. )). tenu), to Soli. 
Tenter, v. a. 1. to tempt, U) attempt 

to try. 



498 



TE-TY. 



UN-VI. 



Terme, n. m. term, end, expression. 

Terrasser, v. a. 1. to throio dawn. 

Terre, n. f. land, earth. 

Terieur, n. f.fear, terror. 

Terrible, adj. terrible. 

Tete, n. f. head. 

Thym, n. m. thyme. 

Tige, n. f. stalk, stem. 

Tigre. n. m. tiger. 

Tirer, v. a. 1. to draw, to extract, to 
fire, to shoot. 

Toison, n. f. fleece. 

Toit, n. m. roof. 

Tomber, v. n. 1, to fall. 

Toimerre, n. m. thunder. 

Tort, n. m. w\'ong. 

Toucher, v. a. 1. to touch. 

Toujours, adv. always. 

Tour, n. f. tower. 

Tour, n. m. trick, turn. 

Tournienter, v. a. 1. to torment, to 
tease. 

Tourner, v. a. 1. to turn. 

Tout, e, adj. all. every. 

Tout, adv. entirely, quite. 

Tracer, v. a. 1. to trace, to mark. 

Traliir, v. a. 2. to betray. 

Trait, n. m. feature, trait, arrow. 

Trait^ment, n. m. treatment. 

Traitre, n. m. & adj. traitor, treacher- 
ous. 

Trame, n. f. woof plot. 

Tranquille, adj. quiet, tranquil. 

Tranquillen>3nt, adv. quietly, tran- 
quilly. 

Transport, n. m. transport, carriage. 

Travail, n. m. work, labor. 

Travers (a), pre. through, across. 

Trembler, v. u. 1. to tremble, shud- 
der. 

Tres, adv. very. 

Tresor, n, m. treasure. 

Tribu, n. f. tribe. 

Triomphe, n. m. triumph. 

Triste, adj. sad, sorrowful. 

Trois, adj. num. three. 

Trone, n. m. throne. 

Trop, adv. too much, too many. 

Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, dis- 
turbance. 

Troupeau, n. m. flock, herd. 

Trouver, v. a. 1. to find, (se) v. r. 
to happen to be, to be present, to 
appear. 

Tuer, v. a. 1. to kill, slay 

Tyrannie, n. f. tyranny'. 



U. 

Un, une, adj. num. one, a, an. 
Univers, n. m. universe. 
Usage, n. m. custom, use. 
Usurper, v. a. 1. to usurp. 
Utile, adj. useful. 



Vacant, e, adj. vacant, unoccupied. 

Vache, n. f. cow. 

Vague, n. f. wave, billow. 

Vain, e, adj. vain. 

Vaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vaincs, 

p. d. je vainquis, p, vaincu), t% 

vanquish, to conquer, to overcome, 
Vaisseau, n. m. vessel, ship. 
Vailon, n. m. valley, vale. 
Valoir, v. n. ir. 3. (ind. je vaux, p, 

d. je valus), to be worth. 
Vanite, n. f. vanity. 
Vanneur, n. m. winnower. 
Vanter (se), v. r. to boast. 
Vaquer, v. unip. & n. to be vacant 
Vase, n. m. vase, vessel. 
Vaste, adj. vast. 
Vengeur, n. m. avenger. 
Venir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je vieng, p 

d. je vins), to com.e. 
Vent, n. m. wind. 
Verger, n. m. orchard. 
Verite, n. f. truth. 
Vermeil, n. m. silver gilded. 
Vers, pre. towards. 
Vert, adj. green. 
Vertueux, se, adj. virtuous. 
Vetement, n. m. garment. 
Vetir, v. a. ir. 2. to cUtlie* 
Vice, n. m. vice. 
Victime, n. f. victim,. 
Vide, adj. empty, n. m. empty space. 
Vie, n. f. life. 
Vieux. vieil, vieille, acy. old, anii* 

quated. 
Vif, ve, adj. lively, quick. 
Vigilance, n. f. vigilance. 
Vil, e, adj. vile, mean, low. 
Village, n. m. village. 
Ville, n. f. town, city. 
Virilement. adv. manfully, ccur& 

geously. 
Visir, n. m. vizic>\ 
Visiter, v. a. 1. to visit. 
Vivacite, n f. vivacUy, 



VI-TO. 



VKr-EB. 



499 



Vivant, e, adj. v. livinj. 

Vivre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p. 

d. je vecus, p. vecu), to live. 
Yceu. n. m. voiv, wish. 
Voici, pre. here is, this is. 
Voila, pre. there is, that is. 
Voler, v. n. 1. to fly, v. a. 1. to steal. 
Voir, v. a. ir. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), to 

see, to perceive. 
Voisin, s. m. neighbor. 
Voix, n. f. voice. 
Vorace, adj. greedy, voracious. 
Vos, adj. pos. pi. your. 
Votre, adj. p. your. 
Vouloir, y. a. & n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

veux, p. d. je voulus, p. voulu), 

to wish, to be willing. 
Vous, prn. you. 
Voute, n. f. vault, arch. 
7oyager, v. n. 1. to travel. 



Vrai, e, adj. true. 
Vraiment, adv. truly. 
Vue, n. f. view, sight. 



Y, adv. there. 

Y, prn. to it, to them, at it, at tken^ 

in it, in them. 
Y avoir, v. unip. il y a, there is, 

there are; il y a un an, a year 

ago. 
Feux, n. m. p. (pluraJ of ceil), eyss. 



Z. 

Zephyr, n. m. light wind, zepnyr 
Z6ro, n. m. zero, naught. 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNET, NEW YORK. j 

GERMAN. 



i 
> 

L WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD WITH | 

German, $1 50. 

II. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH 

German. 15 cents- 

HI. KEY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE, i 

50 cents. 

IV. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Reader. *75 cents. 

Y.WOODBURY'S ECLECTIC GERMAN 

Reader. $1. 

VI. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND 

English-German Reader. 25 cents. 

VH, WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER- 

mans to Learn English ; or, Neue Methode zur Erlernnng der 
Englischen Sprache. $1. 

Vm. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A 

New and Complete American Dictionary of the English and 
German Languages, with the Pronunciation and Accentuation 
according to the method of "Webster and Heinsius. By Wm, 
Odell Elwell. New Stereo. Edition. $1 50. 

The attention of those interested in the study of German is specially invited to the ; 
; several works composing this series. 

; They have been subjected to a rigid examination on the part of the most com- \ 

< ; petent judges, and fully tested in the class-room by the most able teachers. Such, in- \ 
' deed, is the favor everywhere accorded to them by those fully conversant with the J 
! German tongue, and such uniformly their efficiency in the hand of the student, as to i 
justify the utmost confidence in commending them as forming decidedly the best I 
German Course ever yet offered to the public. I 

4 
61 

35+77-7 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 1 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEAopd im bah.-„ ~ a 



